Mm 
 

 
 ' % 
 
 <p <o 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 ^ * 
 
 
 
 ,#v°* c 
 
 v." 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 sV 
 
 *s 
 
y 8 1 A 
 
k 
 
 \^ 
 
 .1 » 
 
 
 
 v^ s l - 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ <&§ 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 ^ r 
 
 v' •< 
 
 
 >i 
 
 ^X 
 
 N 
 
 . V 
 
 *s 
 
 
 
 V* 
 
 
 No* 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 &S 
 
 Y* 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 : 
 
 
 XI 
 
 ft *1 
 
 
 • I' 
 
 . ^ s ^ x ft 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 K 
 
 ^i 11' 
 
 \? 
 
 
 V 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 ^3 X** 
 
 r 
 
 ■t 
 
OLLENDORPFS 
 
 NEW METHOD 
 
 OF LEARNING TO 
 
 READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 
 
 THE 
 
 GERMAN LANGUAGE 
 
 |^ TO WHICH IS ADDED 
 
 A SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 
 
 OF 
 
 GERMAN GRAMMAR, 
 
 BY 
 
 G. J. ABLER, A.M., 
 
 PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSITf 
 OF THE CITY OF NEVf-YORK. 
 
 NEW-YOEK: 
 
 D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 
 
 846 & S48 BBOADWAY. 
 M.DOCC.LVI. 
 

 
 &OTKSSX according k> Act- of Congress, in the year 1845, «| 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO., 
 
 A Hs» Clerk's Office of the D ; 3fcrfet Court for the Southern District oi New-V^tA 
 
 NOTICE 
 & Key to the exercises of this Grammar is published ia ft serrate vo*«m« 
 
PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION. 
 
 In presenting to the American Public a new and improved edi- 
 tion of Ollendorff's New Method, it would seem to be only 
 necessary to state what alterations or additions have been 
 made. To say anything in commendation of the book itself 
 appears almost gratuitous ; for the extensive circulation which 
 it now enjoys in England, and the increasing demand for it in 
 this country, its costliness notwithstanding, constitute the strong 
 est evidence in its favour. The fact that Ollendorff has been 
 sought after with avidity, whilst many other Grammars of high 
 merit have met with but a slow and cold reception, justifies the 
 inference that, as a book of instruction, it presents facilities 
 which in similar works were either entirely wanting or but 
 imperfectly afforded. 
 
 Even the excellent and highly scientific Grammar, written 
 for the use of Englishmen by the genial Becker himself, who 
 by his Organism, his Deutfcfye SBortbttbung, and subsequently 
 by his ©eutfcfye (Srammattf, has made such valuable contribu- 
 tions to the Philosophy of Language, and has almost revolu- 
 tionized the terminology of Grammar in his own country, has, 
 in the space of fifteen years, not even undergone a second edi- 
 tion, and is now entirely out of print. Surely, Becker has de- 
 served a better fate among scholars at least ! 
 
IV 
 
 The success of Ollendorff is unquestionably due to hia 
 method, by which he has made the German, heretofore noto- 
 riously difficult to foreigners, accessible to the capacity of all, 
 young or old, learned or unlearned. Instead of pre-supposing 
 a familiarity with English Grammar in the pupil, and then 
 presenting a synthetic view of the principles of the language, 
 as is commonly done, he begins apparently without any system, 
 with the simplest phrases, from which he deduces the rules, 
 until gradually and almost imperceptibly he makes the pupil 
 master of the etymology and syntax of every part of speech. 
 The rules are, as it were, concealed amid the multitude of 
 exercises which are added to each lesson, and which serve to 
 fortify the learner in the princip es he has already acquired. 
 Another characteristic feature of the book, and one in which 
 its practical merit chiefly consists is, that the examples on 
 which the rules are based, and those which are intended to 
 illustrate the rules, are not derived from the German Classics ; 
 they are neither the ideal language of Poetry, nor the rigorous 
 language of Science, but of life, — short sentences, such as one 
 would be most likely to use in conversing in a circle of friends, 
 or in writing a letter. 
 
 Special prominence is given from the beginning to the end 
 of the book to the idioms of the language, as it were the Ger- 
 man side of the German — a most important element in the 
 acquisition of any language. In the beginning of the book 
 the exercises are of necessity very brief and simple, and the 
 Author, according to his own confession (page 351), has of- 
 ten sacrificed logical accuracy to his eagerness for thoroughly 
 grounding the pupil in the principles of inflection and construc- 
 tion previously laid down. As the pupil advances the exer- 
 
cises become longer and more complicated. The same phrases 
 are often repeated and thrown into new combinations, and 
 constant reference is made to previous parts of the work. It 
 is thus that Ollendorff gradually introduces at once the ety- 
 mology and syntax of German Grammar. His method is so 
 lucid, that no one can go through with the exercises — provided 
 he be guided by a competent master — without acquiring such 
 a familiarity with the principles of the language, and such a 
 stock of words and idioms as will enable him to speak and to 
 write it with considerable facility. 
 
 The book, as it is now presented to the public, is from the 
 Frankfort edition, which, in accuracy of expression, as far as 
 the English is concerned, in the wording of the rules as well 
 as in typographical arrangement, is so far superior to the Lon- 
 don edition, that it seems to be the work of a different author. 
 So striking was found to be the difference between the two edi- 
 tions that the Editor, who at first was not in possession of a 
 German copy, and had already put into the hands of the printer 
 a considerable portion of the London copy revised, deemed it 
 afterwards his duty to recommence the stereotyping of the book 
 on the basis of the German. 
 
 The Editor has ventured to make such alterations as he 
 thought would give additional value to the book. Instead of 
 devoting two lessons to a mere mechanical explanation of Ger- 
 man writing, as was done in the other editions, he simply pre* 
 fixed to the book, on one page, an improved form of the 
 alphabet, and a specimen of German current hand, from which 
 the learner can at once perceive how the different letters are 
 made and united into words. The orthography of the German, 
 which in some cases was antiquated, has been conformed to 
 
the most recent and best authorities, chiefly to Heyse, whose 
 grammars are at present, perhaps, more extensively used in 
 Germany than any others. In some instances, where perspi- 
 cuity would otherwise have suffered, the phraseology of rules 
 has been amended. Wherever the English was crabbed or in- 
 correct in the exercises it has been revised and altered. Great 
 care has been taken to present an edition free from typographi- 
 cal errors, which often, in works of this kind, are the cause of 
 needless and most discouraging perplexity to beginners. In 
 this connection the Editor would make special mention oi 
 Mr. Edw. Stohlmann, corrector of the press, whose fidelity is 
 worthy of all confidence and commendation. 
 
 By the addition of the Systematic Outline, the Editoi 
 has had a twofold object in view. In a work like Ollendorff's, 
 in which each lesson contains a variety of exercises, which 
 have no necessary connection with each other, and in which 
 the different parts of speech are not systematically classified, 
 but scattered in every part of the book, a comprehensive index 
 would have been indispensable. Without it, the book would 
 have been useless for the purposes of reference, and a complete 
 and connected view of the laws which govern the inflection 
 of any one part of speech would have been equally impossible. 
 It seemed to him, that an attempt at a complete index to the mat- 
 ter contained in the book would be a difficult task, and unsatis- 
 factory in the end. He has therefore subjoined, as a substitute, 
 an outline of Grammar, in which the inflection of words is 
 treated briefly, but yet with completeness, and where the learnei 
 may find in different language perhaps, and in rigorously sys. 
 oematic connection, the principles which he met with in the 
 
vii 
 
 previous part of the work, besides much that will be new t« 
 him. 
 
 The second and principal object of making such large addic 
 tions to the book was to adapt it to the use of those who aim, 
 not at a practical knowledge of the language, but desire it for 
 scientific or literary purposes only. As persons of this descrip- 
 tion are commonly men of liberal culture, habituated to the 
 terminology of Grammar, and the study of language, they are 
 generally impatient of beginning at once the reading cf some 
 favourite author, and they are aware too, that for them the 
 shortest road to reach the goal is to master at once the elements 
 of Grammar. As the Author himself has had considerable 
 experience in guiding such to a knowledge of the German, he 
 has endeavoured to meet their wants by bringing within the 
 compass of about one hundred and thirty pages a concise ana- 
 lysis of the different parts of speech, with copious paradigms to 
 the declensions and conjugations. Though the Outline is brief. 
 it will be found that the inflection of the declinable parts oi 
 speech, as well as the gender of substantives, is unfolded 
 more fully than in Grammars of much larger size. The 
 materials are from the best sources, chiefly from the works oi 
 Becker and Heyse. Since it was impossible to add a separate 
 Syntax without greatly increasing the bulk of the book, the use 
 and government of each part of speech has been briefly point- 
 ed out in connection with its etymology. 
 
 The " Table of Classification of the Irregular Verbs," and 
 also the " Government of Verbs," have, after a thorough revi- 
 sion and some additions to the list, been adopted from the Lon. 
 don edition. The Author regrets that the limits of the wort 
 would not admit of a more extended treatment of the Parti. 
 
Vlll 
 
 cles. A clear and thorough analysis of the Adverbs, the Pre- 
 positions, and Conjunctions, in which the Greek-like power of 
 the German chiefly resides, with a sufficient number of exam 
 pies to make it intelligible, has never yet boen given to the 
 English student. It is believed, however, that no one will 
 suffer any practical inconvenience from this deficiency, as par- 
 ticular attention is paid to the use of the particles in other 
 parts of the book. 
 
 With respect to his " Systematic Outline," the Editor would 
 in conclusion say, that he feels confident that it possesses every 
 desirable condition of a complete introduction to the reading of 
 the German. May it contribute to spread the study of a lan- 
 guage, which in richness and flexibility is the acknowledged 
 superior of all its modern sisters — which in creations of Art 
 and in works of Science yields precedence to none — of a 
 language which contains in itself the germs of its own repro- 
 duction, and of an endless development — which still is, as ii 
 $ ?er has been, ^gefonfcert, uugemt'fd)t unb mtr fidfj felbergtetc&I* 
 
 G.J. A. 
 
 September, 1845. 
 
 Vew-York University, ) 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 
 
 Fag* 
 
 Parts of Speech, § 1 . 377 
 
 Cases, §2 377 
 
 ARTICLES. 
 
 Declension of the articles, § 3. 378 
 
 The article, before proper names, § 5 . . 379 
 
 " before abstract substantives and names of materials, $ 6. 379 
 " before common nouns, § 7. . « . . . 380 
 
 " " idiomatic use of, § 8 380 
 
 " " in sentences, § 9 381 
 
 " contracted with prepositions, § 10 381 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. 
 
 Classification of nouns, §11 382 
 
 I. Their Gender, determined by their signification, § 13 and § 14. . 383 
 determined by their termination, § 15— § 20. . 383 
 
 Gender of compound substantives, § 20 386 
 
 " of foreign substantives, § 21 387 
 
 II. Number. Rules for the formation of the plural, § 22, § 23 and § 24. 388 
 
 Nouns employed in the plural only, § 27 390 
 
 Nouns with two forms of the plural, § 28 390 
 
 HI. Inflection. Declension of common and abstract nouns, § 30. . 391 
 
 Earlier Declension, § 31-§ 38 .391 
 
 Later Declension, § 38-$ 42. . . .397 
 
 Declension of foreign substantives, § 42. . 400 
 
 Declension of proper names of persons, % 43-§ 48 . 401 
 
 " " " of places, § 48. . 404 
 
 IV. Government of substantives, § 49-§ 52. . . 405 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 Classification ©f adjectives, §52*5 55- . 406 
 
 A* 
 
X 
 
 PagH 
 
 I. Inflection, $ 55. First declension, § 56 408 
 
 Second declension, § 57 and § 58. . 410 
 
 Third declension, § 59. . . 411 
 
 Observations on the three declensions, § 60 and § 61. 412 
 
 II. Comparison, terminational and compound, § 62-§ 66. . . 414 
 
 irregular and defective, § 66 and § 67. . . . 415 
 
 af adverbs, § 68. . 416 
 
 III. Use and Government of Adjectives, § 70. . , 417 
 
 Adjectives with the infinitive, § 72 ; with the genitive, $ 73 ; w ith 
 the dative, § 74; with the accusative, § 74. iii. . . . 418 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 Classification of numerals, § 75 419 
 
 List of Cardinals and Ordinals, § 76. 420 
 
 Observations on their inflection and use, § 77-$ 80. . 421 
 
 Compound Numerals: Distributives, Iteratives, &c, Dimidiativcs, 
 
 &c, § 80 and $81 423 
 
 Indefinite Numerals, § 82; implying number, § 83; quantity, $ 84 ; 
 
 number and quantity both, § 85 424 
 
 The use of numerals, § 86 and § 87. ... 426 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Classification of pronouns, $88 427 
 
 J. Personal Pronouns, § 89 ; including reflexive, § 90, Obs. 3, and 
 
 reciprocal pronouns, § 90, Obs. 4 427 
 
 Indefinite personal pronouns, § 92. 429 
 
 II. Possessive Pronouns, §93; conjunctive, § 94. . . .430 
 Absolute possessive pronouns, § 95 431 
 
 III. Demonstrative Pronouns, their inflection and use, § 97-§ 99. 433 
 
 IV. Determinative Pronouns, § 100-§ 103. .... 434 
 V. Relative Pronouns, § 103-§ 106. . ... 435 
 
 VI. Interrogative Pronouns, § 106-§ 109. . . . 437 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Classification of Verbs — Transitive, § 109; Intransitive, § 110; 
 
 Reflexive, § 113; Impersonal, § 114; Auxiliary, § 115. . . 439 
 
 Personal terminations, § 117; moods, § 118; tenses, § 119. . . . 442 
 The infinitives, § 120 ; participles, their formation and signification, § 121. 442 
 The omission of the prefix $ » in the perfect participle, § 122. . 443 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs of Tenses, their use in the formation of compounds 
 
 tenses, § 123 .... 443 
 
 Rules for the formation of compound tenses, § 124 444 
 
XI 
 
 Conditionals, § 126. . . 444 
 
 Conjugation of the auiiliary verbs : $ a&ett, § 127 ; fettt, § 128 ; toerben, 
 
 § 129 445 
 
 Intransitive verbs which assume the auxiliary fja£ en, § 131. . . . 454 
 Intransitive verbs which assume the auxiliary fettt, § 132. . . . 454 
 Conjugation of Verbs, § 134 ; regular and irregular mode of conju- 
 gation, § 137. . ... 455 
 
 Table of terminations, § 140 . 457 
 
 Formation of the tenses of the passive voice, § 142. . . 458 
 
 Conjugation of Transitive Verbs, § 143. . . ■ . . . 459 
 
 " Reflexive Verbs, § 144 463 
 
 " Intransitive Verbs, § 145 464 
 
 " Impersonal Verbs, § 146 466 
 
 Compound Verbs — separable and inseparable, § 148-§ 155. . . 467 
 
 Conjugation of compound verbs, . . 469 
 
 Syntax of the Verb — agreement, § 156— § 159 470 
 
 Use of the tenses and moods, § 159— § 165. . . . . .471 
 
 The infinitive without § u, § 167 and § 168 472 
 
 The infinitive with % It, § 169-§ 172. . . . . . .473 
 
 Use of the participles, § 172-§ 178 475 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 Definition and classification of adverbs, § 178. 477 
 
 Adverbs of Place and of Time, § 179 477 
 
 " Modality, of Quantity, of Quality or Manner, 
 
 of Intensity, 478 
 
 Signification of the adverbs Ij i n and *j e V, § 180 478 
 
 The pronominal adverbs ba and ft) 0, ami their compounds, . . . 479 
 Comparison of adverbs, see § 68. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Definition, § 181 ; list of German prepositions, 480 
 
 Prepositions whicb govern the genitive, § 184. 480 
 
 " the dative, § 185 481 
 
 " " " the accusative, § 186 .481 
 
 Prepositions governing both the dative and accusative, § 187. . . 482 
 
 Three prepositions which govern the genitive and dative both, § 188. 482 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Classification of conjunctions — copulative, disjunctive, adversative, con- 
 ditional, concessive, &c, § 191 483 
 
xii 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Past 
 
 A list of German interjections, § 193 . 484 
 
 Observations on their use, ... , . 485 
 
 Classification of the Irregular Verbs, . . 486 
 
 A Table of the Sixteen Verbs which are Irregcla? only in 
 
 part, ... 489 
 
 Table of Irregular Verbs, . . . 490-506 
 
 The government of verbs, . 506 -Ml 
 
OLLENDORFF'S 
 
 GERMAN GRAMMAR. 
 
 FIRST LESSON.— ©rste Cation. 
 
 OF READING. 
 
 In German every letter is pronounced. Hence it fol- 
 lows, that foreigners are able to read the language 
 with greater facility: reading may be acquired in one 
 lesson. 
 
 PRINTED LETTERS OF THE GERMAN ALPHABET. 
 
 There are in German, as in English, twenty-six let- 
 ters, of which we give : 
 
 The Figures, 
 
 TAe Pronunciation, 
 
 The Power 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 ■> 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 CAPITALS. 
 
 SMALL LETTERS. 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 «/ 
 
 
 ah, 
 
 a, 
 
 ®> 
 
 
 *, 
 
 
 bay, 
 
 b, 
 
 e, 
 
 
 *t 
 
 
 tsay, 
 
 c, 
 
 Q, 
 
 
 *>, 
 
 
 day, 
 
 d, 
 
 <£, 
 
 
 e, 
 
 
 a, 
 
 e, 
 
 gf, 
 
 
 f, 
 
 
 ef, 
 
 f, 
 
 @ 
 
 
 P' 
 
 
 gay, 
 
 g. 
 
 % 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 hah, 
 
 h, 
 
 % 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 e, 
 
 i, 
 
 %* 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 yot, 
 
 J. 
 
 «, 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 kah, 
 
 k, 
 
 ?, 
 
 
 1/ 
 
 
 el, 
 
 1, 
 
 SK, 
 
 
 m, 
 
 
 em, 
 
 m, 
 
 % 
 
 
 n, 
 
 
 en, 
 
 n, 
 
 ©, 
 
 
 0/ 
 
 
 o, 
 
 o, 
 
 * la print, the Germans have but one capital letter for the rowel i and Uw 
 
 *oasonant> 
 
Tht 
 
 ? Figures, The Pr 
 
 onunciatioji, 
 
 The Powtf 
 
 
 ■ a 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 "N 
 
 
 CAPITALS. 
 
 SMALL LETTERS. 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 P/ 
 
 pay, 
 
 P> 
 
 Q, 
 
 9/ 
 
 koo, 
 
 q> 
 
 • % 
 
 */ 
 
 err, 
 
 r, 
 
 © 
 
 t<0, 
 
 ess, 
 
 s, 
 
 K 
 
 t, 
 
 tay, 
 
 t, 
 
 u, 
 
 «/ 
 
 oo, 
 
 u, 
 
 ®, 
 
 fe 
 
 fow, 
 
 v, 
 
 as, 
 
 **>/ 
 
 vay, 
 
 w 
 
 3P, 
 
 *, 
 
 iks, 
 
 X* 
 
 2), 
 
 D/ 
 
 ypsilon, 
 
 y> 
 
 3, 
 
 *r 
 
 tset, 
 
 z. 
 
 Most of the German letters being pronounced as in 
 English, we shall only present those that follow a dif- 
 ferent pronunciation. 
 
 TABLE OF THOSE VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS, THE PRONUNCIATION 
 OF WHICH IS NOT THE SAME AS IN ENGLISH. 
 
 Figures 
 
 6 
 m, 
 
 at, 
 ait, 
 
 «*/ 
 
 Name 
 
 ah-a, 
 
 o-a, 
 
 oo-a, 
 
 e-a, 
 
 a-e, 
 
 a-ypsilon, 
 
 ah-e, 
 
 ah-a-oo, 
 
 a-oo, 
 
 Are In 
 
 pronounced the English 
 as : words : 
 
 a, 
 
 i, 
 
 t 
 ie, 
 
 'I, 
 
 made, 
 bird,* 
 
 field, 
 I, 
 
 oy, boy,|| 
 
 German Examples. 
 
 Setter, fathers. 
 
 ?ott>e, lion. 
 
 ©lucf,happiness 
 
 SEBtefe, meadow. 
 ( SOBetfe, manner. 
 < fei)tt, to be. 
 ( $aifer, emperor. 
 \ SSdume, trees. 
 I &Ute, people. 
 
 * The English word bird does not quite answer to the sound of this vowel , 
 it has rather the sound of eu in the French words : feu, coeur, fleur, jeunc* 
 peu. 
 
 f There is no sound corresponding to this rowel in English, and, in order to 
 learn it well, the pupils must hear it pronounced ; it answers to the sound of M 
 in the French words: bat, nK vertu. 
 
 t The method which we have adopted, of placing analogous sounds to- 
 gether, will facilitate to learners the study of the pronunciation. There are 
 even some provinces in Germany, where a and o are both pronounced a ; i\ 
 and te, e; et or fy, ett and ciU, /. 
 
 |{ We have only been able to indicate the sound* otf the two diphthongs aB 
 
Figures. 
 
 Name Are pronounced 
 
 In the English 
 
 German Examples 
 
 
 as : 
 
 words : 
 
 
 au, 
 
 ah--oo, ou, 
 
 house, 
 
 jjau£, house. 
 
 «r 
 
 00, oo, 
 
 boot, 
 
 QUt, good. 
 
 Of the simple and compound consonants the follow 
 ing difFer in their pronunciation from the English con* 
 sonants : 
 
 & 
 
 @, before a, 0, it, before a consonant, or at the end 
 of a syllable, has the sound of k. Ex. QatO, Cato ; 
 (Sbttrab, Conrad ; Gmr, cure ; Srebtt, credit ; ©pectafel, 
 noise. Before the other vowels, the letter c is pro- 
 nounced like ts. Ex. Sdfar, Caesar ; ©cero, Cicero ; 
 @ere£, Ceres. 
 
 ®j, which is called tsay-hah, is pronounced like k : 
 1. when at the beginning of a word. Ex. G>f)or, choir ; 
 Sfyromf, chronicle ; (Shrift, christian ; 2. when followed 
 by f or g. Ex. S5ucf)fe, box; SEBadf)^ wax. In w^ords 
 derived from the French, it preserves the French 
 sound. Ex. Qfyaxlataxt, quack. This consonant, when 
 preceded by a, 0, U, is pronounced from the throat. 
 Ex. Sadf), rivulet ; god), hole ; SSittf), book ; ©pracfye, 
 language. Placed any where else, it is articulated 
 with a less guttural sound. Ex. SSitcfyer, books ; SSIed), 
 iron plate ; trf), I ; ©ejTcfyt, face. 
 
 ©♦ 
 
 ©, at the beginning of a syllable, has a hard sound, 
 as in the English word go. Ex. ©a&e, gift ; ©ott, God ; 
 gut, good ; ©ift, poison. When at the end of a syl- 
 lable, it has a medium sound between those of the gut- 
 tural d) and f . Ex. ZciQ, day ; ntogttd), possible ; Mug, 
 prudent ; (Sfjtg, vinegar ; ettug, eternal. In words bor- 
 rowed from the French, g is pronounced as in French. 
 Ex. ?oge, box (in a theatre) , ©erne, genius. 
 
 and eu approximative^ ; their pronunciation is not quite the same, and in qj 
 der to become familiar with them, the pupils must hear their master pre 
 uounce them . 
 
The pronunciation of g cannot be properly acquired* 
 unless from the instructor's own lips ; he must there- 
 fore make his pupils pronounce the following words • 
 
 ^ct^c, tradition. SRfifjtgga'nger/ idler. 
 
 %al§, tallow. Sowing, pupil. 
 
 £8erg, mountain. 2CnQft, anguish. 
 
 SmtQ, dwarf. £an$e, length. 
 
 Caugnen, to deny. S0?enc;c, quantity 
 
 ©teg, victory. dkfang, singing, 
 
 •gafytcjfett, capacity. SiianQ, sound. 
 
 9)?6gUcl)Eett, possibility. $tng, ring. 
 
 SOJagb, maid- servant. Sungftau, virgin. 
 
 yjlacfic, maid-servants. Sunggcfclt, bachelor. 
 
 The letter f) is aspirated at the beginning of a sylla- 
 ble. Ex. §anb, hand; £efc, hero; £ut, hat. It is 
 mute in the middle and at the end of a syllable, and 
 then it lengthens the vowel that precedes or follows it. 
 Ex. SSafyn, road ; §o{)tt, mockery ; ?ofyit, reward ; lefyrett, 
 to teach ; Scaler, crown (coin) ; $uf), cow ; Zijxane, 
 tear ; tfyiUt, to do. 
 
 3 (yot) has the sound of y in the English word you 
 Ex. Sagb, chase ; 2>ager* hunter ; jeber, each ; jefct, at 
 present. 
 
 D. 
 
 Q is always followed by u, and in combination with 
 that letter pronounced like kv in English. Ex. Dual, 
 torment ; Duette, source. 
 
 ©« 
 ©, when initial, has the pronunciation of z in Eng- 
 lish. Ex. (Same, seed ; ©eefe, soul. 
 
 ©$; 
 
 @df) is pronounced like sh in English. Ex ©cfyaf, 
 sheep ; ©d)i(b, shield. 
 
 ©a. 
 
 f} is pronounced like ss in English Ex. £a#, hatred ; 
 
toetft, white. This double consonant Is compounded of 
 f and J, and is called ess-tset. 
 
 § is compounded of t and g, and has the sound of 
 these two consonants combined. Ex. ©cfyctg, treasure ; 
 $11$, finery. 
 
 S3 is sounded like /. Ex. Setter, father ; SBowmttb, 
 tutor ; SSoIf, people. 
 
 .SB- 
 SB is pronounced like an English v and not like w. 
 Ex. SOBalb, forest ; Sffitefe, meadow. 
 
 3* 
 
 3 has the pronunciation of ts. Ex. 3 a fy*V tooth ; %&t, 
 tent. 
 
 EXPLANATION OF SOME SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK. 
 
 Expressions which vary either in their construction 
 ar idiom from the English are marked thus : f . 
 A hand (f§^"*) denotes a rule of syntax or construction. 
 
 SECOND LESSON— Zmitt tttlxon 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Neuter 
 
 Nominative, 
 
 the. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 t>ev. 
 
 ba$. 
 
 Genitive, 
 
 of the. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 m. 
 
 m. 
 
 Dative, 
 
 to the. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 bent. 
 
 bent. 
 
 Accusative, 
 
 the. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 bem 
 
 ba$. 
 
 * To Instructors. — Each lesson should he dictated to the pupils, whi 
 should pronounce each word as soon as dictated. The instructor should also 
 exercise his pupils by putting the questions to them in various ways. Each 
 lesson, except the second, includes three operations : the teacher, in the first 
 place, looks over the exercises of the most attentive of his pupils, putting to 
 them the questions contained in the printed exercises ; he then dictates 
 to them the next lesson ; and lastly puts fresh questions to them on all the 
 preceding lessons. The teacher may divide one lesson into two, or two into 
 three, or even make two into one, according to the degree of intelligence of 
 his punils. 
 
6 
 
 Have you ] 
 
 Yes, Sir, I have. 
 Have you the hat 1 
 Yes, Sir, I have the hat. 
 The ribbon, 
 the salt, 
 the table, 
 the sugar, 
 the paper, 
 
 Obs. The Germans 
 capital letter. 
 
 $aUn Sie ? 
 
 3a, twin £ett, id) f)afce. 
 
 £aben ©te ten |>ut ? 
 
 3a, mcin £etr, id) f)abe ben £ut 
 
 t>as SBanfc ; 
 
 bog ©alg ; 
 
 ben &tfd) ; 
 
 ben 3uder ; 
 
 bag papier. 
 
 begin all substantives with a 
 
 Nom. my. 
 
 
 Nom. meim menu 
 
 Gen. of my. 
 
 
 Gen. nteme& ntemeg. 
 
 Dat. to my. 
 
 
 Dat. meittenu ntemenu 
 
 Ace. my. 
 
 
 Ace. memem ntetm 
 
 3f)r,3/0wr,is declined like nteitu Example : 
 
 
 Masculine. Neuter. 
 
 Nom. your. 
 Gen. of your. 
 Dat. to your. 
 Ace. , your. 
 
 
 Nom. 3f)r. 3^* 
 Gen. SfyreS, SfyreS* 
 Dat. Severn. Sfyrenu 
 Ace. Sfyrem Sfyr* 
 
 Have you my hat 1 
 Yes, Sir, I have your hat. 
 Have you my ribbon ? 
 I have your ribbon. 
 
 $aben <gte nietnen £ut ? 
 
 3a, mein $civ, id) Fja&c Sfiren #ut. 
 
 £obcn (Sie mein 23anb ? 
 
 3d) F)a(>c 3br SBanb. 
 
 
 EXERC 
 
 JISE 1. 
 
 Have you the salt? — Yes, Sir, I have the salt. — Have yon your 
 salt 1 — I have my salt. — Have you the table ? — I have the table. — 
 Have you my table 1 — I have your table. — Have you the sugar]— 
 I have the sugar. — Have you your sugar 1 — I have my sugar.— 
 Have you the paper? — I have the paper. — Have you my paper]— 
 I have your paper, f 
 
 * 3>f)t with a small letter signifies their, and has the same declension as 
 31)?, your. 
 
 f Pupils desirous of making rapid progress, may compose a great many 
 phrases in addition to those we have given them in the exercises ; but they 
 must pronounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make 
 separate lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns and verbs, as they 
 meet with in the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words 
 more easily, when they have occasion to refer to them in writing their lessons* 
 
THIRD LESSON.— SUrittc tctlion. 
 
 *H5etcf)cr, which, has the same declension as ber. 
 
 Which. 
 
 Masc. Neut. 
 
 Nom. tt>eW)cr. weWjeg* 
 Ace. wetcfyem tt>elcf)eg. 
 
 DECLENSION OF AN ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITH 
 ARTICLE, OR A WORD WHICH HAS THE SAME TERMINATION.* 
 
 Nom. the good. 
 
 Gen. of the good. 
 
 Dat. to the good. 
 
 Ace. the good. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Nom. ber gute* 
 Gen. beg gutem 
 Dat. bem guteu* 
 Ace. ben guten. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 bag gute* 
 beg guten. 
 bem gutett. 
 bag gute* 
 
 Observation. Adjectives vary in their declensior 
 when preceded by : meut, my ; 3f)r, your ; or by one of 
 the following words : em, a ; fern, no, none ; bem, thy 
 fern, his ; tfyr, her ; mtfer, our ; (Suer, your. Example : 
 
 Mase. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. my good. 
 
 Gen. of my good. 
 
 Dat. to my good. 
 
 Ace. my good. 
 
 N. mem guter* mem guteg. 
 G. meineg gutett. memeg guten* 
 D. memem guten. memem guten. 
 A. meineu gutett. mem guteg. 
 
 Good, 
 
 bad, 
 
 beautiful or fine, 
 
 ugly, 
 
 great, big or large, 
 Have you tbe good sugar] 
 Yes, Sir, I have the good sugar 
 
 Have you the fine ribbon 1 
 I have the fine ribbon. 
 Which hat have you 1 
 I have my ugly hat. 
 Which rib o on have you 1 
 I have your fine ribbon. 
 
 ftftftt; 
 fd)6n \ 
 
 Wtd& ; 
 
 atop. 
 
 &aUn <&h ten guten 3udfet ? 
 
 3a, mem &at, uf> fjabe ten guten 
 
 Sucfer. 
 $aUn @ie tag fdjftte SBant ? 
 3d) fjabc tag fd)6'ne 23ant. 
 SS5c(cf)cn £ut fja&cn @te ? 
 3d) fyate metnen Fjd'plid&cn #ut 
 28eldf>e$ 23ant W>en ©U? 
 3* Me 3ftr fd)8ne« SBank 
 
 4« biefcr, this ; jitter, that, he 
 
EXERCISE 2. 
 
 Haveyou the fine hat 1 — Yes, Sir, I ha\e tie fine hat. — Have 
 you my bad hat 1 — I have your bad hat. — Ha\e you the bad salt?— • 
 I have the bad salt. — Have you your good salt] — I have my good 
 salt. — Which salt have you ] — I have your good salt. — Which su- 
 gar have you 1 — I have my good sugar. — Have you my good su- 
 gar] — I have your good sugar. — Which table have you I — I have 
 the fine table. — Have you my fine table? — I have your fine table. — 
 Which paper have you] — I have the bad paper. — Have you my 
 ugly paper ] — I have your ugly paper. — Which bad hat have you ! 
 — I have my bad hat. — Which fine ribbon have you] — I have youi 
 fine ribbon. 
 
 FOURTH LESSON.— bierte Action. 
 
 Nat. 
 I have not. 
 No, Sir. 
 
 Have you the table 1 
 No, Sir, I have it not. 
 Have you the paper 1 
 No, Sir, I have it not. 
 
 The stone, 
 the cloth, 
 the wood, 
 the leather, 
 the lead, 
 the gold, 
 
 it. 
 
 ■ Masc. Neut. 
 
 Nom. er* e& 
 
 Ace. it)n. ti. 
 
 3d) f)aU n i d) t . 
 sjlc'm, mem £crr. 
 £akn ©ie ben £tfd) ? 
 9?etn, mem £etr, id) r/afce tf)tt n Vfl) t 
 £aben ©te t>a$ papier ? 
 £ftem, mem #ert, id) fyabc el 
 nid)t. 
 
 bet ©tern ; 
 t>a$ Sud) ; 
 bag £ol$ ; 
 baS 2ebet ; 
 bat S3let ; 
 bat ©ctb. 
 
 Obs. The terminations en and ern are used to form 
 adjectives and denote the materials of anything. 
 
 Of, 
 
 t> o n ; 
 
 golden or of gold, 
 
 Qcfben ; 
 
 leaden — of lead, 
 
 Wetcrn ; 
 
 stone — of stone, 
 
 ftetnern ; 
 
 pretty, 
 
 F)tiO(cl) (cirtig) 
 
 Have you the paper hat ? 
 I have it not. 
 
 j&aben ©te ben paptetenen, #ut ' 
 3d) W* tfjn nicr>t. 
 
The wooden table, 
 the horse of stone, 
 the coat, 
 the horse, 
 the dog, 
 the shoe, 
 the thread, 
 the stocking, 
 the candlestick, 
 the golden ribbon, 
 
 ten fjo^etnen Stfcf) ; 
 tag fietnetne $fert ; 
 ten motf (tag £(ett) ; 
 tag *pfcrt ; 
 ten £ttnt ; 
 ten ©cbuf) ; 
 ten gatcn ; 
 ten (gtrumpf ; 
 ten Seucfytet ; 
 tag goltene 33ant. 
 
 EXERCISE 3. 
 
 Hare you the wooden table] — No, Sir, I have it not. — Wjiich 
 iable have -youl — I have the stone table. — Have you my golden 
 candlestick ]— I have it not. — Which stocking have you ] — I have 
 the thread (faten) stocking. — Have you my thread stocking ] — 1 
 nave not your thread stocking. — Which coat have you 1 — I have 
 my cloth (tucben) coat. — Which horse have you ] — I have the wood- 
 en horse. — Have you my leathern shoe I — I have it not. — Have 
 you the leaden horse]*— I have it not. — Have you your good 
 wooden horse ] — I have it not.— Which wood have you ] — I have 
 your good wood. — Have you my good gold 1 — 1 have it not.— * 
 Which gold have you ^ — I have the good gold.— Which stone have 
 you ] — I have your fine stone. — Which ribbon have you ] — I have 
 your golden ribbon. — Have you my fine dog] — I have it. — Have 
 you my ugly horse ]— I have it not. 
 
 FIFTH LESSON.— JFunfte Uttion. 
 
 The chest, the trunk, 
 the button, 
 the money, 
 
 Anything, something, 
 Not anything, nothing, 
 
 Have you anything ? 
 
 I have nothing. 
 The cheese, 
 the old bread, 
 the pretty dog, 
 the silver (metal), 
 the silver ribbon, 
 
 Kie you hungry ] . 
 
 ten Jt offer ; 
 ten jtnopf ; 
 tag ®elt* 
 
 <S t w a g ♦ 
 
 9Hcl)tg. 
 
 #a&en (Ste etroag ] 
 
 3d) fjafcc mcf)t& 
 
 ten £afe ; 
 
 tag aUe 25rot - % 
 
 ten arttgen (r;iu;fcr)en) #unt $ 
 
 tag (Sttbct ; 
 
 tag ftlfcerne 23ant. 
 
 C (Sint ®te rjuncjttcj ? 
 C f £akn @te hunger?* 
 
 As ini. French : 
 
 l* 
 
 avez-vGUs faim 1 
 
10 
 
 I am hungry. 
 Are you thirsty ? 
 
 I am thirsty. 
 
 Are you sleepy ] 
 I am sleepy. 
 Are you tired ! 
 I am not tired. 
 
 Of the (genitive). 
 
 C 3$ bin fyuncjug. 
 ItSd) fjabe !>unget. 
 C(Stnb <Ste burfttg? 
 1 1 £a&en <3te ©utft I* 
 5 3* ton burfttg. 
 i t 3d) babe SDurft. 
 gpinb Sie fdW&fmg ? 
 3* bin fctyafmg. 
 ©tnb @tc mtibe ? 
 3d) bin ntd)t mitbe. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 beg. 
 
 O&s. Nouns of the masculine and neuter gender 
 take $ or eg in the genitive case singular. 
 
 The tailor's, or of the tailor, beg 6cf)netberg ; 
 the dog's, or of the dog, fc)c$ punbeg ; 
 
 the baker's, or of the baker, be$ JBacfetg ; 
 
 the neighbour's, or of the neigh- bc£ 9?ad)barg ; 
 
 bour, 
 of the salt, t>C6 ©al$eg. 
 
 The baker's dog. 
 The tailor's coat. 
 
 C bcr &unb bc^ S3atfer$, 
 \ beg Sacfetg £unb. 
 C bcr <Kocf beg ®cf)netberg, 
 I beg ©djnctfcet* SKocf.f 
 
 EXERCISE 4. 
 
 Have you the leathern trunk 1 — I have not the leathern trunk. — » 
 Have you my pretty trunk ] — I have not your pretty trunk. — 
 Which trunk have you 1 — I have the wooden trunk. — Have you 
 my old button ] — I have it not. — Which money have you 1 — I have 
 the good money. — Which cheese have you 1 — I have the old cheese. 
 — Have you anything ?— I have something. — Have you my large 
 dog ? — I have it not. — Have you your good gold ]~ I have it.— 
 Which dog have you 1 — I have the tailor's dog. — Have you the 
 neighbour's large dog 1 — I have it not. — Have you the dog's golden 
 ribbon 1 — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which coat have you 1 — I have 
 the tailor's good coat. — Have you the neighbour's good bread 1 — 
 I have it not. — Have you my tailor's golden ribbon 1 — I have it. — 
 Have you my pretty dog's ribbon 1 — I have it not. — Have you the 
 good baker's good horse % — I have it. — Have you the good tailor's 
 
 * As in French: avez-vous serif? 
 
 r The first of these two expressions is more usual, the latter is preferred 
 in poetry 
 
11 
 
 horse? — I have it not. — Are you hungry] — I am hungjy. — Are 
 you sleepy 1 — I am not sleepy. — Which candlestick have you ! — I 
 have the golden candlestick of my good haker. 
 
 SIXTH LESSON.— Qaifste flection. 
 
 Anything or something good. 
 Nothing or not anything bad. 
 
 Have you anything good ? 
 1 have nothing bad. 
 
 What ? 
 
 What have you 1 
 What have you good 1 
 I have the good bread. 
 
 That or the one. 
 
 &twa$ ©utc$. 
 3Mci)t$ ©dbted&te*. 
 
 4*a6en @ie ttwa§ ®utc$ 1 
 3d) fyabe md)t$ @d)led)te& 
 
 2Ba$ fjabcn <Stc ? 
 2Bas fjaben ©te ©ute$ ? 
 3d) ijabe ba^ gute 23to& 
 
 ikfasc. 
 Neut. 
 
 text. 
 
 The neighbour's, or that of the ben beg 9?ad)bar& 
 
 neighbour. 
 The tailor's, or that of the tailor. bctS t>c^ @d)rtetbet$. 
 
 Or. 
 
 £>ber. 
 
 The book, ba^ 23ud). 
 
 Have you my book or that of the £aben <Sie mcin 23ud) cbet ba$ be$ 
 
 neighbour 1 9tfad)bar$ ? 
 
 [ have that of the neighbour. 3d) fja&e bag beg 9?ad)bar& 
 Have you your hat or the £aben <Sic 3^cn £ut obcc ben be$ 
 
 baker's ? ^defers ? 
 
 EXERCISE 5. 
 
 Have you my book 1 — I have it not. — Which book have you ? — 
 I have my good book. — Have you anything ugly 1 — I have nothing 
 ugly. — I have something pretty. — Which table have you 1 — I have 
 the baker's. — Have you the baker's dog or the neighbour's 1 — I 
 have the neighbour's. — What have you ] — I have nothing. — Have 
 you the good or bad sugar]— I have the good. — Have you the 
 neighbour's good or bad horse? — I have the good (one*). — Have 
 you the golden or the silver candlestick 1 — I have the silver can- 
 dlestick. — Have you my neighbour's paper or that of my tailor 1 — 
 I have that of your tailor. — Are you hungry or thirsty T — I am 
 hungry. — Are you sleepy or tired % — I am tired. — W T hat have you 
 
 Words in the exercises between parentheses, are not to be translated 
 
12 
 
 pretty 1 — I have nothing pretty. — Have you the leather shoe ?— i 
 have it not. 
 
 SEVENTH LESSON.— QwbztiU Ceciicn. 
 
 Have you my coat or the tailor's ] £aben <Ste metnen SKocf eter ten t)H 
 
 @d)nctterg ? 
 I have yours. 3d) fyabe ten Sfatgcn. 
 
 Masculine. Neuter. 
 
 ™. I N. ber tneintge. bct3 nteimge, 
 
 J A. ben metmgen. ba3 meim'ge. 
 
 i ours. | A, ben S^ngen* ba$ Styrtge. 
 
 Absolute possessive pronouns, as : ber ntetmge, mine 5 
 ber 3fyrige, yours ; ber fetnige, his, &c, are declined like 
 adjectives preceded by the definite article. (See Les- 
 son in.) 
 
 Obs. When the conjunctive possessive pronouns ; 
 mem, my ; 3fy*V your ; few, his, &c, are used for the 
 absolute possessive pronouns : ber tneinfge, mine ; ber 
 Sbrfge, yours, &c, they terminate in the masculine in 
 er and in the neuter in i& — Ex. : 
 
 Is this your hat 1 3ft tag 3?>r £ut ? 
 
 No, Sir, it is not mine, but yours. £fltin, metn £crr, eg if! nid)t meinet, 
 
 fon tern Sljrer. 
 Is this my book 1 3ft tag metn 23ud) ? 
 
 No, it is not yours, but mine. 9?etn, eg ijt md)t Sfyreg, fonterti 
 
 meineg. 
 
 TKp TYlflT*- 
 
 
 € ter 20?ann (vir) ; 
 
 1 ter 50?enfcr) (gen. en, he mo) ; 
 
 i 1J.C/ AllClli J 
 
 
 the stick, 
 
 
 ter ©tocf ; 
 
 my brother, 
 
 
 mctn ^Bruter ; 
 
 the shoemaker, 
 
 
 ter (Sd)ul)mad)et ; 
 
 the merchant, 
 
 
 ter ^aufmann ; 
 
 the friend, 
 
 
 ter greutit* 
 
 ave you thp merchants 
 
 stick 
 
 #a-bcn ©w ten @tccf teg $auf* 
 
 or yours 1 
 
 
 manng oter ten S^ri^en ? 
 
 Neither, 
 
 
 &Bet ct 
 
 Nor. 
 
 
 01 oct)* 
 
 I have neither trie merchant's 3$ M>e rcetet ten 'Stecf teg JCmif* 
 stick nor mine. manng nod) ten roeintgw* 
 
13 
 
 .416 you hungry or thirsty * £ ^ ^ ^ g ^ ^ ? 
 
 I am neither hungry nor thirsty. | ^ £ n ^ ^^ ^ ^ 
 
 EXERCISE 6. 
 
 Have you your cloth or mine 1 — I have neither yours nor mine, 
 — ^1 have neither my bread nor the tailor's. — Have you my stick or 
 yours ] — 1 have mine. — Have you the shoemaker's shoe or the 
 merchant's 1 — I have neither the shoemaker's nor the merchant's 
 «*— Have you my brother's coat 1 — I have it not. — Which paper 
 have you ] — I have your friend's. — Have you my dog or my 
 friend's ] — I have your friend's. — Have you my thread stocking or 
 my brother's 1 — I have neither yours nor your brother's. — Have 
 you my good baker's good bread or that of my friend 1 — I have 
 neither your good baker's nor that of your friend. — Which bread 
 have you] — I have mine. — Which ribbon have you! — I have 
 yours. — Have you the good or the bad cheese 1 — I have neither 
 the good nor the bad. — Have you anything 1 — I have nothing. — 
 Have you my pretty or my ugly dog 1 — I have neither your pretty 
 nor your ugly dog. — Have you my friend's stick 1 — I have it not* 
 — Are you sleepy or hungry ] — I am neither sleepy nor hungry. — » 
 Have you the good or the bad salt !-— I have neither the good nor 
 the bad. — Have you my horse or the man's 1 — I have neither yours 
 nor the man's. — What have you ! — 1 have nothing fine. — Are you 
 tired ? — I am not tired. 
 
 EIGHTH LESSON.— &tf)te tttilOW. 
 
 The cork, t>cr $)ftopf (^fropfen) ; 
 
 the corkscrew* t)Ct Spfropfetcfjet ($propfcn$tefar) * 
 
 the umbrella, t>tt SKcflcnfcfyttm ; 
 
 the boy, far incite (gen. n). 
 
 Obs. Masculine substantives ending in e, take it 
 in the genitive case singular, and keep this termina- 
 tion in all the cases of the singular and plural. 
 
 The Frenchman, fcet ^rangefe (gen. tt) ; 
 
 the carpenter, t>ct Bunmctmarm ; 
 
 the hammer* t>et £ammer ; 
 
 the iron, foa$ (Stfcn ; 
 
 iron or of iron, eifcrn (adjective) ; 
 
 the nail, bet 9?ctgcl ; 
 
 the pencil, t>et SSUifiift ; 
 
14 
 
 the thimble 
 the coffee, 
 the honey, 
 the biscuit, 
 
 Havel] 
 
 You have. 
 What have 1 1 
 {on have the carpenter's ham- 
 mer. 
 
 Have I the nail ] 
 You have it. 
 Have I the bread 1 
 You have it. 
 I am right. 
 I am wrong. 
 Am I riorht ? 
 
 bet $tngetf)ut \ 
 bet &cifj*e ; 
 bet £ontg ; 
 bet 3rc>tebacf. 
 
 £abetd>? 
 
 ©te fyaben. 
 
 2Ba$ fjafce td) 1 
 
 <Ste baben ben £ammet be$ 3tmmcr< 
 
 mannS. 
 £a&e id) ben 9?agel ? 
 <Ste Ijaften tfyn. 
 £abe id) ba$ 23rob ? 
 @tc ftaben e$. 
 t 3* fjaOe ftedjt. 
 t 3d) i)aU Untecfyt. 
 t £abettf) £Hcd>t? 
 
 EXERCISE 7. 
 
 1 have neither the baker's dog nor that of my friend. — Are you 
 sleepy 1 — I am not sleepy. — I am hungry. — You are not hungry.— 
 Have I the cork ] — No, Sir, you have it not. — Have I the carpen- 
 ter's wood ] — You have it not. — Have 1 the Frenchman's good um- 
 brella 1 — You have it. — Have I the carpenter's iron nail or yours 1 
 — You have mine. — You have neither the carpenter's nor mine. — 
 Which pencil have I ] — You have that of the Frenchman. — Have 
 I your thimble or that of the tailor 1 — You have neither mine nor 
 that of the tailor. — Which umbrella have 1 ! — You have my good 
 umbrella. — Have I the Frenchman's good honey ]— You have it 
 not. — Which biscuit have 1 1 — You have that of my good neigh- 
 bour. — Have you my coffee or that of my boy 1 — I have that of 
 your good boy. — Have you your cork or mine ] — I have neither 
 yours nor mine. — What have you ] — I have my good brother's good 
 pencil. — Am I right? — You are right. — Am I wrong? — You are 
 not wrong. — Am I right or wrong 1 — You are neither right nor 
 wrong. — You are hungry. — You are not sleepy. — You are neither 
 hungry nor thirsty. — You have neither the good coffee nor the good 
 sugar. — What have I ?— You have nothing. 
 
 NINTH LESSON.— NtXintC %ttt\OXl. 
 
 Have 1 the iron or the golden 
 
 nail 1 
 You have neither the iron nor 
 
 the golden nail 
 
 .g>abe id) ben etfetnen cbet ben cjotbe* 
 
 nen Sftaget ? 
 (Ste tyaben roebet ben etfernen nod) 
 
 ben gotbenen faciei. 
 
15 
 
 The sheep, 
 
 bat (Scfyaf ; 
 
 the ram, 
 
 bet £ammct (tier @d)8p$) ; 
 
 the chicken (the hen), 
 
 t>a£ £uf)tt ; 
 
 the ship, 
 
 ba$@d)tff; 
 
 the bag (the sack), 
 
 tec <Sac!; 
 
 the young man, 
 
 bet junge 9#enfcf; (gen. en) \ 
 
 the youth, 
 
 bet Sunfjtincj. 
 
 Who? 
 
 2Bet? 
 
 Who has ? 
 
 2Bct f)at? 
 
 Who has the trunk? 
 
 2Bct f)at ben £cffet ? 
 
 The man has the trunk. 
 
 2)et Sftann f)at ben jtoffet. 
 
 The man has not the trunk. 
 
 Set tfflcmn fyat ben $offet n t d) t. 
 
 "Who has it 1 
 
 5Bct f)at tl)n ? 
 
 The young man has it. 
 
 Set lunge SBenfd) feat if)n. 
 
 The young man has it not. 
 
 Set iungc Sftenfcr; fyat tr)n n t d) t. 
 
 He has. 
 
 (St 5 at. 
 
 He has the knife. 
 
 (St fjat ba$ SKcffcr. 
 
 He has not the knife. 
 
 (St ftat t>a$ 93?effet n t c^ t . 
 
 He has it. 
 
 (St f)at e& 
 
 Has the man ] 
 
 £at bet Sftann ? 
 
 Has the painter 1 
 
 £at bet 9Met ? 
 
 Has the friend 1 
 
 j&at bet greunb ? 
 
 Has the boy the carpenter's 
 
 £at bet RnaU ben £ammet bc< 
 
 hammer 1 
 
 3tmmetmann$ ? 
 
 He has it. 
 
 (St fjat tf)n. 
 
 Has the youth it! 
 
 £at tt)n bet Sungttng ? 
 
 Is he thirsty 1 
 
 3ft et Uurfttg? (fiat et SDurji?) 
 
 He is thirsty. 
 
 (St tft butfttg. ((St |at ©urjt) 
 
 Is he tired ] 
 
 3ft et nitibe ? 
 
 He is not tired. 
 
 (St ift n t cl> t miibe. 
 
 EXERCISES. 8. 
 
 Is he thirsty or hungry 1 — He is neither thirsty nor hungry. — 
 Has the friend my hat 1 — He has it. — He has it not. — Who has 
 my sheep ] — Your friend has it. — Who has my large sack ] — The 
 baker has it. — Has the youth my book 1 — He has it not. — What has 
 he 1 — He has nothing. — Has he the hammer or the nail 1 — He has 
 neither the hammer nor the nail. — Has he my umbrella or my 
 stick 1 — He has neither your umbrella nor your stick. — Has he my 
 coffee or my sugar ] — He has neither your coffee nor your sugar ; 
 he has your honey. — Has he my brother's biscuit or that of the 
 Frenchman ] — He has neither your brother's nor that of the French- 
 man ; he has that of the good boy. — Which ship has he 1 — He has 
 my good ship. — Has he the old sheep or the ram 1 
 
 Has the young man my knife or that of the painter 1 — He has 
 neither yours nor that of the painter. — Who has my brother's fine 
 
16 
 
 dog ? — Your friend has it. — What has my friend 1 — He has the 
 baker's good bread. — He has the good neighbour's good chicken. — 
 What have you 1 — I have nothing. — Have you my bag or yours ] — 
 I have that of your friend.— Have I your good knife 1 — You have 
 it, — You have it not. — Has the youth it (£cit c£) 1 — He has it not. 
 — -What has he? — He has something good. — He has nothing bad. 
 —Has he anything] — He has nothing. — Is he sleepy? — He is not 
 sleepy. — He is hungry. — Who is hungry ] — The young man is 
 hungry. — Your friend is hungry. — Your brother's boy is hungry. — 
 My shoemaker's brother is hungry. — My good tailor's boy is 
 thirsty. — Which man has my book 1 — The big (grcp) man has it. — 
 Which man has my horse ]— Your friend has it. — He has your 
 good cheese. — Has he it 1— Yes, Sir, he has it. 
 
 TENTH LESSON.— ZdjttU Icttiotl. 
 
 The peasant, bet 25auet (gen. n) ; 
 
 the ox, bet Dcfefr; 
 
 the cook, bet Mctf) : 
 
 the bird, bet 53ccjc(. 
 
 Masc. Neut. 
 
 m i Nom. fern, fern* 
 
 11189 I Ace. femen, fein. 
 
 Obs. A. The conjunctive possessive pronoun fetlt is 
 declined like meitt and %fyv. (See Lessons II. and III.) 
 
 The servant, bet SBcbtcnte ; 
 
 the broom, bet *3efen. 
 
 Has the servant his broom ? #at bet 23ebtente femen SBcfen t 
 
 His eye, fein ?(u$e ; 
 
 his foot, fetnen gup ; 
 
 his rice, fetnen $et$* 
 
 Has the cook his chicken or £at bet jtecf) fetn £uf)n cbet t>a$ beg 
 
 that of the peasant 1 . SBcmetn 1 
 
 He has his own. (5t fjat t>a$ fetntge. 
 
 Masc. Neut. 
 
 His or his own (absolute ( N. ber femtge* bag femtge. 
 
 possessive pronoun). ( A. ben femigen* bag fefm'ge* 
 
 Has the servant his trunk or $at bet SBebtente fetnen Jtoffet ober 
 
 mine 1 ben metntcjen ? 
 
 He has his own. (5t f)ot ben fetntgen. 
 
 Have you your shoe or his 1 £>ciben @te 3f)ten <ScI)uF) obet bep 
 
 fetntgen ? 
 
 I have his. 3d) fyafte ben fctntcicm 
 
17 
 
 Somebody or anybody, some 
 one or any one (indefi- 
 nite pronoun). 
 
 [ Nom. 
 J Gen. 
 1 Dat. 
 
 (^Acc. 
 
 3emcmb* 
 Semanbeg* 
 Semanbem* 
 Semanbetu 
 
 Has anybody my hat ] 
 
 Somebody has it. 
 
 Who has my stick ] 
 Nobody has it. 
 
 No one, nobody or not anybody* 92 1 c nt a n b» 
 
 Ofo. 2?. Jiiemanb is declined exactly like Setltattb 
 
 £at Semanb metncn £ut * 
 
 ij Scmanb (jat tfyn. 
 
 } @S Ijat tfjn Semanb. 
 SQBcr fjat metncn ©tecf ? 
 £ftiemcmb (jat tfyn. 
 
 Who has my ribbon 1 
 Nobody has it. 
 Nobody has his broom. 
 
 S£et f)at twin SBanb ? 
 Sftiemanb ftat eg. 
 Stttcmcmb fytit feincn SScfen. 
 
 EXERCISES. 10. 
 
 Have you the ox of the peasant or that of the cook] — I hnve 
 neither that of the peasant nor that of the cook. — Has the peasant 
 his rice 1 — He has it. — Have you it ! — I have it not. — Has his boy 
 the servant's broom ] — He has it. — Who has the boy's pencil ] — 
 Nobody has it. — Has your brother my stick or that of the painter ] 
 — He has neither yours nor that of the painter ; he has his own. — 
 Has he the good or bad money 1 — He has neither the good nor the 
 bad. — Has he the wooden or the leaden horse ? — He has neither 
 the wooden nor the leaden horse. — What has he good 1 — He has 
 my good honey. — Has my neighbour's boy my book ] — He has it 
 not. — Which book has he 1 — He has his fine book. — Has he my 
 book or his own ] — He has his own. — Who has my gold button ? 
 — Nobody has it.-*— Has anybody my thread stocking 11 — Nobody 
 has it. 
 
 11. 
 
 Which ship has the merchant] — He has his own. — Which 
 norse has my friend ] — He has mine. — Has he his dog ?— He has 
 it not. — Who has his dog 1 — Nobody has it. — Who has my bro- 
 ther's umbrella 1 — Somebody has it. — Which broom has the ser- 
 vant? — He has his own. — Is anybody hungry] — Nobody is hun- 
 gry. — Is anybody sleepy] — Nobody is sleepy. — Is any one tired ] — 
 Nc one is tired. — Who is right] — Nobody is right.— Have I his 
 oiscuit ] — You have it not. — Have I his good brother's ox ? — 
 You have it not. — Which chicken have I] — You have Ls.— Is 
 anybody wrong]— -Nobody is wrong. 
 
.8 
 
 ELEVENTH LESSON.— ©Ifie UtixoXi. 
 
 The sailor, 
 the chair, 
 the looking-glass, 
 the candle, 
 the tree, 
 the garden, 
 the foreigner, 
 the glove, 
 
 This ass, 
 that hay, 
 
 The grain, 
 the corn, 
 
 This man, 
 that man, 
 this book, 
 that book, 
 
 bet matttft, t>cr 23eot$fnecl)t ; 
 
 bet (StuM; 
 bet ©ptegef ; 
 
 bet 93cmm ; 
 bet ©atten ; 
 bet gtembe ; 
 bet £cmbfcf)ufj. 
 
 btcfet (Sfcl ; 
 btefes (bieS) £etu 
 
 t>a$ £otn; 
 bat ©ettetbe. 
 
 btefet 20?ann ; 
 jenet OTcinn ; 
 btefet (bte£ a ) $ucf) ; 
 ieneS JBud). 
 
 This or this one. 
 That or that one. 
 
 N. G. d. a 
 
 Masc. btefer — e3~ - em — e* 
 Neut. jetted — e£ — em— eS 
 
 Obs. It will be perceived that btefer and jener are 
 declined exactly like the definite article. (See Lesson 
 IL) The English almost always use that, when the 
 Germans use btefet. In German j e tt e X is only em- 
 ployed when it relates to a person or a thing spoken 
 of before, or to make an immediate comparison be- 
 tween two things or persons. Therefore, whenever 
 this is not the case, the English that must be translated 
 by btefer* 
 
 Have you this hat or that one 1 $af>m <§k biefen obet (enen #ut ? 
 
 But. 
 
 Uhcv, fonbetn. 
 
 Obs. Slber is used after affirmative and negative 
 propositions ; fonbew is only used after negative propo- 
 sitions. 
 
 I have not this, but that one. 3d) fyafce ntcbt btcfen, fonbetn jencn. 
 Has the neighbour this book or $at bet 9?aci)fcat btcfet obet {etteS 
 that one 1 SBucf) 1 
 
 a 2>teS is often used for biefe§ in the nominative and accusative neu- 
 ter, particularly when it is not followed by a substantive, and when it re- 
 presents a whole sentence, a3 will be seen hereafter. 
 
19 
 
 Ho has this, but not that one. (5t Ijat btcfe£, abet ntd)t jetted. 
 
 Have you this looking-glass or §aUn'&t biefen ct)cc jcncn (Spio 
 
 that one? gel? 
 
 I have neither this nor that one. 3d) fyafce tt>cbcr btcfen nod) Jenen. 
 
 That ox, bicfer £>d)|~c ; 
 
 the letter, bet SSrief ; 
 
 the note, bet Scttct (Dag SStUet) ; 
 
 the hcrse-shoe, fcas #ufeifcn. 
 
 exercise 12. 
 
 Which hay has the foreigner 1 — He has that of the peasant.— Has 
 the sailor my looking-glass ? — He has it not. — Have you this can- 
 dle or that one 1 — I have this one. — Have you the hay of my gar- 
 den or that of yours ] — I have neither that of your garden nor that 
 of mine, but that of the foreigner. — Which glove have you ] — I 
 have his glove. — Which chair has the foreigner ] — He has his 
 own. — Who has my good candle ] — This man has it. — Who has 
 that looking-glass 1 — That foreigner has it. — What has your ser- 
 vant (3hr JtBcfctcnter) 1 — He has the tree of this garden. — Has he 
 that man's book? — He has not the book of that man, but that ot 
 this boy. — Which ox has this peasant 1 — He has that of your 
 neighbour. — Have I your letter or his ? — You have neither mine 
 nor his, but that of your friend. — Have you this horse's hay 1 — I 
 have not its hay, but its shoe. — Has your brother my note or his 
 own ] — He has that of the sailor. — Has this foreigner my glove 
 or his own ] — He has neither yours nor his own, but that of his 
 friend. — Are you hungry or thirsty 1 — I am neither hungry nor 
 thirsty, but sleepy. — Is he sleepy or hungry 1 — He is neither slee- 
 py nor hungry, but tired. — Am 1 right or wrong ] — You are neither 
 right nor wrong, but your good boy is wrong. — Have I the good 
 or the bad knife 1 — You have neither the good nor the bad, but the 
 ugly (one). — What have I ] — You have nothing good, but some- 
 thing bad. — Who has my ass 1 — The peasant has it. 
 
 TWELFTH LESSON.— gtDdlfte Action. 
 
 N. G. D. A. 
 
 That or which (relative jj Masc. toelcfyer — eg— em — ett. 
 pronoun). ( Neut. mttkjeg — eg — em — eg. 
 
 Obs. A. It will be perceived that the relative pro- 
 noun wefefyer is declined like the definite article, which 
 may be substituted for it ; but then the masculine and 
 neuter of the genitive case is beffen instead of beg. 
 58eld)er is never used in the genitive case. 
 
20 
 
 Have you the hat, which my #ctt>en @te ben #ut, wetd^cn metn 
 
 brother has 1 SBtubct fiat ? 
 
 1 have not the hat, which your 3d) fyafte ntdbt ten Jput, n>etcl>en 3(jt 
 
 brother has. 23rubct b&U 
 
 Have you the horse, which I IpaUn @tc fea$ Spfcrb, rocldjcS id) 
 
 have] J)cibe? 
 
 I have the horse, which you have. 3d) t)a6c bag $>fetb, tx>e(cf)C$ Sic 
 
 foafcen. 
 
 Masc. Neut. 
 
 f Nom. berjemge. ba^jemge. 
 TAfltf or the one (determi- ! Gen. begjemgen. be^'emgeit. 
 native pronoun). ] Dat. bemjem'gert. bemjentgen. 
 
 [Ace. benjemgem bagjemge. 
 
 Obs. B. 2) e r j e n i g e is always used with a rela- 
 tive pronoun, to determine the person or thing to which 
 that pronoun relates. It is compounded of the definite 
 article and jetttg, and declined like an adjectiye, pre- 
 ceded by this article. The article alone may also be 
 substituted in its stead, but must then undergo the 
 modification pointed out in the foregoing observation, 
 as will be seen hereafter. 
 
 I have that, or the one which f 3 * * abe ^ e **9*»> »«*« 6te 
 
 you nave ' C 3* fabe ben, roefeften ©ic baton. 
 
 r@te fya&en basjentge, rocldjeS idfr 
 You have that which I have. < fjabe. 
 
 C <Ste fyafcen $>a$, roe(d)e$ id) fjabe, 
 
 f Masculine. 
 
 I Ace. benjetugett, toefefyen. 
 That which or the one which. •< Neuter 
 
 Nom. ba^jetuge, n>elcf)e^* 
 Ace. ba^jentge, n>eW)e£. 
 
 Which carriage have you £Bctd)en SOBcigcn baUn <Ste ? 
 
 I have that which your friend 3d) !)a(>c ben (benjenigen), rcelcfien 
 has. 3fyr greunb fiat. 
 
 The carriage, ber £Bctgen ; 
 
 the house, bag £au$. 
 
 i ne same. j N&ut ha ^ c (ba ^ n amKcf)e). 
 
21 
 
 Obs. C. Serf el be, the same, is compounded o! 
 the definite article and fefl), and is declined like berje* 
 ttige* It is frequently used instead of the personal pro- 
 noun of the third person to avoid repetition and to 
 make the sentence more perspicuous. 
 
 Have you the same stick, which $abm (Ste benfeffcen (ben namtu 
 
 I have 1 d)cn) Stocf, ben id) \)aU ? 
 
 ! have the same. 3cf) fyafte benfetOen (ben ncimltcfyen). 
 
 Has tha^ man the same cloth, $at btefet 93?ann ta^fc(6c (ba^ nam* 
 
 which you have ? lid)c) SLutf), ml$)C$ (bas) ©ic 
 
 fjaben ? 
 
 He has not the same. (St f)ot ntd)t taSfel&C (bciS namUcfyc;. 
 
 Sas he (that is, has the same $ai fccrfel&e metnen £cmbfd)uf) ? 
 
 man) my glove 1 
 
 Te has it not. (5t fjat tljn (benfd&en) nid)i. 
 
 EXERCISE 13. 
 
 Have you the garden, which 1 have 1 — I have not the one that 
 you have. — Which looking-glass have you 1 — I have the one 
 which your brother has. — Has he the book that your friend has 1 — 
 He has not the one which my friend has. — Which candle has he ] 
 ■ — He has that of his neighbour. — He has the one that I have. — 
 Has he this tree or that one] — He has neither this nor that, but 
 the one which I have. — Which ass has the man 1 — He has the 
 one that his boy has. — Has the stranger your chair or mine 1 — He 
 has neither yours nor mine ; but he has his friend's good chair. — 
 Have you the glove which I have, or the one that my tailor has ]- 
 1 have neither the one which you have, nor the one which youi 
 tailor has, but my own. — Has your shoemaker my fine shoe, or 
 that of his boy 1 — He has neither yours nor that of his boy, but 
 that of the good stranger. — Which house has the baker] — He has 
 neither yours nor mine, but that of his good brother. — Which car- 
 riage have I ? — Have I mine or that of the peasant ] — You have 
 neither yours nor that of the peasant ; you have the one which ] 
 have. — Have you my fine carriage ] — I have it not ; but the 
 Frenchman has it. — What has the Frenchman ] — Hs has nothing. 
 — What has the shoemaker] — He has something fine. — What has 
 he fine ] — He has his fine shoe. — Is the shoemaker right ] — He is 
 not wrong ; but this neighbour, the baker, is right. — Is your horse 
 hungry ] — It ((5$) is not hungry, but thirsty. — Have you my ass's 
 hay or yours ] — I have that which my brother has. — Has your 
 friend the same horse that my brother has ? — He has not the same 
 horse, but the same coat. — Has he (£at betfelbe) my umbrella 1 — He 
 has it not. 
 
22 
 
 THIRTEENTH LESSON.— Almonte Uttion. 
 
 DECLENSION OF MASCULINE AND NEUTER SUBSTANTIVES 
 
 I. Singular. 
 
 Rules. — 1. Substantives of the masculine and neu- 
 ter gender take e£ or g in the genitive case singular ; 
 those ending in 3, % j, % f take e3 ; all others, particu- 
 larly those ending in ef, ett, er, cfyen and (em, take i. 
 
 2. Masculine substantives which end in e in 
 the nominative singular, take n in the other cases of 
 the singular and plural, 51 and do not soften the radical 
 vowel. 
 
 II. Plural. 
 
 Rules. — 1. All substantives, without exception, 
 take it in the dative case of the plural, if they have 
 not one in the nominative. 
 
 2. All masculine and neuter substantives ending in 
 et, en, er, as also diminutives in djen and (em, have the 
 same termination in the plural as in the singular. 
 
 3. In all cases of the plural masculine substan- 
 tives take e, and neuter substantives er ; and soften thfr 
 radical vowels a, o, U, into a, 6, it* 
 
 4. In words of the neuter gender ending in el, ett, 
 et, the radical vowel is not softened in the plural, ex- 
 cept in : ba£ Softer, the convent ; plur. bte $I6jler* b 
 
 The hats, tie £ute ; 
 
 the buttons, bte itnopfe ; 
 
 the tables, tie Stfcfye ; 
 
 the houses, t>ie £aufer ; c 
 
 the ribbons, tie 23antcr. 
 
 8 Except ber <£(ife, the cheese ; gen. be$ $cife§ ; plur. bte Jta)e. 
 
 *> The declension of those substantives which deviate from thwe rulei 
 will be separately noted *. 
 
 c It must be observed that in the diphthong <W, a is softened. In the diph* 
 thong eit, U is not softened, as : bev $mmb, the friend ; plur. bte Sretlttbe, th« 
 friends 
 
23 
 
 The threads 
 the tailors, 
 the notes, 
 
 The hoys, 
 
 the Frenchmen, 
 
 men or the men 
 
 tie gfafctt! ; 
 
 tie ©cfynetfcet ; 
 
 fcie 3cttcl, tie Stffettc. 
 
 tie jtnafcen ; 
 tie gtangofen ; 
 tie S^enfdjen. 
 
 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE 
 ARTICLE IN THE PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. the good. 
 
 Gen. of the good. 
 
 Dat. to the good. 
 
 Ace. the good. 
 
 The good boys. 
 The ugly dogs. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 Nom. bte QUtext. 
 
 Gen. bergutem 
 
 Dat. bengutett, 
 
 Ace. bte guten, 
 
 3Die guten jtnaktn 
 £)ie f)aplid)cn £unt>e. d 
 
 Obs. Adjectives preceded in the plural by a p&*§es> 
 sive pronoun, have the same declension as witfe #** 
 definite article. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 f Nom. nteute gutett* 
 My good (plural). t £fi 
 
 Have you my good books'? 
 I have your good books. 
 
 \Dat. memen guten* 
 Ace. meinegutetu 
 
 &aUn (Ste meine guten SSucfyei: ? 
 3d) t)aiK Sfyte guten SBucfyet. 
 
 A TABLE 
 
 OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 
 Subst. Masculine 
 
 Subst. Feminine. 
 
 Subst. Neutef. 
 
 
 'N. 
 
 
 NO 
 
 N. 
 
 
 6 
 
 < 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 i or e£* 
 or e* 
 
 G.I 
 
 > invariable. 
 
 G. 
 D 
 
 § or c$ 
 or e* 
 
 71 
 
 LA- 
 
 
 A.'j 
 
 A. 
 
 
 <* The word £uutb, dog, does not soften the yowel u in the plural 
 

 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 
 Sat 
 
 'N. 
 
 >st. Masculine. 
 
 Subst. Feminine. 
 
 N '1 
 
 Subst. Neuter. 
 
 N. | cr. 
 
 4 
 
 < 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 »en or m 
 
 G.I 
 
 _ > en or n. 
 
 i 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 er* 
 ent. 
 
 > 
 
 e* 
 
 A.J 
 
 A. 
 
 er* 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 EXERCISE. 14. 
 
 
 
 Have you the tables'? — Yes, Sir, I have the tables. — Have you 
 my tables 1 — No, Sir, I have not your tables. — Have I your but- 
 tons 1 — You have my buttons. — Have I your fine houses 1 — You 
 have my fine houses. — Has the tailor the buttons 1 — He has not 
 the buttons, but the threads. — Has your tailor my good buttons 1 — 
 My tailor has your good gold buttons. — What has the boy ] — He 
 has the gold threads. — Has he my gold or my silver threads 1 — 
 He has neither your gold nor your silver threads. — Has the 
 Frenchman the fine houses or the good notes 1 — He has neither the 
 fine houses nor the good notes. — What has he 1 — He has his good 
 friends. — Has this man my fine umbrellas 1 — He has not your fine 
 umbrellas, but your good coats. — Has any one my good letters 1 — 
 No one has your good letters. — Has the tailor's son (tet @o!)tt) my 
 good knives or my good thimbles 1 — He has neither your good 
 knives nor your good thimbles, but the ugly coats of the stranger's 
 big (grcp) boys. — Have I your friend's good mbbons? — You have 
 not my friend's good ribbons, but my neighbour's fine carriage.— 
 Has your friend the shoemaker's pretty sticks, or my good tailor's 
 pretty dogs? — My friend has my good shoemaker's fine books; 
 but he has neither the shoemaker's pretty sticks nor your good 
 tailor's pretty dogs. — Is your neighbour right or wrong 1 — He is 
 neither right nor wrong. — Is he thirsty or hungry 1 — He is neithei 
 ihirsty nor hungry. 
 
 FOURTEENTH LESSON.— t>Ut{el)ttte Cation 
 
 The Englishman, 
 the German, 
 the Turk, % 
 the smallbooks, 
 the large horses, 
 
 Have the English the fine hats 
 of the French 1 
 
 t>et (Sncjtanbet; ; 
 fccr ©eutfcfye ; 
 fccr £utt"e ; 
 tie fletnen 93iid)er ; 
 tie gropen $)fette. 
 
 £aben tte engWnbet tie fcf)(5tmt §fr 
 te tet gtan$ofen? 
 
For allgeiders. 
 
 f Nom. btejetttgen or bit. 
 
 Those J Gen ' ber i eni 9 en — berer * 
 
 j Dat. benjemgett — benem 
 
 (^Acc. btejentgen — bie. 
 
 Obs. A. When the definite article is substituted 
 for berjemge, its genitive plural is berer, and its dative 
 plur. bettetu (See also Lesson XII. Obs. B.) 
 
 Have you the books which the £akn (Sie tie 23ucfyer, wctc^c tie 
 men have ? banner fya&en ? 
 
 » have not those which the men 3d) fyaOe mcf)t tiqcnigen (tic), wU 
 have ; but I have those which dje tic fanner fyafcen ; abet id) 
 you have. fyabt tic (ttqemgen), roctcfye (Sic 
 
 fyafcen. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 l/*e same. gee Lesgon ^ ^ 0) 
 
 Have you the same books, which £akn (Sic ttefelben SBucfyet, tie tdj 
 
 I have ] f)abe 1 
 
 I have the same. 3$ fabe ticfet&en. 
 
 The Italian, the Italians, tet Stalicncr, tie Stattenet ; 
 
 the Spaniard, the Spaniards, tcr ^pemtet, tic (SpanietJ* 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 f Nom. welcfye or bit. 
 Which (nlur } J Gen ' **** — bemt * 
 
 LAcc. todefye — bte. 
 
 Obs. B. When the definite article stands for torfdjer, 
 its genitive case plural is not berer, but btttn. (See 
 Lesson XII. Obs. A.) The genitives befiett, beren, are 
 preferable to the genitives toefefye^, tttetcfyer, being more 
 easily distinguished from the nominative. 
 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 
 N. G. D. A. 
 
 These. 
 
 biefe, btefer, btefett, btefe* 
 
 Those. 
 
 jette, jener, itntn, ftnt. 
 
 » 3)tefet6en is declined like bieieufgett. 
 
 b Nouns derived from foreign languages do not soften the radical vowel in 
 the plural. 
 2 
 
26 
 
 Obs. C. The definite article may be used instead 
 of these pronouns. Before a noun it follows tLe regu- 
 lar declension ; but when alone, it undergoes the same 
 changes as when substituted for berjem'ge (See Obs. A. 
 above). The pronoun ber, ba$, is distinguished from 
 the article ber, i>a$, by a stress in the pronunciation. 
 As an article, it throws the principal accent on the 
 word which immediately follows. 
 
 Which books have you ] 2Md)C SSiicbo: fjafccn ©ie? 
 
 Have you these books or those 1 £aben <gte btcfc ober jcne 93 ticket 1 
 I have neither these nor those. 1 
 
 I have neither the one nor the > 3d) r)a&c u?ebcr btcfc nod) jcnc. 
 
 other. c y 
 
 I have neither those of the Span- 3d) rjctfcc rocbcr tic bet @pamer nod) 
 
 iards nor those of the Turks. tie bet Suticn. 
 
 EXERCISES. 15. 
 
 Have you these horses or those 1 — I have not these, but those. — 
 Have you the coats of the French or those of the English? — I have 
 not those of the French, but those of the English. — Have you the 
 pretty sheep (ta£ @d).af takes c, and is not softened in the plural) 
 of the Turks or those of the Spaniards'? — I have neither those ol 
 teh Turks nor those of the Spaniards, but those of my brother. — 
 Has your brother the fine asses of the Spaniards or those of the 
 Italians 1 — He has neither those of the Spaniards nor those of the 
 Italians, but he has the fine asses of the French. — Which oxen has 
 your brother ] — He has those of the Germans. — Has your friend my 
 large letters or those of the Germans 1 — He has neither the one nor 
 the other (See Note c , Lesson XIV.). — Which letters has he ? — 
 He has the small letters which you have. — Have I these houses or 
 those 1 — You have neither these nor those. — Which houses have 
 1 1 — Y vi have those of the English. — Has any one the tall tailor's 
 gold buttons 1 — Nobody has the tailor's gold buttons, but somebody 
 has those of your friend. 
 
 16. 
 
 Have I the notes of the foreigners or those of my boy 1 — You 
 have neither those of the foreigners nor those of your boy, but those 
 of the great Turks. — Has the Turk my fine horse ] — He has it 
 not.— Which horse has he] — He has his own. — Has your neigh- 
 bour my chicken or my sheep 1 — My neighbour has neither your 
 chicken nor your sheep.-'- What has he 1 — He has nothing good. — 
 Have you nothing fine ] — I have nothing fine. — Are you tired ]— -I 
 
 c The English phrases the former and the latter, the one and the other, are 
 generally expressed in German by btefer, plur. biefe, and jener, plur. jeite, bui 
 in an inverted order, btefer referring to the latter and jener to the former 
 
27 
 
 am not tired. — Which rice has your friend 1 — He has that of his 
 merchant. — Which sugar has he ] — He has that which I have. — 
 Has he your merchant's good coffee or that of mine 1 — He has nei- 
 ther that of yours nor that of mine ; he has his own. — Which ships 
 (ba$ @?d)tff forms its plural in c) has the Frenchman ] — He has the 
 ships of the English. — Which houses has the Spaniard 1 — He has 
 the same which you have. — Has he my good knives ] — He has your 
 good knives. — Has he the thread stockings which I have ] — He has 
 not the same that you have, but those of his brother. 
 
 FIFTEENTH LESSON.— MnfytyWz tcttiotl. 
 
 The glass, 
 the comb, 
 
 Have you my small combs 1 
 I have them. 
 
 Them, 
 
 My (plural), 
 Your, - — 
 His, — 
 Their, — 
 
 Have you my fine glass 1 
 Has he my fine glasses 1 
 He has them. 
 The man has them. 
 He has them not. 
 The men have them. 
 Have the men them 1 
 
 Have you my chairs or his ! 
 
 I have neither yours nor his 
 
 Which chairs have you 1 
 I have mine. 
 
 Some sugar, 
 some bread, 
 some salt, 
 
 bet Jtanmn 
 
 £afrcn ©te mctne fteinen jiffmmel 
 3d) f)abe fte. 
 
 ft e (after the verb). 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 
 N. G. D. A. 
 meme-memer-memen-nteme 
 3{)re -Sfyrer -Sfyren -Sfjre. 
 feme -femer -feinen -feme* 
 tfyre -tfyrer -tfyrett -tfyre* 
 
 £akn <Ste man fcr>one^ ©tag 1 
 
 £at cr mctne fcfyonen ©lafct* 1 
 
 St f)at fie* 
 
 Dec ODIann rjat fte. 
 
 St r)at fte nt cf)t. 
 
 Die Scanner Ijafecn fte. 
 
 £afcen fte tie banner 1 
 
 $akn @ie mctne <Stuf)(e obet tit 
 fetntgen 1 (See Lesson VII.) 
 
 3d) r)abe rocbet He Sfyttgcn nod) btc 
 fetntgen. 
 
 9Be(d)e @tur;(e fcben ©te 1 
 
 3d) fjabe tie metntgen. 
 
 3ucfet"; 
 23reb ; 
 
 Rule. Some or a/iy before a noun is not expressed 
 in German. 
 
28 
 
 EXERCISE. 17. 
 
 Have you my good combs 1 — I ha\e them. — Have you tl g good 
 iDrses of the English] — 1 have them not. — Which brooms have 
 you ] — I have those of the foreigners. — Have you my coats or 
 those of my friends'? — I have neither yours nor those of youi 
 friends. — Have you mine or his ] — I have his — Has the Italian 
 the good cheeses which you have] — He has not those which I 
 have, but those which you have. — Has your boy my good pencils ] 
 He has them. — Has he the carpenter's nails 1 — He has them not. 
 — What has he 1 — He has his iron nails. — Has anybody the thim- 
 bles of the tailors f — Nobody has them. — Who has the ships of 
 the Spaniards'? — The English have them. — Have the English 
 these ships or those 1 — The English have their ships. — Have youi 
 toothers my knives or theirs 1 — My brothers have neither youi 
 knives nor theirs. — Have I your chickens or those of your cooks 1 
 — You have neither mine nor those of my cooks. — Which chick- 
 ens have I? — You have those of the good peasant. — Who has 
 my oxen ! — Your servants have them. — Have the Germans them ] 
 — The Germans have them not, but the Turks have them. — Who 
 has my wooden table ] — Your boys have it. — Who has my good 
 bread ] — Your friends have it. 
 
 SIXTEENTH LESSON.— Qctfy^tttC fLtttum. 
 
 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES WITHOUT AN ARTICLE. 
 
 Rule. An adjective, not preceded by an article, 
 takes the same termination as the definite article, ex- 
 cept in the genitive singular, masculine and neuter, 
 which then ends in en instead of e£. 
 
 Good wine or some good 
 
 Masculine. Neuter. 
 
 N. guter SBSem. gute£ ©afj. 
 G. guten SBemeS* guten ©at* 
 
 wine. &c. j D gutem SR3eme. gutem ©afje, 
 
 l^A. guten 2Bem* guteg ©alj* 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 
 Good or some good, &c. ( N. G. D. A. 
 (plural.) ( gute, guter, guten, gute* 
 
 Some good cheese, guter jtafc ; 
 
 some good bread, guteS SBrot). 
 
29 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Some of it anv of it of it \ M ' ml $ m ' MF«»/ Wfettat. 
 ftorce oj it, any oj it, oj it. j ^ ^^ ^^ beSfel6e»t. 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 
 &Hfte of £Ae?ra, any of them, C . r , «; w r •• 
 
 of them. \ ml *F' bmXt ' ber f e{f)en - 
 
 Obs. The pronoun some or any, when taken in a 
 partitive sense, is expressed by tt>etcfy* Of him, of it, of 
 them, &c. when governed by a substantive, an adjec- 
 tive, or a verb requiring in German the genitive, are 
 expressed by the genitive of the personal pronouns, if 
 relating to a person, and if to a thing, by the genitives 
 befien, be^fetben, beren, berfelbett, which may sometimes 
 be omitted. 
 
 Have you any wine ] £>qkn ©ie SBetn ? 
 
 I have some. 3d) babe rockbett. 
 
 Have you any water ? &aUn ©ic SKoffcr ? 
 
 I have some. 3d) IjaOc roetd)e$. 
 
 Have you any good wine ? &abcn <Sic gutcn £Betn ? 
 
 I have some. 3d) babe tx)c(d)cn. 
 
 Have I any good cloth ? £aOe tcb gute* &ud) ? 
 
 You have some. @tc ()a6cn weld) eg. 
 
 Have you any shoes 1 $abcn @ie ©cbufye ? 
 
 I have some. 3d) ^aOc roctcbc 
 
 Have you good or bad horses 1 Ipabcn @ic cuite ct>et fd)(ed)tc g?fert>e ? 
 
 I have some good ones. 3cb ^abc gute. 
 
 Have you good or bad wine 1 $aU\\ €Sc guten obct fc^tcc^tcn 
 
 SSctn ? 
 
 I have some good. 3cb babe $uten. 
 
 Have you good or bad water 1 6aben @te guteS obct f$fc$tef £8afs 
 
 " fcr? 
 
 I ha^e some good. 3d) babe guteS. 
 
 exercise. 18. 
 
 Have you any sugar 1 — I have some. — Have you any good cof- 
 fee 1 — I have some. — Have you any salt I — I have some. — Have I 
 any good salt] — You have some. — Have I any shoes 1 — Y r ou have 
 some. — Have I any pretty dogs? — You have some. — Has the man 
 any good honey 1 — He has some. — What has the man ] — He hag 
 some good bread. — What has the shoemaker 1 — He has some 
 pretty shoes. — Has the sailor any biscuits (3rotcbctcf does not soften 
 in the plural) l — He has some. — Has your friend any good pencils 1 
 — He has some. — Have you good or bad coffee 1 — I have some 
 good. — Have you good or bad wood 1 — I have some good. — Have 
 
l good or bad oxen ? — You have some bad (ones). — lias yoM 
 brother good or bad cheese 1 — He has neither good nor bad. — What 
 has he good 1 — He has some good friends. — Who has some cloth ? 
 —My neighbour has some. — Who has some money 1 — The French 
 have some. — Who has some gold 1 — The English have some. — 
 Who has some good horses'? — The Germans have some — Whc 
 has some good hay 1 — This ass has some. — Who "has some good 
 bread? — That Spaniard has some. — Who has some good books ?— 
 These Frenchmen have some. — Who has some good ships'? — 
 Those Englishmen have some ] — Has anybody wine 1 — Nobody 
 has any. — Has the Italian fine or ugly horses 1 — He has some ugly 
 (ones). — Have you wooden or stone tables'? — I have neither wood- 
 en nor stone (ones). — Has your boy the fine books of mine ] — He 
 has not those of your boy, but his own. — Has he any good thread 
 stockings l — He has some. — What has the Turk 1 — He has nothing 
 
 SEVENTEENTH LESSON.— Qicbm^ntt Cettkm. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 C N. G. D. A. 
 No, none, not a, or not < M. Jem, fetne^, fement, fettten. 
 any. ( N. fettt, fetne£, fetnem, fern. 
 
 Obs. A. The word fettt has this declension when, 
 like no in English, it is followed by a substantive ; 
 but when the substantive is understood as with none 
 in English, it forms its nominative masculine in er, and 
 its nominative and accusative neuter in e3 or £♦ 
 
 Have you any wine 1 jptibtn @te SBctn ? 
 
 I have none. Sri) fyabc ftincn. 
 
 Have you no bread 1 &abm (Sic fetn 23tcb ? 
 
 I have not any. 3cl) fjafoe fctne^ (fetnS). 
 
 Obs. B. It will be observed that any is expressed 
 oy feilt, when accompanied by a negation. 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 
 No, none, or not any (plu- { N. G. D. A, 
 ral). ) fetne, fewer, feutett, feme 
 
 Have you no shoes 1 £akn ©te feme ©cfyufje ? 
 
 I have none. 3cJ) Ijafce feme. 
 
 Have you any 1 £abcn ©tc welcfye ? 
 
 L have not any. 3d) §aU fetne. 
 
 Has the man any ] $at bet 9}?onn roefefye ? 
 
31 
 
 Ho has none. (St f)at fettle 
 
 Has he any good books .pat cv gutc S3ticf)Ct ? 
 
 He has some. (It Jjat n?c(d)C« 
 
 The American, bet 2fmcti!anet ; 
 
 the Irishman, bet S^td'nbcr ; 
 
 the Scotchman. bet (Scfyottlanb'et ((Sd)0tte) ; 
 
 the Dutchman, bet £ollanbet ; 
 
 the Russian, tcx SHufic. 
 
 Rule, Compound words in memtt form their plura 
 by changing this termination into kute. Ex. 
 
 The merchants, bie Jtauftc^ite ; 
 
 the carpenters, bie Stmmetleute. 
 
 exercise. 19. 
 
 Has the American good money ! — He has some. — Have .he 
 Dutch good cheese] — Yes, Sir, the Dutch have some. — Has the 
 Russian no cheese X — He has none. — Have you good stockings ?-— 
 I have some. — Have you good or bad honey I — I have some good. 
 — Have you some good coffee ? — I have none. — Have you some bad 
 coffee 1 — I have some. — Has the Irishman good wine 1 — He has 
 none. — Has he good water ] — He has some. — Has the Scotchman 
 some good salt! — He has none. — What has the Dutchman 1 — He 
 has good ships. — Have I some bread ] — You have none. — Have I 
 some good friends ] — You have none. — Who has good friends 1 — 
 The Frenchman has some. — Has your servant (3>f)t S3cbtenter) any 
 coats or brooms ] — He has some good brooms, but no coats.— Has 
 any one hay 1 — Some one has some. — Who has some ] — My ser- 
 vant has some. — Has this man any bread ] — He has none. — Who 
 has good shoes'? — My good shoemaker has some. — Have you the 
 good hats of the Russians, or those of the Dutch ? — I have neither 
 those of the Russians nor those of the Dutch, I have those of the 
 Irish. — Which sacks has your friend ] — He has the good sacks of 
 the merchants. — Has your boy the good hammers of the carpen- 
 ters ] — No, Sir, he has them not.: — Has this little boy some sugar 1 
 — He has none. — Has the brother of your friend good combs ] — 
 The brother of my friend has none, but I have some.—- Who hag 
 good wooden chairs 1 — Nobody has any. 
 
 EIGHTEENTH LESSON.— axljtjeJjnte Section. 
 
 The hatter, bet £utmad)et ; 
 
 the joiner, bet StfdWet (©cfttciner). 
 
32 
 
 A or an (one). 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Nom. em. 
 
 eim 
 
 Gen. eute& 
 
 eineS. 
 
 Dat. etnem. 
 
 emem 
 
 Ace. emen. 
 
 em* 
 
 Ohs. A. When a substantive is understood, em like 
 fern, takes e r in the nominative masculine, and e £ or 3 
 in the nominative and accusative neuter. (See pre- 
 ceding Lesson.) 
 
 Have you a looking-glass 1 
 
 I have one. 
 
 Have you a book ] 
 
 I have one. 
 
 I have none. 
 
 $abm <Ste etnen (Spiegel ? 
 3d) fabe etnen. 
 £a6en @ie etn 23ud) ? 
 3d) fjabe etn$ (etne$). 
 3d) fyabe Feins (fetneS). 
 
 Obs. B. Neither the indefinite 
 ever accompanied by toeld). 
 
 article nor fetn is 
 
 And. 
 
 Unb. 
 
 DECLENSION OP AN ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE INDEFINITE 
 ARTICLE OR A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN IN THE SINGULAR. 
 
 (See Obs. in Lessons III. and XIII.) 
 
 A good. 
 
 Have yon a good round hat . 
 
 I have one. 
 
 Has he a beautiful house 1 
 
 He has one. 
 
 He has none. 
 
 I have two of them. 
 
 He has three. 
 You have four. 
 Have you five good horses 1 
 I have six. 
 
 I have six good and seven bad 
 ones. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 ' N. em guter. 
 
 i G. emeS guteit. 
 
 D. emem guten. 
 
 [ A. emen guten. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 em gute£. 
 eme$ guten. 
 emem guten. 
 em guteS. 
 
 j&afccn @te etnen guten runben £ut? 
 
 3d) fjabe etnen. 
 
 £at cr etn fd)cne£ #au$ ? 
 
 @t fjat etn£ (etnes). 
 
 ($r Fjat fctn^ (fetneS). 
 
 3d) f)nbe beren sroet. (See 055. 
 
 Lesson XVI.) 
 (5t t)at beren tret. 
 ©ie fjoben beren trier. 
 £akn @te ftinf $ute $5fetbe ? 
 3d) f)abc beren fcd)$. 
 3d) f)ct&e fed)S gute unb ftefcea 
 
 fd)led)te. 
 
33 
 
 RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES RELATIVE TO THE DECLENSION 
 OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 We have shown in the foregoing lessons that in 
 German as in English, the adjective always precedes 
 the substantive. When two or more adjectives are 
 before the same noun, they all follow the same declen- 
 sion. Adjectives are not declined when they are not 
 accompanied by a substantive expressed or understood, 
 i. e., when they form the predicate of a proposition. 
 Ex. Sljr S)\xt ifl f d) on, your hat is beautiful ; mem SSattt) 
 ift fd)6n, my ribbon is beautiful; tyxe §te jmb fcfyott, 
 your hats are beautiful. 
 
 When followed by a substantive expressed or under- 
 stood, the adjective is declined, and assumes three dif- 
 ferent forms, viz : 
 
 1st, Before a substantive without an article pre- 
 ceding, it takes the same termination as the definite 
 article, except in the genitive case singular masculine 
 and neuter, in which it adds e it instead of e $♦ 
 
 2d, When it follows the definite article, or a word 
 of the same termination, it adds ett in all cases, except 
 in the nominative singular of all genders, and the ac- 
 cusative singular feminine and neuter, in which it 
 adds e. 
 
 3d, When preceded by the indefinite article, or a 
 possessive or personal pronoun, it adds e r in the nomi- 
 native masculine, e in the nominative and accusative 
 feminine, e $ in the nominative and accusative neuter 
 and e U in the other cases. 
 
 All participles partake of the nature of adjectives, 
 and are subject to the same laws. 
 2* 
 
34 
 
 < 
 b 
 
 s 
 
 /5 
 
 
 
 ATi 
 
 lBL 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 OP THE DECLENSION OF GERMAN ADJECTIVES, 
 
 
 I. The adjective 
 
 without an article be foie 
 
 a substantive 
 
 1 II. The adjective 
 preceded by the defi- 
 
 1 nite article. 
 
 1 
 
 III. The adjective 
 
 preceded by the indefl 
 
 nite article. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 'Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 JVeut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut 
 
 Nom. er 
 
 e 
 
 eg 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 er 
 
 e 
 
 e$ 
 
 Gen. en 
 
 er 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 Dat. em 
 
 er 
 
 em 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 Ace. en 
 
 e 1 e£ 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 eg 
 
 "Nom. e 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. er 
 
 For all 
 
 en 
 
 For all 
 
 
 
 
 Dat. en 
 
 genders. 
 
 en 
 
 genders. 
 
 
 
 
 Ace. e 
 
 > 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 
 
 Obs. A. The adjective is declined in the same 
 manner when taken substantively. 
 
 B. Adjectives preceded by the words : afte, all ; 
 euuge, etlicfye, some, sundry ; gettrifie, certain ; feme, none ; 
 tncmcfye, several ; ntefyrere, many, several ; fbkfye, such ; 
 tterfdfytebene, various ; Dxete, many ; toeldfje, which ; tt>emge, 
 few, lose the letter n in the nominative and accusa- 
 tive plural ; but they keep that termination when pre- 
 ceded by a possessive or personal pronoun in the 
 plural. a 
 
 C. Adjectives ending in el, en, er, for the sake oi 
 euphony often reject the letter e which precedes those 
 three consonants. Ex. instead of ebefer, golbener, fynxe* 
 rer, we say : ebter, goftmer, tfyenrer* 
 
 EXERCISE. 20. 
 
 Have you a good servant 1 — I have one. — Has your hatmaker a 
 beautiful house 1 — He has two of them. — Have I a pretty gold rib 
 bon !-*- You have one. — What has the joiner? — He has beautiful 
 
 a Most modern authors frequently reject this distinction, and form all the 
 cases of the plural in en. 
 
35 
 
 tab.es. — Has he a beautiful round (tunb) table 1 — He has one.—* 
 Has the baker a large looking-glass 1 — He has one. — Has the 
 Scotchman the friends that I have 1 — He has not the same that you 
 nave, but he has good friends. — Has he your good books 1 — He has 
 them. — Have I their good hammers 1 — You have them not, but you 
 have your good iron nails. — Has that hatter my good hat 1 — He has 
 not yours, but his own. — Have I my good shoes 1 — You have not 
 yours ; you have his. — Who has mine 1 — Somebody has them. — 
 Has any body two letters 1 — The brother of my neighbour has 
 three. — Has your cook two sheep (plur. <Sd)afe) 1 — He has four. — 
 Has Tie six good chickens ] — He has three good and seven bad. — 
 Has the merchant good wine ]-— He has some. — Has the tailor good 
 coats 1 — He has none. — Has the baker good bread ? — He has some. 
 — What has the carpenter ] — He has good nails. — What has your 
 merchant ? — He has good pencils, good coffee, good honey, and 
 good biscuits (plur. Sitnefracfe). — Who has good iron 1 — My good 
 friend has some. — Am I right or wrong 1 — You are wrong. — Is any 
 body sleepy ] — The shoemaker is sleepy and thirsty.— Is he tired ? 
 — He is not tired. — Has your servant the glasses of our (unfetet, 
 see the next Lesson) friends ] — He has not those of your friends, 
 but those of his great merchants. — Has he my wooden chair 1 — He 
 has not yours, but that of his boy. — Are you thirsty ] — I am not 
 thirsty, but very hungry (gtopen hunger). 
 
 NINETEENTH LESSON.— Nemt^nte lection, 
 
 flow much 1 How many ? ££tetuen a 
 
 How many hats 1 SStcwet jg>Ute ? 
 
 How many knives 1 £Btetricl SOZcffet ? 
 
 How much bread ? £Btmel 33tot> ? 
 
 Only, but. Sftut* 
 
 How many tables have you 1 £Btet>tet Sifcrje r)a6en @te ? 
 
 I have only two. 3d) Ija&e fceten nut gtt?ct. (See 
 
 Obs. Lesson XVI.) 
 
 How many knives have you £Bteme( 9J?effet fyabcn (Ste ? 
 
 I have but one good one. 3d) fjcifce nur em outcS. 
 
 Eight, acf)t ; 
 
 nine, neun ; 
 
 ten, gef)tt* 
 
 a Cardinal numbers are used to answer the question tones iff, how 
 many? 
 
36 
 
 ( 
 
 W^tf ^(designating the na- 
 ture or kind of a thing) ? 
 
 What table have you ? 
 I have a wooden table. b 
 What tables has he ] 
 He has stone tables. 
 What book has your friend ? 
 He has a pretty book. 
 What paper have you T 
 I have some fine paper. 
 What sugar has he 1 
 He has some good sugar. 
 
 Our. 
 
 Mast. Netrt. 
 
 N. tt>a£ fur em. tva$ fitr eta 
 A m$ fur emetu tva# fur em 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 
 ©ad fiir. 
 
 2£as fift cincrt Sifd) fyafcen ©te ? 
 
 3d) fja&c ctn en f)o($erncn &ifd). 
 
 2£as fur Sifcbe fat cr ? 
 
 (St r)at ftonctne £tfcr>v. 
 
 SBaS fiir cm 23ud) f)ct 3f)t gtcunu 1 
 
 (St f)at ctn fyubfcljeg 93ucl). 
 
 SBaS fur e papier fjaben @te ? 
 
 3d) yofce fd)one6 papier. 
 
 2£a$ fut 3ucfet feat ct 1 
 
 (St f)at guten Sucfet 
 
 Neut. 
 
 uufer. 
 unfere£. 
 unferem. 
 uufer. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Now. uufer. 
 
 Gen. Uttfered. 
 
 Dat. unferem. 
 
 Sec. mtferem 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 
 t N. G. D. A. 
 
 Oar (plural). < unfere, unferer, mtferen, m* 
 ( fere* 
 
 Ours (singular and plural). £)ct (t)a$) unfettge ; tic unfettcjen. 
 
 O&s. When a consonant, f, m, It or r, stands between 
 two e's, one of them is omitted to avoid too soft a pronun- 
 ciation (see Lesson XXL, Obs. C), except when this 
 letter is necessary to the termination of the word or 
 the indication of the case. Thus we frequently say, 
 mtferd, unferm, unfre, Grured/ 1 <gurem, Sure, &c, instead of 
 uufere3, unferem, unfere, (Suered, (guerem, @uere, &c. 
 
 EXERCISES 
 
 21. 
 
 How many friends have you ] — I have two good friends. — Have 
 you eight g<*A trunks 1 — I have nine. — Has your friend ten good 
 
 b The pupils will take care not to answer here with the definite article. 
 
 c ( The indefinite article is never placed before collective words, such as : 
 $a£tet, paper ; SBetrt, wine ; 3 u fe/ sugar, &c. 
 
 d (Suer, your, is in fact the second person of the possessive pronoun. 3|jt ia 
 the third person, used generally out of politeness, and for tliat reason written 
 with a capital letter. (See Lessons II. and XV.) 
 
37 
 
 brooms 1 — He has only thiee. — Has he two good ships ] — He has 
 only one. — How many hammers has the carpenter 1 — He has only 
 four. — How many shoes has the shoemaker 1 — He has ten. — Has 
 the young" man ten good books ] — He h£s only five. — Has the 
 painter seven good umbrellas ! — He has not seven, but one. — How 
 many corks (sptopfcn does not soften in the plur.) have 1 1 — You 
 have only three. — Has your neighbour our good bread ! — He ha? 
 not ours, but that of his brother. — Has our horse any hay 1 — It ((5$) 
 has some. — Has the friend of our tailor good buttons 1 — He has 
 some. — Has he gold buttons ] — He has no gold (buttons), but sil- 
 ver (ones). — How many oxen has our brother ] — He has uo oxen, 
 —How many coats has the young man of our neighbours (plur c 
 9?ad)batn) 1 — The young man of our neighbours has only one good 
 coat, but that of your friends has three of them. — Has he our good 
 rams 1 — He has them. — Have I his ] — You have not his, but ours, 
 — How many good rams have 1 1 — You have nine 
 
 22. 
 
 Who has our silver candlesticks 1 — Our merchant's boy nas 
 them. — Has he our large birds ] — He has not ours, but those of the 
 great Irishman.— Has the Italian great eyes (t>a$ 2(uge takes n in 
 the plur. and is not softened) ]- — He has great eyes and great feet. 
 — Who has great thread stockings ] — The Spaniard has some. — 
 Has he any cheese 1 — He has none. — Has he corn ] — He has some. 
 —What kind of corn has he ] — He has good corn. — What kind ol 
 rice has our cook 1 — -He has good rice. — W T hat kind of pencils has 
 our merchant ] — He has good pencils. — Has our baker good bread 1 
 — He has good bread and good wine. 
 
 23. 
 
 Who is thirsty 1 — Nobody is thirsty ; but the friend of our 
 neighboui is sleepy. — Who has our iron knives 1 — The Scotch- 
 man has ihem. — Has he them 1 — He has them. — What kind of 
 friends have you 1 — I have good friends. — Is the friend of our 
 Englishmen right ] — He is neither right nor wrong. — Has he good 
 little birds, and good little sheep (plur. Scbcife) 1 — He has neither 
 birds nor sheep. — What has the Italian 1 — He has nothing. — Has 
 our tailor's boy anything beautiful ] — He has nothing beautiful, but 
 something ugly. — What has he ugly ] — He has an ugly dog. — 
 Has he an ugly horse 1 — He has no horse. — What has our young 
 friend ] — He has nothing. — Has he a good book 1 — He has one.— 
 Has he good salt ? — He has none. 
 
 TWENTIETH LESSON.— groan^ste Uttion. 
 
 Much } many, a good deal of. 25 t c ( . 
 
 Much wine. 9Stcl £Bem 
 
 Much money. $tc( ($klt>. 
 
38 
 
 Obs* A. When Diet is preceded by an article, pro- 
 noun, or preposition, or when it stands alone and is 
 used substantively, it is declined like an adjective ; 
 otherwise it is indeclinable. 
 
 Have you much good wine 1 ,jbafccn <Sic Wt guten 2Betn ? 
 
 I have a good deal. 3d) fyafce beffen mc(. (See Obs 
 
 Lesson XVI. 
 Have you much money 1 Jpabm @ie mel ©elb ? 
 
 I have a good deal. 3d) tyabe beffen Dtct. 
 
 Too mwc^. 3 u Diet. 
 
 You have too much wine. @te fyaOen $u met 2Betn. 
 
 We. SGS i r. 
 
 We have. ££tt bafcen. 
 
 We have not. £Bit l)a6cn nid)t. 
 
 We have little or not much money. SBtt fyafcen nicf)t met ®cft>. 
 
 Enough. 
 
 ® e n u g. 
 
 Enough money. 
 Knives enough. 
 
 ©ctb genug. 
 9#ef[et genug« 
 
 O&s. I>. ©ettug is never put before the substantive. 
 
 Little. 2Bcntg. 
 
 Obs. C. Our remark on Diet applies equally to tt>ettig* 
 But these two words are declined, when they relate to 
 several distinct things, or anything that may be coun- 
 ted, as will be seen hereafter. 
 
 But little, only a little (not much). $lux it) e n t g (nid)t met). 
 
 Have you enough wine 1 £afcen (Sic ££ctn genug ? 
 
 I have only a little, but enough. 3d) foctbe beffen nut roentg, abet ge^ 
 
 nug. (See Obs. Lesson XVI.) 
 
 A r.ttle. ©in rc> e n t g. 
 
 A. little wine. ©in roentg £Betn. 
 
 \ little salt. (Sin nxnig ©at*. 
 
 Courage. bet 9}}ut{). 
 
 Vou have but little courage. (Ste ()a&en ntd)t mel Sftutf). 
 We have few friends. £Btt fyafcen rocmg §teunbe. 
 
 Of vhtm (relative to persons). 3 fy t e t (gen. of the personal pro- 
 noun fte, they; see 01 s. Les« 
 son XVI.) 
 
39 
 
 Have you many friei. ;.s ? JpaUti Bk t)tc( grcunbe ? 
 
 We have but few. 2Bir Ijaben ifyret nut roeutge (Sea 
 
 Obs. C. above). 
 You have but little money. (Sic f)a&en md)t met ©e(b. 
 
 Has the foreigner much mone) ? £at 6cr gtembe »ie( (Uclb ? 
 He has but little. dr fjat befjen nur roenig. 
 
 exercises. 24. 
 
 Have you much coffee 1 — I have only a little. — Has your friend 
 much water ]— He has a great deal. — Has the foreigner much 
 corn ] — He has not much. — What has the American ] — He has 
 much sugar. — What has the Russian ] — He has much salt. — Have 
 we much rice] — We have but little. — What have we] — We have 
 much wine, much water and many friends. — Have we much gold ] 
 — We have only a little, but enough. — Have you many boys ]-— 
 W T e have only a few. — Has our neighbour much hay ] — He has 
 enough. — Has the Dutchman much cheese] — He has a great deal. 
 — Has this man courage ] — He has none. — Has that foreigner 
 money ] — He has not a great deal, but enough. — Has the painter's 
 boy candles (plur. Sid)tc) ] — He has some. 
 
 25. 
 
 Have we good letters] — We have some. — We have none. — 
 Has the joiner good bread] — He has some. — He has none. — Has 
 he good honey ] — He has none. — Has the Englishman a good 
 horse ] — He has one. — What have we ] — We have good horses. — 
 Who has a beautiful house ] — The German has one. — Has the Ita- 
 lian many pretty looking-glasses ] — He has a great many ; but he 
 has only a little corn. — Has my good neighbour the same horse 
 which you have ] — He has not the same horse, but the same car- 
 riage. — Has the Turk the same ships that we have ] — He has not 
 the same, he has those of the Russians. 
 
 26. 
 
 How many servants have we ] — We have only one, but our bro- 
 thers have three of them. — What knives have you] — We have 
 iron knives. — What bag has the peasant ] — He has a thread bag. 
 — Has the young man our long (Qtop) letters ] — He has them not. 
 — Who has our pretty notes ] — The father (ber £>atcr) of the sailor 
 has them. — Has the carpenter Lis nails ] — The carpenter has his 
 iron nails, and the hatmaker his paper hats. — Has the painter beau- 
 tiful gardens ] — He has some, but his brother has none. — Have you 
 many glasses ] — We have only a few. — Have you enough wine ] 
 —We have enough of it. — Has anybody my brooms ] — Nobody 
 has them. — Has the friend of your hatmaker our combs or yours ] 
 ■—He has neither yours nor ours; he has his. — Has your boy my 
 note or yours ] — He has that of his brother. — Have you my stick ] 
 — I have not yours, but that of the merchant. — Have you my 
 gloves (plur. $cmbftf)ubc) ] — I have not yours, but those of my 
 crood neighbour. 
 
40 
 
 TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.— ©in tmb imawfaBtt 
 Action. 
 
 The pepper, 
 the meat, 
 the vinegar, 
 the beer, 
 
 A few books. 
 
 A few. 
 
 Have you a few books % 
 
 i have a few. 
 
 He has a few. 
 
 I have only a few knives. 
 
 You have only a few. 
 
 7%e other. 
 
 The others. 
 
 Another, 
 another horse 
 other horses, 
 
 Have you another horse 1 
 I have another. 
 
 No other. 
 
 The florin, 
 
 the kreutzer (a coin), 
 Other. 
 
 bet spfcffet ; 
 bog g(etfd) ; 
 bet Sfltg ; 
 bets 23tet. 
 
 "N. emtge (etftrfje) S3itd)er* 
 
 G. etntger (etltcfyer) 23ud)er* 
 
 D. etntgen (etttcfyen) S5itd)ern 
 
 A. emtge (etltcfye) S3ud)er. 
 
 (Stntge, etttdje. 
 
 £afcen @ic ctmgc S3ud>er ? 
 
 3d) (jabe e'tntge. 
 
 (St fyat etltcfye. 
 
 3d) fyabe nut emtge SKeffcr. 
 
 ©ie fyaben nut eintge. 
 
 bet ®utben (is not softened in the 
 
 plur.) ; 
 bet ^reugcr. 
 
 71 n b e t (is declined like an ad- 
 jective). 
 
 Singular. 
 Masc. Neut. 
 
 [ N. ber anbere* ba$ anbere* 
 
 G. be£ anberm be£ anberm 
 
 D. bent anbern* bent anberm 
 
 A. ben anbern* bag anbere. 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 
 N. bte anbern* D. ben anbern, 
 
 G. ber anbern* A. bte anbern, 
 
 (See Obs. Lesson XIX.) 
 
 etn 2Cnberet ; 
 
 cm anbeteS spfetb ; 
 
 anbete g)fcrbc. 
 
 &abcn ©tc etn nnbcreS $pfetb? 
 3d) fjabe cin anbetc& 
 
 .Mizsc. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 fetnen anbern. 
 fetn anberetf. 
 
No others 
 
 I have no other horse. 
 I have no other. 
 Have you other horses 1 
 I have some others. 
 I have no others. 
 
 41 
 
 •ftctne anbere (See Lesson XVIII 
 Obs, B. 
 
 3d) fjafce fetn nnbercS g)fcrt>. 
 3d) fya&e fcin anbereS, . 
 $abm <&k anbere $fcrbe 1 
 3d) fyabe anbere. 
 3d) \)Qhz feme anbere. 
 
 The shirt, 
 
 
 fc>ct$ £emb (plur. en) ; 
 
 the leg, 
 
 
 fcaS 93cin (plur. e) ; 
 
 the head, 
 
 
 bcr £opf ; 
 
 the arm, 
 
 
 ber 2Crm (is not softened in fcus 
 plur.) ; 
 
 the heart, 
 
 
 *>a$ fyev$ ; a 
 
 the month, 
 
 
 ber 9)2onat (is not softened in the 
 plur.) ; 
 
 the work, 
 
 
 bag 2Ber£ (plur. e) ; 
 
 the volume, 
 
 
 bcr SBanb ; 
 
 the crown (money), 
 
 ber Scaler (is not softened in the 
 
 
 
 plur.). 
 
 t day of the month ? 
 
 ber ($a$) n> i e d i c ( ft e 1 
 
 Obs. Ordinal numbers are used in replying to the 
 question ber or ba$ ttueirietjte ? what day of the month ? 
 These numbers are declined like adjectives. They are 
 formed of the cardinal numbers by adding t as far as 
 twenty, and ft from twenty to the last, with the excep- 
 tion of erfl, first, and britt, third, which are irregular. 
 Ex. 
 
 The first, 
 
 ber or 
 
 t>a$ erftc; 
 
 the second, 
 
 ber 
 
 jwettc ; 
 
 the third, 
 
 bcr 
 
 brttte ; 
 
 the fourth, 
 
 ber 
 
 trierte ; 
 
 the fifth, 
 
 ber 
 
 fttnfte ; 
 
 the sixth, 
 
 ber 
 
 fecfate ; 
 
 the seventh, 
 
 bcr 
 
 ficfrentc ; 
 
 the eighth, 
 
 ber 
 
 ad)te ; 
 
 the ninth, 
 
 ber 
 
 ncurttc ; 
 
 the tenth, 
 
 ber 
 
 aefmte ; 
 
 the eleventh, 
 
 ber 
 
 clfte ; 
 
 the twentieth, 
 
 bcr 
 
 3tt>an$ta,ftc ; 
 
 the twenty-first, &e 
 
 ber 
 
 cin unb zmn$ic$e, k> 
 
 ^ a S)a§ v§er§, the heart, takes e tt 3 in the genitive and en in the dative cm© 
 wngular ; in the plural it takes e tt in all the cases. 
 
 b Henceforth the learners should write the date before their task. Ex. Son* 
 bon, fcett erftcrt flflai, tin taufenb <itf)t ^unbevt unb ac^t unb brojjia, London, 1st 
 May, i838. 
 
42 
 
 Have you the first or second ftaUn ©ic t>as etfte occr t>a$ grtjeit* 
 
 book? " S3ud)? 
 
 I have the third. 3d) babe fca$ fcrtttc. 
 
 Which volume have you 1 SBekrjcn 23cmt) fyabm <Stc 1 
 
 I have the fifth. 3d) fyabc t>cn fiinften. 
 
 EXERCISES. 27. 
 
 Have you a few knives ] — I have a few. — Have you many 
 rams ] — I have only a few. — Has the friend of the great painter 
 many looking-glasses 1 — He has only a few. — Have you a few 
 florins 1 — 1 have a few. — How many florins have you ] — I have 
 ten. — How many kreutzers has your servant 1 — He has not many, 
 he has only two. — Have the men the beautiful glasses of the Ita- 
 lians 1 — The men have them not, but we have them. — What have 
 we 1 — We have much money. — Have you the carriage of the 
 Dutchman or that of the German ? — 1 have neither the one nor the 
 other. — Has the peasant's boy the fine or the ugly letter ] — He has 
 neither the one nor the other. — Has he the gloves of the merchant 
 or those of his brother? — He has neither the one nor the other. — 
 Which gloves has he ] — He has his own. — Have we the horses of 
 the English or those of the Germans 1 — We have neither the one 
 nor the other. — Have we the umbrellas of the Spaniards ] — We 
 have them not ; the Americans have them. — Have you much pep- 
 per ] — I have only a little, but enough. — Have you much vinegar? 
 — I have only a little. — Have the Russians much meat? — The 
 Russians have a great deal, but the Turks have only a little. — 
 Have you no other pepper 1 — I kave no other. — Have I no other 
 beer ] — You have no other. — Have we no other good friends 1 — 
 We have no others. — Has the sailor many shirts 1 — He has not 
 many ; he has only two. — Have you a wooden leg 1 — I have not a 
 (fcin) wooden leg, but a good heart. — Has this man a good head ? 
 — He has a good head and a good heart. — How many arms has that 
 boy 1 — He has only one ; the other is of wood (sen £^)» — What 
 kind of head has your boy ] — He has a good head. 
 
 28. 
 
 Which volume have you 1 — I have the first. — Have you the se- 
 cond volume of my work 1 — I have it. — Have you the third or the 
 fourth book ] — I have neither the one nor the other. — Have we the 
 fifth or sixth volume ! — We have neither the one nor the other.-— 
 Which volumes have we 1 — W« have the seventh. — What day 
 (£)en rtneotctftcn) of the month is it (fja&cn rmr) ? — It is ( s 2Btt l)aUr\) 
 the eighth. — Is it not (£abcn ttut mcbt) the eleventh 1 — No, Sir, it is 
 the tenth. — Have the Spaniards many crowns 1 — The Spaniards 
 have only a few ; but the English have a great many.— Who has 
 our crowns ] — The French have th^m. — Has the youth much head 1 
 — He has not much head, but mb *h courage. — How many arms 
 has the man 1 — He has two. 
 
4A 
 
 v\). 
 
 Have you the crowns of the French or those of the English 1— « 
 I have neither those of the French nor those of the English, but 
 those of the Americans. — Has the German a few kreutzers ] — He 
 has a few. — Has he a few florins 1 — He has six of them. — Have you 
 another stick 1 — I have another. — What other stick have you 1 — 
 I have another iron stick. — Have you a few gold candlesticks !-— 
 We have a few. — Have these men vinegar] — These men have 
 none, but their friends have some. — Have our boys candles 1 — 
 Our boys have none, but the friends of our boys have some. — Have 
 you some other bags 1 — I have no others. — Have you any other 
 cheeses 1 — I have some others.— Have you other meat ] — I have 
 no other. (See note f , Lesson II. Y 
 
 TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. — £um mib }tucm}igste 
 
 Cation. 
 
 The tome (volume), t>ct Sfyett. 
 
 Have you the first or third tome Shaken (Sic ben erftcn cbet Written 
 of my work ] S^etl mcttics $&cvU 1 
 
 Both. 23 e i t) c (is declined like an ad- 
 
 jective). 
 
 I have both. 3d) fyabe 6etbc. 
 
 Obs. The singular of 6 e t b e is used only in the no- 
 minative and accusative neuter. The plural beibt is 
 employed when two substantives express the same 
 thing, and the singular neuter 6 e t t> e $ , when they ex- 
 press two different things : as, 
 
 Have you my book or my stick 1 $aim\ ®te mettt S3ud) ot>et meittcn 
 
 ©toe! ? 
 I have both. 3d) fjabc fcett>C& 
 
 Still, yet, some or any more. #1 d). 
 
 Some more wine. 9?od) £Bdn. 
 
 Some more money. 9?od) ©elt>. 
 
 Some more buttons. 9?ed) ^nb'pfe. 
 
 Have you any more wine 1 £cu3cn <Ste nod) SSctn ? 
 
 c We have hitherto intentionally, and in perfect harmony with this system, 
 refrained from speaking of feminine nouns. They will be touchei upon here 
 after. (See Lesson LXXVIII.) 
 
44 
 
 I have some more. 
 Has he any more bread ? 
 He has some more. 
 Have I any more books'? 
 You have some more. 
 
 3d) f)aU nod) roetdjen. 
 $at ct nod) &3tob ? 
 (St fyat nod) rcetd)c$. 
 £ak id) nod) 23iidbcr ? 
 <Sie fyaOen nod) nMdje. 
 
 iVo£ cmy more, no more* Jtctn — m e I) t • 
 
 3d) fjabc feincn £Bcm mef)t« 
 
 £aben @te nod) (Sfftg ? 
 
 3d) fyabe Cetncn mct)r. 
 
 £at cr nod) 23rot» ? 
 
 (It r)at fein$ mefjr* 
 
 3d) fjabe fcine £unt>c mefjr. 
 
 3d) fjabe feinc mefyt. 
 
 91 i d) 1 Diet m e f) r . 
 
 £afccn 8te nod) Dtet ££cin 1 
 3d) ^abe fccffcn md)t Dtct mcrjt. 
 £afcen 6'te nod) Diet $iid)et ? 
 3d) fja&e t)cren ntcfyt Diet met)t. 
 
 I have no more wine. 
 
 Have you any more vinegar 1 
 
 I have no more. 
 
 Has he any more bread 1 
 
 He has no more. 
 
 I have no more dogs. 
 
 I have no more. 
 
 Not much more. 
 
 Have you much more wine 1 
 I have not much more. 
 Have you many more books ? 
 I have not many more. 
 
 One more book. 9£od) ein 25ud). 
 
 One more good book 9?od) cin guteS 23ud). 
 
 A few books more. 9?od) etnige 33ud)Ci*. 
 
 Have we a few hats more? Jpabm wix nod) etnige #ute ? 
 
 We have a few more. 2Btt rjaben nod) cintge. 
 
 Has he a few good knives more 1 £at cr nod) etntge gutcSfteflfcr? 1 (Sec 
 
 Lesson XVIII. Obs. B.) 
 He has a few more. (St Fjcit nod) etnige. (See Ota 
 
 Lesson XVI.) 
 
 EXERCISES. 30. 
 
 Which volume of his work have you 1 — I have the second.— 
 How many tomes has this work 1 — It has three. — Have you my 
 work, or that of my brother 1 — 1 have both (Oeibe). — Has the for 
 eigner my comb or my knife 1 — He has both (bct6c6). — Have you 
 our bread or our cheese 1 — I have both. — Have you my glass or 
 that of my friend 1 — I have neither the one nor the other. — Have 
 we anymore hay 1 — We have some more. — Has our merchant any 
 more pepper 1 — He has some more. — Has he any more candles 1 — 
 He has some more. — Have you any more coffee 1 — We have ho 
 more coffee ; but we have some more vinegar. — Has the German 
 any more water 1 — He has no more water ; but he has some more 
 meat. — Have we any more gold ribbons ? — We have no more gold 
 (Lesson XVIII. Obs. B.) ribbons ; but we have some more silver 
 (ribbons). — Has our friend any more sugar? — He has no more.— 
 Have I any more beer ? — You have no more.- — Has your young 
 man any more friends ] — He has no more. 
 
45 
 
 31. 
 
 Has your brother one more horse 1 — He has *ne more. — Hava 
 you one more 1 — I have one more. — Has the peasant one more ox ? 
 — He has one more. — Have you a few more gardens 1 — We have 
 a few more. — What have you more ] — We have a few good ships 
 (plur. Scfytflre) and a few good sailors more. — Has our brother a few 
 more friends ] — He has a few more.— Have I a little more money 1 
 —You have a little more. — Have you any more courage ] — I have 
 nc more. — Have you much more money ] — I have much more, but 
 my brother has no more.— Has he enough salt] — He has not 
 enough. — Have we buttons enough 1 — W T e have not enough. — Has 
 the good son of your good tailor buttons enough ] — He has not 
 enough. 
 
 TWENTY-THIRD LESSON.— Dm ntti }U)<m}igst£ 
 Nation. 
 
 r SS e r f df) t e b e n e (is declined like 
 an adjective, and hardly ever 
 used in the singular.) (See 
 Lesson XVIIL, Obs. B.) 
 
 Several. 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 La 
 
 tterfcfyteberte* D. serfcfytebenem 
 fcerfcfytebener* A. fcerfcfyiebette* 
 
 The father 
 the son, 
 the child, 
 the captain, 
 the tea, 
 the cake, 
 
 
 bet 3$atct ; 
 bet Sobn ; 
 ba$ JUnb ; 
 
 bet ibauptmann (plur £aupt(eute) ; 
 bet Sfyee ; 
 
 bet JUicfyen (is not softened in the 
 plur.). 
 
 Several children. 
 
 
 SSetfcfytebene jUnbet. 
 
 As much, as many* 
 As much — as, as many— 
 
 -as 
 
 <So tuel. 
 
 (So Diet — rot e. 
 
 is much bread as wine. 
 A.s many men as children. 
 
 
 (So met SStob role 2Bctn. 
 (So met Marmot rote .ftmbet. 
 
 Have you as much gold as sil- 
 ver ? 
 
 0/ 
 
 £abcn Ste fo met ©otb rote <Si(6et 1 
 
 Son (preposition governing the 
 dative). 
 
46 
 
 1 have as much of this as of 3d) fyafce fo Diet Don btejcm rote Dor 
 
 that. jenem. 
 
 Have y m as many hats as coats ] £akn @tc fo Diet £ttte rote $Kode ? 
 I have as many of these as of 3d) J)at>c fo Diet Don btcfen rote Don 
 
 those. jencn. 
 
 As many of the one as of the (So met Don ten einen rote Don ten 
 
 other. ctnfcern. 
 
 Obs. A. When e i n is used as an indefinite numer- 
 al adjective, it is declined like other adjectives. 
 
 Quite (or just) as much. <S & e n fo Diet. 
 
 I have quite as much of this as 3$ tya&c c&cn fo Diet Don fciefem rote 
 of that. Don fcnem. 
 
 The enemy, fcer gctnt) ; 
 
 the finger, tec Singer ; 
 
 the boot, bet ©ttefet. 
 
 Mbre. 9)1 c r) t (comparative advert 
 
 More bread. 20?et)r 23rot>. 
 
 More men, 2Q?el)t banner. 
 
 0&5. B. 31 13 answers to tfAara in English, as tt)if 
 answers to as. 
 
 More bread than wine. 
 More men than children. 
 More of this than of that. 
 More of the one than of the other. 
 
 More of these than of those. 
 I have more of your sugar than 
 of mine. 
 
 Less. 
 
 Less water than wine. 
 
 Less than I. 
 
 — than he. 
 
 — than you. 
 
 They. 
 Than they. 
 
 As much as you. 
 As much as he. 
 As much as they. 
 
 SWe&r 23rob ate 2Betn. 
 sjtfcfjr banner a($ Winter. 
 Sfflebt Don tnefem ati Don jenem. 
 9)?ef)t Don tern etnen ati Don teni 
 
 anbern.a 
 SOTcf)r Don fctefen aU Don jenen. 
 3d) fjafce mefjt Don 3f)tem 3ucfer aii 
 
 Den t>em metmgen. 
 
 ££ e n t 3 e r (comparative of rocntg) 
 SBentger Staffer ate ££ctn. 
 
 gBemgcc a(6 id). 
 
 — ciB cr. 
 
 — at* <Ste. 
 
 2CU fie. 
 
 ®o Diet rote <Sie. 
 (So Diet rote cr. 
 ©0 Diet rote fie. 
 
 • When collective or plural nouns, as : 2B e t It, wine ; 23 1 C b, bread, &c 
 are to be represented by the pronouns, btefer and jetter must be used 
 and not e t n and a n b e r 
 
47 
 
 EXERCISES 32. 
 
 Have you a coat 1 — I have several. — Has he a looking-glass ?— • 
 He has several. — What kind of looking-glasses has he 1 — He has 
 beautiful looking-glasses. — Who has my good cakes 1 — Several 
 men have them. — Has your brother a child ] — He has (tftrcr, Les- 
 son XVI.) several. — Have you as much coffee as honey] — I have 
 as much of the one as of the other. — Has he as much tea as beer 1 
 — He has as much of the one as of the other. — Has this man as 
 many friends as enemies 1 — He has as many of the one as of the 
 other. — Has the son of your friend as many coats as shirts ] — He 
 has as many of the one as of the other. — Have we as many boots 
 as shoes ] — We have as many of the one as of the other. 
 
 33. 
 
 Has your father as much gold as silver] — He has more of the 
 latter than of the former. — Has he as much tea as coffee ] — He 
 has more of the latter than of the former. — Has the captain as ma- 
 ny sailors as ships 1 — He has more of the one than of the other. — 
 Have you as many rams as I ]— I have just as many. — Has the 
 foreigner as much courage as we ] — He has quite as much. — Have 
 we as much good as bad paper 1 ?— We have as much of the one as 
 of the other. — Have we as much cheese as bread ] — We have more 
 of the latter than of the former. — Has your son as many cakes as 
 books ] — He has more of the latter than of the former ; more of 
 the one than of the other. 
 
 34. 
 
 How many children have you ] — I have only one, but my bro- 
 ther has more than I ; he has five. — Has your son as much head as 
 mine ] — He has less head than yours, but he has more courage. — 
 My children have more courage than yours. — Have I as much 
 money as you ] — You have less than I. — Have you as many books 
 as 1 ] — I have less than you. — Have I as many enemies as your 
 father ] — You have fewer than he. — Have the Americans more 
 children than we ] — They have fewer than we. — Have we as many 
 ships as the English 1— We have less than they.— Have we fewer 
 knives than the children of our friends 1 — We have fewer than 
 they. 
 
 35. 
 
 Who has fewer friends than we 1 — Nobody has fewer. — Have 
 you as much of my tea as of yours] — I have as much of yours as 
 of mine. — Have I as many of your books as of mine] — You have 
 fewer of mine than of yours. — Has the Spaniard as much of your 
 money as of his own ] — He has less of his own than of ours. — 
 Has your baker less bread than money] — He has less of the lattei 
 than of the former — Has our merchant fewer dogs than horses t— 
 
48 
 
 fle has fewer of the latter than of the former ; he has fewer of the 
 one than of the other. — He has fewer horses than we, and we 
 have less hread than he. — Have our neighbours as many carriages 
 as we ] — We have fewer than they. — We have less corn and less 
 meat than they. — We have but little corn, but meat enough. 
 
 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. — but ttttb jnunqiget* 
 
 tttixon. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 All German verbs form their infinitive in en* This 
 termination in verbs, the root of which ends in e I or e r, a 
 is contracted by throwing out the letter e, as fymbent, 
 to prevent ; fammeln, to collect, &c. The verbs marked 
 with an asterisk ( # ) are irregular. 
 
 A wish, a mind, a desire, £ U ft ; 
 time, 3 c i t ; b 
 to, 3 u . 
 
 Obs. The prepositio $U, to, always stands before 
 the infinitive. In com> and verbs it is placed between 
 the separable particle and the infinitive, as will be 
 exemplified in future lessons. 
 
 To work. 2Ctuetten* 
 
 To speak. <S p t e d) c n*, x c t> e n. c 
 
 Have you a mind to work ? JpaUn @te Cuft gu ar&ctten ? 
 
 I have a mind to work. 3d) fyafcc £uft $u ar&cttcn. 
 
 He has not the courage to speak. Gt*t fycit ten sjflutl) md)t, $u fprecfyen. 
 
 To cw£. <S d) n c t t> c n*. 
 
 **»*. IS- Sj «■*«•■ 
 
 To cut them, (ic fdnictbcn*. 
 
 a By the root we understand that part of a verb which precedes the termi- 
 Aation C tt of the infinitive ; e. g. in the verb (often, to praise, I B is the root. 
 
 b The two substantives Sufi and 3ett are feminine. If they are required 
 in a negative sense, fetrte Sufi, and tttcfyt 3ett must be used. Ex. Sep fyabt 
 him Sufi ju fyredjen, I have no mind to speak : ev fyat ntdjt gett $u ariettett, 
 he has no time to work. 
 
 c <5$xt&)tn is derived from bte @prad)e, the language, and signifies to pro- 
 duce or emit sounds in a physical manner ; rebett means to express ideas by 
 
 ords, from bte SKebe, the discourse. 
 
49 
 
 To cut some. 
 
 Has he tima to cut trees 1 
 He has time to cut some. 
 
 To buy. 
 To buy some more. 
 
 To buy one. 
 
 To buy two. 
 To buy one more. 
 
 To buy two more. 
 
 [ Masc. ttekfyen, beffht, 1 § 
 
 babon I 3 
 
 Neut. \veld)e$, befien, [ jf 
 
 bat)on J * 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 
 rt>dd)e, beren, bafcon frfjttet^ 
 ben* 
 
 £at cc Sett <8aume. $u fcfynetben ? 
 (St f)at Sett nx'tcfyc $u fd)nett>en. 
 
 S( auf e n. 
 
 £>?ed) faufcn. 
 $ Jfasc. emeu 
 I Neut. eut3 
 
 > faufett. 
 
 faujm 
 
 3nxt faufcn. 
 
 ( 7Hasc. norf) emen 
 
 ( iVez^. norf) em£ 
 
 £ttod) $roct faufcn. 
 
 DCF 3 The infinitive is always placed at the end of 
 the phrase whether preceded by JU or not. 
 
 Have you a mind to buy one £aben ©te 2uft ncd) ein $)fett> gu 
 
 more horse ? faufcn ? 
 
 I have a mind to buy one more 3d) fjafce £u|1 ncd) etnS $u faufcn. 
 
 Have you a mind to buy some £>abcn <Sic Suft ^ud)Ct $u faufcn ? 
 
 books ? 
 
 I have a mind to buy some, but 3d) ()at>c £uft nxld)C $u faufcn, 
 
 I have no time. abet id) fyabc ntd)t 3ett. 
 
 Has he time to work ] £>at et 3ctt $u arbettcn ? 
 
 He has time, but no mind to (St bat Beit, abet fcine 2uft £U at* 
 
 work. beiten. 
 
 exercises. 36. 
 
 Have you still a mind to buy the house of my friend 1 — I have 
 still a mind to buy it, but I have no more money. — Have you time 
 to work ] — I have time, but no mind to work. — Has he time to cut 
 some sticks 1 — He has time to cut some. — Have you a mind to cut 
 some bread 1 — I have a mind to cut some, but I have no knife. — 
 ITav*; you time to cut some cheese 1 — I have time to cut some. — 
 lias he a desire :o cut the tree 1 — He has a desire to cut it, but he 
 bas no time. — H?is he time to cut the cloth ]~He has time to cut it. 
 — Have 1 time to cut the trees 1 — You have time to cut them.— 
 Has the painter a mind to buy a horse 1 — He has a mind to buy 
 two. — Has your captain of the navy (<Sd)tff$capitcm) time to speak 1 
 •—He has time, but no desire to speak. 
 
50 
 
 37. 
 
 Have ycu a mind to buy a carriage ? — I have a mind to bin ^ne 
 —Have I a mind to buy a house ]-— You have a mind to buy one. 
 — Has your brother a mind to buy a great ox ? — He has a m ^id to 
 buy a little one. — We have a mind to buy little oxen. — How .nany 
 horses have you a mind to buy 1 — I have a mind to buy four. — Has 
 any one a mind to buy a broom 1 — This man has a mind to buy 
 one. — What has that man a mind to buy 1 — He has a mind to 
 buy a beautiful carriage, three beautiful horses, good tea, and good 
 meat. 
 
 38. 
 
 Have you a desire to speak? — I have a desire, but no time to 
 speak. — Have you the courage to cut your arm 1 — I have not the 
 courage to cut it. — Am I right in speaking ($u fprcd)Cn) 1 — You are 
 not wrong in speaking, but you are wrong in cutting ($u fcfynctfcen) 
 my trees. — Has the son of your friend a desire to buy one more 
 bird 1 — He has a desire to buy one more ] — Have you a mind to 
 buy one more beautiful coat 1 — I have a mind to buy one more. — 
 Have we a mind to buy a few more horses 1 — We have a mind to 
 buy a few more, but we have no more money. (See Lesson XXII.) 
 
 39. 
 
 What have you a mind to buy ] — We have a mind to buy some- 
 thing good, and our neighbours have a mind to buy something beau- 
 tiful. — Have their children a desire to buy any birds 1 — Their 
 children have no desire to buy any. — Have you the courage to buy 
 the trunk of the captain 1 — I have a desire to buy it, but I have no 
 more money. — Who has a mind to buy my beautiful dog] — Nobo- 
 dy has a mind to buy it. — Have you a mind to buy my beautiful 
 birds, or those of the Frenchman 1 — I have a mind to buy those of 
 the Frenchman. — Which book has he a mind to buy 1 — He has a 
 mind to buy that which you have, that which your son has, and 
 that which mine has. — Have you two horses 1 — I have oj*ly one, 
 but I have a wish to buy one more. 
 
 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. — jFtiuf ttttir man^QU 
 
 Ceciion. 
 
 OF COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 There are in German two kinds of compound verbs • 
 one kind consists of a simple verb and a particle 
 which is inseparable from it ; the other of a simple 
 verb and a particle which can be separated, either to 
 
51 
 
 give place to the syllable g e of the participle past, or 
 to j U, or to be itself placed after the verb or even at 
 the end of the phrase. We shall distinguish the separ- 
 able verbs by placing j u between the verb and the 
 particle. 51 Examples : 
 
 To break. Sctfcrccfyen*. 
 
 To keep (to take care). 2Cufbcix>af)rcn (aufpkroafyten). 
 To pick up. 2(uf[)ekn * (cmftuf)ct>en)* 
 
 To mend. 2Cusbcffcrn (ciu^uOefj'ern). 
 
 To make a fire. genet emmacfyen (an^umacfyen). 
 
 Has the tailor time to mend my ipat ber (Scbnetbet Beit mctnen ^ccf 
 
 coat T cut^ufrefiern ? 
 
 He has time to mend it. (St fyat 3eit ifjn au^u&effcrn. b 
 
 To wash. S0Bafd)cn *. 
 
 ( 25rennen *. c 
 To burn, < SScrbrcnncn (to destroy by burn- 
 
 ( ing). 
 To seek, to look for. Sttd)en (governs the accusative). 
 To warm. SBarmen. 
 
 To make. 93?cid)en (physically). 
 
 To do. &f;im * (morally d ). 
 
 Has the shoemaker time to make £at ber @d)uf)macl)ei; Sett metne ©tie* 
 
 my boots ? fel ju mad)en ? 
 
 He has time to make them. (St f)at 3ett ftc 3U macfyen. 
 
 To be willing, to wish. 2B C ( ( e tt ** 
 
 Will you ? ^ 
 
 Are you willing ? > S&otlcn <Ste ? 
 
 Do you wish ? ) 
 I will, I am willing, I wish. 3d) rtutf. 
 
 Will he? is he willing? does > ^.^ „ 
 
 he wish? }««■«? 
 
 a These verbs may likewise be distinguished by the principal accent, which 
 is placed on the root of the verb when the particle is inseparable, and when 
 separable on the particle itself. 
 
 b These examples show how the separable particle gives way in the infini- 
 tive to 1 tt . 
 
 c The verb bvettttett (as well as its compounds, yerBretmett, &c.) is regu- 
 lar when used in an active or transitive, but irregular when in a neuter or in- 
 transitive sense. We denote such verbs by the following abbreviations : v. 
 ac. and neut. irreg. 
 
 d The verb lit a $ c it always relates to a determinate action, and is em- 
 ployed nearly as the English verb to make, in the sense of producing anything ; 
 the verb t i) U it * on the contrary always, like the English verb to do, relates tc 
 an indeterminate action, as : Grttt $letb rmicbett, to make a ceat ; fetter ma- 
 c&en, to make a fire; etnen (befallen tl)mt, to do a favour; fetue (Sdutlbnjfeif 
 t|tttt, to do one's duty. 
 
52 
 
 He will, he is willing, he wish- ) ~ .~ 
 
 es. 5 
 
 We will, we are willing, we 5 ^ aem 
 
 wish. 3 
 
 You will, you are willing, 7^, act 
 
 you wish. 3 
 
 They will they are willing, 5g. ^ 
 
 they wish. j 
 
 O&s. J.. The particle J U does not precede the in 
 finitive added to the verb tt> o I i e it, to be willing. Ex. 
 
 Do you wish to make my fire 1 Snellen ®ic mem $eucr cmmai 
 
 djen ? 
 I am willing to make it. 3d) rotll c£ cmmctcfyen. 
 
 I do not wish to make it. 3d) will c5 ntcfef anmadfoen. 
 
 Does he wish to buy your horse 1 SQBtll et Sfot $)fi'tt> faufen ? 
 He wishes to buy it. (St will t$ f cm fen. 
 
 A TABLE OF COMPOUND VERBS/ 
 
 I. Inseparable Verbs. 2 
 
 These verbs are formed by prefixing one of the fol- 
 lowing unaccented particles to simple verbs: 6 c, emp, 
 tnt, ex, ge, Winter, fcer, wiber, $er* 
 
 23c — bcfcenfen *, to reflect. Jptnter — fymtercjcrjen *, to deceive, 
 
 ©nip — cmpjvrjlen *, to recommend. 23cr — wtfptcdKn *, to promise. 
 
 (Snt — entflteben *, to run away. £Btt>er — ivifccrtccjen *, to refute. 
 
 St — ctljaltcn *, to receive. 3ct — jctbtccben *, to break, 
 ©c — gcftcbcn*, to confess. 
 
 II. Separable Verbs. 
 
 2(6 — abfd)tctben * , to copy. SBci — betftefyen *, to assist. 
 
 2Cn — cmfangcn *, to begin. ©at — uatftetlcn, to exhibit. 
 
 2Cuf — cmfbeben *, to pick up. SDatunter — baritntctmtfcf)en, to in?- 
 2(u€— auSgeljcn *, to go out. termingle. 
 
 e S I) v, y° u , is the real second person plural ; but the Germans generally 
 use <S t e , which is the third. 
 
 f Our intention in giving tables of the most complicated grammatical parts, 
 Cs not that the learners should make an immediate application of them ; we 
 only wish to give them a clear and general idea of those parts, in order to en- 
 able them to find them out more easily, as they will be in want of them in ad« 
 vancing by degrees. They must in their exercises employ only the words and 
 expressions made use of in the lessons. 
 
 6 We call verbs inseparable when they cannot, and separable when the* 
 can be separated. 
 
53 
 
 £)at>on — tat>cn!ommen*/ to escape. 9?ad)— nacfymctcbcn, to imitate. 
 
 £5urcf) — fcurcfytctfen, to travel Ucber — ubcrfticpen *, to overflow 
 
 through. Urn — unitDCtfen *, to overturn. 
 
 (Stn — etnfd)fafcn *, to fall asleep. ttnter — untctfinfen *, to go to th« 
 $ort — fortfafyren *, to continue. bottom. 
 
 £ctm — bcimgcfjcn *, to go home. 95 oil — BoUgtcpcn *, to fill up. 
 
 $erau£ — (jromSfommwi*, to come 83or — sergcbcn *, to pretend. 
 
 out. 83erau$ — fcfcrauSfagen, to foretell. 
 
 #crunter — fyetuntctfortngcn *, to SScrbct — SctbetgcfK'n*, to pass by. 
 
 bring down. SScrijct — serfycvfefyen *, to foresee. 
 
 £er$u — f)cr$unaf)en, to draw near. 93orubcr — soriibetfafyren*, to pass 
 Join — fytngefjen *, to go thither. by in a coach. 
 
 #inciuf — binauffltetc}en*,to ascend. 8©cg — rocggcfycn *, to go away 
 
 £tnau* — ftinauSroeufcn *, to throw SBkbct — roiebcrfcmmcn *, to come 
 
 out. again. 
 
 £tnetn — fytnctngcfjen *, to go in. 3u — $utct>en, to persuade. 
 
 Snnc — tnnefyata *, to stop. Sutud: — %\xtMiel)vm, to return. 
 
 90?it — mittfjetfcn, to communicate. Sufmnmen — $ufammenfegen, to pui 
 dieter — mcktlegen, to lay down. together. 
 
 Obs. B. Some compound verbs are either insepar- 
 able or separable, according to their signification. We 
 shall speak of them hereafter. 
 
 EXERCISES. 40. 
 
 Have you a desire to keep my letter? — I have a desire to keep 
 it. — Am I right in keeping (cwfeubcroaljrcn) your money 1 — You are 
 right in keeping it. — Has the tailor a desire to make my coat I — 
 He has a desire to make it, but he has no time. — Has your tailor 
 time to mend my coats ] — He has time to mend them. — Have you 
 the courage to burn my hat ?— I have not the courage to burn it ; 1 
 have a mind to keep it. — Has the shoemaker's boy a mind to mend 
 my boots'? — He has no time to mend them. — What has our 
 friend's tailor to mend 1 — He has to mend our old coats. — Who has 
 to mend our boots 1 — Our shoemaker has to mend them. — What 
 has our hatmaker to do ] — He has to mend your great hats. — Has 
 your brother's joiner anything to do] — He has to mend our great 
 tables and our little chairs. 
 
 41. 
 
 Do you wish to keep my twenty-seven crowns 1 — I wish to keep 
 them. Will you pick up that crown or that florin 1 — I will pick up 
 both. — Do you wish to cut his finger 1 — I do not wish to cut it. — 
 Does the painter wish to burn vinegar 1 — He wishes to burn 
 some. — Is the peasant willing to burn his bread 1 — He is not wil- 
 ling to burn his own, but that of his neighbour. — Have you any- 
 thing to do l — I have nothing to do. — Have we anything to do ] — 
 We have to warm our coffee. — Do you wish to speak ? — I wish to 
 speak.- — Is your son willing to work ] — He is not willing to work. 
 
54 
 
 4a. 
 
 Do you wish to buy anything] — I wish to buy something.— 
 What do you wish to buy '.' — I wish to buy some good books.—. 
 What has he to buy ] — He has to buy a good horse. — Will you buy 
 this or that table 1 — I will buy (put the infinitive always to the end 
 of the phrase) neither this nor that. — Which house does your friend 
 wish to buy 1 — He wishes to buy your brother's great house. — Is 
 your servant willing to make my lire l-^-He is willing to make it.— 
 Will your father buy these rams or these oxen ] — He will buy 
 neither the one nor the other. — Does he wish to buy my umbrella 
 or my cane ] — He wishes to buy both. 
 
 43. 
 
 Do you wish to make a fire 1 — We do not wish to make any. — 
 What do you wish to make ! — I wish to make vinegar. — Will you 
 seek my knife? — I will seek it. — Have you to look for anything 1 — 
 1 have nothing to look for. — Has he time to seek my son 1 — He has 
 time, but he will not seek him. — What has he to do 1 — He has to 
 make a fire, to wash my thread stockings, to buy good coffee, good 
 sugar, good water, and good meat. — Will he buy your good trunk ] 
 — He will buy it. — Will you buy my great or my little house 1 — 
 I will buy neither your great nor your little house ; I wish to buy 
 that of our friend. — Will you buy my beautiful horses 1 — I will not 
 buy them. 
 
 44. 
 
 How many rams will you buy 1—1 will buy twenty-two. — Does 
 the foreigner wish to buy much corn? — He wishes to buy but 
 little. — Do you wish to buy a great many gloves 1 — We wish to 
 (>uy only a few ; but our children wish to buy a great many. — Will 
 thej seek the same boots that we have 1 — They will not seek those 
 which you have, but those which my father has. — Will you look 
 for my coats or for those of the good Frenchman 1 — I will look for 
 neither yours nor those of the good Frenchman ; I will look for 
 mine, and for those of my good son. 
 
 TWENTY.SIXTH LESSON. — Qut)S ntth }ttmtt}tg$te 
 
 fiction. 
 
 To tear. SetteifUlt*. 
 
 To go. (3 c \) c n *. 
 
 At. 23 c i , ) prepositions governing 
 
 To. 3 u , 5 tne dative case. 
 
 To be. @cin *. 
 
 Rule. The preposition 6 e t signifies with or at the 
 house of, the preposition J U, to or to the house of. 
 
55 
 
 To be with the man or at the 93 ci t'em Sparine fem*. 
 
 man's house. 
 To go to the man or to the 3u t>em 93?cmne gefjen*. 
 
 man's house. 
 To be with his (one's) friend or 33 ct feinem gteunfoc fein*. 
 
 at his (one's) friend's house. 
 To go to my father or to my 3u mctnem SSatcc g^^en*. 
 
 father's house. 
 
 To be at home. 3u &aufc fein*. 
 
 To go home. 9lafy £aufe gefyen. 
 
 To be with me or at my house, 33ct mis fein*. 
 
 To go to me or to my house. 3u nut gefjcn*. 
 
 To be with him or at his house. Set ifym fein** 
 
 To go to him or o his house. 3u tljm gefyen*. 
 
 To be with us or at our house. 95ci un£ fein*. 
 
 To go to us or to our house. 3u un$ gef)en*. 
 
 To be with you or at your house. ( 23ei Sftncn fein*, feet 6ud) fetn*« 
 
 To go to you or to your house. } 3u SPfjncn gefyen*, $u (5ud) gefyen* 
 
 To be with them or at their house -Set ifyncn fan*. 
 
 To go to them or to their house. 3u ifynen gefyen*. 
 
 To be with some one or at some 33d 3emcmt>em fein*. 
 
 one's house. 
 To go to some one or to some 3u Scmanfccm gefjen*. 
 
 one's house. 
 To be with no one or at no one's 33n SRtemanfccm fein*. 
 
 house. 
 To go to no one or to no one's 3« Sfttemanbem gefjen*. 
 
 house. 
 
 At whose house ? With whom ? S3 e t W c m ? 
 To whose house ? To whom ? 3 U VO C m ? 
 
 To whom (to whose house) do 3u rocm wetten ©ie getjen ? 
 
 you wish to go} 
 I wish to go to no one (to nc 3d) will $u 9facmant>era gc^en. 1 
 
 one's house). 
 At whose house (with whom) is S&ti mm if! Sfjt 95rut)er ? 
 
 your brother 1 
 He is at ours (with us). (5r tft fret um>. 
 
 Is he at home ? 3ft er git £cmfc ? 
 
 He is not at home. <$r tft ntd)t $u £aufe. 
 
 To drink. Sttnfcn*. 
 
 To carry (to take). Srctgen*. 
 To bring (to carry). SBttngcn*. 
 
 * In German, as in English, no more than one negative is ever expre»ec« 
 as has already been seen in many instances. 
 
56 
 
 EXERCISES. 45. 
 
 Do you wish to tear my coat 1 — I do not wish to tear it. — Does 
 your brother wish to tear my beautiful book ] — He does not wish 
 to tear it. — What does he wish to tear ] — He wishes to tear your 
 heart. — With whom is our father] — He is with his friend. — To 
 whom do you wish to go ] — I wish to go to you. — Will you go to 
 my house ] — I will not go to your's, but to my tailor's. — Does your 
 rather wish to go to his friend 1 — He wishes to go to him. — At 
 whose house is your son 1 — He is at our house. — Do your children 
 wish to go to our friends ] — They wish to go to them. — Is the 
 foreigner at our brother's ? — He is there (bet tf)m). — At whose 
 house is the Englishman 1 — He is at yours. — Is the American at 
 our house ] — No, Sir, he is not at our house; he is at his friend V 
 —Is the Italian at his friends' 1 — He is at their house. 
 
 46. 
 
 Do you wish to go home 1 — I do not wish to go home ; I wish 
 to go to the son of my neighbour. — Is your father at home 1 — No, 
 Sir, he is not at home. — With whom is he ? — He is with the good 
 children of our old neighbour. — Will you go to any one's house ? 
 — I will go to no one's house. — At whose house is your son I — 
 He is at no one's house; he is at home. — What will he do at 
 home ] — He will drink good wiae. — Will you carry my letters 
 home 1 — 1 will carry them to my father's.: — Who will carry my 
 notes ] — The young man will carry them. — Will he carry them to 
 my house 1 ? — No, he will carry them to his brother's. — Is his 
 father at home? — He is not at home; he is at the foreigner's. 
 
 47. 
 
 What have you to drink ? — I have nothing to drink. — Has youj 
 son anything to drink] — He has good wine and good water te 
 drink. — Will your servant carry my books to my brothers' 1 — He 
 will carry them to their house. — What will you carry to my 
 house 1 — I will carry to your house two chickens, three birds, good 
 bread, ?nd good wine (always put the infinitive to the end, and do 
 not separate it from "to your house"). — Will you carry these 
 chairs to my house 1 — I will not carry these, but those. — What 
 will the German do at home ? — He will work and drink good wine. 
 
 What have you at home ? — 1 have nothing at home. — Have you 
 anything good to drink at home 1 — I have nothing good to drink ; 
 I have only bad water. — Has the captain as much coffee as sugar 
 at home] — He has as much of the one as of the other at home. — 
 Will you carry as many crowns as buttons to my brother's ] — 1 
 will carry to his house as many of the one as of the other. — Will 
 you carry great glasses to my house ] — I will carry some to youi 
 house. — Has the merchant a desire to buy as many oxen as rams? 
 — He wishes to buy as many of the one as of the other. 
 
57 
 
 49. 
 
 Has the shoemaker as many shoes as boots to mend? — He has 
 as many of the one as of the other to mend. — Has he as much 
 wine as water to drink ] — He has as much to drink of the one as 
 of the other. — Has the Turk a desire to break some glasses 1 — He 
 has a desire to break some. — Has he a mind to drink some wine ? 
 — He has no mind to drink any. — Will you buy anything of (bet) 
 mel — I will buy nothing of you. — Of whom (-3d nx'm) will you 
 buy your corn 1 — I will buy it of the great merchant. — Of whom 
 will the English buy their oxen] — They will buy them of the 
 Dutch* — Will the Spaniards buy anything] — They will buy 
 nothing-. 
 
 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Qizbtn mxb 
 jroanyQBte Cectian. 
 
 w , ? C 2£ o ? (an adverb of place with* 
 
 wnere ' I out motion.) 
 
 *T*rz.uz. ? z. .7 C2Bof)tn? (an adverb of place 
 Whither! where to ? ^ wit h motion.) 
 
 Rules. 
 
 1. The question tt>0? indicates rest in a place, or 
 with any person or object whatsoever ; the preposition 
 which a iswers this question always governs the da- 
 tive. 
 
 2. The question tt>ot)irt? denotes motion or direc- 
 tion towards some place or object ; when answered 
 by one of the prepositions a tt, to ; a it f, upon ; I) t tt t e r, 
 behind ; n e b e tt, by the side ; it b e r, above ; it tt t e r, 
 under; jtt)tfd)ett, between; fcor, before; tit, in or 
 into, it always requires the accusative. a 
 
 There. £) a (rest, repose). 
 
 Thither. $ t n or o a \) t n (motion or direc- 
 
 tion). 
 
 To carry thither. £tn or fcafjtn ttagen*. 
 
 To carry it .MAC, j jgj * j ȣJ+ 
 
 a The same prepositions govern the dative when they i nswer the question 
 wo? 
 
 3* 
 
58 
 
 fo carrv some thither i Masc ' mld)en I ^ tt or ba ^ fn 
 lo carry some tiiitner. < N&ut ^^ j tragen #. 
 
 To carry them thither, ffe l)tn or bafym tragett*.' 
 
 Obs. A. The adverb b a, £/*ere, is always joined to 
 a verb of rest, and the abverb t) t n or b a I) t it, thither, 
 to a verb of motion, ijttt is used to express motion 
 from, and f) e r motion towards the person that speaks. 
 Ex. @r tfl ba, he is there ; v&j vdxOC aurf) l)m (bafytrt) ge^en, 
 I will also go thither ; tooften @e fyerfommen? will you 
 come hither ? 
 
 To send. 
 
 To come. 
 To lead, 
 will send him (it) to you. 
 
 C ©cnbctu* 
 C <Sd)tcfcn. b 
 
 .ftommcn*. 
 
 gufyrcn* 
 
 3d) milt tfjn (cS) $u 3&n«n fcfytcfen. 
 
 When 1 
 
 SBann 1 
 
 To-morrow. 
 To-day. 
 
 £CUtO. 
 
 Some where, any where* 3 t Cj c n t) ru (rest). 
 
 ♦Some whither, any whither* 3rQcnbrc>of)tn (direction). 
 
 iVo where, not any where* 9? t r g e n fc> or n t r g e n t> 6. 
 
 Do you wish to go any whither] Pollen @ic trcjcnbmcr)tn QcrjCtt] 
 I do not wish to go any whither. 3d) rottt mtgcn&S fjtwjcfjen. 
 
 The physician, bcr 2Cr$t. 
 
 To write. @cl)tri&cn*. 
 
 Have you to write as many let- $abm (Sic fo t>tel SBvtcfc $u fcfyreibcn, 
 ters as my father 1 rote mctn SScttet ? 
 
 O&s. 2?. Where the verb stands at the end of a 
 phrase, the word tt) i e , as, or a 1 3 , £Aa?i ? is placed with 
 its npminative after the verb. 
 
 I have to write more (i. e. let- 3d) \)abc boron mol)v $u fcfyretben, c&i 
 ters) than he. cr. 
 
 exercises. 50. 
 
 Where is your bi ether] — He is at home. — Whither do you wish 
 to go? — I wish to go home. — Whither does your father wish to 
 
 b (5 rf) i d e tt is used when a person is sent without any object, or with c ae 
 of little importance, fett ben, on the contrary, always denotes a mission of 
 Importance, whence bet ©efanbre, the ambassador. 
 
59 
 
 g* ? — He wishes to go to your house.— Whither will you carry 
 this letter] — I will carry it to my neighbour's. — Is your son at 
 home 1 — He is there. — Whither will the shoemaker carry my boots ? 
 — He will carry them to your house. — Will he carry them home ] 
 — He will carry them thither. — Will you send good sugar home 1 
 — I will send some thither. — Will the baker send good bread home ? 
 — He will send some thither. — Will you come to me] — I will come 
 to you. — Whither do you wish to go 1 — I wish to go to the good 
 Frenchmen. — Will the good Italians go to our house ] — They will 
 go no whither. — Will you take (fufyren) your son to my house ] — I 
 will not take him to your house, but to the captain's. — Wlien will 
 you take him to the captain's ] — I will take him there ($u tfym) to- 
 morrow. 
 
 51. 
 
 Will you go any whither (any where) ] — I will go no whithei 
 (no where). — Will your good son go to any one] — He will go \o 
 no one. — When will you take (fitfyren) your young man to the pain- 
 ter ] — I will take him there ($u tfjm) to-day. — Where will he carry 
 these birds to] — He will carry them no whither. — Will you take 
 the physician to this man] — I will take him there (§u ifym). — When 
 will you take him there] — I will take him there to-day. — Will the 
 ohysicians come to your good brother] — They will not come to him. 
 — Will you send me a servant] — I will send you none. — Will you 
 send a child to the physician] — I will send one to him. — With whom 
 is the physician] — He is with nobody. — Do you wish to go any 
 whither] — I wish to go to the good Americans. — Has he time to come 
 to my house] — He has no time to come there. — Will the captain 
 write one more letter ] — He will write one more. — Will you write 
 * note ] — I will write one. — Has your friend a mind to write as 
 many letters as I ] — He has a mind to write quite as many. 
 
 52. 
 
 Have you many letters to write ] — I have only a few to write. — 
 How many letters has our old neighbour to write ]— He has as 
 many to write as you. — Who has long letters to write] — The youth 
 has some to write. — How many more letters has he to write ] — He 
 has six more to write.— How many has he to send ] — He has twen- 
 ty to send. — Has he as many letters to send as his father 1 — He 
 has fewer to send. — Has the hatmaker some more hats to send ] — 
 He has no more to send. — Has your son the courage to write a 
 long letter ] — He has the courage to write one. — Will he write as 
 many letters as mine ] — He will write quite as many. — Will you 
 buy as many carriages as horses ] — I will buy more of the latter 
 than of the former. 
 
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— &d)t mtS ?WM?tff0t< 
 
 Certion. 
 
 In order to (conjunction). 1! m — gtr. 
 To see. @ c f) c n * 
 
 Ofo. Jl. The conjunctive expression f?i order fo pre- 
 ceding the infinitive is translated into German by u in 
 J U. When the sentence is short, U tn A in order, may be 
 left out. 
 
 I will go to my brother in order 3d) will gu me'mem 23rut>ct gcljen, 
 to see him. urn tf)n $u fct)cn. 
 
 I have no money (in order) to 3d) r)abc Icin (Mb, (urn) 23rob p 
 buy bread. faufetu 
 
 Has your brother a knife (in or- $at 3f)r SBrubVr cm 93?cffcr, (uui) 
 der) to cut his bread ? fctn <Brob $u fd)nett>cn 1 
 
 He has one to cut it. @r r)ar ctng, urn ce $u fcfynribctw 
 
 To sweep* 2C u £ f e I) r c rt (au^ufcfytcn). 
 
 To kill. Sob ten 
 
 To slaughter. &d)ta d) t en 
 
 To saltl 6 a 1 3 c n . 
 
 To oe a&fe. jtotrnen*. 
 
 I can (am able) — he can (is 3d) farm — or faniu 
 
 able). 
 We can (are able) — they can 2Btt Fonncn — fte fonnctr, 
 
 (are able). 
 You can (are able). Sfjr fonnet (<Sic fonncn). 
 
 Obs. B. The particle j it does not precede the infini 
 tive added to the verb fotwetf, to be able. (See Less- 
 son XL.) Ex. 
 
 Can you write a Wer ? jtonrtcn &t crncn SBricf fcfyrctOctt? 
 
 I can write one. 3d) form etnen fcr)rciOcn» 
 
 He is able to work. (St farm ar&citcn. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Dat. Aco, 
 
 To me. me. 
 To him. him. 
 
 1st person, mtr. mtdj. 
 3d person, xbm. tfyru 
 
 * £obtett means to deprive any one of life ; fd)lctd)tett, to slaughter, is used 
 fei speaking of animals, the flesh of which is eaten. Ex. ©etiten ^etttb tobtett 
 to kiP his enemy ; Ddjfen imfc (Sd)afe fcfylacfytett, to slaughter oxen and sheep 
 
61 
 
 To us. 
 To you. 
 
 To them. 
 
 T*. kill me. 
 To- see me. 
 
 To speak to me. 
 
 To speak to him. 
 
 US. 
 you. 
 
 them. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dat. Acc. 
 mtg. mtg. 
 
 (S^ncn) (©ie b ), 
 3d person, ibnen* fte. 
 
 1st person. 
 2d person 
 
 gffitdj tobten. 
 m&> fefjcn*. 
 93ttd) (nut mir or $u nut) fpm 
 
 djcn*. 
 Sfyn (mit tf)m or $u itjm) fpre* 
 
 cfyen*. 
 3f)m fd)icfcn. 
 3u tfjm fcfyicfen. 
 3fm mir ($u mir) fcfytcfen. 
 Sfyn mir mergcn fd)tcfcn (if)n mot* 
 
 gen $u mir fcfyicfen). 
 
 Uj 3 In German the dative precedes the accusative ; 
 but when the accusative is a personal pronoun it pre- 
 cedes the. dative. 
 
 To send to him. 
 
 To send to his house. 
 
 To send him to me. 
 
 To send him to me to-morrow. 
 
 It to me — them to me. 
 It to him — them to him. 
 It to us — them to us. 
 
 r 
 
 Masc. 
 tfylt. 
 
 ifym 
 ifyru 
 
 It to you — them to you. 
 
 ifym 
 
 It to them — them to them. 
 
 tf)tt- 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 eg mir — ffe mir* 
 eg itjxn — fTe tfym. 
 eg mtg — ffe un$. 
 eg dnd) — ffe (Slid). 
 eg (3f)nen)jTe(3f)nen). 
 eg ifyrten — fte itwert. 
 
 When will you send me the hat 1 £Scmn reollen @te mir b t n £ut 
 
 fct)tcfen ? 
 I will send it to ) r ou to-morrow. Scl) txntf t ft n 3 f) n c n morgcn 
 
 fcfyicfen. 
 
 Some to me. 
 Some to him. 
 Some to us. 
 
 Some to you. 
 
 Some to them. 
 
 Masc. Neut. Plural. 
 
 f mir toelcftett* tt>e(df)eg. mir mefcfye. 
 
 f tbm tt>elrf)en* ttekfyeg. ifym wetcfye. 
 
 t itng toefdjem welcfyeg* mtg toefcfye, 
 
 t ifynett n>eldf)en. n>eW)eg. ifynen n>efdbe. 
 
 b See note a , Lesson XXXJ 
 
62 
 
 To give. (3 e t> e n *. 
 
 To lend. fcei&Clt*. 
 
 To give me. 532ic gefcen*. 
 
 To lend me. sjD^tr letfyen*. 
 
 Are you willing to lend me SBotten ©tc mir (Mb (etfjen ? 
 
 some money 1 
 I am willing to lend you some. 3d) will Sfyncn rcctcfyeS tetfyen. 
 
 A TABLE 
 
 
 
 "Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 fN0M. 
 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 ^Acc. 
 
 OF THE DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 trf), I. 
 
 memer (mem ), of me. beitter (bem), of thee. 
 
 SECOND PERSON. 
 
 bit, thou. 
 
 mtr, 
 mtd), 
 
 nrir, 
 imfer, 
 mt£, 
 wt£, 
 
 to me. 
 me. 
 
 we. 
 
 of us. 
 
 to us. 
 
 us. 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 A. 
 
 bir, 
 
 bid), 
 
 eaer, 
 eurf), 
 tufa 
 
 to thee, 
 thee, 
 
 you. 
 of you. 
 to you. 
 
 you. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 Nom. er, he. 
 
 i 
 Gen. femer (fetn), of him. 
 
 Dat. tfynt, to him. 
 
 Ace. tfytt, him. 
 
 ffc, 
 
 she. 
 
 tf)ter,of her. 
 tfyr, to her. 
 ffe, her, 
 
 
 "Nom, 
 
 1-3 
 
 < 
 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 
 ,Acc. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 ffe, 
 
 tfyrer, 
 ifynen, 
 
 Fauter. 
 
 e^, it. 
 
 femer (fern), of it. 
 tfym, to it. 
 
 eg, it. 
 
 they, 
 of them, 
 to them. 
 
 them. 
 
 « 2ftem, fcem, fetn, as genitives singular, for memer, bemer, fettter, are used 
 only in familiar discourse and in poetry. Ex. 33er<}t£ mem ttt$t, forget me 
 not. 
 
88 
 
 EXERCISES. 53. 
 
 Has the carpenter money to buy a hammer ? — He has some tc 
 Duy one. — Has the captain money to buy a ship 1 — He has some 
 to buy one. — Has the peasant money to buy sheep (bets <Sd)af adds 
 e and is not softened in the plural) 1 — He has none to buy any. — 
 Have you time to see my father ] — I have no time to see him. — 
 Does your father wish to see me 1 — He does not wish to see you. 
 —Has the servant a broom to sweep the house 1 — He has one to 
 sweep it. — Is he willing to sweep it 1 — He is willing to sweep it. 
 — Have I salt enough to salt my meat] — You have not enough of 
 it to salt it. — Will your friend come to my house in orc'er to see 
 me 1 — He will neither come to your house nor see you. — Has our 
 neighbour a desire to kill his horse 1 — He has no desire to kill it. — 
 Will you kill your friends 1 — I will kill only my enemies. 
 
 54. 
 
 Can you cut me some bread 1 — I can cut you some. — Have you 
 a knife to cut me some ?-— I have one. — Can you wash your 
 gloves 1 — I can wash them, but I have no wish to do it. — Can the 
 tailor make me a coat 1 — He can make you one. — Will you speak 
 to the physician 1 — I will speak to him. — Does your son wish to 
 see me in order to speak to me 1 — He wishes to see you, in order 
 to give you a crown. — Does he wish to kill mel — He does not 
 wish to kill you ; he only wishes to see you. — Does the son of our 
 old friend wish to kill an oj ] — He wishes to kill two.— How 
 much money can you send me 1 — I can send you thirty crowns. — 
 Will you send me my letter 1 — I will send it to you. — Will you 
 send the shoemaker anything 1 — I will send him my boots. — Will 
 you send him your coats 1 — No, I will send them to my tailor. — 
 Can the tailor send me my coat? — He cannot send it you. — Are 
 your children able to write letters ? — They are able to write some 
 
 55. 
 
 Have you a glass to drink your wine ?— I have one, but I have 
 no wine ; I have only water. — Will you give me money to buy 
 6ome 1 — I will give you some, but I have only a little. — Will you 
 give me that which you have ? — I will give it you. — Can you 
 drink as much wine as water 1 — I can drink as much of the one as 
 of the other. — Has our poor neighbour any wood to make a fire 1 — 
 He has some to make one, but he has no money to buy bread and 
 meat. — Are you willing to lend him some 1 — I am willing to lend 
 him some. — Do you wish to speak to the German 1 — I wish tc 
 speak to him. — Where is he ] — He is with the son of the captain. 
 — Does the German wish to speak to me 1 — He wishes to speak to 
 you. — Does he wish to speak to my brother or to yours? — He 
 wishes to speak to both — Can the children of our tailor work * — 
 They can work, but they will not. 
 
64 
 
 56. 
 
 Do you wish to speak to the children of your shoemaker ? — 1 
 wish to speak to them. — What will you give them 1 — I will give 
 them great cakes. — Will you lend them anything 1 — I have nothing 
 to lend them. — Has the cook some more salt to salt the meat ] — 
 He has a little more. — Has he some more rice 1 — He has a great 
 deal more. — Will he give me some 1 — He will give you some. — 
 Will he give some to my poor children] — He will give them 
 some. — Will he kill this or that hen ] — He will kill neither this 
 nor that. — Which ram will he kill 1 — He will kill that of the good 
 peasant. — Will he kill this or that ox ] — He will kill both. — Who 
 will send us biscuits] — The baker will send you some. — Have 
 you anything good to give me 1 — I have nothing good to give you. 
 
 rwENTY.NiNTH lesson.— Neun mtb ^an^ste 
 Ration. 
 
 To whom ? SSSem ? (A question followed by 
 
 the dative.) 
 Whom? For persons: 2£cn?} (Questions 
 
 > followed by 
 What ? For things : 2B a £ ?_) the accus.). 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN SGB C X ? WHO ? 
 
 Nom. Who ? what ? 
 
 Gen. whose ? 
 
 Dat. to whom ? to what ? 
 
 Ace. whom ? what ? 
 
 Masc. and Fem. Neut. 
 
 N. tt>er ? tva$ ? 
 G. rcefien ? 
 
 cuttt)a3?tt>oratt? 
 
 voorauf? tt>o$u? 
 A. torn ? tva$ ? 
 
 D. mm ? 
 
 3GB e r, who, has no plural, and relates only to per- 
 sons, without distinction of sex, as who in English. It 
 may be used instead of fcerjemge, tt>elrf)er, he who. 
 
 SQ3 a $, which, has no plural, and always relates to a 
 thing. It often stands for ba^jettige, tt>e{d)e$ or t>a£, toeU 
 d)e£, that which. 
 
 To answer. li n t tt) o r t e n. a 
 
 To answer the man. 3)em Marine antrootten. 
 
 a The verb cmttoovtett is inseparable, although the accent rests upon the 
 particle ant; it governs the accusative with the preposition (tuf, to. $8e<Utt* 
 tuovten, to answer, governs the accusative without a preposition. 
 
65 
 
 To answer the men. £)en banner n cu?m>erten. 
 
 To answer a letter. 7£uf etnen Srief cmhvertcn or ctttOI 
 
 93rlef fcecmtrocrten. 
 To it. 5) a v a u f. 
 
 To answer it. ©arouf antrcevten or tfjn (cs>) Oeant* 
 
 mortem 
 
 Obs. A. The demonstrative local adverbs, ba, there ; 
 fyter, here ; too, where ; are usually employed instead 
 of demonstrative pronouns, and connected with the 
 preposition which the verb requires. If the preposi- 
 tion begins with a vowel, the letter r is added to the 
 words fca and tt>0 for the sake of euphony. 
 
 In. 3 n (governs the dat and ace ). 
 
 In the. 3n 6cm (tm, rest b ). 
 
 Into the. 3 n fer.cn (motion). 
 
 In the. 3 n be n (rest). 
 
 Into the. 3 n b t c (motion). 
 
 To go into the garden. 3n ben ©atten gefyen*. 
 
 To be in the garden. 3n bem (tm) ©arten fetn* 
 
 To go into the gardens. 3n btc (fatten gefjen*. 
 
 To be in the gardens. 3n ben ©cirten fein*. 
 
 Ohs. B. The rapidity of pronunciation has led to a 
 contraction of the last letter of the definite article with 
 certain prepositions which precede it ; thus betm is of- 
 ten said instead of bet bent, tm instead of in bem, tn£ in 
 the accusative neuter instead of in ba$. 
 
 According to this contraction we may say or write *> 
 
 2Cm, near the, for an bem. 5?urs, for the, for fur ba$. 
 
 2(n$, to the, against %m, in the, — in bcm. 
 
 the, — an ba$. 3n$, into the, — in ba$. 
 
 #ufs, upon the, — auf fcas. 830m, from the, — t>on bem. 
 
 JBeim, at the, — bet bem. 3um, to the, — gu bem. 
 
 £)urd)$, through the, — burd)'oci$. 3ur, to the, — gu ber. 
 
 The theatre, ba$ Sweater ; 
 
 the forest, the wood, ber SSalb (plur. btc £Balbet) ; 
 the warehouse, bas SQSaarentager (is not softened iw 
 
 the plur.) ; 
 
 b The preposition i tt is used when the place in which a person is, or to- 
 wards which the motion is directed, is closed, or conceived to be so. It is 
 followed by the dative to the question tt? o , and the accusative to the question 
 
66 
 
 the stoiehouse, t>a$ s I§crratf)^aus ;- 
 
 the magazine, bciS sj^agagln (plur. e) ; 
 
 the provision, store, bcr 53ottatf) ; 
 
 the room, the chamber, t>a$ 3immct ; 
 
 the butcher, bet g(ctfd)et (bee 9^e|get)« 
 
 To go into, £tnetnger)en*. 
 
 To be in the. Hariri fetn*. 
 
 Do you wish to go to the thea- Swollen (Sic in$ Sweater gefjen ? 
 
 tre? 
 I wish to go thither. 3d) rottt f)tnctn c^cfyetu 
 
 Is your brother in the theatre ? 3ft Sfjt SStubet tm .Sweater ? 
 He is there. (St tft barin. 
 
 Obs. C. The above examples show how b a r t H 
 expresses rest in, and f) t it e t it motion towards, the 
 interior of a closed place. 
 
 EXERCISES. 57. 
 
 Will you answer your friend? — [ will answer him. — But whom 
 will you answer 1 — I will answer my good father. — Will you not 
 answer your good friends ? — I will answer them. — Who will 
 answerme? — The Russian wishes to answer you, but he cannot. — 
 Will the Russian write me a letter ? — He will write you one. — Can 
 the Spaniards answer us ? — They cannot answer us, but we can 
 answer them. — What has the Englishman to do ? — He has to 
 answer a letter. — Which letter has he to answer ? — He has to 
 answer th_t of the good Frenchman] — Have I to answer a letter ? 
 
 You have not to answer a letter, but a note. — Which note have I 
 to answer ? — You have to answer that of the great captain. 
 
 58. 
 
 Have we to answer the letters of the great merchants ? — We 
 have to answer them. — Will you answer the note of your tailor? — 
 I will answer it. — Will any one answer my great letter ? — No one 
 will answer it, — Will your father answer this or that note ? — He 
 will answer neither this nor that. — Which notes will he answer ? — 
 He will answer only those of his good friends. — Will he answer 
 me my letter ? — He will answer it you. — Will your father go any- 
 whither ? — He will go nowhither. — Where is your brother ? — He is 
 in the garden of our friend. — Where is the Englishman ? — He is in 
 his little garden. — Where do we wish to go to? — We wish to go 
 into the garden of the French. — Where is your son ? — He is in his 
 room. — Will he go to the magazine 1 — He will go thither. — Will 
 you go to the great theatre ? — I will not go thither, but my son has 
 a mind to go thither. — W^here is the Irishman ? — He is in the the- 
 atre. — Is the American in the forest? — He is there. 
 
 c In compound words the last only is softened. Ex. bag 93orratr)§^auS, 
 the storehouse ; plur. bte ^orratf^dufet. 
 
67 
 
 59. 
 
 Will you come to me in order to go to the forest ? — 1 have no 
 w«shto go to the forest. — To which theatre do you wish to go ]— 
 t wish to go to the great theatre. — Will you go into my garden, or 
 into that of the Dutchman] — I will go neither into yours nor into 
 that of the Dutchman ; I will go into the gardens of the French. — 
 Will you go into those of the Germans ? — I will not go thither (bins 
 etn),~ Have the Americans great warehouses 1 — They have some.— 
 Have the English great stores ] — They have some. — Have the Ger- 
 mans as many warehouses as stores ] — They have as many of the 
 latter as of the former. — Will you see our great stores ] — I will go 
 into your warehouses in order to see them. — Have you much hay 
 in ycjr storehouses'? — We have a great deal, but we have not 
 enough corn. — Do you wish to buy some] — We wish to buy some. 
 —Have we as much corn as wine in our storehouses ] — W T e have 
 as much of the one as of the other. — Have the English as much 
 cloth as paper in their warehouses ] — They have more of the one 
 than of the other in them (barin). — Has your father time to write 
 me a letter ] — He wishes to write you one, but he has no time to- 
 day. — When will he answer that of my brother ] — He will answer 
 it to-morrow. — Will you come to my house in order to see my 
 great warehouses] — I cannot come to your house to-day; I have 
 letters to write. 
 
 THIRTIETH LESSON.— ffilrrissigste fcertion. 
 
 Upon. U u f (governs the dat. and ace \ 
 
 Uvonthe. £ 2Cu f b Cm ( re P osea )\ 
 
 upon me. £ 2C u f b c n, b a s (action). 
 
 The market, bcr gftatft ; 
 
 the ball, bet 23aft ; 
 
 the country, bcuS Scmb ; 
 
 the place (the square) bcr $pia§ ; 
 
 the field, bat ge(b. 
 
 To be at the market. 2Cttf tern OTarftc b fetn*. 
 
 To go to the market. 2Cuf ben 93*atft .qcfyen*. 
 
 To be at the ball. 2Cuf tern m\U fctn*. 
 
 To go to the ball. 2tuf ben *8aE cjer ; en*. 
 
 To be in the country. 2£uf bem ganbe fctn*. 
 
 To go into the country. 2Cuf $>a$ Sanb Qcfycn*. 
 
 * The preposition Ctttf, upon, is used when the place is not. closed, butopea 
 t> The genitive singular of masculine and neuter nouns sometimes termi- 
 nates in S, and sometimes in e § (except those in el, en, e r , d) e it and I c t n 
 which always take e). These forms are equally good ; but the former is 
 more frequently used in conversation, and the latter in composition. The 
 same distinction ought to be observed with regard to the dative singular of 
 masculine and neuter nouns, which takes e when the enitive takes e°3 
 
68 
 
 To beat rtie place (in the square). 2Cuf bcm $pfage fein** 
 To go to the place. 2Cuf ben $)fa& cjefyen** 
 
 To be in the field. tfuf t)ctn gfefoe few*. 
 
 To go into the field. 2Cuf jba$ gelb ad)en*. 
 
 .A£. 2f n (dat. and ace). 
 
 .4* the. II n I) cm (repose c ). 
 
 To Me. 2C n ben, t) a 5 (action) 
 
 The window, ; t>a$ Jenjrer. 
 
 To go to the window. 2Cn bat #cnjret fjefyen*. 
 
 To stand, ©tcfocn*. 
 
 To stand at the window. 2Cn bem Jenfter jtefyen*. 
 
 rp - + * i j C2Cn Semanben fefyrctben*. 
 
 To write to somebody. < ~ "* Sl rr '. - 
 
 J C Semanfcem fd)tetben*. 
 
 A . ir . ... . CSBottcn (Ste an mid) febretbe*? 
 
 Are you willing to write to me j ^ ^ rv ,~. ■ C J ■< « 
 * B c Snellen (Ste mtr febtetben f 
 
 T . ir ~ .. . C 3d) will an (Ste fdf)re:t*ctu 
 
 I am willing to write to you. ^^/ ;«>, /..,., 
 
 I wish to write to the man. 3d) will an ben 93iann fcfyretftetu 
 
 To whom ? 2C n n> c n ? 
 
 To whom do you wish to write \ Un wen wclUn ©'ic fd)reiben ? 
 
 To me, to him. Tin mid), an i f) n * 
 
 To the man. 2fn ben 9ftann. 
 
 I will write to him. 3d) will tfym fcfyretOen. 
 
 To icAom ? 8B c m ? 
 
 To me, 2o fo'm. 9ft 1 1 , i f) m. 
 
 To whom do you wish to write 1 £Bcm molten @tc fcfyrctGtti ? 
 To the man. £)em Qftanne. 
 
 The nobleman, bet (Sbctmann ; d 
 
 the boatman, ber @d)tffmann ; 
 
 the bailiff, ber 2(mtmann ; 
 
 people, Scute (p'ur.). 
 
 exercises. 60. 
 
 Whither do you wish to go ? — I wish to go to the market. 
 Where is your cook] — He is at the market.— Where is my brother? 
 — He is at the ball. — Will you come to me in order to go to the 
 ball 1 — I will come to you in order to go thither. — Is your father in 
 the country ] — He is there. — Do you wish to go to the country ?— 
 I do not wish to go there. — Whither does your son wish to go ?— 
 He wishes to go to the great place. — Is your friend at the great 
 place?— He is there. — Does the Englishman wish to go into the 
 country in order to see the fields ] — He does not wish to go into 
 
 c $ln, at, by, near, points out proximity to a person or a place. 
 4 For substantives terminating in memtt, wee Lesson XVII. 
 
69 
 
 the country in order to see the fields, but to see the forests, the 
 birds, the water, and to drink tea. — Where is the son of the 
 peasant] — He is in the field to cut some corn (cutting 1 corn).— 
 Does the son of the nobleman wish to go anywhither 1 — He does not 
 wish to go anywhither ; he is tired. — Whither does the son of the 
 bailiff wish to carry corn ] — He wishes to carry some to the store- 
 house of your brother. — Does he wish to carry thither the wine 
 and the meat 1 — He wishes to carry both thither. 
 
 61. 
 
 Is the friend of the Spaniard able to carry provisions ] — He is 
 able te carry some. — Whither does he wish to carry provisions ] — 
 He wishes to carry some to our storehouses. — Do you wish t^ buy 
 provisions in order to carry them to our storehouses ] — I wish to 
 buy some in order to take them into the country. — Do you wish to 
 go to the window in order to see the youth 1 — I have no time to go 
 to the window. — Have you anything- to do 1 — I have a letter to 
 write. — To whom have you a letter to write 1 — I have to write one to 
 my friend. — Do you wish to write to the bailiff? — I wish to write 
 to him. — What do you wish to write to him ] — I wish to answei 
 him his letter. — Are you able to write as many letters as I ] — I am 
 able to write more of them than you. — Can you write to the (an 
 btc) noblemen ] — I can write to them. — Have you paper to write 1 — I 
 have some. — Is the bailiff able to wiite to anybody 1 — He is not 
 able to write to anybody. 
 
 62. 
 
 Have you time to stand at the window'? — I have no time to 
 stand at the window. — Is your brother at home 1 — He is not at 
 home. — W T here is he ] — He is in the country. — Has he anything to 
 do in the country 1 — He has nothing to do there. — Whither do you 
 wish to go 1 — I wish to go to the theatre. — Is the Turk in the 
 theatre ] — He is there. — Who is in the garden 1 — T l ,e children of 
 the English and those of the Germans are there. — ^ here does your 
 father wish to speak to me ] — He wishes to speak to you in his 
 room. — To whom does your brother wish to speak ] — He wishes to 
 speak to the Irishman. — Does he not wish to speak to the Scotch- 
 man ] — He wishes to speak to him. — Where will he speak to him 1 
 — He will speak to him at (in) the theatre. — Does the Italian wish 
 to speak to anybody ] — He wishes to speak to the physician. — 
 Where will he speak to him 1 — He will speak to him at the ball. 
 
 63. 
 
 Can you send me some money 7 — I can send you some. — How 
 much money can you send me ] — I can send you thirty-twc 
 crowns. — When will you send me that money ] — I will send it to 
 you to-day. — Will you send it to me into the country 1 — I will send 
 it to you thither. — Will you send your servant to the market 1 — I will 
 send him thither. — Have you anything to buy at the market ?— 
 I have to buy good cloth, good boots, and good shoes. — Wh-at doea 
 
70 
 
 the butcher wish to do in the country 1 — He wishes to buy there 
 oxen and rams in order to kill them. — Do you wish to buy a chick- 
 en in order to kill it] — I wish to buy one; but I have not the 
 courage to kill it. — Does the boatman wish to kill any one 1 — He 
 loes not wish to kill any one. — Have you a desire to burn my let- 
 ters ] — 1 have not the courage to do it. — Will the servant seek my 
 knife or my paper] — He will seek both. — Which knife do you 
 wish (to have) ] — I wish (to have) my large knife. — What oxen 
 does the butcher wish to kill ] — He wishes to kill large oxen.— 
 What provisions does the merchant wish to buy ] — He wishes to 
 l >uy good provisions. — Where does he wish to buy them"? — He 
 wishes to buy them at the market. — To whom does he wish to send 
 them ] — He wishes to send them to our enemies. — Will you send 
 ire one more book 1 — I will send you several more. — Are you able 
 to drink as much as your neighbour ] — I am able to drink as much 
 as he ; but our friend, the Russian, is able to drink more than both 
 of us (rotr ktbe). — Is the Russian able to drink as much of tnis 
 wine as of that ] — He is able to drink as much of the one as of the 
 other. — Have you anything good to drink ] — I have nothing to 
 drink. 
 
 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON.— ®in mxb brmsigste 
 Section, 
 
 The corner, bcr SBtnM ; 
 
 the fountain (well), t>er 23tunncn (is not softened 'n 
 
 the plur.) ; 
 the hole, t>a£ £ocr). 
 
 To leave, to let. £ a f f c n *♦ 
 
 To go for, to fetch. $ o ( e n. 
 
 To send for. |)0lcn (affcn*. 
 
 I leave — he leaves. 3cf) foffe — cr la$t. 
 
 We leave— they leave. £Btr (affcn — fte (affcn. 
 
 You leave. Sfjt foffct (^tc (affen). 
 
 Obs. A. The particle J U , does not precede the infi- 
 nitive joined to the verb kflen. See Lesson XL. Ex. 
 
 We send for bread. ££tr (affcn Srct) t)e(cn. 
 
 We wish to send for wine. 2Btr ruottcn £Bcm t)o(cn (affcn. 
 
 To go for it, to fetch it. 3fyn or c$ fyofen. 
 
 To go for some, to fetch some. SBckfycn, nxkfycS rjekn. 
 
 Thou £> u a 
 
 a In addressing one another, the Germans use the second person singulai 
 and third person plural. The second person singular £)U, thou, is used : 1. 
 In addressing the Supreme Being ; 2. in sublime or serious style and in poetry; 
 
71 
 
 Thou hast — thou art. Bu fyaft — £)u U(t. 
 
 Art thou fatigued ] *8ift £>u mute ? 
 
 I am not fatigued. 3d) bin nict)t mute. 
 
 Thou wilt (wishest), — thou art 3)u rotttft — £)u fcmnft. 
 
 able (canst). 
 
 Art thou willing to make my fire 1 SOBiUft £)u mem geuet anmacfyep * 
 
 I am willing to make it, but I 3d) mill cS cmmacfyen, abet id) Unn 
 
 cannot. ntd)t. 
 
 Thou leavest. ©u Wfieft. 
 
 7%. Sing. £> e t n. Plur. jD c t n e b . 
 
 To £e obliged (must) . stiffen*. 
 
 I must — he must. 3d) mup — cr muf. 
 
 We must — they must. 2Btt miiffen — fie miiffen. 
 
 Thou must — you must. £>u mugt — 3()r muffet or mupt 
 
 (®ie miiffen). 
 
 Obs. B. The infinitive joined to the verb ntuffen is 
 not preceded by the particle jU* (See Lesson XL.) 
 Ex. 
 
 We must work. £Btt miiffen citktten. 
 
 Must you write a letter to your 97luffen (Sie Sftrcm SBtubet etnen 
 
 brother ] 23rtcf fcfyteiben ? 
 
 Is he obliged to go to the market ? Sfluj} cr auf ben SOfatft gefjen ? 
 He is obliged to go thither. @t mup baton cjeben. 
 
 What hast thou to do 1 2Ba$ i)aft £)u $u tljun ? 
 
 I have nothing to do. 3d) fyabe md)tg 511 tfyun. 
 
 What hast thou to drink * 2Ba6 grift £>u $u trinfen ? 
 
 I have nothing to drink. 3d) fyabe mcl)tg 5U trtnfen. 
 
 What has the man to do 1 SBaS f>at bet £ftann ^u tfyun ? 
 
 He is obliged to go into the (St mup in ben £Balb gefyen. 
 
 wood. 
 
 This evening (to-night). { f$^*^ 
 In the evening. |f §><f jg*» (^ve). 
 
 This mor ning, Jf|KS n ( . aCCUSatiVe) * 
 
 In the mornino- I + ® C * ^ or 9 cn * (genitive). 
 
 in the morning. j f ?Cm ^ crgen# 
 
 3. it is a mark of intimacy among friends, and is employed by parents and 
 children, brothers and sisters, husbands and wives, towards one another : in 
 general it implies familiarity founded on affection and fondness. In polite 
 conversation, persons always address each other in the third person plural. 
 The third person singular and second person plural also, especially the for) *^r, 
 are frequently used towards inferiors, as servants, &c. In writing, the > 
 nouns of address : ^U, <£te and 3>fyr, have a capital initial letter. 
 b T>?h\ and T^ctne, thy, are declined exactly as mem and ttiei** -**. 
 
72 
 
 EXERCISES. 64. 
 
 Wifl you go tor some sugar] — I will go for some. — Son (9Q?etn 
 ©ofjn), wilt Jhcu go for some water] — Yes, father (nicin SSatct), I 
 will go for some. — Whither wilt thou go ]— I will go to the well 
 in order to fetch some water. — Where is thy brother] — He is at 
 the well. — Will you send for my son] — I will send for him. — 
 Will the captain senu lor my child] — He will send for him (C6). — 
 Where is he ] — He is in a corner of the ship. — Can you make a 
 hole in the (with accusaiive) table ] — I can make one. — Art thou 
 able to write a letter to me! — I am able to write one to you. — 
 Must I go any whither] — Thou must go into the garden. — Must I 
 send for anything ] — Thou must send for good wine, good cheese, 
 and good bread. — What must I do ]— You must write a long letter. 
 — To whom must I write a long letter ] — You must write one tc 
 your friend. 
 
 65. 
 
 What must we do ] — You must go into the forest in order to 
 cut some wood. — What has the Englishman to do] — He has 
 nothing to do. — Has the Spaniard anything to do ] — He has to 
 work. — Where can he work ] — He can work in his room and in 
 mine. — When will you give me some money ] — I will give you 
 some this evening. — Must I come to your house ] — You must come 
 to my house. — When must I come to your house ] — This morning. 
 — Must I come to your house in the morning or in the evening] — 
 You must come in the morning and in the evening. — Whitber 
 must I go ] — You must go to the great square in order to speak to 
 the merchants. — Where must the peasant go to ] — He must go into 
 the field in order to cut some hay. — Must I keep anything (for) 
 you (Sfynen) ] — You must keep (for) me (nut) my good gold and 
 my good works. — Must the children of our friends do anything]— 
 They must work in the morning and in the evening. — What must 
 the tailor mend (for) you ] — He must mend my old coat (for) me. 
 — Which chicken must the cook kill ] — He must kill this and 
 that. — Must I send you these or those books ] — You must send 
 me (both) these and those. 
 
 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON.-gtoei mtt> bxmBlQBte 
 Cation. 
 
 As far as. ■$ t £ (an adverb of place). 
 
 How far? £t« roc()in ? (See Lesson XXVII, 
 
 Rule 2.) 
 As far as the corner. 23t$ in t>cn SBtnfeL 
 
 As far as the end of the road. 93 i6 on fraS (5nt>c t>c$ £Be$e& 
 
73 
 
 The end, 
 
 the end (the extremity), 
 
 the road, the way, 
 
 To the bottom of the cask. 
 To the bottom of the well. 
 To the bottom of the wells. 
 
 The bottom, 
 the garret, 
 the ground, 
 the cask, 
 the purse, 
 
 I go, am going — he goes 
 
 fca£ (Snbe (has no plural) ; 
 ba$ (Snbe (plur. tie (Snbcn) ; 
 t>cr 2Beg. 
 
 23t$ auf ben SBcbcn bc$ gaffe*. 
 <8tS auf ben ©runfc bc$ 25runnen& 
 23 te auf ben @runb bet* 23runneru 
 
 bcr 23oben ; 
 bet 25obcn ; 
 bcr ©runb ; 
 
 t)a$ gap ; 
 ber 33eute(. 
 
 is 3d) gel$ — cr gefjet or gefyt. 
 
 going. 
 We go, are going — they go, are 2Btt gefyen — ftc gefyen. 
 
 going. 
 Thou goest, art going — you go, £)u gcf)eft or geljft — 3()t yr)et 01 
 
 are going. gef)t (<Ste gefyen). 
 
 All, every* 11 { I, 
 
 St 1 1, is declined like the definite article. It is nevei 
 preceded or followed by an article, but may be so by 
 a pronoun. 
 
 Every day. 
 Every morning. 
 Every evening. 
 
 At. 
 
 At what o'clock 1 
 At what time ] 
 At one o'clock. 
 
 Half. 
 
 At half past three. 
 At a quarter past one. 
 At a quarter past eleven. 
 At a quarter to one. 
 At twelve o'clock. 
 
 At twelve o'clock at night (mid- Urn fitter nad)t 
 night). 
 
 The quarter, bat SStertcl, 
 
 t 2Clte Sage. 
 f 2Me gjiergen. 
 t TOe m>enb. 
 
 it m. 
 
 Urn nricmel ltf)t ? 
 
 Urn rocWfee 3ett ? 
 
 Urn ctnS or urn ctn Ufyt.* 
 
 £a (6. 
 
 f Urn Ijafb trier, 
 f Urn ctn SStcrtcl auf ^vocu 
 t Um ctn SSkttel auf aroittf. 
 t Urn btet $iertet auf etn& 
 Um groctf or um jroolf ttr)r^ 
 
 A£ present, now. 
 
 To go out. 
 
 To remain, to stay. 
 
 3 C 1 1. 
 
 2Cu$geF)cn* 
 23 t e t b e n *. 
 
 (au^uger)en) 
 
 * Uf)r signifies clock, watch, and not hour, which is translated by (Stunfce. 
 When we say: UStetuel Ul)r tft e$? it means: SBtemel tfl e$ auf bet U$t? 
 How much is it upon the clock I For this reason we may leave out the word 
 Ufyr, when v r e say : um etrtg, um $tt>5ff, as above. 
 4 
 
74 
 
 When du you wish to go out ? 
 
 I wish to go out now. 
 
 To remain (to stay) at home. 
 
 £Bcnn roetlcn <Ste auSgefyen? 
 3d) null jegt auSgeften. 
 3u £aufc MetOcn*- 
 
 Here. 
 
 £iet. 
 
 To remain here. 
 
 •g>icr Mct&cn' 
 
 TAere. 
 
 2) a. 
 
 To remain there. 
 
 ©a blcikn* 
 
 Are you going to your brother ? 
 
 I am going to him. 
 
 We are — they are. 
 
 You are. 
 
 We have — they have. 
 
 You have. 
 
 Are your brothers at home % 
 They are at home. 
 They are not at home. 
 Are the men thirsty ] 
 
 Have your friends my books'? 
 They have them not. 
 Have they time to write 1 
 
 To thee. 
 
 Thee. 
 
 ©cfjcn @tc ju Sljtem SStubet? 
 
 3d) gcfye $u if)m. 
 
 SOSir finb — fie fmfc. 
 
 3br fetb (©tc finb). 
 
 2Bit F)abcn — fie fyaben. 
 
 3()r f)abct or fjafct (£?te fjafcen) 
 
 ©tnb Sfjte SBriibct $u £aufe ? 
 ©tc finb $u £aufe. 
 ©ie finb ntd)t 311 £>aufe. 
 (Sinb tie banner burfttg? 
 
 &abm 3f)te gxeunbe metne SSucfyet? 
 (Sic fyaben fie ntcfyt. 
 £akn fie Sett 311 fcfyretkn ? 
 
 £)tt (dative). 
 
 2) id) (accusative). 
 
 O&s. Do and am, when used as auxiliaries, are nevei 
 expressed in German. Ex. 
 
 Do you wish to take me to my 
 
 father 1 
 I wish to take thee to him. 
 Are you will ing to give me a 
 
 knife 1 
 I am willing to give thee one. 
 Am I going to him 1 
 Thou art not going to him, but 
 
 to me. 
 
 Swollen <Ste mid) $u meinem SSatci 
 
 ftif)ven ? 
 3d) will .(Did) gu tfjm fiiljren. 
 SMen ©ic nut ein aflcflet gefcen ? 
 
 3d) will £)it etnS gefcetu 
 ®ef)e id) $u ifjm ? 
 
 £>u jjefjeft tucfyt $u ifjm, fonbern $u 
 mtr. 
 
 EXERCISES. 66. 
 
 How far do you wish to go ] — I wish to go as far as the end of 
 the forest. — How for does your brother wish to go 1 — He wishes 
 to go as far as the end of that road. — How far does the wine go 1 
 — It goes to the bottom of the cask. — How far does the water go 1 
 — It goes to the bottom of the well. — Whither art thou going ] — 
 I am going to the market. — Whither are we going? — We are going 
 into the country. — Are you going as far as the square '? — I arr 
 
75 
 
 going as far as the fountain. — When does your cook go to the 
 market 1 — He goes there every morning. — Can you speak to the 
 nobleman? — I can speak to him every day. — Can I see your 
 father 1 — You can see him every evening. — At what o'clock can I 
 see him 1 — You can see him every evening at eight o'clock. — Will 
 you come to me to-day ] — I cannot come to you to-day, but to-mor- 
 row. — At what o'clock will you come to-morrow 1 — I will come at 
 half past eight. — Can you not come at a quarter past eight ] — I 
 cannot. — At what o'clock does your son go to the captain 1 — He 
 goes to him at a quarter before one. — At what o'clock is your 
 Friend at home ] — At midnight. 
 
 67. 
 
 Have you a mind to go out ] — I have no mind to go out. — When 
 Will you go out ] — I will go out at half past three. — Does your 
 father wish to go out ] — He does not wish to go out ; he wishes to 
 remain at home. — Are you willing to remain here, my dear (Ucb) 
 friend 1 — I cannot remain here, I must go to the warehouse. — Must 
 you go to your brother ] — I must go to him. — At what o'clock must 
 you write your letters ] — I must write them at midnight. — Do you 
 go to your neighbour in the evening or in the morning ] — I go to 
 him (both) in the evening and in the morning. — W^here are you 
 going to now ] — I am going to the play. — Where are you going to 
 to-night ] — I am going nowhither ; I must remain at home in order 
 io write letters. — Are your brothers at home 1 — They are not there. 
 — Where are they] — They are in the country. — Where are your 
 friends going to 1 — They are going home. — Has your tailor as 
 many children as your shoemaker] — He has quite as many of them 
 (tfyrer). — Have the sons of your shoemaker as many boots as their 
 father ] — They have (focren) more than he. — Have the children of 
 )ur hatter as much bread as wine 1 — They have more of the one 
 than of the other. — Has our carpenter one more son 1 — He has 
 several more. — Are the Italians thirsty ] — They are thirsty and 
 hungry. — Have they anything to do ] — They have nothing to do. — 
 Are the children of the Irish hungry or thirsty ] — They are neither 
 hungry nor thirsty, but fatigued.. 
 
 68. 
 
 Have you time to go out ] — I have no time to go out. — What 
 have you to do at home ] — I must write letters to my friends. — 
 Must you sweep your room 1 — I must sweep it. — Are you obliged 
 to lend your brothers money ] — I am obliged to lend them some. — 
 Must you go mtothe garden? — I must go thither. — At what o'clock 
 must you go thither ] — I must go thither at a quarter past twelve, 
 — Are you obliged to go to my father at eleven o'clock at night 
 (^benfcs) 1 — I am obliged to go to him at midnight. — Where are 
 the brothers of our bailiff] — They are in the great forest in order 
 •o cut great trees. — Have they money to buy bread and wine]— - 
 They have some. — Are our children wrong in going ($u gerjcn) to 
 
76 
 
 the English ? — They are not wrong in going ($u gefyen) to them.— 
 Must the children of the French go to the children of the English 1 
 — They must go to them. — Is the Russian right in remaining ($u 
 bletbcn) with the Turk 1 — He is not wrong in remaining with him. 
 — Will you send for some wine and glasses 1 — I will neither send 
 for wine nor for glasses ; I am not thirsty. — Is thy father thirsty 1 
 — He is not thirsty. — Are you willing to give me some money in 
 order to go for some bread ] — I am willing to give you some in 
 order to go for some bread and beer. 
 
 THIRTY.THIRD LESSON.— Btti tttib bmssigste 
 Cection. 
 
 To sell. 
 
 To tell, to say. 
 To tell a man. 
 
 The word, 
 
 the favour, 
 
 the pleasure, 
 To give pleasure. 
 To do a favour. 
 
 Will you tell the servant to 
 
 make the fire ] 
 I wi«l tell him to make it. 
 Will you tell the servant to buy 
 
 a broom 1 
 I will tell him to buy one. 
 
 It is. 
 Late. 
 
 W T hat o'clock is it ] 
 
 It is three o'clock. 
 
 It is twelve o'clock. 
 
 It is a quarter past twelve. 
 
 It wants a quarter to six. 
 
 It is half past one. 
 
 To be acquainted with (to know). 
 
 To be acquainted with (to know) 
 
 a man. 
 Do you know (are you acquainted 
 
 with) this man ] 
 1 know him (am acquainted with 
 
 Mm). 
 
 83etfaufen. 
 @ a g c n. 
 
 (Stnem 93?anne fagcn. 
 fcajg 2Bcrt; 
 t>et ©cfatten ; 
 tag 33crgnuQcn. 
 SScrcuiuQcn macfycn. 
 (Stnen ©efatten tfyun*. 
 
 Snellen <Stc km SScbtcntcn fagen, 
 
 t>ag §cuer an$umcid)cn ? 
 3d) will tym fagen, eg an$umacf)cn. 
 Swollen @te t>em 23et>tcntcn fagen, 
 
 ctnen S3cfcn $u faufen ? 
 3d) will tljm fagen, etnen $u faufen. 
 
 ©pat. 
 
 f mi fpat tji eg ? 
 
 t SBtcmcl ill)t iji eg ? 
 
 @s ift fcrei Ufjr. 
 
 (£g ift grwHf Gwolf U&r). 
 
 t S*g ift etn 23tettc( auf etng. 
 
 t <£§ ift brci SBkrtcl auf fecl)g. 
 
 t <S$ ift f)al& $wct. 
 
 Jt e n n e n (governs the accus.) 
 
 (Stncn OD^cnfcl)cn fennen*. 
 
 £enncn <Ste fetcfen 93?ann ? 
 
 3d) fenne ir)n* 
 
77 
 
 To want. p S t f) t g f> a b c n * (governs th. 
 
 xv «/«/** j accusative). 
 
 rj, , . „ , - 5 S3en(5 1 bt At fc t n * (governs the 
 
 To hem want of. | ge nitive). 
 
 I want it. S4 fafce e* notr)tg. 
 
 I am in want of it. 3d) bin beffen benotfytgt. (See Les- 
 
 son XVI.) 
 Do you want this hat? £aben @te biefen £ut nb'tl)tg? 
 
 Are you in want of this hat ] ©int> <Ste btcfc^ £ute$ fcentftfjigt ? 
 I want it. 3d) (jabe ifyn notf)tcj. 
 
 I am in want of it. 3d) bin beffen benotfytgt. 
 
 Do you want this money 1 fyaUn <&K btefeS ©ctt> notfjtg? 
 
 Are you in want of this money 1 (Stnb <Sie btcfeS ©ctbe^ 6cnctr)igt ? 
 I want it. 3d) babe c$ nStfytg. 
 
 I am in want of it. 3d) bin beffen bcnotfjtgt. 
 
 I do not. want it. 3d) babe e$ ntd)t noting. , 
 
 I am not in want of it. 3d) bin beffen nid)t knotty tgt. 
 
 I do not want anything. ) ( W t. * „ & «** M a*t:^ 
 
 I am not in want of anything. J Sd > >> o6e m *« "W* 
 
 Do you want money? > g. . ._ 
 
 Are you in want of money - $ L ; a 
 
 I want some. ) ^ * , , ,r j «•*«• 
 
 I am in want of some. 5 ** "^ "*** ""^ 
 
 I do not want any. ) ~ r , , e ■ . a „„., . 
 
 I am not in want of any. \ ^ i)aU kin * not W 
 
 O&s. ji. 58en6tf)tgt fettt # , must never be used when 
 the noun is not preceded by a determinative word like 
 the definite article, or a possessive or demonstrative 
 pronoun. 
 
 What ? 2B ci $ ? 
 
 What do you want 1 ) ^ , , , ~. „., . 
 
 What are yon in want of] \ ®** <> fl6cn ® ,c not & l 8 ? 
 
 Ois. J5. All the cases of the personal pronouns 
 have been more or less employed thus far, except the 
 genitive, which is as follows : 
 
 Of me — of thee — of him. Reiner — £)ctner — fetner. 
 
 Of us — of you — of them. Unfer — (Suer (Styrer) — ^) rcr (f° 7 
 
 all genders). 
 
 Is he in want of me ? 3ft ct metner benottytcjt ? 
 
 He is in want of you. (§r ijl 3brcr benfc'ttyigt. (See Les- 
 
 son XVI.) 
 
 Are you in want of these books'? (Sinb ®'ie btefct 25ficbet benottyigt? 
 
 I am in want of them. 3d) bin bevfelben benottytgt. 
 
 Is he in want of my brothers 1 3ft er metner SSrubiT benot^igt ? 
 
 He is in want of them (£t tft tbret benottytqt. (See Les* 
 
 son XVI.) 
 
78 
 
 EXERCISES. 69 
 
 Will you do me a favour ] — Yes, Sir, what one (rociS fut ctnen) 1 
 -Will you tell your brother to sell me his horse 1 — I will tell him 
 to sell it you. — Will you tell my servants to sweep my large 
 rooms ] — 1 will tell them to sweep them. — Will you tell your son 
 to come to my father ] — I will tell him to come to him. — Have you 
 anything to tell me] — I have nothing to tell you (put the dative 
 before the aceus.). — Have you anything to say to my father 7—1 
 have a word to say to him. — Do your brothers wish to sell their 
 carriage 1 — They do not wish to sell it. — John (Solemn) ! art thou 
 there (t»a) ] — Yes, Sir, I am here (t>a). — Wilt thou go to my hatter 
 to tell him to mend my hat ] — I will go to him. — Wilt thou go to 
 the tailor to tell him to mend my coats ] — I will go to him. — Art 
 thou willing to go to the market ] — I am willing to go thither. — 
 What has the merchant to sell ] — He has beautiful leather gloves, 
 combs, and good cloth to sell. — Has he any shirts to sell ] — He 
 has some to sell. — Does he wish to sell me his horses 1 — He 
 wishes to sell them to you. 
 
 70. 
 
 Is it late]— It is not late. — What o'clock is if? — It is a quarter 
 past twelve. — At what o'clock does your father wish to go out ]— - 
 He wishes to go out at a quarter to nine. — Will he sell this or that 
 horse] — He will sell neither this nor that. — Does he wish to buy 
 this or that r.oat ] — He wishes to buy both. — Has he one horse 
 more to sell ] — He has one more, but he does not wish to sell it. — 
 Has he one carriage more to sell ] — He has not one more carriage 
 to sell ; but he has a few more oxen to sell. — When will he sell 
 them] — He will sell them to-day. — Will he sell them in the 
 morning or in the evening ] — He will sell them this evening. — At 
 what o'clock ] — At half past rive. — Can you go to the baker ] — I 
 cannot go to him ; it is late. — How late is it ] — It is midnight. 
 — Do you wish to see that man ] — I wish to see him, in order to 
 know him. — Does your father wish to see my brothers ] — He 
 wishes to see them, in order to know them. — Does he wish to see 
 my horse ] — He wishes to see it. — At what o'clock does he wish 
 to see it ] — He wishes to see it at six o'clock. — Where does he 
 wish to see it] — He wishes to see it in (cutf) the great square. — 
 Has the German much corn to sell ] — He has but little to sell. — 
 What knives has the merchant to sell ] — He has good knives to 
 sell. — How many more knives has he] — He has six more. — Has 
 the Irishman much more wine ] — He has not much more. — Hast 
 thou wine enough to drink] — -I have not much, but enough. — Art 
 thou able to drink much wine ] — I am able to drink much. — Canst 
 thou drink some every day ] — I can drink some every morning and 
 every evening. — Can thy brother drink as much as thou] — He can 
 j rink more than I. 
 
79 
 
 71. 
 
 What are you in want of ] — I am in want of a good hat. — Are 
 f om in want of this knife 1 — I am in want of it. — Do you want 
 money] — I want some. — Does your brother want pepper! — He 
 does not want any. — Does he want some boots ] — He does not 
 want any. — What does my brother want ] — He wants nothing". — 
 Who wants some sugar] — Nobody wants any. — Does anybody 
 want money ! — Nobody wants any. — Does your father want any- 
 thing] — He wants nothing. — What do I want] — You want no- 
 thing.— Art thou in want of my book ] — I am in want of it. — Is 
 thy father in want of it ]— He is not in want of it. — Does your 
 friend want this stick] — He wants it. — Does he want these or 
 those corks ] — He wants neither these nor these. — Are you in want 
 of me ] — I am in want of thee.— When do you want me ] — At 
 present. — What have you to say to me ] — I have a word to say to 
 thee. — Is your son in want of us] — He is in want of ycu and 
 your brothers. — Are you in want of my servants ] — I am in want 
 of them. — Does any one want my brother ] — No one wants him. 
 
 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON.— bier mxb irrmsigste 
 Cation. 
 
 THE PRESENT. 
 
 There is no distinction in German between : I love, 
 do love and am loving. All these present tenses are 
 expressed by : id) fiebe, I love. 
 
 In the regular verbs the third person singular and 
 second person plural of the present tense indicative 
 mode are alike, and terminate (even in most of the ir- 
 regular verbs) in c t or t The first and third persons 
 plural in all German ve^bs are like the infinitive. 
 
 To love. g i c b c n, 
 
 love, £ loves, } 
 
 do love, he 3 does love, >3d) (tcuc, er ftckt or ttcut, 
 
 am loving, ^ is loving. ) 
 
 Thou \\ZtLe, you fevef I** «*%% 8J *? 
 # „„«. 1 • J j i •' { Oct or (cut ((Stc ItebcnV 
 f art loving. ( are loving. ) v 
 
 i love, C love, } 
 
 We < do love, they / do love, >£Btt Ucfccn, ftc lic&cn. 
 
 £ are loving- £ are loving. ) 
 
80 
 
 Obs. A. The letter e is often rejected in the second 
 and third persons singular and in the second person 
 plural of the present tense ; but never in verbs the 
 root of which ends in b, t, tf), ft, or in two or more 
 consonants, after which t or jl could not be distinctly 
 pronounced, as in : fenben*, to send ; bit fenbe^ er fenbet, 
 3fyr fenbet ; orbnen, to set in order ; bit orbttefi, er orbnet, 
 3fyr orbnet, &c. On the other hand this contraction 
 always takes place in verbs that end in e £ it or ern, 
 as : fcfymeirfjeht, to flatter ; in fdjmetcfyefft, er fcfymetefyeft, Sfyr 
 fcfymeicfyeft ; cwbern, to alter ; bu dnberft, er dnbert, 3fyr cin^ 
 bert (See Lesson XXIV. the Infinitive.) 
 
 To want* 
 
 Do you want your money ? 
 I war* it. 
 
 To set in order* 
 To open. 
 
 Do you open the window 1 
 I open i \ 
 
 23 r a u d) e n (governs the accusa 
 tive). 
 
 9Bcaud)cn <Sie 3$t G5ett) ? 
 3cb fcrcmcfye e& 
 
 £) x t> n c n. 
 
 Deffnen (aufmacfyen, cmfeumad)cn), 
 
 SBtodjcn &t t>a$ gcnftcr cmf ? 
 3d) macfye eg auf. 
 
 Obs. B. German verbs are generally not irregular 
 in the present tense, but rather in the imperfect and 
 past participle. Some, however, are irregular in the 
 second and third persons singular ; and as pupils 
 should be acquainted with all the irregularities, we 
 shall always mark these two persons whenever they 
 present any. Of those which we have seen already, 
 the following are irregular in the second and third 
 persons singular. 
 
 To give : 
 
 thou givest — he gives. 
 To see : 
 
 thou seest —he sees. 
 To speak : 
 
 thou speakest — he speaks. 
 To take, to carry : 
 
 thou earnest — he carries. 
 To wash : 
 
 thou washest — he washes. 
 To break : 
 
 thou breakest — he breaks. 
 
 (Sjeben* : 
 
 2)u gtfcft — er gtftt. 
 (Sefyen* : 
 
 ©u ficljft — er fteljt. 
 ©predjen* : 
 
 £)u fpricftft — er fpridjfc 
 Sragen* : 
 
 ©u tragfi — er tr&jt. 
 2£afd)cn* : 
 
 £>u tt>afd)e|t — er w&ffiu 
 3crked)en*: 
 
 £)u ^erbrtcfyjt— er serbrtchl 
 
81 
 
 DCP Personal pronouns not standing in the nomina* 
 tive, take their place after the verb. 
 
 Do you love him ? fitefccn (Sic i r) n 1 
 
 I do love him* 3d) (tefcc t I) n. 
 
 I do not love him. Set) Ue6e t f) n n i dfj U 
 
 Does the servant sweep the jtcfyrt bet 23cbiente ba$ 3imme* 
 room ? au^l 
 
 Obs. C. In simple tenses, as the present or imper- 
 fect, the separable particle is always placed at the 
 end of the sentence ; unless this begins with a con- 
 junction, a relative pronoun, or a relative adverb, in 
 which case the particle is not separated from the verb, 
 which then takes its place at the end. 
 
 He sweeps it. (?t Fefyrt e$ cui& 
 
 Does your father go out to-day 1 (5kl)t 3()t SSatcu fyeute cute 1 
 
 He does not go out to-day. (St cjefyt fyeutc ntcfyt cm$* 
 
 exercises. 72. 
 
 Do you love your brother 1— -I love him. — »Does your father love 
 him ] — He does not love him. — Dost thou love me, my good child I 
 — I love thee. — Dost thou love this ugly man ] — I do not love him. 
 — Does your father want his servant] — He does want him. — Dost 
 thou want anything 1 — I want nothing.— Does the servant open the 
 window ] — He does open it. — Dost thou open it] — 1 do not open 
 it. — Dost thou set my books in order? — I do set them in order. — - 
 Does the servant set our boots or our shoes in order 1 — He sets 
 (both) the one and the other in order. — Do our children love us ]— 
 They do love us. — Do we love our enemies ] — We do not love 
 them. — Do you want your money 1 — I do want it. — Do we want 
 our carriage 1 — We do want it. — Are our friends in want of their 
 clothes (.frletbet) 1 — They are in want of them.- — What do you give 
 me '? — I do not give thee anything. — Do you give my brother the 
 book 1 — T do give it him. — Do you give him a hat 1 — I do give him 
 one. 
 
 73. 
 
 Dost thou see anything ] — I see nothing. — Do you see my large 
 garden 1 — I do see it. — Does your father see our ship ] — He does 
 not see it, but we see it. — How many ships do you see ] — We see 
 a good many; we see more than thirty of them.— Do you give me 
 books'? — I do give thee some. — Does our father give you money] 
 — He does not give us any. — Does he give you hats 1 — He does 
 not give us any. — Do you see many sailors 1 — We see more 
 soldiers (bet <Sott>at, plur. en) than sailors. — Do the soldiers see 
 manv storehouses 1 — They see more gardens than storehouses , — 
 4 # 
 
82 
 
 Do the English give you good cakes ] — They do give us some 
 Do you give me as much wine as beer ] — I give thee as mu<jl A 
 the one as of the other. — Can you give me some more cakes 1--I 
 can give thee no more ; I have not many more. — Do you give me 
 the horse which you have ] — I do not give you that which I have.-— 
 Which horse do you give me ] — I give you that of my brother. 
 
 74. 
 
 Do you speak to the neighbour ] — I do speak to him. — Does he 
 Speak to you ] — He does not speak to me. — Do your brothers speak 
 to you ] — They do speak to us. — When dost thou speak to thy 
 father ] — I speak to him every morning and every evening. — What 
 dost thou carry ] — I carry a book. — Where dost thou carry it to 1 — I 
 carry it home. — Do you wash your stockings ] — I do not wash 
 them. — Does your brother wash as many shirts as stockings ] — He 
 washes more of the one than of the other. — Hast thou many more 
 stockings to wash ] — I have not many more to wash. — How many 
 more shirts have your friends to wash 1 — They have two more to 
 wash. — What does your servant carry ] — He carries a great table. 
 — What do these men carry ] — They carry our wooden chairs. — 
 Where do they carry them to ] — They carry them into the large 
 room of our brothers. — Do your brothers wash their stockings or 
 ours] — They neither wash yours nor theirs ; they wash those ot 
 their children. 
 
 75. 
 
 Dost thou not break my glass 1 — No, Sir, I do not break it.— >Do 
 he sons of our neighbours break our glasses ] — They do break them. 
 — Who tears your books] — The young man tears them. — Do you 
 not tear them ] — I do not tear them. — Do the soldiers cut trees 1 — 
 They do cut some. — Do you buy as many hats as gloves ] — I buy 
 more of the one than of the other. — Does your brother buy any 
 bread] — He is obliged to buy some; he is hungry. — Do oui 
 brothers buy any wine ] — They are obliged to buy some ; they are 
 thirsty. — Do you break anything. — We do not break anything. — 
 Who breaks our chairs ] — Nobody breaks them. — Dost thou buy 
 anything] — I do not buy anything. — Who keeps (takes care of) 
 our money ] — My father keeps it. — Do your brothers take care of 
 my books ] — They do take care of them. — Dost thou take care of 
 anything] — I do not take care of anything. 
 
 76. 
 
 Does the tailor mend our coats ] — He does mend them. — What 
 dost thou write] — I write a letter. — To whom dost thou write a 
 letter ] — To my father. — When does thy brother write his letters ] 
 — He writes them in the morning and in the evening. — What dost 
 thou now. — I do nothing.— At what o'clock do you go to the the- 
 atre ] — At a quarter past seven. — What o'clock is it now ] — It 
 
83 
 
 wants a quarter to six. — At what o'clock does your cook go to tha 
 market] — He goes there at five o'clock (put bafytn to the end). — 
 Does he go thither in the evening] — No, he goes thither in the 
 morning. — Do you go any whither ] — I go no whither; but my 
 brothers go into the garden. — Dost thou drink anything ] — I drink 
 nothing ; but the Italian drinks good wine and good beer. — Do you 
 send me one more book ] — I do not send you one more. — Are you 
 answering his letter ] — I am answering it. — Does he answer thine 1 
 —He does answer it. — What do you say ] — I say nothing. — Must 
 I give him money to remain here ] — You must give him some to 
 go out. — Is this man selling anything ] — He is selling good cakes. 
 ■ — What do you sell] — I sell nothing; but my friends sell nails, 
 knives, and horse-shoes. — What does the man say ]— He says no- 
 thing.— What art thou looking for ] — I am not looking for any- 
 thing. 
 
 *** We should fill volumes, were we to give all the exercises that are applica- 
 ble to our lessons, and which the pupils may very easily compose by them- 
 selves. We shall therefore merely repeat what we have already mentioned 
 at the commencement : pupils who wish to improve rapidly ought to compose 
 a great many sentences in addition to those given ; but they must pronounce 
 them aloud. This is the only way by which they will acquire the habit of 
 speaking fluently. 
 
 THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. — Mtlf ttltb frrmsigste 
 
 Action. 
 
 The pain, 
 
 bet <Sd)met$ ; 
 
 the tooth, 
 
 ber 3at)n ; 
 
 the ear, 
 
 ba£ £)r)r (is not softened 
 
 
 takes en in the plur.) ; 
 
 the neck, 
 
 bet £a(6 ; 
 
 the ache, 
 
 t>a$ SBefj (plur. en a ) ; 
 
 the evil, 
 
 ba$ Uefcef. 
 
 Sore (t/Z, wicked) . 
 
 ScTe. 
 
 Bad. 
 
 ©d)(tmm. 
 
 Evil, ill. 
 
 Ue&cl. 
 
 and 
 
 Have you a sore finger ] 
 
 I have a sore finger. 
 
 Has your brother a sore foot ] 
 
 He has a sore eye. 
 
 vVe have sore e\es. 
 
 £akn <S:e etnen Wffett ginger? 
 3d) babe etnen befen gtngct. 
 £at 3f)t 93tuber etnen tnjfen #u£ ! 
 (St f)at etn 6ofe$ 2Cua,e. 
 ££tt rjafcen fccfe 2Cugen. 
 
 v$)a$ SBefy, the ache, is employed in the plural only to denote the pangs ef 
 hildbirth. 
 
M 
 
 The head-ache, bag jtopftoeft f 
 
 the tooth-ache, bat 3af)nn)ef) ; 
 
 the ear-ache, $>a§ £)f)remt>cf) ; 
 
 a sore throat, §a-f$tt>cf) ; 
 
 a pain in one's back $ucfenfd)mer$. 
 
 He has the head-ache. (Sr fyat $opffd)mer$en.« 
 
 I have the tooth-ache. 3d} h a bz 3afynfd)mcr$eifc 
 
 The elbow* t>er ©tlOccjcn ; 
 
 the back, bet 9?iicfcn ; 
 
 the knee, bag Jtnie^ d 
 
 To bring. S3 1 1 n 0, e n *„ 
 
 To find. ginbcn*. 
 
 That which {what). 2£a6 (basientge wctcfye*, bag roc!* 
 d)Cg). 
 
 05s. J.. SBa3 is often used instead of baSjemge, tt>ef* 
 cf)e3 or ba£, toelcfye^, that which. (See Lesson XXIX.) 
 
 Do you find what you are look- gtnbcn <&k, \va g (Sic fud)cn ? 
 
 ing for ] 
 I find what I am looking for. 3d) fktbe, wag id) fud)C. 
 He does not find what he is look- (St fmbet ritcfyt, mag et fucfyt. 
 
 ing* for. 
 We find what we are looking for. Sfi*it ftnbcn, mag mir fucbcn. 
 1 have what I want. 3d) f)abe, mag id) &raud)C. 
 
 I mend what you mend. 3d) bcfferc aug, wa$ @ic ausfref 
 
 fern. • 
 
 Ois. 5. As the second member of this phrase be- 
 gins with a relative pronoun, the particle au$ is not 
 separated from its verb which is removed to the end* 
 (See Obs. C. Lesson XXXIV. and rule of Syntax, Les- 
 son XL VII.) 
 
 To read (thou reddest, he reads). £ c f e n * (bu ftefcft, cr ftefet o? 
 
 Kept). 
 To study. <S t « b t r c n . 
 
 To learn. £ c r n c rt . 
 
 Obs. C. The particle J tt does not precede the infini- 
 tive joined to the verb ferttett, to learn. (See Lesson 
 XL. Ex. 
 
 b Compound words are of the gender of the last component which expresses 
 the fundamental or general idea. 
 
 c <& corner j, pain, is here in the plural. In compound words, SBety is em* 
 ployed in the singular, and ©corner J in the plural, thus : 3d) $abt ^Opf»e^ 
 and : 3d) fxtjbe <ftopffd)mer$en, I hav£ the head-ache. 
 
 d 2)(t§ fink, the knee, does not take an additional e in the plural and is ne 
 vertlieless pronounced as if it did. 
 
85 
 
 I leam to read. t 3d) letne lefen* 
 
 He learns to write. f (Sr (cent fdjretfcctt* 
 
 French, frangoftfc^ (an adjective*) % 
 
 English, engltfd) ; 
 
 German, bcuffd). 
 
 Do you learn German ? 2crnen ©ic t)cutfd) ? 
 
 I do learn it. 3d) (erne c£* 
 
 I do not leam it. ^d) (erne tx> ntd)t* 
 
 exercises. 77. 
 
 Where is your father ] — He is at home. — Does he not go out '?—* 
 He is not able to go out ; he has the head-ache.— Hast thou the 
 nead-ache ] — I have not the head-ache, but the ear-ache. — What 
 day of the month is it (Den rmemetiTen fyaben nut, Lesson XXI) to- 
 day '? — It is the twelfth to-day. — What day of the month is (Dct 
 itncmeffte tft) to-morrow ? — 'To-morrow is the thirteenth. — What 
 teeth have you] — I have good teeth. — What teeth has your bro- 
 ther ] — He has bad teeth. — Has the Englishman the tooth-ache ?— 
 He has not the tooth-ache ; he has a sore eye. — Has the Italian a 
 sore eye V — He has not a sore eye, but a sore foot. — Have I a sore 
 finger] — You have no sore finger, but a sore knee. — Will you cut 
 me some bread ] — I cannot cut you any ; I have sore fingers. — * 
 Will anybody cut me some cheese 1 — Nobody will cut you any. — * 
 Are you looking for any one ] — I am not looking for any one. — 
 Has any one the ear-ache ] — No one has the ear-ache. — What is 
 the painter looking for] — He is not looking for anything. — Whom 
 are you looking for ] — I am looking for your son. — W r ho is look- 
 ing for me ]— No one is looking for you. — -Dost thou find what thou 
 art looking for ] — I do find what I am looking for ; but the captain 
 does not find what he is looking for. 
 
 78. 
 
 Who has a sore throat 1— We have sore throats. — Has any one 
 sore eyes ] — The Germans have sore eyes.— Does the tailor make 
 my coat ] — He does not make it ; he has a pain in his back. — Does 
 the shoemaker make my shoes 1 — He is unable (fann md)t) to make 
 them ; he has sore elbows. — Does the merchant bring us beautiful 
 purses (bet ^Beutel) ]— He cannot go out ; he has sore feet. — Does 
 the Spaniard find the umbrella which he is looking for] — He does 
 find it. — Do the butchers find the sheep which they are looking for ] 
 — They do find them. — Does the tailor find his thimble 1 — He does 
 not find it. — Dost thou find the paper which thou art looking for ?— - 
 I do not find it. — Do we find what we are looking for] — We do 
 not find what we are looking for. — What is the nobleman doing ) 
 —-He does what you are doing. — W T hat is he doing in his room 1— 
 He is reading. 
 
 e Derived from ber ftr<ttt$ofe, the Frenchman. 
 
86 
 
 79. 
 
 Art thou reading ] — I am not reading. — Do the sons of the noble* 
 men study? — They do study. — What are they studying] — They 
 are studying German. — Art thou studying English] — I have no 
 time to study it. — Are the Dutch looking for this or that ship ]— 
 They are looking for both. — Is the servant looking for this or that 
 broom ] — He is neither looking for this nor that. — Who is learning 
 German ] — The sons of the captains and those of the noblemen are 
 .earning it. — When does your friend study French] — He studies 
 it in the morning. — At what o'clock does he study it ] — He studies 
 it at ten o'clock. — Does he study it every day] — He studies it 
 every morning and every evening. — What are the children of the 
 carpenter doing ] — They are reading. — Are they reading German ] 
 — They are reading French ; but we are reading English. — What 
 books does your son read ] — He reads good books. — Does he read 
 German books ] — He reads French books. — What book do you 
 read ] — I read a German book. — Do you read as much as my chil- 
 dren] — I read more than they. — Does your father read the book 
 which I read ] — He does not read that which you read, but that 
 which I read. — Does he read as much as I ] — He reads less than 
 you, but he learns more than you. — Do you lend me a book ] — I do 
 lend you one. — Do your friends lend you any books ] — They do lend 
 me some. 
 
 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON.— Qztt)Z tttlb brmsigot* 
 &zttion. 
 
 Spanish, fpcmtfd) (an adjective a ). 
 
 The termination tfcf) serves to form adjectives of the 
 names of nations. Thus : 
 
 Italian, 
 
 ita(temfcf) ; 
 
 Polish, 
 
 petntfd) ; 
 
 Russian, 
 
 rufftfd) ; 
 
 Latin, 
 
 latetntfdf) ; 
 
 Greek, 
 
 gried)tfd& ; 
 
 Arabian, Arabic, 
 
 arabtfcl) ; 
 
 Syrian, Syriac, 
 
 fottfd). 
 
 The Pole, 
 
 bet spote ; 
 
 the Roman, 
 
 bet SWmet ; 
 
 the Greek, 
 
 bet (SJriedb* % 
 
 the Arab, the Arabian, 
 
 bet 2ttG&«* ? 
 
 the Syrian, 
 
 bet ©ptet, 
 
 * Derived from (Span ten, Spain. 
 
87 
 
 Are you a Frenchman] 
 No, Sir, I am a German. 
 
 Is be a tailor? 
 
 No, he is a shoemaker. 
 
 He is a foci. 
 
 TV? -msh, to desire* 
 
 The fool, 
 
 the mouth, 
 
 the memory, 
 Have you a good memory I 
 He has a little mouth. 
 Your b] other hks blue eyes. 
 Do you wish me a good morn- 
 ing? 
 I wish you a good evening. 
 
 Blue, 
 black, 
 
 Instead of. 
 
 To play. 
 
 To listen, to hear. 
 
 Instead of listening. 
 Do you play instead of studying] 
 I study instead of playing. 
 That man speaks instead of list- 
 ening. 
 
 ©tr.b Bit ein gtan^ofe ? 
 
 Stfetn, mctn £>crr, id) bin (in ©tuft 
 f*«r. 
 
 3ft cv ctn ©cfynetbct ? 
 9?ctn, cr if! ctn (Sd)uf)macf)cr. 
 (St tfi ctn 9?arr. 
 
 £Mnfd)cn. 
 
 t>et Stfatt (gen. en) ; 
 bet £Kunb (has no plur.) ; 
 bas ®cbad)tntj} (plur. c)» 
 $aUn @tc ctn gutcS ®ebad)tmp * 
 (St fyat ctncn Hctncn SCKunb. 
 3f)t 23rubcr feat Heme 2Cua.cn. 
 SBunfcfyen (Sic nut ctncn gutcn 
 
 Bergen ? 
 Sep tt>itnfd)c 3&ncn ctncn a,utcn 
 
 2C6cnb. 
 
 fclau ; 
 fd)tt>ar$. 
 
 2Cnftatt ju. 
 (Spt c(cn. 
 $ 8 v e n; 
 
 f 2Cnfiatt ^u fyorcn. 
 f (Sptctcn (Sic, anftatt 311 [iubtrcn ? 
 t 3d) ftubttc, anftatt $u fptc(cn« 
 { Du\ct Sflann fprid)t, anftatt $u 
 Wren. 
 
 ' 2C n f) ft t c n (an^ufjoren, governs 
 
 the accusative). 
 3 u f) '6 t c n Qu$uf)Qten, governs 
 the dative). 
 
 C Sd> Ijorc tf)n an. 
 t3c*) Wre tf)m$u. 
 2(uf Scmanben obct ctroaS rjStcn. 
 
 £) a <?, ro a g. 
 
 To toen to. 
 
 I listen to him. 
 
 To listen tv some one or some- 
 thing. 
 
 That which. 
 
 r#6ten (Sic auf bat, roaS Sfyncn bet 
 Do you listen to what the man! SDtonn fagt? 
 tells you ] I £ercn (Sic auf bat, rcaS bcr 9^ann 
 
 L Sbncnfagt? 
 I do listen to it. Sd) r)orc barauf. b 
 
 b 9lnt)0Vett takes the person in the accusative, and jutyflren in the dative. 
 They never relate to a thing ; but tjorett auf stands either with the perscn of 
 
88 
 
 He listens to what I ;ell him. (St f)8tt auf bag, .t?a$ :d) tfym f<wj« 
 
 To correct. SSetfccffctn, corri.gttcn. 
 
 To ta£-e ojf (as the hat). 2C 6 n e l) m c n * (ofyunetjmcn). 
 
 To ta£e ojf (as clothes). 2Cu$$tef)cn* (ciu$$u$tef)m). 
 
 To take away, 2B e 3 tt l \) m c n*. 
 
 To take. 91 e ^ men*. 
 
 Thou takest, — he takes. 3)u ntmmft, — er ntmmt. 
 
 Thou takest off thy hat. aDu nimmft £Vtmm &ut flb. 
 
 Do you take off your boots ] 3tof)cn (Sic 3fcrc <Sttcfe(n ciu$ ? 
 
 We take off our coats. £Bir gieften unjerc SRocfc au& 
 
 Who takes away the chairs ] SKcr ntmmt bw @t£U)(t rocg ? 
 
 The servant takes them away. £)cr 93ct)ientc ntmmt fie nxej. 
 
 exercises. 80. 
 
 Do you speak Spanish ] — No, Sir, I speak Italian. — Who speaks 
 Polish ]— My brother speaks Polish. — Do our neighbours speak 
 Russian 1 — They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — Do you speak 
 Arabic ? — No, I speak Greek and Latin. — What knife have you \ 
 —I have an English knife. — What money have you there 1 — Is i 
 Italian or Spanish money ] — It is Russian money. — Have you ai 
 Italian hat ] — No, I have a Spanish hat. — Are you a German ]— 
 No, I am an Englishman. — Art thou a Greek ] — No, I am a Span 
 iard. — Are these men Poles'? — No, they are Russians. — Do the 
 Russians speak Polish 1 — They do not speak Polish, but Latin, 
 Greek, and Arabic. — Is your brother a merchant] — No, he is a 
 joiner. — Are these men merchants 1 — No, they are carpenters. — 
 Are we boatmen ] — No, we are shoemakers. — Art thou a fool 1 — I 
 am not a fool. — What is that man 1 — He is a tailor. — Do you wish 
 me anything] — I wish you a good morning. — What does the young 
 man wish me? — He wishes you a good evening. — Whither must I 
 go ] — Thou must go to our friends to wish them a good day (Sag). 
 — Do your children come to me in order to wish me a good evening 1 
 — They come t r you in order to wish you a good morning. 
 
 81. 
 
 Has the nobleman blue eyes ]— He has black eyes and a little 
 mouth. — Hast thou a good memory ] — I have a bad memory, but 
 much courage to learn German. — What dost thou (do) instead of 
 playing ] — I study instead of playing.— Dost thou learn instead of 
 writing 1 — I write instead of learning. — W T hat does the son of oul 
 bailiff (do) 1 — He goes into the garden instead of going into the 
 field. — Do the children of our neighbours road ] — They write in- 
 stead of reading. — What does our cook (do)] — He makes a fire 
 
 the tiling, and always requires the accusative. Ex. 3$ IjBttt tf)tt an, or td) l) fi- 
 re tl)m \vl, 1 listen to him ; but id) ()6te auf ba3, toaS ©ie mix fagen, I listen to 
 what you are telling me. 
 
89 
 
 Instead of going to the market. — Does your rathe/ sell his ox ?-* 
 He sells his horse instead of selling- his ox. — Do the physicians 
 go out] — They remain in their rooms instead of going out. — At 
 what o'clock does our physician come to you 1 — He comes every 
 morning at a quarter to nine. — Does the son of the painter study 
 English ] — He studies Greek instead of studying English. — Does 
 the butcher kill oxen] — He kills sheep instead of killing oxen. — 
 Do y&i; listen to me 1 — I do listen to you. — Does your brother listen 
 to me 1 — He speaks instead of listening to you. — Do you listen to 
 *irat I am telling you ] — I do listen to what you are telling me. 
 
 Does the man listen to what you are telling him ]-— He does listen 
 to it. — Do the children of the physician listen to what we tell them 1 
 — They do not listen to it. — Dost thou listen to what thy brother tells 
 thee ] — I do listen to it. — Do you go to the theatre ] — I am going to 
 the storehouse instead of going to the theatre. — Are you willing to 
 listen to me ] — I am willing to listen to you, but I cannot ; 1 have 
 the ear-ache. — Does thy father correct my notes or thine ] — He 
 corrects neither yours nor mine. — Which notes does he correct 1 — 
 He corrects those which he writes. — Does he listen to what you 
 tell him ] — He does listen to it. — Do you take off your hat in order 
 to speak to my father ] — I do take it off in order to speak to him. — 
 Does thy brother listen to what our father tells him ] — He does 
 listen to it.- — Does our servant go for some beer ] — He goes for 
 some vinegar instead of going for some beer. — Do you correct my 
 letter? — I do not correct it ; I have sore eyes. — Does the servant 
 take off his coat in order to make a fire ] — He does take it off. — 
 Do you take off your gloves in order to give me money 1 — I do 
 take them off in order to give you some. — Does he take off his 
 shoes in order to go to your house ] — He does not take them off. — 
 Who takes away the tables and chairs ] — The servants take them 
 iway. — Will you take away this glass 1 — I have no mind to take i* 
 iway. — Is he wrong to take off his boots ? — He is right to take 
 .hem off. — Dost thou take away anything] — I do not take away 
 mything. — Does anybody take off his hat] — Nobody takes it off. 
 
 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Qkbcn nnb 
 bmssigste jDectiou. 
 
 Wet (moist). $la$ (an adjective). 
 
 To wet (to moisten). $1 a & m a d) i n (nc6cn)« 
 
 To show. 3 c i q c n, m e t f e n * (govern the 
 
 dative*). 
 
 ■ 3^^^ expresses the mere act of showing; roetfen implies showing with 
 tostniction, and is derived from the word : he 33etfc, the manner. 
 
90 
 
 To let set (expose to sight). 
 
 Do you let me see your gold 
 
 ribbons ] 
 [ do let you see them. 
 
 Brandy, 
 
 tobacco, 
 
 tobacco (for smoking), 
 
 snuff, 
 
 cider, 
 
 meal (flour), 
 
 apples, 
 
 The gardener, 
 
 the cousin, 
 
 the brother-in-law, 
 
 the handkerchief, 
 
 the pocket handkerchief, 
 
 the valet, servant, 
 
 Do you go for your brother-in- 
 law ? 
 I do go for him. 
 
 (S c 1; c n I a f f c n (governs the a©. 
 cusative). 
 
 gaffcn pu mtcf) 3f)te golbcnen SBdnv 
 
 in fefyen ] 
 3d) lafic (Sic btcfcl&m fcr)en. 
 
 *8ranntn>ctn (masc.) ; 
 
 Qabat (masc.) ; 
 
 9?cmcf)tabaf ; 
 
 ©cbnupftabat ; 
 
 (Stbct (masc.) ; 
 
 mtbt (neut.) ; 
 
 TCepfel (Spfct) (plur. of bet 2CpfW) 
 
 t)cr (Partner; 
 
 bet better ; 
 
 bcr ©cbwagcr ; 
 
 ta§ Sud) ; 
 
 bag (Sc!)nupftud) ; 
 
 bet £)tcncr, bee jtrtcd)t. b 
 
 $$tm ©te 3f)ten ©djroaget ? 
 3d) fjolc ir}n. 
 
 To znterci (to £ Am£). © e b e n f e n. 
 
 Do you intend to go to the ball 
 
 this evening ] 
 1 do intend to go thither. 
 
 To know. 
 
 I know — he knows. 
 
 We know — they know. 
 Thou knowest — you know. 
 
 Do you know German ? 
 
 I do know it. 
 
 Do you know how to read 
 
 French 1 
 Can you read French 1 
 
 ®ebcnfcn <Sie focutc tfbcrtb auf ben 
 
 93aft £u gef)cn 1 
 3d) gcbcnfc r)tn^uqcf)cn. (See 035. 
 
 A. Lesson XXVII.) 
 
 SBtffcn* (formers). 
 
 3d) rocip — ct roctg. 
 
 SBtt rmffen — fie rotffen. 
 
 £)u welpt — 3r)t rotftct (©tc nrif* 
 
 fen). 
 Jlonnen @te bcutfd) ? 
 3d) frmn c£. 
 
 I 
 
 jlonncn (Sic ftcm$oftfd) (cfen ' 
 
 b Wiener generally means servant ; hence : ber Jtammerbtener, the valet de 
 chambre ; ber Jtircfyenbtener, the church-minister, clergyman ; ^nec^t point* 
 jut the lowest degree of servitude, hence : ber .jpausFttedjt, the menial ser- 
 vant; ber Stalffrtedjt, the groom, the stableman ; ber 9t.ettfncdjf, the jockey. 
 
 c SBiffen implies to have the knowledge of a thing, not to be ignorant cf it ; 
 Eoiltten signifies to be able, to have the knowledge of an art or a science. Ex. 
 3d) toetfj, n>aS <Ste faflen mollcn, I know, what you wish to say. (§r fann 
 etnen beutfdjen SBricf fcfyrctfcen, he knows how to write a German letter. The 
 learner must take care not to confound ttnffett*, to know, with fonrten*, to be 
 able, and the latter not with f ennett*, to be acquainted See Lessons XX VUX 
 and XXXIII.) 
 
91 
 
 Can you make a hat ? ^ 
 
 Do you know how to maise a Cjtonnen ©te einen #ut macfjcn ? 
 
 hat? 3 
 
 Can you come to me to-day ] £onneu <Stc fyeute gu mit footmen ? 
 
 !To 5w?zm. @ d) to i m m c n *. 
 
 SaV^sTJr t0 swim ■ }*&" M **■*» ? 
 
 Whither ? where to? 8B • $ i n 1 
 Whither are you going ] &&0 gefycn (Sic f)in 1 d 
 
 exercises. 83. 
 
 Do you wish to drink brandy ] — No, I wish to drink wine. — Dc 
 you sell brandy ] — I do not sell any ; but my neighbour, the mer- 
 chant, sells some. — Will you fetch me some tobacco] — I will 
 fetch you some ; what tobacco do you wish to have ! — I wish to 
 have some snuff; but my friend, the German, wishes to have some 
 tobacco (for smoking). — Does the merchant show you cloth] — He 
 does not show me any. — Does your valet go for some cider ] — He 
 does go for some. — Do you want anything else (nod) ctwaS) ] — I 
 want some flour ; will you send for some (for) me ] — I will send 
 for some (for) you. — Does your friend buy apples ] — He does buy 
 some. — Does he buy handkerchiefs] — He buys tobacco instead ot 
 buying handkerchiefs. — Do you show me anything ] — I show you 
 gold and silver clothes. — Whither does your cousin go ] — He goes 
 to the ball. — Do you go to the ball ] — I go to the theatre instead 
 of going to the ball. — Does the gardener go into the garden ] — He 
 gc *s to the market instead of going into the garden. — Do you send 
 yrur servant to the shoemaker] — I send him to the tailor instead 
 oi sending him to the shoemaker. 
 
 84. 
 
 Dost thou go to fetch thy father ] — I do go to fetch him. — May 
 ($arm) I go to fetch my cousin ] — You may go to fetch him. — 
 Does your valet find the man whom he is looking for]~He does 
 finn him. — Do your sons find the friends whom they are looking 
 for? — They do not find them. — When do you intend going to the 
 haU] — 1 intend going thither this evening. — Do your cousins intend 
 to go into the country ] — They intend to go thither. — When do 
 they intend to go thither ] — They intend to go thither to-morrow. — 
 At what o'clock ] — At half-past nine. — What does the merchant 
 wish to sell you ] — He wishes to sell me pocket-handkerchiefs. — 
 Dj you intend to buy some ] — I will not buy any. — Dost thou know 
 
 E)ttt, as above, may be divided into two parts, the first of which is 
 V iced in the beginning and the second at the end of the sentence. If the 
 i \tence ends with a past participle or an infinitive, f) t tt is placed before it- 
 
92 
 
 anything 1 — I do not know anything. — What does thy cousin know 1 
 — He knows how to read and to write. — Does he know German ] — 
 He does not know it. — Do you know Spanish 1 — I do know it.— 
 Do your brothers know Greek ] — They do not know it ; but they 
 intend to learn it. — Do I know English 1 — You do not know it; 
 but you intend to study it. — Do my children know how to read 
 Italian] — They know how to read, but not how to speak it. 
 
 85. 
 
 Do you intend to study Arabic 1 — I intend to study Arabic and 
 Syriac. — Does the Englishman know Polish ? — He does not know 
 it, hut he intends learning it. — Do you know how to swim ? — I do 
 not know how to swim, but how to play. — Does your cousin know 
 how to make coats'? — He does not know how to make any; he is 
 no tailor. — Is he a merchant] — He is not one. — What is he ] — He 
 is a physician. — Whither are you going ! — I am going into my 
 garden, in order to speak to the gardener. — What do you wish to 
 tell him ? — I wish to tell him to open the window of his room. — 
 Does your gardener listen to you ] — He does listen to me. — Do 
 you wish to drink some cider ] — No, I have a mind to drink some 
 beer ; have you any ? — I have none ; but I will send for some. — 
 When will you send for some ? — Now. — Do you send for apples ? 
 —I do send for some. — Have you a good deal of water ? — I have 
 enough to wash my feet.— Has your brother water enough ? — He 
 has only a little, but enough to moisten his pocket-handkerchief. — 
 Do you know how to make tea ] — I know how to make some. — Does 
 your cousin listen to what you tell him ? — He does listen to it. — 
 Does he know how to swim 1 — He does not know how to swim.— 
 Where is h? going to? — He is going no whither; he remains at 
 home. 
 
 THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— &d)t mtir hxmBlQBtt 
 tcttion. 
 
 The intention. 3) e r S3 t f a §. 
 
 Intended. ©efonnen. 
 
 To intend or to have the intention, ©efonncn f c t n *. 
 
 I intend to go thither. 3d) bin gefonncn f)tn$ugef)en. 
 
 We have the intention to do it. 2Btr finb gefennen c$ 511 tfyun. 
 
 'Srfjattcn* (to receive any- 
 thing sent). 
 rrt S3 e 1 mm c n * (to receive as a 
 
 To receive. i preS ent). 
 
 ((Smpfongen* (to welcome, to 
 entertain). 
 
Thou receivest-He receives. S ®" «» @r etftfft. 
 
 £ 2)u cmpfanojr. a (St cmpfangt. 
 He receives money. (St focfemmt d5dt>. 
 
 He obtains the preference. (St ctrja'tt ben SSequg. 
 
 He receives his friends. (St empfangt feine greunbe. 
 
 Do you receive a letter to-day? (Straiten <Ste ()cutc etnen SSttef ? 
 [ receive one to-morrow. 3d) errjattc motgen etnen. 
 
 To guide (conduct, take). g u fj r c n "> b 
 To lead. S c 1 1 c n 5 ' 
 
 f lead the horse info the stable. 3d) fufjte bag §)fetb in ten (Stall. 
 
 The preference, bet SSct^ug ; 
 
 the stable, bet (Stall ; 
 
 blind, Mtnb ; 
 
 sick (ill), ftan!; 
 
 poor, arm. 
 
 To extinguish. 2C u 6 { o f d) e n (v. act. and m. if 
 
 au$$u(efd)en). 
 To light. 2C n 3 u n t> c n (an$u$tinben). 
 
 . To set on fire. 2C n ft e cf e n (an^uftecfen). 
 
 Does he extinguish the candle ] 2ofd)t et i)a<> gtcfyt au£ ? 
 He lights it. ~ (St giinbet el an. 
 
 To depart, to set out. 2Cbtetfcn (ab^utetfen). 
 
 When do you intend to depart ] £Cann ejebenfen ©tc at^urctfen ? 
 I intend to depart to-morrow. 3d) gcbenfe mercjen afyuretfen 
 
 exercises. 86. 
 
 Do your brothers intend to go into the country] — They do in- 
 tend to go thither. — Do you intend to go to my cousin ] — I do in- 
 tend to go to him. — Dost thou intend to do anything ] — I intend t^ 
 do nothing. — Do you intend to go to the theatre this evening ] — 1 
 do intend to go thither, but not this evening. — Dost thou receive 
 anything? — I receive money. — From (£>cn) whom dost thou receive 
 some ] — I receive some from my father, my brother, and my cousin, 
 — Does your son receive books 1 — He does receive some. — From 
 whom does he receive some] — He receives some from me, from his 
 friends, and neighbours. — Does the poor man (t>ct 2Crmc, See 
 page 34, Obs. A.) receive money ] — He does receive some. — From 
 whom does he receive some ] — He receives some from the rich.— 
 ~)ost thou receive wine] — I do not receive any.— Do I receive 
 noney ] — You do not receive any. — Does your servant receive 
 
 a The persons not mentioned follow the regular conjugation. (See Pre- 
 sent Tense, Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 b f5ur)ren expresses the act of conducting only ; letten means to conduct 
 with safety. Ex. (£tnen jfranf en fiiljren, to conduct a sick -person ; em &inb, 
 etnen SBlmben (etten, to guide a child, a blind man. 
 
94 
 
 clothes (,ft(eit>er) ! — He does not receive any. — Do you receive the 
 books which our friends receive] — We do not receive the same 
 which your friends receive; but we receive others. — Does your 
 friend receive the letters which you write to him ! — He does re- 
 ceive them. — Do you receive the apples which I send you! — I do 
 not receive them. — Does the American receive as much brandy as 
 cider ! — He receives as much of the one as of the other. — Do the 
 Scotch receive as many books as letters ! — They receive as many 
 of the one as of the other. 
 
 87. 
 
 Does the Englishman obtain the preference ! — He does obtain it. 
 — Does your cousin receive as much money as 1 ! — He receives 
 more than you. — Does the Frenchman receive his letters ! — He 
 does receive them. — When does he receive them ! — He receives 
 them in the evening. — When dost thou receive thy letters ! — I re- 
 ceive them in the morning. — At what o'clock ! — At a quarter to 
 ten. — Dost thou receive as many letters as 1 ! — I receive more ot 
 them than thou. — Dost thou receive any to-day ! — I receive some 
 to-day and to-morrow. — Does your father receive as many friends 
 as ours (as our father) ! — He receives fewer of them than yours 
 (than your father). — Does the Spaniard receive as many enemies 
 as friends ! — He receives as many of the one as of the other. — Do 
 you receive one more crown 1 ? — I do receive one more. — Does your 
 son receive one more book ! — He does receive one more. — What 
 does the physician receive ! — He receives good tobacco, good snuff, 
 and good pocket-handkerchiefs. — Does he receive brandy ! — He 
 doeg receive some. 
 
 Does your servant receive shirts! — He does receive some.— Does 
 he receive as many of them as my valet (does) ! — He receives quite 
 as many of them. — Do you receive anything to-day! — . receive 
 something every day. — Dost thou conduct anybody ! — I conduct 
 nobody. — Whom do you guide ! — I guide my son. — Where are you 
 conducting him to ! — I conduct him to my friends to wish them a 
 good morning. — What is your son ! — He is a physician. — Does 
 your servant guide any one ! — He guides my child. — Whom (>Hkn) 
 must I guide! — Thou must guide the blind. (Page 34, Obs. 
 A*) — Must he conduct the sick person ! — He must conduct him.~ 
 Whither must he conduct him ! — He must couduct him home. — 
 Whither is he leading your horse ! — He is leading it into the 
 stable. — Dost thou guide the child or the blind man] — I guide both, 
 — When does the foreigner intend to depart ! — He intends to deparl 
 this morning. — At what o'clock! — At half past one. — Does he not 
 wish to remain here ! — He does not (@r mil ntd)t). — Do you intend 
 to go to the theatre this evening ! — I intend to go there to-rnorrow 
 —Do you depart to-day ! — I depart now. — When do you intend U 
 
95 
 
 write to your friends ? — I intend to write to them to-day. — Do yom 
 friends answer your letters 1 — They do answer them. — Do you ex- 
 tinguish the fire ] — I do not extinguish it. — Does your servant light 
 th& candle 1 — He does light it. — Does this man intend to set your 
 w&iehouse on fire 1 — He does intend to set it on fire (cinjuftccfen)* 
 
 THIRTY.NINTH 
 
 LESSON. — Jfam 
 Action. 
 
 ntib bteissigste 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The comparative is formed by adding e V and the 
 superlative by adding # a to the simple adjective. 
 Examples : 
 
 Posit. Comp. Superl. 
 ©cfy&tt — fcf)6ner — fcfyonfL 
 
 Handsome — handsomer — 
 
 handsomest. 
 Small — smaller — smallest. 
 Wild — wilder — wildest. 
 
 Mtein — ffemer — flemji. 
 2Btlb — nnfber — ttrilbejt. 
 
 Obs. A. Comparative and superlative adjectives 
 are declined like the positive. Examples : 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 r N. ber fcfjonere 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 ba$ fcfyonere 23ncfy. 
 
 The handsomer 
 table, the hand-<( 
 somer book, &c. 
 
 G. be3 fcfyoneten be3 fcfyoneren SSucfyeg. 
 
 D. item fcfyonerat bent fcfyoneren S5ud>e. 
 
 Zifdp, 
 
 A. ben fcfyoneren t>a$ frf)onere h 33ud). 
 
 a In the superlative, ft is sometimes preceded by e when the pronunciation 
 requires it, as : fiifl, sweet, fiifieft; fcf)iecJ)f, bad, fc|tecf>teft. In the word qro£, 
 *reat, the superlative grojseft, is contracted into $x£% as : ber $toj$te 2ftann, 
 the greatest man. 
 
 b The letter e, which precedes or follows the consonant r in the compara- 
 tive, is often omitted for the sake of euphony ; thus instead of: ber, b(t3 fcf)5= 
 ture, bes fcfyoneren, bent fcfeoneren, we say : ber, ba$ fc^onre, beg fcfyonern, bew 
 fd&bnem, <fcc. (See Ohs. Lesson XIX.) 
 
w 
 
 SUPERL \TXVE. 
 
 The smallest 
 hat, the smal- < 
 lest book, &c. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 bag ffemjte 33uct>* 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 N, ber Heinjle 
 
 tint, 
 
 G. beg Hempen beg Hemjien Sucfyeg 
 
 £uteg, 
 D. bem Hempen bem Hemflen SSucfye, 
 
 §nte, 
 A. ben Heinjien bag ffemfle SSucf). 
 
 £ut, 
 
 06s* jB. The radical vowels a, 0, U, are softened 
 in the comparative and superlative into a, b, \U C 
 Examples : 
 
 Posit. Cqmp. Superl, 
 
 Old, &c. 
 
 a(t 
 
 alter afteji. 
 
 pious, &c. 
 
 fromm 
 
 frommer fromm ft 
 
 young, &c. 
 
 Jttnfl 
 
 jiinger jfingfi. 
 
 Ota. C The following adjectives, which are alsc 
 used as adverbs, are irregular in the formation of their 
 comparatives and superlatives. 
 
 Soon, 
 Willingly, 
 Good, 
 High, 
 
 Positive. Comp. 
 
 §3a(b, efyer, 
 ber or bag balbtge, efyere, 
 
 ®ern, fteber, 
 
 ber or bag Kebe, Kebere, 
 
 j @itt, 6efler, 
 
 ( ber or bag gute, befjere, 
 
 #orf), e f)5f)er, 
 
 ( ber or bag fjolje, fyofyere, 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 eljejl (am efyeftat d ) 
 
 efyeffo 
 
 Kebji (am Kebfiett) j 
 
 Kebfie. 
 
 befit (am bejten) ; 
 
 betfe. 
 
 fyodfjfi (am fyocfytfen); 
 
 fyocfyfte. 
 
 c On the adjectives which do not soften the radical vowels a, o, u in the 
 comparative and superlative, see Obs. D. hereafter. 
 
 d When an adjective is used in the superlative degree adverbially, it is 
 combine! with a contraction of the definite article, and one of the preposi- 
 tions, at, cmf, $u, in, as: am roentgen, the least; auf£ bodjfie, at the most; $um 
 beften, fc-r the best; tm mtttbefteit, at least. Hence the adverbs : fcfoonfteug, 
 in the handsomest manner; fcefiert§, in the best manner; fyocfrfienS, at the 
 most; ncicfyfteng, next time ; toemcjfteng, at least, &c. 
 
 e In the positive and comparative degrees the form Ijof), not 1)0 c¥), is used as 
 an adjective before a noun ; but as a predicate after the noun, the positive is 
 ()od>. Ex. 3)ev fio&e SBaum,- the high tree ; ber fjoftere Q3aum, the higher tree j 
 but btefer Q3aum tft feecfr, this tree is hifjh. 
 
97 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Comp. 
 
 maty, 
 
 nafyer, 
 
 ber or ba$ ttctfye, 
 
 tidfyere, 
 
 asfer, 
 
 rnefyr, 
 
 ber or ba$ tuefe, 
 
 ntetjre, 
 
 Near, 
 
 Much, 
 
 This book is small, that is smal- 
 ler, and this is the smallest of 
 all. 
 
 This hat is large, but that is 
 larger. 
 
 Is your book as large as mine? 
 
 ft is not so large as yours. 
 It is larger than yours. 
 
 Not so large. 
 
 Are our neighbour's children as 
 
 good f as ours 1 
 They are better than ours. 
 
 Whose 1 
 It is. 
 
 Whose hat is this 1 
 It is the hat of my brother. 
 It is my brother's. 
 It is my brother's hat. 
 Whose hat is the finest ] 
 That of my father is the finest. 
 Whose ribbon is the handsomer, 
 yours or mine ] 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 ndd)(l(amttarf)(len); 
 
 rmcfyfte. 
 
 meift (am metften) ; 
 
 ntetfte. 
 
 2)iefe<? <8ud) ift ftctrt, JencS if! Hets 
 net, unt> fctefeS fjicr ift am flew* 
 ffeti (t>as fletnfte) ttcn alien. 
 
 £)tefct £ut ift a,top, allcin jener iji 
 groper. 
 
 3ft 3*jr S3ucr) fo gtcp nrie fcaS nwi* 
 nta,e? 
 
 @$ ift ntcf>t fo grcp alS t>a$ Sfjrige* 
 
 @6 ift proper al$ bag Sfyrtgc. 
 
 9?td)t fo gt op. 
 
 ©inb tie jlinbcc unfeteg 9?ad)fcat<( 
 
 fo arttg tme tie unfrtgen ? 
 Ste ftnb arttget ate t>ic unfrtgetn 
 
 SS c f f e n ? s (See Lesson XXIX.) 
 <$$ ift. 
 
 SGScjfen $ut ift bag * 
 (5$ ift bet: £ut metneS £3rubet$. 
 (SS tft metrics 33rufcer$. 
 <£$ ift mctneS SBtufcerS £ut. 
 SBBcffen £ut ift t>cr fd)6nfte ? 
 Set metrics Waters ift bet fd)8njte. 
 SBcfjen 23ant> ift fdj&'nct, i>as Sfytb 
 gc obcr fcas metmge 1 
 
 Good, gentle, pretty, 
 
 arttg ; 
 
 light, easy, 
 
 leicl)t ; 
 
 heavy, difficult, 
 
 fefywee ; 
 
 great, grand (big, large), 
 
 grop ; 
 
 long, 
 
 tang ; 
 
 short, 
 
 *m ; 
 
 round, 
 
 ttmb ; 
 
 rich, 
 
 rctcf). 
 
 Obs. D. The adjectives which do not soften the ra 
 
 dical vowels in the comparative and superlative, are * 
 
 1st, Those of which the last syllable does not belong 
 
 f In this phrase the word arttg does not quite correspond to the English 
 word good; but it does in many others, as for instance : be good ! fei arttg ! 
 a good child, etrt avttge§ <$mb. 
 
 k The word which answers the question roeffett ? is always put in the gen! 
 live case. 
 5 
 
08 
 
 to the primitive h word, as : bant bar, grateful ; frf)Ufb(& 
 culpable ; bogfyaft, malicious. Ex. artig, pretty ; arttger, 
 prettier ; arttgft, prettiest. 
 
 2d, Participles, as : labenb, refreshing ; gelobt praised ; 
 tobettb, furious ; fucfyettb, seeking, &c. 
 
 3d, Those which contain a diphthong, as : genau 
 exact ; faut, lazy ; blaw, blue ; grau, grey, &c. 
 
 4th, Those terminating in e r, as tapfer, valiant, &c 
 
 5th, The following : 
 
 Wa$, pale ; i flat, clear ; fanft, gentle ; 
 
 bunt, variegated ; fnapp, tight ; fatt, satisfied r 
 
 faf)t, fallow ; (afym, lame ; jcfylaff, slack ; 
 
 fa(fcf), false ; (c$, loose ; fd)(anf, slender; 
 
 fro f), joyful ; matt, wearied ; (fart, numb ; 
 
 gerabe, straight; morfcf), brittle ; ftofy, proud ; 
 
 gefunft, healthy ; nctctt,. naked; jiraflf, stiff; 
 
 glatt, smooth ; platt, flat ; ftumm, dumb ; 
 
 !)cf)(, hollow ; Plump, clumsy ; tell, mad ; 
 
 Mb, kind ; rof), raw ; twit, full ; 
 
 fa(){, bald ; runt), round ; sctfym, tame, 
 fare], stingy ; 
 
 Obs. E. In German the superlative is almost al 
 ways relative, and to express the absolute superlative 
 we use, as in English, one of the adverbs : fefyr, very 
 recfyt, very ; fyocfyft, extremely ; itttgemettt, uncommonly 
 &c. Ex. ©n fef)r armer SWann, a very poor man ; em 
 fefyr fcfyoneg $mb, a very fine child. 
 
 Obs. F. Than, after a comparative, is translated by 
 a t g (See Obs. B. Lesson XXIII.) . To increase the 
 force of the comparative, we use the adverbs ttod), still, 
 and tveit, far. Ex. 9tod) grower, still greater ; id) bin tvcit 
 gttitfltcfyer al$ er, I am far happier than he. 
 
 Obs. G. The following adjectives have no compara- 
 tive: 
 
 Positive. 
 ber or bag duftere, 
 ber — bag trtnere, 
 ber — bag fymtere, 
 ber — bag mittfere, 
 ber — bag obere, 
 
 h By primitive we mean a word to which a syllable may be added in ordei 
 to form another word, as banfftar, which is formed of the word 3)anf, thapfcf, 
 and the syllable bar. 
 
 The exterior, 
 the interior, 
 the posterior, 
 the middle one, 
 the superior, 
 
 Superlative. 
 ber or bag auffcrfte ; 
 ber — i>a6 mnerpe ; 
 ber — ia^ fyutterfte ; 
 ber — bag mtttelfte ; 
 ber — bag oberfte ; 
 
99 
 
 Positive. Superlative. 
 
 the inferior, ber or i>a$ utttere, ber or bag unterfie ; 
 the anterior, ber — bag fcorbere, ber — ba$ twrberfte. 
 
 EXERCISES. 89. 
 
 Is your brother taller (gtop) than mine] — He is not so tall, but 
 oetter than yours. — Is thy hat as bad as that of thy father ]— It w 
 better, but not so black as his. — Are the shirts of the Italians as 
 white (roet£) as those of the Irish ] — They are whiter, but not to 
 good. — Are the sticks of our friends longer than ours ] — They are 
 not longer, but heavier. — Who have (££et fyat) the most beautiful 
 gloves ] — The French have them. — Whose horses are the finest ? 
 - — Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine ; but those of our friends 
 are the finest of all. — Is your horse good 1 — It is good, but yours 
 is better, and that of the Englishman is the best of all the horses 
 which we know. — Have you pretty shoes'? — I have very pretty 
 (ones) ; but my brother has prettier (ones) than I. — From (23 en) 
 whom does he receive them ] — He receives them from his best 
 friend. — Is your wine as good as mine 1 — It is better. — Does your 
 merchant sell good handkerchiefs ! — He sells the best handkerchiefs 
 that I know. 
 
 90. 
 
 Have we more books than the French 1 — We have more of them 
 than they ; but the Germans have more of them than we, and the 
 English have the most of them. — Hast thou a finer garden than 
 that of our Physician 1 — I have a finer (one). — Has the American 
 a, finer house than thou ] — He has a finer (one). — Have we as fine 
 children as our neighbours I— We have finer (ones).- — Is your coat 
 as long as mine 1 — It is shorter, but prettier than yours. — Do you 
 soon (bait)) go out 1 — I do not go out to-day. — When does your 
 father go out 1 — He goes out at a quarter past twelve. — Is this man 
 older than that (man) ] — He is older, but that (man) is healthier 
 (gcjunfccr). — Which of these two children is the better 1 — The one 
 who studies is better than the one who plays. — Does your servant 
 sweep as well as mine 1 — He sweeps better than yours. — Does the 
 German read as many bad books as good (ones) 1 — He reads more 
 good than bad (ones). — Do the merchants sell more sugar than 
 coffee 1 — They sell more of the one than of the other. — Does your 
 shoemaker make as many boots as shoes WHe makes more of the 
 one than of the other. 
 
 91. 
 
 Can you swim as well as the son of the nobleman 1 — I can 
 swim better than he ; but ht can speak German better than I,—. 
 Does he read as well as you 1 — He reads better than I. — Have you 
 the head-ache ] — No, I have the ear-ache. — Does your cousin 
 Usten to what you tell him'? — He does not listen to it. — Does the 
 
 Lrft 
 
100 
 
 son of your bailiff go into the forest? — No, he remains at home, 
 he has sore feet. — Do you learn as well as our gardener's son? — 
 I learn better than he, but he works better than I. — Whose car« 
 riage is the finest ] — Yours is very fine, but that of the captain ia 
 still finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one as fine apples 
 as we ] — No one has such fine (ones). (See end of Lesson 
 XXXIV.) 
 
 FORTIETH LESSON.— t)ier?i9$te Union. 
 
 To begin. 2Cnfangen* (an$ufana,en)* 
 
 Thou beginnest — he begins. 3)u fartgft an — cr fangt an. 
 I begin to speak. 3d) fange an $u fpted)en. 
 
 Does your servant sweep the jlefytt 3f)t <8et>tentet tag 3immet 
 room, which I sweep 1 au$, tt>e(d)e$ i&) au£fel)te ? 
 
 To finish, to end. @ n b i 9 e n. 
 
 Not yet. 9}ecr> mcfyt. 
 
 Already. ©d)0il. 
 
 Before. (gfye (6et>et), 
 
 Do you speak before you listen ? (Spred)en <Ste, efye ©ic f)b'ten ? 
 
 Dees he go to the market before (5$ef)t cc auf ten SWarCt, ef)e it 
 
 he writes] fcfyretbt? 
 
 Do you take off your stockings Stefyen ®ie 3f)te Sttumpfe au$, cf)C 
 
 before you take off your shoes I (Sic Sfyrc tScrjufye au^teljcn ? 
 
 I take off my shoes before I take 3d) jtcfje metne @d)ul)C w$, efye id) 
 ofl my stockings. metne ©ttumpfc au^tefjfc 
 
 Obs. A. These examples show that when a con- 
 junctive word, as a conjunction, a relative pronoun or 
 relative adverb begins the sentence, the separable par- 
 ticle is not detached from the verb, which is placed at 
 the end. (See Lesson XXXIV. Obs. C, and Rule of 
 Syntax, Lesson XL VII.) 
 
 Often. £) f t (oftmalS, ofterS), its compara- 
 
 tive is oftet, and its superlative 
 am efteften. 
 
 As often as } ou. <Se eft nue <Ste. 
 
 Oftener than you. Defter (£)ftct) a(6 &€. 
 
 Not so often as you. 9ftci)t fo eft alt Sift, 
 
 To breakfast. $ t u fj ft u cf e n. 
 
 Early. ' g r u (). 
 
 Do you breakfast before you g) #tfi(jftMcn ©te, elje Sic in ten 
 into the wood? SBalb a,el?cn? 
 
101 
 
 Does he breakfast before he be- #r(if)ftucft ct, tt)t a anftfngt $U at* 
 
 gins to work 1 bctten ? 
 
 Do you breakfast as early as IT grubftucfen ®te fo friif) wit id) ? 
 I breakfast earlier than you. 3d) fru()jiuc!c fritter ale <§k. 
 
 Late. <3 p a t. 
 
 Too. 3 u. 
 
 Too late. 3u fpat. 
 
 Too early. 3u frufj. 
 
 Too great. 3u Qrcf. 
 
 Too little. 3u Bern. 
 
 Too much. 3u mL 
 
 Do you speak too much 1 ©ptccfycn (Ste jU met ? 
 
 I do not speak enough. 3d) fprccfye nicfyt genug. 
 
 Ofrs. jB. We have seen (Lesson XXIV.) that the in- 
 finitive in German is always preceded by the particle 
 jit. This particle, however, is omitted before the infi- 
 nitive, 
 
 1st, When it is joined to one of the following verbs : 
 
 ©iirfett*, to be permitted ; fyeiffctt*, to bid ; Ijelfett*, to 
 help ; fyoren*, to hear ; fottnett*, to be able (can) ; lajV 
 fen*, to let ; lefyren, to teach ; fernen, to learn ; mogen*, 
 to be allowed (may) ; mufiert*, to be obliged (must) ; 
 fefyett*, to see ; fottett*,tobe obliged (shall, ought) ; YOoU 
 ten*, to be willing, to wish (will). 
 
 ^afyren*, to ride, to go (in a carriage) ; ftnben*, to 
 find ; fiifyten, to feel ; nemten*, to call, to name ; retten*, 
 to ride, to go on horseback. 
 
 2d, When the infinitive is used in an absolute sense. 
 Ex. §Iet£tg fern gcjtemt bem Semite, it behoves a man to 
 be assiduous. When two infinitives are thus em- 
 ployed, the verb which follows them is put in the third 
 person singular. Ex. (Seine $el)Ier befemten mtb bereuen 
 tjl fd)on balbe SSefferung, to acknowledge one's faults and 
 to repent of them is already half an amendment. In 
 constructing the phrase with e3 tft, it is, the verbs fern*; 
 to be ; befemien% to acknowledge ; bereuen, to repent 
 are removed to the end and preceded by j u. Ex. @a 
 gejiemt bem 9Ramte, fletgtg ju fetm (£& tjt fcfyon tjatbe 93effe* 
 rung, feme gefyfer ju befennen unb ju bereuem 
 
102 
 
 EXERCISES. 92. 
 
 Do you begin to speak ? — I begin to speak. — Does your brothel 
 begin to learn Italian ? — He begins to learn it. — Can you already 
 speak German? — Not yet, bat I am beginning. — Do our friends 
 begin to speak] — They do not yet begin to speak, but to read.— • 
 Does our father already begin his letter? — He does not yet begin 
 it. — Does the merchant begin to sell? — He does begin. — Can you 
 swim already? — Not yet, but I begin to learn. — Does your son 
 speak before he listens ?— He listens before he speaks. — Does your 
 brother listen to you (Lesson XXXVI.) before he speaks? — He 
 speaks before he listens to me. — Do your children read before they 
 write ? — They write before they read. — Does your servant sweep 
 the warehouse before he sweeps the room ? — He sweeps the room 
 before he sweeps the warehouse. — Dost thou drink before thou 
 goest out] — I go out before I drink. — Does your cousin wash his 
 hands (feme £anfc>c) before he washes his feet ? — He washes his 
 feet before he washes his hands. — Do you extinguish the fire be- 
 fore you extinguish the candle ? — I extinguish neither the fire nor 
 the candle (au$, to the end). — Do you intend to go out before you 
 write your letters ? — I intend writing my letters before I go out. — 
 Does your son take off his boots before he takes off his coat ? — 
 My son takes off neither his boots nor his coat (cm$, to the end). 
 
 93. 
 
 Do you intend to depart soon (6a(b) ? — I intend to depart to- 
 morrow. — Do you speak as often as I? — I do not speak as often, 
 but my brother speaks oftener than you. — Do I go out as often as 
 your father 1 — You do not go out as often as he ; but he drinks 
 oftener than you. — Do you begin to know this man ? — I begin to 
 know him. — Do you breakfast early ? — We breakfast at a quarter 
 past nine. — Does your cousin breakfast earlier than you'? — He 
 breakfasts later than I. — At what o'clock does he breakfast ? — He 
 breakfasts at eight o'clock, and I at half-past six. — Do you not 
 breakfast too early ? — I breakfast too late. — Does your father break- 
 fast as early as you ? — He breakfasts later than I. — Does he finish 
 his letters before he breakfasts ? — He breakfasts before he finishes 
 them.— Is your hat too large ? — It is neither too large nor too 
 small. — Does our gardener breakfast before he goes into the garden ? 
 — He goes into the garden before he breakfasts. — Do you read 
 French as often as German? — I read French oftener than German. 
 — Does the physician speak too much ? — He does not speak enough. 
 — Do the Germans drink too much wine? — They do not drink 
 enough of it. — Do they drink more beer than cider ? — They drink 
 more of the one than of the other. — Have you much money 1 — 
 We have not enough of it. — Have your cousins much corn?— 
 They have only a little, but enough. — Have you much more brandy 1 
 -'We have not much more of it. — Have you as many tables ai 
 
103 
 
 shairs* — I have as Aiany of the one as of the other. — Does yt-ui 
 friend receive as many letters as notes 1 — He receives more of the 
 latter than of the former. — Do you finish before you begin ? — 1 
 wist begin before I finish (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FORTY-FIRST LESSON.— <ffi n wxh mer?ig«e Uction. 
 
 THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The past participle of regular verbs a is formed from 
 the second person plural of the present indicative, by 
 prefixing to it g e* Ex. Sfyr Kebet or ttefcf, you love ; ge* 
 Ctebet or geliebt, loved. The past participle of irregular 
 verbs will always be given with the verb. 
 
 All that has been said (Obs. A. Lesson XXXIV.) on 
 the rejection of the letter e, is equally applicable to 
 the past participle, this being formed from the second 
 person plural. 
 
 Obs. A. Some verbs do not add the syllable g e in 
 the past participle. (See those verbs, Lesson XLV.) 
 
 To be — been. <5 c t n * -— g c n> c f e n. 
 
 Have you been to the market? @tnt> €?ie auf t>em 9J?arfte geroe* 
 
 fen ? 
 
 I have been there. 3d) bin ba gcrocfen. 
 
 I have not been there. 3d) bin ntd)t pa gcroefen. 
 
 Have I been there ] Sin id) t>a gcrocfen ? 
 
 You have been there. @tc fint) fca gerccfen. 
 
 Has he been there ! 3# a fca gemefen t 
 
 ^yer. 3c, { c m a { 5 . 
 
 Never. 9Hc, ittcmal^ 
 
 Have you been at the ball 1 (Stnb ^ie auf fecm 93att geroefen ? 
 
 Have you ever been at the ball 1 <Sinb <Sic }e auf t>em 23alC cjeroefen ? 
 
 I have never been there. 3d) bin nic fca ejeroefen. 
 
 Thou hast never been there. £)u tuft ntc t>a fjenxfen. 
 
 Yoa have never been there. <&\c fint> (3fyt fctb) ntcm<*($ fca ge> 
 
 roc fen. 
 He has never been there. (§x ift ntc fca gcrccfen. 
 
 Have you already been at the ©infc <Ste fd)t>n im ®d)tiufptc( gcroc* 
 play ? fen ? 
 
 a The pupils, in lepeating the irregular verbs already given, must not fail 
 to mark in their lists the past participle of those verbs. 
 
104 
 
 I have already been there. 3df) 6tn fcfjon t)a gen?efe?k 
 
 You have already been there. <Sie ftnb fcben t>a geroefen. 
 The play, ba6 (Sdjaufpict (plur. e). 
 
 I have not yet been there. 3$ bin ned) ntd)t ta getvcfen. 
 
 Thou hast not yet been there. 3)u fcift ned) ntcl)t t)a gerecfen* 
 STou have not yet been there. (Sie ftnb ned) ntcf)t bet gcnxfen. 
 He has not yet been there. (5r tft ned) ntcr)t ba gewefen. 
 
 We have not yet been there. SBtr finb tied) md)t t>a geroefen. 
 Have you already been at my @inb ©te fdjen Oct nternem 9Sotct ge* 
 
 father's (with my father) ? roefen ? 
 
 I have not yet been there (with 3d) tun ned> md)t bet tfjm gcrw 
 
 him). fen. 
 
 Where have you been this morn- 2Bo ftnb ®te bicfen Bergen gcrces 
 
 ing ? fen ? 
 
 E have been in the garden. 3d) bin tro ^i« bem) ©artco gcwi?* 
 
 fen. 
 Where has thy brother been 1 gBe tft SDetn SBrttbet gercefen ? 
 He has been in the storehouse. (Sr tft itn 95orrcitf)Sf)ciwfc geroefen. 
 
 exercises. 94. 
 
 Where have you been 1 — I have been at the market. — Have yoo 
 been at the ball ] — 1 have been there. — Have I been at the play ?— 
 You have been there. — Hast thou been there ? — I have not been 
 there. — Has your cousin ever been at the theatre 1 — He has never 
 been there. — Hast thou already been in the great square 1 — I have 
 never been there. — Do you intend to go thither 1 — I intend to go 
 thither. — When will you go thither ]— I will go thither to-morrow. 
 — At what o'clock ? — At twelve o'clock. — Has your son already 
 been in my large garden 1 — He has not yet been there. — Does he 
 intend to see it ] — He does intend to see it. — When will ho go 
 thither (binetn) ?— He will go thither to-day. — Does he intend to go 
 to the ball this « yeningl — He does intend to go thither.' — Have you 
 already been at the ball ] — I have not yet been there. — When do 
 you intend to go thither (befytn) 1 — I intend to go thither to-morrow. 
 — Have you already been in the Englishman's room 1 — I have not 
 yet been in it (barm). — Have you been in my rooms'? — I have 
 been there. — When have you been there ? — I have been there this 
 morning. — Have I been in your room or in that (in bem) of your 
 friend ] — You have neither been in mine nor in that of my friend , 
 but in that of the Italian. 
 
 95. 
 
 Has the Dutchman been in our storehouses or in those (in benenj 
 of Vhe English ? — He has neither been in ours nor in those of the 
 English, but in those of the Italians. — Hast thou already been at 
 the market 1 — I have not yet been there, but I intend to go thither. 
 — Has the son of our bailiff been there ] — He has been there.—* 
 When has he been there 1— He has been there to-day. — Does the 
 
105 
 
 son cf our neighbour intend to go to the market ? He does intend 
 to go thither. — What does he wish to buy there ? — He wishes to 
 buy some chickens, oxen, cheese, beer, and cider there. — Have you 
 already been at my cousin's house 1 — I have already been there.— 
 Has your friend already been there 1 — He has not yet been there. — 
 Have we already been at our friends 1 — We have not yet been 
 there (bet ifyncn). — Have our friends ever been at our house? — 
 They have never been there. — Have you ever been at the theatre 1 
 x have never been there. — Have you a mind to write a letter 1— 
 I have a mind to write one. — To whom do you wish to write ?— 
 I wish to write to my son. — Has your father already been in the 
 country 1 — He has not yet been there, but he intends to go thither. — 
 Does he intend to go thither to-day ] — He intends to go thitherto- 
 morrow. — At what o'clock will he depart] — He will depart at 
 half past six. — Does he intend to depart before he breakfasts ] — 
 He intends to breakfast before he departs. — Have you been any* 
 where? — I have been nowhere. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FORTY.SECOND 
 
 LESSON. - 
 &ation> 
 
 ■%wz\ nnh trier}ipt£ 
 
 To have-~had. 
 
 #ctbcn*— -gc&afct. 
 
 lCP The participle past, as well as the infinitive 
 (Lesson XXIV), when it forms with the auxiliary a 
 compound tense, is in German placed at the end of the 
 phrase. 
 
 Have you had my coat? 
 
 ] have not had it. 
 
 Have I had it 1 
 
 You have had it. 
 
 Y ou have not had it. 
 
 Thou hast not had it 
 
 Has he had it 1 
 
 He has had it. 
 
 Hast thou had my book 1 
 
 I have had it. 
 
 I have not had it. 
 
 Have you had the books 1 
 I have had them. 
 Has he had them 1 
 He has had them. 
 Have you had bread 1 
 [ have had some. 
 Hast thou had paper 1 
 5* 
 
 &aUn ^te mctnen Siecf Cjcrjafrt? 
 
 3d) fyabe it)rt md)t gefyaftt. 
 
 £abe icb tfjn gefyabt ? 
 
 @te fyaben it)tt geftabt. 
 
 (Sic rjafcen tfyn md)t acfyafct. 
 
 £)u rjaft tr)n md)t gcf)abt. 
 
 £at cr tfm Qcf)cu3t ? 
 
 (St f)at ir)n gefyafct. 
 
 £aft £)u metn S5ud) gef)cu3t ? 
 
 3d) f)abe c» gefyafct. 
 
 3d) rjabe es tucfyt gef)cu3t. 
 
 &aUn <Stc bte 9B(id)Ct gefyafct ? 
 3d) f)abc fie gefyafct. 
 £at cr fte gefyabt ? 
 (Sr fyat Re gebafct 
 £a(u'n (£te SBtcb gebafrt ? 
 3d) fiafrc rcctcbcS geftabt. 
 £aft £>u ^nptct gerjafct? 
 
106 
 
 I have had none 3d) fyak ftin$ Qefyabt. 
 
 Have 1 had any 1 #ctbc id) roekt)C$ t qcf)a(>t ? 
 
 Has he had some wine 1 jpat cr SDBctn cjefjabt ? 
 
 He has had some. (St bat n>ekf)en gc^abt. 
 
 He has had none. (St fyat fetncn gefjabt. 
 
 What has he had ? SOBas f)at ct geijabt % 
 
 He has had nothing. (St bat ntd)t$ gefyaOt. 
 He has never been either right f (St fiat me roebct <Ked)t no$ Una 
 or wrong. tcd)t gc^abt. 
 
 To ta£e /?/ace. @ t a 1 1 ft n b e n *. 
 
 Does the ball take place this gtnbet t>cr SBatt biefen 2C$cnfc 
 
 evening ] (Start ? 
 
 [t does take place. (St ftnkt ©tatt. 
 
 It takes place this evening. (St pnDct biefen 2Cknb ©tatt. 
 
 Found. ©efunbcn. 
 
 When did the ball take place ? SBann fjat bet S3all (Statt gefun* 
 
 ben ? 
 Yesterday. ©eftetn. 
 
 The day before yesterday. 93orgeffern. 
 
 It took place yesterday. (St bat geftern ©tatt gefunben. 
 
 Obs. A. Expressions such as <§tatt jtltbett*, ought 
 to be considered as separable verbs, of which the par- 
 ticle is placed at the end in simple tenses and before 
 the syllable g t of the past participle. Here the sub- 
 stantive ^tatt, place, stands as a separable particle. 
 
 Time. $11 a L* 
 
 The first time. £>a£ ctfte 9M. 
 
 The last time. £)a$ (cgtc 9M« 
 
 Last. £c|t. 
 How many times (how often) ? ££tc mclniaC? 
 
 Once, etnmal ; 
 
 twice, gwctmal ; 
 
 thrice, brctmal ; 
 
 several times, tterfd)tet>Cttc Wlcil 
 
 Formerly. (S f) c b e m (edentate, cfyebeffen, ror* 
 
 mate). 
 Sometimes. 931 a n d) m a t . 
 
 Do you go sometimes to the mar- (SJeljen (Ste mancfymal auf ben 
 
 ket ? mattt 1 
 
 I do go sometimes thither. 3d) gefye mand)ma( bafjtn. 
 
 • When the word 20? at is preceded by an adjective or an ordinal number, it 
 is written with a capital initial letter ; when annexed to a cardinal number, it 
 begins with a small letter. 
 
107 
 
 Gone. ® c g a n 9 e n» 
 
 Gone thither, ^in^cgancjen. 
 
 Have you gone thither some- (Stub ©ie mcmdjmat fjtngegan^va t 
 times ? 
 
 Obs. B. Here it may be seen how the syllable g e 
 in the past participle is placed between the separable 
 particle and the verb, (See Lesson XXV.) 
 
 I have gone thither sometimes. 3$ Inn mcmdbmal fjingegamjm. 
 
 Oftener than you. £)eftct al$ ©ie. 
 
 Have the men had my trunk ! £a&cn tie SDifctiner mctnen ftcffer 
 
 9ct)a0t ? 
 
 They have not had it. <Sie rjafcen if>n nid)t cjcr)abt. 
 
 Who has had it ? 2&ev f)at tfjn gcfabt ? 
 
 Have I been wrong in buying #a&c id) Unrcd)t gc^abt, SSftdjet ^U 
 
 books? frmfcn] 
 
 You have not been wrong in @tc faben md)t-Unrcd)t gcfyabt, wefe 
 
 buying some, dje gu faufcn. 
 
 EXERCISES. 96. 
 
 Have you had my glove ] — I have had it. — Have you had my 
 pocket-handkerchief] — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my 
 umbrella ] — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my pretty knife 1 — 
 I have had it. — When hadst (rjajt — qetyaOt) thou it] — I had it yes- 
 terday. — Have I had thy gloves ] — You have had them. — Has your 
 brother had my wooden hammer] — He has had it. — Has he had 
 my golden ribbon ] — He has not had it. — Have the English had 
 my beautiful ship I — They have had it. — Who has had my thread 
 stockings ] — Your servants have had them. — Have we had the iron 
 trunk of our good neighbour ? — We have had it. — Have we had 
 his fine carriage 1 — We have not had it. — Have we had the stone 
 tables of the foreigners 1 — We have not had them. — Have we had 
 the wooden leg of the Irishman 1 — We have not had it. — Has the 
 American had my good work 1 — He has had it. — Has he had my 
 silver knife ] — He has not had it.— Has the young man had the 
 first volume of my work ?• — He has not had the first, but the 
 second. — Has he had it] — Yes, Sir, he has had it. — When has he 
 had it ? — He has had it this morning. — Have you had sugar ? — 
 I have had some.— Have I had good paper 1 — You have had some. 
 -Has the sailor had brandy 1 — He has had some. — 'Have you had 
 any ? — I have had none. 
 
 97. 
 
 Has the German had good beer ] — He has had some*. — Hast 
 thou had large cakes (itud)en is not softened in the plur.) ] — I have 
 had some. — Has thy brother had any]- -He has had none. — Has 
 the son of our gardener had flour ] — He has had sorre. — Have the 
 
108 
 
 Poles had good tobacco 1 — They have had some. — What tobae«« 
 have they had 1 — They have had tobacco for smoking and snuff 
 (9?aud)' unb ©cbnupftoOof). — Have the Engljsh had as much sugar 
 as tea ] — They have had as much of the one as of the other. — 
 Has the physician been right ] — He has been wrong. — Has the 
 Dutchman been right or wrong 1 — He never has been either right 
 or wrong. — Have I been wrong in buying honey 1 — You have been 
 wrong in buying some. — What has your cousin had ] — He has 
 had your boots and shoes. — Has he had my good biscuits 
 (3nncbcicf is not softened in the plur.) ] — He has not had them.— 
 What has the Spaniard had 1 — He has had nothing. — Who has 
 had courage ? — The English have had some. — Have the English 
 had many friends ? — They have had many of them. — -Have we 
 had many enemies ] — We have not had many of them. — Have we 
 had more friends than enemies 1 — We have had more of the latter 
 than of the former. — Has your son had more wine than meat]— 
 He has had more of the latter than of the former. — Has the Turk 
 had more pepper than corn 1 — He has had more of the one than oi 
 the other. — Has the painter had anything 1— -He has had nothing* 
 
 98. 
 
 Have I been right in writing to my brother 1 — You have not 
 been wrong in writing to him. — Have you had the head-ache ?— 
 I have had the tooth-ache. — Have you had anything good ] — I have 
 had nothing bad 1 — Did the ball take place yesterday T — It did no! 
 take place. — Does it take place to-day ? — It does take place to- 
 day. — When does the ball take place ? — It takes place this evening. 
 — Did it take place the day before yesterday ] — It did take place, 
 — At what o'clock did it take place ] — It took place at eleven* 
 o'clock. — Have you gone to my brother's 1 — I have gone thither.— 
 How often hast thou gone to my cousin's house ?— I have gone 
 thither twice. — Do you go sometimes to the theatre 1 — I go some- 
 times thither. — How many times have you been at the theatre 1— 
 I have been there only once. — Have you sometimes been at the 
 ball 1 — I have often been there. — Has your brother ever gone to the 
 ball 1 — He has never gone thither. — Has your father sometimes 
 gone to the ball 1 — He went (tfr — geqancjen) thither formerly. — Has 
 he gone thither as often as you 1 — He has gone thither oftener than 
 I. — Dost thou go sometimes into the garden ?-— I do go thither 
 sometimes. — Hast thou never been there 1 — I have often been 
 there. — Does your old cook often go to the market ] — He does go 
 thither often. — Does he go thither as often as my bailiff? — He 
 goes thither oftener than he. 
 
 m. 
 
 Have you formerly gone to the ball ? — I have gone thither some* 
 times — When hast thou been at the ball 1 — I was there the day 
 before yesterday. — Didst thou find anybody there ?— I found (fyabe 
 gefunbert) nobody there. — Hast thou gone to the bail oftener than 
 
209 
 
 thy brothers 1 — I have gone thither oftener than they. — Has you 
 cousin often been at the play ] — He has been there several times, 
 — Have you sometimes been hungry ] — I have often been hungry. 
 —Has your valet often been thirsty] — He has never been either 
 hungry or thirsty. — Have you gone to the play early 1 — I have 
 gone thither late. — Have I gone to the ball as early as you ] — You 
 have gone thither earlier than I. — Has your brother gone thither 
 too late 1 — He has gone thither too early. — Have your brothers had 
 anything ] — They have had nothing. — Who has had my purse and 
 my money ] — Your servant has had both. — Has he had my stick 
 and my hat ? — He has had both* — Hast thou had my horse or thai 
 of my brother] — I have had neither yours ror that of your brother. 
 — Have I had your note or that of the physician T — You have had 
 both (OetDe).— -What has the physician had ] — He has had nothing. 
 — Has anybody had my golden candlestick ] — Nobody has had it 
 (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FORTY.THIRD LESSON.— ?Hm txtiif mt^Btt 
 Nation. 
 
 To do — done* & r) u n * — g e t r) a ru 
 
 What have you done 1 2Ba£ f)aben ©te getrjan ? 
 
 I have done nothing. 3d) fyabe md)t6 getfyaru 
 
 Has the shoemaker made my $at t>er 6cl)ur;mad)et meine ©ttefef 
 
 boots 1 gemacfet ? 
 
 He has made them. <£r f)cit fie gemad}t. 
 
 He has not made them. (£r t)at fie ntcrjt gemad)t. 
 
 To take off-taken off. j^ncNien*--o6. fl encmmen. 
 M M <. 2C u $ $ t e 1) e n * — ausge^ogeti. 
 
 Have you taken your boots off] $dbm @tc Sfjre (Sttcfet au£ge$ogen? 
 I have taken them off. 3d) l)at>e fie au$ge$egen. 
 
 This, that. £> i e f e £, fc> a $. 
 
 Has he told you that 1 £at et Sfonen t>a$ gefagt ? 
 
 It. <£ $, 
 
 He has told it to me. gt fyat eg nut gefagt. 
 
 Obs. The neuter pronoun e 3, it, which is some- 
 times rendered into English by so, and more elegantly 
 omitted, may in German relate to substantives of any 
 gender or number, to adjectives, and even to whole 
 phrases. 
 
110 
 
 Have you told it to me 1 £aben <Ste t$ mir gcfagt ? 
 
 I have told it to you. 3d) f>abe e$ Sfynen gefagt* 
 
 Who has told it to him 1 2Ber ()at eg i()m gefngt ? 
 
 Are you the brother of my friend ! ©tnt ©te ter SBtutet meine* gteum 
 
 kg? 
 I am. f 3d) bin e $* 
 
 Are you ill 1 ©int) 6'ie franr* ? 
 
 I am not. t 3d) bin e g nid)t. 
 
 Are our neighbours as poor as f @tnt> unfete 9?ad)bam fo *cm, nric 
 
 they say ? ft e e g facjen ? 
 
 They are so. f Sic ftnb eg. 
 
 To speak-*-spoken. ©pre d) en* — g e f p r o d) c n. 
 
 I have spoken with the man. 3d) fabe niit tern SCftanne gefprodjen. 
 I have spoken to the man. 3d) fyabe ten Sfficmn cjefprod)en. a 
 
 With. 90H t (a preposition which gov- 
 
 erns the dative). 
 
 With which man have you SOtft it>ctd)em 9)?anne fyaben Sic ge* 
 
 spoken 1 fprod)en ? 
 
 To which man have you spoken? 2Md)en 20?cmn fyaben ©te gefprecfyen ? 
 
 CW (past participle). © e f d) n 1 1 1 e n. 
 Picked up. 2C u f cj e I) o b e n. 
 
 Washed. ® c xo a f d) e n. 
 
 Which books have you picked £Md)C 33itd)cr fjciben ©e ctufgeljos 
 
 up ] ben ? 
 
 I have picked up yours. 3d) fabc tie 3^igen cmfgerjcben 
 
 (See Obs, B* preceding Lesson.) 
 
 Burnt. 95erbrennt. b 
 
 Which books have you burnt] £Betd)e 23iid)et: Ijciben ®ie ttetbtcnnt ? 
 [ have burnt no books. 3d) fabe feinc S3ud)et tterbtennt* 
 
 Torn. 3 etc tiff en. 
 
 Which shirts have you torn 1 2Be(d)C £emten fjaben ©ic $ertiffen ? 
 I have v orn my own. 3d) fjabe tie nicinigen $erriffen. 
 
 EXERCISES. 100. 
 
 Have you anything to do 1 — I have nothing to do. — What has 
 your brother to do 1 — He has to write letters. — What hast thou 
 done 1 — I have dono nothing. — Have I done anything 1 — You have 
 
 R Semanbett fyvedjen means to speak to somebody in an absolute sense, with- 
 out mentioning the subject spoken of, whilst nut Semanbem fpre($en, means to 
 ■peak with or to somebody about a particular thing, as : mtt 3>emcmbem liber 
 ttxva§ (i)on enter (2ctd)e) fpredjen, to speak with somebody about something. 
 
 b The participle past of the verb tterbrenttett would be serbrannt, if it were 
 employed either in a neuter or intransitive sense. Ex. Are my books b irnt! 
 ftnb metne 93tid)er tjetbrcmttt? They are burnt, fie ftnb tterbrrtttnt. (See Note 
 «, Lesson XXV. 
 
Ill 
 
 torn my clothes (JUctbet). — What have your children done ? — They 
 have torn their beautiful books. — What have we done ] — You have 
 done nothing ; but your brothers have burnt my fine chairs. — Has 
 the tailor already made your coat ] — He has not yet made it. — 
 Has your shoemaker already made your boots?-— He has already 
 made them. — Have you sometimes made a hat]— -I have never 
 made one. — Hast thou already made thy purse ] — I have not yet 
 made it. — Have our neighbours ever made books] — They made 
 (IjaOen — gcmacfyt) some formerly. — How many coats has your tailor 
 made ? — He has made thirty or forty of them. — Has he made good 
 or bad coats] — He has made (both) good and bad (ones). — Has 
 our father taken his hat off] — He has taken it off. — Have your 
 brothers taken their coats off] — They have taken them off. — Has 
 the physician taken his stockings or his shoes off] — He has taken 
 off neither the one nor the other. — What has he taken away] — 
 He has taken away nothing, but he has taken off his large hat. — 
 Who has told you that ] — My servant has told it to me- — What has 
 your cousin told you? — He has told me nothing. — Who has told 
 it to your neighbour ? — The English have told it to him. — Are you 
 the brother of that (t>tefc6) youth ? — I am (3d) bin c£). — Is that boy 
 your soh ] — He is. — How many children have you ] — I have but 
 two.-— Has the bailiff gone to the market ] — He has not gone 
 thither. — Is he ill ] — He is. — Am I ill I — You are not. — Are you 
 as tall (grop) as I] — I am. — Are your friends as rich as they say ] 
 — They are. — Art thou as fatigued as thy brother] — I am more so 
 (c$ mef)t) than he. 
 
 101. 
 
 Have you spoken to my father ? — I have spoken to him. — When 
 did (fyaben Qcfprecfycn) you speak to him] — I spoke to him the day 
 before yesterday.— Have you sometimes spoken with the Turk ] — 
 I have never spoken with him. — How many times have you 
 spoken to the captain? — I have spoken to him six times. — Has 
 the nobleman ever spoken with you ] — He has never spoken with 
 me. — Have you often spoken with his son ] — I have often spoken 
 with him. — Have you spoken with him oftener than we ] — I have 
 not spoken with him so often as you (have). — To which son of the 
 nobleman have you spoken ] — I have spoken to the youngest. — To 
 which men has your brother spoken ? — He has spoken to these. — 
 What has your gardener's son cut ? — He has cut trees. — Has he 
 cut corn ] — He has cut some.— Has he cut as much hay as corn * 
 — He has cut as nueh of the one as of the other. — Have you 
 picked up my knife ? — I have picked it up. — Has your boy picked 
 up the tailor's thimble] — He has not picked it up. — Have you 
 picked up a crown ] — I have picked up two of them. — What have 
 you picked up ? — We have picked up nothing. — Have you burnt 
 anything 1 — We have burnt nothing. — What have the sailors 
 burnt] — They have burnt their cloth coats. — Hast thou burnt my 
 fine ribbons ] — 1 have not burnt them. — Which books has the 
 
112 
 
 Greek burnt? — He has burnt his own. — Which sjiips (©d)tffe) 
 have the Spaniards burnt? — They have burnt no ships. — Have you 
 burnt paper] — I have not burnt any. — Has the Physician burnt 
 notes ? — He has burnt none. — Have you had the courage to burn 
 my hat 1 — I have had the courage to burn it. — When did you burn 
 it ] — I burnt it yesterday. — Where have you burnt it ? — I have 
 burnt it in my room. — Who has torn your shirt ] — The ugly boy «f 
 our neighbour has torn it. — Has anybody torn your books'? — I* -\ 
 body has torn them. 
 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 To drink - 
 
 —drunk. 
 
 Zxinhn* • 
 
 To carry - 
 
 —carried. 
 
 ZxaQm* ■ 
 
 To bring- 
 
 -brought. 
 
 SBrittgetv* 
 
 To send - 
 
 -sent. 
 
 ©ertben* ■ 
 
 To write- 
 
 -written. 
 
 ©cfjreiben* 
 
 Te see - 
 
 -seen. 
 
 ©efyen* 
 
 To give - 
 
 -given. 
 
 ©eben* 
 
 To lend - 
 
 -lent. 
 
 2etf)en* - 
 
 
 NEUTER 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 FORTY.FOURTH LESSON.— \)kx ttttir metpgete 
 Section. 
 
 Past part, 
 
 -getrunfem 
 
 -getrogeru 
 
 -gebrarf)t # 
 
 -gefanbt 
 
 -gefd>riebetu 
 
 -gefefyetu 
 
 -gegebetu 
 
 -geliefyem 
 
 Neuter verbs are conjugated like the active. The 
 latter, however, always form their past tenses with 
 the auxiliary fyaben*, to have ; on the contrary, some 
 neuter verbs take fern*, to be, and others tyaben*, for 
 their auxiliary ; others again take sometimes fyabett*/ 
 and sometimes fetrt*. Those of which the auxiliary 
 is not marked have the same as in English. 
 
 To come — come (Past part.;. & o m m c n * — g c I m m e n. 
 Togo —gone. ©efycn* — 9 eg an gen. 
 
 Is the man come to your father? 3ft bet Wlann $u Sfyrem QSaret ge* 
 
 fommcn ? 
 He is come to him. <$r if! $u tbm gefommen. 
 
 Is thy brother gone into the 3ft &ctn ©ruber cmf t>ct$ (auf$) 
 
 field 1 $cft ge<|cmgen ? 
 
 He is gone thither. (St ift bet bin gcgangen. 
 
 Have you seen the man 1 #afcen ©te ben #Rcmn gcfer)en ? 
 
 I have seen him. 3d) rjctOe tbn gefeben. 
 
 Have you seen my book * £ctben ®' xc m * xn ^ uc ^ 3 c f e ^ tt ^ 
 
113 
 
 t have seen it. 3d) r)afce e$ gefer)en. 
 
 I have not seen it. 3d) fya&e eg ntc^t Qe|el)cn 
 
 When 1— Where ? 2S a n n ? — 2Bo? a 
 
 When did you see my cousin 1 SQBcmn rjaben <Sie metnen ^Setter g# 
 
 feljen ? 
 I saw him the day before yester- 3d) fjabe if>n ttcrgeftern gefefyen. 
 
 day. 
 Where have you seen him 1 2Bo faften ®ie tfjtt gcfcr)cn ? 
 
 I have seen him at the theatre. 3d) babe ifyn tm Skater gefc^cn. 
 Where hast thou seen my book 1 2Bo f)aft £)u mcin 23ud) gefefyen ? 
 I have seen it in your room. 3d) fyabe e$ in Sfjrem Simmer gefe* 
 
 f)eru 
 
 Do you learn to read ? 2ernen <Ste lefen ? 
 
 I do learn (it). 3d) (erne c& 
 
 I learn to write. 3d) (erne fd)retfren. 
 
 Have you learnt to write ? £aben ®te fcfytetben gefetnt ? 
 
 I have (learnt it). 3d) fyafce cs gelcrnt. 
 
 To know (to be acquainted with) jtennen* — g e f: a n n t. 
 — known. 
 
 Have you known those men 1 $abm ©ft jenc banner gefannt ? 
 I have not known them. 3d) fyabe fie nid)t gefcmnt. 
 
 Ofo. Instead of the past participle, the following 
 verbs retain the form of the infinitive when preceded 
 by another infinitive : b bihfett*, to be permitted ; fyetfktt*, 
 to bid ; fyelfen*, to help ; fyorett, to hear ; formett*, to be 
 able (can) ; laffert*, to let ; lefyrett, to teach ; (ewett, to 
 learn ; mogen*, to be allowed (may) ; mifffen*, to be 
 obliged (must) ; fef)en # , to see ; [often, to be obliged 
 (shall, ought) ; toolkit, to be willing, to wish (will). c 
 
 To let (to get, to have, to order). S a f f e n *• (See Lesson XXXI. 
 
 where this verb is conjugated 
 in the present tense.) 
 
 To get or to have mended — got Tfusbefjetn (affen*. 
 or had mended. 
 
 a Learners ought now to use in their exercises the adverbs of time, place, 
 and number, mentioned in Lessons XXVII. XXXI. XXXII. and XLII. 
 
 b It will be useful to remember that the particle $u does not precede the 
 infinitive joined to one of these verbs. (See Obs. JB. Lesson XL.) 
 
 c Modern authors do not always observe this distinction, but give the pre- 
 ference to the regular form. Thus it is already generally said : 3d) J)abe tf)tt 
 femtett gclernt (not lentett), I have become acquainted with him ; 3<9 r)abe tljm 
 atbetteri gefyolfert (not f>elfett), I have helped him to work ; er i)at mity rictytig 
 foremen ^cter)rt (not lernett), he has taught me to speak correctly. 
 
114 
 
 To get or to have washed — got SQScifcfycn faffen* 
 
 or had washed. 
 To have made — had made. 9J?adf)cn (af[cn*» 
 
 Are you getting a coat made (do gaffen <Ste ctncn SKecf macfyen ? 
 
 you order a coat) ] 
 I am getting one made (I do 3d) laffe ctncn macfycn. 
 
 order one). 
 I have had one made. 3d) f)cibe ctncn mctd)cn (affcn. 
 
 Has your brother had his shirt $at 3fyr 33rut>ct fctn £>cmt> tt>afd)*B 
 
 washed 1 (affen ? 
 
 He has had it washed. Gtr fjctt c*> nxtfcfycn (affcn. 
 
 The cravat, t>a£ £a($tud) ; 
 
 the neck, t)cr $dU. 
 
 Hast thou sometimes had cravats #ctft £)u mcmcftmal #a(Stud)et au$s 
 
 mended 1 kffcrn (affen ? 
 
 have had some mended some- 3d) ^«bc mand)ma( tvc(cr)C auSfccffctn 
 
 times. (affcn. 
 
 EXERCISES. 102. 
 
 Have you drunk wine 1 — I have drunk some.— Have you drunk 
 much of it 1 — I have drunk but little of it. — Hast thou drunk 
 some beer 1 — I have drunk some 1 — Has thy brother drunk much 
 good cider 1 — He has not drunk much of it, but enough. — When 
 did you drink any wine 1 — I drank some yesterday and to-day (3d) 
 Ocifte gcftcrn lint) (jeute tvckben). — Has the servant carried the letter 1 
 — He has carried it. — Where has he carried it to 1 — He has 
 carried it to your friend. — Have you brought us some apples 1 — We 
 have brought you some. — How many apples have you brought us ] 
 — We have brought you twenty-five of them. — When did you 
 bring them 1 — I brought (rjafrc — qcbracfyt) them this morning. — At 
 what o'clock 1 — At a quarter to eight. — Have you sent your little 
 boy to the market? — I have sent him thither (t>af)tn). — When did 
 you send him thither 1 — This evening. — Have you written to your 
 father 1 — I have written to him. — Has he answered you *?— -He has 
 not yet answered me. — Have you ever written to the physician 1 — 
 I have never written to him. — Has he sometimes written to you ? 
 — Hj has often written to me. — What has he written to you ! — He 
 has written to me something. — Have your friends ever written to 
 you 1 — They have often written to me. — How many times (Lesson 
 XLII.) have they written to you 1 — They have written to me more 
 than thirty times. — Have you ever seen my son ] — I have never 
 seen him. — Has he ever seen you ] — He has often seen me. — Hast 
 thou ever seen any Greeks 1 — I have often seen some. — Have you 
 already seen a Syrian 1 — I have already seen one. — Where have 
 you seen one 1 — At the theatre. — Have you given the book to my 
 brother ] (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XXVIII.)— 1 have given it to 
 him. — Have you given money to the merchant] — I have given 
 some to him. — How much have you given to him 1 — I have given 
 to him fifteen crowns. — Have you given gold ribbons to cur good 
 
115 
 
 neighbours' children! — I have given some to them. — Will you 
 give some bread to the poor (man) (Page 34, Obs. A.) ? — I have 
 already given some to him. — Wilt thou give me some wine 1 — 1 
 have already given you some. — When didst thou give me some ! — - 
 I gave you some formerly. — Wilt thou give me some now ! — 1 
 cannot give you any (3d) farm Sfyncn fcincn). 
 
 103. 
 
 Has the American lent you money ! — He has lent me some. — 
 Has he often lent you some ! — He has lent me some sometimes. — 
 When did he lend you any ? — He lent me some formerly. — Has 
 the Italian ever lent you money ! — He has never lent me any. — 
 Is he poor ! — He is not poor ; he is richer than you. — Will you 
 lend me a crown ! — I will lend you two of them. — Has your boy 
 come to mine ! — He has come to him. — When ! — This morning. — 
 At what time ! — Early. — Has he come earlier than 1 ! — At what 
 o'clock did you come ! — I came at half past five. — He has come 
 earlier than you. — Wliere did your brother go to ? — He went to the 
 ball. — Wlien did he go thither! — He went thither the day before 
 yesterday. — Has the ball taken place ! — It has taken place. — Has 
 it taken place late ! — It has taken place early. — At what o'clock ! 
 — At midnight. — Does your brother learn to write ! — He does learn 
 it. — Does he already know how (Lesson XXXVII.) to read ! — He 
 does not know how yet. — Have you ever learnt German 1 — I learnt 
 it formerly, but I do not know it. — Has your father ever learnt 
 French! — He has never learnt it. — Does he learn it at present!— 
 He does learn it. — Do you know the Englishman whom I know! 
 I do not know the one whom (Lessons XII. and XIV.) you know; 
 but I know another (Lesson XXI). — Does your friend know the 
 same nobleman whom I know! — He does not know the same ; but 
 he knows others. — Have you known the same men whom I have 
 known (roc(d)C td) Cjefannt babe). — I have not known the same ; but 
 I have known others. — Have you ever had your coat mended ! — 
 I have sometimes had it mended ! — Hast thou already had thy 
 boots mended ! — I have not yet had them mended. — Has your 
 cousin sometimes had his stockings mended ! — He has several 
 times had them mended. — Hast thou had thy hat or thy shoe mend- 
 ed ? — I have neither had the one nor the other mended. — Have you 
 had my cravats or my shirts washed ! — I have neither had the 
 one nor the other washed. — W T hat stockings have you had washed ? 
 — I have had the thread stockings washed. — Has your father had 
 * table made ? — He has had one xiade. — Have you had anything 
 naade? — I have had nothing made. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
116 
 
 FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. — ifftttf Uttb trierjigste 
 Cectiott. 
 
 To receive — received. 23 e £ o m m e n * (etfyatten* 
 
 c m p f a n g e n *). 
 
 Ofo. A. We have observed (Lesson XLI.) that some 
 verbs do not take the syllable g e in the past participle ; 
 tiey are, 
 
 1st, Those which begin with one of the inseparable 
 unaccented particles : be, emp, ent, er, ge, fcer, noiber, jer 
 (See Lesson XXV.), or with one of the % following par- 
 ticles, when inseparable : bltrd), through ; gutter, behind ; 
 iiber, over ; um, around ; utlter, under ; fcott, full ; ttneber, 
 again. a 
 
 2nd, Those derived from foreign languages and ter- 
 minating in tren, or tereru Ex. (iubiren, to study ; past 
 part, fiubtrt, studied. 
 
 Rule. All verbs, in general, which have not the prin- 
 cipal accent upon the first syllable, reject the syllable 
 ge in the past participle. 
 
 How much money have you re- SBteoiet (Sk'fo Fjafcen fie bcfcmmen 1 
 
 ceived ] 
 1 have received three crowns. 3d) f)a6c brct Sfjakt kfommcn. 
 Have you received letters 1 Ipabtn <&k SSrtcfc crfjaftcn ? 
 
 I have received some. 3d) fycibe noeldjc etfyatten. 
 
 To promise — promised. 2Scrfprccl>e n* — D etfptodjen- 
 
 06s. 5. Derivative and compound verbs are con- 
 jugated like their primitives : thus the verb fcerfprecfyett* 
 is conjugated like fprecfyen*, to speak, which is its pri- 
 mitive. (Lessons XXIV. and XXXIV.) 
 
 Do you promise me to come? 93erfprcd)en <Ste nut $u fommetv? 
 I promise you. 3d) t)erfprccl)e c$ S^ncn. 
 
 The grosh (a coin), bet ©refefyen (is not softened in the 
 
 plur.) ; 
 the denier, bet ^pfennig. 
 
 A crown contains twenty-four (Stn Sbcilct F)at vi°x unb $roan$tg 
 groshes. ©rofefyen. 
 
 a Verbs compounded with these particles are inseparable, when the par- 
 ticles may be considered as adverbs, and separable, when they have th* 
 meaning of prepositions. 
 
117 
 
 A. grosh contains twelve deniers. (Sin (S5refd)en F>at jtt)b'(f >pfenntge« 
 A. florin contains sixteen groshes ©in ©ulben fjat fetf)$et)n ®refd)en 
 or sixty kreuzers, or forty-eight ober fed)$tg jtreujer, cber ad)t unb 
 good kreuzers. Merjtg gute jtrcu^er. 
 
 A denier contains two oboles. Sin pfennig fjat imi fetter. 
 The obole, ber feller. 
 
 There is. (S'Stft. 
 
 Tfore are. f§ $ ft n b 
 
 How many groshes are there in SBiemcl ©rofefyen ftnb in eincm Zka> 
 
 a crown ? let 1 
 
 Twenty-four. SSicr unb pocittftg. 
 
 To wear out — worn out. 2C 1 r a g e n * — a&gctra;}cn 
 
 (abnugen — aftgenu£t). 
 To spell — spelled. 23ud)fta&tre n — b u d) ft a * r t . 
 
 How? SPSte? 
 
 Well. ©ut, W0&( (adverbs b ). 
 
 Bad, badly. @d)(ccl)t, ut>c(, fcfyttmm (adverbs c ). 
 
 How has he washed the shirt ? £Btc f)at er ba§ £emb geroafefyen ? 
 He has washed it well. (5r ()at e$ gut gercafeben. 
 
 How have you written the letter 1 £Bie fjaben S'ie ben 23rtcf gefefyrte* 
 
 ben 1 
 
 Thus. 
 So so. 
 
 <3o. 
 ®o fo. 
 
 n this manner. 
 
 C2fuf btefe2Crt. 
 1 2Cuf biefe aSeife. 
 
 To call— called. 
 
 SKufen* — gerufen. 
 
 du called the man 1 
 
 £afcen @te ben Sflann gerufen ? 
 
 I have called him. 3d) fyafce tfyn gerufen. 
 
 Todry. Srotfnen. 
 
 To put (to place, to lay). £ e g c n . 
 
 Do you put your coat to dry ! 2egen ®ie Sfjren $ocf ju troefnen ? 
 1 do put it to dry. 3d) lege tljn gu treefnen. 
 
 Where have you placed (put) 2Bo fyaben <Ste t>a$ 23ud) fytnge- 
 thebook! legt? (See Note d , Lesson 
 
 XXXVII. 
 
 *> ©ut relates to the manner in which a thing is done. Ex. (£r rebet Qixt, he 
 speaks well. 2&of)t denotes a certain degree of well being. Ex. 3d) fcttt 
 TDflf)l, I am well ; id) ttjei§ e3 t»of)T, I know it well. 
 
 c <2d;led)t is the opposite to $ut, and lit el the opposite to tooljl. Ex. (§X 
 fdjretbt fdjtecfct, he writes badly. fetnxtS libel nefmten, to be offended at any- 
 thing. <Scf)lurtm is employed nearly in the same sense as liBel, thus we say: 
 fd)limm flemtg, bad enough ; befto femtmmer, so much the worse. 
 
118 
 
 1 have placed it upon the table. 3d) fyafce e$ auf ten £tfd) getegt 
 
 To lie — lain. £ t c a, e n * — g e t e 9 e n . 
 
 Where lies the book 1 2Bo licgt bag SSucb ? 
 
 It lies upon the table. (£& licgt auf tern Stfc&e. 
 
 It has lain upon the table. (§£ fjat auf fcem Stfcfye getegcn. 
 
 TAere. £)atauf. 
 
 Does the book lie on the chair 1 £tegt bat 33ud) auf tern ©tuf)(e ? 
 
 It does lie there (on it). (&$ (iecjt b a t a u f. 
 
 Tt has lain there. <S$ f)at batauf gelegen. 
 
 * 
 
 EXERCISES. 104. 
 
 Hast thou promised anything? — I have promised noihing. — Dc 
 you give me what you have promised me 1 — I do give it to you. — 
 Have you received much money 1 — I have received but little. — How 
 much have you received of it 1 — I have received but one crown.-^ 
 When have you received your letter ? — I have received it to-day. — 
 Hast thou received anything] — I have received nothing. — What 
 have we received ] — We have received long (cjtop) letters. — Do you 
 promise me to come to the ball 1 — I do promise you to come to it. — 
 Does your ball take place to-night] — It does take place. — How 
 much money have you given to my son ! — I have given him fifteen 
 crowns. — Have you not promised him more 1 — I have given him what 
 I have promised him. — Have our enemies received their money ]— « 
 They have not received it. — Have you German money ? — I have 
 some. — What kind of money have you ? — I have crowns, florins, 
 kreuzers, groshes, and deniers. — How many groshes are there in 
 a florin 1 — A florin contains (fyat) sixteen groshes, or sixty kreuzers, 
 or forty-eight good kreuzers. — Have you any oboles T — I have a 
 few of them. — How many oboles are there in a denier 1 — A denier 
 contains two oboles. — Will you lend your coat to me 1 — I will lend 
 it to you ; but it is worn out. — Are your shoes worn out ] — They 
 are not worn out. — Will you lend them to my brother 1 — I will 
 lend them to him.— To whom have you lent your hat ] — I have not 
 lent it ; I have given it to somebody. — To whom have you given 
 it ? — I have given it to a pauper (bet 2Crme). 
 
 105. 
 
 Does your little brother already know how to spell? — He does 
 know. — Does he spell well 1 — He does spell well. — How has your 
 little boy spelt 1 — He has spelt so so. — How have your children 
 written their letters 1 — They have written them badly. — Do you 
 know (Lesson XXXVII.) Spanish ] — I do know it. — Does your 
 cousin speak Italian ? — He speaks it well. — How do your friends 
 speak] — They do not speak badly (mcl)t iibd). — Do they listen to 
 what you tell them 1 — They do listen to it. — How hast thou learnt 
 English ? — I have learnt it in this manner. — Have you called me ?-* 
 I have not called you, but your brother. — Is he ccme 1 — Not yet 
 
119 
 
 (Lesson XL.) — Where have you wet (nag mad)en) your clothes 1 
 — I have wet them in the country. — Will you put then, to dry 
 ($u trccfnen legcn) 1 — I will put them to dry. — Where have you put 
 my hat 1 — I have put it upon the table. — Hast thou seen my book ] 
 — I have seen it. — Where is it ] — It lies upon your brother's trunk. 
 — Does my handkerchief lie upon the chair] — It does lie upon it. — 
 When have you been in the country 1 — I have been there the day 
 before yesterday. — Have you found your father there 1 — I have found 
 him there. — What has he said 1 — He has said nothing. — What have 
 you been doing in the country ] — I have been doing nothing there. 
 
 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. — 0ed)0 nrib trierfoste 
 &zttion. 
 
 Does your father wish to give 835ttt 3r)r SSotec nut etrcaS m tfjun 
 
 me anything to do 1 gcfren ? 
 
 He does wish to give thee some- (St will §ftt ttnoat $u tfyun gefcen. 
 
 thing to do. 
 
 Obs. Qa^M, to it, relates sometimes to an kifini 
 tive, as: 
 
 H?ve you a mind to work ] JpaUn <&\c £ujt 311 atkitcn ? 
 
 I have no mind to it. 3d) fja&c fcine Suft fccuu. 
 
 Is thy brother gone to the 3ft £)ein SBtubct auf$ £anb gegan 
 
 country ] gen ? 
 
 He is gone thither. (Sr tft ta^iti gegangcn. 
 •Hast thou a mind to go thither? £ajt 2>u Sufi: fcafjtn $u gefjen ? 
 
 I have a mind to it. 3d) fyabc £uft ba$u. 
 
 How old are you 1 2Btc aft ftnb <&u ? 
 
 I am twelve years old. 3d) tun arob'lf 3<# a alt. 
 
 How old is your brother 1 2Bte aft ift Sfjt SSrubet ? 
 
 He is thirteen years old. (St ift btci$eljtt Satyr alt. 
 
 Almost {nearly). 23 c i n a r) c or f a ft • 
 
 About. U n g c f a I) t. 
 
 Hardly. Ran m . 
 
 He is almost fourteen years old. (St ift faft tueqeljn 3al)t aft. 
 
 I am about fifteen years old. 3d) bin ungefd'fjt filnfjefjn Safo 
 
 aft. 
 He is almost sixteen years old. (St ift foetnalje fdj$e!)n Safjt aft. 
 Yoar are hardly seventeen years @ic ftnb faum ficbcngcljn 3af)t alt 
 old. 
 
 a Here custom require; tHs singular number. 
 
120 
 
 Not quite. $1 t cl) t g a n $. 
 
 I am not quite eighteen years 3d) bin md)t gan$ ad^tgc^tt Saljt 
 
 old. alt. 
 
 Art thou older than thy brother 1 SBtft £>u alter at* £>cm <8ruber ? 
 
 I am younger than he. 3d) bin (linger atg er. 
 
 To understand — undet stood. 23erftefjen* — serftanben 
 
 Do you understand me % SSerftefycn <Sie mid) 1 
 
 I do understand you. 3d) tterftefye ©te. 
 
 Have you understood the man ? £aben @te ten SCftann tterftanben 1 
 
 I have understood him. Set) fyctfce tf)n tterftanben. 
 
 I hear you, but I do not under- 3d) f)8re <bte, aber id) tterftefjc @ie 
 stand you. nid)t. 
 
 The noise, bcr Cd'rm ; 
 
 The noise (roaring) of the wind, t>a$ (Saufen t)e^ SStnbeg ; 
 
 The wind, t)cr 28tnb. 
 
 Do you hear the roaring of the #oren @ic bag (Saufcn te^ SQSiiK 
 
 wind 1 beg 1 
 
 I do hear it. 3d) lite eg. 
 
 To bark. 93c den. 
 
 The barking, bag S3eften* 
 
 Have you heard the barking of £>abcn (Sic t>a$ SSetlen ber £unbe ge* 
 
 the dogs? fjort? 
 
 I have heard it. 3d) tyafce eg gefyort. 
 
 To Zo^e — lost. aSerfteren* — \> e r I or c n . 
 
 To beat — beaten. <S d) t a g e n * — g e f d) t a g e n. 
 
 Thou beatest,— he beats. £)u fd)(agfr, — er fd)tagt. 
 
 To read — read (past part.). Sefcn* — getefen. 
 
 To remain — remained. 23 ( e i 6 e n* — g e b 1 1 e b e n (takes 
 
 fcin for its auxiliary). 
 To tale— taken. SSI e \) m c n * — g e n o m m e n. 
 
 To know— known. 2£ i f f c n * — g c W U f* t. 
 
 Have you lost anything 1 £abcn <Sie ctroag t>erforen ? 
 
 I have lost nothing. 3d) fabe nid)tg ttertorem 
 
 To Zose (at play) — lost. 33 e r f p i c t c n * — tterfpt-elt. 
 
 How much has your brother lost] SStcmcl f)at 3fyr SBruber tterfpictt? 
 
 He has lost about a crown. ©r fiat ungefafyr cinen Skater t»ers 
 
 fpiett. 
 Who has beaten the dog 1 SBcr fiat ben £unb gefd)(agcn ? 
 
 No one has beaten it. Cftiemanb bat ifyn gefd)tagen. 
 
 How many books has your cousin SQBtcmel 23ud)cr f)at 3f)t better fd)Wt 
 already read ' getefen 1 
 
121 
 
 He has already read five of them, (St fyat fceren fd)on fdnf getefen, Uttb 
 
 and at present he is reading jegt (tef'tct fcas fccfyfte. 
 
 the sixth. 
 Has the man taken anything- f s?at ^er fD&itn 3f)nen ctroaS ge* 
 
 from you ? nonimen 1 
 
 He has taken nothing- from me. f jgc r)ot nut ntcbt* Qcnommen. 
 Do you know as much as this &Mf[en Sic fo met ix>te fctefet 
 
 man 1 93Jcmn ? 
 
 I do not know as much as he. 3d) R>*$ ntcfyt fo met rote cr. 
 Have you known that? £nben ©te t>a$ gcnmpt ? 
 
 I have not known it. 3d) f)abe.c6 ntd)t gcroupt. 
 
 Where have our friends re- £80 finb unfcre 5teunt>e Qcbliefcen ? 
 
 mained ? 
 They have remained at home. <&\c finb 3U J5cmfe gebUebetu 
 
 exercises. 106. 
 
 Have you time to write a letter? — I have time to wiite o:*e 
 
 Will you lend a hook to my brother ] — I have lent one to him 
 already. — Will you lend him one more ? — I will lend him two 
 more. — Have you given anything to the poor 1 — I have given them 
 money. — How much money has my cousin given you 1 — He has 
 given me only a little ; he has given me only two crowns. — How 
 )ld is your brother] — He is twenty years old. — Are you as old as 
 he? — lam not so old. — How old are you 1 ? — I am hardly eighteen 
 years old. — How old art thou 1 — I am about twelve years old. — Am 
 I younger than you 1 — I do not know. — How old is our neighbour " 
 —He is not quite thirty years old. — Are our friends as young as 
 we ] — They are older than we. — How old are they ] — The one is 
 nineteen and the other twenty years old.— Is your father as old as 
 mine ]— He is older than yours 1 — Have you read my book 1 — I have 
 not quite read it yet. — Has your friend finished his book 1 — He has 
 almost finished it. — Do you understand me 1 — I do understand you. 
 — Does the Englishman understand us 1 — He does understand us. 
 — Do you understand what we are telling you ] — We do understand 
 it. — Dost thou understand German 1 — I do not understand it yet, 
 but 1 am learning it. — Do we understand the English 1 — We do 
 not understand them. — Do the Germans understand us 1 — They do 
 understand us. — Do we understand them 1 — We hardly understand 
 them. — Do you hear any noise ? — I hear nothing. — Have you heard 
 the roaring of the wind 1 — I have heard it. — What do you hear?— 
 I hear the barking of the dogs. — Whose dog is this 1 — It is the dog 
 of the Scotchman. 
 
 107. 
 
 Have you lost your stick 1 — I have not lost it. — Has your sei 
 rant lost my note 1 — He has lost it. — Have you gone to the ball ] 
 —No, I have not gone to it. — Where have you remained 1 — I have 
 remained at home. — Has your father lost (at play) as much money 
 as I ?— He has lost more of it than you 1 — How much have I lost 1 
 6 
 
122 
 
 -—You have hardly .ost a crown. — Where has thy brother r©» 
 mained 1 — He has remained at home. — Have your friends re* 
 mained in the country] — They have remained there. — Do you 
 know as much as the English physician? — I do not know as much 
 as he. — Does the French physician know as much as you ] — He 
 knows more than I. — Does any one know more than the French 
 physicians] — No one knows more than they. — Have your brothers 
 read my books ] — They have not quite read them. — How many of 
 them have they read ]— >They have hardly read two of them. — Has 
 the son of my gardener taken anything from you ] — He has taken 
 my books from me. — What hast thou taken from him] — I have 
 taken nothing from him. — Has he taken money from you] — He 
 has taken some from me. — How much money has he taken from 
 you ] — He tas taken from me almost two crowns. (See end of 
 Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Qicbm ttltb merest* 
 
 Section. 
 
 To bite — bitten. <8 C t p e n — gebtffen. 
 
 Why ? SBarum? 
 
 Because* 58 c i f. 
 
 DCr* The verb of the subject or nominative, (in 
 compound tenses, the auxiliary) is placed at the end 
 of the phrase, when this begins with a conjunction or 
 a conjunctive word, such as a relative pronoun or a 
 relative adverb. The conjunctions which do not re- 
 quire the verb to be placed at the end, will be given 
 thereafter. 
 
 Why do you beat the dog ? ££arum fd)(a$en ©te fc>en £utib ? 
 
 I beat it, because it has bitten 3d) fd)tage tfyn, weil ct nud) ge&tffen 
 
 me. fyat. 
 
 Do you see the man who is in (Sefyen ©te ben SOfrmn, tt>eld)Ct (bet) 
 
 the garden 1 tm (fatten ift ? 
 
 I do see him. 3d) fclje ifjti. 
 
 Do you know the man who has jtennen @te ben Sflcinn, bet (roe(d)Ct) 
 
 lent me the book ? nut l>a$ 23ud) geltcfjen f)at ? 
 
 I do not know him. 3d) fenne tfyn ntd)t. 
 
 Do you read the book, which I gefen ©te t>a$ S3ud), wetcfyetf td) 3fc 
 
 have lent you 1 ncn geftefyen f)Qt>e ? 
 
 1 do read it. 3d) U\i e& 
 
 Obs. When the verb, which a conjunctive word 
 causes to be placed at the end of the phrase, is com 
 
123 
 
 pounded with a separable particle, this is not detached 
 from it. Ex. 
 
 I breakfast before I go out. 3d) frufyftucfc, cl)C id) cmSgefje. 
 
 Does the tailor sho v you the 3ctgt Sfyncn bet (Sdmcibcr fcen $Koc& 
 coat, which he is mending? roelcfycn cr auSfccffert? 
 
 To wait. SOS a r t c n. 
 
 To expect. 6 r ro a r t e m* 
 
 To wait for some one or for 2Cuf (Sinen ebet cttt>a^ marten 
 
 something. 
 To expect some one or some- (S'tncn obet etrcaS crroarten. 
 
 thing. 
 Do you wait for my brother? SKarten <Sie auf mcincn &mbvt? 
 I do wait for him. 3d) roartc auf tfyn. 
 
 Do you expect friends ! (Srroattcn ©te grcunfc; ? 
 
 I do expect some. 3d) erroattc etntge. 
 
 To owe. @d)UlM9 fctu* ° 
 
 How much do you owe me ? SBtcmet ftnt) (Sic mit fcfculfctg? 
 
 F owe you fifty crowns. 3d) bin 3&ncn flinfetfl S^atct fd)itU 
 
 btg. 
 How much does the man owe SQSicmcl ift Sfcnin t)cr 9flann fdfeulbtg ? 
 
 you? 
 He owes me ten shillings. (gt ift nut $ef)n (Sdritttnge fdjutbtg. 
 
 Does he owe as much as you 1 3ft ct fo met fct)ult>t9 rote <Sie ? 
 He owes more than I. (St ift mef)t frf>utbig at$ id). 
 
 The shilling, bet ©d&tUing ; 
 
 the pound, ba$ 5>funb ; 
 
 the livre (a coin), bet granfe. 
 
 To return — (to come bach) — re- 3 u t u d $ o mm e n * — 3 u r (i cf 9 e * 
 turned. t m m c R. 
 
 At what o'clock do you return Urn tmcmel Uf)t femmen ©ic t>cn 
 
 from the market? bem 9DZar£te gutitcf ? 
 
 I return from it at twelve o'clock. 3d) f emme um $tt>o(f Uf)t t>on ba $u» 
 
 rucf. 
 
 From there, thence (from it). 55 on ba. 
 
 Does the servant return early jtommt bet S3ebtente frtif) sen ba $u* 
 
 thence \ tucf ? 
 
 He returns thence at ten o'clock (St femmt um gefjn ltf)r ^etgenS 
 
 in the morning. yen ba Auritcf. 
 
 At nine o'clock in the morning, f Um neun Ufjt 9Dlorgcn$. 
 At eleven o'clock at night. f Um elf Uf)t 2(&enb$. 
 
 a 3Bartetl auf, with the accusative case, is used, when the person or thing 
 spoken of is present, and evtoarten, when it is not. 
 
 b v5cf)ittbtg feht*, to owe, is to be considered as a compound verb, of which 
 the separable particle is placed at the end, fdjutlbtg, due, owing, indebted, hav 
 ins here the force of the separable particle. 
 
124 
 
 How long ? 2B t e I a n g e ? « 
 
 During, for -2B a f) r c n t) (a preposition whick 
 
 governs the genitive case). 
 
 How long has he remained ££te (ano,e tft ct t>a gcMtcOen ? 
 there ? 
 
 A minute. (Sine SDrtnute. 
 
 An hour. (Sine 8tunt>e.<i 
 
 A day. (Stnen Sag. 
 
 A year. (Sin 3o()r (a neuter substantive, 
 
 taking e in the plur. without 
 being softened). 
 A month. (Stncn 9flonat. 
 
 The summer, ber (Sommet. 
 
 The winter, bet Winter. 
 
 rSOBafyrenb M ©ommerS. 
 During the summer. < *Den @ommet fi&cr. 
 
 C £)en ©ommcr fyintmrd). 
 How long have you spoken with 9Bie fange fyaben <Ste mit bem SEan* 
 
 the man ] ne gcfprccftcn ? 
 
 I have spoken with him for three 3d) fjabe btct ©tunben mit ifym ges 
 
 hours. fptod)cn. 
 
 ^Hojfcr long has your brother re- 2Bie tange ift 3f)t 93rut)cr auf t>em 
 
 mained in the country ] £anbe geOtteben ] 
 
 He has remained there a month. St ift einen 9}?onat t)a gefclte&cn. 
 Have you remained long with <Sint> <Sie lancje Oet nicinem SSatet 
 
 my father ] geHieben 1 
 
 t have remained with him for an 3d) bin cine (Sttmbe tang bet tf)m Ofi* 
 hour. Hieben. 
 
 Long. 2angc. 
 
 exercises. 108. 
 
 Why do you love that man ] — I love him, because he is good. — 
 Why does your neighbour beat his dog? — Because it has bitten 
 his little boy. — Why does our father love me ] — He loves you, be- 
 cause you are good. — Do your friends love us ] — They love us, be- 
 cause we are good. — Why do you bring me wine] — I bring you 
 some, because you are thirsty. — Why does the hatter drink] — He 
 drinks, because he is thirsty. — Do you see the sailor who is in 
 (auf) the ship ] — I do not see the one who is in (auf) the ship, but 
 
 c The accusative case answers to the question tote lattge? how long? and 
 other similar questions, relative to measure, weight, quantity, &c, as tote 
 Jang? how long? tote fcfywer? how heavy? totesiel? how much? tote tbtu* 
 ft? at what price? toie toett? how far? tote a,vo£? of what size? tote alt? 
 how old ? 
 
 d SJitmtte, minute, ©tltttbe, hour, are two nouns of the feminine gender; 
 they add tt in all the cases of the plural . without softening the radical vow- 
 els. We can also say: ettte ©tunbe tag during an hour; ettt 3al;r (ana, 
 during a year. 
 
125 
 
 the one who is in (auf) the square. — Do you read the books which mj 
 father has given you ] — I do read them. — Do you know the Italians 
 whom we know ] — We do not know those whom you know, but 
 we know others (anfcerc). — Do you buy the horse which we have 
 seen 1 ? — I do not buy that which we have seen, but another (ctn 
 an terc$). — Do you seek what you have lost 1 — I do seek it. — Do you 
 find the man whom you have looked for? — I do not find him. — 
 Does the butcher kill the ox which he has bought in (auf with the 
 dat.) the market ] — He does kill it. — Do our cooks kill the chickens 
 which they have bought]' — They do kill them. — Does the hatter 
 mend the hat which I have sent him ] — He does mend it. — Does 
 the shoemaker mend the boots which you have sent him ] — He does 
 not mend them, because they are worn out. — Does your coit lie 
 upon the chair ] — It does lie upon it.- — Does it lie upon the chair 
 upon which 1 placed it? — No, it lies upon another. — Where is my 
 hat ] — It is in the room in which (roorin or in nxkfyem) you have been. 
 — Do you wait for any one ] — I wait for no one. — Do you wait for 
 the man whom I have seen this morning] — I do wait for him. — 
 Art thou waiting for thy book ] — I am waiting for it. — Do you 
 expect your father this evening] — I do expect him. — At what 
 o'clock has he gone to the theatre ] — He has gone thither at seven 
 o'clock. — At what o'clock does he return from there 1 — He returns 
 from there at eleven o'clock. — Has your bailiff returned from the 
 market ] — He has not yet returned from it. — At what o'clock has 
 your brother returned from the country ] — He has returned from 
 thence at ten o'clock in the evening. 
 
 109. 
 
 At what o'clock hast thou come back from thy friend 1 — 1 have 
 come back from him at eleven o'clock in the morning. — Hast thou 
 remained long with him ] — I have remained v/ith him about an 
 hour. — How long do you intend to remain at the ball ] — I intend 
 to remain there a few minutes. — How long has the Englishman 
 remained with you ] — He has remained with me for two hours.— 
 Do you intend to remain long in the country ] — I intend to remain 
 there during the summer. — How long have your brothers remained 
 in town (in t>cr <Stctbt) ] — They have remained there during the 
 winter. — How much do I owe you] — You do not owe me much. — 
 How much do you owe your tailor ]—-I only owe him fifty crowns. 
 —How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ] — I owe him already 
 seventy crowns. — Do I owe y'5u anything ? — You owe me nothing. 
 — How much does the Frenchman owe you ] — He owes me more 
 than you. — Do the English owe you as much as the Spaniards ] — 
 Not quite so much. — Do I owe you as much as my brother 1 — You 
 owe me more than he. — Do our friends owe you as much as we ]— 
 You owe me less than they. — Why do you give money to the mer- 
 chant ] — I give him some, because he has sold me handkerchiefs. 
 —•Why do you not < brink] — I do not drink, because I am not 
 thirsty. — Why do you pick ip this ribbon ] — I pick it up, because 
 
126 
 
 I want it. — Why do you lend money to this mam'? — I lend him 
 some, because he wants some. — Why does your brother study 1— 
 He studies, because he wishes to learn German ((crncn nnlt). — Art 
 thou thirsty 1 — I am not thirsty, because I have drunk. — Has your 
 cousin drunk already] — Not yet, he is not yet thirsty. — Does the 
 servant show you the room which he sweeps ] — He does not show 
 me that which he sweeps now, but that which he has swept yester- 
 day. — Do you breakfast before you go out 1 — I go out before I 
 breakfast. — What does your shoemaker do before he sweeps his 
 room ? — He mends my boots and my shoes before he sweeps it (See 
 end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— 3Uljt tmb tfiet&ete 
 Section. 
 
 To live, to dwell, to reside, to £Bof)nen« 
 abide, to lodge. 
 
 Where do you live ? ££o roofyncn (Sic? 
 
 I live in William-street, number 3d) roofyne in t>et SBityefo^fttajk, 
 
 twenty-five. Summer fitnf unt> a aroanatg. 
 
 Where has your brother lived? £Bo f>at tf)t 23tut>et gcroofynt ? 
 He has lived in Frederic-street, (St bat tn fcet $riet>ttd)Sftraj}e, Sflums 
 
 number one hundred and fifty. met Ijunfcett unb funf$t§ Qercofynt. 
 Dost thou live at thy cousin's £Bof)nft £)u feet £)ctnem better % 
 
 house? 
 I do not live at his, but at my 3d) woljnc ntd)t bet tfym, fontcrn Oct 
 
 fathers house. metnem SSatcr. 
 
 Does your friend still live where SBefynt 3f)t gtcunb nod) (t>a), wo 
 
 I have lived 1 id) gcrool)nt (jabe 1 
 
 He lives no longer where you (St roofynt trd)t mefyt (t>a), roo <Sie 
 
 have lived ; he lives at present a,crooI)nt { aben ; ct wefynt \i%% auf 
 
 in the great square. t)cm gtofi tt $)lcige. 
 
 The street. ®ic (Strafe (a noun of the femi- 
 
 nine gender). 
 
 The number. £)te Sfcummct (a noun of the femi- 
 
 nine gender). 
 
 To brush. 23 u t ft e n. 
 
 Have you brushed my coat 1 $abm <Stc metnen SRcd geMtrftet ? 
 I have brushed it. 3d) (jabc tf)n Qeburftet. 
 
 How long? &Bte Una,c? 
 
 Ti/7, tmto'Z. 23 i & 
 
 * In German, the conjunction Ull^ is used to add a number less than a 
 Qimdred. 
 
127 
 
 fill noon, ) m;j cmi^A 
 
 Till twelve o'clock. | Sl > ^^ 
 
 Till to-morrow. 23i^ mfltgen. 
 Till the day after to-morrow. £Bt$ tibermergen. 
 
 Till Sunday. <8i$ ©enntag. 
 
 Till Monday. S3t$ Zoning. 
 
 Till this evening. ffii5 rjeute 2Cbenfc>. 
 
 Till evening. 23i^ auf ten 2ft?cnt). 
 
 Until morning. S5t$ an ben Bergen. 
 
 Until the next day. S3i6 gum anbetn Sag. 
 
 Until this day. 23& auf fctcfen Sag. 
 
 Until this moment. 23t$ auf fctefen 2CugenbUct 
 
 Till now— hitherto. <8& je|t — i bt^er. 
 
 To this place, hither, thus far, as 23i$ fytetfyer (an adverb of place) 
 
 far as here. 
 To that place, thither, so far, as S3t£ tafjtn (an adverb of place). 
 
 far as there. 
 
 Ob$. The days of the week are all of the mascu- 
 line gender, except bie SD&ttWOdje, Wednesday, which 
 some authors use as feminine. 
 
 Tuesday, £)kn#ag ; 
 
 Wednesday, SOtfttrood) ; 
 
 Thursday, £)onncrftag ; 
 
 Friday, ftccttag ; 
 
 Saturday, ©amftctg (<Sonnabent>). 
 
 Then. £> a n n — (a i $ fc a n n). 
 
 Till I return (till my return). S3t6 id) gutfieffomme. 
 
 Till my brother returns (till my 23i$ mem 23cufc>et sutiidfommt. 
 
 brother's return). 
 Till four o'clock in the morning. 25t$ Met Ur)t 9#0tgen$. 
 Till midnight (till twelve o'clock <8t$ 92Httetnacr;t (a noun of the 
 
 at night). feminine gender). 
 
 How long did you remain with £Bte lange finb @ie 6ci metnem 
 
 my father 1 SSatcr g^bltebcn ? 
 
 I remained with him till eleven 3d) bin big e(f llr)r 2Cbent>$ bet ifym 
 
 o'clock at ni^-ht. geblieben. 
 
 One, the people, they or any one §Tl a n (indefinite pronoun always 
 
 singular). 
 
 Have they brought my shoes 1 £at man metne ^cfyube gebracbt? 
 
 They have not brought them yet. Sffian fyat ftc nod) nictt gebracfyt. 
 
 What have they said 1 2£a$ fjat man gefagt ? 
 
 They have said nothing. 9Jlat\ bat md)t6 gefagt 
 
 What have they done 1 3Ba$ bat man getban ? 
 
 They have done nothing. 932an r)at ntd)tg getfyan. 
 
128 
 
 To be willing (to ivish), — been SfBeUett*,— gewoUt 
 willing (wished). 
 
 Has he been willing to go for $at er ben 2Cr^t f)0len roelten ? (noi 
 
 the physician 1 gcwcttt. See Obs. Less. XLIV.) 
 
 He has not been willing to go (St foot t()n ntd)t f)o(en roellen. 
 
 for him. 
 
 Has he wished to go out this £dt cr biefen Bergen au^c()«i 
 
 morning ? reollen ? 
 
 He has not wished to go out. <§r l)at md)t auSfjer)cn tt>oUciu 
 
 Have they been willing to do it? $at man e$ tfyun rooilen ? 
 
 They have not been willing to SQlan M c$ mcf)t /fyun wollen. 
 
 do it. 
 
 They have not been willing to 33?cm fyat md)t$ tfyun rootfen. 
 
 do any thing. 
 
 To fo a&te (can),-— been able & on nc n* — g c £ onn t. 
 
 (cow/d). 
 Have they been able to find the £cit man tic 93iicbcr ftnben ftfanen 1 
 
 books 1 (not gefennt. See Less. XLIV,) 
 
 Thej have not been able to find 93?cm (jot ftc ntcfyt finben rc'nnem 
 
 them. 
 Has the tailor been willing to £ctt bet (Scfynetber mcincn dlQd ou$s 
 
 ment^ my coat ] fceffern tvellen ? 
 
 He has not been willing to mend (5t (jut tfyn ntd)t auSfceffetn «>ctU*> 
 
 it. 
 
 Something (or anything) new. (StroaS 9? e U c $♦ 
 
 What do they say new 1 8S5a$ fagt man 9?euc$ ? 
 
 They say nothing new. 93fan fagt ntd^t^ 3&cuc$. 
 
 iVew. %l c u. 
 
 My new coat. 9$ein neueS jtteib* 
 
 My new friend. gftetn ncuct gteunb. 
 
 His new clothes. (Seine neuen JUetbct. 
 
 exercises. 110. 
 
 Where do you live ? — I live in the large (in bet Qreferv) street.— 
 Where does your father live 1 — He lives at his friend's house- 
 Where do your brothers live 1 — They live in the large street, number 
 a hundred and twenty. — Dost thou live at thy cousin's "? — 1 do live at 
 his house. — Do you still live where you did live (ejeruefynt fyaben) ?— 
 I live there still. — Does your friend still live where he did live 1 ? — 
 He no longer lives where he did live. — Where does he live at present 1 
 — He lives in William-street, number a hundred and fifteen.— 
 Where is your brother] — He is in the garden. — Where is youj 
 cousin gone to 1 — He is gone into the garden. — Did you go to the 
 play yesterday ] — I did go thither. — Have you seen my friend 1 — 
 I have seen him. — Wlien did you see him ] — I saw (fycibc — gefefyen) 
 him this morning. — Where has he gone to *— I do not know (Obs 
 
129 
 
 Lesson XLIIL). — Has the servant brushed my clothes 1 — He has 
 brushed them. — Has he swept my room ] — He has swept it. — .How 
 long* did he remain here 1 — Till noon. — How long have you been 
 writing ] — I have been writing until midnight. — How long did I 
 work] — You worked until four o'clock in the morning. — How long 
 did my brother remain with you? — He remained with me until 
 evening. — How long hast thou been working 1 — I have been working 
 till now. — Hast thou still long to write ] — I have to write till the 
 day after to-morrow. — Has the physician still long to work ] — He 
 has to work till to-morrow. — Must I remain long here ] — You must 
 remain here till Sunday. — Must my brother remain long with you 1 
 — He must remain with us till Monday. — How longi*ustI work?— * 
 You must work till the day after to-morrow. — Have you still long 
 to speak 1 — I have still an hour to speak. — Did you speak long 1 — 
 1 spoke (fyaftc — gefptocbcn) till the next day .—Have you remained 
 long in my room ? — I have remained in it till this moment. — Have 
 you still long to live in this house 1 — I have still long to live in it 
 (fcartn). — How long have you still to live in it] — Till Sunday. 
 
 111. 
 
 Does your friend still live with you 1 — He lives with me no longer, 
 — How long has he lived with you ] — He has lived with me only a 
 year. — How long did you remain at the ball ] — I remained there till 
 midnight. — How long have you remained in the carriage ? — I have 
 remained an hour in it. — Have you remained in the garden till now ] 
 — I have remained there (fcartn) till now. — Has the captain come 
 as far as here] — He has come as far as here. — How far has the 
 merchant come ? — He has come as far as the end of the small road. 
 — Has the Turk come as far as the end of the forest 1 — He has come 
 as far as there. — What do you do in the morning? — I read. — And 
 what do you do then ] — I breakfast and work. — Do you breakfast 
 before you read 1 — No, Sir, I read before I breakfast. — Dost thou 
 play instead of working (Lesson XXXVI.) ] — I work instead of 
 playing. — Does thy brother go to the play instead of going into the 
 garden] — He does not go to the play. — What do you do in the 
 evening] — I work. — What hast thou done this evening] — I have 
 brushed your clothes and have gone to the theatre. — Didst thou 
 remain long at the theatre ] — I remained there but a few minutes. — 
 Are you willing to wait here ] — How long must I wait ] — You must 
 wait till my father returns. — Has anybody come ] — Somebody has 
 come. — What have they (man) wanted (cjcroollt) ] — They (20?cm) have 
 wanted to speak to you. — Have they not been willing to wait ] — 
 They have not been willing to wait. — What do you say to that 
 man ] — I tell him to wait. — Have you waited for me long] — I have 
 waited for you an hour. — Have you been able to read my letter? — 
 I have been able to read it. — Have you understood it ] — I have 
 understood it. — Have you shown it to any one ] — I have shown it 
 to no one. — Have they brought my clothes ? — They have not brought 
 them yet. — Have they swept my room and brushed my clothes 1 — 
 6* 
 
130 
 
 They have done both (fceibeS). — What have they said ? — They have 
 said nothing. — What have they done 1 — They have done nothing. — 
 Has your little brother been spelling 1 — He has not been willing 
 to spelL — Has the merchant's boy been willing to work ] — He has 
 not been willing. — What has he been willing to do ] — He has not 
 been willing to do anything. 
 
 112. 
 
 Has the shoemaker been able to mend my boots 1 — He has not 
 Deen able to mend them. — Why has he not been able to mend them '* 
 —-Because he has had no time. — Have they (man) been able to find 
 my gold buttons ? — They have not been able to find them. — Why 
 has the tailor not mended my coat ] — Because he has no good 
 thread. — Why have you beaten the dog ? — Because it has bitten me. 
 — Why do you not drink ? — Because 1 am not thirsty. — What have 
 they wished to say 1 — They have not wished to say anything. — 
 What do they (man) say new in the market? — They say nothing 
 new there. — Have they (man) wished to kill a man 1 — They have 
 not wished to kill any one. — Have they said any thing new ?— 
 T^ey have said nothing new. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FORTY.NINTH LESSON.— $fam mxb aieqigste 
 Action. 
 
 To steal — stolen. ® t c & U n * — $ c ft o fj I c n. 
 
 Thou stealest, he steals. 3)u ftiefjfft, — ct ftteljlt. 
 
 To steal something from some f Scmantcm etroaS ftefyten*. 
 
 one. 
 Have they stolen your hat from f £>at man Sfmen Sfjren £ut a> 
 
 you 1 fto&len ? 
 
 They have stolen it from me. f 9Jlan fyat if)tt mtr $cjicf)(cn. 
 Has the man stolen the book f £at £)tr t>er 93?ann bag 23ud) 
 
 from thee ? a,efto()(en 1 
 
 He has stolen it from me. f (Sr ()at c* mtr geftofylcn. 
 
 What have they stolen from you? j £B a * M man Sfynen geftof)(en ? 
 
 All. 71 U is declined in the following 
 
 manner. 
 
 ( N. G. D. A. 
 
 All < Masc. alter — eg — em — en* 
 
 ( Neut atfeg — e^ — em — e$, 
 
 ! Plural for all genders. 
 
 N. G. D. A. 
 We — er — ett — e. 
 
131 
 
 Ail the good wine. UiUt gute &Bem. 
 
 All the good water. TOeS gute SKaffet* 
 
 Ml the good children. 2ClIe $ute Jtinfcct. (See page 34, 
 
 Obs. B.) 
 
 Obs* JL When two determinative words, which do 
 not take the definite article, as : aCf, all (See Lesson 
 XXXII.) ; biefer, this; jener, that, &c., are placed 
 one after the other, they have each the characteristic 
 ending of this article. Ex. 
 
 All this wine. 2(flcr biefer (not biefe) 2Bein. 
 
 All this money. MeS biefes (not biefe) ©elt>- 
 
 All these children. UiU fctcfe Winter. 
 
 All these good children. UiU ttcfe QUten £ inter. 
 
 Obs. B. In familiar style, when cttt, all, is followed 
 by a pronoun, it often rejects its termination, Ex. 
 
 All his money. OT fctn ®e(£>. 
 
 The word, fcaS 2Bcrt ; 
 
 the speech, fc>a$ 28ort (plur. ££i>rte). a 
 
 How is this word written? &Bte fcfyreibt man fctefeS SBott ? 
 
 It is written thus. SOlan fdjrcibt & f^ 
 
 To dye or to colour. % a r b c n . 
 
 To dye black, white, <&&)WMb roeip fatben. 
 
 To dye green, blue. ©riin, b(au farben. 
 
 To dye red, yellow. SRotf), getb fatten. 
 
 To dye grey, brown. d5tau, btaun farben. 
 
 My blue coat. 9#etn Mauer Sfacf (mein ttauti 
 
 £feti>). 
 
 This white hat. £>tcfcr roet£e £ut. 
 
 Do you dye your coat blue ? garben @ie Sfyren died Uan ? 
 
 I dye it green. 3d) fa'rbe tfjn cjtftn. 
 What colour will you dye your £Bie roolten <Sw S-lfc &ud) fd't6en ? 
 
 cloth ? 
 
 [ will dye it blue. 3d) txnft e£ btau farben. 
 
 The dyer, fc>er garber. 
 
 To get dyed— got dyed. g a r b c n t a ffen*. 
 
 VVJiat colour have you got your 2Bte fyaben (Sic Sforen £ut fa'rbett 
 hat dyed ? (affen ? 
 
 have got it dyed white. 3d) fjabc tf)n rocip farben (affen. 
 
 a When 2Bort, means merely a word, its plural is SBorter ; but when it 
 conveys the meaning of a whole phrase, its plural is SBotte. Ex. Seete 
 Sffiovte, useless words ; ©lauben <§>te itteinen SBotten, take my word for it; fcal 
 8<titV>ftt)prt, the substantive ; p^ur. bte .gaitytttjorrer, the substantives. 
 
132 
 
 As far as my brother's. 23t$ 311 metnem S5ru$#r, 
 
 As far as London. £U* genfcen. 
 
 As far as Paris. S5tg g)artfc 
 
 As far as England. ©u> nad) (Snglanb. 
 
 As far as France, $i$ nad) <?rqnfrdfo. 
 
 As far as Italy. *Bis nad) Staltctt- 
 
 Germany, ©cutfcfrfcmfc ; 
 
 Spain, ©pontcn ; 
 
 Holland, £etfant>. 
 
 Rule. The names of countries, towns, and villages, 
 belong to the neuter gender, and stand without the 
 article. They are indeclinable, except in the genitive, 
 which receives $ when the pronunciation admits it. If 
 the ending of the name does not admit the letter £, as 
 in tyaxi$, Paris, the preposition fcott, of, is used. Ex. 
 trie ©ntt>of)Uer fcon tyaxi$, the inhabitants of Paris, 
 Some proper names of countries are of the feminine 
 gender. These, like all other feminine nouns, are in- 
 variable in the singular, and form their case by means 
 of the definite article, viz. 1, Names of countries 
 w r hich terminate in et. Ex. trie Zuxhi, Turkey ; and 2. 
 the following : tie Mximm, Crimea ; trie ?aujT§, Lusatia ; 
 trie 9D?ar¥, March; trie STOoIban, Moldavia; trie spfafj, 
 Palatinate ; trie ©rf)tt)etj, Switzerland. Ex. trie ©cf)tt>et$ ; 
 Switzerland ; ber ©cfymetj, of Switzerland ; hex ®rf)tt>et^ 
 to Switzerland ; trie ©cfywefj, Switzerland. 
 
 To tiavel 8? e t f c n (is used with the auxs- 
 
 liary fdn). 
 
 Do you travel to Paris .- SKctfen Sic nacl) tyaxU 1 
 
 Do you go to Paris 1 ©cfjen ®# nad) $)ari$ ? 
 
 I do travel (or go) thither. 3d) rctfe (id) 9c ()c) t>af)tn. 
 
 Is he gone to England 1 3ft ct nad) (Snajanb cjcrctf't ? 
 
 He is gone thither. (3;r ift t>af)in gcrctf't. 
 
 How far has he travelled ? 23ig tvobtn ift cr gctctf't 1 
 He has travelled as far as (§r tft tus nad) 2(mcri£a gcmf't 
 America. 
 
 exercises. 113. 
 
 Have they (man) stolen anything from you ] — They have stolen 
 all the good wine from me. — Have they stolen anything from your 
 father? — They have stolen all his good books from him. — Dost 
 thou steal anything 1 — I stea! nothing.-— Hast thou ever stolen 
 
133 
 
 anything* 1 — I have never stolen anything (ntc ctruci^). — Have the| 
 stolen your apples from you 1 — They have stolen them from me. — 
 What have they stolen from me ] — They have stolen from you all 
 the good books. — When did they steal the carriage from you]— 
 They stole (93? cm f)at — cjiftcfy(en) it from me the day before yesterday. 
 — Have they ever stolen anything from us ] — They have never 
 stolen anything from us. — Has the carpenter drunk all the wine ]— 
 He has drunk it. — Has your little boy torn all his books ] — He has 
 torn them all. — Why has he torn them ] — Because he does not 
 wish to study. — How much have you lost (at play) ] — I have lost 
 all my money. — Do you know where my father is ] — I do not know. 
 — Have you not seen my book ] — I have not seen it. — Do you 
 know how this word is written] — It is written thus. — Do you dye 
 anything] — I dye my hat. — What colour do you dye it ] — I dye it 
 black. — What colour do you dye your clothes] — We dye them 
 yellow. 
 
 114. 
 
 Do you get your trunk dyed ] — I get it dyed. — What colour dc 
 you get it dyed ] — I get it dyed green. — What colour dost thou get 
 thy thread stockings dyed ] — I get them dyed white. — Does youi 
 cousin get his handkerchief dyed ] — He does get it dyed. — Does 
 he get it dyed red ]— He gets it dyed grey. — What colour have 
 your friends got their coats dyed ] — They have got them dyed green, 
 ^-W hat colour have the Italians had their carriages dyed ] — They 
 nave had them dyed blue. — What hat has the nobleman ] — He has 
 two hats, a white one and a black one. — Have I a hat ] — You have 
 several. — Has your dyer already dyed your cravat ] — He has dyed 
 it. — What colour has he dyed it] — He has dyed it yellow. — Do you 
 travel sometimes ] — I travel often. — Where do you intend to go to 
 (f)tn$urctfcn) this summer ] — I intend to go to Germany. — Do you 
 not go to Italy ] — I do go thither. — Hast thou sometimes travelled ? 
 — I have never travelled. — Have your friends the intention to go to 
 Holland ] — They have the intention to go thither. — When do they 
 intend to depart 1 — They intend to depart the day after to morrow. 
 — Has your brother already gone to Spain ] — He has not yet gone 
 thither. — Have you travelled in Spain ] — 1 have travelled there. — 
 When do you depart ? — I depart to-morrow. — At what o'clock ?— 
 At five o'clock in the morning. — Have you worn out all your boots 1 
 — I have worn them all out.— What have the Turks done ? — They 
 have burnt all our good ships. — Have you finished all your letters 1 
 —I have finished them all.— How far have you travelled ] — I have 
 travelled as far as Germany. — Has he travelled as far as Italy ] — 
 He has travelled as far as America. — How far have the Spaniards 
 gone ] — They have gone as far as London. — How far has this poor 
 man come ] — -He has come as far as here. — Has he come as far as 
 your house ] — He has come as far as my father's. (See end of 
 Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
134 
 
 FIFTIETH LESSON.— jfimfygste flection. 
 
 Above. 
 Below. 
 
 This side. 
 That side. 
 
 Dben (rest). 
 Unten (rest). 
 
 £)iegfett$(rest) 
 3enfett$ (rest). 
 
 [1st (<-«-)• 
 
 i tjmanter or fytnctb 
 i fyerunter or fyerab 
 Hither, fyterfyer, } 
 fyter ^eriiber, > 
 son bortfyer ) 
 Thither, bortfym 
 
 (motion) 
 
 (motion), 
 (motion). 
 
 Obs. A. The particles fyer and fyut, having no corres- 
 ponding words in English, must be carefully distin- 
 guished from each other, jjer expresses motion to- 
 wards the person who speaks, as : fyercutf, up ; fyerunter 
 or fyerab, down ; f)erau£, out ; fyeriiber, hither, to this 
 side. fyin expresses motion from the person who 
 speaks towards another place, as : fymcwf, up ; fyutitttter 
 or fyinab, down ; fynwuS, out ; fymiiber, thither, to the 
 opposite side. If, for instance, I wish to tell any one 
 who is on a mountain to come down, I must say : f cm* 
 mm ©te fyerunter, come down (to where I am). He 
 might answer me, f ommen ©te fyercutf, come up. I might 
 say to him, id) f omme ntcfyt fymauf, I am not coming up ; 
 and he might answer me, imb id) ntcfyt fyinunter, and I 
 am not coming down. 
 
 According to this we must say : fommen ©te Ijerem, 
 come in ; gefyen ©te fytncmg, go out ; fasten ©ie fytnitber, 
 drive to the opposite side ; fyrtngen ©te fytnem, jump in 
 (i. e. in ben $lu$, into the river) ; but should the per- 
 son speaking be already in the water, he would say ; 
 fprtngen ©te fyeretn 
 
 The mountain, 
 the river, 
 the present, 
 
 fcet SBetg ; 
 
 fcas ©cfcfyent: (plur. c a ). 
 
 Obs. B. The adverbs btegfett£, jenfettS, ought to be 
 carefully distinguished from the prepositions, bte^fett, 
 
 R Neuter words, formed of a verb and the prefix ge, add % to all the cases 
 plural, and do not soften the radical vowel. 
 
135 
 
 jettfeit The latter are always followed by the genitive, 
 whilst the others never govern a case. Ex. bte6feit bei 
 $fafie£, on this side of the river ; jettfeit be£ SSergeS, on 
 the other side of the mountain. 
 
 To go up the mountain. £)en 33etg (jtnauf gcfyen *. 
 
 Where is your brother gone to ] £Bo tft 3$t 33tut>et fytngegangen ? 
 He is gone up the mountain. (St ijl t>en 93etg fytncmf gegangcn. 
 
 To gwe £#€& a^am (£0 restore). &Biet>etge6en*. 
 
 Thou givest back again. £>u gibjl ttuetet. 
 
 He gives back again. (St Qtbt rctebet. 
 
 Given back again. £Biet>etgegefcen. 
 
 Does he restore you your book 1 ©ibt ct Stmen Sfjt SBudj ttuebet ? 
 
 He does restore it to me. (St gibt c$ mit Httefcer, 
 
 Has he given you your stick £at et Sfjncn Sfyren <Stecf tx>ict>crge* 
 
 back again 1 gefocn ? 
 
 He has given it me back again. (St f)cit tfyn mit ttuefcetgcge&en. 
 
 To Jeg-zrc, to commence. It n f a n g e n *, beginnen*. 
 
 Begun, commenced. 2tngefangen, fcegonnen. 
 
 Have you already commenced $a&n <Ste Sftvcn S3ttcf fcfyon angc? 
 
 your letter 1 fangen ? 
 
 Not yet. 9?dcf) md)t. 
 
 I have not yet commenced it. 3d) Ija&e tr)n ncd) nid)t angefan^ 
 
 gen. 
 Have you received a present ] £ctkn <Sie etn ®cfdjen£ fcefom* 
 
 men? 
 L have received several. 3d) rjabe ttetfcrjtefcene fcefommen. 
 
 From whom have you received SSon mm baben @ie ©efcfyenfe fce&m* 
 presents 1 men 1 
 
 Whence ? WAere /rom ? 2B o f) e t ? 
 
 Ow£ o/*. 2C u § (governs the dative). 
 
 Where do you come from ? £Co f emmen <8te r)et ? 
 
 Ota. C The adverb tt>of)er may be separated into two 
 parts (as ti>of)ttt, Lesson XXXVIL), the first of which is 
 put at the beginning, and the second at the end of the 
 phrase. If the phrase ends with a participle past, or an 
 infinitive, her is placed before it : but it precedes the 
 particle JU of the infinitive. 
 
 I come from (out of) the garden. 3d) fomme cuts tern dtarten. 
 
 Where has he come from 1 5Bof)et ift et gefommen ? 
 
 He has come from the theatre (St tft au$ fcem &f)eatet gefommen. 
 
ia6 
 
 To be worth. 2B e X t fj f e i tt *. 
 
 How much may that horse oe SBictriel fcmn t>tefe$ 9)fctt> mtt% 
 
 worth 1 fcin 1 
 
 It may be worth a hundred (5*6 fcmn fjunfcert Sfyatct rocttr) fettn 
 
 crowns. 
 This is worth more than that. £)icfcs ift mefjt rocttf) o(g jcnc*. 
 The one is not worth so much as 2)a6 cine iff nid)t fo Did rocttfy o(S 
 
 the other. &a$ anbcre* 
 
 How much is that worth 1 2Btemcl ift ta€ roettf) ? 
 
 That is not worth much. 5)ct$ ift ntcbt tricl roertf). 
 
 That is not worth anything. £)aS ift mdbtS ivcrtr). 
 
 To fo footer. 23 e f f c t fcin* (mefyr roertf) 
 
 fcin *). 
 
 A.m I not as good as my brother 1 23in id) md)t fo gut rote mem 23 ru* 
 
 t>et? 
 
 You are better than he 5" @ic f int) ^ aU CXt 
 
 Y ou are better tnan he. £ @ie finb ^ ^ ^ fe 
 
 f am not as good as you. 3d) tin md)t fo gut roic @te* 
 
 exercises. 115. 
 
 Do you Cv 11 me ? — I do call you. — Where are you ?— I am on (auf 
 with the dative) the mountain ; are you coming up ? — I am not 
 coming up. — Where are you? — I am at the foot (am $u(Je) ; of the 
 mountain ; will you come down ? — I cannot come down.— Why 
 can you not come down 1 — Because I have sore feet. — Where does 
 your cousin live ] — He lives on this side of the river. — Where is 
 the mountain 1 — It is on that side of the river. — Where stands the 
 house of our friend ?— -It stands on that side of the mountain. — Is 
 the garden of your friend on this or that side of the wood 1 — It is on 
 that sid* (jenfeit*). — Is our storehouse not on that side of the road ? 
 — It is on this side (t>tc$fett$). — Where have you been this morning ? 
 — I have been on (Lesson XXX.) the great mountain. — How many 
 times have you gone up the mountain ] — 1 have gone up (fjtnauf 
 gegemgen) three times. — Is our father below or above 1 — He is above. 
 —Have the neighbour's boys given you your books back again 1 
 —They have given them to me back again. — When did they give 
 them back again to you] — They gave (fjcibcn — roiebcrgegeben) them 
 Sack again to me yesterday. — To whom have you given your stick 1 
 — I have given it to the nobleman. — To whom have the noblemen 
 given their gloves 1 — They have given them to Englishmen. — To 
 which Englishmen have they given them ] — To those (Lesson 
 XIV.) whom you have seen this morning at my house. — To which 
 people do you give money 1 — I give some to those to whom (Lesson 
 XIV) you give some. — Do you give any one money 1 — I give some 
 to those who want any. — To which children does your father give 
 cakes'? — He gives some to those who are good. 
 
137 
 
 116. 
 
 Have you received presents ] — I have received SDme. — What 
 presents have you received ? — I have received fine presents. — Has 
 your little brother received a present ]— He has received several. — 
 From whom has he received any 1 — He has received some from my 
 father and from yours. — Do you come out of the garden 1 — I do not 
 come out of the garden, but out of the house.— Where are you going 
 to ? — I am going into the garden. — Whence comes the Irishman ? 
 — He comes from the garden. — Does he come from the same garden 
 from which (cw$ rocldjem) you come] — He does not come from the 
 same. — From which garden does he come ? — He comes from that 
 of our old friend. — Whence comes your boy 1 — He comes from the 
 play. — How much is that carriage worth] — It is worth five hundred 
 crowns. — Is this book worth as much as that 1 — It is worth more. 
 — How much is my horse worth 1 — It is worth as much as that of 
 your friend. — Are your horses worth as much as those of the French? 
 — They are not worth so much. — How much is that knife worth ? 
 — It is worth nothing. — Is your servant as good as mine ] — He is 
 better than yours. — Are you as good as your brother] — He is better 
 than I. — Art thou as good as thy cousin 1 — I am as good as he. — 
 Are we as good as our neighbours ] — We are better than they. — 
 Is your umbrella as good as mine ] — It is not worth so much. — 
 W T hy is it not worth so much as mine? — Because it is not so fine 
 as yours. — Do you wish to sell your horse ] — I do wish to sell it*— 
 How much is it worth 1 — It is worth two hundred florins. — Do you 
 wish to buy it "?— I have bought one already.— Does your father 
 intend to buy a horse 1— He does intend to buy one, but not yours, 
 f See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FIFTY-FIRST LESSON.— Cin ntib ffmfygste Action. 
 
 That (conjunction). £) a p (See Rule of Syntax, Les- 
 son XL VII.). 
 
 What do you say 1 SBaS fagcn (Sic 1 
 
 I say that you have my book. 3d) fage, t>a& @te mem 23ud) fyafcen. 
 
 I tell you that I have it not. 3d) fage 3bnen, t>ap id) c$ md)t 
 
 babe. 
 Have you not had it 1 £aben (Ste e£ ntd)t gcfjafct ? 
 
 I have had it, but I have it no 3d) bate e$ gebabt, abet id) fjdhc tl 
 longer. md)t meb?. 
 
 No more. 91 1 d) t m c b r. 
 
 Where have you placed it ? 2£o b^en ®tc es f)tngclc^t ? 
 
 I have placed it on the table. 3d) baOe eS auf t>cn Stfd) gctegt 
 
 *s it (does it lie) on the table 1 gtegt es> auf tent &tfd)e ? 
 
 It is (lies) on it. (££ licgt fcatauf. 
 
138 
 
 Some, a little* 
 <^an you give me some water ! 
 
 t can give you some. 
 
 Must. 
 
 Necessary (adjective). 
 
 To be necessary. 
 
 (St wag (etn wentg). 
 
 Bennett ©te mis etwaS SSajfet gt« 
 
 6en? 
 3d) fcmn Sfyncn mlfytf gc&en. 
 
 SDZuffen, past part, gemupt. 
 
 &b't c Mg. 
 
 0Z 6 1 6 1 9 fetn*. 
 
 Is it necessary to go to the 
 market ? 
 
 It is necessary to go thither. 
 
 C S^up man ouf ben 9J*ar£t gefyen ? 
 
 < 3jr e$ notfytg auf ben SWatft $u ge* 
 
 ( fan? 
 
 C 9#an mup t>af)tn gefjen. 
 
 t (SS ift notfytg t>af)in $u gefjen. 
 What must one do in order to 2£a$ muff man tfyun, um betitfe^ $U 
 
 learn German ] (erncn ? 
 
 One must study much. g#cm mug Diet fiubiren. 
 
 What must he do ] £Ba$ mup er tfyun ? 
 
 He must go for a book. (St mug etn *®ud) fyolen. 
 
 What must I do 1 2Ba$ mug id) tf)un ? 
 
 Still, silent. mtiU. 
 
 To be sitting, been sitting. @ t g c n * (takes l)a6en for its 
 
 auxiliary), gefeff en. 
 
 You must sit still. (Sic miiffen fiitt ftgen. 
 
 Have you been obliged to work £a6en (Ste met atktten miiffen (Obs. 
 
 much to learn German! Lesson XLIV.), um bcutfd) gtl 
 
 (crnen 1 
 I have been obliged to work 3c!) fyak Diet atktten miiffen. 
 
 rnueh. 
 
 The competency, the subsistence, £) a $ 2C u § 6 m m e n. 
 
 the livelihood. 
 To have wherewithal to live. 
 
 Has he wherewithal to live 1 
 
 He has. 
 
 What must I buy ] 
 
 Some beef. 
 
 The ox (neat). 
 You must buy some beef. 
 
 What do you wish? 
 What do you want } 
 
 I want some money. 
 
 Do you want some money ? 
 
 ©etntfuSfommcn I) a 6 e ti * 
 
 £at er fetn 2Cu$£emmen ? 
 
 ($r f)at c$. 
 
 £Ba$ mug tcf> faufen 1 
 
 fttnbftetfd). 
 
 2)a$ mint). 
 
 ©te miiffen Sttnbfleifdj faufen. 
 
 2Ba$ rotten (Sic ? 
 CSBag btaudjen ©te? 
 £ 2Ba$ fyaben ©ic notfytg ? 
 5 3cl> babe ®elb noting. 
 f 3d) braucfa ®ett>. 
 
 25raud)en ©tc (Mb ? 
 
 Do you wish to have some &BoHen ©ie ®efo F)af>en ? 
 money * 
 
139 
 
 I do want 9 )me. 
 
 Do you want much ? 
 
 I do want much. 
 
 How much must you have ! 
 
 How much do you want? 
 
 I only want a giosh. 
 
 Is that all you want ? 
 
 That is all I want. 
 
 More* 
 
 Do you not want more ? 
 I do not want more. 
 What does he want 1 
 He wants a coat. 
 Have you what you want? 
 I have what I want. 
 He ha3 what he wants. 
 They have what they want. 
 
 3d) btaud)C roc(d)C$. 
 23taud)cn ©ie tcffcn fctcl ? 
 3d) braudjc fceffen met. 
 SG&tctriel miifjVn Sic (jaben ? 
 SS5ict>tct braucfyen (Sic ? 
 3d) btaudjc nur cincn ©tefdjen. 
 3ft t>a$ a tic*, roaS (Sic btaudjen ) 
 £)a$ ifi allc£, roaS id) braudje. 
 
 991 c&r. 
 
 55raud)cn (Sic nid)t mcf)t? 
 3d) btaucfyc nid)t mer)r. 
 2Ba$ btaud)t er ? 
 (St braucfyt ctn Jtfcib. 
 £abcn Bit, tva$ (Sic kaudjen ? 
 3d) fyabc, wag id) braud)C. 
 (5r r)at, roa$ cr braud)t. 
 (Sic fyaben, wa$ ftc btaud)cn. 
 
 To fe o5Z^ed (jAaW, ow#AO- (Solicit, past. part, gefottt 
 
 What am I to do ? 
 You must work. 
 Am I to go thither ? 
 You may go thither. 
 
 9£a$ felt id) tfjun ? 
 (Sic folicn arbcitcn. 
 (Sell id) fjtncjefjen ? 
 (Sic fonncn fjtrtge^cn. 
 
 EXERCISES. 117. 
 
 Were ((Stub — ejerocfen) you yesterday at the physician's ? — I was 
 at his house (bci ifym). — What does he say ? — He says that he can- 
 not come. — Why does he not send his son ? — His son does not gc 
 out (gcf)t nid)t au6, Lesson XXXIV. Obs. C). — Why does he not 
 go out ($cf)t cr nid)t au$) ? — Because he is ill. — Hast thou had my 
 purse ? — I tell you that I have not had it. — Hast thou seen it ? — I 
 have seen it. — Where is it ? — It lies upon the chair. — Have you 
 had my knife? — I tell you that I have had it. — Where have you 
 placed it ? — I have placed it upon the table. — Will you look for it ?— 
 I have already looked for it. — Have you found it ? — I have not found 
 it. — Have you sought (for) my gloves 1 — I have sought (for) them, 
 but I have not found them. — Has your servant my hat ? — He has 
 had it, but he has it no longer. — Has he brushed it ? — He has 
 brushed it. — Are my books upon your table ? — They are (lie) upon 
 it. — Have you any wine 1 — I have but little, but I will give you 
 what I have. — Will you give me some water ? — I will give you 
 some. — Have you much wine ? — I have much. — Will you give me 
 some ? — I will give you some. — How much do I owe you ? — You 
 owe me nothing. — You are too kind (giitici). — Must I go for some 
 wine ? — You must go for some. — Shall I go to the ball ? — You 
 must go thither. — W T hen must I go thither? — You must go thither 
 this evening. — Must I go for the carpenter ? — You must go for Mm. 
 
140 
 
 — Is it necessary to go to the market 1 — It is necessary to go 
 thither. — What must one do in order to learn Russian ? — One must 
 study much. — Must one study much to learn German ] — One must 
 study much. — What shall I do 1 — You must buy a good book. — 
 What is he to do'? — He must sit still. — What are we to do 1 — You 
 must work. — Must you work much, in order to learn the Arabic] — 
 I must work much to learn it. — Does your brother not work] — He 
 does not want to work. — Has he wherewithal to live ] — He has. — 
 Why nrast I go to the market ] — You must go thither to buy some 
 beef. — Why must I work ] — You must work, in order to get (fyabm) 
 a competency. 
 
 118. 
 
 What do you want, Sir ] — I want some cloth. — How much is 
 that hat worth ] — It is worth three crowns. — Do you want any 
 stockings ? — I want some. — How much are those stockings worth ] 
 — They are worth twelve kreuzers. — Is that all you want 1 — That 
 is all. — Do you not want shoes ] — I do not want any. — Dost thou 
 want much money'? — I want much. — How much must thou have] 
 — I must have six crowns. — How much does your brother want ] 
 — He wants but six groshes. — Does he not want, more ? — He does 
 not want more. — Does your cousin want more ] — He does not want 
 so much as I. — What do you want ] — I want money and boots. — 
 Have you now what you want] — I have what I want. — Has 
 your brother what he wants ] — He has what he wants. 
 
 FIFTY-SECOND LESSON.— gtwi tin* fimfygste 
 Section. 
 
 To pay— paid. 23 e $ a f) I e n — e $ a rj ( t. (See 
 
 Obs. A. Lesson XLV.) 
 
 To pay a man for a horse. (Sincm Sfflcmne cm Spfctb 6e$ar)U'n. 
 
 To pay the tailor for the coat. £)em (Scfynribct ten 3?ocf UflbUn* 
 
 Do you pay the shoemaker for 23e$af)len &u bent <Scl)uf)macf)Ct t>t« 
 
 the shoes] ©cbufje? 
 
 1 pay him for them. 3d) be$af)fc ftc tfym. 
 
 Does he pay you for the knives] S3c$flf)tt cr 3t)nen fur fcte 9J?ef[ct? 
 
 He pays me for them. (St bqa f>tt fie nut. 
 
 Obs. A. These examples show that the verb fcejafy* 
 lett governs the dative of the person, and the accusa- 
 tive of the thing. It may also be used with the pre- 
 position f fir, for, as in English. Ex. I pay him for 
 the boots, id) bqaijte tfym fiir bie ©tiefeL But taken 
 figuratively, in the signification of beftrafett, to punish, 
 
141 
 
 i\ rs sometimes construed with the accusative of the 
 
 person, as in the following expressions : tt>axt\ tcf) toiU 
 
 £td) 6ejabfett, wait, I shali pay (punish) you for it ; ben 
 
 f)Ct6e id) fcfyiftt frejafylt, I have paid (punished) this man 
 
 well. 
 
 Have you paid the shoemaker £aben <Sic bem <Sd)uf)mad)er bt« 
 
 for the boots ? 
 I have paid him for them. 
 I pay what I owe. 
 Have you paid for your book ] 
 I have paid for it. 
 I have not yet paid for it. 
 
 To demand — demanded. 
 
 To ask — asked. 
 
 To beg of— begged of. 
 
 To pray — prayed. 
 
 To request — requested. 
 
 To ask any one for money. 
 To beg money of some one. 
 To request money of any one. 
 What do you ask me for 1 
 I ask you for nothing. 
 I beg some money of you. 
 
 Sttefel fccgaWt ? 
 3d) fyabe ftc if)m bc$a(jlt. 
 3d) be$ab(c, mi id) fcbUDtcj tun. 
 £aben Sic 3br SBu* bcjaWt? 
 3d) fjabe e$ bqa bit. 
 3d) fyabc e$ nod) nicbt btyxtyt, 
 
 > 95 c 1 1 a rt g c it — t) c r t a n cj *. 
 
 2f nfpr ecl) en* — ancjcfptocfyeK 
 £ SB i 1 1 c a * — 9 e b c t c n. 
 
 95 en Semanbetn ©db wfangen. 
 Semanben tint G5clb anfprccfyen*. 
 3emanbcn um <$dt> bitten*. 
 8©a$ t>cr(an$en (Sic t>en nur ? 
 3d) wrfangc ntd)t$ r>cn Sbncn. 
 Set) fpveebe (Sic um @ctb en. 
 
 He has begged some money of (£r. (jat mid) um ©ctb ana,efpted)etu 
 me. 
 
 For. It m (a preposition governing the 
 
 accusative). 
 
 Do you beg some money of him 1 Spted)cn Sic il)n um ($dt> an ? 
 I beg some of him. 3d) evbttte mir rocfd)C$ son tbm. 
 
 To solicit any one to do a thing. (Straas t*on 3cnmnbcm ctbitten*. 
 
 For it. 
 To ask him for it. 
 To ask him for them. 
 
 I ask you for it. 
 
 Do you ask me for anything . 
 I ask you for the hat. 
 Do you ask me for the hat ] 
 I ask you for it. 
 
 To speak of some one. 
 
 Does one speak of that man 1 
 •~*ne speaks of him. 
 
 Saru m. 
 
 C 3l)n batum anfptcd)en*. 
 £ (5$ son tfyrn wrtongen. 
 C3bn barum anfptccben*. 
 C <Ste son if)m tjettancjen. 
 C 3d) fprcd)C (Sic barum an. 
 1 3d) Mttange c$ *en Sfwen. 
 
 $er(angen Sic tfxoaS sen mttl 
 
 3d) bittc Sic um ben £ut. 
 
 ^Bitten Sic mid) um ben £ut ? 
 
 3d) bttte Sic barium 
 
 93 n 3 c ui a n b c m f p r c d) c n * 
 
 Sprtcbt man t>cn btefcm 9}?anne ? 
 9)?an fprtdjt tton tl)tn. 
 
142 
 
 One does not speak of him. $ftan fpttd)t md)t t)cn t&m. 
 
 Do they speak of my book 1 <Spdct)t man t)cn metnem 93ud)f 1 
 
 They speak much of it. Sfllan fpdcl)t del bauon. 
 
 What do you say to hi 5Ba$ fagen ©'tc ba$u (f)ier$u) ? 
 
 I say he is right. 3d) fagc, t>aj} ct SKccfyt fyat. ■ 
 
 Content, satisfied. 3 u f r i c t> e n. 
 
 New. 9? en. 
 
 To be content with any one. SOtft Scmanbcm $ufdebm fetn** 
 Are you content with this man 1 (Sinb @ie nut btcfem 9)?anne $ufde; 
 
 ben? 
 1 am content with him. 3d) bin nut ifym sufdeben. 
 
 Obs. B. Of I) i e r, Aere, and b a, ZAere, compounc 
 adverbs are formed by means of certain prepositions 
 governing the dative or accusative. In these adverbs 
 l)ter and bd stand instead of the three genders singular 
 and plural, dative and accusative of the demonstra- 
 tive pronoun : biefer, biefe, biefe£ (ber, bte, ba$), which is 
 never used with a preposition. 
 
 Are you content with your new ©tnb Sic nut Sfjtem ncucn JIU'ibt 
 
 coat? gufdeben? 
 
 I am contented with it. 3d) bin bemut sufdeben. 
 
 I am discontented with it. 3d) bin un^ufdeben bamit. 
 
 Discontented. Ungufdcbcn. 
 
 Of what do they speak ? £Bot)on fpdcfyt man ? 
 
 They speak of peace, of war, of 9J?an fpdd)t sen bem gdeben, t)0ti 
 
 yoar book. bem Jtde$e, t>on Sfjrcm 23ud)e. 
 
 Do they speak of peace ? Spriest man sen bem Jfdcfan' ? 
 
 They do speak of it. %ftan fpdd)t bason. 
 
 Ofo. C The adverb tt>0, where, like fyt'er and ba 
 (See O&s. above), forms compound adverbs with certain 
 prepositions governing the dative or accusative. In 
 these tt>0 takes the place of the dative and accusative 
 of the pronoun interrogative Welcfyer, Welcfye, toefefyeg, or 
 
 With what are you content 1 SSonrit ftnb ©ic gufrtcben ? 
 
 I am content with my book. 3d) bin init metnem &Hicl)C gufrtc* 
 
 ben. 
 With whom are you satisfied ] 50?tt went ftnb <Sie sufdeben ? 
 [ am satisfied w ith my master. 3d) bin nut metnem Center- $ufrie» 
 
 bem 
 
 To sfw rfy — studied. ©tufctrcn — (rubtrt. (St 
 
 Ofo. ^4. Lesson XLV) 
 
143 
 
 To correct-corrected. \%\\\\ ^ixt^ttixl[ i 1 t 
 To question, — interrogate, g r a 9 e n (governs the ace). 
 
 The uncle, tec £)r)etm (is not softened in the 
 
 plural) ; 
 the gentleman, the lord, bcr £crr ; 
 
 the master, the tutor, the pre- > ^ a c u xa . 
 ceptor, the professor, 5 ' 
 
 the scholar, tet fitter ; 
 
 the pupil, tet Soiling; 
 
 the fee, wages, salary, tec Cofjn (has no pint.) ; 
 
 the lesson, tie Section (a feminine noun, 
 
 taking en in the plur.) ; 
 the exercise, tie tfufgabe (a feminine noun, 
 
 taking n in the plur.) ; 
 To receive a present from some S3 on Semcmtem etn ®efd)en£ bcHm- 
 one, men*. 
 
 EXERCISES. 119. 
 
 Have we what we want 1 — We have not what we want. — What 
 
 do we want ! — We want a fine house, a large garden, a beautiful 
 
 carriage, pretty horses, several servants, and much money. — Is 
 
 that all we want ] — That is all we want. — What must I do 1 — You 
 
 must write a letter. — To whom (Lesson XXX.) must I write ] — 
 
 You must write to your friend. — Shall I go to the market I — You 
 
 may go there. — Will you tell your father that I am waiting for him 
 
 here ? — I will tell him so (Obs. Lesson XLIIL). — What will you 
 
 tell your father ] — I will tell him that you are waiting for him here. 
 
 —What wilt thou say to my servant ? — I will say to him that you 
 
 have finished your letter. — Have you paid (for) your table ] — I have 
 
 paid (for) it.- — Has your uncle paid for the book 1 — He has paid 
 
 for it. — Have I paid the tailor for the clothes ] — You have paid 
 
 him for them.— Hast thou paid the merchant for the horse ] — I have 
 
 not yet paid him for it. — Have we paid for our gloves 1 — We have 
 
 paid for them. — Has your cousin already paid for his boots ] — He 
 
 has not yet paid for them. — Does my brother pay you what he 
 
 owes you 1 — He does pay it me. — Do you pay what you owe ! — I 
 
 do pay what I owe. — Have you paid (with the dative) the baker 1 
 
 -—I have paid him. — Has your uncle paid the butcher for the meat 1 
 
 —He has paid him for it. — Have you paid your servant his wages 1 
 
 — T have paid them to him. — Has your master paid you your wages ] 
 
 — He has paid them to me. — When did he pay them to you ] — He 
 
 paid (f)at — begafylt) them to me the day before yesterday. — What do 
 
 you ask this man for ! — I ask him for my book. — What does this 
 
 boy beg of me ? — He begs of you some money. — Do you ask me 
 
 for anything] — I ask you for a crown. — Do you ask me for the 
 
 bread 1 — I ask you for it. — Do the poor beg money of you ] — They 
 
 beg some of me. — Which man do you ask for money 1 — I ask him 
 
 for some whom you ask for some. — Which merchants do you ask 
 
144 
 
 for gloves 1 — -I ask those who live in William-Street (Lesson 
 XLVIII.) for some. — Which joiner do you ask for chairs ] — I ask 
 that one, whom you know, for some. — What do you ask the baker 
 for 1 — I ask him for some bread. — Do you ask the butchers for some 
 moat 1 — I do ask them for some. — Dost thou ask me for the stick 1 
 — I do ask thee for it. — Does he ask thee for the book] — He does 
 ask me for it. — What have you asked the Englishman for ] — I have 
 asked him for my leather trunk. — Has he given it to you 1 — He has 
 given it to me. 
 
 120. 
 
 Whom have you asked for some sugar ] — I have asked the mer- 
 chant for some. — Of whom have the poor begged some money 1 — 
 They have begged some of the noblemen. — Of which noblemen 
 have they begged some 1 — They have begged some of those whom 
 you know. — Whom do you pay for the meat 1 — I pay the butchers 
 for it. — Whom does your brother pay for his boots 1 — He pays the 
 shoemakers for them. — Whom have we paid for the bread 1 — We 
 have paid our bakers for it. — Of whom have they (man) spoken ?— - 
 They have spoken of your friend. — Have they not spoken of the 
 physicians 1 — They have not spoken of them. — Do they not speak 
 of the man of whom (t?on roe(d)em) we have spoken? — They do speak 
 of him. — Have they spoken of the noblemen? — They have spoken 
 of them. — Have they spoken of those of whom we speak 1 — They 
 have not spoken of those of whom we speak, but they have spoken 
 of others. — Have they spoken of our children or of those of our 
 neighbours ? — They have neither spoken of ours nor of those of 
 our neighbours. — Which children have been spoken of 1 — Those 
 of our preceptor have been spoken of. — Do they speak of my book 1 
 — They do speak of it. — Of what do you speak 1 — We speak oi 
 war. — Do you not speak of peace ? — We do not speak of it. — Are 
 you content with your pupils 1 — I am content with them. — How 
 does my brother study 1 — He studies well. — How many lessons 
 have you studied ? — I have already studied fifty-four. — Is your 
 master satisfied with his scholar 1 — He his satisfied with him. — 
 Has your master received a present 1 — He has received several. — 
 From whom has he received presents 1 — He has received some from 
 his pupils.— Has he received any from your father ] — He has re- 
 ceived some (both) from mine and from that of my friend. — Is he 
 satisfied with the presents which he has received 1 — He is satisfied 
 with them. — How many exercises hast thou already done 1 — I have 
 already done twenty-one. — Is thy master satisfied with thee 1 — He 
 -ays that he is satisfied with me. — And what dost thou say 1 — I say 
 that I am satisfied with him. — How old art thou 1 — I am not quite 
 ten years old. — Dost thou already learn German? — I do already 
 earn it. — Does thy brother know German 1 — He does not know it. 
 — Why does he not know it? — Because he has not learnt it. — Why 
 nas he not learnt it ] — Because he has not had time. — Is your father 
 at home 1 — No he has departed, but my brother is at home. — Where 
 
145 
 
 i? your father gone to 1 — He is gone to England. — -Have you some- 
 times gone thither 1 — I have never gone thither. — Do you intend 
 going to Germany this summer ] — I do intend going thither. — Have 
 you the intention of staying there long 1 — I have the intention of 
 staying there during the summer. — How long does your bi other 
 remain at home ? — Till twelve o'clock.— Have you had your gloves 
 dyed. — I have had them dyed. — What have you had them dyed 1 — 
 I have had them dyed brown. — Will you tell your father that I 
 have been here ] — I will tell him so. — Will you not wait until he 
 unies back attain 1 — I cannot wait. (See end of Lesson XXXI V.) 
 
 FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. - Mxtx nrib fftufygste 
 Cection. 
 
 To eat — eaten. 
 [nou eatest — he eats. 
 
 To dine {eat dinner) 
 
 gffcn*— gegeffctn 
 £>tti$£ — ft tftetorigt. 
 
 At what o'clock do you dine 
 I dine at five o'clock. 
 
 £3u SCRtttacj effen — $u %yiitta§ Qcgef* 
 — dined. < fen. 
 
 ( ©pctfen — gefpeiftt or gefpetft, 
 C Urn tmemcl U&t fpcifen <St 
 ine ? < itm nxkfye Sett effen St 
 
 
 3cf) fpctfe urn fanf (urn ffinf Ufyt). 
 
 I have dined. 3$ fyafre $u TOittag gegeffen. 
 
 I have dined earlier than you. 3cr) fyabi feufcer gefpetpt ati Ste. 
 
 II we you already breakfasted 1 &aUn @tc fcfyen geftufyfttieft ? 
 
 The dinner. 
 The breakfast. 
 
 Vo eat supper {to sup). 
 
 The supper. 
 
 I wish to eat supper. 
 
 I have supped late. 
 After. 
 
 After you. 
 
 After me. 
 
 After him. 
 
 After my t rother. 
 
 I have breakfasted after hi*«i. 
 
 £)aS gjitttageflcn. 
 2)a3 J?rttf)fifidf. 
 
 3u 2C6cnb effen*, 2(&ent>* 
 
 fctob effen *. 
 
 2)a$ tf&cnbeftcn, bag 2(6enbI>tob. 
 3d) mitt Hbenbbrofc effen. 
 { 3* §aU fpa't gu 2lbenb flegeffctt. 
 
 $ 3d) I)a6e fpa't 2(6enbbtob cjea,effem 
 
 vflati) (a preposition governing 
 the dative). 
 
 Sftad) S&nen. 
 
 9?ad) nur. 
 
 $lad) trnn. 
 
 9?aco mctnem SBtubet. 
 
 3* fyafrc nacf) ifjm gefrftljftiicft. 
 
146 
 
 To hold— held. 
 
 Thou holdest — he holds. 
 Will you hold my stick 1 
 
 To try — tried. 
 To taste — tasted. 
 
 Will you try to do that ? 
 
 I have tried to do it. 
 
 You must try to do it better. 
 
 Have you tasted that wine 1 
 
 I have tasted it. 
 
 Are you looking for any one ? 
 Whom are you looking for 1 
 I am looking for a brother 
 
 So a 1 1 c n * — 9 c fj a 1 1 c n. 
 
 2)u baltft — ec fjcilt 
 
 2BeUen (Sic marten ©tocf fatten T 
 
 CsproHtcn — p t o & 1 1 1. 
 £ 83 c t f u d) c n — o c r f it d) t. 
 CJUften— - gefoftet. 
 (.SSctfucfyen — »ctfud)t.^ 
 
 SBeltert <§ic t>erfud)cn, ba$ $u than * 
 
 3d) f>abc rerfitcbt, e$ $u tfjun. 
 
 (Ste mfijfcn Dcrfucfyen, e$ kffct $u ma« 
 
 d)cn. 
 6afcen <§tc bicfen 2£ctn gefojtet (vet* 
 
 fu*t) ? 
 3d) fyabe tfjn gefojtct (wtfud)t). 
 
 (Sucfyen (Sic Semanfoen ? 
 £Ben fucbert (Sic ? 
 of f 3d) fudjc eirten metnet 23tubet. 
 
 An uncle of mine. 
 A neighbour of yours. 
 A relation of mine. 
 
 Ace. Sing. Gen. Plur. 
 
 t ©itctt metner Dfietme, 
 t ©nm 3^rer Kacfybarm 
 t @men metner SBerroanbtetu 
 
 O&s. Adjectives taken substantively are declined like 
 other adjectives. Ex. ber SSertDattbte, the relation; gen. 
 be§ SBermutbten, of the relation, &c. ; ber 23ebtente, the 
 servant ; gen. beg SBebtenten, of the servant, &c. ; em 23er* 
 wutbter, a relation ; cm SSebtenter, a servant, &c. 
 
 The parents (father and mother). 
 He tries to see an uncle of his. 
 
 A cousin of his. 
 A friend of ours. 
 A neighbour of theirs. 
 He tries to see you. 
 Does he try to see me 1 
 
 To inquire after some one. 
 
 After whom do you inquire ] 
 I inquire after a friend of mine 
 
 The acquaintance. 
 Whom do y©u look fo^ 
 
 3)tc TCcftctn (©(Urn). 
 
 & fucfyt cincn fetner £%tme $u fe* 
 
 f)cn. 
 t (Strten fcinet SScttern. 
 f (Stnen unferct greurtbe. 
 t ©incn tfttet 9Rctd)barn. 
 (£t fud)t @tc $u fefjen. 
 <Sud)t er mid) $u fefyen ? 
 
 9t a d) 3 c m a n b e m f r a g e n. 
 
 $lad) mem frctgen @ie ? 
 
 3d) ftagc nad) etnem metner greutu 
 
 be, 
 Set SBefamtte. 
 SBen fudben ©te ? 
 
14" 
 
 I am booking for an acquaintance 3d) fttd)C etnen mtimc SBcfrmnten. 
 
 of mine. 
 I ask him for a piece of bread. 3d) lutte tf)n am cm &tM &rcb. 
 
 Rule 1. The preposition of, which in English stands 
 between two substantives, when the second determines 
 the substance of the first, is never expressed in Ger- 
 man. Ex. 
 
 A piece of bread. 
 A glass of water. 
 A sheet of paper. 
 
 ©in (Stucf S8tob. 
 (Sin ®(a$ Staffer* 
 (5tn SBogcn spctptcr. 
 
 Three sheets of paper. f ©ret SBocjcn papier. 
 
 The piece, ia$ ©tftc! ; 
 
 the sheet, t>cc SBecjcn ; 
 
 the small piece (little bit), bct$ @tiic!d)cn ; 
 
 the little book, bat S3tid)(ctn. 
 
 ii^fe 2. All diminutives terminating in cfyen and (etn 
 are neuter, and those terminating in It n Q are mascu- 
 line. To form diminutives from German substantives, 
 the syllable df) e U or lettt is added, and the radical 
 vowels, a, 0, U, are softened into a, 6, it. Ex. 
 
 The small house, fcaS £au6d)cn ; 
 
 the small picture, bag SSUbdftcn ; 
 
 the little heart, $>a$ £cr$d)en ; 
 
 the little child, t>a$ JUnblctn ; 
 
 the little boy, t>ai ^nablctn, JtnaOc^en ; 
 
 the suckling (baby), t>et (Sctttgttnc}; 
 
 the favourite, darling, bcr StebUncj ; 
 
 the apprentice, bcr Ccfytttncj. 
 
 EXERCISES. 121. 
 
 Have you already dined 1 — Not yet. — At what o'clock do you dine ? 
 — I dine at six o'clock. — At whose house (SBci \vm\, Lesson XXVI.) 
 do you dine ] — I dine at the house of a friend of mine. — With whom 
 (Oct mm) did you dine yesterday ] — I dined (f)abc — gcfpctf't with are« 
 lation of mine. — What have you eaten 1 — W r e have eaten good bread, 
 beef, apples, and cakes. — What have you drunk? — We have drunk 
 good wine, good beer, and good cider. — Where does your uncle dine 
 to-day ] — He dines with (bet) us. — At what o'clock does your father 
 eat supper 1 — He eats supper at nine o'clock. — Do you eat supper ear- 
 ier than he] — I eat supper later than he. — At what o'clock do you 
 breakfast ] — I breakfast at ten o'clock. — At what o'clock did you 
 eat supper yesterday * — We ate (r)at>cn — Q^geffcn) supper late. — 
 What did you eat 1 — We ate only a little meat and a small piece of 
 bread. — W'hen did your brother sup ? — He supped after my father 
 
148 
 
 — Where are you going to ? — I am going to a relation ot mine, ij 
 order to breakfast with him. — Do you dine early 1 — We dine late. 
 ■ — Art thou willing to hold my gloves ? — I am willing to hold them 
 —Is he willing to hold my cane ? — He is willing to hold it. — W'ho 
 has held your hat ? — My servant has held it. — Will you try to 
 speak. — I will try. — Has your little brother ever tried to do exercises ? 
 — He has tried. — Have you ever tried to make a hat? — I have nevei 
 tried to make one.; — Have we tasted that beer ? — We have not 
 tasted it yet. — Which wine do you wish to taste ? — I wish to taste 
 that which you have tasted. — Have the Poles tasted that brandy 1 
 — They have tasted it. — Have they drunk much of it (t)at)en) ? — 
 They have not drunk much of it. — Will you taste this tobacco ? — 
 I have tasted it already. — How do you find it? — I find it good. — 
 Why do you not taste that cider ? — Because I am not thirsty. — 
 Why does your friend not taste this meat? — Because he is not 
 hungry. 
 
 122. 
 
 Whom are you looking for ? — 1 am looking for the man who has 
 sold a horse to me. — Is your relation looking for any one ? — He is 
 looking for an acquaintance of his. — Are we looking for any one ? 
 — We are looking for a neighbour of ours. — Whom dost thou look 
 for? — I look for a friend of ours. — Are you looking for a servant of 
 mine? — No, I am looking for one of mine. — Have you tried to 
 speak to your uncle ? — I have tried to speak to him. — Have you 
 tried to see my father ? — I have tried to see him. — Have you been 
 able (Less. XLVII1.) to see him ? — I have not been able to see him.. 
 —After whom do you inquire ? — I inquire after your father. — After 
 whom dost thou inquire ? — I inquire after the tailor. — Does this 
 man inquire after any one? — He inquires after you. — Do they in- 
 quire after you ? — They do inquire after me ? — Do they inquire 
 after me ? — They do not inquire after you, but after a friend of 
 yours. — Do you inquire after the physician? — I do inquire after 
 him. — What do you ask me for ? — I ask you for some meat. — 
 What does your little brother ask me for ? — He asks you for some 
 wine and some water. — Do you ask me for a sheet of paper ? — I 
 do ask you for one. — How many sheets of paper does your friend 
 ask for? — He asks for two. — Dost thou ask me for the little book ? 
 — I do ask you for it. — What has your cousin asked for ? — He has 
 asked for a few apples and a small piece of bread. — Has he not 
 breakfasted yet ? — He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry. — 
 What does your uncle ask for ? — He asks for a glass of wine. — 
 What does the Pole ask for ? — He asks for a small glass of brandy. 
 — Has he not already drunk ? — He has already drunk, but he is 
 still thirsty. 
 
49 
 
 FIFTY.FOURTH LESSON.-bkr ntto fttttfygste 
 Hettion. 
 
 1 see the man who has my mo- 3cb fcr)e ben S0?ann, tvetfyct mcttt 
 
 ney. (Beit) fyat. 
 
 T see the child who plays. 3d) fef)C ba^ $tnb, roekbeS fptctt. 
 
 1 perceive him who is coming. 3d) bemerfc ten, nxkrjer fommk 
 I see him who owes me money. 3d) febe ben, tuclcfycr nur ©etb fct>ut* 
 
 big if!. 
 
 Do yon perceive the soldiers f ***** «£ f:®^3 wct * e 
 
 who are going into the store- J ^ na *-fe^|ff^J&J ^ 
 hous i SBcmcrftn (Sic btc (Setbaten, rockbe 
 
 v in ba$ pagastn (btnctn) ejefyen V 
 I do perceive those who are go- $ 3d) bemerfe btc, rocld)e bafytn gefeen, 
 ing into it. 
 
 Also, 
 
 To perceive — perceived. 
 
 Have you perceived any one ? 
 I have perceived no one. 
 
 The soldier, 
 
 To go to the store-house. 
 
 C Scf) bemcrfe btc, tvekfye btnctn ger^n. 
 
 3Cu*. 
 
 S3 c m e r f c n — • b c m c r 1 1. 
 
 vpaben @tc Scmcmbcn bemcrft ? 
 3d) babe 9ttemanben bemertt. 
 
 bcr (Selbat.a 
 
 5^ocb bem 93?aqqtn gel>cn*. 
 
 3n ^ax> 9)Zaga$tn (rjfnctn) Qcfyen*. 
 
 Obs. A. Direction towards a place or towards a 
 country is expressed by the preposition nad) with the 
 dative. 
 
 Willingly* 
 
 To like. 
 
 To like to see. 
 
 To like to study. 
 
 To like wine. 
 He likes a large hat. 
 Do you like to see my brother ] 
 I do like to see him. 
 I like to do it. 
 Do you like water 1 
 No, I like wine. 
 
 © c r n. 
 
 f ©ern Ijaben*. 
 
 t ©crn fcrjen*. 
 
 f ®ern ftubtren. 
 
 t ©ern SBetn trtnfen*. 
 
 t <St bat a,crn etnen o,ro£?en &ut. 
 
 t (Sebcn fete metnen 23rubcr gem 1 
 
 t 3d) fcf)c tbn gcrn. 
 
 j 3cb tbuc e$ gcrn. 
 
 { £rtnfcn ©!e gern QSaffcr ? 
 
 j Stfctn, id) trtnfc gern 2Bctm 
 
 Fowl, 
 
 Joufyn ; 
 
 the fish, 
 
 bcr Sifct) ; 
 
 fish, 
 
 glfftc (plur.) ; 
 
 the pike, 
 
 bcr £>cd)t ; 
 
 pike, 
 
 £ed)tc (plur.). 
 
 * Substantives derived from foreign languages and terminating in : rtttt 
 ttrcf), at, et, ent, (ft, tr, 03, add en to the genitive singular and to all the othei 
 cases singular and plural. 
 
150 
 
 To like sometliing. 
 I like fish. 
 He likes fowl. 
 I do not like fish. 
 
 By heart. 
 To learn by heart. 
 
 Do your scholars like to learn 
 
 by heart? 
 They do not like learning by 
 
 heart. 
 Have you learnt your exercises 
 
 by heart ? 
 We have learnt them. 
 Once a day. 
 Thrice or three times a month. 
 
 t ®m greunb t>on etwag fetn.* 
 
 t 3d) bin em greunb Don gtfdjcn. 
 
 t @r ipt Qcrn £uf)n. 
 
 t 3d) bin f!ein greunb »on #ifcf)en. 
 
 2C u g m e n b t 9. 
 
 2C u £ w e n b t a, t c c n c n. 
 
 Scrnen 3f)te @d)u(er a,etn outwent 
 
 big? 
 (Sic Icrncn nid)t gent auetocnbtg. 
 
 £a&en @te Sfyve 2Cufgafcen auiwen* 
 
 big gctcrnt ? 
 SBhTfjcuxn <5te gctevnt 
 ©tttmat beg &agg* 
 S)reimol beg SttcnatS. 
 
 O&s. 5. The genitive is used in reply to the ques- 
 tions: tt>attn? when? ttue oft*? how often? in speak- 
 ing of something that takes place habitually and at a 
 determinate period. 
 
 Six times a year. @cd)$mot beg 3>af)re$. 
 
 How many times a day does he £Btc tnetmal (wte eft) tpt er bes 
 
 eat ? £agg ? 
 
 He eats three times a day. (St tpt bretmat bc£ £a$g. 
 
 Do you eat as often as he] (Sffen @ie fo oft wic er 1 
 
 When do you go out 1 ££ann gefyen <Stc aug 1 
 
 We go out early in the morning. £Btt getyen be$ 9J?otgeng frit!) aug* 
 
 I intend paying you if I receive 
 
 my money. 
 Do you intend to buy wood ] 
 I do intend to buy some, if they 
 
 pay me what they owe me. 
 
 How is the weather ] "> 
 
 What kind of weather is it ? 3 
 
 It is fine weather at present. 
 
 How was the weather yester- 
 day? 
 
 What kind of weather was it 
 yesterday ? 
 
 Obs. C. 2Bar, was, is the imperfect of the auxilia 
 vy verb fetn*, to be; we shall speak of it hereafter 
 (See Lesson LV1I.) 
 
 23$ e n n (See Rule of Syntax, 
 Lesson XLVIL). 
 
 3$ tun gefonnen, @te $u &e$af)(en, 
 
 wenn id) mein ©elb foefomme. 
 ©ebenf en <Sie £e($ $u Eaufen 1 
 3d) gcbenfe mld>c$ $u faufen, wenn 
 man mir fecjafjlt, \va$ man mit 
 fcfyutbig tji. 
 
 2£a$ fur better ijt eg ! 
 
 ®$ tft }e|t fd)5'neg SCBetfer. 
 
 $&a$ fur ^Better war eg geftern 1 
 
L51 
 
 Was it fine weather yesterday ] 
 It was bad weather yesterday. 
 It was fine weather this morning. 
 
 Is it warm 1 
 It is warm. 
 
 Very. 
 It is very warm. 
 It is cold. 
 It is very cold. 
 Et is neither cold nor warm. 
 
 Dark, obscure, 
 dusky, gloomy, 
 clear, light, 
 
 ft is gloomy in your shop. 
 
 Is it gloomy in his room 1 
 
 I is gloomy there. 
 
 The shop, 
 
 moist, humid, damp, 
 
 dry, 
 Is the weather damp 1 
 The weather is not damp. 
 It is dry weather. 
 The weather is too dry. 
 It is moonlight (moonshine). 
 We have too much sun. 
 We have no rain. 
 
 The moonlight, moonshine, 
 
 the rain, 
 
 the sun, 
 Of what do you speak ? 
 We speak of the weather. 
 
 The weather, 
 
 £Bcu: e* geftcrn fd)6nc$ aOScitet ? 
 (SS wat geftctn fd)led)teS ^Better. 
 (SS wax btefeit ojfergcn fcfyoneS 2£et* 
 
 ter. 
 3p eg xvaxm 1 
 (§5 tft warm. 
 Sefyr. 
 
 (£•$ if! fc()v warm. 
 ®$ tft Ml 
 <S$ ift fefjr fait. 
 %$ xft rocbcr faft nod) warm. 
 
 ftnfter ; 
 tmnfel ; 
 
 @$ tft bunfet in Sfttem Saben. 
 3ft eg bunfel in fetnem Simmer 1 
 (S£ tft tiunfct bartn. (See Obs. A 
 and C. Lesson XXIX.) 
 
 tct Sabcn ; 
 
 feud)t ; 
 
 trocfen. 
 
 3ft c$ fc$frte* ©rttrt ? 
 
 £)a$ SBctter tft ntcfet fcud)t 
 
 (S$ tft trccfcncb better. 
 
 Dag SZBcttet tft $u trod en. 
 
 G& tft 9J2ont)fcl>ctn. 
 
 £Btr fyaten gii met (Sonne* 
 
 2Btt fyafcen mrien 9?cgcn. 
 
 bee 93?onbfd)etn ; 
 
 bet Sftcgen ; 
 
 bie (Sonne (a feminine noun). 
 
 £Bot)on fptecfyen @te ? 
 
 SBtt fprecfyen mm (Don bem) 2B* tec 
 
 bat SGBcttcr. 
 
 EXERCISES. 123. 
 
 Do you perceive the man who is coming 1 — I do not perceive 
 him. — Do you perceive the soldier's child ? — I perceive it. — What 
 do you perceive 1 — I perceive a great mountain and a small house. 
 — Do you not perceive the wood 1 — I perceive it also. — Dost thou 
 perceive the soldiers who are going to the market] — I do perceive 
 them. — Do you perceive the men who are going into the garden ? — 
 I do not perceive those who are going into the garden, but those, 
 who are going to the market. — Do you see the man to whom I 
 have lent money 1 — I do not see the one to whom you have lent, 
 but the one who has lent you some. — Dost thou see the children 
 "who are studying 1 — I do not see those who are studying, but those 
 
152 
 
 who are playing. — Do you perceive anything 1 — I perceive nothing, 
 — Have you perceived the house of my parents 1 — I have perceived 
 it. — Do you like a large hat ! — I do not like a large hat, but a 
 large umbrella. — What do you like to do ] — I like to write. — Do 
 you like to see those little boys ] — I do like to see them. — Do you 
 like beer ? — I like it. — Does your brother like cider ] — He does not 
 like it. — What do the soldiers like ] — They like wine and water.— 
 Dost thou like wine or water 1 — I like both (bctt)C5). — Do these 
 children like to study 1 — They like to study and to play. — Do you 
 like to read and to write ] — -I like to read and to write. — How many 
 times do you eat a day ? — Four times. — How often do your children 
 drink a day ] — They drink several times a day. — Do you drink as 
 often as they ] — I drink oftener. — Do you often go to the theatre 1 
 — I go thither sometimes. — How often do you go thither (in) a 
 month ? — I go thither but once a month. — How many times a year 
 does your cousin go to the ball 1 — He goes thither twice a year.- — 
 Do you go thither as often as he 1 — I never go thither. — Does you? 
 cook often go to the market ] — He goes thither every morning. 
 
 124. 
 
 Do you often go to my uncle's 1- — I go to him six times a year. — 
 Do you like fowl 1 — I do like fowl, but I do not like fish. — What 
 do you like ? — I like a piece of bread and a glass of wine. — What 
 fish does your brother like! — He likes pike. — Do you learn by 
 heart ] — I do not like learning by heart. — Do your pupils like to 
 learn by heart 1 — They like to study, but they do not like learning 
 by heart. — How many exercises do they do a day] — They only 
 do two, but they do them well. — Do you like coffee or teal — I like 
 both. — Do you read the letter which 1 have written to you (Rule of 
 Syntax, Lesson XL VII.) ] — I do read it.— Do you understand it ] — 
 I do understand it. — Do you understand the man who speaks to you ! 
 — I do not understand him ] — Why do you not understand him ] — I 
 do not understand him because he speaks too badly. — Does this man 
 know German 1 — He does know it, but I do not know it. — Why do 
 you not learn it ] — I have no time to learn it. — Have you received 
 a letter 1 — I have received one. — Will you answer it. — I am going 
 to (3d) null) answer it. — W'hen did you receive it ] — I received it at 
 ten o'clock in the morning. — Are you satisfied with it ] — I am not 
 dissatisfied with it. — W^hat does your friend write to you ] — He 
 writes tome that he is ill (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XLVIL). — Does 
 he ask you for anything ] — He asks me for money. — Why does he 
 ask you for money 1 — Because he wants some. — What do you ask 
 me for ] — I ask you for the money which you owe me. — Will you 
 wait a little 1 — I cannot wait. — Why can you not wait] — I cannot 
 wait because I intend to depart to-day. — At what o'clock do you in- 
 tend to set out ] — I intend setting out at five o'clock in the evening. 
 —Do you go to Germany ] — I do go thither. — Are you not going to 
 Holland] — I am not going thither. — How far has your brother gone * 
 — He has gone as far as London. 
 
153 
 
 125. 
 
 Do you intend going to the theatre this evening 1 — V do intend 
 going thither, if you go. — Has your father the intention to buy 
 that horse ] — He has the intention to buy it, if he receives his money. 
 — Has your cousiu the intention to go to England. — He lias the 
 intention to go thither, if they pay him what they owe him. — Do 
 you intend going to the ball 1 — I do intend going thither, if my friend 
 goes 1 — Does your brother intend to study German 1 — He does in- 
 tend to study it, if he finds a good master. — How is the weather to- 
 day ] — It is very fine weather. — Was it fine weather yesterday ? — 
 It was bad weather yesterday. — How was the w T eather this morning 1 
 — It was bad w r eather, but now it is (tjl e$) fine weather. — Is it w T arm ] 
 — It is very warm. — Is it not cold ] — It is not cold. — Is it warm oi 
 cold 1 — It is neither warm nor cold. — Did you go ,« the country 
 (Lesson XXX.) the day before yesterday] — I did not go thither. 
 — Why did you not go thither 1 — I did not go thither, because it 
 was bad weather. — Do you intend going into the country to-morrow 7 ] 
 — I do intend going thither, if the weather is fine. 
 
 126. 
 
 Is it light in your room 1 — It is not light in it. — Do you wish to 
 work in mine ] — I do wish to work in it. — Is it light there ] — It is 
 very light there. — Can you work in your small room (Rule 2, Lesson 
 LIII.)] — I cannot work there. — Why can you not work there 1 — 
 I cannot work there, because it is too dark. — Where is it too dark 1 
 — In my small room. — Is it light in that hole ] — It is dark there. — Is 
 it dry in the street (Lesson XL VIII.) 1 — It is damp there. — Is the 
 weather damp 1 — The weather is not damp. — Is the weather dry 1 — 
 It is too dry. — Is it moonlight 1 — It is not (Urn) moonlight, it is 
 yery damp. — Why is the w r eather dry ? — Because w r e have too much 
 sun and no rain. — When do you go into the country ] — I intend go- 
 ing thither to-morrow, if the weather is fine, and if w T e have no 
 rain. — Of what does your uncle speak I — He speaks of the fine 
 weather. — Do you speak of the rain 1 — We do speak of it. — 01 
 what do those men speak 1 — They speak of fair and bad weather. 
 — Do they not speak of the wind 1 — They do also speak of it (aucl) 
 baron). — Dost thou speak of my uncle ] — I do not speak of him. — 
 Of whom dost thou speak ] — I speak of thee and thy parents. — Do 
 you inquire after any one 1 — I inquire after your uncle (Lesson 
 LIII.) ; is he at home ] — No, he is at his best friend's. (See Lesson 
 XXXIX and end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 If* 
 
154 
 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.— JTmf uttb fttttfygste 
 
 OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 In English, the past participle is joined to the verb 
 to be, either to form the passive voice, or as an ad- 
 jective to qualify the subject. In the first instance it 
 must be translated by toerbett*, and in the second by fern*. 
 
 In German we distinguish, as in Latin : bct£ jjau3 ift 
 Qehaut, domus cediftcata est, from ba$ $)&U$ ttttrb Qebaut, 
 domus cedificatur ; bte SSriefe jmb gefefyrtebett, litter ce scrip - 
 tee sunt, from bie 93rtefe merbert gefefyrteben, litterce scri- 
 buntur. 
 
 To ascertain whether a past participle stands as an 
 adjective or not, one has only to change the construc- 
 tion into the active voice ; if in that voice the tense 
 is the same as in the passive, the participle is a pas- 
 sive participle, and the auxiliary to be must be trans- 
 lated by tt>erbett # ; but if the tense is not the same, it 
 then stands as a mere adjective, and the auxiliary to 
 be must be translated by feut # * Ex. 3d) tt>erbe geftebt, 
 I am loved, is in the same tense, when I say : er liebt 
 mid), he loves me ; but ber ©pieget ijl jerbrocfyen, the 
 looking-glass is broken, is not in the same tense, 
 when I say : er fyat ben ©piegef jerbrocfjen, he has bro- 
 ken the looking-glass. Here jerbrocfyett is nothing but 
 an adjective, which qualifies the subject (Spiegel, look 
 ing-glass. 
 
 I am loved. 3d) rcetbe cjeltebt. 
 
 Thou art guided. £)u rotrft gVkitefe. 
 
 He is praised. (St nnrb cjelcbr. 
 
 We are heard. £Btr nxrben Qd)b'rt. 
 
 They are blamed (Sic ructben cjctaMt. 
 
 You are punished. \ ^ r "J*** 9 c £ a £ 
 
 To praise, to blame. £oben, tabctn. 
 
 By me — by us. SSen nut — ocn un$. 
 
 By thee — by you. $on £>tt — oon (Sud) (3()ncnv 
 
 By him — by them. $on i&m — Don tfjnen. 
 
 I am loved by him. 3d) ttK'tbc son tf)m gcttebt 
 
 Who is punished 1 2Bct rotrb geftraft 1 
 
155 
 
 The naughty boy is punished. 
 
 By whom is he punished ? 
 
 He is punished by his father. 
 
 Which man is praised, and which 
 is blamed 1 
 
 The skilful man is praised, and 
 the awkward blamed. 
 
 Which boys are rewarded, and 
 which are punished 1 
 
 Those that are assiduous are re- 
 warded, and those that are idle 
 punished. 
 
 We are loved by the captain's 
 sons, you are despised by them. 
 
 You are praised by our brothers, 
 and we are despised by them. 
 
 Good — naughty. 
 
 Skilful, diligent — awkward. 
 
 Assiduous — idle. 
 
 Ignorant. 
 
 The idler, the lazy fellow, 
 
 To reward — rewarded. 
 
 To esteem. 
 To despise. 
 To hate. 
 
 Is your book torn ? 
 It is not torn. 
 Are your children good ? 
 They are very good. 
 Is the enemy beaten 1 
 He is beaten. 
 The enemies are beaten. 
 These children are loved, because 
 they are studious and good. 
 
 £>et unatttcje jtnafce rottb geftraft 
 $cn roem roitb ct gcjttaft ? 
 (gr rcttb tton fetnem SBatet gefttaffc. 
 4 Bekbet £ftarm txutb cjeio&r, unb rock 
 
 cber rmrb Qctabett ? 
 Dec ejefefytcfte 9)?ann nritb getofct unb 
 
 bet ungefebtcfte $etabett. 
 SBclcfye itnaben nxtben belofynt, unb 
 
 tt)c(d)e nxrben fcefttaft ? 
 £)teiema.en, rcetcfye fletjna. finb, mu 
 
 ben OeKefynt, unb bte, vr>ctd>e ttage 
 
 [tub, kfttaft. 
 2Btt nxrben son ben <S3f)nen bc$ 
 
 vgwuptmannS gettebt ; 3or roerbet 
 
 t?cn tfynen t>crad>tet. 
 @tc roetben son unfern S3tiibetn <$& 
 
 lo&t, unb nrit rtfetben sen tfynen 
 
 t»erad)tct. 
 
 2Cttta — unatttq. (See Note % Les- 
 son XXXIX.) 
 
 ®efd)tcft — ungefefytcft. 
 $(et&tg — tta'ge (faul). 
 tlnrciffenb. 
 bcr gautenget. 
 
 23etof)ncn — Mofynt (See Obs. A 
 
 Lesson XLV). 
 2£cf)ten, fd>af3cn. 
 23etad)ten. 
 £affen. 
 
 3ft 3f)t 23ud) scrrifTcn ? 
 (S3 tft ntd)t $ettiffcn. 
 (Stub Sbrc jttnber attta.? 
 (Sic finb fefyt atttg. 
 3ft bet getnb gestagen ? 
 (St tjt gcfcfylagen. 
 £)te -getnbe finb gestagen. 
 £)tefe ittnbet roetben a.ctte6t, roetl fte 
 
 fCci^tg unb atttg finb. (See Note 
 
 r, Lesson XXXIX.) 
 
 EXERCISES. 127. 
 
 Are you loved by your uncle'? — I am loved by him. — Is your 
 brother loved by him 1 — He is loved by him.-— By whom am I 
 loved ?— Thou art loved by thy parents. — Are we loved 1 — You are 
 loved. — By whom are we loved ] — You are loved by your friends. 
 — Are those gentlemen loved 1 — They are loved. — By whom are 
 they loved I — They are loved by us and by their good friends.— 
 By whom is the blind man led ? — He is led by me. — Where do 
 
156 . 
 
 you lead him to ] — I lead him home. — By whom are we beamed ?-— 
 We are blamed by our enemies.— -Why are we blamed by them !— 
 Because they do not love us. — Are you punished by your tutor]— 
 We are not punished by him, because we are good and studious. — 
 Are we heard] — We are (e*, Lesson XLIIL). — By whom are we 
 heard] — We are heard by our neighbour. — Is the master heard by 
 his pupils ] — He is heard by them. — Which children are praised ? 
 — Those that are good. — Which are punished 1 — Those that are 
 idle and naughty. — Are you praised or blamed ] — We are neither 
 praised nor blamed. — Is our friend loved by his masters? — He is 
 loved and praised by them, because he is studious and good; but 
 his brother is despised by his, because he is naughty and idle. — Is 
 he sometimes punished? — He is (mtrfc) c$) every morning and every 
 evening. — Are you sometimes punished 1 — I am (cs) never ; I am 
 loved and rewarded by my good masters. — Are these children 
 never punished ? — They are (c£) never, because they are studious 
 and good ; but those are so (c?) very often, because they are idle 
 and naughty. 
 
 128. • 
 
 Who is praised and rewarded ] — Skilful people (9eutc) are 
 praised, esteemed, and rewarded, but the ignorant are blamed and 
 despised. — Who is loved and who is hated ] — He who is studious 
 and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is hated. — 
 Must one be good in order to be loved ? — One must be so. — What 
 must one do in order to be loved ] — One must be good and assidu- 
 ous. — What must One do in order to be rewarded] — One must be 
 skiiful and study much. — Why are those children loved ] — They 
 are loved, because they are good. — Are they better than we ? — They 
 are not better, but more studious than you. — Is your buther as 
 assiduous as mine ] — He is as assiduous as he ; but your brother 
 is better than mine. — Do you know anything new ] — 1 do not 
 know anything new. — What does your cousin say new ] — He says 
 nothing new. — Do they not speak of war ] — They do not speak of 
 it. — Of what (Obs. C. Lesson LII.) do they speak ] — They speak 
 of peace. — What do they say] — They say that the enemy is beaten. 
 — Are you understood by your pupils ] — I am understood by them. 
 — Dost thou often receive presents ] — I do receive some if I am 
 good. — Are you often rewarded ] — We are rewarded if we study 
 well, and if we are diligent.— Has your master the intention of 
 rewarding you] — He has the intention of doing so if we study 
 well. — What does he intend to give you if you study well] — He 
 intends giving us a book. — Has he already given you a book ]— > 
 He has already given us one. 
 
 129. 
 
 Have you dined already] — I have dined already, but I am stil. 
 hungry. — Has your little brother drunk already ] — He has drunk 
 already, but he is still thirsty. — What must we do in order to be 
 
157 
 
 skilful 1 — Yoq must work much. — Must we sit still in older U 
 study] — You must listen to what the master tells you. — Do you 
 intend to eat supper to-day ? — I do intend to dine before I eat 
 supper. — At what o'clock do you dine ] — I dine at four and eat 
 supper at nine o'clock. — Have you seen my cousin 1 — I have seen 
 him. — What has he said] — He has said that he does not wish to 
 see you (fcfycn n)t((). — Why does he not wish to see me ] — He does 
 not wish to see you, because he does not like you. — Why does he 
 not like me ] — Because you are naughty. — Will you give me a 
 sheet of paper ] — Why (£Bo$u) do you want paper ] — I want some to 
 write a letter. — To whom '(Lesson XXX.) do you wish to write I 
 — I wish to write to the man by whom (son roclcfyem) I am loved. — 
 Afte; whom do you inquire ? — I inquire after no one. (See end of 
 Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FIFTY-SIXTH 
 
 LESSON. — 0jedjs tmb fimfyysie 
 Cection. 
 
 OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 These verbs having no determinate subject, are only 
 conjugated in the third person singular, by means of the 
 indefinite pronoun e£, it. Ex. 
 
 To lain — it rains* 
 To snow — it snows. 
 
 Does it thunder 1 
 It does thunder. 
 Is it foggy ] 
 Does the sun shine 1 
 
 The sun shines. 
 
 It thunders loud. 
 
 the fog, 
 hard, violent, 
 
 To shine — shone. 
 To thunder. 
 
 The sun does not shine. 
 
 The sun is in my eyes. 
 The face, 
 the thunder, 
 the snow, 
 the sunshine, 
 the parasol, 
 
 3? c 3 n c n — e s tea net. 
 (S d) n e i e n — e $ ($ n < i t. 
 
 Dennert cs? 
 
 (5$ bonnett. 
 
 3ft c$ nc&ctig ? 
 
 3ft e$ <Sonncnfd)Ctn ? 
 i &$ tft <Senncnfcr)ctru 
 j SBtt fjaben ©cnncnfdjcV 
 ' (£$ benncrt fyefttfj. 
 
 neftettcj ; 
 
 bee Sfec&el ; 
 
 *Kfttg. 
 
 © dj c t n e n * ■ 
 
 Sonncm. 
 
 ■cjefcrSe* \u 
 
 35te (Sonne fc&ctnt ntd)t. 
 
 t £>ic (Sonne fcftcint tint k$ (SHiA* 
 
 t>a* (55eftd)t ; 
 
 bet Conner *, 
 
 bet @d)nee ; 
 
 t)cv ©ennen(d)ein ; 
 
 ber ©onncnfdutm. 
 
158 
 
 Does it lighten I ©fi|t eg ? 
 
 It do.es lighten. (£g b(t|t. 
 
 To hail. ^agcm, fcfyfopen. 
 
 The hail, 6et #age(. 
 
 $ (£g fcplof't. 
 
 It rains very hard. (£g rennet fef)t ftarf, 
 
 It lightens much. (£g MtfJt fefyr. 
 
 Does it snow 1 ©cfyneit eg ? 
 
 It does snow much. (Sg fcfyneit fc^r. 
 
 It hails much. (£g I)agett feljr. 
 
 Ofo. J.. There are some impersonal verbs, which re- 
 late to a person : they govern the dative or accusative, 
 and instead of: id) 6m fyuttgrig, (Lesson V.) one may 
 say: eg fyungert mid), I am hungry : for the verb f)Wtgent, a 
 to be hungry, governs the accusative. 
 
 To be thirsty. £> u t fU n. 
 
 To be sleepy. @ d) ( li f e r n. 
 
 Art thou sleepy 1 ©d)fflfcrt eg £>td) ? 
 
 I am not sleepy, but hungry. (£g fct)(afett mid) mcfyt ; after eg luins 
 
 cjert mtd). 
 Is your brother thirsty 1 SDurfM eg 3f)ten SBtuber ? 
 
 He is thirsty. (£g turftet tf)n. 
 
 He is not thirsty, but sleepy. (5g burftet tfjn ntd)t ; abet eg fcfylafert 
 
 ir)n. 
 
 O65. JB. The case of the verb may be placed before 
 the impersonal verb, but then the indefinite pronoun e$ 
 must be suppressed. For instance, instead of : eg fyttttgert 
 mid), one may say : mid) ifUtlQCXt, I am hungry ; but if 
 the sentence is interrogative, the indefinite pronoun eg 
 must not be omitted. 
 
 Are you sleepy 1 ©cfyla'fert eg @te ? 
 
 W e are sleenv S~ ®* f* Wfcrt Un ^ 
 
 V\ e are sleepy. £ Ung fcftlcifett. 
 
 Are those men hungry ! ^ungert eg btefe Sffla'nnet ? 
 
 C (£g fjungert f 
 
 £ @te r)ungcrt. 
 Who is thirsty ? 2Ben fcurfiet eg ? 
 
 They are hungry, [ftt^ 
 
 Who is thirsty ? 2Ben fcurftet eg 
 
 t TOi* turftet fel?r. 
 
 a *gungevtt, in the signification of to fast, is neuter and follows the conj» 
 gation of neuter verbs. 
 
159 
 
 Has your cousin been thirsty ! .jjat ti Sljtctt Setter gebutftet 1 
 He has been thirsty. [ffi^ 
 
 Where has he gone to ] £8of)tn tft cr Cjcrctf't ? 
 
 He has gone to Vienna. (Sr tft nad) SBtm cjcrctft 
 
 Is it good travelling 1 3ft eg gut rctfcn ? 
 
 It is bad travelling. @g tft fd)(cd)t rctfcn. 
 
 In the winter. 3m -2Bintcr* 
 
 In the summer. 3m ©ommcr. 
 
 Is it good travelling in the win- 3ft c$ cjut rctfcn tm QQBtntcr ? 
 
 terl 
 
 It is bad travelling in the winter. @g tft fd)(cd)t rctfcn tm £Btntcr. 
 
 The spring, t)cr $tuf)ftttCj ; 
 
 the autumn, bcr £crftft. 
 
 To ride in a carriage. $afyrcn* (in this signification 
 
 takes fetn* for its auxiliary 81 ). 
 
 Ridden in a carriage. Gkfafyrcn. 
 
 To ride on horseback. 9Sctten* (takes fcin* for its auxi- 
 liary). 
 
 Ridden on horseback. ©crittcn. 
 
 To go on foot. 3u guf5e cjeftcn*. 
 
 Do you like to go on horseback 1 f SRcttcn @tc ejern ? 
 
 I like to ride in a carriage. f 3d) fafyrc ejern. 
 
 Where is the bailiff gone to (on £Bo tft t>cr 2Cmtmann rjtngcrttten ? 
 
 horseback) ] 
 
 He is gone (on horseback) to the (Sr tft in ten 2Mb ejertttcn. 
 
 forest. 
 
 When does your cousin go to 2£ann ejefyt tfyr better nad) SBcrltn ? 
 
 Berlin 1 
 
 He goes thither this winter. (Sr gcrjt btcfen £Btnter ba r)tn. 
 
 I intend going this spring to 3d) bin ejefonnen, btcfen JrtifjUng 
 
 Dresden. - nad) £)re$bcn $u rctfcn. 
 
 Where is your uncle ! £Bo tft $fyt £)f)Ctm ? 
 
 He is in Berlin. (Sr tft in 93erttn. 
 
 He is at Berlin. (Sr tft ft! SBerttn. 
 
 I?^fe. The preposition git or ttt is used to express 
 rest in a place or country, and the preposition nad) 
 motion or direction towards a place or country. 9?ad) 
 is particularly used before names of towns or coun- 
 tries (Lesson LIV.) ; but the preposition jit must be 
 made use of to express motion towards a person. 
 (Lesson XXVI.) 
 
 a When the verb fafyveu* signifies to move anything by a ca?riage it is aa 
 ive and takes tntBen* for its auxliary. 
 
160 
 
 The two prepositions gtt and itt answer the question 
 ft>0 ? and narf) the question tt>of)Ut ? as is seen by thv 
 above examples. 
 
 1 iL^inYS in P Paris i }** ** ^cn 1, ^ 1 
 
 The living is dear there. (S$ tjt tfjcuct k'bcn t)a 
 
 Is it windy ] Does the wind 3ft e$ tvtnbicj ! 
 
 blow 1 
 It is windy. The wind blows. @6 ift nnnbig, fc>cr SBint) gcf)t. 
 
 \kTL3! ndy - The wind ( « ** *> »«te «-»■ 
 
 Is it stormy* J 3ft e« jlOrmtf* ? 
 
 is it stormy < j ^ cg p firmifcW g^, , 
 
 T . • . . { 66 ift ntd)t flurmifd). 
 
 It is not stormy. } ©a« ffirttw ift ntftt ftfeimft. 
 
 Strong, stormy, dear, windy. (Star! ; fttirnrijcf) ; tfycuct ; rmnfctg 
 
 EXERCISES. 130. 
 
 Do you like to ride in a carriage ] — I like to ride on horseback.-- 
 Has your cousin ever gone on horseback ] — He has never gone on 
 horseback. — Did you go on horseback the day before yesterday ] — 
 I went on horseback to-day. — Where did you go to (on horseback) 1 
 —I went into the country. — Does your brother ride on horseback as 
 often as you 1 — He rides on horseback oftener than I. — Hast thou 
 sometimes ridden on horseback] — I have never ridden on horse- 
 back. — Wilt thou go (in a carriage) to-day into the country ] — I will 
 go thither (in a carriage). — Do you like travelling ] — I do like 
 travelling. — Do you like travelling in the winter] — I do not like 
 travelling in the winter, I like travelling in the spring and in autumn. 
 — Is it good travelling in the spring ] — It is good travelling in the 
 spring and in the autumn, but it is bad travelling in the summer 
 and in the winter. — Have you sometimes travelled in the winter ? 
 — I have often travelled in the winter and in the summer. — Does 
 your brother travel often ] — He travels no longer, he formerly travel- 
 led much. — When do you like to ride on horseback ] — I like riding 
 on horseback in the morning after breakfast. — Is it good travelling 
 in this country ] — It is good travelling here (t)a). — Have you ever 
 gone to Vienna ] — I have never gone thither. — Where is youf 
 brother gone to ? — He is gone to London. — Does he sometimes go 
 to Berlin 1 — He went thither formerly. — What does he say of (sort) 
 that country ? — He says that it is good travelling in Germany ] — 
 Have you been at Dresden? — I have been there. — Have you stayed 
 xhere long ] — I have stayed there two years. — What do you say o/ 
 
1(51 
 
 the (con ben) people of that country ] — I say that they are good peopta 
 (eg qutc Scute ftnfc). — Is your brother at Dresden ] — No, Sir, he is 
 at Vienna ] — Is the living good at Vienna 1 — The living is good 
 there. 
 
 131. 
 
 Have you been in London 1 — I have been there. — Is the living 
 good there 1 — The living is good there, but dear. — Is it dear living 
 in Paris 1 — It is good living there and not dear. — At whose house 
 have you been this morning ] — I have been at my uncle's. — Where 
 are you going to now ] — I am going to my brother's. — Is your brothe?. 
 at home ] — I do not know. — Have you already been at the English 
 captain's 1 — I have not been there yet. — When do you intend going 
 thither ]— I intend going thither this evening. — How often has your 
 brother been in London ] — He has been there thrice. — Do you like 
 travelling in France ? — I like travelling there, because one finds 
 good people there. — Does your friend like travelling in Holland '? 
 — He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad there. 
 — Do you like travelling in Italy 1 — I do like travelling there, be- 
 cause the living is good there, and one finds good people there ; but 
 the roads are not very good there. — Do the English like to travel in 
 Spain] — They like to travel there ; but they find the roads there too 
 bad. — How is the weather 1 — The weather is very bad. — Is it windy ? 
 — It is very windy. — Was it stormy yesterday 1 — 1£ was stormy. — 
 Did you go into the country 1 — I did not go thither, because it was 
 stormy. — Do you go to the market this morning 1 — I do go thither, 
 if it is not stormy. — Do you intend going to Germany this year ] — 
 I do intend going thither, if the weather is not too bad. — Do you in- 
 tend breakfasting with me this morning ?: — I intend breakfasting 
 with you, if I am hungry. 
 
 132. 
 
 Does your uncle intend dining with us to-day 1 — He does intend 
 dining with you, if he is hungry. — Does the Pole intend drinking 
 some of (oon) this wine 1 — He does intend drinking some of it (t)as 
 Don), if he is thirsty. — Do you like to go on foot ] — 1 do not like to 
 go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (menn) I am travel- 
 ling. — Will you go on foot ] — I cannot go on foot, because I am too 
 tired. — Do you go to Italy on foot ] — I do not go on foot, because 
 the roads are there too bad. — Are the roads there as bad in the summer 
 as in the winter 1 — They are not so good in the winter as in the 
 summer. 
 
 133. 
 
 Are you going out to-day] — I am not going out when it is raining 
 — Did it rain yesterday ] — It did not rain. — Has it snowed ] — It has 
 snowed. — Why do you not go to the market 1 — I do not go thither, 
 because it snows. — Do you wish to have an umbrella ] — If you have 
 one. — Will you lend me an umorella ? — I will lend you one. — What 
 sort of weather is it 1 — It thunders and lightens. — Does the sun 
 shine ?~^The sun does not shine, it is foggy. — Do you hear the 
 
162 
 
 thunder 1 — 1 do hear it — How long have you heard the thunder.— 
 I have heard it till four o'clock in the morning-. — Is it fine weather . 
 — The wind blows hard and it thunders much. — Does it rain ] — It 
 does rain very fast (ftarf). — Do you not go into the country 1 — How 
 can I go into the country, do you not see how (rule) it lightens ] — 
 Does it snow ] — It does not snow, but it hails. — Does it hail ] — 
 It does not hail, but thunders very much. — Have you a parasol 1 — 
 I have one. — Will you lend it me 1 — I will lend it you. — Have we 
 sunshine ] — We have much sunshine, the sun is in my eyes. — Is it 
 fine weather 1 — It is very bad weather, it is dark ; we have no sun- 
 shine. 
 
 134. 
 
 Are you thirsty ] — I am not thirsty, but very hungry. — Is your 
 servant sleepy] — He is sleepy. — Is he hungry ] — He is hungry. — 
 Why does he not eat 1 — Because he has nothing to eat. — Are your 
 children hungry] — They are very hungry, but they have nothing 
 to eat. — Have they anything to drink] — They have nothing to 
 drink. — Why do you not eat? — I do not eat when (rcenn) I am not 
 hungry. — Why does the Russian not drink] — He does not drink 
 when he is not thirsty. — Did your brother eat anything yesterday 
 evening] — He ate a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a 
 piece of bread. — Did he not drink ] — He also drank.— What did 
 he drink ]— He drank a large glass of water, and a small glass ot 
 wine. — How long did you stay at his house (foci ir)m) ?— I stayed 
 there till midnight. — Have you asked him for anything ] — I have 
 asked him for nothing. — Has he given you anything ] — He has 
 given me nothing. — Of whom have you spoken 1 — We have spoken 
 of you. — Have you praised me ? — We have not praised you; we 
 have blamed you. — Why have you blamed me] — Because you do 
 not study well. — Of what has your brother spoken? — He has 
 spoken of his books, his houses, and his gardens. — Who is hungry ] 
 — My friend's little boy is hungry. — Who has drunk my wine ? — 
 No one has drunk it. — Hast thou already been in my room? — I 
 have already been there. — How dost thou find my room 1 — I find it 
 beautiful. — Are you able to work there ] — I am not able to work 
 there, because it is too dark. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— giebett nrxb fiftn^igate 
 Action. 
 
 OF THE IMPERFECT ANE PERFECT TENSES. 
 
 In English there are three imperfect tenses, viz : I 
 praised, did praise, and was praising. These three 
 are expressed in German by one imperfect id) lobte. It 
 is used to express a past action or event in reference 
 
163 
 
 to another, which was either simultaneous with or an 
 tecedent to it. It is the historical tense of the Germans, 
 and is always employed in narration, particularly 
 when the narrator was an eye-witness of the action or 
 event. The perfect tense, on the contrary, expresses 
 an action or event, as perfectly past and ended, with- 
 out any reference to another event, and when the 
 narrator was not an eye-witness. In this latter in- 
 stance the imperfect also may be used, if the narratoi 
 accompanies his narrative with any phrase denoting 
 that he does not speak in his own name, as matt facjt or 
 fagt man, they say, it is said, &c. 
 
 The perfect tense is compounded of the present of 
 the auxiliary, and the past participle, as in English. 
 (See Lessons XLL, XLIL &c.) 
 
 I was — he was. 3d) uoaz — ct roat. 
 
 We were — they were. 85*tt nxitcn — fie rcaten. 
 
 Thou wast — you were. £)u roctrft — 3fa wcttct (Ste rcmtett). 
 
 Were you content ? 2£aren @tc gufrtcben 1 
 
 I was very content. 3d) war febt $ufttebcn. 
 
 Was the wine good ? 28cit bet £8ctn gut 1 
 
 It was very good. (St tvat fef)t gut. 
 
 Were you there yesterday 1 (Stnfc ©ie geftetn ba geroefen ? 
 
 I was there to-day. 3d) bin fyeute ba gcroejVn. 
 
 Where was he the day before ££o tft ct ttotgcftetn geraefea ? 
 
 yesterday 1 
 
 Were you already in Paris ? (ginb &c fcfyon in tyaxi€ genoefen ? 
 
 I was there twice already 1 3d) bin fcfyon §n>etmol ta geisefen. 
 
 Obedient — disobedient. ©er)orfam — ungefyorfam. 
 
 Negligent. 9tad)(tff(tg. 
 
 Obs. A. The imperfect of regular verbs is formed 
 from the infinitive by changing en into t, and adding 
 the proper termination to each person, viz. e, to the 
 first and third persons singular, en, to the first and third 
 persons plural, eff, to the second person singular, and 
 et, to the second person plural. Ex. 
 
 ( loVed ' { loved ' ) <** ttebte-rr 
 
 I 1 did love, He J did love, [ Kebte 
 
 ( was loving. ( was loving. ) 
 
 i loved, I loved, ) cm' r x.l 
 
 did love, They did love, "£" 
 
 were loving. ( were loving. ) P 
 
164 
 
 !lovedst, C loved, ) Su Itcbtefl — 
 
 didst love, You < did love, > 3f)r Kebtet(©te 
 wast loving. (were loving. ) Itebten) ♦ 
 
 Obs B. The consonant t of the imperfect is pre- 
 ceded by e, if the pronunciation requires it, which is 
 the case in all verbs, the root of which ends in b, t, tfy ; 
 or ft, or in several consonants united. (See Obs. A. 
 Lesson XXXIV. and Lesson XLL) Ex. 
 
 [worked, [worked, ) <_ , . 
 
 T did work, He j did work, ^ * j* -I * 
 
 [was working, [was working. J 
 
 f worked, [worked, \ ^ atbeiteten 
 
 We 1 did work, They did work \% ^bSi 
 
 l^were working, [were working. j ' 
 
 f workedst, [worked, 1 Sit arbettetefl — 
 
 Thou j didst work, Yom did work, r %t)V avbeitetet 
 
 I wast working. [ were working. J (©te ax beiteten) ♦ 
 
 Obs. C. In all German verbs, whether regular or 
 Irregular, the third person singular of the imperfect 
 tense is the same as the first person ; and the third 
 person plural is the same as the first in all the tenses. 
 
 I had — he had. 3cb fyattc — er Fjottc. 
 
 We had — they had. 2Btr fatten — ftc fyattcn. 
 
 Thou hadst-— you had. £)u fyattcft— 3^ ^attct (<gt* fatten) 
 
 Had you money ? fatten <Bu ®c(t> ? 
 
 I had some. 3d) fyatre wekh^. 
 
 Had your brother books 1 &attc 3fyt 23mi)<?r ^itd)cr ? 
 
 He had some. (gt fjntte nxlclK. 
 
 What had we 1 g&ciS gotten wit ? 
 
 W T hat sort of weather was it yes- 2Ba$ fur SBcttcr wax e$ Qeftcrn ? 
 
 terday ? 
 It was fine weather. ©s wax fcb&'neg ^Better. 
 
 Had you a wish to buy a horse 1 fatten (Ste Cuft tin $)fcr& $u fatu 
 
 fen ? 
 T had a wish to buy one, but I 3d) fycittc Suft etn* $u fruifen, abet 
 
 had no money. id) f)attc fetn ($kfr. 
 
 Did your cousin intend to lean s I£at 3f)t ^Setter gofonnetl bcutfd) £U 
 
 German 1 (crncn ? 
 
 He did intend to learn it, but he (St mat gefonnen H $u ktnen, abet 
 
 had no master. Ct ftatte fetnen Scbrcr. 
 
165 
 
 EXERCISES. 135. 
 
 Were you at home this morning''? — I was not at home — Where 
 were you ! — I was at the market. — Where were you yesterday f— « 
 I was at the theatre. — Wast thou as assiduous as thy brother ]— « 
 I was as assiduous as he, but he was more clever than I. — Where 
 have you been ] — 1 have been at the English physician's. — Was 
 he at home ? — He was not at home. — Where was he 1 — He was at 
 the ball. — Have you been at the Spanish cook's ] — I have been at 
 his house. — Has he already bought his meat ] — He has already 
 bought it. — Have you given the book to my brother? — I have given 
 it to him. — Hast thou given my books to my pupils] — I have 
 given them to them. — Were they satisfied with them (bcmut) ] — 
 They were very well (fefyr) satisfied with them. — Had your cousin a 
 wish to learn German 1 — He had a wish to learn it. — Has he 
 learnt it ? — He has not learnt it. — Why has he not learnt it ] — 
 Because he had not courage enough. — Have you been at my 
 father's 1 — I have been there (6ci irjm). — Have you spoken to him 1 
 — I have spoken to him.- — Has the shoemaker already brought yov 
 the boots ] — He has already brought them to me. — Have you paid 
 him (for) them ? — I have not paid him (for) them yet. — Have you 
 ever been in London ] — I have been there several times. — What 
 did you do there ] — I learnt English there. — Do you intend going 
 thither once more 1 — I iniend going thither twice more. — Is the 
 living good there ] — The living is good there, but dear. — W^as your 
 master satisfied with his pupil] — He was satisfied with him.- - 
 Was your brother satisfied with my children 1 — He was very well 
 (fefyr) satisfied with them. — Was the tutor satisfied with this little 
 boy ] — He was not satisfied with him. — Why was he not satisfied 
 with him 1 — Because that little boy was very negligent. 
 
 136. 
 
 Were the children of the poor as clever as those of the rich ? — 
 They were more clever, because they worked harder (md)t). — Did 
 you love your tutor] — I did love him, because he loved me. — Did 
 he give you anything ] — He gave me a good book, because he was 
 satisfied with me. — Whom do you love ]— I love my parents and 
 my preceptors. — Do your tutors love you ] — They do love me, 
 because I am assiduous and obedient. — Did this man love his 
 parents] — He did love them. — Did his parents love him ? — They 
 did love him, because he was never disobedient. — How long 
 did you work yesterday evening ] — I worked till ten o'clock. 
 — Did your cousin also work? — He did also work. — When 
 didst thou see my uncle] — I saw him this morning. — Had 
 ae much money ] — He had much. — Had your parents many 
 friends ] — They had many. — Have they still some ? — They have 
 still several. — Had you any friends ] — 1 had some, because I had 
 money. — Have you still some ? — I have no longer any, because 1 
 have no more money. — Where was your brother ? — He was in the 
 garden. — Where were his servants] — They were in the house.— 
 
166 
 
 Where were we ] — We were in a good country and with (bet, 
 good people. — Where were our friends 1 — They were on (board) 
 the ships of the English. — Where were the Russians ] — They 
 were in their carriages. — Were the peasants in the fields ? — They 
 were there. — Were the bailiffs in the woods ? — They were there — 
 Who was in the storehouses ? — The merchants were there. 
 
 137. 
 
 What sort of weather was it ] — It was very bad weather. — Was 
 it windy 1 — It was windy and very cold. — Was it fogofy] — It was 
 foggy. — Was it fine weather 1 — -It was fine weather, but too warm. 
 — What sort of weather was it the day before yesterday ] — It was 
 very dark and very cold. — Is it fine weather now] — It is neither 
 fine nci bad weather. — -Is it too warm ] — It is neither too warm 
 nor too cold. — Was it stormy yesterday] — It was very stormy. — 
 Was it dry weather] — The weather was too dry ; but to-day it is 
 too damp. — Did you go to the ball yesterday evening J — I did ncl 
 go, because the weather was bad. — Had you the intention to tear 
 my books ] — I had not the intention to tear, but to burn them. 
 (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— 2UI)t mxir fftntyflste 
 j&ettion, 
 
 {spoke, 
 did speak, He 
 was speaking. 
 {spoke, 
 did speak, They 
 were speaking, 
 fspokest, 
 Thou < didst speak, You 
 I wast speaking. 
 
 {spoke, 
 did speak, 
 was speaking, 
 fspoke, 
 \ did speak, 
 [were speaking. . 
 fspoke, 
 \ did speak, 
 [were speaking.. 
 
 l3cfyfrrad) a — 
 | er fprarf). 
 
 3Str fyracfyen 
 — jTe fprad)en. 
 
 06s. C. Less. LVII. 
 
 £>u fpracfyft— 
 •3f>r fpracfyet 
 (©tefpracfyen). 
 
 Obs. In irregular verbs the imperfect of the indica 
 tive is formed by changing the vowels : a, ef, I, 0, U, 
 and adding the termination belonging to each person. 
 Hence in the irregular verbs we shall mark only the 
 change of that vowel, together with the termination of 
 the first person, in order to enable learners to know 
 
 a Learners ought now to add to their list of verbs the imperfect of all ir- 
 regular verbs which they have been using hitherto, or will have to use here 
 after. 
 
167 
 
 the imperfect tense. Examples : the verb fprecfyen 
 above changes in the imperfect the radical vowel e into 
 a ; Ueiben, to remain, changes it into ie, thus : id) blteb, 
 I remained ; (jefyert, to go, into t, thus : id) gtng, I went ; 
 jtefyett, to draw, into o, thus : id) jog, I drew ; fcfylctgert, 
 to beat, into U, thus : id) fcfyfag, I smote. 
 
 Compound verbs follow in general the conjugation of 
 simple verbs. 
 
 At first (in the beginning). (Stft, guerft (anfangS). 
 
 Afterwards. £ernad) or nacfyfjer. 
 
 Hereupon, upon this. £ietauf. 
 
 DCP Whenever a sentence begins with any other 
 word than the subject, its order is inverted, and the 
 subject stands after the verb in simple, and after the 
 auxiliary in compound tenses. b 
 
 At first he said yes, afterwards (Srft fagte c t [a, fjetnad) nctn. 
 
 no. 
 At first he worked, and after- (Srft cttfceitete, unb r;crnad) fptclte c t. 
 
 wards he played. 
 I. do not go out to-day. £eute gefje td) rud)t am. 
 
 Now you must work. 3cj?t miiffcn <S t c arbetten. 
 
 My father set out yesterday. ©cftcrn ifl me i n SS a t e t afcge* 
 
 teif't. 
 Here lies your book and there £iet liegt 3f)t SB lid) unb t>a 3f)t 
 
 your paper. papier. 
 
 He came afterwards. (Sr tft ()etnad) (tiddler) gefemmen. 
 
 Upon this he said. luercmf fagtc e r. 
 
 As soon as. @e&al&,fo&alfcal$. 
 
 I drink as soon as I have eaten. 3d) tttnie, febatb id) gegefifen fja&e. 
 As soon as I have taken off my ©cbcitb id) meirte @d)ul)e au£ge$0s 
 shoes I taks off my stockings. gen fja6e,3ter)c id) metne (Striimpfc 
 
 au£. c 
 What do you do after supper? SOBaS tf)tm <Sie nad) bem 2C6enbcf* 
 
 fen? 
 
 To sleep — slept. ® cl) ( a f c ti — 9 e fd) ta fe n. Im- 
 
 perfect fd)li ef. 
 
 I sleep, thou sleepest, he sleeps. 3d) fd)(afe, bu fd)tafjr, er fd)(aft. 
 
 b From this rule must be excepted the conjunctions which serve to unite 
 sentences {See Lesson XL VII.) ; they leave the subject in its place and throw 
 the verb to the end of the sentence. 
 
 c See Obs. C. Lesson XXXIV. 
 
168 
 
 Does your father still sleep ? 
 He does still sleep. 
 
 To live. 
 
 (Sr fd)(ctft mfy< 
 S e b c n. 
 
 [s your relation still alive ] f 2ebt 3br SSetnxmbter nod) ? 
 
 He is no longer alive (he is dead). f (5r (ebt ntcbt mebr. 
 
 Without. 
 
 Without money. 
 Without speaking. 
 Without saying anything. 
 
 $2 t> h e (is followed hy $u befo; 
 the infinitive). 
 
 ©bne (Beit. 
 
 f jDtjnc gu fpred)en. 
 
 7 Dbne etitmS $u fagen. 
 
 To go away — gone away. SB c g g c b c n * — 1» e g g c 9 a n g c n. 
 
 Imperf. g t n g. 
 
 He went away without saying (St gtng meg, efyrtc etroaS $11 fagen. 
 anything. 
 
 At last. (£• n b ( t d) . 
 
 To arrive — arrived. ?C n f c 111 m c n * — a n g e f m m e n. 
 
 Imperf. f a m. 
 
 3fl: cr cnb(tcf) angefommen ? 
 (Sr tft nod) ntcbt angefommen. 
 .ftommt et enbltd) ? 
 (5r femmt. 
 
 Has he arrived at last ? 
 He has not arrived yet. 
 Does he come at last? 
 He does come. 
 
 To give away — given away. 
 To cut off — cut off (past part.). 
 
 Has he given away anything 1 
 He has given away his coat. 
 
 To cut one's throat. 
 They have cut his throat. 
 
 To crop a dog's ears. 
 
 What have they done to him ] 
 They have cut off his ears. 
 
 Aloud. 
 
 © c g g c b c n* — to c g g e g c b e n 
 
 Imperf. gab. 
 2C b f d) n c t b e n* — a b g c f d) n t 1 -- 
 
 ten. Imperf. febnttt. 
 
 £at cr ctruag roeggegeben % 
 (St: bat fcin .£(etb weggegeben. 
 
 Semanbem ben £al$ abfebnetben *. 
 SDlan b^t ibm ben £a(£ abge* 
 
 febnttten. 
 (Stncm £unbe bic Db^cn abfdnieu 
 
 ben*/ 
 SSaf baton (ic t()m getfyan ? 
 (Sic baben ibm bte Dfywn abge* 
 
 febnttten. 
 
 Saut. 
 
 Does your master speak aloud 1 <Sprtd)t 3b* £ebrcr taut ? 
 He does speak aloud. (5t fpttcbt taut. 
 
 In order to learn German, one Urn bcutfdj 311 tetnen, muj} man laut 
 must speak aloud. fprecben. 
 
 exercises. 138. 
 
 Hadst thou the intention to learn English 1 — I had the intention 
 learn it, but I had not a good master. — Did your brother intenJ 
 
169 
 
 io buy a carriage 1 — He did intend to buy one, but he had no more 
 money. — Why did you work ] — I worked in order to learn Ger- 
 man. — Why did you love that man ] — I loved him because he loved 
 me. — Have you already seen the son of the captain ] — I havea^eady 
 seen him. — Did he speak French ] — He spoke English. — Where 
 were you then (Lesson XLVIII.)] — I was in Germany. — Did you 
 speak German or English 1 ? — I spoke neither German nor English, 
 but French. — Did the Germans speak French ] — At first they spoke 
 German, afterwards French. — Did they speak as well as you ] — 
 They spoke just as well as you and I. — What do you do ai the 
 evening. — I work as soon as I have supped. — And what do you do 
 afterwards ] — Afterwards T sleep. — When do you drink ] — I drink 
 as soon as I have eaten. — When do you sleep 1 — I sleep as soon as 
 I have supped. — Dost thou speak German 1 — I spoke it formerly. 
 — Dost thou take off thy hat before thou takest off thy coat ] — I take 
 off my hat as soon as I have taken off my clothes. — What do you 
 do after breakfast ] — As soon as I have breakfasted I go out. — Art 
 thou sleeping] — You see that I am not sleeping. — Does thy brother 
 still sleep ] — He does still sleep. — Have you tried to speak to my 
 uncle ] — I have not tried to speak to him. — Has he spoken to you ¥ 
 — As soon as he sees me, he speaks to me. — Are your parents still 
 alive ] — They are still alive. — Is your friend's brother still alive ] 
 — He is no longer alive. 
 
 139. 
 
 Have you spoken to the merchant] — -I have spoken to him. — 
 Where have you spoken to him ? — I have spoken to him at my 
 house (6et mtr). — What has he said ] — He went away without say- 
 ing anything. — Can you work without speaking ] — I can work, but 
 not study German, without speaking.— Do you speak aloud when 
 (ttK'nn) you are studying German ] — I do speak aloud. — Can you 
 understand me ? — I can understand you when (roenn) you speak 
 aloud. — Wilt thou go for some wine ] — 1 cannot go for wine withont 
 money. — Have you bought any horses ] — I do not buy without 
 money. — Has your father arrived at last] — He has arrived. — When 
 did he arrive ] — This morning at four o'clock. — Has your cousin 
 set out at last ] — He has not set out yet. — Have you at last found 
 a good master ] — I have at last found one. — Are you at last learning 
 English ] — I am at last learning it. — Why did you not learn it al- 
 ready ] — Because I had not a good master. — Are you waiting foi 
 any one ] — I am waiting for my physician ] — Is he coming at last 1 
 • — You see that he is not yet coming. — Have you the head-ache ?— 
 No, I have sore eyes. — Then you must wait for the physician. — 
 Have you given away anything ] — I have not given away anything 
 — What has your uncle given away ? — He has given away his old 
 clothes. — Hast thou given away anything] — I had not anything to 
 give away. — What has thy brother given away ] — He has given 
 away his old boots and his old shoes. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
170 
 
 FTFTY-NINTH LESSON.— Jtfemt mtft fftntyg*!* 
 Action. 
 
 Been. S&erbcti. 
 
 Ols. A. The learner must remember that tt>erbett * 
 not fern*, is the verb which serves to form the passive 
 voice (Lesson LV.). The past participle of the former 
 is IDorben, and that of the latter getoefen. (Lesson XLL) 
 
 Have you been praised ? @mb (Sic gcfebt moreen ? 
 
 I have been praised. 3d) bin cjclebt roctben. 
 
 Hast thou been blamed 1 S5tft £>u gctabctt roorfcen ? 
 
 [ have not been blamed. 3d) bin ntd)t gctabdt roorbcn. 
 
 Have we been loved % <Sinb rotr gelte&t roerbcn ? 
 
 By whom has he been punished 1 93en wem tft cr geftraft roerbcn ? 
 
 He has been punished by his (5r tft ucn fetncm SSatcr gejtraft roor* 
 
 father. ben. 
 
 When has he been punished ? ££ann ift cr gcftraft rcorbcrt ? 
 
 He has been punished to-day. (5r tft r)eute gcftraft tvorbcn. 
 
 I was — he was 1 3d) rcmrbc — cr rourbe 
 
 gclofct. 
 
 We were — they were > praised. 2Btr rcmrbcn — ftc rourbcn 
 Thou wast — you were J 3>u wurbcft — 3fyr nwrbct 
 
 (6ic rtmrbcn) 
 
 Were you loved ? SBurbcn @ic gcttcbt ? 
 
 I was loved. 3d) rourbe gclte&t. 
 
 Was he hated 1 ££urbc cr ger)apt? 
 
 He was neither loved nor hated. ($t rourbe roeber gcttefct nod) gefjaj& 
 
 To become. . £& e r b c n *. 
 
 The past participle of this verb is : 
 
 Become. (3 e ro t b C tt. a 
 
 And its imperfect : 
 I became — he became 3d) roarb or rourbe — cr roarb or 
 
 rourbe. 
 Thou becamest. £)u roctrbft or rourbcft. 
 
 06s. 5. In all the other tenses and persons, tt)erben*, 
 to become, is conjugated as the verb which serves to 
 form the passive voice. (See Lesson LV. and above.) 
 
 He was made a king. ? _l «• v «<« • 
 
 He became a king. 5 1 «* »«b Scmg. 
 
 n Not tootben, which is the past participle of the verb that serves to form 
 ne passive voice, as may be seen above. 
 
171 
 
 Hare you become a merchant 1 ©inb ©tc jtcmfmann Cjeroorben ? 
 1 have become a lawyer. 3d) bin 2(bt>ofat cjercetben. 
 
 He has taken the degrees of a f (£r tft teeter cjeroerben. 
 doctor. 
 
 The king, ber ffixtiQ ; 
 
 the successor, bcr 9?acl)fo(ger ; b 
 
 the lawyer (barrister at law), bet Ubvoiat (See Note % Lessoi 
 
 L1V.) ; 
 the office, the employment, l>a$ 2(mt. 
 
 Learned. 
 
 To fall sick. 
 
 To be taken ill. 
 
 To recover, to grow well. 
 
 To recover one's health. 
 He was taken ill. 
 He has recovered his health. 
 
 What has become of him 1 
 
 He has turned soldier. 
 He has enlisted. 
 
 To enlist, to enroll. 
 
 Children become men. 
 
 (Mcr,tt. 
 
 > f .ftranf rcctbcn *. 
 
 > f dkfunb roctbcn *• 
 
 t (St roarb franf. 
 
 f (5*r tjl cjefunb gcroctben. 
 C 2Bas ijl au$ tr)m cjeroerbcn ? 
 C ££o ift cr fnncjefommen ? 
 
 @t ifi ©clbot cjeroerben. 
 
 (St feat fid) anroetben (affcrt. 
 C ©elbat roctben*. 
 C ©td) anroctOcn foficn*. 
 
 U\x$ &inbctn roctben Scute. 
 
 [ tore — we tore. 3cr> rip — roit riffen. 
 
 Thou torest — you tore. £)u ttfjeft — 3fa rtffct ((Sic tiffen). 
 
 He snatched it out of my hands. (St rip c$ nur au» ben £anbcn. 
 What did he snatch out of your £Ba$ rip et Sfyncn au$ ben £anben I 
 hands ? 
 
 I was there, 
 there. 
 
 When, ltl$ (t*a, it>enn). (See Lesson 
 
 XL VII.) 
 
 when you were 3d) root ta, aH Bxe ba roaten. 
 
 Next year. 
 
 Last month. 
 
 Last Monday. 
 
 Next, 
 
 last, 
 When was he in Berlin ? 
 He was there last winter. 
 When will you go to Berlin 1 
 
 9?ad)ftes 3af)t. 
 
 SSorigcn (lc|tcn) 9)2onat. 
 
 Segten SRentag. 
 
 nodbft ; 
 
 Dorig, icfrt. 
 
 SBctrin mar cr in 23erUn? 
 
 (Sr war Dcrigen SBintet ba. 
 
 2£ann roollcn ®tc nad) SBctltn reifen ? 
 
 b Masculine substantives derived from a regular verb do not soften the radi* 
 r-al vowel in the plural, as : < $lad)folatv, which is derived from nacfyfolgeu, to 
 follow, to succeed ; plur. bte ^acfyfolger, the successors. 
 
 c The verb reijjen, to tear, to pull, to wrest, must not be mistaken for \tx* 
 m§en, which msans : to tear to pieces, to rend, to burst asunder. 
 
172 
 
 I will go tnitWr next summer. 3d) will nacbflen (Seamier tobtt? 
 
 tetfen. 
 
 So that. @o fccip (See Lesson XLVIL), 
 
 1 have lost my money, so that I 3d) babe mein ©c(t> ttetforen, fo t>ap 
 
 cannot pay you. id) <2tc ntd)t Ocjablcn fann. 
 
 I am ill, so that I cannot go out. 3d) bin franf, fo bap id) nid)t au^cjc* 
 
 ben farm. 
 
 The imperfect of fomten is id) fomtte I could. 
 
 The way to Berlin. £>et SBea, nad) SSerlin. 
 
 The way from Berlin to Dresden. £)et 2£eg t)0n ^Berlin nad) 3)te$fc>en. 
 Which way has he taken ] £Beld)cn £Beg Fjat cc a,enommen? 
 
 He has taken the way to Leipzic. (St bat ten £Bea, nad) Cetp^ig genome 
 
 men. 
 Which way will you take ] ££e(d)en 2Bcg tDoden ©te nebmen ? 
 
 I will take this way. 3d) will ticfen £Becj nebmen. 
 
 And I that one. lint) id) jenen. 
 
 exercises. 140. 
 
 Why has that child been praised ] — It has been praised, because 
 it has studied well. — Hast thou ever been praised ] — I have often 
 been praised. — Why has that other child been punished] — It has 
 been punished, because it has been naughty and idle. — Has this 
 child been rewarded ] — It has been rewarded, because it has worked 
 well. — When was that man punished 1 — He was punished last 
 month. — Why have we been esteemed] — Because we have been 
 studious and obedient. — Why have these people been hated ] — Be- 
 cause they have been disobedient. — W'ere you loved when you were 
 at Dresden] — I was not hated. — W T as your brother esteemed when 
 he was in London ] — He was loved and esteemed. — When were you 
 in Spain ] — I was there when you were there. — Who was loved and 
 who was hated ? — Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, 
 were loved, and those who were naughty, idle, and disobedient, 
 were punished, hated and despised. — What must one do, in order 
 not to be despised ] — One must be studious and good. — Were you 
 in Berlin when the king was there] — I was there when he was 
 there. — Was your uncle in London when I was there ] — He was 
 there when you were there. — Where were you when 1 was at Dres- 
 den ] — I was in Paris. — Where was your father when you were in 
 Vienna ] — He was in England. — At what time did you breakfast 
 when you were in Germany ] — I breakfasted when my father break- 
 fasted. — Did you work when he was working] — I studied when he 
 was working. — Did your brother work when you were working] — 
 He played when I was working. 
 
 141. 
 
 What nas become of your friend ] — He has become a lawyer.— 
 What has become of your cousin? — He has en listed. — Was you! 
 
173 
 
 uncle taken ill ] — He was taken ill, and I became Lis successor io 
 his office. — Why did this man not work 1 — He could not work, be« 
 cause he was taken ill. — Has he recovered ] — He has recovered. — 
 What has become of him 1 — He has turned a merchant. — What 
 has become of his children] — His children have become men.— 
 What has become of your son ] — He has become a great man. — 
 Has he become learned ] — He has become learned (c§). — What 
 has become of my book 1 — I do not know what has become of it.— 
 Have you torn it 1 — I have not torn it. — What has become of our 
 neighbour] — I do not know what has become of him. — Did they 
 wrest the book out of your hands 1 — They did wrest it out of my 
 hands. — Did you wrest the book out of his hands ? — I did wrest it 
 out of his hands. — When did your father set out 1 — He set out last 
 Tuesday. — Which way has he taken ] — He has taken the way to 
 Berlin. — When were you in Dresden ] — I was there last year. — 
 Did you stay there long 1 — I stayed there nearly a month. — Has 
 my brother paid you? — He has lost all (Obs. 2?., Lesson XLIX.) 
 his money, so that he cannot pay me. (See end of Lesson 
 XXXIV.) 
 
 SIXTIETH LESSON.— 0ecl)?igste Union. 
 
 Of whom , of which. 95 o n t> c m, ro o t) c n. 
 
 Obs. A. Of which, when relating to a thing, may 
 be translated by the preposition which the verb re- 
 quires, added to the adverb tt)0. 
 
 I see the man o^ whom you 3d) febe ben 9J?ann, »on b c m (tton 
 speak. nxlcbcm) (Sic fptecben. 
 
 I have bought the norse of which 3d) fyabt %a$ $)fetb ejefauft, Don 
 you spoke to me. b e m <&ic nut nur gefprecfyen fyaben. 
 
 Has your father the book of £cit 3b*? 93atcr bat 23ucb, WJOHll 
 which I am speaki/ig ] td) fprecbe ? 
 
 Whose. 3) c f f e n. Plur. b c r c n. 
 
 The man whose. 3)ct 9}?ann, beffen. 
 
 The child whose. £)a$ JUnb, beffen. 
 
 The men whose. £)tc banner, bcren. 
 
 I see the man whose brother has 3d) ft? be ben SJftann, beffen 35rubet? 
 
 killed my dog. tnctnen £>unb cjetobtet bat. 
 
 Do you see the child whose fa- @ebcn @ic l>a$ JUnb, beffen SSater 
 
 ther set out yesterday ? geftern cibgcreif't tft ? 
 
 I do see it. 3d) febe el. 
 
 I see the man whose dog you 3d) febe ben 20?cmn, beffen £unb @ie 
 
 have killed. getobtet baben. 
 
 Do you see the people whose ©efyen <Stc bie Scute, bcren ^)ferb tcfe 
 
 horse I have bought ? gefauft babe ? 
 
I have spoken to the man whose 
 house has been burnt. 
 
 174 
 
 I do see them. 3d) fefye fie. 
 
 I have seen the merchant whose 3d) fabe ben itcmfmann gefefjetl 
 shop you have taken. beffen Saben <Ste gcnomnicn Ijabcn- 
 
 DC/ 3 Incidental or explicative propositions are 
 placed either immediately after the word which they 
 determine, or at the end of the principal proposition. 
 
 '3d) fyafce nut bem 3}?annc, beffen 
 
 £au$ abgebrannt tjt, gefpvecfyen. 
 3d) f)at>c tint bem SOtanne gefprodjen, 
 beffen £au£ afrge&rannt tft. 
 C2(6btenncn, (verb act. and neut. 
 To burn-^~burnt. < irreg.) afcgeOtannt. Imperf. 
 
 C u r a n n t e. 
 
 (£aben ©te ba$ S3ud), ive(d)c$ td) 
 Sbnen geliefjen (jafoe, gclefen ? 
 £aben <Ste bag 23ud) gelefen, rcekl)e$ 
 td) Sfynen geliefyen babe ? 
 1 have what I want. 3d) fa&C/ roaS td) braud&c. 
 
 That, the one of which. £) a $, beffen. 
 
 Have you the paper of which $aUn <Ste bciS papier, beffen <Bu 
 
 you have need 1 Oenotfyigt ftnb ? 
 
 I have that of which I have need. 3d) Ijafce $>a$, beffen id) beniftfytgt tun. 
 
 Dative. Gen. 
 
 That, the one of which, ( M. ber, Don toefefyem-ber, beffen* 
 of whom. \ N. ba^fcon toefcfyem-ba£, beffen. 
 
 I see the man of whom I speak. 3d) fefje ben SOtonn, t)cn nxtdjem id) 
 
 fpr ed)c. 
 I see the one of whom I am 3d) febe ben (benjentgen), sen wiU 
 speaking *.o you. d)em id) nut Sftnen fpredje. (See 
 
 Lesson XII.) 
 Which book have you? 2Be(d)C5 <8ud) fjaben ®ic? 
 
 have that (the one) of which I 3d) f)a&e ba$ (baSjcntge), beffen id) 
 have need. benotfytgt bin. 
 
 Dative. Gen. 
 
 Those, M ones of whieh. | «* "J gj» } *,*«. 
 
 Which men do you see 1 SQBctdjc banner fefjen ©te ? 
 
 I see those of whom you have 3d) fcf>c tic (btejenigen), &en wets 
 spoken to me. cfyen (t>on benen) ©te mit mir 
 
 qefptodjen fycifcen. (See Lesson 
 
 XIV.) 
 
175 
 
 Which nails has the man ? SMdje 9£age< fjat t>ct S^ann ? 
 
 He has those of which he has (£*c [jot tic (fctfjcmgen), t>ct£tt Zl hi 
 need. tiot&tgt ijL 
 
 Dat. Plur* 
 To whom* £> c n c n * 
 
 [ see the children to whom you 3d) fefje t>tc Winter, txnun ©u 
 gave apples. 2tepfel gegs&ct* f>abctu 
 
 0/ ^are. SS c n b c n e n (dative). 
 
 Of which people do yon speak * SScn redden Scutcn xtim ©u ? 
 i speak 0/ ^ose whose children 3$ rebc son t) e n e n (fcenjemgen), 
 have been assiduous. ttften £int>ct f^cipig gercejen (ink 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE 
 when it is used instead of either 
 The demonstrative pronouns btefer, jener, the determi- 
 native pronoun berjemge, or the relative pronoun weld}??. 
 (See Obs. Lessons XII. and XIV.) 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 Neuter. Plural for all genders. 
 
 Nom. ber bte 
 
 ba3 bte 
 
 uen, beflen (beg) beren 
 
 befleit (beg) berer (bereft) 
 
 Dat. bem bcr 
 
 bem benett 
 
 Ace. beu bie 
 
 ba$ bte* 
 
 Ofo. 5. In the genitive singular masculine and 
 neuter, beg is often used instead of beffert, chiefly in poe- 
 try and compound words. 
 
 Obs. C. When the definite article is used instead 
 of n>eCd)er, its genitive plural is not berer, but berett. 
 (See Obs. Lesson XIV.) 
 
 EXERCISES. 14*2. 
 
 Did your cousin learn German 1 — He was taken ill, so that he 
 could not learn it. — Has your brother learnt it ? — He had not a 
 good master, so that he could not learn it. — Do you go to the ball 
 this evening 1 — I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to it. — Did you 
 understand that Englishman] — I do not know English, so that I 
 could not understand him. — Have you bought that horse 1 — I had 
 no money, so that I could not buy it. — Do you go into the country 
 on foot ? — I have no carriage, so that I must go thither on foot. — 
 Have you seen the man from whom I received a present! — I have 
 not seen him. — Have you seen the fine horse of which I spoke to 
 you ! — I have seen it. — Has your uncle seen the books of which 
 
176 
 
 you spoke to him] — He has seen them. — Hc.st thou seen the man 
 whose children have been punished] — I have not seen him. *-To 
 whom were you speaking when you were in the theatre ] — I was 
 speaking to the man whose brother has killed my fine dog. — Have 
 you seen the little boy whose- father has become a lawyer ] — I have 
 seen him. — Whom have you seen at the ball ] — I have seen the 
 people there whose horses and those whose carriage you bought.— 
 Whom do you see now ] — I see the man whose servant has broken 
 my looking-glass. — Have you heard the man whose friend has lent 
 me money] — I have not heard him. — Whom have you heard] — 1 
 have heard the French captain whose son is my friend. — Hast thou 
 brushed the coat of which I spoke to you ] — I have not yet brushed 
 it. — Have you received the money which you were wanting] — I 
 have received it. — Have I the paper of which I have need ] — You 
 have it. — Has your brother the books which he was wanting ] — He 
 has them. — Have you spoken to the merchants whose shop we 
 have taken ] — We have spoken to them. — Have you spoken to the 
 physician whose son has studied German ] — I have spoken to him. 
 — Hast thou seen the poor people whose houses have been burnt]— 
 I hav\ seen them. — Have you read the books which we lent to 
 you ] — We have read them . — What do you say of them ] — We say 
 that they are very fine. — Have your children what they want] — 
 They 1 ave what they want. 
 
 143. 
 
 Of which man do you speak ]— I speak of the one whose brother 
 has turned soldier. — Of which children did you speak? — I spoke 
 of those whose parents are learned. — Which book have you read ? 
 — I have read that of which I spoke to you yesterday. — Which 
 paper has your cousin ]— He has that of which he has need. — 
 Which fishes has he eaten % — He has eaten those which you do not 
 like. — Of which books are you in want ? — I am in want of those 
 of which y.'i have spoken to me. — Are you not in want of those 
 which I am reading] — I am not in want of them. — Is any one in 
 want of the coats of which my tailor has spoken to me? — No one 
 is in want of them. — Do you see the children to whom I have 
 given cakes ] — I do not see those to whom you have given cakes, 
 bat those whom you have punished. — To whom have you given 
 money \ — I have given some to those who gave me some. — To 
 which children must one give books ] — One must give some to 
 those who learn well and who are good and obedient. — To whom 
 do you give to efvt and to drink ]- — To those who are hungry and 
 thirsty — Do you give anything to the children who are idle ] — I 
 give them nothing. — What sort of weather was it when you went 
 (qtnqcn) out ] — It was raining and very windy. — Do you give cakes 
 to your pupils] — They have not studied well, so that I give them 
 nothing. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.; 
 
177 
 
 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON — ©in ttttfr set^igste ftettion. 
 
 To forget— forgotten. $etgeffcn* — ttctgeffcn. 
 Forgot. Imperf. SSergap. 
 
 Thou forgettest — he forgets. £)u t>ergtf[eft — cr fcrgi^t* 
 
 I have forgotten to do it. Scf) fyabe tergcffeh, eg gu tbun. 
 
 Has he forgotten to bring you the $at et sergeffen, Sfynen tag 23ucl) §tt 
 
 book ? bringen ? 
 
 He has forgotten to bring it me. (gt fyat ttergeffen, eg mir $u fcrins 
 
 gen. 
 f (Sic fjafrcn ttetgeffen, an unci) $u ferrets 
 You have forgotten to write to J fcen. 
 me. 1 @te fjafcen octgeffen, mir $u fcfyret* 
 
 [ ben. 
 
 To belong. ® c F) 6 t e n . 
 
 Does this horse belong to your ©efeort ttefeg spfett Sfjtcm 9$ni* 
 
 brother ? tcr ? 
 
 It does belong to him. (Sg gcf)ort tbm. 
 
 To whom does this table belong ] 2£em gcbott ttefet &tfd) ? 
 It belongs to us. (Sr gefyort ung. 
 
 To whomdo these gloves belong? 2Bem gef)b'ren ttefc £antfcbuf)e ? 
 They belong to the captains. (Sic gefyoten ten £aupt(euten. 
 
 WAose. SB c f f c n (See Lesson XXIX. and 
 
 XXXIX). 
 Whose hat is this ? SBcffcn £ut tft tag? 
 
 It is mine. (Sg iffe metner. 
 
 Obs. A. The possessive conjunctive pronouns, when 
 used instead of the possessive absolute pronouns, in 
 the nomirative masculine take the termination er, and 
 e$ in the nominative and accusative neuter. (See 
 Obs. Lesson VII.) 
 
 Whose book is this ! SBeflcn 93ucf) tft tag ? 
 
 It is his. (5g ift fetneg. 
 
 Whose carriage is that ] fXScfjfcn SOSagen ift tag ? 
 
 It is ours. ©g ift unfercr. 
 
 Whose shoes are these 1 SOBcffcn ©djufje ftnt tag ? 
 
 They are ours. (£g ftnt unfere. 
 
 Obs. B. These examples show that the indefinite 
 pronoun e3 may be used of any gender or number. 
 (See also the Obs. of Lesson XLIII.) 
 
 Toft (suit). jUcttcn, pa f fen, ftefjen*. 
 
 Do these shoes fit these men 1 ^)affen ttefe ©cfyube tiefen 50?a'n* 
 
 nern ? 
 
 8* 
 
178 
 
 They fit them. 
 
 That fits you very well. 
 
 To suit {please) — suited. 
 
 Does this cloth suit (please) your 
 
 brother 1 
 [t suits (pleases) him. 
 Do these boots suit (please) your 
 
 brothers 1 
 They suit (please) them. 
 Does it suit you to do this] 
 It does suit me to do it. 
 
 To become. 
 
 (Sic paffen tf)«cn> 
 
 £)a$ jrefjt Sfnten fef)t cjut. 
 
 2Cnftcl)en* — angcftanfcen. 
 Imperf. ft a n t>. 
 
 &e\)t S&rem 23rut>et toeftf Such 
 
 an? 
 (5* jtcbt tbm an. 
 (Stcfyen Sbten Stubern fctcfc ©ttcfcl 
 
 an? 
 @te ftefjen ifmcn an. 
 @tcf)t c£ Sfynen an, tuefcg $u tfyun ? 
 (£•$ ftefyt mir an, c$ $u tfyun. 
 
 (3 c i t c m e n. 
 
 Does it become you to do this 1 ©cgtemt c$ Sfyncn, t>tefc» ^u tfyun ? 
 It does become me to do it. (S$ gegknit mir, e$ $u tfyun. 
 
 It does not become me to do it. (S3 gqtemt mir ntcfyt, c£ $u tfyun. 
 It does not become him to go on (S3 cje$temt tfytn mcf)t, $u gufk ^ ty % 
 foot. ^cn. 
 
 To please. 35 e 1 1 c b e n. 
 
 Does it please your brother to SSelt'efct c£ S^rcm iBtufcct nut$ufoms 
 
 go with us] 
 Does it suit your brother to go 
 
 with us ] 
 It does not please him. 
 It does not suit him. 
 What is your pleasure 1 
 
 do you want 1 
 
 men (with us is understood) ! 
 <Stef)t e$ 3l)tem 25rut)ec an mit$iu 
 
 fommen ? 
 (S3 fceltcbt tfym md)t. 
 (S3 (tefyt tfjm ntcfyt an. 
 What ) 2Ba3 fcelte&t Sfjnen ? 
 J 2£a$ Mtebt 1 
 
 To please, to like. 
 
 Thou pleasest — he pleases. 
 
 Does this book please you 1 
 
 Do you like this book 1 
 
 It pleases me much. 
 
 I like it very much. 
 
 How are you pleased here? 
 
 I am very well pleased here. 
 
 Paid in cash, ready. 
 Ready money. 
 To pay down. 
 To buy for cash. 
 To sell for cash. 
 
 On credit. 
 To sell on credit 
 
 ®efalUn*. 
 Imperf. cj e ft c I. 
 
 £>u gefailjt — cr cjefdllt* 
 
 I ©efallt S&nen t>tefe3 23ud) ? 
 
 I (S3 gefalit mir fefjt. 
 
 2Bie gcfcCDCt cs Sfjncn r)ter ? 
 (S3 cjcfdttt mir rcd)t roofjt fyter, 
 
 S3aar. 
 
 33aarcg (Mb. 
 
 93aar kfflfttciu 
 
 Urn baare3 ©elb faufen. 
 
 Urn 6aatc3 ®clb t>cr£aufen, 
 
 2Cuf (Stebtt, auf 23or<j. 
 2Cuf (Srebtt t>etfcmfcn. 
 
179 
 
 The credit, t>ct <5rebit ? bet $$tx%. 
 
 Will you buy for cash ? &Be8en <Sic urn fccmreS (Mb faufen ! 
 
 Does it suit you to sell me on ©teljt c$ Sfyncn an, mir auf (Srebit 
 
 credit 1 gu wrfaufen ? 
 
 To succeed — succeeded. 
 
 >e tin gen* — get una, en. 
 Imperf. g clang. 
 
 obs. a 
 
 iiary, and 
 LVL) 
 
 Do you succeed in learning the f (Mtngt es Sfjncn beutfcf) m (cr* 
 
 This impersonal verb takes fem for its auxi- 
 governs the dative. (See Obs. A. Lesson 
 
 German 1 
 I do succeed in it. 
 I do succeed in learning it. 
 Do these men succeed in selling 
 
 their horses ? 
 They do succeed therein. 
 
 There is. 
 There are. 
 
 Is there any wine 1 
 There is some. 
 Are there any apples 1 
 There are some. 
 There are none. 
 Are there any men 1 
 There are some. 
 
 ncn? 
 f ©S gettngt mir. 
 f (£6 gcttngt mir, t§ $u ferwn. 
 t ©ettngt c* btefen Scutca, 
 
 spferbe $u fccriaufen? 
 f (S$ gcltngt tfjnet?. 
 
 (S3 tfr. 
 (SS finb, 
 
 SftaBctn Da? 
 (5*5 ifr we(d)et ta. 
 ©tub 2Ccpfc( bo ! 
 (S$ finb it)c(d)e bo, 
 ($* ftnt) Feine bo, 
 @inb Scute fc>a? 
 (££ finb cinige $>a. 
 
 tr)re 
 
 O&s. D. The impersonal verb there is, there are, is 
 translated by e$ tfi, e£ jtnb, when it expresses exist- 
 ence in a certain place, and by e£ cfibt, when it expres- 
 ses existence in general. Ex. 
 
 There are men who will not stu- 
 
 dy. 
 Is there any one ? 
 There is no one. 
 Has a man been there ? 
 There has been one there. 
 Were many people there 1 
 There were a great many there 
 
 To clean. 
 
 Clean. 
 The inkstand, 
 Will you clean my inkstand ? 
 
 I will clean it. 
 
 <$$ gi&t SJienfdjen, roc(d)e tud)t ftubU 
 
 ten rootten. 
 Sjc 3«iwnb ba ? 
 <£$ tft SZiemanb ba, 
 3ft em Sftann ba gerocfen * 
 (5$ tft einet ba gercefen. 
 SBaren trictc Scute ta ? 
 (£$ roaren fer)r triete ba. 
 
 & e t n t g e n, t e t n m a d) e n. 
 
 mein, 
 
 t)a$ Stntenfap. 
 
 SBolten <§te mctn Stntenfap retnt« 
 
 gen? 
 3d) will c£ tcttugen. 
 
180 
 
 To keep— kept 25 e f) a ( t c n*. 
 
 Kept. Imperf. <8 e t) t c ( t. 
 
 Will you keep the horse 1 Snellen <E>te ba$ s yfctb befyaltcn ? 
 
 I will keep it. 3d) will c$ kfyatten. 
 
 You must not keep my money, ©te nmffen mcin ®clb nid)t kljal 
 
 ten. 
 
 Directly ^ immediately. ©e^tetcf). 
 
 This instant. ©kfen tfugenftlicf. 
 
 Instantly. Hugcnblicfltdj. 
 
 I v/ill do it. 3d) will e$ tfjutt. 
 
 I will do it immediately. 3d) will eg foojeid) ttjutt. 
 
 I am going to work. 3d) will atbetten* 
 
 □CJ 3 Some conjunctions do not throw the verb to th( 
 end of the phrase (See Lesson XL VII.), but leave it ir 
 its place immediately after the subject They ar* 
 the following : 
 
 lint), and ; entwebet — cber, either — or ; 
 
 after or alletn, but ; weber — nod), neither — nor ; 
 
 fonbetn, but (on the contrary) ; fewest — al$, ) ,* 
 
 benn, for ; fewof)l — ati aud), S aS We as * 
 
 ebet, or ; nid)t nur — fenbern aud), not only 
 
 — but also. 
 
 _ cannot pay you, for I have no 3d) frtnn ©tc nid)t be^aljlen, benn id? 
 
 money (because I have no fjabe fein ©elb (wcil id) fein ©elb 
 
 money). fyabe). 
 
 He cannot come to your house, (St Cann nid)t $u Sftnen fommen, 
 
 for he has no time. benn et fjat ntd)t Seit. 
 
 exercises. 144. 
 
 Have you brought me the book which you promised me ? — I 
 have forgotten it. — Has your uncle brought you the handkerchiefs 
 which he promised you ] — He has forgotten to bring me them. — * 
 Have you already written to your friend ] — I have not yet had time 
 to write to him. — Have you forgotten to write to your parent 1 — 
 I have not forgotten to write to him. — To whom does this house 
 belong 1 — It belongs to the English captain whose son has written 
 a letter to us. — Does this money belong to thee 1 — It does belong 
 to me. — Froro whom hast thou received it 1 — I have received it 
 from the men whose children you have seen. — To whom do those 
 woods belong 1 — They belong to the king. — Whose horses are 
 those 1 ? — They are ours. — Have you told your brother that I am 
 waiting for him here? — I have forgotten to tell him so. — Is it 
 your father or mine who is gone into the country 1 — It is mine, — 
 Is it your baker or that of our friend who has sold you bread ow 
 
181 
 
 credit 1 — It is ours.— Is that your son 1 — He is ((£$ ift) not mine, h« 
 is my friend's. — Where is yours ] — He is at Dresden. — Does this 
 cloth suit you ] — It does not suit me, have you no other 1 — I have 
 some other ; but it is dearer than this.— Will you show it to me 1 — ■ 
 I will show it to you. — Do these boots suit your uncle ] — They do 
 not suit him, because they are too dear. — Are these the boots of 
 which you have spoken to us ] — They are the same. — Whose 
 shoes are these ] — They belong to the gentleman whom you have 
 seen this morning in my shop. — Does it suit you to go with us ]— 
 It does not suit me. — Does it become you to go to the market ! — It 
 does not become me to go thither. — Did you go on foot into the 
 country ] — It does not become me to go on foot, so that I went 
 thither in a carriage. 
 
 145. 
 
 What is your pleasure, Sir 1 — I am inquiring after your father 
 — Is he at home ] — No, Sir, he is gone out. — What is youi 
 pleasure 1 — I tell you that he is gone out. — Will you wait till ho 
 comes back again ] — I have no time to wait. — Does this merchant 
 sell on credit ] — He does not sell on credit.— Does it suit you to 
 buy for cash 1 — It does not suit me. — Where have you bought 
 these pretty knives? — J have bought them at the merchant's whose 
 shop you saw yesterday. — Has he sold them to you on credit 1 — 
 He has sold them to me for cash. — Do you often buy for cash 1 — 
 Not so often as you. — Have you forgotten anything here 1 — I have 
 forgotten nothing. — Does it suit you to learn this by heart ] — I 
 have not a g ^d memory, so that it does not suit me to learn by 
 neart. 
 
 146. 
 
 Has this man tried to speak to the king 1 — He has tried to speak 
 to him, but he has not succeeded in it. — Have you succeeded in 
 writing a letter ? — I have succeeded in it. — Have those merchants 
 succeeded in selling their horses ] — They have not succeeded 
 therein. — Have you tried to clean my inkstand 1 — I have tried, but 
 have not succeeded in it. — Do your children succeed in learning 
 the English ] — They do succeed in it. — Is there any wine in this 
 cask ] — There is some in it (fcattn). — Is there any brandy in this 
 glass 1 — There is none in it. — Is wine or water in it ] — There is 
 neither wine nor water in it. — What is there in it ] — There is» 
 vinegar in it. — Are there any men in your room ] — There are some 
 there. — Is there any one in the store-house] — There is no ont 
 l) ere. — Were there many people in the theatre 1 — There were man} 
 ti.-jre. — Are there many children that will not play] — There are 
 many that will not study, but few that will not play. — Hast thou 
 cleaned my trunk 1 — I have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. 
 -—Do you intend buying an umbrella 1 — I intend buying one, ii 
 the merchant sells it me on credit. — Do you intend keeping mine ? 
 —1 intend giving it back again to you,' if I buy one. — Have you re 
 
182 
 
 turned the books to my brother ? — I have not returned them yet to 
 him. — How long do you intend keeping them 1 — I intend keeping 
 them till I have read them. — How long do you intend keeping my 
 horse? — I intend keeping it till my father returns. — Have you 
 cleaned my knife 1 — I have not had time yet, but I will do it this 
 instant. — Have you made a fire 1 — Not yet, but I will make one 
 (welcfyeS) immediately. — Why have you not worked ] — I have not 
 yet been able. — What had you to do ] — I had to clean your table, 
 and to mend your thread stockings. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SIXTY-SECOND 
 
 LESSON.— Zwi KXlb *tttyfa*U 
 Nation. 
 
 
 To run — part, past run. 
 
 Thou runnest — he runs. 
 To run away. 
 Behind (a preposition). 
 
 To be sitting behind the oven. 
 
 He ran behind the oven. 
 Where is he running to ? 
 He is running behind the house. 
 Where has he run to ? 
 
 The oven, the stove, 
 
 the blow, the knock, 
 
 the kick, 
 
 the stab, 
 Have you given that man a 
 
 blow 1 
 I have given him one. 
 A blow with a stick, 
 beatings with a stick, 
 the stab of a knife, 
 the kick (with the foot) 
 a blow (with the fist), 
 blows (with the fist), 
 the sword, 
 the stab of a sword, 
 the sabre, 
 
 2 a u f e n * — $ e I a u f e n (takes 
 fetn for its auxiliary). Imperf. 
 lief. 
 
 £>u Wuflt — cr Id'uft, 
 
 SBcglaufen*. 
 
 £tntct (governs the dative and 
 
 accusative). 
 Winter bem Dfen ft|en*. Imperf 
 
 foft 
 (St lief Winter ten Dfen. 
 aBc&tti td'uft er 1 
 (St td'uft Winter fca$ £au& 
 2Bo ijt et f)tnge(aufen ? 
 
 bet £)fen ; 
 
 bee ©d)tag, bet jg>tc6 ; 
 
 bet ©top, bet Srttt ; 
 
 bet (Sttd). 
 
 £afcen @te btefem Sflanne etnen 
 
 ©cfyfag gege&cn ? 
 3d) babe ifjm etnen gegeben. 
 ein ^d)(ag mit bem (Stccfe ; 
 ©tecffdbttfge, ©tetfptttgcl ; 
 bet SOJcfferftid) ; 
 bet Srttt (mit bem gfufie) ; 
 ein ©d)fag (mit bet gaufi) ; 
 gauftfd)(age ; 
 bet £>egen ; 
 bet ^DcQcnftidf) ; 
 bet &LML 
 
 To push — pushed. 
 
 (Stolen* — g e fi o p c n. Impeif 
 ft t e p. 
 
183 
 
 Thou pushest — he pushes. 
 
 To beat. 
 Why do you push him ? 
 I push him, because he has 
 
 pushed me. 
 Has this soldier given you a 
 
 blow? 
 He has given me a blow with 
 
 the fist. 
 I gave him a kick. 
 
 The shot or the report of a gun, 
 the shot of a pistol, 
 
 the powder, 
 
 the officer, 
 
 the shot, 
 
 To shoot — part, past shot. 
 Imperf. shot, 
 
 To fire a gun. 
 
 To fire a pistol. 
 
 To fire at some one. 
 t have fired at a bird. 
 
 To fire a gun at some one. 
 i have fired (shot) at that bird. 
 
 I have fired twice. ^ 
 
 I have fired three times. 
 I have fired several times. 
 How many times have you fired 1 
 How many times have you fired 
 
 at that bird 1 
 I have fired at it several times. 
 
 I have heard a shot. 
 
 He has heard the report of a 
 pistol. 
 
 We have heard a clap of thun- 
 der. 
 
 The clap of thunder, 
 
 SDu jtcpcfi — et |Wgt. 
 
 $)uigeln (fcbfagen*). 
 
 ££atum ftopen ©ie ir)n ? 
 
 3d) ftcpe xi)ti, mil et mid) gcftcpcn 
 
 bat. 
 £at Sbnen btefet <So(bat ctnen 
 
 (Sdtfag gcgeben ? 
 (St ijcit mix etnen @d)tag nut bet 
 
 gauft gcgeben. 
 3d) gab tym ctnen SStitt. 
 
 bet $ltntenfdjup ; 
 ber spijiotenfcbup ; 
 bag spufoct ; 
 bet £>fftctet ; 
 bet @cbup. 
 
 <S d) t e £ e n * — g e f d) o f f e n. 
 fd)0p. 
 
 '(Stnen $ltntcnfd)up tfyun*. imp. 
 
 t&at. 
 Sine gltntc to$fd)tepen* or abfdjic* 
 
 pen*. 
 "(Stnen f tjtctenfe^up t&un*. 
 ' Sine spiftele (ostaften* or foSfdjie* 
 
 pen*. 
 2fuf Semanben fd)tepen*. 
 3d) babe auf ctnen SSegcl gefd)Offen. 
 ' OTacb Semanbem nut bcr gltnte 
 
 fd)te|en*. 
 (Knew glintenfdjufj nad) Semanbem 
 
 ftwi*. 
 ' 3d) babe nad) btefem 23egc( nut ber 
 
 •gttnte gefeboffen. 
 
 3d) babe groetmal gefeboffen. 
 3d) babe $wct gttntenfebuffe getban. 
 3d) babe bret $(tntenfd)itffe getban. 
 3d) f)abt ctntge Jltntcnfcbuffe getban 
 £Bte melmal baben @te gefeboflfen ? 
 3Bte mcfaial baben <Ste nad) btefem 
 
 SSoget gefeboffen ? 
 3d) babe t>etjd)tebcnc $Jial nad) tbm 
 
 gefeboffen. 
 3d) babe etnen gltntcnfcbup gebott. 
 <5t b«t etnen sptjiotenfcbuf gcbort. 
 
 80&tr b^en rincn £)onnetfebtag ge< 
 
 bort. 
 ber £)onncrfd)tag 
 
184 
 
 EXERCISES. 147. 
 
 Do you intend buying a carriage? — I cannot buy one, foi 
 have not yet received my money. — Must I go to the theatre 1 — You 
 must not go thither, for it is very bad weather. — Why do you not 
 go to my brother ] — It does not suit me to go to him ; for I cannot 
 yet pay him what I owe him. — Why does this officer give this 
 man a stab with his sword ] — He gives him a stab with his sword, 
 because the man (tricfer) has given him a blow with the fist. — 
 Which of these two pupils begins to speak 1 — The one who is 
 studious begins to speak. — What does the other do who is not Bol 
 — He also begins to speak, but he is neither able to write nor to 
 read. — Does he not listen to what you tell him 1 — He does not 
 listen to it, if (See Rule of Syntax, Lesson XLVII.) I do not give 
 him a beating (©tocfprfiget). — What does he do when (rocnn) you 
 speak to him 1 — He sits behind the oven, without saying a word. 
 — Where does that dog run to? — It runs behind the house. — 
 What did it do when you gave it a beating ] — It barked and ran 
 behind the oven. — Why does your uncle kick that poor dog 1 — 
 Because it (tricfct) has bitten his little boy. — Why has your servant 
 run away ] — I gave him a beating, so that he has run away. — 
 Why do those children not work ] — Their master has given them 
 blows with the fist, so that they will not work (arbcttcn molten). — 
 Why has he given them blows with the fist"? — Because they have 
 been disobedient. — Have you fired a gun 1 — I have fired three 
 times. — At whom did you fire ] — I fired at a bird which sat on a 
 tree. — Have you fired a gun at that man 1 — I have fired a pistol at 
 him. — Why have you fired a pistol at him 1 — Because he gave me 
 •* stab with his sword. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.") 
 
 SIXTY.THIRD LESSON.— JUrei mtb sedate 
 Cation. 
 
 To cast — past part. cast. 835 c r f c n * — Qcmorfcn. Im- 
 perii". n> a r f. 
 
 Thou castest — he casts. £)u ruitfft — ct ruirft* 
 
 To cast an eye upon some one (Sincn 33ltd£ (trie linden) ctuf Scmatt* 
 
 or something. ben obet etrcaS rcerfvn* 
 
 Have you cast an eye upon that $ahm (Sic ctnen SSlicf auf fcriefeS 
 
 book 1 93ud) gcrootfen ? 
 
 I have cast an eye upon it 3d) babe etnctt S3Ucf barciuf §n 
 
 reorfen. (See Obs. A. Lesson 
 XXIX.) 
 
 To throw — thrown. SBetfett* — QCtt)Otfcr 
 Threw. 235 a r f. 
 
185 
 
 Have you thrown a stone into £cit>cn <&k ctncn ^tctn in ben 'Jtufl 
 
 the river 1 geroetfen ? 
 
 I have thrown one into it. 3d) fjabc ctncn hinctn gcrcotfen. 
 
 (Ofo. JL. Lesson L.) 
 
 Where does the stone lie now 1 
 h lies in the river. 
 
 To draw, to pull. 
 To drag* 
 
 The evil, the pain, 
 To hurt. 
 
 To hurt some one. 
 
 The injury, the damage, 
 To cause (to do). 
 
 To prejudice some one. 
 
 It is a pity. 
 
 Have you hurt that man ] 
 
 I have not hurt him. 
 
 Why have you hurt that man 1 
 
 have not hurt him. 
 Does this hurt you 1 
 t doesfhurt me. 
 Have I hurt you 1 
 You have not hurt me. 
 
 Harm, 
 
 Have I ever done you any harm] 
 
 On the contrary. 
 No, on the contrary, you have 
 
 done me good. 
 I have never done harm to any 
 
 one. 
 To do good to anybody. 
 
 To show — shown. 
 
 Sftun. 
 
 2£o ftegt nun t>er (Stein ? 
 (Sr Ucgt in bem (im) Stuff e. 
 
 3 1 e I) c n *♦ Imperf. $ o g. 
 @cr/Uppen. 
 
 bo§ Seib. 
 
 2Bc& tf)un*. 
 
 Semanbem etmaSp Seibetfjun*. 
 
 Semanbem cin Setb tfyun*. 
 
 Semanbem S3(5fc€ tfyun*. 
 
 Semanbem SBofe^ sufiigen. 
 
 bcr (£d)aben. 
 
 Sufiigen, »ctu r fa d) en 
 
 Semanbem ©djiaben gufugen. 
 
 t 6* tfi @'d)abe. 
 
 £>at>cn (Sie btefem 93?anne etma$ $u 
 
 Cctbe getfyan ] 
 3d) babe ifcm mcfytS $u 2etbe ge* 
 
 tfyan. 
 SBarum fjaben Sic btefem 93?anne 
 
 cm £etb gctfyan ] 
 3d) babe itjm ntd)t$ 33ofe$ geffyan; 
 Sfjut bag Sfaen wej ? 
 (5$ tl)ut nut rcef). 
 £abc id) Sbncn rod) gct|ari ? 
 (Sic frnben mir ntd)t rcefc getfjan. 
 
 23 6 f e ^. 
 
 ^abe id) Sfyncn je <8ofe$ getfjan? 
 
 3m Gkgentfyctf. 
 
 Sftctn, im ®cgentf)ci{, ©te Fjaben nut 
 
 ©uteS getfyan (ernricfen). 
 3d) fyabe nie Semanbem etroaS $u 
 
 £ctb gctfyan. 
 Semanbem @5utcS tfyun* (crroet* 
 
 fen*). 
 (Srroetfen* — ctmiefen. Imperf. en 
 
 nneS. 
 
 To be good for the health, to be 3utvd'g(id) 7 f • * 
 wholesome. ©cfunb y * 
 
 C IDieS tbut mir rooty. 
 £ SteS ift nut ^uttagUd). 
 
 That does me good. 
 
186 
 
 V\ hat does the servant do with 2Ba$ mad)t fc>ct 93et>tentc mtt fetnei 
 
 his broom ? 3kfen ? 
 
 He sweeps the room with it. @t u\)xt fca* 3immct fcamit au£. 
 
 What does he wish to make out ££as wilt et au$ fetefcm £ol$c ma* 
 
 of this wood ? cr)cn 1 
 
 He does not wish to make any- (St will rud)t$ t>atau£ mac^cn. 
 
 thing of it. 
 
 To pass by the side of some one. 1L\\ Semanfoem Dcrbct^e^en *• 
 
 I pass by the side of him. 3d) gefte an i(jm ootbeu 
 
 Have you passed by the side of <Sint) (Sie an meincm S3tut>et Dots 
 
 my brother 1 bctgcgangen ! 
 
 I have passed by the side of him. 3d) bin an tfjm sotbetgcgangcn. 
 
 To throw away* SSegroetfen*. 
 
 He has thrown away his money. (St fyat fctn (Mt> roeggerootfen. 
 
 Before. £> o t (dative and accusative). 
 
 To pass before a place. £5ot cincm £)tte t)or6ctgct)cn *. 
 
 To pass by a place. 2(n eincm £)tte DOtbeigeljen *. 
 
 He has passed before my house. (St tft t>ot meinem £aufe DOtbeigcs 
 
 gangen, 
 I have passed by the theatre. 3d) bin am Sweater tiotbeigegan* 
 
 gen. 
 Fie has passed before me. (St tjl sot nut ttorbetgegangen. 
 
 exercises. 148. 
 
 How many times have you shot at that bird 1 — I have shot at it 
 twice. — Have you killed it 1 — I have killed it at the second shot. — 
 Have you killed that bird at the first shot ] — I have killed it at the 
 fourth. — Do you shoot at the birds which you (see) upon the houses, 
 or at those which you see in the gardens 1 — I shoot neither at 
 those which I (see) upon the houses nor at those which I see in the 
 gardens, but at those which I perceive upon the trees.- — How many 
 times have the enemies fired at us ? — They have fired at us several 
 times. — Have they killed any one 1 — They have killed no one. — 
 Have you a wish to shoot at that bird 1 — I have a desire to shoot at 
 it. — Why do you not shoot at those birds 1 — I cannot, for I have 
 no powder. — When did the officer fire ? — He fired when his 
 soldiers fired. — How many birds have you shot at? — I have shot 
 at all that I have perceived, but I have killed none, for my powder 
 was not good. 
 
 149, 
 
 Have you cast an eye upon that man 1 — I have cast an eye upon 
 him. — Has your uncle seen you 1 — I have passed by the side of 
 him, and he has not seen me, for he has sore eyes. — Has that man 
 hurt you 1 — No, Sir, he has not hurt me. — What must one do in 
 order to be loved 1 — One must do good to those that have done as 
 
187 
 
 harm. — Have we ever done you harm 1 — JNo, you have on the 
 contrary done us good. — Dc you do harm to any one? — I do no 
 one any harm ] — Why have you hurt Ihese children 1 — I have not 
 hurt them. — Have I hurt you? — You have not hurt me, hut your 
 children (have). — What have they done to you] — They dragged 
 me into your garden in order to beat me. — Have they beaten you 1 
 * — They have not beaten me, for I ran away. — Is it your brother 
 who has hurt my son ]— No, Sir, it is not my brother, for he has 
 never hurt any one. — Have you drunk of (t)cn) that wine ? — I 
 have drunk of it, and it has done me good. — W T hat have you done 
 with my book] — I have placed it on the table. — Where does it lie 
 now 1 — It lies upon he table. — Where are my gloves ?•— They are 
 lying upon the chair. — Where is ray stick? — They ($ftcm) have 
 thrown it into the river. — Who has thrown it into it 1 (See end 
 of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. — but nnh sec^igste 
 &zciwn. 
 
 To spend time in something. 3>te Beit nut ctt»a£ $ut>ringen * or 
 
 fytnbtingen*. 
 Imperf. brought. 3Bracl)te. 
 
 What do you spend your time in 1 £Bomtt bringen ®tc tie Sett $u ? 
 
 Rule. A demonstrative, relative, or interrogative pro- 
 noun is never used with a preposition, when it relates 
 to an indeterminate thing. Instead of the pronoun, one 
 of the adverbs ba,tt>0 is joined to the preposition ; thus : 
 oatatt, fcr an bag ; Koran, for an wa$ ; nwrauf, for auf 
 wag ; tt>omtt, for nut toa$, &c. (See Obs. B. and C, 
 Lesson LII.) 
 
 I spend my time in studying. 3d) fcrtngc tic 3ctt nut ©tutttcn $u. 
 What has he spent his time in 1 £Bomtt fjat ct tie Sett gugebraebt ? 
 
 To miss, to fail. 23 c r f e f) ( e n, t) c r a b f a' u m e n. 
 
 '*Dcr Jtaufmann fjat t>a$ ®elt $u 
 
 bttngen tterabfaumt (t>crfef)(t). 
 £>ct ^aufmann fjat wrabfa'umt (wr* 
 fefrft), tag ®elb gu brincjen. 
 You. have missed your turn. * (gte hahen 3fyre Sicifte *>crfef)(t. 
 You have failed to come to me (Sic fjaben wrfetyt, ttcfen Sftorgen >u 
 this morning. nut $u femrnen. 
 
 The turn, tic 9?etf)C. 
 
 To hear. $ o r c n. 
 
 To hear of some one, 23cn Semantem fjotm 
 
 The merchant has failed to 
 bring the money. 
 
To happen — happened* 
 
 188 
 
 Have you heard of my friend 1 $obm <Sie Don mctnem S^unk* &* 
 
 f)b'rt? 
 I have heard of him. 3d) fyake Don tfym gcMrt. 
 
 Of whom have you heard ? $8on nxm f)abcn (Sic gefyort? 
 
 Have you heard nothing new ] £akn Sic nid)tg Sttcueg gef)8rt ? 
 I hear that your father has ar- 3d) l)ore, t)ci£ 3fyr SSatcr angefom* 
 rived. men iff* 
 
 To assure. S3 c r fi d) c r n (governs the dat.). 
 
 Obs. The verb fcerjTcfjem requires the dative of the 
 person, when followed by the conjunction ba$, expressed 
 or understood ; otherwise it takes the accusative of the 
 person, and the genitive of the thing, or the dative of 
 the person and the accusative of the thing. 
 
 {3d) Dcrficfyere Sic metneg SSetftans 
 3d) Kvftd)crc Spncn metnen Sets 
 (tanb. 
 
 '(55efd)cl)cn* — gcfd>cbcn 
 
 Imperf. g cfcfya fy. 
 2£iberfaf)ten* — rotb e tfa l)s 
 r c n. Imperf. rotbetfufyr. 
 To happen, to meet with. * 33 e g c gn c n (has fcin* for its 
 
 auxiliary). 
 
 The fortune, happiness, bag (55(utf ; 
 
 the misfortune, bag llngtucf. 
 
 A great misfortune has happened. (£g ijt ein grojk'g Ungtticf gefefyefjen. 
 He has met with a great misfor- (5g iffc tfym cin gropes ilnglficf fccgeg* 
 
 tune. net (miberfafyren). 
 
 I have met with your brother. 3d) bin Sfyrcm 23rnbet fceg*gttct» 
 
 Are tnere many horses in this vil- ©t&t eg t>iet g)fctbe in btcfem £)otfe ? 
 lage? 
 
 TAere. £>afe(6ft or ba. 
 
 There is not a single good horse (Sg gtfot fcin ein^igcg guteg spfcrb bo* 
 there, fclbft. 
 
 The village, t>a$ £)otf ; 
 
 single, ctn$tg. 
 
 Are there many learned men in ®tfct eg Diet (Setefjrte in JranFteicb ? 
 
 France ? 
 There are a good many there. (5*g giOt fef)t Dicfe t>a. 
 There are no apples this year. (Sg giftt Seine 2Cepfc( biefeg Satyr. 
 
 To #e of use, to be good. & a U g C n» 
 To be good for something. 3u ctroag iaugen- 
 
189 
 
 Of what use is that? 2£o$u tauQt fcaS ? (Obs. C, Les* 
 
 son LIL, and Rule, page 
 187.) 
 It is good for nothing. (5* taugt $u md)t& 
 
 The good for nothing fellow, t>cr £au$cntd)t$ ; 
 
 the fault, the defect, t>ct gtfyter. 
 Is the stuff which you have 3ft ^ 3cug, t>cn <Sic gcfottft Oafccn. 
 bought good ] ^Ut? 
 
 EXERCISES. 150. 
 
 T do not see my gloves ; where are they 1 — They are ying in 
 the river. — Who has thrown them into it ] — Your servant, because 
 they were no longer good for anything. — What have you done with 
 your money ! — I have bought a house with it (taunt). — What has 
 the joiner done with that wood ] — He has made a table and two 
 chairs of it. — What has the tailor done with the cloth which you 
 gave him] — He has made clothes of it for (fitr with the accus.) 
 your children and mine. — What has the baker done witli the flour 
 which you sold him ] — He has made bread of it for you and me. — 
 Have the horses been found ] — They have been found. — Where 
 have they been found ] — They have been found behind the wood, 
 on this side (Lesson L.) of the river. — Have you been seen by 
 anybody ? — I have been seen by nobody. — Have you passed by 
 anybody 1 — I passed by the side of you, and you did not see me. — 
 Has any one passed by the side of you 1 — No one has passed by 
 the side of me. 
 
 151. 
 
 Do you expect (Lesson XLVII.) any one ] — I do expect my 
 cousin, the officer. — Have you not seen him ] — I have seen him 
 this morning ; he has passed before my house. — What does this 
 young man wait for (Obs. C, Lesson LIL and page 187, 1 — 
 He waits for money. — Art thou waiting for anything?— am 
 waiting for my book. — Is this young man w?.Uing for his money ] 
 —He is waiting for it. — Has the king passed (in the carriage) 
 here (htct rcorftct) ? — He has not passed here, but before the the- 
 atre. — Has he not passed before the new fountain ] — He has 
 passed there ; but I have not seen him. — What do you spend your 
 time in 1 — I spend my time in studying. — What does your brother 
 spend his time in ] — He spends his time in reading and playing. — 
 Does this man spend his time in working ] — He is a good for 
 nothing fellow ; he spends his time in drinking and playing. — 
 What did you spend your time in, when you were at Berlin] — 
 When I was at Berlin, I spent my time in studying, and rding on 
 horseback. — What do your children spend their time in ] — They 
 spend their time in learning. — Can you pay me what you owe me ] 
 —I cannot pay it to you, for our bailiff has failed to bring me mj 
 
190 
 
 money.— Why have you breakfasted without me? — You failed tc 
 come at nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted without you. — 
 Has the merchant brought you the stuff which you bought at his 
 house (Oct if)m) 1 — He has failed to bring- it to me. — Has he sold 
 it to you on credit 1 — He has sold it to me, on the contrary, for 
 cash. — Do you know those men ] — I do not know them; but 1 
 think that they (c$) are good for nothing fellows, for they spend 
 their time in playing. — Why did you fail to come to my father 
 this morning] — The tailor did not bring me the coat whieh he 
 promised me, so that I could not go to him. 
 
 152. 
 
 Have you heard of any one 1 — I have not heard of any one, 
 for I have not gone out this morning. — Have you not heard of the 
 officer who has killed a soldier 1 — I have not heard of him. — Have 
 you heard of my brothers ] — I have not heard of them. — Of whom 
 has your cousin heard ] — He has heard of a man to whom a 
 misfortune has happened. — Why have your scholars not done 
 (gcmad)t) the exercises] — I assure you that they have done them. 
 — What have you done with my book ] — I assure you that I have 
 not seen it. — Have you had my knives ] — I assure you that I have 
 not had them. — Has your uncle arrived already] — He has not 
 arrived yet. — Will you wait till he returns ] — I cannot wait, for I 
 have long letters to write. — What have you heard new ] — I have 
 heard nothing new. — Has the king assured you of his assistance ] 
 — He has assured me of it (beffi'tt, Obs. Lesson XVI.). — What has 
 happened to you] — A great misfortune has happened to me. — 
 What] — I have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me 
 a blow with his stick. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SIXTY.FIFTH LESSON.— JTiinf Uttb 0*d)tt£0te 
 Nation. 
 
 How long is it since ] SBte fange ift c$ fcfyon, tap ? 
 
 It is long since. (S6 ift fcfyon lange, bap. 
 
 Is it long since you breakfasted ] 3ft e£ fcfyon (ano,c, bap ©tc cjcfcu()ftucfl 
 
 f)abcn ? 
 Ft is not long (it is a short time) & ift nod) ntd)t fange, t>a$ tcb Qcfttil)* 
 
 since I breakfasted. ftucft f)abc. 
 
 It is a great while since I break- (S3 ift fcbon fefyt langc, t>a$ tcV) cjcs 
 
 fasted. frubftticft babt- 
 
 \ breakfasted an hour ago. 3d) i)abc t>ot ctncr ©tunbe gcfruf): 
 
 ftttcft. 
 
 Obs. A. In speaking of time, the word ©tltttbc 
 
191 - 
 
 hour, a must be employed, and not the word \Xf}V, which 
 signifies watch. 
 
 Two hours ago. 23ot greet ©timben. 
 
 Is it long since you saw him 1 3ft cs> fetyen tange, bap Sic ttyn gefes 
 
 tycn tyaben ? 
 How long is it since you saw £Bte fonge tft e*, bap Sic il)n gefetyen 
 
 him] tyaben'? 
 
 I raw him a year ago. Scty tyafce ttyn t>or cittern 3af)re gefe* 
 
 tyen. 
 Two years ago. &or greet Satyrcn. 
 
 An hour and a half ago. 83or anbetttyatb Stunben. 
 Two hours and a half ago. $3ct btttttyalfc ©tttnben. 
 
 Is it long since you are in 3ft c$ fd)Ctt fange, bap @te in granf* 
 
 France ? tctcty ftnb ? 
 
 Have you been long in France ? f Stnt) @te feften lange in granfr 
 
 retdr)? 
 He has been in Paris these three C f ($r ift fett brct Satytcn in SpartS. 
 
 years. £ \ (Sr tft fetyen t>rei Satyre in s part$ 
 
 How long is it since he was £Btc (angc tft e$, bap er tytet rear 1 
 
 here 7 ? 
 He was here a fortnight ago. (St rear Dot mcqetyn Sagen tyter. 
 
 It is but a year since. (S$ tft crft eitt Satyr, bap. 
 
 Obs. B. But is translated by ttur (Lesson XIX., 
 when it relates to a quantity, and by erfl when to time 
 
 It is more than a year since. (5$ tft (anger aU etn Satyr, bap. 
 
 It is hardly six months since. (£•£ ftnb faum fectyS donate, $)a$. 
 
 It is nearly two years since. (S$ ftnb ungefatyr jrect Satyre, bap. 
 
 It is almost a year since. ($$ ift balb ein Satyr, bap. 
 
 I have been living here these two f Scty reotync fett areei S^tyten tyter. 
 
 years. 
 
 How long have you had that f 2Bte tange tyakn @te t>a$ $fetfb ? 
 
 horse ] 
 
 I have already had it these five f Scty tyafce e$ fetyen funf Satyre. 
 
 years. 
 
 It is already more than three (5$ ftnb fetyen mctyr dU brc't denote 
 
 months since. bap. 
 
 I have not seen him for a year. Scty tyafre ttyn in etttem Satyre ntcty* 
 
 gefetyen. 
 
 Soon, almost, 93 a ( b. 
 
 A few hours ago. 83er etntgen ©'tunben. 
 
 Half an hour ago. 23er cincr tyaften (Stunbe. 
 
 A quarter of an hour ago. SSor cincr 83tertelftunbe. 
 
 * $)te Stunbe, the hour, is a feminine noun, and has it in the plural 
 
192 
 
 I hare seen him more than twen- 3d) fycifce tljn mer)r at$ groatt&igmal 
 
 ty times. gcfcfjen. 
 
 More than a hundred times. 9Jltt)t ati rjunbertma!. 
 
 Since. ©ctt (a preposition governing 
 
 the dative). 
 How long ? f <S c 1 1 ro a n n 1 
 
 How long has he been here ! f ®*tt warm ifi cr rjtet ? 
 These three days. t ^tt ^ l Scicjen. 
 
 This month. j ©ctt cincm Senate. 
 
 To cos*. £ ft c n (is an impersonal verb 
 
 governing the dative of the 
 person). 
 
 How much does this book cost £&tct)te( feftet Styncrt btefc$ 23ucfy? 
 you] 
 
 It costs me three crowns and aS ^ ^ mi| . ^ unb dncn ^^ 
 
 r ©tcfet Sifcf) feftet tfjm a*tf)al& ©ut« 
 This table costs him seven) ben. 
 
 florins and a half. i ©tefet Stfcf) feftet tljm fte&en unt 
 
 [ cincn fjcMcn ©utben. 
 
 Obs. B. The adjective fyalb, half, is declined when 
 before a substantive ; but it is not declined in fraction- 
 al numbers, as attbertfyalb, one and a half, compounded 
 of ber anbere (jtoette), the second, and fyatb, half; brttfr 
 baib, two and a half, compounded of ber britte, th<: 
 third, and f)al6, half. 
 
 To purchase {to buy). 6 i n € a u f tit. 
 
 What have you purchased to- £Sa6 Ijabcn <Sie fyeute ctngefauft ? 
 
 day? 
 I have purchased three pair of 3d) fiafrc brct $)aar <Scf)uf)C unb 
 
 shoes, and two pair of boots. gnxt $)aat (Sttcfd ctngefauft. 
 Have you purchased anything £cikn @ic fycute etrcag ctngefauft ] 
 
 to-day ? 
 
 O&s. C. The names of weights, measures, and 
 quantities, as well as the word 9D?cmtt, man, meaning a 
 soldier, are not used in the plural, when preceded by 
 a noun of number. 
 
 My father has bought twenty 9)?etn SSatet f)at $tvan$tg spfunb 
 
 pounds of sugar. 3ucfer qefauft. 
 
 Three quires of paper. ©ret 2$ u d) papier. 
 
 k regiment of a thousand men. (Sin Regiment tten taufenb 93? a n n. 
 
193 
 
 The pound (weight), t>a$ $)funb ; 
 
 the dozen, t>a$ £)u£cnb ; 
 
 the pair, l>a$ $)aar ; 
 
 the quire of paper, bciS feucf) papier ; 
 
 the foot (measure), t>cr gufo bet ©cfyitl) $ 
 
 the inch, bet 3oIl ; 
 
 the regiment, t>a* 9?e$tment ; 
 
 the ring, bet SUng ; 
 
 the picture, ba$ ©emalbe. 
 
 exercises. 153. 
 
 Have you ever been in this village ? — I have been there several 
 times. — Are there good horses in it ? — There is not a single one in 
 it. — Have you ever been in that country ] — I have been there once. 
 — Are there many learned men there ? — There are many there, but 
 they spend their time in reading. — Are there many studious chil- 
 dren in that village ? — There are some, but there are also others 
 who will not study. — Are the peasants of this village able to read 
 and write] — Some are able to read, others to write and not to read, 
 and many both to read and to write; there are a few w r ho are 
 neither able to read nor to write. — Have you done the exercises 1 — 
 We have done them. — Are there any faults in them ? — There are 
 no faults in them, for we have been very assiduous. — Has your 
 friend many children? — He has only one, but who is a good for 
 nothing fellow, for he will not study. — In what does he spend his 
 time ] — He spends his time in playing and running. — Why does 
 his father not punish him] — He has not the courage to punish 
 him. — W'hat have you done with the stuff which you bought? — 
 I have thrown it away, for it was good for nothing. — Have you 
 thrown away your apples] — I tasted (them), and found them very 
 good, so that I have eaten them. 
 
 154. 
 
 Have you been long in Paris ] — These four years. — Has your 
 brother been long in London % — He has been there these ten years. 
 — Is it leng since you dined ] — It is long since I dined, but not 
 long since I supped. — How long is it since you supped ] — It is 
 two hours and a half. — Is it long since you received a letter from 
 your father ] — It is not long since I received one. — How long is it 
 since you received a letter from your friend who is in Germany] — 
 It is three months since I received one. — Is it long since you spoke 
 to the man whose son has lent you money 1 — It is not long since I 
 spoke to him. — Is it long since you saw your parents ] — It is a 
 great while since I saw them. — Has the son of my friend been 
 living long in your house ? — He has been living there a fort) light 
 (t)ter^cr)n Sage). — How long have you had these books ] — I have 
 had them these three months. — How long is it since your cousin 
 set out] — It is more than a month since he set out. — What is be- 
 9 
 
194 
 
 come of the man who spoke English so well? — 1 do not km™ 
 what is become of him, for it is a great while since I saw him.— 
 Is it long since you heard of the officer who gave your friend a 
 stab with his sword 1 — It is more than a year since I heard of him. 
 — How long have you been learning German? — I have been learn- 
 ing it only these three months.— Are you already able to speak it? 
 — You see that I am beginning to speak it. — Have the children ot 
 the French noblemen been learning it long 1 — They have been 
 learning it these five years, and they do not yet begin to speak. — 
 Why can they not speak it ]— They cannot speak it, because they 
 are learning it badly. — Why do they not learn it well? — The}/ 
 have not a good master, so that they do not learn it well. 
 
 155. 
 
 Is it long since you saw the young man who learnt German with 
 (M) the same master with whom we learnt it ? — I have not seen 
 him for nearly a year. — How long is it since that child ate 1 — It 
 ate a few minutes (Lesson XLVII. Note d ) ago.— How long is it 
 since those children drank 1 — They drank a quarter of an hour ago. 
 — How long has your friend been in Spain 1 — He has been there 
 this month. — How often have you seen the king ] — I saw him more 
 than ten times when I was in Paris. — When did you meet my 
 brother ? — I met him a fortnight ago. — Where did you meet him 1 — 
 In (2Cuf) the great square ($(a£) before the theatre.— Did he do you 
 any harm 1 — He did me no harm, for he is a very good boy. — Has 
 your son long been able to read 1 — These two days only. — With 
 (23ei) whom has he learnt it]— He has learnt it with (bet) the Ger- 
 man tutor. — How long have you been spending your time in study- 
 ing 1 — Nearly these twenty years. — Have you purchased anything 
 to-day ] — I have purchased something. — What have you bought ] 
 — I have bought three casks of wine and thirty pounds of sugar. — 
 Have you not bought any stockings 1 — I have bought nine pair of 
 them. — Have you also bought handkerchiefs 1 — I have bought two 
 dozen oi them. — Why have you not bought gold rings ? — I could 
 not buy anything more, for I had no more money. — Are there many 
 soldiers in your country 1 — There is a regiment of three thousand 
 men there. — How long have I kept your cousin's money ] — You 
 have kept it almost a year. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SIXTY.SIXTH LESSON.— Qct\)B Mlb 0£Cf)}ig6t£ 
 Cation. 
 
 Just now. <So efcen. 
 
 1 have just seen your brother 3* fjabe fo cfcen 3f)ren JBrubet gefc* 
 
 ben. 
 
195 
 
 He has just written. (£r Ijat fo eften gefd)riefcen. 
 
 The men have just arrived. £)ie Ccutc ftnt> fo ebcn cmgefcmmetu 
 
 To s^ewd money* 2(u$gebcn*. 
 
 How much have you spent to- S&temel FjaOcn (Sic fycutc cm&jecjeben ? 
 day? 
 
 To spend {to eat, to consume). 33et$ef)tett. 
 
 W hat am I to pay 1 f £Ba$ fyafte id) wt$eljtt ? 
 
 How much has he spent at the f fflStemel I)at et feci tern 2Bttt!)C 
 
 inn 1 »crgel>rt ? 
 
 He has fifty crowns a month to f @* M ten $Kenat funfetg Sljate 
 
 live upon. $u fcrscf)rcn. 
 
 To squander, to dissipate, 25 c t f d) tt> c n t> c n. 
 fo lavish. 
 
 He has squandered all his (St fjot fctn gonggl SSctmogen Mts 
 
 wealth. fcftrcenbet. 
 
 The landlord, the innkeeper, bet SOSirtfj ; 
 the wealth, the fortune, t>a£ 93crmogcn ; 
 
 entire, whole. gan$. 
 
 rf SBefjct finb (Sic? 2Bo finb ©ie 
 What countryman are you ? < fyct ? 
 
 C 2Ba$ fur em eanb$mann a finb ©ie ? 
 
 From Venice. 9Son (au$) 23enebtg. 
 
 From London. SSon (au$) Sonbon. 
 I am from Dresden. 3d) bin mis HDreS&cn. 
 
 Obs. A. The syllable et is the characteristic termi- 
 nation of the masculine gender, b and signifies the per- 
 son that performs or is accustomed to perform the thing 
 expressed by the verb. This syllable joined to the 
 name of a town or country, forms a substantive de- 
 noting the man born in such a town or country. Ex. 
 
 He is a saddler, ct ift cin ©attler ; 
 
 a baker, etn SBa'cfet ; c 
 
 a locksmith, cin <Sd)lojJet ; 
 
 the lock, bag <Sd)(og ; 
 
 the saddle, bcr battel ; 
 
 the key, bet ©d)Kiffcl. 
 
 a The plural of bet* £attb§mann, the countryman, one of the same country, 
 is £cmb3leute. Its feminine is £attbSmattttttt, country-woman, a woman of the 
 same country. This word must not be mistaken for ber £cmbmcmn, the coun- 
 tryman, farmer, rustic, the plural of which is £cmbleute. 
 
 b For this reason most substantia ?s of this termination are of the mascu* 
 line gender. 
 
 c Derived from ftacf en, to bake. 
 
He is from Berlin, 
 
 Are you an Englishman? 
 
 Whence do you come 1 
 I come from Paris. 
 
 To serve, to wait upon. 
 
 To serve some one, or tc wait 
 
 upon some one. 
 To be in one^s service. 
 
 Has he been in your service 1 
 
 Does he serve you well ] 
 
 He serves me very well. 
 
 This is to no purpose (of no use). 
 
 Do you choose any of it 1 
 
 I do not like it. j 
 
 It will not do for me. < 
 
 To spoil. 
 
 Thou spoilest — he spcils. 
 
 You have spoiled my book. 
 My book is spoiled. 
 
 Has he spoiled my hat 1 
 
 196 
 
 t (St if! ein iBetttnct. 
 <Sint> (Sic etn (Sncjlcmbet ! 
 
 2£of)cr fommcn 8te ? 
 2Bo fommcn (Sic tyt ? 
 3d) fomme tton g)ati& 
 
 2) t c n c n (governs the dative). 
 &$ebtcncn (governs the ac€i* 
 
 sative). 
 3 c m a n b c m b t c n e n« 
 
 23 ci 3 c man I) em b ten etn 
 
 £at ct feet Sftncn gebtcnt ? 
 
 Scbtcnt et <Ste gut ? 
 
 (St kbtent mid) fcr)r gut. 
 
 t 3)a$ btcnt *u ntd)t$. 
 
 t £ann id) Sfacn bamtt btenen ? 
 
 f jDamtt iff nut ntd)t gcbtcnt. 
 
 "23erbctben* (verb. act. anJ 
 
 neut. irreg.). 
 3 u <S cb a n b e n m a d) c n (a vul- 
 gar expression). 
 
 £)u ttctbtrbft, ct ttcrbtrto. (Imp. 
 
 ttctbatb.) 
 ©te fyafccn ntctn 23ud) tjcrbor&cn. 
 sftltin 23ud) ift ttcrborfcen ($u (Sedans 
 
 ben gemacbt). 
 #at er metnen £ut oetbctOen (ju 
 
 ©cfyanben $cmad)t) ? 
 
 25 cfd>cf btgen. 
 
 SMcfet 4out ftef)t Sfcnen gut. 
 2Bte ftcf)t mtr btefet £ut ? 
 @r ftcfyt 3fynen ntd)t gut. 
 OTcrltc&ft. d 
 2Bunbcrfd)6n. 
 
 To damage. 
 
 That hat fits you well. 
 How does this hat fit me 1 
 It does not fit you. 
 
 Most lovely, charming. 
 
 Admirably. 
 
 To dress, to Jit, to sit well. St I e i b e n. 
 
 Obs. B. The verb ffefeett, when it signifies to fit, tJ 
 sit well, is neuter ; but when it means to dress, to cloth^ 
 it is active, and governs the accusative in both signi- 
 fications. 
 
 d 5lller is the genitive plural of the word <xi{, all. It is sometimes thu§ 
 Joined to the superlative to give i* more strength. 
 
197 
 
 That hat fits you admirably well. £)tefer £ut fletbet <&\c atlerltebft 
 
 That coat fits him. 2)tefer Otocf flcttwt ifjn ejut. 
 
 My father clothes me. Sttein Stater ftctfcet nud). 
 
 God clothes the poor. ©ett frctfcet t>te 2Crmeru 
 
 The man with the blue coat. £>ct Sftcinn mtt tern bfouen £lctt>fc 
 
 How was the child dressed? SBte war tag &tnt> gef lctt>et ? 
 
 It was dressed in green. f @^ war flt:ftn flcflctfoet. 
 
 How large? i SBte fltrof ? 
 
 Of what size I J r y 
 
 How high ] of what height ] SSBte Ijed) ? 
 How deep 1 of what depth 1 2Bte ttcf ? 
 Of what height is his house ] SOSic fjeci) ift fcin #au$ ? 
 It is nearly thirty feet high. (5*S ift uncjefcifyt fcvetptfj gup F>0d^ 
 
 (Lesson LXV. Ofa. C.) 
 
 True. 2B a 6 r. 
 
 . s it true that his house has been 3ft eS roarer, fccip fcin £au$ afccje* 
 
 burnt ] frrarmt ift ? 
 
 It is true. @$ ift tt>af)t* 
 
 Is it not 1 (meaning, Is it not f SftUfot waf)t ? 
 true?) 
 The philosopher, tit 2£etoetfe, fcet g)f)t(cfcpF) (gen. 
 
 en). 
 
 EXERCISES. 156. 
 
 Who is the man who has just spoken to you ! — He is a learned 
 man. — What has the shoemaker just brought] — He has brought the 
 boots and shoes which he has made us. — Who are the men that 
 have just arrived ] — They are philosophers. — Of what country are 
 they ] — They are from London. — Who is the man who has just 
 started ] — He is an Englishman, who has squandered away (t?cr- 
 fcfytvenoet) all his fortune in France. — What countryman are you ] — 
 I am a Spaniard, and my friend ts an Italian. — Wilt thou go for 
 the locksmith ] — W T hy must I go for the locksmith ] — He (£)erfe(be) 
 must make rne a key, for I have lost the cne belonging to my room 
 (ben metneS Simmer?). — Where did your uncle dine yesterday 1 — 
 He dined at the innkeeper's. — How much did he spend ] — He spent 
 three florins. — How much has he a month to live upon ] — He has 
 two hundred florins a month to live upon. — Must I go for the sad- 
 dler] — You must go for him, for he must mend the saddle. — Have 
 you seen any one at the market ] — I have seen a good many people 
 there. — How were they dressed ] — Some were dressed in blue, 
 some in green, some in yellow, and several in red. 
 
 157. 
 
 Who are those men ] — Tne one who is dressed in grey is my 
 neighbour, and the one with the black coat the physician, whose 
 «*on has given my neighbour a blow with a stick. — Who is the man 
 
198 
 
 with the green coat? — He is one of my relations. — Are you fioin 
 Berlin 1 — No, I am from Dresden. — How much money have your 
 children spent to-day 1 — They have spent but little ; they have 
 spent but one florin. — Does that man serve you well 1 — He does 
 serve me well ; but he spends too much. — Are you willing to take 
 this servant? — I am willing to take him if he will serve me. — Can 
 I take this servant ] — You can take him, for he has served me very- 
 well. — How long is it since he (first) served you] — It is but two 
 months since. — Has he served you long ] — He has served me (for) 
 six years. — How much did you give him a year (t>c$ Safacs) • — J 
 gave him five hundred francs without clothing him. — Did he board 
 (2(6) with (bet) you 1 — He did board with me. — What did you give 
 him to eat? — I gave him whatever (t»cn atlcm, roa$) 1 ate. — Were 
 you pleased with him ? — I was much (fefjt) pleased with him. (See 
 end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Bkbttt ntib 0tdftig6te 
 
 %zt\\on. 
 
 To trust with. 2Cnt>ctttaucn. 
 
 To entrust, to confide, to commit SSettrauen. 
 in confidence* 
 
 I trust you with my money. 3d) ttettraue Sfyncn mctn ©ctfc) an. 
 
 He has trusted me with his mo- S*t \)at nut fein (Mt> anwtftaut. 
 ney. 
 
 I entrust you with a secret. 
 
 To unbosom one's self to one. 
 
 The secret, 
 To keep anything secret. 
 
 I have kept it secret. 
 
 Secret (adjective). 
 
 To pity. 
 
 With all my heart. 
 
 Do you pity that man? 
 
 I do pity him with all my heart. 
 
 To offer — offered. 
 I offer it you. 
 
 3d) Dettraue 3^ncn cm ©e&etm* 
 
 nip. 
 t @td) Semanbem wttraucn. 
 
 fca$ (SJefjctmmfi (plur. c a ). 
 (StrcaS gefjetm Fjattcn. 
 
 Imperf. rjtelt. 
 3d) \)aU c$ gefjcim ^cr)a(tcn. 
 ©cfjeim. 
 
 SSeHagcn. 
 
 t 9Scn gangem &cr$en. 
 SBeflagcn <Stc fciefen SRann ? 
 3d) bcflage ir)n son ganjcni £cr» 
 Sen. 
 
 2(nt>ictcn* — ange&oten. 
 Imperf. b t. 
 
 3d) bietc c£ 3&ncn an. 
 
 a Neuter nouns terminating in £, add e to all cases of the plural wHhoiu 
 softening the radical vowel. 
 
199 
 
 From. $ ft r ( a preposition governing 
 
 the accusative). 
 
 Tc take care of something. £ ^ l |n ^ ^j^ 
 
 Masc. Neat. 
 
 To take care of it. j ggj *g£ <*» | f* e* fefb^t 
 
 To take care of the hat. £)<m £ut in 2Cd)t nebm-en** 
 
 Imp erf. nafjni. 
 Do you take care of your clothes] jsflefymcn (Sic 3fae Jttetfcet in 2Cc^t? 
 [ do take care of them. t 3$ ncfyme fie in 2£d>t. 
 
 O&s. A There are in German many substantives, 
 adverbs and other words and expressions which form 
 one signification with the verb, as : ouSttWbtg kritett, to 
 learn by heart ; b gent ej]en*, to like to eat (Lesson 
 LIV.) ; fcf)Utbig fern*, to owe (Lesson XL VII.), &c. These 
 are placed exactly like the separable particles (Lesson 
 XXV.), but are never joined to the verb. 
 
 C SSScHcn <Sie fur mem $)ferfc> flvs 
 Will you take care of my horse 1 < gen ? 
 
 ( SSottcn <Sie mcin $)fert) fceforgen ? c 
 
 will take care of it. j g* "«J N»J f«3 cn - 
 
 } 3d) will e$ beforgen. 
 
 To take care. Bergen, fcefergen. 
 
 The merohmt of Hamburg. £)cr ^amburact jtaufmann. 
 
 Obs. B. The genitive of names of towns is gener- 
 ally expressed in German by an adjective. This is 
 formed by adding the syllable er to the name, and is 
 indeclinable. Ex. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 f Nom. ber Setpjtger ©tubeitt — bte^ Cetp* 
 The student J Gen. be£ Setpjiger ©tubentcn — ber I jtger 
 of Leipzic. ] Dat. bent ?etpjtger ©tubentcn - ben [ <&tx\* 
 l^Acc. ben ?eipjtger ©tubenten — btej benten. 
 
 D This and the above examples show that such a construction is not alto 
 gether unusual in English. 
 c The first of these two expvessions is the best 
 
Mi) 
 
 The citizen (burgess) of London, fcer Convener SBurgct ; 
 the citizen of Paris, t>et Sparifer burger ; 
 
 the beer of Strasburg, tm$ ®trc#urgct SBier. 
 
 exercises. 158. 
 
 Are there many philosophers in your country? — There are as 
 many there as in yours. — How does this hat fit me 1 — It fits you 
 very well. — How does this hat fit your brother ? — It fits him ad- 
 mirably. — Is your brother as tall (qrep) as you 1 — He is taller than 
 I, but I am older than he. — How high is this man ? — He is five 
 feet, four inches high. — How high is the house of our landlord? — 
 It is sixty feet high. — Is your well deep 1 — Yes, Sir, for it is fifty 
 feet deep. — How long have those men been in your father's service ? 
 - — They have been in his service already more than three years. — 
 Has your cousin been long at Paris ? — He has been there nearly 
 six years. — Who has spoiled my knife ? — Nobody has spoiled it, 
 for it was spoiled when we were in want of it. — Is it true that youi 
 ancle has arrived ? — I assure you that he has arrived. — Is it true 
 what the king has assured you of his assistance ? — I assure you that 
 it is *rue. — Is it true that the six thousand men whom we were ex- 
 pecting have arrived '? — I have heard so. — Will you dine with us ? 
 — I cannot dine with you, for I have just eaten. — Will your brother 
 drink a glass (of) wine ? — He cannot drink, for, I assure you, he 
 has jut t drunk. — Do you throw away your hat ? — I do not throw it 
 away, ibr it fits me admirably. — Does your friend sell his coat ? — 
 He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. — There are many 
 learned men in Berlin, are there not (mebt roctfyr) 1 asked Cuvier a 
 man from Berlin (t>cr SBcr(tner). Not so many as when you were 
 there, answered the man from Berlin. 
 
 159. 
 
 Why do you pity that man ? — I pity him, because he has trusted 
 a merchant of Hamburg with his money, and the man (btcfer) will 
 not return it to him. — Do you trust this citizen with anything? — I 
 do not trust him with anything. — Has he already kept anything 
 from you ? (3()nen etma£ fcebatten). — I have never trusted him with 
 anything, so that he has never kept anything from me. — Will you 
 trust my father wi h your money ? — I will trust him with it. — What 
 secret has my son entrusted you with ? — I cannot entrust you with 
 that with which he has entrusted me, for he has desired (bitten*) 
 me to keep it secret. — Whom do }'ou entrust with your secrets ? — 
 I entrust nobody with them, so that nobody knows them.-^-Has 
 your brother been rewarded 1 — He has on the contrary been pun- 
 ished ; but I beg you to keep it secret, for no one knows it. — What 
 has happened to him ? — I will tell you what has happened to him, 
 if you promise me to keep it secret. — Do you promise me to keep 
 it secret ? — I promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. (See 
 tnd of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
201 
 
 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON— &djt ntti zttt)jiQ*U 
 Cation. 
 
 Each man. Scbcr 93?enfd). 
 
 Each child. 3ebe$ £tnb. 
 
 Every one. Scbcrmcmn. 
 
 The whole world. £)te gcm^e SSSclt, 
 
 O&s. A. ^ciexmanti adds g in the genitive, and re« 
 mains invariable in the other cases, thus : 
 
 TNom. 3et>ermatttt. 
 Every one, every body. J g- |S— • 
 
 [Acc. Sebermann. 
 
 Every thing (meaning all). It i t C 6. 
 
 Ofo. 2?. Sitter, all, taken substantively, is put in the 
 neuter gender singular. Ex. 
 
 He knows every thing. (St fcmn citteS. 
 
 I have seen all. 3d) f)at>e atleS Cjcfeljen. 
 
 He is fit for any thing. f (St tft 5U aflehi $u cjefctcmdjen. 
 
 Obs. C. ©attj, whole, entire, is used with the article, 
 but att, all, is never used with it. 
 
 The whole town. 5>tc ganje (Stabt. 
 
 The whole society. £>te cjan^e ©efeflfdjaft. 
 
 His whole wealth. } ~* . . ~ „ 
 
 All his fortune. J 6em flanjrt ffirondfiem 
 
 The walk (meaning the place to bet <2>pci$tetp(a§ ; 
 
 walk in), 
 ths concert, (Concert ; 
 
 the walk (meaning the walking), bet <Spa$tergcmg. 
 There were many people in the (SS tuaten met 8eute auf bem <Spai 
 
 walk (at the concert). ^tetaange (tm (Son cert). 
 
 I have cut his finger. f 3d) fyabe if)n in ben finger 9 es 
 
 fdjnttten. 
 He has cut my leg. f (St f)at mid) in bag SBein gefdjntt* 
 
 ten. 
 He has cut off his finger. (St fjett tfjm ben finger afcgefdjnitten 
 
 He has cut it off. (St fjQt tfyn t&m afcgefcfynitten. 
 
 Entirely. ©analtd). 
 
 To bring along with one* OTltbringctt*. 
 
 Have you come quite alone ? <Stnb <Ste gan$ aftetn gefommen? 
 9* 
 
202 
 
 Obs. D. Sltteilt, as a conjunction, has the same signifi* 
 cation as aber, but ; as an adverb it signifies alone. 
 
 No, I have brought all my men Stfctn, tdf) fyabe attc mcine Scute mit» 
 
 along with me. o,ebrad)t. 
 
 He has brought all his men along (St hat alle fetne Scute mltgcbrad)t. 
 
 with him. 
 Have you brought your brother £afrcn @tc 3fytcn 33tubct mttgc* 
 
 along with you ] t>tad)t ? 
 
 I have brought him along with 3d) f)Ctbe tfytt nutgebtad)t. 
 
 me. 
 Have you told the groom to bring £afcen ©te bem <Statl£ncd)t gqagt, mtr 
 
 me the horse ? tag $>fetb $u bungen ? 
 
 The groom, t)cr (Stallfnccfyt. 
 
 'Unweit, in bet 9? a F) c (go- 
 verns the genitive). 
 Near* \ 23 c i (governs the dative). 
 
 9£ c 6 c n (governs the dative and 
 accus.). 
 
 Near me. 9?ebcn mtr. 
 
 f <8ei bem gcuct. 
 Near the fire. i 2£m #euer. 
 
 [ 8Scr bem gfcucr. 
 Near the castle. ttnroett beg <Sd)lof1cg. a 
 
 Where do you live % 2£o roormen (Sic ? 
 
 I live near the castle. 3d) roofyne unroett beg ©d)loffe$. 
 
 What are you doing near the fire 1 SSag tfjun ©te Ui bem gcuct ? 
 
 To fall. g alien (takes fctn for its auxi* 
 
 liary). 
 
 Thou fallest— he falls. £)u f afljt — et falin 
 
 Fallen. ©cfattcm 
 
 Fell (Imperf.). gtct. 
 
 To drop (meaning to let fall). g a U e tt (affen*. 
 
 Has he dropt anything ] £at cr ciwai fallen taffen ? 
 
 He has not dropt anything. (5r fjat md)tg fallen laffen. 
 
 To kinder, to prevent. 33etl)tnbetn. 
 
 You hinder me from sleeping, gtc ttcrfjtnbctn mid) $u fd)(afen. 
 
 exercises. 160. 
 
 Whom do you pity 1 — I pity your friend —Why do you pity 
 him ? — I pity him because he is ill. — Do the merchants of Berlin 
 
 * $>a$ <Sc$lof$, the castle, is declined exactly like ba$ (Scfylofj, the lock. 
 
203 
 
 fity anybody ! — They pity nobody. — Do you offer me anything; ?-— 
 offer you a gold ring-. — What has my father offered you ?— He 
 has offered me a fine book. — To whom do you offer those fine 
 horses 1 — I offer them to the French officer.— Do you offer that fine 
 carriage to my uncle I — I do offer it to him. — Dost thou offer thy 
 pretty little dog to these good children 1 — I do offer it to them, for 
 1 love them with all my heart. — What have the citizens of Stras- 
 burg offered you ! — They have offered me good beer and salt-meat 
 (9cfa($cnc$ ^It'tfcf)). — To whom do you offer money ? — I offer some to 
 those Parisian citizens, who have assured me of their assistance. — 
 WL1 you take care of my clothes 1 — -I will take care of them. — Wilt 
 thou take care of my hat? — I will take care of it. — Are you taking 
 care of the book which I lent you 1 — I am taking care vf it.— Will 
 this man take care of my horse ? — He will take care of it. — Who 
 will take care of my servant ? — The landlord will take caie of him. 
 — Does your servant take care of your horses ! — He does take care 
 cf them. — Is he taking care of your clothes 1 — He is taking care of 
 them, for he brushes them every morning. — Have you ever drunk 
 Strasburg beer ? — I have never drunk any. — Is it long since you ate 
 Leipzic bread ] — It is almost three years since I ate any. 
 
 161. 
 
 Have you hurt my brother-in-law ] — I have not hurt him ; aut he 
 has cut my finger. — What has he cut your finger with ] — With the 
 knife which you had lent him. — Why have you given that boy a 
 blow with your fist ? — Because he hindered me from sleeping. — 
 Has anybody hindered you from writing 1 — Nobody has hindered 
 me from writing; but I have hindered somebody from hurting your 
 cousin. — Has your father arrived ] — Every body says that he has 
 arrived ; but I have not seen him yet. — Has the physician hurt 
 your son ? — He has hurt him, for he has cut his finger. — Have they 
 cu . off this man's leg ] — They have cut it off entirely. — Are you 
 pleased with your servant 1 — I am much (fefyt) pleased with him, 
 for he is fit for anything. — What does he know? — He knows every 
 thing. — Can he ride on horse-back 1 — He can. — Has your brother 
 returned at last from Germany ] — He has returned thence, and has 
 brought you a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me ? 
 — He has told him to bring it to you. — What do you think (fagcn) of 
 ($u) that horse 1 — I think (fage) that it is a fine and good one, and 
 (I) beg you to lead it into the stable. — In what did you spend your 
 time yesterday 1 — I went to the public walk (t>et (Spqietptag), and 
 afterwards to the concert. — Were there many people in the public 
 walk 1 — There were many people there. 
 
 162. 
 
 What did you see at the concert ? — I si w many people. — What 
 did you do after the concert ] — I went to the inn (t>a$ SGBtttfjSfjauS) 
 in order to dine. — Have you dined well 1 — I have dined very welh 
 
204 
 
 bat 1 have spent too much. — How much have you spent ? — 1 hav« 
 spent nearly two florins and a half. — Is the fare (Spetfet man) good 
 at your inn ] — It is very good ; but every thing is so dear, that one 
 must be rich to dine there. — Have you dropt anything ] — I have 
 dropt nothing ; but my cousin dropt some money. — Who picked it 
 ap 1 — Some men who were passing by picked it up. — Have they 
 returned it to him ] — They have returned it to him, for they were 
 good people. — Where were you going to when I met you this morn- 
 ing 1 — I was going to my uncle. — Where does he live ? — He lives 
 near the castle. — What news has (fagt) your uncle ? — He has no 
 news. — What has happened to him? — A little misfortune has hap- 
 pened to him. — Will you tell me what has happened to him ? — I 
 will tell it you ; but I beg you to keep it secret. — I promise you to 
 tell it to nobody. — Will you tell me now what has happened to 
 him ? — He fell as (a(g) he was going to the theatre. — Is he ill 1 — 
 He is very ill. — I pity him from my heart, if he is ill. — Have you 
 succeeded in finding a hat that fits you well ] — I have succeeded in 
 finding one. — How does it fit you 1 — It fits me admirably. (See 
 end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON.— Item Ktib Bttt)n*tt 
 tuxxon. 
 
 Far. 835 e it. 
 
 How far ? 2Bte mett ? 
 
 How far is it from here to Ber- 2Bte roett ifi eg sen rjtct ttacr) S3ets 
 
 lin 1 tin ? 
 
 Is it far from here to Berlin 1 3ft eg roett sen fytet nacf) SBetftn ? 
 It is far. <5*g tft roett. 
 
 It is not far. <$$ tjt ntdjt roett. 
 
 How many miles is it ? SBtctricl Sttetten ftnb eg ? 
 
 It is twenty miles. (Sg ftnb aroangtg SDlcxkn. 
 
 The mile, tie Sfletfe (a feminine noun a ). 
 
 It is almost a hundred and thirty (S*g ftnb bctnafye bunbert unb btetjng 
 
 miles from here to Berlin. SMetkn t?on r)ier nacJ) 23erltn. 
 
 It is nearly a hundred miles from (£g ftnb ungefa'bt fjunbett Snellen t>on 
 
 Berlin U Vienna. SSerfin nad) 2Bten. 
 
 To like better. 2 1 e b e t m b' g c n. b 
 
 Part, past gemcefyt. 
 Imperf. modjte. 
 
 like better, tho i likest better, 3d) mag debet, bit magft debet, et 
 he likes better. mag Uebct. 
 
 a A German mile is equal to four English miles and a half. 
 
 * £iebet is the comparative to gem. (See Lessons XXXIX. and UY.) 
 
205 
 
 Thw% 
 
 I like staying here better than 
 going out. 
 
 Do you like to write better than 
 to speak 1 
 
 I like to speak better than to 
 write. 
 
 He likes to play better than to 
 
 study. 
 He likes to do both. 
 I like beef better than mutton. 
 
 He likes beer better than wine. 
 Do you like bread better than 
 
 cheese ] 
 I like neither the one nor the 
 
 other* 
 I like tea^ as much as coffee. 
 
 The calf, 
 
 Quick, fast. 
 Slow, slowly* 
 
 He eats quicker than I. 
 Do you learn as fast as 1 1 
 I learn faster than you. 
 \ do not understand you, because 
 you speak too fast. 
 
 Cheap. 
 
 Does he sell cheap 1 
 
 He does not sell dear. 
 
 He has sold to me very dear. 
 
 So. 
 
 So much. 
 
 3d) mag ftebet Ijter otetben &U <m& 
 
 gefjen. 
 3d) Heibe ftebet fjier, at* bap id) cm$* 
 
 9$8g«i ©tc ItcOer fd)tetben aU fprc* 
 
 cben? 
 <Sd)tetben ©tc debet, «!$ bap @te fptes 
 
 d)en? 
 3d) mag liebct fpted)en ate fd)tei* 
 
 ben. 
 3cb fptecfye Itcbet, ot$ bap id) fdjrei* 
 
 be. 
 (§t mag Itebet fpicfen oti flufcu 
 
 rem 
 (Bt t&ut betbe$ gem. 
 f 3* effe debet fRxnts efbWfif 
 
 fenfTetfd).* 
 t (St trinft Itebet S3iet all Beta. 
 t @ffen <Stc Itebet S3tcb o(g Jta'* 
 
 3d) effe Wn* t>cn beiben gem. 
 
 3d) tttnfe eben fe gem Sfjee wic 
 
 Jtaffee. 
 ba^ £alb. 
 
 ® cfd&wtnfc, f d^nelf. 
 £ a ngfa at. 
 
 (St ift gefdntunbet ate id). 
 £ernen @te fc fdjnetf rote id) ? 
 3d) (erne fdjnettet a& (Sic. 
 3d) aetftefie ©te md)t, well Sic $u 
 fd>ncU fptecfyen. 
 
 SSetf auft er woWfeil ? 
 
 (St tjetfauft nicrjt tfjeuet. 
 
 (St bat rnit fef)t ttyeuet wrfauft. 
 
 @o t>iel. 
 
 c When two or more compounds terminate in the same component word, 
 this is joined only to the last, and a German hyphen (?) is placed after the 
 others Ex. ber (gin* nnb SUtSgang, the entrance and exit; er tft tin guter 
 fepirtc^s unb ©c^retbleBrer, he is a good master of languages and of writing; 
 jftmb* unb ©c^opfenfletfd), beef and mutton ; anf- unb jumactyen, to open and 
 to shut ; instead of ber (Stngang unb Stotsgano,, ber ©prac$leljrer unb ©$retfr' 
 le^re?, S^tnbftetfc^ unb ©c^Bpfenffeffdj, aufmac^en unb jumadjen. 
 
206 
 
 This man sells every thing so £)icfcr Sfilann ttctfauft atlc$ fo tfycuet 
 very dear that one cannot buy bap man nicl)t$ 6ci ifym faufctl 
 any thing of him. fann. 
 
 [0 s In a sentence in which the verb ought to stand 
 at the end (Lesson XLVIL), when the auxiliary fein* 
 or werbett*, or one of the verbs bitrfen*, fotttten*, lafjen*, 
 mogeif% miiften*, foffen*, tvcUen*, is added to an infini- 
 tive, it must be placed immediately after that infini- 
 tive, as is seen in the above example. 
 
 I do not know what you wish to 3d) tvctf mcfyt, roa* (Sic fagen root* 
 
 say. (en. 
 
 You speak so fast that I cannot @te fptecben fo fcfynctf, bap id) (Sie 
 
 understand you. md)t t?crftcf)en fann. 
 
 I assure you that he wishes to 3d) Dcrftd)cre (Stc, fcajj cr <Stc fpte* 
 
 speak to you. d)cn ttrill 
 
 To drm£. &ttn6en*. 
 
 Drank* Stan! (Imperi ). 
 
 Do you drink tea or coffee ] Srinfen @te &fjce ofcet .ftaffee ? 
 
 I drink neither the one nor the 3d) tutnfe frtnS ten beiben. 
 
 other. 
 What do you drink in the morn- 2Ba$ trtnfcn (Sic fccS $K08$cn6 ? 
 
 ing? 
 
 EXERCISES. 163. 
 
 How far is it from Paris to London 1 — It is nearly (fcctnafyc) a 
 Hundred miles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Ham- 
 burg 1 — It is far. — Is it far from here to Vienna 1 — It is almost a 
 nundred and forty miles from here to Vienna. — Is it further from 
 Berlin to Dresden than from Leipzic to Berlin ] — It is further from 
 Berlin to Dresden than from Leipzic to Berlin. — How far is it from 
 Paris to Berlin] — It is almost a nundred and thirty miles from here 
 to Berlin. — Do you intend to go to Berlin soon ] — I do intend to go 
 thither soon. — Why do you wish to go this time ] — In order to buy 
 good books and a good horse there ; and to see my good friends.— 
 Is it long since you were there ] — It is nearly two years since I was 
 there. — Do you not go to Vienna this year] — I do not go thither, 
 for it is too far from here to Vienna. — Is it long since you saw 
 your Hamburg friend ! — I saw him but a fortnight ago. — Do youi 
 scholars like to learn by heart ? — They do not like to learn by 
 heart ; they like reading and writing better than learning by heart. — 
 Do you like beer better than cider? — I like cider better than beer. 
 — Does your brother like to play ] — He likes to study better than 
 to play. — Do you like meat better than bread ? — I like the latter 
 better than the former. — Do you like to drink better than to eat ? 
 —I like to eat better than to drink ; but my uncle likes to drink 
 
207 
 
 better than to eat. — Does your brother-in-law like meat better than 
 fish 1 — He likes fish better than meat. — Do you like to write better 
 than to speak] — I like to do both. — Do you like fowl better than 
 fish 1 — Do you like good honey better than sugar 1- — I like neither. 
 
 164. 
 
 Does your father like coffee better than tea 1- — He likes neither. 
 —What do you drink in the morning" 1 — I drink a glass of watei 
 with a little sugar; my father drinks good coffee, my younger bro- 
 ther good tea, and my brother-in-law a glass of good wine. — Can 
 you understand me 1 — No, Sir, for you speak too fast. — Will you 
 be kind enough (fo gut fein) not to speak so fast (fangfcmict $u fptres 
 ct)cn) 1 — I will not speak so fast if you will listen to me. — Can you 
 understand what my brothel tells you 1 — He speaks so fast, that I 
 cannot understand him. — Can your pupils understand joul — They 
 understand me when I speak slowly ; for in order to be understood 
 one must speak slowly. — Why do you not buy anything of that 
 merchant ]— I had a mind to buy several dozen of handkerchiefs, 
 some cravats, and a white hat of him ; but he sells so dear that I 
 cannot buy anything of him. — Will you take me to another? — I 
 will take you to the son of the one whom you bought of last year. 
 —Does he sell as dear as this (one) 1 — He sells cheaper. — Do you 
 like going to the theatre better than going to the concert] — I do 
 like going to the concert as well as going to the theatre ; but I do 
 not like going to the public walk, for there are too many people 
 there. — Do your children like learning Italian better than Spanish ? 
 —They do not like to learn either ; they only like to learn Ger- 
 man. — Do they like to speak better than to write i — Tney like to do 
 neither. — Do you like mutton 1 — I like beef better than mutton. — 
 Do your children like cake better than bread ] — They like both. — 
 Has he read all the books which he bought ? — He bought so many 
 of them, that he cannot read them all. — Do you wish to write some 
 letters I— I have written so many of them, that I cannot write any 
 mo*e. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SEVENTIETH LESSON.— Siebett^igste Action. 
 
 OF REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 When the action falls upon the agent, and the ob- 
 jective case refers to the same person as the nomina- 
 tive, the verb is called reflexive. 
 
 In reflexive verbs the pronoun of the object is of the 
 same person as that of the subject, and stands either 
 in the dative or the accusative, according as the verb 
 
206 
 
 governs the one or the other case. In the third person 
 singular and plural it is always jTd), whether the verb 
 governs the dative or accusative. 
 
 A REFLEXIVE VERB GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 To disguise myself—to disguise STCtdj x>etfteflen — Un$ t>etftelkn. 
 
 ourselves. 
 To disguise thyself— to disguise £)td) DetftcTUn — (Sud) wrftetlcn 
 
 yourselves. 
 
 A REFLEXIVE VERB GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 
 
 To represent to myself— to re- 9#tt ttotftetten — Un$ t)0tfWien 
 
 present to ourselves. 
 To represent to thyself— to re- £)tt ttotfteflen — (Sue!) ttorfteflcrt 
 
 present to yourselves. 
 
 THIRD PERSON FOR ALL GENDERS. 
 
 Singular and Plural Dative and Accusative. 
 
 To disguise one's self— to repre- ©idj MtfUHen — ftd) DCtjMen 
 sent to one's self. 
 
 OCF* The personal pronoun of reflexive verbs is 
 placed after the verb as in English ; and so are all 
 other personal pronouns when they are not in the no- 
 minative. 
 
 Obs. A. There is no real reflexive verb in English, 
 that is to say, such as cannot be used otherwise ; but 
 in German, there are many, as for instance the follow- 
 ing, which govern the accusative : 
 
 To rejoice. <Std) frcuen. 
 
 To be ashamed. ©id) fcfyamen. 
 
 To look back. 0td) umfefyen*. Imperf. faft. 
 
 Do you see yourself ! ©efyen ©U ftd) 1 (<sef)Ct 3(jt (Sudj ?) 
 
 I do see myself. 3d) fefye mid). 
 
 Thou cuttest thyself. 3)u fd)ncit>ejt ©id). 
 
 He cuts himself. (5t fd>ncit>ct ftd). 
 
 I am afraid to go thither. 3d) ftird)te mid) l;tn$ugef)cn* 
 
 They burn themselves. <&\c forennen ftd). 
 
 To flatter. ®, d) m c t d) e ( n (governs the da- 
 
 tive). 
 Dost thou flatter thyself? ©d)mcid)c!ft £>u 3)it? 
 
 I do not flatter myself. 3d) fd)mrid)le nut mdfet 
 
209 
 
 We do not flatter ourselves. SQBtt fd&metdjcln un$ ntd)t 
 He disguises himself. (St wtjMIt fid). 
 
 You represent to yourself. 'Bit ftcflen fid) net. 
 
 To fear some one. Scmcmbcn fitrcbtcn. 
 
 To be afraid of somebody. Sid) ret Scmcmbcm futd>tcn. 
 
 I am not afraid of him. 3d) fttrd)te mid) ntd)t set tftm. 
 
 I do not fear him. 3d) fiitcbte t&n ntd)t. 
 
 Of whom are you afraid ! SSet twm furd)tcn Sic fid) ? 
 
 Whom do you fear ] SBcn ffi'rdjtcn @i« ! 
 
 To enjoy something. _ a^ m 3dtwrtrc ft mit ctWfl| 
 
 To amuse one's self m doing ^ ujjfit*** 
 
 something. J f * ° 
 
 To pass away the time. 3)te 3eit sctttctben*. 
 
 To drive away. SScttmkn*. 
 
 Driven away. £>ctttte6ert. 
 
 Drove away. SScttriefc (Imperf.). 
 
 The pastime, the diversion. £)ct 3citr>etttcib. 
 
 In what do you amuse yourself ] SScmtt Mtttetbcn (Ste fid) Mc 3cit? 
 I amuse myself in reading. 3d) wtttctbe nut tu 3ctt nut Cefen. 
 
 He diverts himself in playing. (5t ocrtrcibt fid) tie 3eit nut ©ptclen. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Each or each 5 Seber, jebe, jebe$. 
 one. J ©n jeber, cine jebe, em jebe£* (3ebermamt.) 
 
 Ota. jB. 3^ber, jebe, jebe£, has no plural, and is de- 
 clined like all, with the characteristic termination of 
 the article (Lesson XLIX.). Preceded by the indefinite 
 article, it is declined like an adjective preceded by this 
 article. 
 
 Every man has his taste. 3ebct Stfenfd) fat fdncn ©efcfymcuf. 
 
 Each of you. (Sin jct>i»r yen (Sud). 
 
 Every body speaks of it. Scfccrmann fpttd)t tasen. 
 
 Each man amuses himself as he ©in jetct Mttteifct fid) t)tc 3cit tt)te 
 
 likes. eS t(jm gcfaUt. 
 
 Each one amuses himself in the (Sin jefcct t>crtrciOt fid) t»ic 3cit fc gut 
 
 best way he can. ct fann. 
 
 The taste, fcet ©cfdjmacf. 
 
 To mistake, to be mistaken. <Sid) ittcn, ft eft t a U f d) e tt« 
 
 Every man is liable to mistake. Sefcet SRcnfd) farm fid) ittcn. 
 You are mistaken. (Sic ittcn fid). 
 
 To soil. 23cfd)mu£cn, fdmuigtg mad^n. 
 
 To deceive. Scttiicjcn* (bctticcjcn*). 
 
210 
 
 Deceived. JBetWjcn (past part,) Imperf. to 
 
 treg. 
 He has cheated me of a hundred (St fyat mid) um f)unt>ett SFjafcv to 
 crowns. ttogcn. 
 
 At (over). lie bet (a preposition governing 
 
 the dative and accusative). 
 
 To rejoice at something. @td) fiber ctwat frcueru 
 
 I rejoice at your happiness. 3d) frcue mid) fiber 3(}C dHiicf; 
 
 At what does your uncle rejoice ! ££ortiber frcut fid) 3()t £)f)etm ? 
 
 To believe* (SHauben. 
 
 This verb requires the person in the dative, and the 
 thing in the accusative. It governs also the accusa- 
 tive with the preposition ait* 
 
 Do you believe *hat man? ©faubcn <Stc fctefcm $flcmne? 
 
 I do not believe him. 3d) Qtaut>c 31) m md)t. 
 Do you believe what I am tell- ©laubcn (£te unt, voa$ id) Sfynen 
 
 ing you 1 fagc ? 
 
 I believe in God. 3d) cjfaubc an ©ott. 
 
 The God, bet ©ctt (plural ©otter) ; 
 
 the story-teller, the liar, t)cr Stumer. 
 
 To utter a falsehood, to lie. Cugcn (part, past gclogen, Imperf. 
 
 (gee £Ae Continuation of this Lesson Page 211.) 
 
 exercises. 165. 
 
 Have you written long or short letters ] — I have written (both) 
 ong and short ones. — Have you many apples ] — I have so many 
 of them that I do not know which I shall (fell) eat. — Do you wish 
 to give anything to these children 1 — They have studied so badly, 
 that I do not wish to give them anything. — What is this man re- 
 joicing at? — He is rejoicing at the luck which has happened to his 
 brother. — What dost thou rejoice at] — I rejoice at the good fortune 
 that has happened to you. — What do your children rejoice at 1 — 
 They rejoice at seeing you. — Do you rejoice at the happiness oi 
 my father] — I do rejoice at it. — What does your uncle say to my 
 happiness ] — He rejoices at it from his heart. — Do you flatter my 
 brother] — I do not flatter him. — Does this master flatter his pu- 
 pils ] — He does not flatter them. — Is he pleased with them 1 — He 
 is much (fcljr) pleased (jufrteben) with them when they learn well ; 
 but he is highly (fef)r) displeased with them when they do not learn 
 well. — Do you flatter me ] — I do not flatter you, for I love you. — 
 Do you see yourself in that small looking-glass? — I do see mysell 
 in it. — Can your friends see themselves in that large looking- 
 glass] — They can see themselves therein. — Why do you not re- 
 main near the fire] — Because I am afraid of burning myself. — 
 
211 
 
 Does this man make his lire ? — He does not maKe it, for he in 
 afraid of burning himself. — Do you fear me 1 — I do not fear you. — 
 Do you fear those ugly men ] — I do not fear them, for they hurt 
 nobody. — Why do those children run away 1 — They run away, be- 
 cause they are afraid of you. — Do you run away before your ene- 
 mies ] — I do not run away before them, for I do not fear them. 
 
 166. 
 
 In what do your children amuse themselves? — They amuse 
 themselves in studying, writing, and playing.— In what do you 
 amuse yourself? — I amuse myself in the best way I can, for I read 
 good books, and I write to my friends. — In what do you amuse 
 yourself when you have nothing to do at home 1 — I go to the play 
 and to the concert, for every one amuses himself in the best way 
 he can. — Everyman has his taste ; what is yours ] — Mine is to 
 study, to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, the 
 ball, and the public walk, and to ride on horseback. — Has that 
 physician done any harm to your child] — He has cut his finger 
 (e£ in ten Stngcr), fjut he has not done him any harm ; so you are 
 mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any harm. — Why do 
 you listen to that man ] — I listen to him, but I do not believe him ; 
 for I know that he is a story-teller. — How do you know that he is 
 a story-teller ] — He does not believe in God ; and all those who 
 do not believe in God are story-tellers. — Why does your cousin 
 not brush his hat 1 — He does not brush it, because he is afraid of 
 soiling his fingers (ficb fcic ginger). — What does my neighbour tell 
 you 1 — He tells me that you wish to buy his horse ; but I know 
 that he is mistaken, for you have no money to buy it. — What do 
 they say at the market] — They say that the enemy is beaten. — Do 
 you believe it ] — I do believe it, because every one says so. — Why 
 have you bought that book ] — I bought it, because I wanted it to 
 learn German ; and because every one spoke of it. (See end of 
 Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 CONTINUATION OF THE SEVENTIETH LESSON. 
 
 iToIge hex siebettjigsien Action. 
 
 When a proposition has no definite subject, the 
 English, in order to avoid the pronouns they, people, 
 &c., use the verb in the passive voice ; and say : / was 
 told, instead of, They told me ; It was given to me, in- 
 stead of, They gave it to me. This is expressed in Ger- 
 man by means of the indefinite pronoun matt, om, as 
 in French by on. Ex. 
 
212 
 
 I a»n told that lie is arrived. 93?an fagt mir, tag er angefommetl 
 
 A. knife was given to him to cut 5Q?cm gab tbm ctn goffer, fctn SSrot 
 his bread, and he cut his $u febneiten, unt ct febnitt fid) in 
 finger. ten $4n|jer« 
 
 PERFECT OF REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 Have you cut yourself] 
 
 I have not cut myself. 
 
 Have those men cut themselves ] 
 
 They have not cut themselves. 
 
 Hast thou hurt thyself] 
 
 I have not hurt myself. 
 
 Who has cut himself] 
 
 I have cut my finger. 
 
 I have rejoiced. 
 I have flattered myself. 
 Thou hast cut thyself. 
 He has flattered himself. 
 We have been afraid. 
 
 You have mistaken. 
 
 To full out* 
 
 He pulls out his hair. 
 
 He has pulled out his hair. 
 
 He has cut his hair. 
 
 I have had my hair cut. 
 
 I have cut my nails. 
 
 The hair, 
 
 To go to bed. 
 
 To get up, to rise. 
 
 Do you rise early ] 
 I rise at sun-rise. 
 
 1 go to bed at sun-set. 
 
 A.t what time did you go tc bed 
 
 At midnight. 
 
 £aben <§u fid> gcfd)iitttcn ? 
 3d) ()abc mid) nicbt gefebnttten. 
 £aben fid) fckfe banner gefebnitten ? 
 (Sic fyaben fid) nicbt gefebnttten. 
 £aft £)u Dtr mil) gctl)an ? 
 3d) t)abc nur ntd)t Vocb getfyan. 
 2£er t)at fid) gefebnttten ? 
 f 3d) babe mid) in ten S* n $ cr 9 e * 
 febnitten. 
 
 f 3d) babe mid) gefrcut (gefreuet) 
 
 3cb babe mir gejcbmctcbclt. 
 
 £>u baft £)icb gefebnttten. 
 
 (5r bat fid) gefcbmetcbelt. 
 
 t SBtt baben un$ gefutcbtet. 
 C f 3br babt (Sud) getrtt, 
 £ f Ste fyaben fid) garrt. 
 
 2C u $ r e i p e n*. 
 
 t (St retpt fid) tie £aare au$. 
 
 t C£r bcit fid) t>ie £aare ausgeriffen. 
 
 t <$t b«t fid) tie £aare abgefefynit* 
 
 ten. 
 t 3d) t)aU mir tie £aate fcfynetten 
 
 (affen. 
 f 3d) b«be mir tie Sftagel abgefefynte 
 
 ten. 
 tag #aat (plur. e). 
 
 C3u Sette geben*. 
 
 < (Scblafen gefyen*. 
 C^tcb iegen. 
 
 2Cuf|te&en*. 
 
 (Steben (Siefrub auf ? 
 3d) ftebe nut (Sonnenaufgang auf. 
 C3d) gebe ffltt (Sennenuntctgang 311 
 
 < mma 
 
 C 3d) lege mid) nut (Sennenuntetgang. 
 ? Urn roefcbe 3eit fint (Stc ju 23ette ge* 
 gangen 1 
 Urn sjtfitternadbt. 
 
213 
 
 At three o'clock in the morning. Urn btet Uf)t SWc^enS. 
 
 He went to bed late. (§r tjt fpat $u 23cttc gc^ongen. 
 
 At what o'clock did you go to Urn rmcmcl Ufjt fint) (Sic gcftcru $8 
 
 bed yesterday ] 33ctte gcgangen ? 
 
 At a quarter past eleven. Urn cm SStertct cmf $»8lf. 
 
 The bed, t>a$ S5ctt (plur. en)* 
 
 The sun-rise $" Ut ©ennenaufgang. 
 l ne sun-rise, | tct Ruffians bcr ©cnnc 
 
 The sun-set 5" tcr ©*nnenwnto9 a «9* 
 L ne sun-set, £ ^ Untcrgftnfl kr @cnnc ^ 
 
 Nothing but. 91 i cf) t 4 a I $. 
 
 lie has nothing but enemies. @t fyat mcfytS a($ $ctnt>e. 
 He drinks nothing but water. (Sr tttnft nid)t5 ali 235affcr. 
 
 exercises. 167. 
 
 Did your father rejoice to see you 1 — He did rejoice *o see me.-* 
 What did you rejoice at] — I rejoiced at seeing my good friends. — 
 What was your uncle delighted with (2Berubet f)at fid) tf)t Dfyeim 
 gcfrcut) ] — He was delighted with (liber) the horse which you 
 brought him from Germany. — What were your children delighted 
 with ] — They were delighted with the fine clothes which I had 
 had made (for) them. — Why does this officer rejoice so much (fo 
 fcfyr) ? — Because he natters himself he has good friends. — Is he not 
 right in rejoicing] — He is wrong, for he has nothing but enemies. 
 — Do you flatter yourself that you know German] — I do flatter 
 myself that I know it; for 1 can speak, read, and write it. — Can 
 you write a German letter without an error (bet $el)(cr) 1 — I can. — 
 Does any one correct your letters ] — No one corrects them ; they dc 
 not require (braucfyen ntd)t) to be corrected, for I make no faults in 
 them. — How many letters have you already written ] — 1 have al- 
 ready written a dozen. — Have yo i hurt yourself] — I have not Lart 
 myself. —Who has hurt himself ] — My brother has hurt himself, 
 for he has cut his finger. — Is he still ill ] — He is better. — I rejoice 
 to hear that he is no longer ill ; for I love him, and I pitied him from 
 my heart. — Why does your cousin pull out his hair]- — Because he 
 eannst pay what he owes. — Have you cut your hair 1 — I have rot 
 cut it (myself), but I have had it cut.- — Why do you pity that 
 child 1 — Because he has cut his foot. — Why was a knife given to 
 him ? — A knife was given to him to cut his nails, and he has cut 
 his finger and his foot. 
 
 168. 
 
 Do you go to bed early ] — I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep if 
 I go to bed early. — At what o'clock did you go to bed yesterday ? — 
 Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven. — At what o'clock 
 do your children go to bed ? — They go to bed at sun-set. — Do they 
 rise early ] — They rise at sun-rise. — At what o'clock did you rise 
 to-day ? — To-day 1 rose late, because I went to bed late yesterday 
 
214 
 
 evening. — Does your son rise late? — He must rise early, for he 
 never goes to bed late. — What does he do when he gets up ] — He 
 studies, and then breakfasts. — Does he not go out before he break- 
 fasts ? — No, he studies and breakfasts before he goes out. — What 
 does he do after breakfast] — As soon as he has breakfasted he 
 comes to my house, and we ride (on horseback) into the forest.-^ 
 Didst thou rise this morning as early as I ] — I rose earlier than 
 you, for I rose before sun-rise. (See end of Lesson XXXIV*) 
 
 SEVENTY.FIRST LESSON.- (gin ttttb ditbtttftpte 
 Cation. 
 
 To take a walk. (Spqtcten gefyen*. 
 
 To take an airing in a carriage, ©pajterert fasten* (Imp. fuf)tj. 
 To take a ride on horseback. (Spc^tetcn tcttcn* (Imp. rttt). 
 
 DC? 3 A. When two or more infinitives, two past 
 participles, or a past participle and an infinitive de- 
 pend upon each other, the last in English is put the 
 first in German. 
 
 Do you wish to take a walk (to SBetTcn (Sic fpa$tcten gefjen ? 
 
 go a walking) 1 
 
 I do wish to take a walk (to go 3$ will fpqteren gefyen 
 
 a walking). 
 
 He wishes to take a walk. (St roitt fpc^ieten gefyen. 
 
 Thou wishest to take an airing. £)u nritlft fpa^teren fasten. 
 
 They wish to take a ride. (Sic rooflcn fpqtercn rcttcn. 
 
 Do you wish to see him work ] SMlen (Sic tfyn atbetten fcfycn ? 
 
 Has your brother been praised 1 3ft 3()t 23tufc>et gelobt tt>ori>en ? 
 
 He takes a walk every day. (St gcfyt a\U Sage fpqteten. 
 
 Do you often walk ? Gkfyen (Ste oft fpqtctcn ? 
 
 I take a walk every morning. 3d) gef)C afle SERorgen fpa$teten 
 
 To take a child a walking. (Sin ^tnb fpc^teten fufjretu 
 
 Do you take your children a gufytcn (Ste 3(jt:e &int>et fpqtetetn 
 
 walking 1 
 I take them a walking every 3d) fft&te fie atte 2(&eno fpa$Uten« 
 
 evening. 
 
 DC/ 3 B. Two infinitives or participles not deper d- 
 ing on each other follow the English construction. 
 
 One must love and praise one's gjton mup fetnett Jteunb (tefcen unfc 
 
 friend. (often. 
 
 Whom nrist we despise and SGBcn muff man ttetacljtcn unt> ftra* 
 
 punish ? fen ? 
 
215 
 
 I take a walk, when I have no- 3d) cjefye fpa^teten, roenn td) $u £oufe 
 thing to do at home. md)t* $u tfjun fyabe. 
 
 Obs. A. The adverb tt>cmtt is used to interrogate 
 with respect to time only. In all other instances the 
 English when is translated by tt>etttu Ex. 
 
 When do you start 1 £Bcmn rctfen <Stc afc ? 
 
 When did he start] SBcmn tft et abgereift? 
 
 To teach. £efjten. 
 
 Ofo. 2?. This verb, when joined to an infinitive, 
 governs the name of the person in the accusative ; 
 and when the thing taught is expressed by a substan- 
 tive, it governs a double accusative, the one of a per- 
 son and the other of a thing. 
 
 He teaches me to read. (St fcfjrt mid) lefen. 
 
 I teach him to write. 3d) tc&re tfjn fd)tet&cn. 
 
 He teaches me arithmetic and (St tefytt nrid) t>a$ 9?cd)ncn tint) 
 
 writing. @d)ret&cn. 
 
 Obs. C. All infinitives taken substantively are of 
 the neuter gender. Any German infinitive may thus 
 be taken substantively, e. g. ba$ Dlecfynett, arithmetic, 
 from recfyttett, to reckon ; bct$ ©cfyreiben, the writing, 
 from fcfyretben*, to write, &c. 
 
 I teach you the German Ian- 3d) (eljre <Bu tie fceutfcfye ®yxas 
 g^age. d)e. a 
 
 run t err id) ten. 
 To instruct. <Untetrtd)t e 1 1 f) e t ( e n (or g c* 
 
 The instruction, the lessons, fc>et Untcrttd)t. 
 
 He P-ives me lessons $ ®* & ht mic U «^«*t- 
 
 tie gives me lessons. j fe g^ ^ umcr ^ 
 
 I give him .essons in German (I 3d) QeOe (or crtfyetle) t()m Untcrrid)t 
 
 teach him German). im £>eutfd)ert. 
 
 I gave lessons in English to his 3d) fyabe fetncn jtinbcrn Itntcrricbt 
 
 children (I taught his children tm (5ttC}Ufd)en CttfteUt. 
 
 English). 
 He takes lessons in dancing. (5t nimmt Uttterridjt tm &an$cn. 
 
 The learned man, bcr d5clcr)rte ; 
 
 • 3)tt ^£tad)e, the l&nguage, is a feminine noun, and has u in the plural. 
 
216 
 
 a learned man, 
 
 the clergyman, 
 a clergyman, 
 
 the German master (meaning 
 the master of the German 
 language), 
 the German master (meaning 
 that the master is a German 
 whatever he teaches), 
 .he dancing master, 
 To dance. 
 To cipher, to reckon. 
 
 !l 
 
 em ©carter (See Obs. 
 LIII.) ; 
 
 ber ©etfhldje; 
 cm ©ctftlidjer ; 
 
 • bet £)cutfd)tcf)rer ; 
 
 t)cr bcutfcfye Center ; 
 
 ber &an$mciftcr. 
 
 Sanjcn. 
 
 $cd)ncn. 
 
 To remember, to recollect. (Bid) c r i n n e r n. 
 
 Obs. D. This verb governs either the genitive alone 
 or, less elegantly, the accusative with the preposition 
 am 
 
 Do you remember that man ] 
 I do remember him. 
 
 Does ho recollect his promise] 
 
 He does recollect it. 
 
 Does he recollect it 1 
 
 I remember you. 
 
 I recollect them. 
 
 He remembers me. 
 
 He recollects us. 
 
 I have remembered him. 
 
 (Srtnnern Sic fid) btcfcS $ftanne$ ? 
 3d) crtnncrc mtd) fritter. 
 
 {(Srinncrt cr fid) fetneS $3crfpre 
 d)en$ ? 
 (Srtnncrt cr fid) an fcin SScrfprc* 
 d)en ? 
 
 S (S*r crtnnert fid) beffen. 
 I (Sr ertnncrt fid) batan. 
 $ ©rtnnert cr fid) beffen? 
 \ (Srtnncrt cr ftd6 baran ? 
 
 3d) crtnncrc mid) Sfytcv. 
 
 3d) crtnncrc mid) tfyrer. 
 
 (£r crtnnert fid) metner. 
 
 (Sr crtnnert fid) unfer. 
 
 3d) fyafcc mid) fetner crtnnert. 
 
 EXERCISES. 169. 
 
 Do you call me 1 — I do call you. — What is your pleasure ? — Yc>«» 
 must rise, for it is already late. — What do you want me for? — 1 
 have lost all my money at play, and I come to beg you to lend me 
 some. — What o'clock is it] — It is already a quarter past six, and 
 you have slept long enough. — Is it long since you rose 1 — It is an 
 hour and a half since I rose. — Do you often go a walking] — I go 
 a walking when I have nothing to do at home. — Do you wish to 
 take a walk ] — I cannot take a walk, for I have too much to do. — 
 Has your brother taken a ride on horseback 1 — He has taken an 
 airing in a carriage. — Do your children often go a walking ? — They 
 go a walking every morning after breakfast. — Do you take a walk 
 
217 
 
 after dinner 1 — After dinner I drink tea and then I take a walk,-- « 
 Do you often take your children a walking ] — I take them a walking 
 every morning and every evening. — Can you go along with me 1 — 
 I cannot go along with you, for I must take my little brother out a 
 walking. — Where do you walk 1 — We walk in our uncle's garden 
 and fields. — Do you like walking 1 — I like walking better than eat- 
 ing and drinking. — Does your father like to take a ride on horse- 
 back ] — He likes to take a ride in a carriage better than on horse- 
 back. — Must one love children who are not good ] — One ought, on 
 the contrary, to punish and despise them. — Who has taught you to 
 read ] — I have learnt it with (bet) a French master. — Has he also 
 taught you to write 1 — He has taught me to read and to write. — 
 W T ho has taught your brother arithmetic 1 — A German master has 
 taught it him. — Do you wish to take a walk with us] — 1 cannot go 
 a walking, for I am waiting for my German master. — Does your 
 brother wish to take a walk 1 — He cannot, for he is taking lessons 
 in dancing. 
 
 170. 
 Have you an English master ? — We have one. — Does he also 
 give you lessons in Italian] — He does not know Italian ; but we 
 have an Italian and Spanish master. — What has become of youi 
 old writing master ] — He has taken orders (has become a clergy- 
 man). — W T hat has become of the learned man whom I saw at your 
 house last winter ? — He has set up for a merchant. — And what has 
 become of his son? — He has turned a soldier. — Do you still recol- 
 lect my old dancing master ? — I do still recollect him ; what has 
 become of him ] — He is here, and you can see him, if you like 
 (rooflcn). — Hast thou a German master ? — I have a very good (one), 
 for it is my father, who gives me lessons in German and in Eng- 
 lish. — Does your father also know Polish ] — He does not know it 
 yet, but he intends to learn it this summer. — Do you remember 
 your promise 1 — I do remember it. — What did you promise me ? — 
 I promised to give you lessons in German ; and I will doit. — Wil 
 you begm this morning 1 ? — I will begin this evening, if you please 
 (roenn c$ 3&nen gefcttltg ift). — Do you recollect the man whose son 
 taught us dancing 1 — I no longer recollect him. — Do you still recol- 
 lect my brothers? — I do recollect them very well, for when I was 
 studying at Berlin, I saw them every day. — Does your uncle still 
 recollect me? — I assure you that he still recollects you. — Do you 
 speak German better than my cousin ] — I do not speak it as well as 
 he, for he speaks it better than many Germans. — Which of your 
 pupils speaks it the best ] — The one that was walking with me yes- 
 terday speaks it the best of them all. — Is your uncle's house as high 
 as ours ? — Yours is higher than my uncle's, but my cousin's is the 
 highest house that I have ever seen. — Has your friend as many books 
 as I ? — You have more of them than he ; but my brother has more 
 of them than (both) you and he. — Which of us (SBet son un$) has 
 the most money ] — You have the most, for I have but thirty crowns, 
 my friend has but ten, and you have five hundred. (See end erf 
 Lesson XXXIV.) 
 10 
 
218 
 
 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON.— Zmi m\b Bitbmfytlt 
 
 jUrtion. 
 
 To make use of to use. <S i d> b e b t e n e n (governs the 
 
 genitive). 
 
 Do you use my horse ? Skbicncn <Sie fid) meincS $)ferbe$? 
 
 I do use it. 3d) bcbienc mid) beffetbcn. 
 
 Does your father use it ? 23ebtent fid) 3f)t s £ater t>effctOen ? 
 
 He does use it. (St bcbicnt fid) beffetbcn. 
 
 Have you used my carriage ? £aben (Sic fid) metnes £Bacjeng be* 
 
 bicnt ? 
 I have used it. 3d) f)abe mid) beffetbcn bebtcnt. 
 
 Do you use my books'? SBebienen (Sic fid) mcincr 93iid)er? 
 
 I do use them. 3d) bcbiene mid) berfelben. 
 
 May I use your book ? Jtcmn id) mid) SfyreS 93ud)eg bcbie* 
 
 nen? 
 Thou mayest use it. 2)u fannft Did) beffetbcn bebienen. 
 
 To approach, to draw near. (Sid) nafjcm (governs the dative). 
 
 To withdraw from, to go away (Sid) erttfetnen (governs the dative 
 
 from. with the preposition son). 
 
 Do you approach the fire ? Stfafyern (Sic fid) bem $cucr V 
 
 I do approach it. 3d) nafjere mid) bcmfclbcn. 
 
 t go away from the fire. 3d) cntfcrne mid) t>om ??cuer. 
 
 I go away from it. 3d) cntfcrne mid) ba»on. 
 
 What do you recollect? SBoran crinncrn ©te fid) ? 
 
 I recollect nothing. 3d) crinnere mid) an md)tg. 
 
 What are you withdrawing from? 3Bot)on entfernen <Sie fid)? 
 Are you cold % t 3ft c6 3 f) n e n fait ? 
 
 I am very cold. t ©$ ift m i r feljr fatt. 
 
 I am not cold. f <5g ift m t r nid)t fatt 
 
 Art thou cold ? f 3ft eg 3D i r fait ? 
 
 Is he warm 1 t 3ft eg tljm warm ? 
 
 Are they warm or cold 1 t 3ft eg tljnen warm obcr fait? 
 
 They are neither warm nor cold, f @£ ift ifyncn weber warm ncdj 
 
 Mt. 
 Who is cold ? t SQBem ift eg fait ? 
 
 My feet are cold. f (5g ift nut -cm ben gupen fatt. 
 
 His hands are cold. f (§g ijt tfjm an ben £anben fatt. 
 
 Why does that man go away from SBarum entfernt fid) btcfer 9J2ann t>on 
 
 the fire 1 bm\ $euer ? 
 
 He goes away from it, because (£r entfernt fid) ba»on, wett eg ibm 
 
 he is not cold. nid)t fatt ift. 
 
 To freeze— frozen. f S? t i e t e n — g e f t o t e n. 
 
 Froze. § r o r (imperfect). 
 
 06s. The impersonal verb fnetett, to freeze, governs 
 
219 
 
 the accusative, and may also be used for the English 
 verb to be cold, as : 
 
 I am very cold. f (S$ frtctt mid) fel(jr. 
 
 I am not cold. \ (5s fricrt mid) ntd)t. 
 
 Who is cold 1 t ^n fricrt e$ ? 
 
 My feet are cold. } ^ r fttcten t>te giipe. 
 
 His hands are cold. t 3^ m f^icren t>te £cink\ 
 
 For what ? whereto ? for what £B j U ? 
 purpose 1 
 
 What do you want money for ? £Be$u fcrciud)en ©te (Mb ? 
 
 1 want some to buy a carriage 3d) btaudx roelcfyeS, urn cinen 2Ba* 
 
 with. gen $u faufen. 
 
 What does this horse serve you £Bo$u blent Sfynen fctcfeS Spfetb ? 
 
 for] 
 [t serves me to ride out upon. (£$ b'tem mir cm^utetten or $um 2(u$* 
 
 reiten. 
 To ride out. 2Cu$teiten*. 
 
 To go out in a carriage. 2(u£faf)cen*. 
 
 EXERCISES. 171. 
 
 Which is the nearest way to go to your uncle's castle ? — This 
 way is shorter than the one we took yesterday ; but my father 
 knows one which is the nearest of all. — Do you use my carriage ] 
 — I do use it. — Has your father used my horse ] — He has used it. 
 — What does this horse serve you for 1 — It serves me to ride out 
 upon. — Do you use the books which I lent you ] — I do use them. — 
 May I (jtonn id)) use your knife ] — Thou mayest use it, but thou 
 must not cut thyself. — May my brothers use your books'? — They 
 may use them, but they must not tear them. — May we use your 
 stone table ? — You may use it, but you must not spoil it. — What 
 has my wood served you for 1 — It has served me to warm myself 
 with. — For what purpose do your brothers want money 1 — They 
 want some to live upon. — What does this knife serve us for? — It 
 serves us to cut our bread, our meat, and our cheese with. — Is it 
 cold to day 1 — It is very cold. — Will you draw near the fire ] — I 
 cannot draw near it, for I am afraid of burning myself. — Why does 
 your friend go away from the fire 1 — He goes away from it, because 
 he is afraid of burning himself. — Art thou coming near the fire ] — 
 I am coming near it, because I am very cold. — Are thy hands cold ] 
 — My hands are not cold, but my feet are. — Do you go away from 
 the fire 1 — I do go away from it. — Why do you go away from it 1 ? — 
 Because I am not cold. — Are you cold or warm ] — I am neither cold 
 nor warm. 
 
 172. 
 
 Why do your children approach the fire ? — They approach it, be- 
 cause they are cold. — Is any body cold 1 — Somebody is cold. — Who 
 
220 
 
 is cold ] — The little boy, whose father has lent you a horse, is cold, 
 — Why does he not warm himself] — Because his father has no 
 money to buy wood. — Will you tell him to come to me to warm 
 himself] — I will tell him so. — Do you remember anything ] — I re- 
 member nothing*. — What does your uncle recollect] — He recollects 
 your promise. — What have I promised him ? — You have promised 
 him to go to Germany with him next winter. — I intend to do so if 
 it is not too cold. — Are your hands often cold ] — My hands are 
 scarcely ever cold, but my feet are often so. — Why do you with- 
 draw from the fire ] — I have been sitting near the fire this hour and 
 a half, so that I am no longer cold. — Does your friend not like to 
 sit near the fire ] — He likes, on the contrary, much (fefyr) to sit neai 
 the fire, but only when he is cold. — May one approach your uncle ] 
 — One may approach him, for he receives every body. (See end 
 of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. -JUm mtfr Bkbm^BU 
 
 Section. 
 
 To shave $ ttafiten (verb active). 
 
 { (Sid) rajiren (verb reflexive). 
 
 To get shaved. (Std) taftren laflen*. 
 
 To dress, to put on clothes. 2Cn$tcf)en*. 
 
 To dress. 2lnftctt>en. 
 
 To undress, to put off clothes. 2Cu6£tef)cn*. 
 To undress. UutfUtim. 
 
 Obs. A. gfttjtefyett* expresses either to dress or to put 
 en clothes, but anfteiben can only be used to express the 
 English to dress. The same may be said with regard to 
 aug jtefyett* and cwgfieiben. 
 
 Have you dressed yourself] Jpcibm <Ste fi'cJ) cmcjeHctbct ? 
 
 I have not yet dressed myself. 3d) t)abe nud) nod) ntcfyt angefteitct. 
 
 Have you dressed the child] £a6cn (Ste fcas Jttnb ancjesocjm ? 
 
 I have dressed it. 3d) Fja&e c$ angc^ocjen. 
 
 He has put on his coat. (Sr fyat feincn $ec£ an$e$ogen. 
 
 He has taken off his shoes. (St r)ctt feme @cf)ul)e au$gc$ogcn. 
 
 To wake. SGBccfen, emfrwefen. 
 
 To awake. (Srwacfyen, aufrcactjeru 
 
 Obs. B. 2Berfen and cwftoetfett are active verbs, but 
 erwadjen and cwfwacfyen are neuter, and take the verb 
 fetn* for their auxiliary. Sffietfen signifies to wake in- 
 tentionally, cmftoecfen unintentionally : Ex. SDBotfen ©if 
 
221 
 
 mid) um gn>et Ufyr tt>ecfen ? Will you wake me at two 
 o'clock? 9D?adf)ett ©te femen Sdrm, bamtt ©te if)tt md)t 
 ailftDecfett, do not make any noise, that you may not 
 wake him. &tvad)cn means to awake at once or by ac- 
 cident. Ex. 3d) ern>act)te auf eutntal an$ memem granme, 
 I at once awoke from my dream. StufrDCtcfyett, means to 
 awake regularly without any accident. Ex. £>e$ QRor* 
 gen£ aufwacfyert, to awake in the morning. 
 
 To come down ( S)evah, fyutab ) ftetgen*, gefyen*, 
 (See Less. L.) ( Remitter, fyimmter 5 retten*, fasten*, jc. 
 
 To go down into the well. 3n ben SBrunnen fytnunter fretgen*. 
 
 To come down the hill. 55cm S3etge beraO ftctgcn*. 
 
 To go down the river. 3)en ©ttcm rjtnaO fasten*. 
 
 To alight from one's horse, to 25 cm ^fcrbe fteicjen*. 
 dismount. 
 
 To alight, to get out. {SS^^. 
 
 To mount — to ascend. © t c i 3 c n (part, past cjefttegen. 
 
 Imperf. fttco,). 
 
 To mount the horse. 2Cuf$ (auf t)Q^) tyfttb ftctcjen*. 
 
 To get into the coach. 3n ten SBagen jtetgen*. 
 
 To go on board a ship. 3n em (Scfyiff ftetgen*. 
 
 The dream, the beard, bet Sraum ; ber 23ort ; 
 
 the stream (the river), ber (Sttcm. 
 
 Where is your brother 1 ££c tft Sfjt 93rubet ? 
 
 He is in the garret. <Sr ijt auf tern 33oben. 
 
 Will you desire him to ccme SGBcllen @ic tf)n bitten r)cra& (Reruns 
 
 down 1 ter) $u femmen ? 
 
 The garret (the loft) under the £)et S3obcn untet bem £)aclje etnc$ 
 
 roof of a house. ^oufe€. 
 
 To come down. #era& (or fjeruntet) femmen. 
 
 To behave, to conduct one s $ 'Bid) aufftirjtcn. 
 
 self. I <&xti) ftetraa/n* (Imperf. ktrug). 
 
 I behave well. 3d) ftiftte nucf) % qut auf. 
 
 How does he behave 1 £Bte fuf)rt er ficr; auf ? 
 
 Towards. (55 c Cj e n (a preposition governing 
 
 the accusative). 
 
 He behaves ill towards this man. (Sr bctragt fid) fd)tecl)t ge^en ttefen 
 
 9#ann. 
 He has behaved ill towards me. (5r rjat fid) viM a/cjen mid) kttacjen. 
 
222 
 
 To be worth while. 2)et 9#u()e a roettf) ettt* 
 
 fs it worth while 1 3(1 e6 bet 5DZuf)e roettfj ? 
 
 It is worth while. (§6 tft fcer ^(ir)e n?ertr). 
 
 It is not worth while. (Ss tft ntd)t feet SfMfye rcettf). 
 
 Is it worth while to do that? 3ft es t>et 9Mf)e roettf), t>tefe$ gi 
 
 tfum? 
 
 Is it worth while to write to 3ft e£ t>cr 9)?ufje roertf), an tf)tt $tt 
 
 him ] fct)teit)cn ? 
 
 Is it better ! 3ft e$ kfiet ? 
 
 It is better. @s tft beffet. 
 
 ft is better to do this than that, (gg tft t>cffer, t>tefe$ ati ierteS $U 
 
 tf)un. 
 It is better to stay here than to (S$ tft beffet, f)tet $u bU\bm, ctt$ fpa* 
 go a walking. gieren $u cjefyen. 
 
 exercises. 173. 
 
 Have you shaved to-day ? — I have shaved. — Has your brother 
 shaved! — He has not shaved himself, bat has got shaved. — Do 
 you shave often 1 — I shave every morning, and sometimes also in 
 the evening. — When do you shave in the evening 1 — When I do 
 not dine at home. — How many times a day does your father 
 shave 1 — He shaves only once a day, but my brother has such a 
 strong beard, that he is obliged to shave twice a day. — Does your 
 uncle shave often ] — He shaves only every other day (etrten &cig um 
 t>cn anbcrn), for his beard is not strong. — At what o'clock do you 
 dress in the morning ] — I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and 
 I breakfast every day at eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight. — 
 Does your neighbour dress before he breakfasts ] — He breakfasts 
 before he dresses. — At what o'clock in the evening dost thou un- 
 dress] — I undress as soon as I return from (aue) the theatre. — 
 Dost thou go to the theatre every evening 1 — I do not go every eve- 
 ning, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. — At what 
 o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre I— 
 I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten 
 o'clock. — Have you already dressed the child 1 — I have not dressed 
 it yet, for it is still asleep (fcfyfaft nocb). — At what o'clock does it 
 get up 1 — I gets up as soon as it is waked. 
 
 174. 
 
 Do you rise as early as 1 1 — I do not know at what o'clock you 
 rise, but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my servant to 
 wake me to-morrow at four o'clock 1 — I will tell him. — Why have 
 you risen so early] — My children have made such a noise that 
 they wakened me. — Have ycu slept well ? — I have not slept well, 
 for you made too much noise. — At what o'clock must I wake you? 
 
 * 3)ie Sftitfje, is a feminine suostantive, and takes tt in the plural. 
 
223 
 
 — To-moirow thou mayest wake me at six o'clock. — At wha* 
 o'clock did the good captain awake 1 — He awoke at a quarter past 
 five in the morning. — When did this man go down into the well 1 
 — He went down into it this morning. — Has he come up again 
 yet (wtct)cr (jerciuf gcfttcgen) ? — He came up an hour ago. — Where 
 is your brother 1 — He is in his room. — Will you tell him to come 
 down ] — I will tell him so ; but he is not dressed yet. — Is your 
 friend still on the mountain? — He has already come down. — Did 
 you go down or up this river] — W^e went down it. — Has your 
 brother dined already ? — He dined as soon as he had alighted from 
 his horse. — Is your uncle already asleep (fcf)(afen*) 1 — I believe 
 that he is asleep, for he went to bed as soon as he had alighted. — 
 Did my cousin speak to you before he started ] — He spoke to me 
 before he got into the coach. — Have you seen my brother? — I saw 
 him before I went on board the ship. 
 
 175. 
 
 How did my child behave 1 — He did behave very well. — How 
 did my brother behave towards you 1 — He behaved very well to- 
 wards me, for he behaves well towards every body. — Is it worth 
 while to write to that man ] — It is not worth while to write to him. 
 ■ — Is it worth while to alight in order to buy a cake 1 — It is not 
 worth while, for it is not long since we ate. — Is it worth while to 
 dismount from my horse in order to give something to that pcor 
 man 1 — Yes, for he seems to want it ; but you can (formcn) give 
 him something without dismounting from your horse. — Is it better 
 to go to the theatre than to study] — It is better to do the latter 
 than the former. — Is it better to learn to read German than to speak 
 it 1 — It is not worth while to learn to read it without learning to 
 speak it, — Is it better to go to bed than to go a walking ? — It is 
 better to do the latter than the former. — Is it better to get into a 
 coach than to go on board the ship ? — It is not worth while to get 
 into a 3oach or to go on board the ship when one has no wish to 
 travel (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON.— hut mtir xicbtttjiQZt* 
 
 tttiion. 
 
 To hire, to rent. 9% i e t fj e tu 
 
 To hire a room. (Sin Simmer mtctfjen. 
 Have you hired a room 1 &abm <Ste etn 3tmmet gemtetr)et ? 
 
 I have hired one. 3d) fjate cirtS gemtetfyet. 
 
 To lei aSermtetfjctu 
 
 He has a room to let. (St r;at ctn Simmer $u ttetmtetfyen. 
 
 To part with something. (StoaS aftfefyaffen. 
 
224 
 
 Do you intend to part with your ©tnb ©ie gcfonnen 7 3f)te 9)fett)e a & 
 
 horses ? gufcbaffcn ? 
 
 I have already parted with them. 3d) babe ftc feben abgcfd>afft. 
 He has parted with his carriage, (St bat fetnen 5Bagen abgefebafft. 
 Have you parted with (dis- £ciben @>W 3t)ren 23ebtenten cibqe* 
 
 charged) your servant 1 fd)afft ? 
 
 I have parted with (discharged) 3d) fyabe i&n abgefefyafft. 
 
 him. 
 To get rid of something. 7 f g , > # 
 
 To rid ones self of something. 3 ' 
 Did you get rid of your damaged f (Stnb @ie Sfyrcn ttctborbenen 3uj 
 
 sugar ? cfer log gerootben ? 
 
 I did get rid of it. t 3d) bin tfyn leg geroorben. 
 
 Did he get rid of his old horse ! f 3ft cr fein cites $fcrb log geivon 
 
 ben? 
 He did get rid of it. f <5r ift eg log gerootben. 
 
 To hope, to expect. *£) f f e n. 
 
 Do you expect to find him there 1 £offen (Sic i()ii la $u finben ? 
 I do ~xpect it. 3d) fyoffe eg. 
 
 Hope and expectation make £offen unb barren macfyt 9Eand)cn 
 many a dupe. gum barren. (See Lesson XL. 
 
 Obs. B.) 
 To wait, to tarry. £arten. 
 
 To change. % a u f d) c ru 
 
 To ea*^ to *«*. { J ^ ^"f ^ 
 
 To change one thing for another. (Stuxig gegen etwat ttertewfefyen 01 
 
 umtaufeben. 
 I change my hat for his. 3d) taufd)c metnen £ut gegen ber 
 
 feintgen um. 
 
 To put on one's hat. 2>en £ut auffegen. 
 
 To put on linen. SBa'fdbV antegen. 
 
 To p n on a cravat. ©in £a(gtud) umbtnben*. Part, 
 
 past, gebunben. Imperf. banb. 
 
 Do 12 jSSeThatl }**■ * *« «"*» M«*' 
 
 JdoStTotron. }s*fe|eei„enanter„aui 
 
 He puts on other (shifts his) (St tegt ($tefit) anbete 2£afd)e an. 
 
 linen. 
 
 He changes his linen. (5t roeebfett feme SBSfdjc. 
 
 I put on another cravat. 3d) btnbe etn anbereg ^algtuc^ um. 
 
 I change my cravat. 3d) tt>ed)gle bat £algtud). 
 
 a 2)ie SBctfcfye, the linen, is a feminine collective noun and has consequent 
 ly no plural. 
 
To put on other clothes. 
 He puts on other clothes. 
 He puts on another shirt. 
 To change the horse. 
 
 225 
 
 { (Sid) umfleibett. 
 
 \ ©te JUeibct rocd)fcln. 
 
 ' (Sr fteibct fid) urn. 
 
 1 <5t tt>cd)fc(t fctnc &fciber. 
 
 i @t jiefjt em anbcrcS £cmb am 
 
 i (St wcdbfclt fein #cmb. 
 
 < @tn anbercs §)fetb ncfymcn*. 
 
 { 2)a$ spfetb n>ed)fc(n. 
 
 To exchange. SB e d) f c I n. 
 
 To take fresh horses. £)ic ^fcrbc tt>cd)fehn 
 
 To exchange a piece of money. (Sin Stiicf ®ctt> roecfyfefn. 
 
 To correspond with some one. SBrtcfc nut 3emanbem roedbfefa. 
 
 Do you correspond with your 2Ced)fc(n <£ic S3riefe nutSfyrem 93aa 
 
 father? tcr ? 
 
 f do correspond with him. 3d) rc>cd)6(c SSrtefe mit tfym. 
 
 To mix. 
 Amongst. 
 
 I mix among the people. 
 
 He mixes amongr the soldiers. 
 
 @ i d) m i d) c n. 
 
 XX n t c r (a preposition governing 
 the dative and accusative). 
 
 3d) mtfd)C mid) untcr tie Seutc. 
 (Sc mifct)t fid) untcr tic (Selbatcn. 
 
 rSQSicbcr erf enn en*. 
 To recognise or to acknowledge* ^(Srfcnncn*. 
 
 C Imperf. erfanntc. 
 
 Do you recognise this man ] (Srfcnncn (Sic bicfen 90?cmn ? 
 [t is so long since I saw him, 3d) fjcibe ifjn fcl)on fo tcuicjc ntd)t ge* 
 tint I do not recollect him. fefyen, l>ci$ id) tr)n md)t roieberers 
 
 fennc. 
 
 EXERCISES. 176. 
 
 Have you already hired a room ] — I have already hired one.— 
 Where have you hired it] — I have hired it in William Street, 
 number (one) hundred and fifty one. — At whose house (*8ct rocm) 
 have you hired it 1 — At the house of the man whose son has sold 
 you a horse.— -For whom has your father hired a room 1 — He has 
 hired one for his son who has just arrived from Germany. — Did 
 you at last get rid of that man 1 — I did get rid of him. — Why has 
 your father parted with his horses ] — Because he did not want 
 them any more. — Have you discharged your servant 1 — I have dis- 
 charged him, because he served me no more well. — W T hy have you 
 parted with your carriage] — Because I do not travel any more. — 
 Has your merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged 
 sugar ] — He has succeeded in getting rid of it. — Has he sold it on 
 credit? — He was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it 
 on credit. — Do you hope to arrive early in Paris ? — I hope to ar- 
 rive there at a quarter past eight, for my father is waiting for me 
 this evening. — For what have you exchanged your carriage which 
 10* 
 
226 
 
 von no bnger made use of? — I have exchanged it for a fine Ara 
 bian noise. — Do you wish to exchange your book for mine 1—1 
 cannot, for I want it to study German with. — Why do you take 
 your hat off? — I take it off, because I see my old writing-mastel 
 coming. — Do you put on another hat to go to the market 1 — I do 
 not put on another to go to the market, but to go to the great con* 
 cert. 
 
 177. 
 
 Why does your father put on other clothes 1 — He is going to the 
 king, so that he must put on others.— -Have you put on another hat 
 to go to the English captain 1— I have put on another, but I have 
 not put on another coat or other boots. — How many times a day 
 dost thou put on other clothes ? — I put on others to dine and to go 
 to the theatre. — Do you often put on a clean shirt (cin roeifieS #emb) ? 
 —I put on a clean one every morning. — W T hen does your father put 
 on a clean shirt ?— . He puts it on when he goes to the ball. — Does 
 he put on a clean cravat (cin roet|5e$ #a(6tud)) as often as you? — He 
 puts one on oftener than I, for he does so six times a day. — Did 
 you often take fresh horses when you went to Vienna l — I took 
 fresh ones every three hours. — Will you change me this gold coin 
 (ba$ (Mbftiicf) 1 — I am going to (mill) change it for you ; what money 
 do you wish to have for it (bafitt) ? — I wish to have crowns, florins, 
 and kreuzers. — Do you correspond with my friend 1 — I do corres- 
 pond with him. — -How long have you been corresponding with my 
 brother ?~I have been corresponding with him these six years al- 
 most. — Why do you mix among those people?-—! mix among 
 them in order to know what they say of me. — Have you recognised 
 your father ? — I had not seen him for such a long time, that I did 
 not recognise him (3d) fyatte tf)n fo (angc ntcfyt gcfcfyen, bagid) tr)n ntd)t 
 rotcbet crfrmnte). — Do you still speak German? — It is so long since 
 I spoke it, that I have nearly forgotten it all. — Amongst you (Untet 
 (Sud)) country people there are many fools, are there not (tud)t roafyt) ? 
 asked a philosopher lately (neultd)) of a peasant (ctncn S3ciuetn). 
 The latter (£)tefet) answered him : " Sir, one finds some in all sta- 
 tions (bet ^tcmb)." " Fools sometimes tell the truth (bte SSafa 
 f)dt)," said the philosopher. (See end of Lesson XXXI V.) 
 
 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON.— Mini amir siebttqigftte 
 
 To find one's self (to be, to do). @tdjt>efint>cn*. Imperf. fanb. 
 
 How do you do ? t $&* kftnben (Sic fid) ? 
 
 I am very well. j 3d) tofinbe mtcl) fefjr tt>oF)(. 
 
 How is your father? £Bie kftnbct fid) 3^ £ert SSatet? 
 
227 
 
 Obs. In the German the words ^err, sir, $va\t> ma« 
 dam, &c. must be preceded by the possessive pronoun. 
 
 He is ill. f <£r befmbet fid) ftbef. 
 
 Your brother. f 3 5 r £ e r r 23ruber. 
 
 Your cousin. f 3 1) r |)err better. 
 
 Your brothers. f 3 5 re £ err en 23riiber. 
 
 To stay, to sojourn. @id) auf flatten*. Imperf. l)te(t. a 
 Have you stayed long at Vien- £aben Bit fid) tange in SQBtett aufges 
 
 na? fatten? 
 
 I have stayed there only three 3d) fyafce mid) nut btei Sage t>a auf* 
 
 days. gefyattcn. 
 
 Where does your brother stay at £Bo fja'tt fid) Sljt #crr *8rubet ges 
 
 present ? genroattig auf ? 
 
 At present. ©egcnroattig. 
 
 To mock at, to criticise some one (Sid) fiber 3emanben ot)er etwaS auf* 
 
 or something. fyaften*. 
 
 To laugh at some one. ©id) ubet Semanben Utjtig madjen. 
 
 He criticises every body. (St t)dtt fid) uber Sebermann auf. 
 
 To earn, to get* £S e r b i e tt e n. 
 
 To ^w. ©eminnen*. Part, past, g e * 
 
 rccnncn. Imperf. geroann. 
 
 To get one's bread. @etn 95reb Dcrbtcnen or erroerben*. 
 
 Part, past, erwerbcn. Imperf. 
 emxitb. 
 
 To get one's livelihood by. & t d) e r n a f) r e tt mi t. 
 
 He gets his livelihood by work- (St ernafjrt fid) mit 2Crbeiten. 
 
 ing. 
 I get my livelihood by writing. 3d) emafyrc mid) mit <Sd)reibetn 
 I gain my money by working. 3d) ttetbiene mcin ®e(b mit 2Crbeiten. 
 By what does this man get his SOBomtt crnafyrt fid) biefer SRatm? 
 
 livelihood ? 
 
 To spill. SSergiegen*, Part, past, oet* 
 
 g off en. Imperf. &ergof. 
 
 He has spilt the wine over the (Sr fjat ben ££ein auf ten SSifdr) tter* 
 table. goffen (action). 
 
 a Compouna verbs are conjugated exactly like simple verbs. We shall 
 therefore merely note the irregularities of the latter, and leave it tc the learner 
 himself to add the separable or inseparab*e particles. Thus fatlb is the im- 
 perfect of fmben*, to find (See Lessons XXXV. and XLIL), and befdttb that 
 of beftnben*. The participle past of futben is gefunben, and that of beftttben*, 
 befuttben, the syllable ge being omitted on account of the inseparable particle 
 (See Lesson XLV). iptclt is the imperfect of the verb fjaltcn*, to hold (Les- 
 son LIIL), and btelt auf that of auf batten*. The past participle of fallen ii 
 flebalten, and that of auf fallen* aufgeljaften. 
 
228 
 
 To stana, 
 The wine is on the table. 
 
 Has your father already 
 
 parted 1 
 He is ready to depart. 
 Ready. 
 To make ready. 
 To make one's self ready. 
 To keep one's self ready. 
 
 To split (to pierce)* 
 
 To break somebody's heart. 
 You break this man's heart. 
 
 To hang. 
 
 To be hanging. 
 
 <S t e ty c n *. Part, past, gejtanbert 
 Imperf. ftanb. 
 
 £>ct SSein ftetyt auf bem &ifd>< 
 (rest). 
 
 de- 3ft 3&r £crr SBatcr fcr)0tt abgercipi ? 
 
 (St tft bereft, nfyuteifen. 
 
 SBereit. 
 
 SBeteiten. 
 
 (Sicty berctt mactyen. 
 
 ©id) bcreit fatten*. 
 
 Serfpalten (butcty&otyten). 
 
 Semanbem bag $cr$ butctyfcotyren. 
 @ie burctyfcotyten biefem Sftanne bag 
 *«* 
 
 £ a n g c n (verb active, regular) 
 *|p a n g e n * (a neuter irregulai 
 
 verb). Part, past, getyangen. 
 
 Imperf. tying. 
 
 Was my hat hanging on the nail 1 
 
 It was hanging on it. 
 
 I hang it on the nail. 
 
 The thief has been hanged. 
 
 Who has hung the basket on the 
 
 tree? 
 
 The thief, 
 
 the robber, the highwayman, 
 The patient (the sick person), 
 
 Tolerably well. 
 It is rather late. 
 ft is rather far. 
 
 £tng mcin £ut an bem Sftaget ? 
 
 @r tying baran. 
 
 3cty tyd'ngc ityn an ben Stfagef. 
 
 £)et Die& tfi gctyangt rootben. 
 
 SGScr tyat ben jtotb an ben 25aum ge* 
 
 tyangt ? 
 ber £)tc& ; 
 ber Member, 
 ber patient. (See Note, Lesson 
 
 LIV.) 
 3temUcty, fo $temlid). 
 <&$ ift $iemtid) fpat. 
 <S$ ijt jiemltd) roett. 
 
 exercise 178. 
 
 How is your father ! — He is (only) so so. — How is your patient? 
 — He is a little better to-day than yesterday. — Is it long since you 
 saw your brothers 1 — I saw them two days ago. — How were they ? 
 —They were very well. — How art thou? — 1 am tolerably well 
 (nicbt iibel). — How long has your brother been learning German 1 
 —He has been learning it only three months. — Does he already 
 speak it? — He already speaks, reads, and writes it better than youi 
 cousin who has been learning it these five years. — Is it long since 
 you heard of my uncle*? — It is hardly three months since 1 heard 
 of him. — Where was he staying then 1 — He was staying at 'Berlin* 
 but now he is in London. — Do you like t(> speak to my uncle 1— 
 
229 
 
 1 do like very much (fefjt) to speak to him, but I do not like (tcf) Ijafcc 
 nid)t gern) him to laugh at me. — Why does he laugh at you 1 — H6 
 laughs at me, because I speak badly. — Why has your brother nc 
 frierrds 1 — He has none, because he criticises every body. — What 
 do you get your livelihood by] — I get my livelihood by working. 
 — Does your friend get his livelihood by writing] — He gets it by 
 speaking and writing. — Do these gentlemen get their livelihood by 
 working ] — They do not get it by doing any thing, for they are 
 too idle to work. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON.— Qzzt)B Utib rietatpgrtc 
 
 Cation. 
 
 To doubt any thing. ) 2Cn etroag ^roctfem (governs the da- 
 
 To question any thing. $ tive with the preposition an). 
 Do you doubt that ? 3roetfeln ©ie batan ? 
 
 . do not doubt it. } 
 
 I make no question,* have no C 3d) groetflc md)t barcm. 
 
 doubt of it. j 
 
 It is not to be doubted. £)atan ift ntd)t $u $roetfctn. 
 
 What do you doubt 1 SBeran petfeln <Sie? 
 
 I doubt what that man has told 3d) peifle on bent/ roaS btefet 9tfawi 
 
 me. mit gefagt f)aU 
 
 To agree to a thing. ttekt (or roegen) etwag etmg (oi 
 
 etng) roerben*. 
 
 To SL".^ tMng - } «•»»« *#** « ,*»-. 
 Do you grant that ? ©cftcfecn (Sic eg ? 
 
 I do grant it. 3d) geftefoe eg (or id) geftefye eg ettt, of 
 
 id) gebe eg $u). 
 
 How much have you paid for that SBtemel \)ahcn ©te fiir btefer £ut be* 
 
 hat! ga^ft? 
 
 I ha^e paid three crowns for it. 3d) fyafce btet Sfjalct bafut 6c§af)(t. 
 
 For. § (i r (a preposition governing the 
 
 accusative). 
 
 [ have bought this horse for fire 3d) fjate btcfeg $)fetb fur (or urn) 
 hundred francs. fiinf f)unbctt ^ranfen gefauft. 
 
 The price, bet §)retg. 
 
 Have you agreed about the price? (Stub @te (iter ben $tcig (roegen beg 
 
 $)ret|"eg) cintg geroorben ? 
 We have agreed aboui it. £Bit finb barubet (begroegen) etntg 
 
 gcrootben. 
 About what have you agreed? 2Boriibct (rcegrocgen) finb ©tc etntg 
 
 gcroorben ? 
 
230 
 
 ence. 
 
 To consent. 
 
 Abort the price. J ^^ ^^ 
 
 On account of (about). SBegen (a preposition governing 
 the genitive). 
 Do you confess your fault? ©efteljcn ©tc Sforen $c(jler etn? 
 
 [ do confess it. 3d) geftefye tfyn cin. 
 
 t confess it to be a fault. 3d) geftefye, tap eg cin gc^tet tfi 
 
 To aoree to oomoose a differ- ^" @i * ^3^*™*- Part, past, m> 
 
 2 gltcf>en. Imperf. Detgttcrj. 
 .©id) Mtctmgen. 
 (SinroUligen. 
 
 Snbeffen, bod), iebod)* 
 £>effen ungead)tet. 
 
 & t a Q e n*. Imperf. ttug. 
 
 2Ba$ fiir Jttetber ttagt et ? 
 (Sr trfigt fd)b'ne £letber. 
 
 ©egen mettle ©ercofjnfjett (a fern. 
 
 noun taking en in the plural). 
 &Bte gcroofynUd). 
 bet £anbe(ggencp (gen. en). 
 
 However* 
 For all that* 
 
 To wear* 
 
 What garments does he wear ? 
 He wears beautiful garments. 
 
 Against my custom. 
 
 As customary. 
 The partner, 
 
 To observe something, to take (Strcag mctien (geroafyt roetben*, fe* 
 
 notice of something. 
 Do you take notice of that ? 
 I do take notice of it. 
 Did you observe that 1 
 Did you notice what he did? 
 
 J did notice it. 
 
 fyen*). 
 Sfterfen &xt tag ? 
 3$ merfe eg. 
 £afcen @te bag gemetft ? 
 |>aben <Ste gefefyen, rcaS et getfjan 
 
 Fjat? 
 3d) M>e eg gefefjen. 
 
 To expect (to hope). 33ermutl)cn (f)Offen)» 
 Do you expect to receive a letter SSetmutfyen @ic etnen S3ttef t)On 3fc 
 
 from your uncle ? 
 I do expect it. 
 He expects it. 
 Have we expected it 1 
 We have expected it. 
 
 rem £)fyetm $u err)altcn ? 
 3* fjeffe eg. 
 (St t>etmutfjet eg. 
 £afcen rait eg »etmutf)et? 
 £Btt fjafcen eg oermut^et. 
 
 To get (meaning to procure). 
 { cannot procure any money. 
 
 23ctfd)affen. 
 
 3d) frmn mit !etn ®etb fcerfdjaffen. 
 He cannot procure any thing to (St fann fid) md)tg $u effen ©crfd^af* 
 eat. fen. 
 
 exercises. 179. 
 
 What have you gained that money by 1 — I have gained it by 
 working. — What have you done with your wine 1 — I have spilt it 
 
231 
 
 on the table. — Where is yours 1 — It is on the large table in my lit* 
 tie room ; but you must not drink any of it, for I must keep it for 
 my father who is ill. — Are you ready to depart with me 1 — I am so. 
 — Does your uncle depart with us 1 — He departs with us if he plea- 
 ses. — Will you tell him to be ready to depart to-morrow at six 
 O'clock in the evening ] — I will tell him so. — Why are you laugh- 
 ing at that man 1 — I do not intend to laugh at him. — I beg of you 
 not to do it, for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. — Why 
 have they (man) hanged that man 1 — They have hanged him, be- 
 cause he has killed somebody. — Have they (man) hanged the man 
 who stole a horse (from) your brother (in the dative) ?■ — They (9#an) 
 have punished him, but they have not hanged him : they only hang 
 highwaymen in our country (bet un£). — Where have you found my 
 coat 1 — I found it in the blue room ; it was hanging on a great nail. 
 — Will you hang my hat on the tree 1 — I will hang it thereon. 
 
 180. 
 
 Do you doubt what I am telling you 1 — 1 do not doubt it. — Do 
 you doubt what that man has told you ] — I do doubt it, for he has 
 often told me what was not true (rcafyt). — Why have you not kept 
 your promise 1 — I know no more what I promised you. — Did you 
 not promise us to take (fubtcn) us to the concert (on) Thursday 1 — I 
 confess that I was wrong in promising you ; although (tnfeeffcn) the 
 concert has not taken place. — Does your brother confess his fault] 
 — He does confess it. — What does your uncle say to that letter'? — 
 He says that it is written very well ; but he admits that he has 
 been wrong in sending it to the captain. — Do you confess your fault 
 now ] — I confess it to be a fault. — Have you at last bought the 
 horse which you wished to buy ] — I have not bought it, for I have 
 not beej able to procure money. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SEVENTY.SEVENTH LESSON. — Qkbm nnh 
 BkbznfisBtt fiction. 
 
 OF THE PLUPERFECT. 
 
 This past tense expresses an action entirely finished 
 ^hen another action which relates to it was com- 
 mencing. 
 
 After having read (after I had 9tacr?t>em ten getcfen fatte. 
 
 read). 
 
 After having cut the bread (after 9?ad)t>cm er feaS SBrob gefdjmtten fyat* 
 
 he had cut the bread). U. 
 
 After having eaten (after he had 9?ad)t>cm er Qcc;ef[cn r)atte. 
 
 eaten.) 
 
232 
 
 After cutting myself. 9?ad)bem id) mid) Qcfcftntttett (jatte. 
 
 After dressing yourself. 9tfad)bem ©ie fid) angcgogcn fatten. 
 After he had withdrawn from the 9?ad)bem cr fid) t>em gciter entfertrf 
 
 fire. fyatte. 
 
 After thou hadst shaved. 9?ad)bem £)u £)id) raftrt I)attcft. 
 
 After they had warmed them- 9?ad)bcm fie fid) gcroa'rmt fatten. 
 
 selves. 
 
 Before I set out. (Sfyc id) abretfe. 
 
 When I had read, I breakfasted. 9?ad)bcm id) Qckfen fyatte, fru^ftMtc 
 
 [O 23 In the second member of a compound phrase the 
 nominative is placed after its verb. 
 
 When you had dressed you went 9?ad)bem @te fid) ange^ogen fatten, 
 
 out. 9 i n g c n ©te au$. 
 
 When he had cut the bread he Wad) bem cr. bat 23rob gefdjnitten f)at* 
 
 cut the meat. te, f d) n i 1 1 cr bag g(eifd). 
 
 After he had read the letter he 9?ad)bem cr t>cn SBricf a/lcfen fyatte, 
 
 said. fflgtc cr. 
 
 Before I depart I will once more (Sfye fd) abreifc, rot U i d) nod) etn« 
 
 see my children. mat meine £inbcr fefyen. 
 
 Obs. A. This transposition of the nominative does not 
 take place when the phrase begins with the subject. 
 
 He cut the meat after he had cut ($r fd)tittt bag $(cifd), nad)bem cr t)a$ 
 the bread. £$rob a,cfd)nitten f)attc« 
 
 What did he do after he had £Ba£ tfyat cr, nad)bcm cr ejegeffen fjats 
 eaten 1 tc ? 
 
 He went to bed. (gr gtng $u 23ctte. 
 
 THE FOLLOWING VERBS GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE 
 
 preposition fiber. 
 
 To be afflicted at something;. tlcbet etwat bctrubt fcin*. 
 To afflict one's self at something, ©id) liber etroaS betrtiben. 
 Are you afflicted at the death of (Stub ©te tibet ben &ob meine* 
 
 my friend ? $reunbe$ betrftbt ? 
 
 I am much afflicted at it. 3d) bin fefyr bctrubt barubet. 
 
 At what is your father afflicted 1 SBodiber tft 3f)t £err 25atct bctrubt ? 
 
 The accident, 
 
 ber 3ufoC ; 
 
 the death, 
 
 bcr Sob. 
 
 To die (to lose life). 
 
 ©terben* 
 
 I die, am dying*. 
 
 3d) ftcrtfo 
 
 Thou iiest, art dying. 
 
 £u fttrbji 
 
233 
 
 He dies, is dying. 
 Died. 
 
 To complain of some one or some- 
 thing. 
 
 (St ftirbt. 
 
 Part, past, geftctkn. 
 park 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Do you complain of my friend 1 
 
 I do complain of him. 
 Of whom do you complain 1 
 Of wnat does your brother com- 
 plain ? 
 
 To wonder, to be astonished or 
 surprised at something. 
 
 Do you wonder at what I have 
 
 done ? 
 I do wonder at it. 
 At what are you surprised 1 
 
 To be glad. 
 To be sorry. 
 
 (S t d) it 6cr Semctnfcen ot>et 
 etroaS bcflagen (Oefcfyroe* 
 r en). 
 
 SScftagen <Ste fid) itbcr mctnen 
 
 greunb ? 
 3d) fceffoge mid) U6et: ityt. 
 ileber wen fccflagen ©te fid) ? 
 gBotfibet befefyroett fid) 3&t SStubet ? 
 
 ©id) u b c t ctroaS n> u n b e t n« 
 
 [ am glad of it. 
 
 I am sorry for it. 
 
 I am glad to hear that your father 
 
 is well. 
 To hear (to understand). 
 
 Dear, 
 
 sad, sorrowful. 
 
 The prince, 
 
 the count, 
 the baron, 
 
 To pronounce 
 
 The Saxon, 
 the Prussian, 
 the Austrian, 
 Saxony, 
 Prussia, 
 Austria, 
 The Christian, 
 the Jew, 
 the negro, 
 
 £Bunbetn ©te fid) ttbet t>a$, roa$ tdj 
 
 gctf)<m fyabt ? 
 3d) nnmbcte mid) batttOct. 
 2Bortibet rounbern 6te fid) ? 
 
 S 1 c b f c t n* (governs the dative) 
 Sett) f c i n* or tf)un* (governs 
 the dative). 
 
 t 6* ijt nut fteb. 
 
 t (SS tfyut or (tjt) nut Celt). 
 
 (S$ tft nut fteb gu setnefymen, tag 3fa 
 
 £crt SSatet fid) rcof)l kpnbet. 
 SSctncfymen*. 
 fteb ; 
 ttauttg. 
 
 bet gtttp (String) (en in the ge« 
 
 nitive) ; 
 tct ©taf (en in the genitive) ; 
 t>et 23aron. 
 
 2Cu Sfptedjen*. 
 
 bet (Sad)fe ; 
 
 tcx $pteuge ; 
 
 bet £)efiretd)Ct. 
 
 @ad)fen ; 
 
 ^pteufien ; 
 
 Dejttetd) (£)ePettetd) a ). 
 
 bet (Sfyttp (gen. en) ; 
 
 bet 3ube ; 
 
 bet Sftcget i^cv $Jloht, gen. en) 
 
 • All names of countries are neuter. 
 
234 
 
 EXERCISES. 181. 
 
 Has your father at last bought the house 1 — He has not bought it; 
 for he could not agree about the price. — Have you at last agreed 
 about the price of that carriage ] — We have agreed about it. — How 
 much have you paid for it ] — I have paid fifteen hundred francs (bet 
 gxcmfe) for it. — What hast thou bought to-day 1 — I have bought 
 three beautiful pictures, a pretty gold ring, and two pair of thread 
 stockings. — How much hast thou bought the pictuies for ? — I have 
 bought them for seven hundred francs. — Do you find that they are 
 dear ] — I do not find so. — Have you agreed with your partner ] — I 
 have agreed with him. — Does he consent to pay you the price of 
 the ship 1 — He does consent to pay it to me. — Do you consent to go 
 to England 1 — I do consent to go thither. 
 
 Have you seen your old. friend again (rotcber Qcfefycrt) ] — I have 
 seen him again. — Did you recognise him 1 — T could hardly recognise 
 him, for contrary to his custom, he wears a long sword. — How is 
 he 1 — He is very well. — What garments does he wear ] — He wears 
 beautiful new garments. — Have you taken notice of what your boy 
 has done 1 — I have taken notice of it. — Have you punished him for 
 it ? — I have not punished him for it, because he has confessed his 
 fault. — Has your father already written to you ? — Not yet ; but I 
 expect to receive a letter from him to-day. — Of what do you com- 
 plain? — I complain of not being able to procure some money. — 
 Why do these poor people complain 1 — They complain because they 
 cannot procure a livelihood. — How are your parents 1 — They are 
 as usual (one gem^fjnftd}), very well. — Is your uncle (3fyt £em 
 £)f)ctm) well] — He is better than he usually is (a($ geroofynUd)). — 
 Have you already received a letter from your friend who is in Ber- 
 lin 1 — I have already written to him several times ; he has, how 
 ever, not answered me yet. 
 
 182. 
 
 What did you do when you had finished your letter 1 — I went to 
 my brother, who took (fufyrcn) me to the theatre, where I had the 
 pleasure to find one of my friends, whom I had not seen for ten 
 years. — What didst thou do after getting up this morning] — When 
 I had read the letter of the Polish count, I went out to see the the- 
 atre of the prince, which I had not seen before (nod) ntd)t). — What 
 did your father do when he had breakfasted 1 — He shaved and went 
 out. — What did your friend do after he had been a walking 1 — He 
 went to the baron. — Did the baron cut the meat after he had cut the 
 bread !-i He cut the bread after he had cut the meat. — When do you 
 set out 1 — I do not set out till (crft) to-morrow ; for before I depart 
 I will once more see my good friends. — What did your children do 
 when they had breakfasted l . — They went a walking with their dear 
 preceptor. — Where did your uncle go to after he had warmed him- 
 self? — He went nowhither. — After he had warmed himself he un- 
 dressed and went to bed. — At what o'clock did he get up 1 — He go* 
 up at sun rise. — Did you wake him ? — I had no need to wake him 
 
235 
 
 for he had got up Defore me. — What did your cousin do when he 
 heard (of) the death of his best friend 1 — He was much afflicted, 
 and went to bed without saying- a word. — Did you shave before you 
 breakfasted ] — I shaved when I had breakfasted. — Did you go to 
 bed when you had eaten supper ? — When I had eaten supper I 
 wrote my letters, and when I had written them I went to bed. — At 
 what are you afflicted ] — I am afflicted at that accident. — Are you 
 afflicted at the death of your relation ? — I am much (ft'fyr) afflicted 
 at it. — When did your relation die ] — He died last month. — Of 
 what dd you complain ] — 1 complain of your boy. — Why do you 
 complain of him ] — Because he has killed the pretty dog, which I 
 received from one of my friends. — Of what has your uncle com- 
 plained 1 — He has complained of what you have done. — Has he 
 complained of the letter which I wrote to him ] — He has com- 
 plained of it. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SEVENTY.EIGHTH LESSON.— <3Utjt ttttfc silbotiigSte 
 
 Cection. 
 
 Declension of Feminine Substantives. 
 
 Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. 
 m, { Singular. bte, ber, ber, bte* 
 
 ( Plural bte, ber, ben, bte 
 
 I. Singular. 
 
 Rule. All feminine substantives, without excep- 
 tion, together with all foreign feminine words adopted 
 into German, as : bte $orm, the form ; bte ?mt'e, the 
 line, remain invariable in all the cases singular Ex. 
 Nom. bte $rcm, the woman ; • Gen. ber grew, of the 
 woman; Dat. ber grew, to the woman; Acc. bte 
 grew, the woman. 
 
 II. Plural. 
 
 Rule. Feminine substantives ending in e, el, er, add 
 It, and all others ett, in all the cases of the plural ; and 
 do not soften the radical vowels. (See Table of the 
 Declension of Substantives, Lesson XIII.) 
 There are two exceptions to this rule : 
 1st, The two substantives: bte 9D?ittter, the mother; 
 Me £od)ter, the daughter, soften the radical vowels in 
 
236 
 
 the plural without adding m a Ex. Plural : bte 90iuttt* 
 the mothers ; bte £6rf)ter, the daughters. 
 
 2d, Feminine monosyllables containing an a or it, 
 are declined in the plural like masculine substantives, 
 that is, they add e in all the cases and soften the radi 
 cal vowel. b 
 
 
 Sing. Plural. 
 
 The loor — the doors. 
 The bottle — the bottles. 
 The fork — the forks. 
 
 bte Zfyux, — bte Zfyitxm. 
 bte gfafcfye — bte glafcfyem 
 bte ©abel — bte ©abelm 
 
 The pen — the pens. 
 The hand — the hands. 
 The nut — the nuts. 
 
 bte geber — bte $ebew* 
 bte £cmb — bte §anbe« 
 bteSRug — bteSWifie* 
 
 She — they. 
 
 (gie — fie. (See Table of the 
 Personal Pronouns, Lesson 
 XXVIII.) 
 
 Has she ? 
 
 She has. 
 She has not. 
 Have they? 
 They have. 
 They have not. 
 
 &at fie ? 
 Ste f)at. 
 <5te fjat md)t. 
 £a6en fie ? 
 <Ste fyaben. 
 @te fyaben tucfyt. 
 
 My (feminine singular). 
 My (plural for all genders), 
 
 Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. 
 ntetne, metner, metner, meme* 
 metne, metner, metnen, metne* 
 
 Obs. A. In this manner all possessive pronouns of 
 the feminine gender are declined, as : Seine, thy ; feme, 
 his ; tfyre, her ; unfere, our ; (Jure, your ; tfyre, their. 
 
 The father and his son or his £)et SSater unb fern (Sofyn cfcet fetne 
 
 daughter. gedbter. 
 
 The mother and her son cr her £)tc Gutter unt> tljt (Scfyn efcer tr)re 
 
 daughter. &ocf)ter. 
 
 The child and its brother or its Da* JUnt) unb fetn 33tut>er obet 
 
 sister. fetne (Sdjnxftei*. 
 
 My door — my doors. 9)?etne Sb/ur — metne Sfjuten. 
 
 Thy fork — thy forks. £)etne ®afcel — £)ehtc (itabefa. 
 
 * Except in the dative. It will be remembered that all substantives with 
 out exception take n in the dative plural, if they have not one in the nomina* 
 tive. (See Lesson XIII.) 
 
 b The declension of those substantives which deviate from these rules 
 will be separately noted. 
 
237 
 
 His pen — his pens. 
 Hei brother — her brothers 
 Her sister — her sisters. 
 Her book — her books. 
 
 (Seine getct — fetne $etettu 
 S&t SBrutct — ifjre Srutet, 
 Sbre ©dbwefter — tfere (Scftroefterth 
 Sfcr SBud) — i&re S3ttd)et. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE ARTICLE OF THP 
 FEMININE GENDER. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 the goocH « 
 of the good I i* 
 to the good r p^ R 
 
 the good J 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. bte gate. 
 Gen. ber guten. 
 Dat. ber gutem 
 Ace. bte gute. 
 
 Plural. 
 bte guten. 
 ber gutetn 
 ben gutetn 
 bte gutem 
 
 Obs. B. The adjective preceded by a possessive 
 pronoun of the feminine gender, as : metne, betne, &c. 
 has exactly the same declension as with the definite 
 article. 
 
 My good linen, 
 
 the right hand, 
 
 the left hand, 
 
 the language, 
 
 the tongue, 
 
 the street, 
 
 the town, 
 
 the woman, the wife, 
 
 the girl, 
 
 the young lady, 
 
 My right hand aches. 
 His left hand aches. 
 
 The room, 
 
 the chamber, 
 
 the cabinet, 
 
 the apartment, 
 The front room, 
 the back room, 
 the silk, 
 the silk stocking, 
 
 metne gute Cetnroant ; 
 
 tie rccbte £ant ; 
 
 tie ixnh £ant ; 
 
 tie ©pracfye ; 
 
 tie 3unge ; 
 
 tie @tta£e ; 
 
 tie ©tabt ; 
 
 tie $tau (does not soften 
 
 takes en in the plural) ; 
 tag 9#atd)en ; 
 tas gt&rtein, 
 
 sx>lir febmcrgt tie tecfyte £ant. c 
 3&m fct)mcr^t tie ltn!e £ant. 
 
 tie ©tube ; 
 
 ta$ 3inmicr ; 
 
 tie hammer ; 
 
 tag ®emad). d 
 
 tic ©tube flora fyerauS ; 
 
 tie ©tube fytntettauS ; 
 
 tie ©ette ; 
 
 ter fettene ©trumpf. 
 
 and 
 
 c When the sensation expressed by the impersonal verb is felt only in o 
 , Tt of the body, the person is put in the dative. 
 
 d <&t\xbl is the room commonly inhabited and in which there is a stove. 
 f immer is the general word for room, whether there is a stove in it or not 
 Jictmmer is a small room in which there is no stove, and in which various 
 flings are kept ; hence bte Jtletberfctmmer, the wardrobe ; bte Q3oben£ammer, 
 the garret, <fec. ©ernac^) is only used in speaking of tie apartments in a caa« 
 fle or a palace. 
 
238 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN ARTICLE IN THE FEMININE 
 GENDER. 
 
 Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. 
 Good, &c. (in the singular).! gute, guter, guter, gute, 
 Good, &c. (in the plural). | gute, guter, guten, gute. 
 
 Some good soup. ($5ute (Suppc 
 
 Some bad pens. (Sct)(ed)te jct>crn. 
 
 Some beautiful linen shirts. <Sd)one tetnn>cmt>ene ^embcn. (See 
 
 Obs. Lesson IV.) 
 
 THE adjective preceded by the indefinite article 
 
 IN THE FEMININE GENDER. 
 
 A A o ,, . . v IN. erne ante. G. ettter guten. 
 A good, &c. (feminine). | A ^ ^ D ^ J^ 
 
 THE FOLLOWING PRONOUNS ARE DECLINED LIKE THE 
 DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 This or this one, that or that one, btcfe, jene. 
 
 Some, sundry, eintge, etttcfyc. 
 
 Many, several, mct)re or mefjrete. 6 
 
 Which, nxtcfye. 
 
 All olle. 
 
 Many a one, some, manner, manege, mandfyeS. 
 
 2Cnt>ete is declined Jike an adjective. 
 
 Obs. C. In the plural all adjectives, ordinal num- 
 bers, and pronominal adjectives have the same declen- 
 sion for all genders, as we have already seen in many 
 parts of this work, particularly in the Table of the 
 Declension of Adjectives, Lesson XVIII. 
 
 REMARK. 
 
 To become intimately acquainted with the declen- 
 sion of adjectives, ordinal numbers, and pronominal 
 adjectives, the learner has only to familiarize himself 
 with the definite article ; for when the adjective is 
 preceded by a word having the characteristic termina- 
 tion/ it takes en in all the cases, except in the nomi- 
 
 e Some authors write me()ve, others mefjreve. The latter is more usual, 
 the former more correct. 
 
 { The terminations of the definite article are called charax-teristic because 
 thev characterize the case, number, and gender. 
 
239 
 
 native singular of all genders and the accusative sin- 
 gular feminine and neuter, in which it takes e (Page 
 33, Rule 2d.). The adjective itself takes these termi- 
 nations when it is not preceded by any article* or if 
 the word preceding has not the characteristic termi- 
 nation, as : em, mem, fettt, &c> in the nominative of the 
 masculine, and nominative and accusative of the 
 neuter gender. 
 
 This principle is clearly exemplified in the adjective 
 preceded by the indefinite article. The nominative 
 em, not having the characteristic termination er for 
 the masculine and e$ for the neuter, the adjective 
 takes it. Ex. ©n guter 9J?attn, em gute£ $mb* 
 
 The characteristic termination of the masculine 
 being e r and that of the neuter e §, that of the femi- 
 nine is e : so that is is sufficient to join the ending e to 
 a word of the characteristic termination to make it 
 feminine. Ex. Masc. and neuter : biefer, btefeS ; femi- 
 nine : btefe ; masc. and neuter : jener jene£ ; feminine, 
 iene. 
 
 These principles being once well understood, the 
 learner will find no difficulty whatever in declining 
 adjectives, ordinal numbers or pronominal adjectives. 
 
 Have you my pen 1 £abcn <Ste mctne $et)ev ? 
 
 No, Madam, I have it not. 9?ein, 93tabam (gncibige $rau h ), id) 
 
 fyabc fie mcl)t. 
 Which bottle have you broken 1 2Beld)e Jjfofdje fyafcen (Sic getfcrodjcn ? 
 Which soup has she eaten? £Bc(d)e (Suppe Fwt fie gegeffen? 
 What pear have you ? 2Ba$ fur cine SSirne fyaben <Sie ? 
 
 What linen have you bought ? ££a$ fur 8ettm>ant> r)aben @te ge* 
 
 fauft ? 
 Do you see my sister ? (Sefyen @ie meine ©djroeftet ? 
 
 I do see her. 3d) felje fie. . 
 
 Have you seen my sisters 1 £ctkn (Sic mctne (Sd)tt)cflcttt gefc* 
 
 r>en? 
 No, my lady, I have not seen 9letn, metn gtauletn, id) fyaU fte 
 them. nid)t gcfefoen. 
 
 g Except in the genitive singular masculine and neuter, in which it takes 
 en, and in the nominative and accusative neuter in which it changes <t$ into 
 e«. (Page 33, Rule 2d.) 
 
 h If speaking to a lady of rank, gnabtge Srau, gracious Lady, must b« 
 luted. 
 
240 
 
 The nose, tie 9?afe ; 
 
 the butter, tic Sutter ; 
 
 the soup, tie Suppe ; 
 
 the towel, tag ^anttudf) ; 
 
 the napkin, tag Sellertud), tie ^crctette. 
 
 exercises. 183. 
 
 Are you not surprised at what my friend has done 1 — I am much 
 iurprised at it. — At what is your son surprised ] — He is surprised 
 at your courage. — Are you sorry for having written to my uncle 1 
 — I am, on the contrary, glad of it. — At what art thou afflicted ] — L 
 am not afflicted at the happiness of my enemy, but at the death of 
 my friend. — How are your brothers 1 — They have been very well 
 for these few days. — Are you glad of it ] — I am glad to hear that 
 they are \^11. — Are you a Saxon 1 — No, I am a Prussian. — Do 
 the Prussians like to learn French 1 — They do like to learn it. — 
 Do the Prussians speak German as well as the Saxons 1 — The 
 Saxons and the Prussians speak German well ; but the Austrians 
 do not pronounce it very well (ntd)t atl^u gut) ; notwithstanding 
 they are (teffen ungeacfytet ftnt eg) very good people. — Which day of 
 the week (2Bc(d)en Sao, in ter £Bod)c) do the Turks celebrate (feiern) 1 
 — They celebrate Friday (ten grettag) ; but the Christians cele- 
 brate Sunday, the Jews Saturday, and the negroes their birth-day 
 (ter ©ebuttgtag). 
 
 184. 
 
 Has your sister my gold ribbon 1 — She has it not. — What has 
 she ? — She has nothing. — Has your mother anything "? — She has a 
 fine gold fork. — Who has my large bottle ] — Your sister has it. — 
 Do you sometimes see your mother 1 — I see her often. — When did 
 you see your sister 1 — I saw her three months and a half (Obs. C., 
 Lesson LXV.) ago. — Who has my fine nuts 1 — Your good sister 
 has them, — Has she also my silver forks ] — She has them not. — 
 Who has them 1 — Your mother has them. — Have your sisters had 
 my pens ] — They have not had them, but I believe that their chil- 
 dren have had them. — Why does your brother complain] — He 
 complains because his right hand aches. — Why do you complain 1 
 — I complain because my left hand aches. — Is your sister as old 
 as my mother 1 — She is not so old, but she is taller. — Has your 
 brother purchased anything'? — He has purchased something. — 
 What has he bought 1 — He has bought fine linen and good pens. 
 - — Has he not bought some silk stockings 1 — He has bought some. 
 — Is your sister writing ? — No, Madam, she is not writing. — Why 
 does she not write? — Because she has a sore hand. — Why does 
 the daughter of your neighbour not go out'? — She does not go out, 
 because she has sore feet. — Why does my sister not speak 1 — Be- 
 cause she has a soar mouth. — Hast thou not seen my silver pen 1 
 ~-I have not seen it. — Hast thou a front room 1 — I have one be- 
 
241 
 
 tiind, but my brother has one in the front. — Does the wile of ow 
 shoemaker go out already ] — No, my lady, she does not go out 
 yet, for she is still very ill. 
 
 185. 
 
 Which bottle has your little sister broken ] — She broke the one 
 which my mother bought yesterday. — Have you eaten of my soup 
 or of my mother's 1 — I have eaten neither of yours nor your mo- 
 ther's, but of that of my good sister. — Have you seen the woman 
 that was with (Oci) me this morning 1 — I have not seen her. — Has 
 your mother hurt herself? — She has not hurt herself. — Have you a 
 sore nose 1 — I have not a sore nose, but a sore hand. — Have you 
 cut your finger 1 — No, my lady, I have cut my hand. — Will you 
 give me a pen 1 — I will give you one. — Will you (have) this (one) 
 or that (one) ] — I will (have) neither. — Which (one) do you wish 
 to have 1 — I wish to have that which your sister has. — Do you 
 wish to have my mother's good black silk or my sister's ] — I wish 
 to have neither your mother's nor your sister's, but that which you 
 have. — Can you write with this pen ? — I can write with it (Obs. 
 Z?.. Lesson LIL). — Each woman thinks herself amiable (ItebenS* 
 ttwrttcj) and each is conceited (bcfigt (Stgcn(tcbc). — The same (C£bcn 
 fo) as men (t>ic 93?ann6pctfcn), my dear friend. — Many a one thinks 
 himself learned who is not so, and many men surpass (ubcrttcffcn*) 
 women in vanity (an (Sttelfctt). (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON.— ^un ttttfr skbet^igst* 
 
 Cation. 
 
 To go into the kitchen, to be in 3n tic .£ud)C Qcfycn*, in tct .Sucrje 
 the kitchen. fctn*. (See Lesson XXIX. 
 
 Note "».) 
 To go to church, to be at church. 3n tic jttrcfte gcfjen*/ in t>et jUrcf)* 
 
 fctn*. 
 To go to school, to be at school. 3n tie @d>ule $cfjcn*, in tct; ©cfyute 
 
 fctn*. 
 To go into the cellar, to be in 3n ten jtctter a,efjcn*, in t>em &tU 
 the cellar. (er fctn*. 
 
 The dancing school, tic Scm$fdf)u(c ; 
 
 the play (the comedy), tie demotic ; 
 the opera, tic £)pcr. 
 
 1 o go a hunting, to be at hunt- t 2fuf tic 3ci$t $cr)cn*, auf tct: 3a$& 
 ing. fctn*. (See Lesson XXX- 
 
 Note a .) 
 
 To go to the castle, to be at the Zfuf tog ©cfytop Qcbcn*, auf tern 
 castle. <Sd)(offe fctn*. a 
 
 R The preposition auf denotes acti ju am] existence upon the exterior of any 
 thing or motion towards an elevation 
 
 u 
 
242 
 
 To go to the exchange, to be at 2Cuf tie SBffrfc gefyen*, auf tet SBifcft 
 the exchange. fetti*. 
 
 The bank, tie 23anf (plur* 93an!en) ; 
 
 the bench, tie £$anf (plui. ^Ba'nfe). 
 
 To go to fish or a fishing. $tfcf)en gefyen*. 
 
 To hunt. 
 
 The whole day, aL the day, 
 
 the whole morning, 
 
 the whole evening, 
 
 the whole night, all the night, 
 
 the whole year, 
 
 the whole week, 
 
 the whole society, 
 
 All at once, 
 
 suddenly (all of a sudden), 
 
 Sagen, 
 
 ben gctngen Sag ; 
 ten gangen Sflorgen ; 
 ben garden 2C0ent ; 
 tie gatife 9?adf)t ; 
 tag ganjc 3af)t ; 
 tie gan$e SBodje ; 
 tie ganje ($5efettfcr;aft. b 
 auf ctnmot; 
 plogUdj. 
 
 Next week. 
 Last week. 
 This week. 
 This year. 
 Your mother, 
 
 your sister, 
 your sisters, 
 
 A person, 
 The belly-ache, 
 
 She las the stomach-ache. 
 His sister has a violent 
 ache. 
 
 head- 
 
 Die ftinftige (nacfyfle) 2&ed)e. 
 
 Die t>crige (t>etgcmgene) S35od^e» 
 
 Diefe £Bocf)e. 
 
 £)iefe$ So^r. 
 
 f Sbrc grcm Gutter (See Ofo, 
 
 Lesson LXXV.) ; 
 f 3(jr grautctn (ScWeftet ; 
 t 3*)te grd'utein (Scfyroeftern. 
 eine spcrfon. 
 tag 23aucr>tx>cr) ; plur. tie SSaudfa 
 
 fcfymeqen. 
 @tc &at SRagenfcfymcrgen (plur.). 
 (Seine (Scr/roejlet f)at r)efttge$ itopf* 
 
 me ^. 
 
 Some of it, any of it. ] 
 Some of them, any of 
 
 them. 
 Of it, of them. 
 
 Pronouns possessive 
 
 lute. 
 Mine, his, hers, ) 
 Ours, yours, theirs. ) 
 
 Singular and Plural fern* 
 
 a 
 
 Sing. 
 
 and 
 Plur. 
 
 fern. 
 
 abso- 
 Sing. 
 
 SKMcfye, fcerett, berfelbem 
 (See Obs. Lesson XVI.) 
 
 Feminine, 
 a 
 
 Singular. 
 
 tie meinige, tie feinige, tie tfytige. 
 tie unfrige, tie (Surige, tie tfjrige. 
 
 b Substantives terminating in et, fyett, hit, fdjaft, and atf) are feminine. 
 
243 
 
 Mine, his, hers, 
 Ours, yours, hers. 
 
 yPlural. 
 
 j 
 
 Have you my pen )r hers ? 
 I have hers. 
 
 To her. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bte metmgen, bte feimgen, tie 
 
 tfyrtgeru 
 bte imfrtgett, bie (Surtgen, bte 
 
 tf)rigen* c 
 
 $aUn <gic meine getet otet tie if)* 
 
 ttge? 
 3d) Ijafce bte tfjrtge. 
 
 3 F) r (See Table of Personal Pro- 
 nouns, Lesson XXV11I.). 
 
 What do you wish to send to 2£as rooflen (Sie Sfjtct Sttufome fd)b 
 
 your aunt 1 cfen ? 
 
 I wish to send her a tart. 3d) nritt if)t etne Sotte fd)icfen. 
 
 Will you send her also fruits 1 SBeUcn @ie tf)t aud) g-tud)te fd)icfen ? 
 I will send her some. 3d) wttt tf)t tt)c(d)C fcfyicfen. 
 
 Have you sent the books to my £afcen <Sie meinen (Scfyroeftcrn tie 
 
 sisters 1 
 1 have sent them to them. 
 
 The fruit, 
 
 the tart, 
 
 the aunt, 
 
 the peach, 
 
 the strawberry, 
 
 the cherry, 
 
 the cousin (aunt), 
 
 the niece, 
 
 the might (power), 
 
 the maid-servant, 
 
 the gazette, 
 
 The relation. 
 
 The neighbour (feminine), 
 
 SBiictjet gc[d)tcft? 
 3d) fyafce fie ifjnen gcfd)tcft. 
 
 tie $tud)t ; 
 
 tie Sorte ; 
 
 tie SKuljmc (tie Sante) ; 
 
 tie gpftrfid&e ; 
 
 tie (Stb&cete ; 
 
 tie Jttrfclje; 
 
 tie 23afe ; 
 
 tie Sfadjte ; 
 
 tie 9Jtod)t ; 
 
 tie SOZagt ; 
 
 tie 3eitung.a 
 
 M. ber SSermanbte ; ) (an adjec* 
 F. bte SBernxmbte ; \ tive noun. 
 
 tie 9?ad)6atinn ; 
 
 the ware (merchandise, goods), tie SBaare. 
 
 Obs. A. A feminine substantive is formed by join- 
 ing the syllable inn to a masculine substantive. Ex. 
 
 The actor, 
 the actress, 
 
 tcr ©djaufpicfcr ; 
 tie (Sdjaufpicktinru 
 
 « These pronouns have the declension of an adjective preceded by the deft 
 nite article. (See Lesson VII.) 
 d Words terminating in uttg are feminine. 
 
244 
 
 Obs. B. If the radical syllable of the masculine sub 
 stantive contains one of the vowels a, 0, U, it is gen* 
 erally softened on being made feminine by the addi- 
 tion of the syllable ttttt* Ex. 
 
 The countess, 
 the fool (fern.), 
 the cook (fem.), 
 
 the peasant (peasant's wife), 
 
 the sister-in-law, 
 
 To catch a cold, 
 To have a cold, 
 To have a cough, 
 I have caught a cold. 
 
 The cold, 
 
 the cough, 
 To make sick. 
 It makes me sick. 
 
 tie ©rd'fimn ; 
 t>ic iftarrinn ; 
 tie £od)tnn ; 
 tie 23aumnn ; 
 t>te ©cfyroagerinn. 
 
 ten (Sdjnupfen fcefommen*. 
 
 ten ©cbnupfen tyaben*. 
 
 t)cn £uften fjaben*. 
 
 3d) fyabt t>cn (Scfynupfen fccEommen. 
 
 tec (S.d)nupfcn; 
 
 tec £ujTteru 
 
 jttan! macfyen. 
 
 (S6 niacfyt mid) franE. 
 
 exercises. 186. 
 
 Where is your cousin] — He is in the kitchen. — Has your cook 
 (fem.) already made the soup ] — She has made it, for it stands al- 
 ready upon the table. — Where is your mother 1 — She is at church. — 
 Is your sister gone to school ? — She is gone thither. — Does your 
 mother often go to church ] — She goes thither every morning and 
 every evening. — At what o'clock in the morning does she go to 
 church ? — She goes thither as soon as she gets up. — At what o'clock 
 does she get up ] — She gets up at sun-rise. — Dost thou go to school 
 to-day] — I do go thither. — What dost thou learn at school? — I 
 learn to read, write, and speak there. — Where is your aunt ] — She 
 is gone to the play with my little sister. — Do your sisters go this 
 evening to the opera ] — No, Madam, they go to the dancing school. 
 — Is your father gone a hunting ] — He has not been able to go a 
 hunting, for he has a cold. — Do you like to go a hunting 1 — I like 
 to go a fishing better than a hunting. — Is your father still in the 
 country 1 — Yes, Madam, he is still there. — What does he do there 1 
 — He goes a hunting and a fishing there. — Did you hunt whenyDU 
 were in the country ? — I hunted the whole day. 
 
 187. 
 
 How long have you stayed with (6et) my mother ] — I stayed with 
 her the whole evening. — Is it long since you were at the castle ? — 
 I was there last week. — Did you find many people there 1 — I found 
 only three persons there. — Who were those three persons ] — They 
 ((S$) were the count, the countess, and their daughter. — Are these 
 girls as good as their brothers 1 — They are better than they. — Can 
 your sisters speak German? — They cannot, but they are -learning 
 
245 
 
 ii —Have you brought anything to your mother 1 — I brought nei 
 gvo& fruits and a fine tart. — What has your niece brought you !— • 
 She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, and good 
 peaches. — Do you like peaches ] — I do like them much (fcfjt). — 
 How many peaches has your neighbour (fern.) given you ! — She 
 has given me more than twenty of them. — Have you eaten many 
 cherries this year? — I have eaten many of them. — Did you give 
 any to your liUle sister ] — I gave her some. — Why have you not 
 given any to your good neighbour (fern.) ] — I wished to give her 
 some, but she did not wish to take any, because she does not 
 like cherries. — Were there many pears last year ] — There were not 
 many. 
 
 188. 
 
 Why do your sisters not go to the play 1 — They cannot go thither, 
 because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. — Did you 
 sleep well last night ] — I did not sleep well, for my children made 
 too much noise in my room. — Where were you last night 1 — I was 
 at my brother-in-law's. — Did you see your sister-in-law 1 — I did 
 see her. — How is she? — She was better yesterday evening than 
 usual. — Did you play ] — We did not play, but we read some good 
 books ; for my sister-in-law likes to read better than to play. — 
 Have you read the gazette to-day 1 — I have read it. — Is there any 
 thing new in it ] — I have not read anything new in it. — Where have 
 you been since (fetttcm) I saw you] — I have been at Vienna, Lon- 
 don, and Berlin. — Did you speak to my sister 1 — I did speak to her. 
 — What does she say ] — She says that she wishes to see you. — 
 Where have you put my pen ] — I have put it on the table. — Do you 
 intend to see your aunt to-day ] — I do intend to see her, for she has 
 promised me to dine with us. — I admire (fccrountctn) that family 
 (tic ^amilte), for the father is the king and the mother the queen of 
 it. The children and the servants (ta$ ©eftnte has no plural) are 
 the subjects (t)cr Untettfyan, gen. en) of the state (ter ©taat). — The 
 tutors of the children are the ministers (tct SDitmjfai*), who share 
 (tf)cilcn) with the king and queen the care (ttc (Serge) of the govern- 
 ment (tie SKeqteruncj). The good education (tie (Sr$tcr)ung) which 
 is given to children (See Obs. Contin. of Lesson LXX.) is the 
 crown (tic jtrone) of monarchs (tcr £Kortarcr;, gen. en). (See end 
 of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 EIGHTIETH LESSON.— &d}t}igste £edion. 
 
 To march (to walk). SOfrirfcfetrcn.* 
 
 To walk (to go on foot). ©efjen* (nt gufie Cjcf)cn). 
 
 a The verb tttcirfd)tren takes the auxiliary few* when there is a destination 
 of place, else it takes either f)aben* or fetn*. Ex. 5)ie 5lvmee tft mfy diom 
 marfdjirt, the army has marched to Rome ; bit 5lvmee $at (or tft) ben gattjett 
 Xacj matfct)itt, the army has marched the whole day. 
 
246 
 
 To step 
 
 To travel. 
 
 To wander (to go on foot). 
 
 The traveller, 
 
 the wanderer (the traveller on 
 
 foot), 
 To walk or travel a mile. 
 To make a step (meaning to step 
 
 physically). 
 To take a step (meaning to take 
 
 measures morally). 
 To go on a journey. 
 To make a speech. 
 
 A piece of business, ") 
 an affair, j 
 
 To transact business, 
 
 To salt. 
 
 Salt meat, 
 
 fresh meat, 
 
 the food (victuals), 
 
 the dish (mess), 
 
 the milk, 
 Salt meats, 
 Milk-food, 
 
 To attract* 
 
 The load-stone attracts iron. 
 
 Her singing attracts me. 
 
 To allure, to entice. 
 To excite, to charm. 
 To charm, to enchant. 
 To enrapture, to ravish. 
 I am enraptured with it. 
 Tho beauty, 
 the harmony, 
 the voice, 
 the power (the force), 
 
 (Scftretten*. Part, past, gefcfytttten 
 
 Imperf. fcfyntt. 
 3*etfen, ) take fetn for theii 
 SBanbetn, £ auxiliary. 
 
 t>cr S^ctfcnbe ; 
 bet £8cmbmt (£8cmbcr$mann> 
 
 (Sine strife $urucf(cgcn. 
 (Stncn (Scfyritt macfyen. 
 
 (Stncn ®d)ritt tf?un*. 
 
 Sine Strife macfyen. 
 (Sine 9?ebc fyalten** 
 
 ► etn ©cfc^aft (plural e). 
 
 ®efd)afte macfyen. 
 
 <S a ( i e n. 
 
 gefa^cncS $(etfd) ; 
 
 frifebe* Steifcl) ; 
 
 bte <Spetfe ; 
 
 bat ©ericfyt (plur. c) ; 
 
 tic SMcf). 
 
 cjefatyne (Speifen ; 
 
 smitd)fpctfe. 
 
 2Cn fid) $tef)en* (f)er&et$.te* 
 Ijen*, an$te fyen*). 
 
 £)et 93?aa,net ^ie^t ba$ ©fen an 
 
 ft*. 
 Stye ®cfang $tef)t mi* an. 
 
 Socfcn. 
 
 *Ket$en. 
 
 2$c3au6etn. 
 
 (5nt$ucfen. 
 
 3* bin batufcet ent$ficft. 
 
 bte @d)on^eit ; 
 
 bte vftatmome ; 
 
 tic ©timme ; 
 
 bte ©cwalt. 
 
 To meddle with something. 
 
 To concern one's self about 
 
 something. 
 To trouble one's head about 
 
 something, (to meddle with 
 
 something). 
 
 S <Stcf) in ctnxiS mtfdf)cn. 
 \ @td) mit etroag abgeben*. 
 
 • ©tdfc urn etwa$ M fimmenu 
 
247 
 
 f do not meddle with other peo- 3d) nu]d)C mid) ni$)t ttt fcetnte 
 
 pie's business. 
 
 The quarrel (the contest), 
 the commerce (the traffic), 
 Strange (foreign), 
 [t is strange. 
 
 £><mtc(. 
 tct £antel ; 
 
 tet £antct (has no plural), 
 fremt. 
 (£g if! fonbet&ar. 
 
 He employs himself in painting. (St gtfct fid) nut tet £ftaletet <$. 
 The art of painting, tie 93Metci; 
 
 chemistry, tie (Sfjemie, tic <Sd)eite6unjit ; 
 
 the chemist, bet (Sfycmifet (tet ©d)citet:unjtfet) ; 
 
 the art, tic £unjt. 
 
 To look at some one, Scmanten anfefyen** 
 
 To concern some one. Scmanten angefyen*. 
 
 I look at you. 3d) fefyc <Ste cuu 
 
 The thing, l^fS^S, , 
 
 s ' } tag £)tng (plur. e). 
 
 I do not like to meddle with 3d) mtfd)C mid) ntd)t gcrn in £)tna,e 
 
 things that do not concern me. tie mid) md)tg ancjefyen. 
 
 What is that to me 1 f £Bag gcljt tag mid) an ? 
 
 What is that to you ! f %&a$ gefjt tag <Stc an ? 
 
 To repeat. 
 The repetition, 
 
 the beginning, the commence- 
 ment, 
 the wisdom, 
 
 the study, 
 
 the goddess,, 
 the lord, 
 the nightingale, 
 k\\ beginnings are difficult. 
 
 To create. 
 
 The creator, 
 
 the creation, 
 
 the benefit (the kindness), 
 
 •the fear of the Lord, 
 
 the heaven, 
 
 the earth, 
 
 the solitude, 
 
 the lesson, 
 
 ££ i c t e t fj c ( c n. 
 
 tag SOBtebetfjoten. (See 
 
 LXXI. Obs. C.) 
 bet 2Crifang ; 
 
 Less>n 
 
 tic SO&ete&ett ; 
 C tag ©tubtum ; b 
 I bat (Stubtten ; 
 
 bie (5>ctttnn ; 
 
 bet £ett ; 
 
 tic ££ad)tia,all. 
 
 2Cflet 2(nfang ifi fcfywet (a proverb). 
 
 © d) a f f e n. Part, past, gefdjaffeit. 
 Imperf. fd>uf. 
 
 bet @d)6'pfet ; 
 
 tie @d)opfung ; 
 
 tie aOBc&ttM ; 
 
 tie gutdfet teg #ettn ; 
 
 for £tmmc( ; 
 
 tie (Stte ; 
 
 tic (Sinfamfcit ; 
 
 tie Section ; 
 
 *> Substantives terminating in um, form their plural by changing Uttt into 
 en. Ex. bag Stibmbuum, the individual ; plur. bieSubttubuen; ba8<Satbtum, 
 fee study ; plur bte ©tub tea. 
 
248 
 
 the exercise, tie 2Cufgafoe ; 
 
 the goodness. tie ©ute. c 
 
 I have done it for your sake. 3d) Ijctbe e$ Sfotctwcflcn getyam 
 
 Obs. The preposition tt)egen takes its place eitliei 
 before or after the genitive which it governs ; but when 
 it follows a oersonal pronoun, the letter t is substituted 
 for the letter r of the pronoun which then forms one 
 word with the preposition. The same thing should be 
 observed with regard to the prepositions fyalben, on ac ~ 
 count of, and um — ttutten, for the sake of, with this 
 difference, that the latter never stands before the sub- 
 stantive. Ex. 
 
 sj^cinemxgen, mctnetfyatfccn, on ac- tlnfcttroccjen, unfett&nt&en, on ac- 
 count of me. count of us. 
 
 £>etneta)e$en, teinetljcMen, on ac- (Suretroegen, eurctfyciUxn, on account 
 count of thee. of you. 
 
 (Setnetrce^en, feinctfyalkn, on ac- Sfytetreegen, tfjrctfat&en, on account 
 count of him. of them, for their sake. 
 
 3fjtetroea.en, tfjtctfjaftcn, on ac- 
 count of her. 
 
 In the same way we say : itm tttemetttrittett, for my 
 sake ; urn beutetttriften, for thy sake, &c. 
 
 He has done it for the sake of @r %oX c$ am tfyretnnflcn getfyatu 
 her. 
 
 On account of you and your S^rcts unt Sfyret Winter, e&en fe* 
 children, as well as on account tx>or)t ctt£ metnets unt t>cr feints 
 of me and mine, I have put gen nxgen, fyabc id) Sfynen t>tefe 
 you in mind of and inculcated rotcfyttge unt unttualtcfye SBafyt* 
 this important and infallible fecit gu ©emutfye gefufyrt unt cttt* 
 truth. gefefyarfr. 
 
 The cleanliness, the uncleanli- tie SKetnltcf)fett ; tie Unrctnlld^feit ; 
 ness, 
 
 the government (meaning the tie £)bttgfeit. 
 magistrate), 
 
 Sensible, reasonable, sctnunfttg. 
 
 Not only — but also. 9W d)t cillctn — fentetn aud). 
 
 exercises. 189. 
 
 Will you dine with us to-day 1 — With much pleasure. — What 
 have you for dinner ? — We have good soup, some fresh and salt 
 meat, and some milk-food. — Do you like milk-food 1 — I like it bet* 
 
 c Abstract substantives have no r Jural in German ; as He (35 lite, the good* 
 ness ; He £tefce, the love, &c. 
 
249 
 
 ter than all other food. — Are you ready to dine ] — I am ready — Do 
 you intend to set out soon I — I intend setting out next week. — Do 
 you travel alone ] — No, Madam, I travel with my uncle. — Do you 
 travel on foot or in a carriage 1 — We travel in a carriage. — Did you 
 meet any one in (auf with the dative) your last journey to Berlin 1 
 — We met many wanderers. — What do you intend to spend your 
 time in this summer 1 — I intend to take a short journey. — Did you 
 walk much in your last journey ! — I like very much to walk, but my 
 uncle likes to go in a carriage. — Did he not wish to walk ] — He 
 wished to walk at first, but after having taken a few steps, he 
 wished to get into the carriage, so that I did not walk much. — 
 What have you been doing at school to-day ] — We have been listen- 
 ing to our professor, who made a long speech on (ubcr with the 
 accus.) the goodness of God. — What did he say? — After saying, 
 " God is the creator of heaven and earth ; the fear of the Lord is 
 the beginning of all wisdom ; " he said, " repetition is the 
 mother of studies, and a good memory is a great benefit of God." — 
 Why did you not stay longer in Holland ] — When I was there the 
 living was dear, and I had not money enough to stay there longer. 
 ■ — What sort of weather was it when you were on the way to Vi- 
 enna ] — It was very bad weather ; for it was stormy, and snowed, 
 and rained very heavily. d 
 
 190. 
 
 What are you doing all the day in this garden? — I am walking 
 in it (fccittn). — What is there in it that attracts you 1 — The singing 
 of the birds attracts me. — Are there any nightingales in it ] — There 
 are some in it, and the harmony of their singing enchants me.- — 
 Have those nightingales more power over (fiber with the accus.) 
 you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of your tender (jcirts 
 ltd)) mother, who loves you so much ] — I confess, the harmony of 
 the singinr of those little birds has more power over me than the 
 most tender words of my dearest friends. — What does your niece 
 amuse herself with in her solitude? — She reads a good deal and 
 writes letters to hex mother. — What does your uncle amuse himself 
 with in his solitude 1 — He employs himself in painting and chem- 
 istry. — Does he no longer do any business 1 — He no longer does 
 any, for he is too old to do it. — Why does he meddle with your 
 business ] — He does not generally (geroofynttd)) meddle with other 
 people's business ; but he meddles with mine, because he loves 
 me. — Has your master made you repeat your lesson to-day 1 — He 
 has made me repeat it. — Did you know it 1 — I did know it pretty 
 well. — Have you also done some exercises 1 — I have done some, 
 but what is that to you, I beg ] — I do not generally meddle with 
 things that do not concern me; but I love you so much (fo febr) that 
 I concern myself much (fefjr) about what you are doing. — Does any 
 one trouble his head about you 1 — No one troubles his head abouf 
 
 d The learner must here repeat all the expressions- relative to the impersonal 
 /erb e 3 i ft, it is, in Lessons LIV. and LVI. 
 11* 
 
250 
 
 me ; for I am not worth the trouble. — Not only for the sake o\ 
 cleanliness, but a*so for the sake of health (btc ©efunbljett), prudent 
 people avoid (ftd) f)iitcn ttor with the dative) uncleanliness, and wash 
 themselves often. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. — ©in tttti* at\\t\\%%lt 
 Section. 
 
 OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 The first or simple future is formed from the present 
 of the auxiliary tt>erbetf% to become,* and the infinitive 
 of the verb, as in English from shall or will, and tne 
 infinitive. Ex. 
 
 I shall love, he (she) will love. 3d) roetbe ftc&en, ct (ftc) nritb tteberu 
 Thou wilt love, you will love. £)u ttnrft lichen, Sfyt roctbet (<St<? 
 
 roetben) Ucbcn. 
 We shall love, they will love. SOBtt rcetben Ucben, ftc roctben Itckn. 
 
 I shall be loved. 3d) tt)erbe gcttc&t tvetben. 
 
 Will you love my mother ? £Bcrben (Sic metne Gutter (tcben ? 
 
 I shall love her much. 3d) rocrbc ftc fcfyr ttefcen. 
 
 I shall never love her. 3d) roctbc ftc ntc Itckn. 
 
 I shall love her when she loves 3d) rcctbc ftc ftefcen, roenn ftc nttd) 
 
 me. licbcn ttutb. (See Less. XL VII.) 
 
 Will you go out to-day ? SGScrbcn ©te fycutc au^efjen ? 
 
 To be dusty. ©taufctg f c i n *, ftemfcen. 
 
 Is it dusty? 3ft cs ftau&tg? 
 
 It is dusty. (SS tft ftau&tg. 
 
 It is very dusty. (Sg tft fefjr ftauOtg. 
 
 [s it muddy out of doors I 3ft c£ fd)mu$tg btaupen ? 
 
 It is very muddy. <£•$ tft fcfyt fcfymugtg. 
 
 To be smoky, to smoke. 9laud)en. 
 Is it smoky ? Does it smoke? S^aucfyt c& ? 
 It is very smoky. It smokes (5S taud)t fcl>tr. 
 
 much. 
 It is too smoky. It smokes too (g$ taucfyt $u fcfyr. 
 
 much. 
 
 To go in. |> t n c i n g c Fj c n *. 
 
 To come iw. herein fommen*. 
 
 » The verb fterbett*, when employed in the formation of the future ana 
 ether tenses, loses its proper signification. 
 
251 
 
 Will you go in 1 SBetben @ie fymetn gcfyctt 1 
 
 To sit down. S t cf) f e § e tn 
 
 To «7. ©tgen* (verb neuter), Par^ 
 
 past, gefcffcn. Imperf. fop. 
 
 I will sit down on that chair. 3d) tttttl mid) ouf btefcn <StuI)( fe$ett.« 
 
 Where did he sit 1 SGBo fo| ct ? 
 
 He sat upon that chair* (St fafi auf btcfem ©tuljle. 
 
 To have left, UcbviQ bltibtn*. Imperfect, 
 
 bticb. 
 
 How much money have you left t SBteoicC @clb bk'xbt Sfmcn tt&ttg? 
 I have a crown left. @g btct&t mit cm Sfyatct tibtig* 
 
 I have only three crowns left. @g bletkn mit nut btct Scaler torig. 
 If I pay him I shall have but 2Bcnn id) il)n fcegaJjte, rottb mit nut 
 little left. tvemg fi&ttg bletben (or fo witb 
 
 mit nut wentg (ibttg bletben). 
 
 OCP -A. The subject is placed after the verb in an 
 inversion of propositions ; that is, when that which 
 ought to stand first is put after, and forms as it were ; 
 the complement of the other. An inversion of propo- 
 sitions takes place when the first proposition begins 
 with a conjunction. Ex. 
 
 if he comes, I shall speak to him £Benn ct ftmmt, roctbe id) mit ifjm 
 
 (inversion). fpted)Ctu 
 
 I shall speak to him if he comes 3d) rcetbe mit ifmt fpted)en, roetm ct 
 
 (without inversion). fommt. 
 
 If it is fine weather to-morrow, 1 £Benn c$ menjen fd)one£ 2&ttet tjt, 
 
 shall take a walk (inversion). tvetbe id) fpqtcten cjefyen. 
 I shall take a walk if it is fine 3d) roetbe fpa^ieten gefjen, wenn eg 
 
 weather to-morrow (without motgen fd)3ne$ SBcttct if!. 
 
 inversion). 
 
 □CF 5 B. The subject is also placed after its verb, 
 when in an inversion of propositions, the conjunction 
 tttftttt, if, is omitted in the first. This omission of the 
 conjunction may take place or not ; but when it does, 
 the second proposition begins with the conjunction f o, 
 then (so). 
 
 Then (.so). ©o. 
 
 r*" t ™^™ ™,r „„ t «u«n CSScfemme id) mem ©elb (instead 
 
 i l vZ y y i of: rcenn id) mcin (Mb beWnme), 
 
 pay you ' C fo bwW id) (Sic. 
 
 b Whenever a will or intention and not merely futurity is to be expressed, 
 the verb ttoEctt* is used. 
 
252 
 
 -r , t T , n ( <Sprid)t et m nut (for: rcrenn er $tt 
 
 If he speaks to me, I shall an- \ ^ f .^ fc ^ e ^ . ^ ^ 
 
 O&s. When the conjunction roemt is not omitted, the 
 conjunction fo of the second proposition may either be 
 omitted or not, unless the proposition is of a certain 
 length. 
 
 If you will promise me to keep SSenn <Ste nut wrfpredjen rc>otten,c$ 
 it secret, I shall tell it to you. oefyehn $u tjoltm, fo roetbe id) e$ 
 
 Sfynen facjen. 
 
 I have spent all my money, so 3d) r)abe at! mem ©etfc) au$Qege> 
 that I have none left. ben, fo bap nur fetnS merjt ubttfl 
 
 Hettt 
 
 Ta^ZZ. ^utlen (anfuUcn). 
 
 To fill a bottle with wine. (Sine -Jfafdje nut 2Betn anftillen. 
 
 I fill my purse with money. 3d) fiittc mcincn SScutel (mime 93ot> 
 
 fe) nut ©clb. 
 With what do you fill that glass] ££onut fullcn ©te Wefe$ @(a$ ? 
 
 EXERCISES. 191* 
 
 Will your father go out to-day ] — He will go out, if it is fine 
 weather.-— Will your sister go out ] — She will go out, if it is not 
 windy. — Will you love my brother 1 — I shall love him with all my 
 heart, if he is as good as you. — Will your parents go into the 
 country to-morrow ] — They will not go, for it is too dusty. — Shall 
 we take a walk to-day ] — 'We will not take a walk, for it is too 
 muddy out of doors. — Do you see the castle of my relation behind 
 yonder mountain'? — I do see it. — Shall we go in? — We will go in, 
 If you like. — Will you go into that room ] — I shall not go into it, 
 for it is smoky. — I wish you a good morning, Madam. — Will you 
 not rome in ] — Will you not sit down ] — I will sit down upon that 
 largt chair. — Will you tell me what has become of your brother ?— * 
 I will tell you. — Here is the chair upon which he sat often.— When 
 did he die 1 — He died two years ago. — I am very much (febr) afflic- 
 ted at it. — Hast thou spent all thy money ] — I have not spent all. 
 —How much hast thou left of it]— I have not much left of it; I 
 have but one florin left. — How much money have thy sisters left ]— . 
 They have br*. three crowns left. — Have you money enough left tc 
 pay your tailor 1 — I have enough of it left to pay him ; but if I pay 
 him, I shall have but little left. — How much money will your bro- 
 thers have left] — They will have a hundred crowns left. — Will 
 you speak to my uncle if you see him ] — If I see him, I shall speak 
 to him. — Will you take a walk to-morrow ] — If it is fine weather, I 
 ethall take a walk ; but if it is bad weather, I shall stay at home*— 
 
253 
 
 vVill you pay your shoemaker 1 — I shall pay him, if I receive my 
 money to-morrow. — Why do you wish to go ] — If your father comes 
 I shall not go ; hut if he does not come, I must go. — Why do you 
 not sit down 1 — If you will stay with (fret) me, I will sit down ; 
 but if you go, I shall go along with you.— Will you love my chil- 
 dren ] — If they are good and assiduous, I shall love them ; but it 
 they are idle and naughty, I shall despise and punish them. — Am 
 I right in speaking thus (jo) ! — You are not wrong. (See end ol 
 Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.— %m\ Uttb adjt&ste 
 Cation, 
 
 OF THE PAST OR COMPOUND INFINITIVE. 
 
 In German, as in English, the past infinitive is formed 
 from the infinitive of the auxiliary and the past par- 
 ticiple of the verb ; but in English the past participle 
 stands after the infinitive, whereas in German it pre- 
 cedes it. Ex. 
 
 Have loved, to have loved. ©cttcbt fjct&cn, gcltebt $u fyaUru 
 
 In order to have loved. Urn geltc&t $tt Ijobcn. 
 
 "Without having loved. £)(jne gelteBt $u (jofccn. 
 
 Have been loved. Sctte&t roorbcn fetrt. 
 
 To have been loved. (Skltcbt roerfoen $u fctlt. 
 
 OF THE PAST FUTURE. 
 
 The past or compound future is formed, as the first 
 or simple future (preceding Lesson) from the present 
 of the auxiliary tt>erben* and the past infinitive Ex* 
 
 I shall have loved, he (she) will 3d) roctbc gcttcfet Fjabcn, er (|te) ruit§ 
 
 have loved. geltcfct fjabcn. 
 
 Thou wilt have loved, you will *Du nrirfi geftebt fyabm, Sbr n>crt>ct 
 
 have loved. (€>tc reerfccn) getiebt baben. 
 
 We shall have loved, they will SQBir roerfccn gcticbt fyabin* ftc nfetbcn 
 
 have loved. gcftebt babcn, 
 
 I shall have been loved. 3d) roerbc geftcbt tBorfcen fetn. 
 
 T shall have written my letters 3d) roctfrc mctnc SBvicfe gcfdbrictcn 
 
 before you return. baben, the 0tc aurueffommen. 
 
 tin. tu -a 4- + u i, f^ cnn *# bag 9>fert> bc$af)(t foabett 
 
 When I have paid for the horse ^ ^ b ^ ^ } 
 
 I shall have only ten crowns i ^^ ^ ^ t ^ ^ ^ 
 lett * [ ttbrtg Mcibcn. 
 
254 
 
 JO* A. When at the end >f a proposition there arc 
 two infinitives, two past participles, or an infinitive 
 and a past participle, the verb which on account ot 
 the conjunction ought to be thrown to the end of the 
 phrase, may be placed either before or after those in- 
 finitives or participles. Ex. 
 
 (2Bcib nxtben @ic tfyun, rocnn ffU $u 
 9Jttttacj gcgcffcn fjakn roetbcn, 
 or roctfcen $u SDUttag Qcgcffcn fjas 
 L ben ? 
 
 When I have spoken to your I®'™ id > 3*™ ^^ 9f tc * cn 
 
 brother I shall know what I I £ a f cn ™ xtc > ° r ™ rb l 9*% 
 
 have to do I & a0cn ' f° n?crt>e l * wl ff cn ' wa * td) 
 
 [ $u tfjun fjabe. 
 
 DCr* The latter way of placing the verb is the most 
 elegant and most usual. Ex. 
 
 (3d) fa&c tfym gefagt, baf^SU tag 
 Spferb fyaben ttcriaufen mufien (and 
 not t)cr!aufcn gcmuft or muffcn 
 fyaOen). 
 
 TAe same (feminine). 
 
 The same thing. 
 
 One and the same. 
 
 It is all one (the same). 
 
 Sucn. 
 
 £) t c f c I b e, t> t e n a m I i d) c. (See 
 Lessons XII. and XIV.) 
 
 { Sttefette (ttc nam(tdf)c) ©ac^c. 
 { ©asfclbe (t>a$ namttcfye) Ding. 
 
 (Stneriet. 
 
 (S$ ift ctncrtei. 
 
 ilfa^c. i^m. Neut. 
 ©olcfyer, f o I ct> e, folcfyeS 
 
 (is declined according to 
 the characteristic termi- 
 nation). 
 
 Obs. A. When fold) is preceded by em or fettt, it has 
 the declension of an adjective. Ex. 
 
 Such a man, such a woman, such (Sin fo(d)et SDtonn, etnc fotcfye grew, 
 
 a child. ein fotdjeS Jtint). 
 
 Such men merit esteem. (Sotcfyc Sflenfcfym ttetbtenen tfefytung. 
 
 Obs. B. When fold) is followed by eitt, it is not de- 
 clined. Ex. 
 
255 
 
 Such a man, such a woman, such <Sotd) em SJtatttt, fofd) erne #tau # |b(c| 
 a happiness. cm (Sjlucf. 
 
 On the outside of without, out of. 2( U (5 c t Ij a t t> (a preposition gov* 
 
 erning the genitive). 
 
 The church stands outside the 2)te Jttrd)e ift aupetljatt) feet ©tafct. 
 
 town. 
 I shall wait for you before the 3d) roetbc <Su t)cr tcm Sftere (<Stabt* 
 
 town-gate. tfyorc) crroarten. 
 
 Thetownorci^e, JgP^ 
 
 To go out. £tnau$gcl)cn*. 
 
 To come out. ipctausfrmmcn*. 
 
 Seldom (rarely). ©eftcn. 
 
 Does he sit under the tree 1 ©tgt et untcr bem 23aume ? 
 
 He is sitting under it. (St ftfjt barunter. (Obs. B. Les- 
 
 son LII.) 
 
 To continue (to proceed), vl* * tfeftnu" ' 
 
 He continues his speech. f (St fafyrt in fetnet 5Kcbe fort. 
 
 The armetile $ bcr %>petit, 
 
 I he appetite, ^ ^ ^ (u ^ Me ^ jum ^ m ; 
 
 the narrative, the tale, btc (Sqa fyluno, ; 
 
 the shore (the coast, the bank), t)a6 Ufet ; 
 
 the sea-shore, bag Ufet t>c€ £fleeteg ; 
 
 on the sea-shore, am Ufcr beg 5Q?cere^. 
 
 iVo* wn^7 (not before). 9Z t d) t e r) c r — 6 i g. 
 Before. @ f) e , cf)C atg, 6 e t) t. 
 
 1 shall no see him until I go 3d) roetbe tr)n ntd)t fefyen, cr)e (6c? 
 
 thither. oot) id) Ijtngefye. 
 
 Did you see him before his de- £afcen <Ste tfyn t)or femet 2C6rctfe ge* 
 
 parture ] fefjen ? 
 
 I will not do it until you tell 3d) tfjue eg ntd)t, tug ©te eg mir fat 
 
 me. gen. 
 
 There is, there are. £)a tjt, Plural, t>a ftnb. 
 
 Here is, here are. £tet tft, — bier ftnb. 
 
 Here I am. #tet bin id). 
 
 There is my book. £)a tjt mem 33ud). 
 
 There it is. £)a tjt eg. 
 
 There they are. 2)a ftnb jte. 
 
 » ^ortfe^enis a regular verb active and governs the accusative ; fortf oljren*, 
 wi the contrary, is neuter and irregular and governs the dative with the pro* 
 position in or nut. 
 
256 
 
 Therefore. 2)eproegen, t>ar)er. 
 
 That is the reason why. £)a$ ift bic Urfodbe, rcatum. 
 
 Therefore I say so. ©epwcgcn fagc id) e& 
 
 My sister's feet are cold. 9)Mner ©cfyrccftct frteren tie $$$t. 
 
 Her hands are cold. 3fa fttcten tie ^>anbc (e$ ift tf)t on 
 
 ten £ant>en fait). 
 
 EXERCISES. 192. 
 
 When will you go to Italy 1 — I shall go as soon as I have learnt 
 Italian. — When will your brothers go to Germany 1 — They will 
 go thither as soon as they know German. — When will they learn 
 it ]— They will learn it when they have found a good master. — 
 How much money shall we have left when we have paid for oui 
 horses ] — When we have paid for them we shall have only a hun- 
 dred crowns left. — Have you told my brother that I have been 
 obliged to sell the carriage 1 — I have told him so. — Have you writ- 
 ten to the same man to whom my father wrote ] — I have not writ- 
 ten to the same, but to another. — Have they already answered you] 
 — Not yet, but I hope to receive a letter next week. — Have you 
 ever seen such a person ? — I have never seen such a one. — Have 
 you already seen our church * — I have not seen it yet. — Where does 
 it stand] — It stands outside the town. — If you wish to see it, I 
 will go with you in order to show it to you. — Who is there] — It is 
 I. — Who are those men ] — They are foreigners who wish to speak 
 to you. — Of what country are they ] — They are Americans.— 
 Where have you been since 1 saw you] — We sojourned long on 
 the sea-shore, until a ship arrived, which brought us to France. — 
 Will you continue your narrative ] — Scarcely had we arrived in 
 Prance when we were taken to the king who received (cmfnafym) us 
 very well and sent us back to our country. — Whom are you look- 
 ing for ] — I am looking for my little brother. — If you wish to find 
 him you must go into the garden, for he is there. — The garden is 
 large, and I shall not be able to find him if you do not tell me in 
 which part (fc>er £f)Ctl) of the garden he is. — He is sitting under 
 the large tree under which we were sitting yesterday.*— Now I 
 shall find him. 
 
 193. 
 
 Why do your children not live in France 1 — They wish to learn 
 English, that is the reason why they live in England. — Why do 
 you sit near the fire ] — My hands and feet are cold, that is the rea- 
 son why I sit near the fire. — What do the people live upon that 
 live on the sea-shore] — They live upon fish alone. — Why will you 
 not go a hunting any more ] — I hunted yesterday the whole day, 
 and I killed nothing but an ugly bird, that is the reason why I shall 
 not go a hunting any more. — Why do you not eat ] — I shall not eat 
 before I have a good appetite. — Why does your brother eat so 
 much ] — He has a good appetite, that is the reason he eats so much 
 —If you have read the books which I lent you, why do you not re* 
 
257 
 
 turn them to me]— I intend reading them once more, that is the 
 reason why I have not yet returned them to you ; but I shall return 
 them to you as soon as I have read them a ($um) second time. — 
 Why did you not bring me my clothes ] — They were not made, 
 therefore I did not bring them; but I bring them to you now, here 
 they are. — You have learnt your lesson, why has your sister not 
 learnt hers ] — She has taken a walk with my mother, that is the 
 reason why she has not learnt it ; but she will learn it to-morrow. 
 — When will you correct my exercises *? — I will correct them when 
 you bring me those of your sister. — Do you think (gloubcn) you 
 have made mistakes in them. — I do not know. — If you have made 
 mistakes you have not studied your lessons well ; for the lessons must 
 be learnt well, to make no mistakes in the exercises. — It is all the 
 same, if you do not correct them (for) me to-day, I shall not learn 
 them before (fo roetbe id) fte erf!) to-morrow. — You must make no 
 mistakes in your exercises, for you have all you want, in order to 
 make none. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 EIGHTY.THIRD LESSON.-JDm tmfr fldjtpflrt* 
 tcction. 
 
 To die of a disease. 2Cn etner (dative) &ranffjett fter* 
 
 fcen*. 
 The small pox bte Slattern (plural of tie S5(at« 
 
 ter, the blister, the pustule, the 
 pock). 
 She died of the small pox. @ie iff an ben Slattern geftotfcen. 
 
 The fever, the intermitting fever, bat gtebct, foag £Bed)felfteber. 
 He had a cold fit. (St rjatte etnen 2CnfaH »on gie&et. 
 
 He has an ague. (Sr f)al ba$ gtcbet fcefommen. 
 
 His fever has returned (5t r)at t>a$ Jtefcet nriefcet fcefom* 
 
 men. 
 The apoplexy, bet ©dftag, bet ©d&tagftup. 
 
 He has been struck with apo- $ ® w .f * tfl 9 tyVfr gerfi&tt 
 
 Y 2 < (St tft t>om ^ctyage gevu&rt wets 
 
 * J* t ben. 
 
 C ®uten 2C6gang f)a&cn*. 
 To sell well. < ®ut afrqeften*. 
 
 ( asict £a'ufet ftnben*. 
 Wine sells well. f £)et 2£etn gefyt gut a& (6at guten 
 
 2Cfcgang). 
 Cloth sells well. f £)a$ Sud) bat guten 2Cfcgang (fin* 
 
 bet Met £&ufcr). 
 Wine will sell well next year, f 3)et SSetn rotrb nadjjle* Sal)* gus 
 
 ten 2C0qanQ fia&en 
 
258 
 
 To open. 
 
 To shut. 
 
 To open. 
 
 That door opens easily. 
 
 The door does not shut. 
 The window shuts well. 
 
 Far off, from afar. 
 
 That house is seen far off. 
 
 Summer clothes are not worn 
 in winter. 
 
 That is not said. 
 
 That cannot be comprehended. 
 
 It is clear. 
 
 To conceive, to comprehend. 
 
 According to circumstances. 
 
 The disposition, 
 the circumstance, 
 
 According as. 
 
 According to circumstances. 
 
 It depends on circumstances. 
 
 Do not put the glass upon the 
 table, for it will break. 
 
 To put. 
 To lay. 
 
 £)effnen, aufmacfyen, auffd)(tef<en*.» 
 ~3umad)en, $ufd)ttefien * (active 
 
 verbs). b 
 Sugcfyen*, gufd^ltepen*. Part, past, 
 
 gefctyoffen. Imperf. fcfylcp. 
 "ttufgefyen* (a neuter verb), fief) 3ff* 
 
 nen. 
 ©tcfe Sbffc gc^t (etdjt auf (ift tad)* 
 
 $u effnen). 
 £)ie Sbtir fcfticgt nuf)t. 
 &ai genftet fctyiegt gut. 
 
 !23on rcettem, son feme. 
 Wan ftef)t &tefe$ #au$ Don weitem 
 (t)on feme). 
 
 ^ommcrfletber tta'gt man ntcfyt im 
 
 Winter. 
 SommerHetbec roetben ntd)t im SSitu 
 
 tct gcttagen. 
 
 £)aS tDtrb mcfyt gefagt. 
 £)a$ ift unbegteifttcf). 
 (SS ift beut(tci). 
 
 SBegmfen*. Part, past, begrtffen. 
 Imperf. begriff. 
 " 9la$ ten Umftanben. 
 . S^ad) S5efdf)Qffcn()cit bet Umftanbe. 
 
 tie 23cfcf)aflfcnt)cit ; 
 
 bet Umftanb. 
 
 Sftadjbem, fe nacfybem, in fo fern. 
 9?ad)bem e$ ift (nadjbem t$ Eommt). 
 • Sftadjbem bte Umftanbe ftnb. 
 
 <Ste(len @te ba^ ®(a$ ntd>t auf ten 
 Stfd) ; benn e$ tmtb getbtecljett. 
 Imperf. ^etbtad). 
 
 ©tclten. 
 
 Segen. 
 
 * Deffnen and aufmctdjen mean to remove the obstacle in order to give ac- 
 cess, as : bte £f)ore, bte %$ux ernes %immtx8, ctnen (Sctyranf, etnen 93rtef offnen 
 or aufmaefcen, to open the town-gates, the door of a room, a cupboard, a let 
 ter. Deffnen is only employed to make an opening in the thing itself, as : ti- 
 ncn £etd?nam, etne 9lber, em ©efefymut offnen, to open a corpse, a vein, an ab- 
 scess, because there is no opening yet. So we say bte £aufgrabett effnett, to 
 open the trenches. 5luffd)ltef3en is only employed in speaking of things that 
 lire shut with a key or a padlock. 
 
 b The same distinction is to be made between JUtttac^ett and &uf($lte£ien*, as 
 between <mfma$ett and anffcfyltefiett*. 
 
259 
 
 To set, to seat. 
 
 To stick. <Stecfen. c 
 
 Are the women handsome 1 ©tnb t>te Srctuen fcfyott ? 
 
 They are so ; they are rich and Sie ftnt> e $ ; fie fint) retd) unt> fcfyftft 
 handsome. 
 
 What countrywoman is she i £ gj&j* | Jf » ? 
 
 She is from France. @ic ijt cm£ (or son) $rcm£retd). 
 
 To be angry at somebody (about 23ofe auf Semcmben (ufcer etroaS) 
 
 anything). fetn. 
 
 What are you angry about ? SOBorftOer fint) 0ic t>ofc ? 
 
 Are you sorry for having done St)ut e$ 3f)tten leifc, e£ getfjan *U 
 it f bakm ? 
 
 C ©*$ tFjut mit ktb. 
 [ am sorry for it. < @$ tft mit md)t tteb. (See Lesson 
 
 C LXXVII.) 
 
 Polite (courteous), impolite (un- .poflicl) ; unt)ofttd). 
 
 civil). 
 Happy, unhappy. @>Utcf(td) ; ungtucftid). 
 
 What sort of pen have you lost 1 £Bct$ fur cine $et>er fyabm @te rerfo: 
 
 ten? 
 A gold one. (Sine cjetccne. 
 
 What sort of pens has your 835ct$ fur gebctn fyctt Sfyrc (Scfyweftet 
 
 sister made ? gcfd)nttten ? 
 
 Good ones. (S5ute. 
 
 exercise 194. 
 
 Of what illness did your sister die 1 — She died of the fever. — 
 How is your brother 1 — My brother is no longer living. He died 
 three months ago. — I am surprised at it, for he was very well last 
 
 c ©tellen is used when the person or the thing spoken of is, as it were 
 standing upright, and legen when it is lying. Ex. bte ©Lifer, bte ^lafcfye auj 
 ben Ztfa) ftelien, to put the glasses, the bottle on the table ; em $tttb auf ba$ 
 93ett legen, to place a child upon the bed ; ein Jtletb auf ba$ 33ett legen, to put 
 a coat upon the bed ; tt)0 fjaben Sie metnen ©tod: Ju'ngeftellt? where have you 
 placed my stick? tt>o fyabtn ©ie meiu Sfteffer fymgelegt? where have you put 
 my knife? The verbs ftefyen* and liegen* may be explained by the English 
 verbs: to stand and to lie. Ex. 3i)r (&tod ftet)t in meinem Simmer, your 
 stick is (stands) in my room; Sljr §8 ruber ffcefyt am ^enfier, your brother 
 stands at the window ; S|r SUieffer Itegt auf bem £tf($e, your knife is (lies) 
 upon the table; J)ter fte^t S&r (Stodf unb ba liegt 3>ljr Sfteffer, here stands 
 your stick and there lies your knife. (5ei3eu nearly answers to the English 
 verb to seat, as : fefcen <5it ftcj) fytevljer, seat yourself here. It is also used in 
 the following idiom : Semanbcn m ben ©tanb fe^en, to enable some one, as : 
 id) fmbe ttm in ben Stanb gefe^t e3 m tfmn, I have enabled him to do it. 
 <&ted en, as an active verb, is used with the preposition i tt followed by the 
 accusative. Ex. 2>n bte £afd)e ftecfen, to put into the pocket. We stall 
 hereafter see various other examples of these verbs. 
 
260 
 
 summer when I was in tne country. — Of what did he die 1 — He 
 died of apoplexy. — How is the mother of your friend ? — She is 
 not well ; she had an attack of ague the day before yesterday, and 
 this morning the fever has returned (unb tucfen 9}?ergcn roicfcer). — 
 Has she the intermitting fever? — I do not know, but she often has 
 cold fits. — What has become of the woman whom I saw at your 
 mother's ! — She died this morning of apoplexy. — Did the wine 
 sell well last year ] — It did not sell very well ; but it will sell 
 better next year, for there will be a great deal of it, and it will not 
 be dear. — Why do you open the door? — Do you not see how it 
 smokes here] — I do not see it; but you must open the window in- 
 stead of opening the door. — The window does not open easily, 
 that is the reason why I open the door. — When will you shut it ? 
 — I will shut it as soon as there is no more smoke. — Why do you 
 not put those beautiful glasses on the small table 1 — If I put them 
 upon that little table they will break, — Did you often go a fishing 
 when you were in that country ] — We often went a fishing and a 
 hunting. — If you will go with us into the country, you will see the 
 castle of rny father. — You are very polite, Sir ; but I have seen 
 that castle already. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.— bier tttti* adftijiett 
 CerJio.tt. 
 
 The utility, the use, t>er 9?ugcn ; 
 
 the advantage, t>er aScrtbt'U. 
 
 This thing is of no use. Dtcfc @ad>e ift t>on fetncm 9?u$en- 
 
 To profit by a thing. Sttugcn ou£ ctnct <Sad)e stefycn*. 
 
 To turn a thing to profit. ©id) etne <&ad)t au ^uge mad)Ctt. 
 
 To be useful to any one. 3enicmt>em nu|cn (or nugcn). 
 
 Of what use is that ] SOSegu nflgt t>ag ? 
 
 That is of no use. £)as nugt ntcfytS. 
 
 Useful. SMeltd). 
 
 Useless. itnniig, nu^teS. 
 
 Is it useful to write a great deal 1 3ft cs ntigltd), Mel $u ffyrci&en 7 
 
 It is useful. <S$ ift ntigltd). 
 
 Is it well (right) to do it 1 3ft c$ HM9, e$ *u tfjun ? 
 
 It is not well (wrong) (SS ift unlulltg (unred)t) 
 
 What is that ! 2£a$ if! tas? 
 
 I do not know what it is* 3d) roetp mdjt, \va$ eS ift. 
 
 To be called. £ c t ff e n *. Part, past, g c \) e t fj e n 
 
 Imperf. f) t c p. 
 
 What is your name 1 f jffite fjctpen @tc ? 
 
 My name is Charles. + 3d) faipe (mem Sttamc ift) &<xxl 
 
261 
 
 What do you call this in Ger- £Btc fyctpt bag auf bcutfcft ? 
 
 man ? 
 How do you express (say) this £Bic facjcn ©U fcaS auf fran$6ftfd) ? 
 
 in French 1 
 What is that called 1 SBte ncnnt man fc>a£ ? 
 
 To name. IKcnncn*. Part, past, genonnt 
 
 Imperf. nannte. 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE NAMES OF PERSONS. a 
 
 The names of persons are declined either without 
 or with the article. Without the article they take $ 
 in the genitive, and en in the dative and accusative, 
 with the article they add nothing to their termination. 
 Ex. 
 
 Nom. ffiflfyelm or ber SBtffyefm, William. 
 
 Gen. 3BBin»efatg — be£ SSityefo/ of William. 
 
 Dat. 2Bttyefaten — bem 2Btff)efot, to William. 
 
 Ace. SBttyelmen — ben 2Btff)elm, William. 
 
 Nom. ©Kfafcetf) or bte @hfa&etb, Elizabeth. 
 
 Gen. @fifabctl)8 — ber ©tfabetf), of Elizabeth. 
 
 Dat. &tfabeti)m — ber (SSfa6et4 to Elizabeth. 
 
 Ace. ©tfafcetfyen — bte (glifabetfy/ Elizabeth. 
 
 Obs. A. Names of persons terminating in fcf), 8, ft, 
 #, £, if take en£ in the* genitive. Ex. granj, Francis ; 
 gen. gremjen^. Names of females in a or e (tne com- 
 mon endings for almost all such names) change in the 
 genitive a or e into en£* Ex. SBityehnina, Wilhelmine ; 
 gen. SBtlfyefaunenS, of Wilhelmine. ?eonore, Eleanor ; 
 ?eonoren$, of Eleanor. 
 
 Obs. B. To indicate that the ending of the geni- 
 tive is not a part of the name, it is commonly separ- 
 ated by an apostrophe as in English. Ex. @d)ttter'$ 
 ©ebtcfyte, Schiller's poems ; ©oetfye'S SOBerfe, Goethe's 
 works. 
 
 Sooner— than. (gfyet — als. 
 
 Rather — than. Eicfcet — at$. 
 
 He has arrived sooner than I. (£r ijt efyet angefemmen ati id). 
 
 * For the proper names of countries and towns, see Lesson XLIX. 
 
262 
 
 (Stebet roetfe td) mein ©c(t> in ben 
 $(up, etc td) c$ t»crfct>wcnt)e. 
 (Stye id) mctn (Mb wtfcfyroenbe, wet* 
 fe td) e$ Uebct in ben $(u(j. 
 J will rather pay him than go 3d) will ifyn Iteber be$af)len, alg Ijm* 
 
 thither. gcfyen. 
 
 I will rather burn the coat than 3d) will ben $Kocf liebet ttetbtenncn, 
 wear it. ate ifjn ttagen. 
 
 Swre. © e to t p. 
 
 To be sure of a thing. (Sinet (Sacfte gcw'tp fein*. 
 
 I am sure of that. 3d) bin bcffen gcnup. 
 
 I am sure that he has arrived. 3d) roeifj (or bin) gcrotp, tap cr an: 
 
 gcfommen tft. 
 
 IknowitwelL f&V**** 
 
 To repair to, to go to. (Sid) roofjtn begebcn*. 
 
 I went to my room. 3d) begab mid) ciuf mem 3immer. 
 
 He repaired to that town. (5*t begab (id) in biefe ©tabt. 
 
 To repair to the army, to one's ©id) gut 21'tmce, 311 fcinem Regimen* 
 
 regiment. te begebcn*. 
 
 I repaired to that place. 3d) fyabe mid) an bicfen Drt begebcn. 
 
 He repaired thither. (St fyat fid) bat)in begebcn. 
 
 Go where you please. ©efyen ©te, roofyin <Ste roollen. 
 
 George the Third. ®eotg bet £)tttre. 
 
 Louis the Fourteenth. Subroig bet 93ter$efynte. 
 Henry the Fourth. £cinrtd) bet SSiertc. 
 
 Europe, European. (Sutopa; eutopaifd). 
 
 Fluently. (S5c(duftg. 
 
 Charles the Fifth spoke several Rati bet ^(inftc \pxa<b gctd'uftg mef)* 
 European languages fluently. tete eutopatfdje ©ptacfyen. 
 Such a thing. (So cttt)05. 
 
 Have you ever seen such a |>aben ©ie }e fc etroaS gefefyen ? 
 
 thing 1 
 Have you eve; heard of such a $aben <Sie ie fo etwaS gefyott? 
 
 thing ] 
 I have never seen nor heard of 3d) fjabe nie fo ctroas gefefyen nod) 
 such a thing. gefyott. 
 
 exercises. 195. 
 
 When did you see my father's castle ] — I saw it when 1 was 
 travelling last year. It is one of the finest castles that I have ever 
 seen ; it is seen far off. — How is that said 1 — That is not said. 
 That cannot be comprehended. — Cannot every thing be expressed 
 in your language 1 — Every thing can be expressed, but not as in 
 yours. — Will you rise early to-morrow 1 — It will depend upon cir- 
 cumstances ; if I go to bed early, I shall rise early, but if I go to 
 
Q63 
 
 oed late, I shall rise late. — Will you love my children ? — If they 
 are good, I shall love them. — Will you dine with us to-morrow ] — 
 If you get ready (ju&erettcn foficn) the food I like, I shall dine with 
 you. — Have you already read the letter which you received this 
 morning'? — I have not opened it yet. — When will you read it]— 
 I shall read it as soon as I have time. — Of what use is that ] — It is 
 of no use. — Why have you picked it up ] — I have picked it up, in 
 order to show it to you. — Can you tell me what it is ] — I cannot 
 tell you, for I do not know; but I shall ask my brother who will 
 tell you. — Where have you found it 1 — I have found it on the bank 
 of the river, near the wood. — Did you perceive it from afar ] — I did 
 not want to perceive it from afar, for I passed by the side of the 
 river. — Have you ever seen such a thing 1 — Never. — Is it .useful to 
 speak much 1 — If one wishes to learn a foreign language it is use- 
 ful to speak a great deal. — Is it as useful to write as to speak 1 — 
 (t is more useful to speak than to write ; but in order to learn a 
 foreign language, one must do both (fretfceS). — Is it useful to write 
 /til that one says 1 — That is useless. 
 
 196. 
 
 Where did you take this book from 1 — I took it out of the room 
 of your friend (fern.). — Is it right to take the books of other people 1 
 — It is not right, I know ; but I wanted it, and I hope that your 
 friend will not be displeased ; for I will return it to her as soon as 
 I have read it. — What is your name ] — My name is William. — 
 What is your sister's name ? — Her name is Eleanor. — Why does 
 Charles complain of his sister ] — Because she has taken his pens. 
 — Of whom do those children complain 1 — Francis complains of 
 Eleanor and Eleanor of Francis. — Who is right] — They are both 
 wrong ; for Eleanor wishes to take Francis's books and Francis 
 Eleanor's. — To whom have you lent Schiller's works ] — I have lent 
 the first volume to William and the second to Elizabeth. — How is 
 that said in French ] — That is not said in French. — How is that 
 said in German ] — It is said thus. — Has the tailor already brought 
 you your new coat] — He has brought it to me, but it does not fit me 
 well. — Will he make you another] — He must make me another ; 
 for rather than wear it, I will give it away. — Will you use that 
 horse ] — I shall not use it. — Why will you not use it ] — Because it 
 does not suit me — Will you pay for it ] — I will rather pay for it 
 than use it. — To whom do those fine books belong ] — They belong 
 to William. — Who has given them to him ] — His good father. — 
 Will he read them ? — He will tear them rather than read them — 
 Are you sure that he will not read them ] — I am sure of it, for he 
 has told me so. (See end of Lesson XXXI V.> 
 
264 
 
 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.— Mnf tttti* ftciftijpte 
 
 Sweet. 
 
 mild, 
 
 agreeable, 
 Sweet wine, 
 A mild zephyr, 
 A mild air, 
 A soft sleep, 
 Nothing makes life more agree- 
 able than the society of and 
 intercourse with our friends. 
 
 Sour, acid. 
 
 To cry, to scream, to shriek. 
 
 To help. 
 
 Thou helpest, he helps. 
 I help him to do it. 
 f help you to write. 
 
 I will help you to work. 
 To cry out for help. 
 
 0fp; 
 
 fanft; 
 
 ancjcneljm. 
 
 flip et SBetn ; 
 
 etn fanftet: 3epfr)r ; 
 
 eine fanfte £uft ; 
 
 etn fanftcr @d)taf. 
 
 9£id)t$ mad)t bag Scben ancjenefyner, 
 
 a(6t>ie ©cfettfcfyaft unt> t>et Umaana, 
 
 nut unfern grcunfcen. 
 
 (Sauet. 
 
 © d) r e i c n *. Part, past, g c - 
 f d) r t c e n. Imperf. f d) 1 1 e. 
 
 # e t f e n * (governs the dative). 
 Part, past, 9 e I) 1 f e n. Imperf. 
 *«tf. 
 
 ©u i&ttfli, cr fottft 
 C 3d) Ijclfe ifjm battn. 
 £ 3d) bin ifym tartn fcefyittfrtd). 
 
 3d) fjctfe S^nen fct>rctbcn. (See Les- 
 son XL.) 
 
 3d) twill Sbncn arkiten rjetfen. 
 
 Um £ulfe fcfyretcn*. 
 
 To inquire after some one. (Sid) nad) Scmantcm erftmfcigtti 
 
 (nad) Semanbem ftagen). 
 Will you have the goodness to SBoflen Bu tie ®utc fjaben, nut btefe 
 
 pass that plate to me 1 (Sd)itffel $u retcfyen ? 
 
 Will you pass that plate to me Snellen <Ste mit gefSlltgft fciefe (Scfyftf* 
 
 if you please 1 
 To reach. 
 
 If you please. 
 
 complaisant, pleasing. 
 4s you please. 
 At youi pleasure. 
 As you like 
 
 To kh.'ck at the door. 
 
 To happen. 
 Something has happened, 
 
 fcl rcidjen ? 
 
 $eid)cn. 
 C SefSmgt 
 £ £Benn eg 3^ncn gefatltg if!. 
 
 OtfBSig. 
 
 £Bte eg 3fynen ^efd'Hig tft. 
 
 isDSt 
 
 2Cn tie Sfjiit fCepfen. 
 f®td) eretancn, fid) $utrctgen* (take 
 J r)at>en for their auxiliary). 
 } SBorfallcn*, gefcfyc&en*, fcegegnen 
 (^ (take fein). 
 
 (5$ fjat fid) etroag suQctragen (etetg* 
 net). 
 
265 
 
 What has happened 1 £Ba$ tfl fcorgcfatf en ^gefdjcljen) ? 
 
 A great misfortune has happened. (£$ jft ctn gte£eS llnglucf gcfd)ef)ett. 
 Nothing has happened. (S$ tfl nid)t6 ttotgefcdtcm 
 
 A misfortune has happened to <S$ tfl tfjm ctn Ungtttd kgcgnct. 
 
 him. 
 I had an accident. 3d) fjattc ctncn Bufatt, 
 
 To joowr. © t c p e n*, f c^ u 1 1 c n, c i n f d) c its 
 
 fen. 
 To joowr Away. ££ c g 9 i e p c n*. 
 
 To sAed. 83 c t g t c p c n*. 
 
 To shed tears. 3#r5nen wtgiefkn* (Part past, wrs 
 
 gcffcn. Imperf. ttctgop), 
 A tear. (Sine Static 
 
 With tears in his, her, our, or 9D2tt tfyr&ncntxm 2Cugcn. 
 
 my eyes. 
 I pour wine into a glass. 3d) gte£c £Bctn in ctn ®(a$. 
 
 I put corn into a sack. 3d) fd)utte @ettctt>c in ctncn ©acf. 
 
 I pour out some drink for that 3d) fcfyenft fciefcm Sfltanne $u trinfcn 
 
 man. ctn. 
 
 I pour away the wine, for it is 3d) gicpe ten £Bctn reeg, benn cv taugt 
 
 good for nothing. ntd)t$. 
 
 ^ t SOS a ^ a n b c t r e f f e n* (a n 6 e* 
 As to, as for ^ with i 
 
 Cf 2Ba$ anfcetteffen* ( 
 respect to. < t r f f e n, a n b e t r a f). 
 ft SScte anbclangett. 
 
 As to me, I do not know what f -2Bag mid) antutrifft (cmbctangt), 
 to say. fc roctg id) nld)t, axis id) fagen foil 
 
 To me€* m^A. ftfntreffen* (governs the ace). 
 
 Part, past, gcttoffem Im 
 perf . t r a f. ' 
 
 Where have you met with him! f %&* faben ©te tf)U emgettoffen? 
 
 I do not know what to do. f 3d) roctp ntd)t, n>a£ id) tf)un foil. 
 
 I do not know where to go to. \ 3d) roeip ntd)t, roofytn id) gefjet! 
 
 fc«. 
 He does not know what to an- f @t roctfi ntcf)t, nxi$ et antwcrtett 
 
 swer. foil. 
 
 We do not know what to buy. f 2Btr roiffen nld)t, roctg nrit faufetl 
 
 fcllen. 
 
 To unbosom one's self to some ©id) Scmanbcm wrtraucn. 
 
 one. 
 To trust some one. Scmanbcm traucn or sertrauen. 
 
 To distrust one. « ©ncm mi^auen. 
 
 ) (Stncm ntd)t ttauen. 
 Do you trust that man ? Stauen (or Mttrauen) <SU btcfetfi 
 
 Stfanne ? 
 12 
 
2m 
 
 I do trust him. 
 
 He trusts me. 
 
 We must not trust every body. 
 
 To laugh at something. 
 
 Do you laugh at that ? 
 
 I do laugh at it. 
 
 At what do you laugh ? 
 
 To laugh at, to deride some one. 
 
 I laugh at (deride) you. 
 
 Full. 
 
 A full glass. 
 
 A full j^iass of wine. 
 
 A book full of errors. 
 
 The means, 
 To afford (to have the means). 
 Can you afford to buy a horse ] 
 
 I can afford it. 
 
 I cannot afford it. 
 
 The lady, 
 
 To taste, to like, to relish. 
 
 How do you like this wine ? 
 1 like it well. 
 I don't like it 
 
 3eW« 
 
 3d) traue (or uertrauc) tfjm, 
 (Sr traut (or ttcrtraut) nun 
 SBtt nitijjen ntd)t ctncm 
 
 ttauen. 
 Uefccr etroas fadjen. 
 £ad)cn @ie bariibcr ? 
 3d) tacfyc barfi&cr. 
 SQScrflbcr (ad)cn (Ste ? 
 3cmantcn au$(ad)cn (or wtfadjcn). 
 3d) tacfte (Sic au$ foerfocfye ©ic). 
 
 as oil 
 
 Gin t>ctXc5 (SJfo*. 
 
 (Sin ®(a$ Doll SGBctn (ctn t>oUc^ ®la< 
 
 SBein). 
 (Sin SBud) t»ottcr $«Mer. 
 
 tog 9KtttcL 
 
 £)ie DDUttct &afan*. 
 
 £aOen (Sic tic SDtfttcf, ctn 9)fert $u 
 
 faufen ? 
 3d) fyaOc tic SRtttcl ta$tt (td) F)a&c 
 
 ftc). 
 3d) babe ftc ntd)t. 
 tic £)ame. 
 
 © d) m c cf c n. 
 
 2Btc fcrmtccft S&nen ticfet 805cm ? 
 (Sr fdjmccft mtr gut. 
 (Sr fefymceft mtr ntctyt, 
 
 exercises. 197. 
 
 Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart ? — They will ra- 
 ther tear them than learn them by heart. — What does this man ask 
 me for 1 — He asks you for the money which you owe him. — If he 
 will repair to-morrow morning to my house I will pay him what I 
 owe him. — He will rather lose his money than repair thither. — 
 Charles the Fifth, who spoke fluently several European languages, 
 said that we should (man muffe) speak Spanish with the gods, 
 Italian with our (fetnet) mistress (tic ©eltcfcte Obs. Lesson LIII.) 
 French with our (fetnem) friend (masc.), German with soldiers, 
 English with geese (tic @kms), Hungarian (una/irtfd)) with horses, 
 and Bohemian (fcofymtfcf)) with the devil (tet SeufeQ. — Why does 
 the mother of our old servant shed tears ] What has happened to 
 her] — She sheds tears because the old clergyman, her friend, who 
 was so very good to her (tcr tfyt fo met ©uteS gett)an \)<\t), died a few 
 days ago. — Of what illness di-d he die ] — He was- struck with apo 
 plexy. — Have you helped your father to write his letters 1 — I have 
 nelped him. — Will you help me to work when we 4*0 to town? — I 
 
267 
 
 will help you to work, if you will help me to gel a livelihood. — 
 Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap ? — I have 
 inquired after him ; hut nobody could tell me what has become of 
 him. — Where did he live when you w r ere here three years ago 1 — 
 He lived then in Carles Street, No. 55. — How do you like this 
 wine ? — I like it very well ; but it is a little sour. 
 
 198. 
 
 How does your sister like those apples? — She likes them very 
 veil ; but she says that they are a little too sweet. — Will you have 
 ,he goodness to pass that plate to me ? — With much pleasure. — 
 Shall (©oil) I pass these fishes to you? — I will thank you to pass 
 •hem to me. — Shall I pass the bread to your sister ? — You will 
 oblige (scrbtnt>cn*) me by passing it to her. — How does your mo- 
 ther like our food ? — She likes it very well ; but she says that she 
 has eaten enough. — What dost thou ask me for ? — Will you be kind 
 enough to give me a little bit of (t)Cn) that mutton ? — Will you 
 pass me the bottle, if you please] — Have you not drunk enough? 
 — Not yet; for I am still thirsty. — Shall I give (cinfct)cn!cn) you 
 some wine ? — No, I like cider better. — Why do you not eat ? — I do 
 not know what to eat. — Who knocks at the door] — It is a foreigner. 
 — Why does he cry ? — He cries because a great misfortune has 
 happened to him. — What has happened to you ? — Nothing has 
 happened to me. — Where will you go to this evening? — I don't 
 know where to go to. — Where will your brothers go to? — I do not 
 know where they will go to ; as for me, I shall go to the theatre. — 
 Why do you go to town? — I go thither in order to purchase some 
 books. — Will you go thither with me ? — I will go with you ; but I 
 do not know what to do there. — Must I sell to that man on credit 1 ? 
 — You may sell to him, but not on credit; you must not trust him, 
 foi he will not pay you. — Has he already deceived anybody? — 
 He has already deceived several merchants who have trusted him. 
 — Must I trust those ladies ? — You may trust them ; but as for me, 
 I shall not trust them; for I have often been deceived by the wo- 
 men, and that is the reason why I say, we must not trust every 
 body. — Do those merchants trust you ? — They do trust me, and 1 
 trust them. 
 
 199. 
 
 Whom do those gentlemen laugh at ? — They laugh at those la- 
 dies whc wear red gowns (fcaS .jtlett)) with yellow ribbons. — Why 
 do those people laugh at us ? — They laugh at us because we speak 
 Dadly. — Ought we to (93Zuj5 man) laugh at persons who speak bad- 
 ly ? — We ought not to laugh at them ; we ought, on the contrary, 
 to listen to them, and if they make blunders (gcfytet), we ought to 
 correct them for them. — What are you laughing at I— I am laughing 
 at your hat ; how long (fctt rcann) have you been wearing it so 
 large \ — Since (©ettfcem) 1 returned from England. — Can you afford 
 to buy a horse and a carriage ?-— I can afford H.— - Can your brother 
 
268 
 
 afford to buy that large house ? — He can afford it. — Will he buy it 1 
 — He will buy it, if it pleases him. — Have you received my let- 
 ter 1 — I have received it with much pleasure. I have shown it to 
 my German master, who was surprised at it, for there was not a 
 single mistake in it. — Have you already received Jean Paul's and 
 Wieland's works 1 — I have received those of (t>on) Wieland ; as 
 to those of Jean Paul, I hope (fo bcffe tcf)) to receive them next 
 week. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON.— 0*d)0 xttib ac^XQBtC 
 Cation. 
 
 Who is there? 2Bet tft t>a ? 
 
 It is I. 3cf) tun eg. 
 
 Is it you 1 (Sinb @te eg ? 
 
 It is not I. 3d) bin eg ntcf)t. 
 
 It is you. (Ste ftnb eg. 
 
 It is he, it is she. (Sr tft eg, fie tft eg. 
 
 Are they your brothers? <5tnt> eg 3f)te 33tubet ? 
 
 They are not my brothers. <§g ftnt) mctne SBrubct md)t. 
 
 DCF 3 Appositional phrases a are in German always 
 put in the same case as the principal noun. Ex. 
 
 NOMINATIVE. 
 
 Lycurgus, the Spartan legislator, Oqfutg, bet ®efe£get>er Sparta'g. 
 Religion, this daughter of hea- 3)te SKcU^ten, btefe Securer beg £tm* 
 
 ven, is the faithful companion melg, iff bie tveue (SJefafyrttnn ber 
 
 of men. Sfflenfcfyen. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 The duty of a father, the natural £>eg SSaterg, teg naturttcfyen $or* 
 tutor of his children, is to pro- munbeg fetnec .ftinbet:, 5)fltcl)t tft 
 vide for them. eg, fur fie $u foremen. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 That honour is due to my friend £)tcfe (Stytc cjebftfyrt metnem greunbe, 
 who is a brave man. etnem foremen dttanne. 
 
 t gave the father, this honest old 3d) fja&e bem SSaUv, btefem vcd)U 
 man, the model of his family, fcfyctffenen ©tetfe, bem 9#uftet feU 
 that advice. nee -JfamUic, ben 3?atf> Cjcge-« 
 
 ten. 
 
 ■ We call a phrase appositional when it serves to explain and determine th* 
 principal noun. 
 
260 
 
 That happened under Constan- SDteS Cjcfdjar) unlet (Sonftonttn bem 
 tine the Great, the first Chris- ©refjen, tern erften d)rift(ici)en Stai* 
 tian emperor. fer. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 t concerns my friend, the coun- (§S ktrtfft metnen gteunt, ten 
 
 sellor N. ffiatf) 9k 
 
 t have known the king, that 3d) bote ben .ftonicj, ttefcn 9GBer;ltr)fo 
 benefactor of his people. tcr feineS SSolfc^ gcfannt. 
 
 The duty, tie SpfUcftt ; 
 
 the companion, tcr ©cfafyrtc ; 
 
 the tutor (the guardian), tcr SScrmunt (plur. SScrmftntcr) ; 
 
 the model, fca$ buffer ; 
 
 the family, tie gamiltc ; 
 
 the people, fca$93ol£; 
 
 honest, tcd)tfd)affcn ; 
 
 faithful (true), trcu. 
 
 To thee, my dearest friend, I give £)tr, ntctnem fiebjtcti $teuntc, cjebe 
 this ring. id) ttefcn 9ttncj. 
 
 OCT 3 B. In German the pronoun must be in the 
 same gender, number, and case, with the substantive. 
 
 Of me, who am his nearest rela- SScn nut, fcinem naebften SSctroants 
 
 tion, he requests nothing. ten, Bcrtancjt cr ntd)t$. 
 
 /s it they who speak ? ©int fie c$, tie fprccfyen ? 
 
 It is they. @tc ftnt e£. 
 
 It is 1 who speak. | 3d) ^ ^ bcc ^ ^^ 
 
 DCF 9 C When a personal pronoun is followed by 
 a relative pronoun, it may or may not be repeated af- 
 ter the latter ; but if it is not repeated, the verb which 
 follows the relative pronoun must stand in the third 
 person, though the personal pronoun be of the first or 
 second person. 
 
 It is you who laugh. \ ®! c M A f #" lfl * Ctt '' ° r ' 
 
 J ° c ® te fm& *$/ bet lacfyt. 
 
 C £)u t>tft cS, tcr tu c$ gctftan baft ; 
 
 It is thou who hast done it. < or, 
 
 C £>u bij! c$, tcr e$ ejetfyem r)at* 
 It is you, gentlemen, who have (Ste ftnt e$, metne #etren, tie ta$ 
 said that. ^efaQt fyafcen. 
 
 To look like (to appear) 2Cu$fcf)en* rote. 
 
 How does he look 1 2Bte ftet)t et cm$ ? 
 
270 
 
 He looks gay (sad, contented). (&t ftef)t Uifttg (trcmrig, guftteben) 
 
 au£. 
 This beer looks like water. jDtcfeg 93tcr ftcfyt cuts vok SBafier. 
 
 You look like a doctor. (Sic fcfyen rote cm Uv$ au$. 
 
 Our equals. f UnfercS ©lctd)en. 
 
 He has not his equal or his f (Sr r)at fetncS ©(ctcfycn ntd)t. 
 match. 
 
 To resemble some one* 
 
 He resembles me. 
 
 I resemble your brother. 
 
 I resemble him. 
 
 Each other. 
 
 We resemble each other. 
 
 " 3 c m a n b c m 3 ( c t d) e n *. Part. 
 
 past, gcgttcrjcn. Imperf. glid)* 
 3 c m a n b c m a b n ( t d) fct;en* or 
 fctn *• 
 
 (Sr ftcf)t mtr af)n(td). 
 
 3d) gfeicfec 3^cm SSruber. 
 
 3d) bin ifjm aljnltd). 
 
 (S t n a n b e t (an indeclinable pro- 
 noun)^ 
 
 5 £Btt gfeidjen cincmbet. 
 * SBit fefi 
 
 er)en ctnanbet cibntid). 
 They do not resemble each other. (Sic fcbcn eincmber: md)t afjnltcl). 
 The brother and the sister love £)ct SSrubct unb tic ©djrocftct lies 
 
 each other. ben eincmber. 
 
 Are you pleased with each other] (Sinb <Sie mit eincmbet $uftteben ? 
 
 We are (so). 
 
 I am well. 
 
 To drink to some one. 
 
 To drink some one's health. 
 
 SGBit finb e$. 
 
 3d) Inn gefunb. 
 
 Semcmbem $utrin!cn*. 
 rScmanbcS <SJcfunt>r)eit trinfen*. 
 < 2Cuf ScmanbcS ©cfunbfjeit ttfrt* 
 C frn*. 
 
 J 3d) ttinfe Sfcte ©cfunbbcit. 
 } 3d) trinfe auf 3&re (35ejimbf)eit. 
 
 I drink your health. 
 
 To make some one's acquaint- SSefanntfdjaft mit Sentanbem macfyett. 
 
 To become acquainted with some- 3cmcmben fenncn lerncn. 
 body. 
 
 f ScT> fyctfcc feinc <8eranntfd)aft ge» 
 
 I have made his acquaintance. g ™*t mamtm mit fa ^ 
 
 [ mad)t. 
 I have become acquainted with 3d) &abe U)n fennen gctcrnt. 
 
 him. 
 Are you acquainted with hirn (Stub @te mit ir)m (tf)t) kfrumt? 
 
 (her) ? 
 
 b (^incmbev indicates that the action expressed by the verb is reciproca* 
 tetween several persons or things, and is employed for all cases and gender*. 
 
271 
 
 Do you know him (her) ! <5tcnncn (Sic tr)n (fie) ? 
 
 I am acquainted with him (her). 3d) bin nut tl)m (irjt) fccfrmnk 
 I know him (her). 3d) ftmnc tf)ti (ftc)» 
 
 He is an acquaintance of mine. (St ift nietn 23cfanntct. 
 She is my acquaintance. (Sic ift mctnc SBcfcumtc. 
 
 He is not a friend, he is but an (St tft Mn gtcunt), ct ift nut cut 
 acquaintance. SBcfanntcr. 
 
 Ofo. ©0 denotes the consequence of a preceding 
 proposition, (See DCf 3 B. Lesson LXXXI.) 
 
 As thou hast not done thy exer- £Beu fru bcinc ^ufgabcn ntd)t gut Qa 
 
 cises well, thou must do them macfyt fyaft, fo nuif't £>u ftc nod) ettt* 
 
 again. mal macbcn. 
 
 As he did not come, I sent for £)a ct ntd)t fain, (fo) ficfi id) tr)n til* 
 
 him. fen. (Lesson LXXXI.) 
 
 Again, once more. 9£od) cinmal 
 
 As. £)a, nxtf. 
 
 exercises. 200. 
 Where have you become acquainted with that lady ? — I have be- 
 come acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Is 
 it thou, Charles, who hast soiled my book] — It is not I, it is your 
 little sister who has soiled it. — Who has broken my fine ink-stand? 
 — It is I who have broken it. — Is it you who have spoken of me ? 
 — It is we who have spoken of you, but we have said of you nothiag 
 but good (®ute<s). — Why does your cousin ask me for money and 
 books 1 — Because he is a fool ; of me, who am his nearest relation 
 and best friend, he asks for nothing. — Why did you not come to 
 dinner ($um ^tttctcjeffen) 1 — I have been hindered, but you have been 
 able to dine without me. — Do you think that we shall not dine, if 
 you cannot come 1 — How long did you wait for me 1 — We waited 
 for you till a quarter past seven, and as you did not come, we dined 
 without you. — Have you drunk my health ] — We have drunk yours 
 and that of your parents. — A certain man liked much wine, but he 
 found in it (bciran) two bad qualities (t)tc (St^enfcfyaft). " If I put 
 water to it (rjincttt)," said he, " I spoil it, and if I do not put any 
 to it, it spoils me. 1 ' — How does your uncle look 1 — He looks very 
 gay ; for he is much pleased with his children. — Do his friends 
 look as gay as he ? — They, on the contrary, look sad, because they 
 are discontented. — My uncle has no money, and is very contented, 
 and his friends who have a great deal of it, are scarcely ever so. — 
 Do you like your sister! — I like her much, and as she is very com- 
 plaisant towards me, I am so towards her ; but how do you like 
 yours ? — We love each other, because we are pleased with each 
 other. 
 
 201. 
 
 Does your cousin resemble you? — He does resemble me. — Do 
 your sisters resemble each other! — They do not resemble each 
 other ; for the eldest (fctc a(tcftc) is idle and naughty (unattta,), and 
 
272 
 
 the youngest assiduous and complaisant towards every body. — Who 
 knocks at the door? — It is I, will you open it? — What do you 
 want ] — I come to ask you for the money which you owe me, and 
 the books which I lent you. — If you will have the goodness to 
 come to-morrow, I will return both to you. — Do you perceive yon- 
 der house? — I do perceive it, what house is it! — It is an inn (bag 
 2Strtf)$l)au6) ; if you like, we will go into it to drink a glass of 
 wine ; for I am very (fef)t) thirsty. — You are always thirsty when 
 you see an inn. — If we enter it, I shall drink your health. — Rathe? 
 than go into an inn I will not drink. — When will you pay what 
 you owe me ] — When I have money ; it is useless to ask me for 
 some to-day, for you know very well that there is nothing to be had 
 of him who has nothing. — When do you think you will have mo- 
 ney 1 — I think I shall have some next year.— Will you do what I 
 shall tell you ? — I will do it, if it is not too difficult. — Why dc you 
 laugh at me 1 — I do not laugh at you, but at your coat. — Does it 
 not look like yours ] — It does not look like it ; for mine is short 
 and yours is too long, mine is black and yours is green. (See end 
 of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 EIGHTY.SEVENTH LESSON.— Qkbm uttb actjtjigote 
 
 £ation. 
 
 To get into a scrape. ©tcf) £ant>ef gu$te!)en*. 
 
 f (Sid) fyetauS fjetfen*. 
 To get out of a scrape. \ @tcr> auS fc>er- ©cfr&ngc $tef)en*. 
 
 [ ©id) tton ctwaS (o$ mad)en. 
 
 (3d) fyabe mit fycrau$ gcf)e(fen. 
 3^n6cmtcl)au«bct©cl)Jin S c 3 c^ 
 3d) tun gut t>awn gefommen. 
 The snare, tuc <Sd)linge ; 
 
 always, tmmcr. 
 
 That man always gets into bad £)tefet 93?arm $kl)t ficf> tmmcr jifcltms 
 scrapes; but he always gets meJpanM^u; aber er Ijtlft fid) im* 
 out of them again. \\m tmcbcr. fjetcmS. 
 
 Between. 3 \v i f d) c n (governs the dative 
 
 and accusative). 
 
 The appearance, t>ct$ 2Cnfer)cn ; 
 
 the sight, the face, fccig ©eficfyt ; 
 
 the mien, the look, t>te $fttene ; 
 
 the countenance, the physiog- t>ic ©cjtcfyts&tftwng. 
 
 nomy, 
 
 To have the appearance. 3)a£ 2Cnfcr)en Ijafcen*. 
 
 To appear <Scl)cinen*» Imperf* fcfyteik 
 
273 
 
 To look. 
 To look well. 
 To look good. 
 
 You (appear) look very well. 
 
 She looks angry. 
 
 She appears to be angry. 
 
 They appear to be contented. 
 They look contented (pleased). 
 
 To look pleased with some one. 
 
 To receive one kindly. 
 
 Friendly, kindly. 
 
 To look cross at some one. 
 
 When I go to see that man, in- 
 stead of receiving me with plea- 
 sure, he looks displeased. 
 
 A. good-looking man. 
 
 A bad-looking man. 
 
 Bad-looking people or folks. 
 To imagine. 
 
 That man whom you see, seems 
 desirous of approaching us. 
 
 To visit, to go to see some one. 
 To pay some one a visit. 
 
 To frequent a place. 
 
 To frequent societies. 
 To associate with some one. 
 
 It is all over with me ! < 
 
 It is all over ! 
 
 I*: is too late to consult to-day 
 about what was done yesterday 
 (a proverb). 
 
 The spite, the displeasure, 
 the grief, the sorrow, 
 To vex, to spite some one. 
 To hurt some one's feelings. 
 You have vexed (spited) that 
 
 man. 
 You have hurt that man's feel- 
 ings. 
 
 The place, 
 [ know a good place to swim in. 
 
 12 # 
 
 2Cu6feF)en*. 
 ©at cmSfefyen*. 
 ©ut $u fctn fcfyetnen** 
 
 ©ie fcfjen fe&t gut aiiS. 
 
 ©ic ficf)t wt&rtcftUd) au$. 
 
 ©ic fdjeint fcofe (oetbricpticf)) ju 
 
 fern. 
 ©te fcbeinen $ufrteben $u fctn. 
 ©te fefjen ttcrgniigt au$. 
 
 Semanbcm cut ftcunbttcfycS (§Jcftd)t 
 
 macften. 
 Stiten frcunbltd) empfangen*. 
 $rcunblid). 
 
 Semanbcm ein %'o\k$ (Skftcftt macfycn. 
 SBcnn id) fctefen Sflann bcfucfyc, mad)t 
 
 et nut ein 68fe$ ®cfid)fr, anftatt 
 
 mid) frcunbltd) aufeuncfymen. 
 (Sin SRann sjen gutem tfnfefjen. 
 ©in SJiann son fd)lcd)tem ttnfefyen. 
 Scute sen fd)lcd)tem 2(nfef)en. 
 (Sid) einbilben (governs the da 
 
 tive). 
 
 £)et 9Bann, ben ©ie fefyen, fcftcint 
 fid) un£ (dative) ndfyecn $u woltcn, 
 
 3emcmbcn befucfyen. 
 Semanbcm cincn S3 e fuel) madden. 
 (Sinen £)rt befucfyen. 
 ©efellfcbaften befud)en. 
 SOttt Scmanbcm umgefjen*. 
 
 i (SS if! urn mid) gefd)cl)cn ! 
 j 3d) bin ttcttorcn ! 
 
 CSS tft barum gefdjefyen ! 
 
 ©cfcrjcfyene £)inge ftnb nid)t $u anbetn 
 (©pricljroott). 
 
 bet SSctbtup ; 
 
 bet Summer. 
 
 Semanbem &ctbtup mad)en. 
 
 Semanbcn franfen. 
 
 ©te fyaben bicfem SJtannc aSetbrup 
 
 gemad)t. 
 ©ie fyaben bicfen 9#ann gefranft 
 
 bcr £rt, bic ©telle, 
 
 3d) rcetp cine gute ©telle jum 
 
 ©djroimmen. 
 
274 
 
 To swim. ©cftnnmmen*. Part, past, gefcftrooro* 
 
 men. Imperf. fcftroamm. 
 
 To experience. @ r f a ft r e n*. Imperf. c t f u fj t 
 
 To endure {experience). (5 r b u t b e n. 
 To feel {experience). (S m p ft n t> c n*. Imperfect, cms 
 
 pf a n t>. 
 
 I have experienced a great deal. Scft ftabc Diet etbtrtbet (empfunben, 
 
 etfaftrcn). 
 I have experienced a great many 3>cft ftabe tuel Ungtttcf geftctbt. 
 misfortunes. 
 
 To swjfer. & c i b c n* (g e 1 1 1 1 e n, lit t). 
 
 To feel a pain in one's head or f ?fm £epfe obet am Jatfe tetben* 
 
 foot. 
 I felt a j)ain in my eye. f 3cft fa&* am ^Citge 9Ctittcn. 
 
 To neglect. 83 c t n a eft ( a f ft g e n. 
 
 To miss (*o neglect). 23erfdumcn. 
 
 You have neglected your prom- <Stc ftaftcn tftr £k'tfprecftcn ttetnacft* 
 
 ise. (a'fftflt. 
 
 You have neglected to come to (Ste ftctben ttetfaumt, gur (Stunbe ($ut 
 your lesson. Section) $u femmen. 
 
 To yield. SQSetcften** takes fetn. Part, past, 
 
 gerotcften. Imperf. rotcft. 
 To yield to some one. Semanbem nacftgeben*. 
 
 C<Sicft in ctroas (accus.) fcfttcfen. 
 To yield to something. < ©id) ju ctroaS bequemen. 
 
 C @$ Oct etroaS bewenben foffen*. 
 To yield to necessity. ©tcft in bte 9tfotftwcnt)tg£ctt fcfttcfen 
 
 We must yield to necessity. 9J?an nmp ftcft in bte 9?otl)tt>enbtgfeti 
 
 fcfttcfen. 
 
 To spring. (Spttngen*. Part, past, gefptungen, 
 
 Imperf. fprang. 
 
 To jump (hop). £upfen. 
 
 To blow up, to burst, (Sptengcn. 
 
 To omit. 2CuS(affcn*. Imperf. (teg. 
 
 To spring up from below. 93cn unten ftcrauf fprtngen*. 
 
 To spring forward. SSetroartS fprtngen. 
 
 To spring backward. Surticf fprtngen. 
 
 The child hopped joyfull arcund 3)a$ ittnb fttipfte freubtg urn mtcft 
 me. fterum. b 
 
 ■ 2Bettf)ett, to steep, and ettuetcfjen, to soften, to mollify, are active and regu- 
 lar verbs, and consequently take fyabett* for their auxiliary. 
 
 b <§upfett, to jump, to hop, to frisk, is generally used in speaking of animals 
 that spring, and of children. 
 
275 
 
 rhe besiegers iet the bastion Die SBekgetetttefien t>te SSaftet fpretfc 
 
 blow up gem 
 
 The copier has omitted a few Det 2C&fd)m&ct fjat etnige SeUett au$* 
 
 lines. gclaffen. 
 
 {2(uf Semanbcn obet etroaS fo$ 
 fpttngen*, CM ftuqen, fo* ten, 
 nen » 
 Ueber Semanben cber ett&$£ r)etfak 
 ten*- 
 The cat springs upon the rat. Die £aj$e fptingt auf tie 9?atte (o$. 
 To leap on horseback. ©tdj auf bag $)fetb fc^ivincjen* (ges 
 
 fcbnningen, fencing). 
 To run. jftennen* (gerannt, rannte). 
 
 To swing. ©djnnngcn* (gefefyroungen, fcfywang). 
 
 To still greater ill luck. 3u nocb gropetem Ungtucf. 
 
 To still greater good luck. 3u nod) gtofjerem ©liicf. 
 
 To my still greater ill luck I 3u nod) gropcrem UngtM r)afce t$ 
 have lost my purse. metne SSorfe setloten. 
 
 exercises. 202. 
 
 Is it right to laugh thus at everybody] — If I laugh at your coat, 
 I do not laugh at every body. — Does your son resemble any one ] — 
 He resembles no one. — Why do you not drink 1 — I do not know 
 what to drink ; for I like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar. 
 « — If you wish to have some other I shall go down into the cellar 
 (Lesson LXXIII.) to fetch you some. — You are too polite, sir, I 
 shall drink no more to-day. — Have you known my father long] — I 
 have known him long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet 
 at (auf) school. We often worked for one another, and we loved 
 each other like brothers. — I believe it, for you resemble each 
 other. — When I had not done my exercises, he did them for me, 
 and when he had not done his, I did them for him. — Why does 
 your father send for the physician 1 — He is ill, and as the physi- 
 cian does not come he sends for him. 
 
 203. 
 
 Is that man angry with (auf with the accus.) you ] — I think he 
 is angry with me, because I do not go to see him ; but I do not 
 like to go to his house : for when I go to him, instead of receiving 
 me with pleasure, he looks displeased. — You must not believe that 
 he is angry with you, for he is not so bad as he looks. — He is the 
 best man in (twn) the world ; but one must know him in order to 
 appreciate (fcfycigen) him. — There is ((5$ ijt) a great difference (bet 
 Unterfd)teb) between (dative) you and him ; you look pleased with 
 all those who come to see you, and he looks cross at them. — 
 Why do you associate (gef)en ©te — urn) with those people ] — I as- 
 sociate with them because they are useful to me. — If you continue 
 to associate with them you will get into bad scrapes, for they have 
 
276 
 
 many enemies. — How does your cousin conduct himself? — He 
 does not conduct himself very well ; for he is always getting into 
 some bad scrape (or other).- — Do you not sometimes get into bad 
 scrapes 1 — It is true that 1 sometimes get into them, but I always 
 get out of them again. — Do you see those men (Scute) who seem 
 desirous of approaching us 1 — I do see them, but I do not fear 
 them ; for they hurt nobody. — We must go away, for I do not like 
 to mix with people whom I do not know. — I beg of you not to be 
 afraid of them, for I perceive my uncle among them. — Do yoa 
 know a good place to swim in 1 — I do know one. — Where is it ?— 
 On that side of the river, behind the wood, near the high-road (big 
 Ccmbftrape). — When shall we go to swim ? — This evening if you 
 like. — Will you wait for me before the city-gate] — I shall wait for 
 you there ; but I beg of you not to forget it. — You know that I 
 never forget my promises. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 EIGHTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— ftcijl mi udftiffBte 
 Action. 
 
 By all means (obstinately). SJftt alter 932acl)t imb ©ewaft. 
 
 To follow. gotten, nacfygefien* (govern the d@» 
 
 tive). 
 To pursue. SScrfctgcn (governs the accus.). 
 
 I have followed him. 3# t>tn ifyttt nad^egangen. 
 
 To lose one's wits. £)cn SSerftanb Dertieren*. Imperf* 
 
 setter. 
 
 The sense, the wit, the intellect, bet SSerffanb, 
 
 That man has lost his wits, for Stefet SJftann fyat ben SSctftcmb Wt* 
 
 he does not know what he is loren, benn Ct roeip md)t, tt>ct$ ct 
 
 doing. tt)Ut. 
 
 That man wishes by all means 2)tcfct 9)tann tttttt nut mit attct ®«* 
 
 to lend me his money. malt \nn ®etb tetfyen. 
 
 Obs. A. The neuter of the demonstrative pronoun 
 biefe£ (ba$) may in the singular relate to substan- 
 tives of any gender or number, and even to a whole 
 proposition. 
 
 Is that the lady whom you spoke %fx bet* bte Same, son ber <Sie mit 
 of to me ? * mit gefprocben fyakn ? 
 
 That is a bad man. £)ci6 ift em itfit 9ftann. 
 
 Which are the pens with which ££efcfye$ ftnb .bte #ebern, mit bencn 
 you write so welt ? ©te fo gut fcfytetOen ? 
 
 Obs. B. The neuter of the interrogative pronounv 
 
W e t dj e g, which, may equally relate to substantives of 
 any gender or number. 
 
 Which is the best pronuncia- $Md)e$ ift tie fccftc ?Xu$fptad)e ? 
 tion'? 
 
 What a beautiful book ! SG&cld) Ctn fc(>3nc^ S5ud) ! 
 
 Obs. C. SGBelrf), when it expresses admiration, may 
 be followed by the indefinite article. It remains then 
 invariable. 
 
 What a g:eat man ! 2Md) em §refkt 9)tann! 
 
 W T hat fine weather ! £Bclcf)eS fd)6ne SDBcttcr ! 
 
 What good people they axe ! £Bc(d)e gute Scute fint) fca$ ! 
 
 What a happiness ! } 
 
 How fortunate ! vBc(d) em ©IM or roetd)C$ <&lM \ 
 
 How lucky ! J 
 
 Perhaps. S3 t e t i e t d) t. 
 
 i shall perhaps go thither. 3d) roetbe t)tetletd)t fytngcfKn. 
 
 Obs. D. How, before an exclamation, is translated 
 by ttu'e, ttrietrief, mid). Ex. 
 
 How good you are ! 3Bte gut finb €5ie ! 
 
 How foolish he is ! jIBie bumra ift ct ! 
 
 How foolish she is ! 2Bie bumm ift ftc ! 
 
 How rich that man is ! £Bte rctd) ift btefet 93?cmn ! 
 
 How handsome that woman is ! SOBte fd)6n ift biefe $rau ! 
 
 How kind you are to me ! £Bdd)e ©tire ©te fur mid) fjct&cn ! 
 
 How happy you are ! £Bct$ finb <5pte fo cjlucf(td) ! 
 
 How much I owe you ! SBtcmcl let) Sbtien nid)t fdjulbtcj bin ! 
 
 How much I am obliged to you ! £Bte fer)t tun id) Sfyncn nid)t ttctfcun* 
 
 ben ! 
 tr^,xr ™™,r ^ki; «*;^« t ™ ")£$a$ id) Sfaen nid)t ttetbanfe ! 
 H °uIderto y y o°u b ! gat,0nS l am ^gcnd,3^cnnt*t,u P ab«„fcn 
 
 How many (what a multitude 2QBcld>e Sftenfcftenmencje ! £3dd) etne 
 
 of) people ! Sfflenge SSolB ! 
 
 The multitude, the great number, bie SJZencjc. 
 
 To be under obligations, to be "} ^ v £ » L a , w 
 
 obliged to someone foi some- C^ r mclt I bcm f ttr * tm * mhmU " 
 thing. 3 fCtn * 
 
 To be indebted to some one for "> ~ s ± ^ ^ ^ * 
 
 something r Semcmbcm ctroaS serbanfen o* w 
 
 To owe something to some one. 5 MCbflnf Cn ^ Cn# - 
 
 I am indebted to him for it. £>ae fyak id) ifjm $u Mtbanfcn. 
 
278 
 
 To thank. £) a n f c tt (governs the dative) 
 
 1 o thank some one for some- Semcmfcem fiit ctwa$ t»anfen- 
 
 thing. 
 
 1 thank you for the trouble you 3d) tonfe Sfyncn fur t)te 9Mf)e, fc>* 
 
 have taken for me. <&\t fid) fur mid) gegcben fjabcn 
 
 Is there anything more grand ] 2BaS ift proper? 
 
 Is there anything more cruel ? 2Ba6 tft graufamer ? 
 
 Is there anything more wicked 1 £Bag ift gottfofcr ? 
 Can anything be more handsome"? jlann etroaS fd)6nct fetn ? 
 
 To run up. £crfcetfaufen* 
 
 To hasten up. $erbeteilen 
 
 To run to the assistance of some 3emanfc>em $u £tUfe eUcn. 
 
 To save, to deliver. $Ketten. 
 
 To hasten. (Stlen. 
 
 To plunder (to rob). Sptunfcem. 
 
 Many men had run up ; but in- SStete Scute waren fyer&etgcertt ; a£et« 
 stead of extinguishing the fire, anftatt t)a$ $euer ^u KJfdben, ftngen 
 the wretches set themselves to tie (5(ent>en an $u ptunDetn. 
 plundering. 
 To begin something. (StroaS anfangen*. Imperf. fincj. 
 
 To set about something. (Bid) an etroaS (ace.) macfyen. 
 
 Have they been able to extin- £at man t>a£ $euer lofdjen fonncn ? 
 
 guish the fire 1 
 Have they succeeded in extin- "3ft c$ tfynen getungen, t>a$ geucr $u 
 
 guishing the fire 1 lefefyen ? 
 
 The watch indicates the hours. £)te Uf)r $ctgt bte (B'tunben an. 
 To indicate. 2Cn3Ctgetu 
 
 To quarrel. (5 t d) $ a n £ c tt. 
 
 To chide, to reprove some one. 3emanben au$$an£en or au6fd)rtten* 
 
 (gefefyoften, fd)alt). 
 To scold some one. sjJltt Scmanbem ganfen. 
 
 The quarre bcr 3anf, t)te 3an£eret. 
 
 To dispute, to contend aoout Ueber et\va$ ftrctten* (geftrttten, 
 
 something. ftrttt). 
 
 About what are those people dis- SBortibcr ftrciten bicfe Ceute ? 
 
 puting 1 
 They are disputing about who @tc janfen fid), rocr gucrpt geftcn fell 
 
 shall go first. 
 
 OF THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The present participle is formed from the infinitive, 
 by adding the letter b* Ex. ?tebett, to love ; present 
 
279 
 
 part. Itefcenb, loving ; arbeitett, to work , present part. 
 axMtenb. 
 
 The present participle in German is used in the at- 
 tributive sense like an adjective. Ex. din jterfcenbet 
 Setter, a dying father ; ber tacfyenbe grufylmg, the smiling 
 spring; bte nafyenbe ©tmtbe, the approaching hour ; ba£ 
 jittembe ^Utb, the trembling child. But it cannot be 
 used as a predicate. We cannot say with the Eng- 
 lish : the boy is reading. a This must be expressed ny 
 the present tense, as: ber ftttabt Itef^t. 13 
 
 In English the present participle is used to express 
 cause, reason, condition, and time. But this is rarely the 
 case in German. For in all such instances the present 
 participle is translated by the following conjunctions 
 with the verbs expressed by the English participles : 
 al$, when, as ; nacfybem, after ; ba, as ; inbem, as, whilst ; 
 tt)etf, because. Ex. 
 
 Being lately at your brother's 2tt$ id) ncutid) bet Sfytcm 23tufc>er 
 
 house, I gave something to his wax, gab id) feincn $int>ern etnxiS. 
 
 children. 
 Having eaten supper, she went tc 9?ad)bem c fte $u 9?ad)t gegeflcn fyatte, 
 
 bed. gin 9 fte $u SSctte* 
 
 Having no money, I cannot lend 3) a id) fetn ®ett) fytibt, fo fann id) 3#* 
 
 you any. nen fcinS (etfyen. 
 
 Knowing that you are my friend, Da id) n>ct&, tap @ic mein $rcunt> 
 
 I beg of you to do me that fa- ftnb, fo intte id) ©tc, mir t)tcfcn 
 
 vour. ©efaltcn §u tl)un. 
 
 Not finding my brother, I went Snbem id) meincn SBrubcr nidjt fant), 
 
 to my sister. (fo) giriQ id) $u mcincr (Sd)tt?ejtcr. 
 
 Being ill, I cannot work. SBeU id) ftant bin, fann id) nid)t ats 
 
 ktten. 
 
 O&s. JE. These examples show that each of the con- 
 
 a In sublime style, principally in poetry, it may be used adverbiax/y. Ex. 
 3ttrentb »or {ebem (Sdjcttten leBt ber §nrd)tfcune in enriger Qlngft, trembling at 
 each shade the fearful lives in constant anxiety. 2>()nt in bte ^ftebe eutfalienb, 
 fcegann ber eble 3ldn'{Ie3, interrupting him, the noble Achilles began. 
 
 b Several words formed originally from verbs, have lost the nature of pre- 
 sent participles, and are used as adjectives only, both in the attributive and 
 predicative sense ; they are : brmgenb, pressing ; brttcf tnb, oppressive ; etttnef)* 
 menb, captivating ; fliefjenb, fluent ; fymt'etfjcnb, overpowering ; f remfenb, mor- 
 tifying; retjenb, charming. Ex. Sfjre bitten ftnb fe^r etnnetunenb, her man- 
 ners are very captivating ; bte 9lotfj tft bttngenb, the necessity is pressing ; 
 ne Srtft tft brMenb, the burden is oppressive ; btefe Q3eletbtgnno. tft frcinfenb, 
 ihis insult is mortifying ; feme Sftebe tft fliefjenb, his speech is fluent ; fte ifl 
 retjenb, she is charming. 
 
 « 9iac$bem can only be employed with the pluperfect of the indicative. 
 
280 
 
 junctions ate, nacfybem, ba, robero, tt>etf, has its peculiai 
 signification, and that there is necessarily a difference 
 in their application: 1st, al$ refers to a definite event 
 of a past time ; 2d, itacfybem states that an action was 
 finished when another action commenced ; 3d, ia im- 
 plies a logical cause from which an inference is drawn ; 
 4th, intent is used to state that an event is simultane- 
 ous with another event ; 5th, tt)etl expresses a real rea- 
 son why a thing is or takes place. 
 
 Obs. F. The present participle may, in English, be 
 converted into a substantive by a preceding article, 
 as : the reading, the writing, the speaking. This can- 
 not be done in German, where the infinitive must be 
 employed, as : ba$ 2efen, bag (gcfyreiben, ba$ ©precfyem As 
 an adjective, however, but not as an abstract substan- 
 tive, the present participle may elliptically be turned 
 into a substantive, as : ber ?efenbe, one that reads ; ber 
 ©d)ret6enbe, one that writes; ber ©precfyenbe, one that 
 speaks. 
 
 By too much reading one fatigues £)urcl) $u tricks 2efctt etmiibtft man 
 the eyes. fid) tic 2(ua,en. 
 
 Obs. G. Sometimes the present participle is transla- 
 ted by a substantive preceded by a preposition. Ex. 
 
 I saw your brother whilst I was 3d) F)qOc Sfyren 33tubcr im SSet&etgcs 
 passing by. r)en gefefyen. 
 
 He came with a book under his (Sr tarn nut ctncm $Bud)e untct bem 
 
 arm. ?(rmc. 
 
 When I was in the country, I was 2tt$ id) cmf bcm Canbe roar, fcefanb td) 
 
 very well. mid) fcrjr roof)L 
 
 She smiled as she was saying (Sic (ad)c(te, tnbem fte bag fagte. 
 
 this. 
 
 To perform (to represent) SSotfMtcn. 
 
 To entertain (to amuse). Untctfjaftcn*, Imperf. untetfytclt. 
 
 To bargain (to deal). .ftanbcm. 
 
 To reply. (Strotebcrn. 
 
 To be struck with horror SScn ©rauen ((Sntfegen) frcfatfen 
 
 roctben*. 
 
 The horror, bas ©raucn, ba$ (5ntfc$cn. 
 
 A. violent head-ache. ©in f)efttge$ ^cpfweF). 
 
281 
 
 EXERCISES. 204. 
 
 Ah, it is all over with me ! — But, bless me ! (mctn ©ctt !) why 
 do you cry thus ] — I have been (SCRan l)at nrir) robbed of my gold 
 rings, my best clothes, and all my money : that is the reason why 
 I cry. — Do not make so much noise, for it is we who have taken 
 them all in order to teach you to take better care of your things 
 (<Sad)cn), and to shut the door of your room when you go out.— 
 Why do you look so sad ? — I have experienced great misfortunes ; 
 after having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking men ; 
 and to my still greater ill-luck I hear that my good uncle, whom I 
 .ove so much, has been struck with apoplexy. — You must not 
 afflict yourself so much, for we must yield to necessity ; and you 
 know well the proverb : " It is too late to consult to-day about whal 
 was done yesterday." — Can you not get rid of that man? — I cannot 
 get rid of him, for he will absolutely (fcurcfyaue) follow me. — He 
 must have lost his wits. — What does he ask you for ] — He wishes 
 to sell me a horse, which I do not want. — Whose houses are these 1 
 — They are mine. — Do those pens belong to you 1 — No, they be- 
 long to my sister. — Are those the pens with which she w r rites so 
 well? — They are the same. — Which is the man of whom you com- 
 plain ? — It is he who wears a red coat. — " W T hat is the difference 
 (t>cr Untcrfd)ietO between a watch and me 1 " inquired a lady (of) a 
 young officer. " My lady," replied he, " a watch marks the hours, 
 and near (Oct) you one forgets them." — A Russian peasant, who 
 had never seen asses, seeing several in Germany, said : " Lord (90£ein 
 ©ott), what large hares there are in this country ! " — How many 
 obligations I am under to you, my dear friend ! you have saved my 
 life ! without you I had been (reare id)) lost.— Have those misera- 
 ble men hurt you 1 — They have beaten and robbed me ; and when 
 you ran to my assistance they were about to strip (auSgtefyen*) and 
 kill me. — I am happy to have delivered you from (cms) the hands 
 of those robbers. — How good you are ! — Will you go to Mr. Tor- 
 tenson's to night (otefen 2(bcnt>) ? — I shall perhaps go. — And will 
 your sisters go ] — They will perhaps. — Was you pleased at the 
 concert yesterday ? — I was not pleased there, for there was such 
 a multitude of people there that one could hardly get in. — I bring 
 you a pretty present with which you will be much pleased. — What 
 is it] — It is a silk cravat. — Where is it ] — I have it in my pocket 
 (t»te Safcfye). — Does it please you ] — It pleases me much, and I 
 thank you for it with all my heart. — I hope that you will at last 
 accept (anncfymcn*) something of (sen) me. — What do you intend to 
 give me 1 — 1 will not tell you yet, for if I do tell you, you will find 
 no pleasure when I give it to you. 
 
 205. 
 
 Why do those men quarrel 1 — They quarrel, because they do not 
 know what to do. — Have they succeeded in extinguishing the fire] 
 — They have at last succeeded in it ; but it is said that several 
 houses have been burnt. — Have they not been able to save any 
 
282 
 
 thing ? — They have not been able to save anything ; for, instead oi 
 extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches who had come up set 
 themselves to plundering. — What has happened ? — A great misfor* 
 tune has happened. — Why did my friends set out without me ] — 
 They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing that you did not 
 come, they set out. — Tell ((Sqctfjten) us what has happened to you 
 lately. — Very willingly, but on condition (mit £>em 93c6tnge or untct 
 t>er JBctun^urtg) that you will listen to me attentively (nufmcrffam) 
 without interrupting (untcrbrcd)en*) me. — We will not interrupt 
 you, you may be sure of it. — Being lately at the theatre, I saw The 
 speaking picture and The weeping woman performed. This latter 
 play (£)ci$ tegterc ©tucf) not being very (fonbcrltd)) amusing to me, I 
 went to the concert, where the music (btc 5D2uftf) caused me a vio- 
 lent head-ache. I then left (cctlaffen*) the concert, cursing (sets 
 nninfcfycn) it, and went straight (gcrabe) to the mad-house (baS 9?at- 
 tenfyaufe), in order to see (fcefucfyen) my cousin. 
 
 EIGHTY.NINTH LESSON.— Neutt ttttb atl)t^tc 
 Ztttion. 
 
 Towards, against. ® e a e n ) n the accus# 
 
 Against. SOB 1 1> C r J to 
 
 ©ecjen denotes the direction of two things turned 
 towards each other and is used for towards and against ; 
 tt) t b e X, on the contrary, denotes hostility and is only 
 used for against. Ex. 
 
 To take the field against the ©ecjcn (or tmbct) ten gctnb $\ getbc 
 
 enemy. gtef)cn*. 
 
 What have you against me ? 28aS fyabcn <Sie Qcgen (or wtbcr) 
 
 mid)? 
 
 You speak against yourself. @te tebcn gegen (or ttribet) ftcb feftjt. 
 
 To swim against the current. ©egen ben <Sttom fd)«nmmcn*. 
 
 The love of a father towards his 3)te £teOe etncS 23cttcr$ gcgcn (not 
 
 children. ttubet) feme £tnber. 
 
 I have nothing against that. 3d) fycibe mcfytS bacjegcn. 
 
 Self* selves. ©el Oft or fe (0 e x (is indeclin- 
 
 able). 
 
 [ myself. 3d) fcftfi. 
 
 Thou thyself, he himself. SDu felbft, cr felb|t. 
 
 We ourselves, you yourselves. 2Bit fetbfr, 3()r (6te) felbft* 
 
 They themselves. ©ic fetfcfr. 
 
 He himself has told it to me. (St fet&ft fiat c$ nut flcfaflt. 
 
283 
 
 Obs. A. The pronoun preceding self is not transla- 
 ted into German. But the personal pronoun preced- 
 ing felbfi is declined. 
 
 He has given it to me (not to (St r)at e$ mix fet&ft gcgefcen. 
 
 another person). 
 They themselves have come to @ic fctbft ftnfc $u nur gefommen. 
 
 me. 
 We have given it to them (not SBit fja&en c£ iljnen fctbft gcgeberu 
 
 to others). 
 
 The day before. £)et Sag t>orr)cr. 
 
 The preceding day, t)ct r>otf)Ctgef)ent>e Sag. 
 
 The day before Sunday is Satur- Dot Sag t)0r ©enntag fjctpt @an^« 
 
 day. tag. 
 
 The day before (the preceding £)et Sag former (bet Mtf)crger)enbe 
 
 day) was Friday. Sag) war cm Jtcttag. 
 
 Again (anew). 33on 9?euem, rotcfcct. 
 
 Once more (again). Stfed) ctnmaf. 
 
 He speaks again (5r fprtdfet tmcbcr. 
 
 I must hear him again. 3d) mup tl)n t>en 9Jeuem fyotm 
 
 O&s. 5. The adverb ttrieber must not be mistaken for 
 the inseparable particle ttttber (Lesson XXV*), nor for 
 the preposition tt>tber, against It answers to the 
 English word again. Ex. rrMeberfcrnmen*, to come 
 again ; ttriebercmfcmgen*, to begin again. It must not 
 be mistaken for juriitf, back again, which as in English 
 denotes retrogression. Ex. 3uriicflfontttten # , to come 
 back again. 
 
 The light, tag fclcfct 
 
 To blow. S3(afen* (gcMafcn, Mice;). 
 
 To blow out. HuSMafen*. 
 
 To flee. £(teben* (geftcfjen, flof)). 
 
 CSntfltcfjcn*. 
 To run away. < (Sntlaufen*. 
 
 C £)attort foufcn*. 
 Why do you run away 1 SZDctrum laufcn <Ste nxg (t>ar>on) ? 
 
 I run away, because I am afraid. 3d) (cmfc tarpon (pcQ), we'll id) mid) 
 
 furdjte (or recti id) Surest ()abe). 
 To make one's escape. } 
 
 To run away, to flee. > £)k Jfludjt nefjmen* (or ergtetfm*). 
 
 To take to one's heels. ) 
 
 He deserted the battle. (§r tft auS tcr 6d)*ad)t entftofjen or 
 
 enttaufen. 
 The thief has run away Dcr iDieb tft entfoufen (battens or reeg' 
 
 ge(aufen). 
 
284 
 
 To catch, to lay hold of, to seize. (Srgtetfen* (ergttffen, etgtiff). 
 
 To translate. tteberfegen.* 
 
 To translate into German. 2fuf fceutfd) ttberfcgcn. 
 
 To translate from French into 2luS bem ^raniSftfcften tn$ 3)eutfdK 
 
 German. (ifcerfcgen. 
 
 To translate from one language 2CuS etncr (Spracfye in bte anbere ii&er 
 
 into another. fejen. 
 
 To introduce. (Sinfitfyren. 
 
 I introduce him to you. 3d) fufyre ifjn bet 3f)tien ein. 
 
 Since or from. 25 o n — an, f e 1 1. 
 
 r25on biefem 2fugcn(?Ucfc an. 
 From that time. < ®iit ttcfer Sett. 
 
 1 23 on biefer 3ett an. 
 
 Obs. C. Compound prepositions must be divided 
 and the case which the preposition governs placed be- 
 tween the two component parts, as : 
 
 From my childhood. SSon metnet 3>ua,enb an. 
 
 From morning until evening. 35 om SWotgen fci$ gum 2tt>enb. 
 
 From the beginning to the end. \ ®™ *"*"?' Mm?* 
 S ° i 95 on 2Cnfana, bts 5U (Snbe. 
 
 To produce (to yield, to profit). Gunbringen*. 
 
 To destroy. Serftoten. 
 
 To reduce. £ctaOfegen. 
 
 To limit. (Sinfdbtanfen. 
 
 To diminish (to lessen). 5Setfretnem. 
 
 To reduce the price. iDen sprcU r)erabfegen. 
 
 To reduce (to bring down) the 2)en $pret$ tu$ auf einen &r)atei 
 
 price to a crown. f)eruntctt>rina,en*. 
 
 The merchandise, bie SSaare. 
 
 The price of the merchandise f Die £Baare fd)taa,t ak 
 
 falls. 
 
 The yard, the ell. bte ©lie. 
 
 To deduct. f ^actyaffen*. 
 
 Having not overcharged you, I f Da id) <Ste gar nicfyt uOetfegt r)abc, 
 
 cannot deduct anything. fo fcmn id) nid)t$ nacfylaffen. 
 
 loaTtoo^uch. J ^c^en (inseparable). 
 
 By the year (or a year), j[ar)rttcT) ; 
 
 by the day (or a day), tacjttcf) ; 
 
 by the month (or a month), monatftel). 
 
 a In iifcevfe^ett, to translate, the accent being on the root of the verb, U h t X 
 is inse])arable, and consequently its past participle is iifcerfeljt, net itfcergefefct 
 (See Lesson XLV.) 
 
285 
 
 By no means. ®at mdf)t 
 
 Not at all. ©cm$ unt) gat md)t. 
 
 flow much does that situation SBicMet brtngt Sftnen btefeS 2Cm\ 
 yield you a year ? ja^rttc^ etn? 
 
 exercises. 206. 
 
 On entering the hospital (fcciS £efpttal) of my cousin I was struck 
 with horror at seeing several madmen (t>er 9?cttr, gen. en) who came 
 up (nafyen) to me jumping and howling (f)cu(cn). — What did you do 
 then ] — I did the same (c$ cben fo macfyen) as they, and they set up 
 a laugh (anfancjen* $u (acben) as + hey were withdrawing (fid) $utucf* 
 fidjen or roegbegeben*). — When I was yet little I once (c'tnft) said tc 
 my father, " I do not understand (wrjlefyen*) business, and I do not 
 know how to sell ; let me play." My father answered me, smiling 
 ((adx(n), " In dealing one learns to deal, and in selling to sell." 
 "But, my dear father," replied I, "in playing one learns also to 
 play." " You are right," said he to me * " but you must first (vov 
 f)cr) learn what is necessary and useful." 
 
 Do you already know what has happened ! — I have not heard 
 anything. — The house of our neighbour has been burnt down. — 
 Have they not been able to save anything 1 — They were very for- 
 tunate in saving the persons that were in it ; but out of (yen) the 
 things that were (fid) beftnfccn*) there, they could save nothing. — 
 Who has told you that ? — Our neighbour himself has told it to me. — 
 Why are you without a light ? — The wind blew it out, when you 
 came in. — What is the day before Monday called 1 — The day be- 
 fore Monday is Sunday. — W 7 hy did you not run to the assistance of 
 your neighbour whose house has been burnt down ? — I could not 
 run thither, for I was ill and in bed. — What is the price of this 
 cloth 1 — I sell it at three crowns and a half the ell.— I think (ftn- 
 fc>cn*) it very dear. — Has the price of cloth not fallen 1 — It has not 
 fallen : the price of all goods has fallen, except (auSgcnemmcn) that 
 of cloth. — I will give you three crowns for it. — I cannot let you 
 have it for (urn) that price, for it costs me more. — Will you have 
 the goodness to show me some pieces ($>a$ ©tiicf, plur. c) of English 
 cloth ] — With much pleasure. — Does this cloth suit you ] — It does 
 not sui; me. — Why does it not suit you] — Because it is too dear ; 
 if you will lower the price, I shall buy twenty yards of it (fc>at)0n) 
 — Having not asked too much, I cannot take off anything. 
 
 207. 
 
 You learn French ; does your master let you translate ] — He lets 
 me read, write and translate. — Is it useful to translate in learning 
 a foreign language ] — It is useful to translate when you nearly 
 know the language you are learning ; but while (ivcnn) you do not 
 yet know anything, it is entirely useless. — What does your Ger- 
 man master make you do ] — He makes me read a lesson ; after- 
 wards he makes me translate French exercises into German or 
 
286 
 
 (fiber with the accus.) the lesson which he h^s made me read ; and 
 from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks German to 
 me, and I have to answer him in the very (fetbft) language which 
 he is teaching me. — Have you already learnt much in that manner? 
 — You see that I have already learnt something, for T have hardly 
 been learning it four months, and I already understand you when 
 you speak to me, and can answer you. — Can you read it as well 1 
 — I can read and write as well as speak it. — Does your master also 
 teach English ? — He does teach it. — Wishing to make his acquaint- 
 ance, I must beg of you to introduce me to (bet) him. — As you wish 
 to make his acquaintance, I shall introduce you to him. — How many 
 exercises do you translate a day ? — If the exercises are not difficult 
 I translate (from) three to (bis) four every day, and when they are 
 so, . translate but one. — How many have you already done to-day ? 
 — It is the third which I am translating; but to-morrow I hope to 
 be able to do one more, for I shall be alone. — Have you paid a visit 
 to my aunt 1 — I went to see her two months ago, and as she looked 
 displeased, I have not gone to her any more since that time. — How 
 do you do (to-day) 1 — I am very unwell. — How do you like that 
 soup 1 — I think (fhtt>eft*) it is very bad ; but since I have lost my 
 appetite I don't like anything. — How much does that situation 
 yield to your father 1 — It yields him more than four thousand 
 crowns. — What news do they mention (fagen) ?— They say that the 
 Turks have taken the field against the Russians. — Every one will 
 find in himself the defects which he remarks in others : the defects 
 of others are before (us), our own behind us. (See end of Lesson 
 XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETIETH LESSON.— £temt}ig$te Action. 
 
 PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 I may have, thou mayest have, 3* fyafcc, £>U fyabefl:, ct (fie, e$) 
 
 he (she, it) may have. f)abe. 
 
 We may have, you may have, 2Bit (jabctt, 3r)r Ijabct, ftc fja&cn. 
 
 they may have. 
 
 I may be, thou mayest be, he 3d) fci, 5Du fetcft (or fetft), Ct (fie, 
 
 (she, it) may be. c£) feu 
 
 W e may be, you may be, they S5Mt fetcn, 3f)t fetet, ftc fctctv 
 
 may be. 
 
 I may become, thou mayest be- 3d) tt>ctt>e, 3)it tDCtbeft, ct (ftc, c$) 
 
 come, he (she, it) may become. nxtfcc. 
 We may become, you may be- 2Bir roerben, 3r)r rcetbet, ftc was 
 
 come, they may become. t>crt. 
 
 I may praise, thou mayest praise 3$ (obe, iDu tobeft, cr (fie, c$) lobe* 
 he (she, it) may piaise. 
 
287 
 
 We may praise, you may praise, 2Btt loOen, Sfjt lo&ct, jic (oben. 8 
 they may praise. 
 
 Obs. A. The present of the subjunctive differs, in 
 regular verbs, from the present of the indicative only 
 in the third person singular, which rejects the letter U 
 All German verbs are regular in the present of the 
 subjunctive, which is formed from the infinitive. 
 
 Obs. B. The letter e which is often omitted in the 
 present of the indicative (Obs. A, Lesson XXXIV.) 
 must always be retained in the present of the sub- 
 junctive. 
 
 He who requires to be honoured 3Bet Detfanc^ top man tfyn fetneS 
 on account of his riches, has $eid)tfjum$ roegen ttetefyte, fcet 
 also a right to require a moun- fjat aud) em 9?ed)t 311 fcetlanget^ 
 tain to be honoured that con- top man etn en 23crg r>eref)te, t>er 
 tains gold. (Mt> in ftel) f)at 
 
 IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 In regular verbs the imperfect of the subjunctive 
 does not differ from that of the indicative. In irregu- 
 lar verbs it is formed from the imperfect indicative 
 by softening the radical vowels and adding an e* b 
 
 The imperfect of the subjunctive is used after the 
 conditional conjunction tt>emt, if, expressed or under- 
 
 » 
 
 tood. 
 
 (f I had money SBenn td) ®ctt> ^d'tte (or fjcitte id) 
 
 ®ett>). 
 
 a In conjugating their verbs, learners would do well to prefix a conjunction 
 to each person of the subjunctive, not because a conjunction should necessa- 
 rily precede that mode, but because it is advisable to get into the habit oi 
 placing the verb after the conjunction, particularly in compound verbs. 
 They may use for that purpose one of the conjunctions ba$, tt> e tt tt. Ex. 
 $)a$ id) abfefyteibe, that I may copy ; ttemt tcf) abfcfjrteBe, if I copied ; wemt 
 id) afcgefcfyrteBen fyattz, if I had copied ; bafj tcp abffyxtibtn ttevbe, that I shall 
 copy, &c. These examples show that when the phrase begins with a con- 
 junction (Lesson XLVIJ.), the separable particle is not detached from the 
 verb in simple tenses, and in the past participle gives way to the syllable ge, 
 
 b From this rule must be excepted the sixteen irregular verbs which com- 
 pose the first class in our list. These, having already an e in the imperfect 
 indicative, do not add one in the subjunctive. Several of them do not soften 
 the radical vowel, but become regular again in the imperfect subjunctive, as : 
 feitncu*, to know; ttemten*, to name, to call; vetmen*, to run; feitbett *, to 
 send ; ttwnben*, to turn. 
 
288 
 
 If I saw him. 2£emt id) t!)rt ffffje (or f&f)e idf) i^n) 
 
 If he did it. £8enn cr eS tfyate (or t^dte cr c$). 
 
 Were he to lose his money. SBenn cr fern ©elt> fccrlore. 
 
 Were he to beat his dog. SBcnn er fetnen £unt) fcr)(iige. 
 
 If you were rich. SBcnn <Ste rctd) wciten (or watcn 
 
 <Sie reid)). 
 
 Ois. C. As soon as VDetttt is not conditional it re- 
 quires the indicative mode. Ex. 
 
 If he is not ill, why does he send £Bcnn cr nidjt fran! ijr, worum (apt 
 for the physician ? cr ten Sector fommen ? 
 
 Obs. D. Instead of tt>emt, the imperfect subjunctive 
 of the verb fotfen is often used at the beginning of a 
 sentence, as should in English. 
 
 Should you still receive my let- (gelltcn @te metnen S3ncf tied) fycute 
 ter to-day, I beg you will call crMten, fo tntte id) <Sic, auQcn: 
 on me instantly. bltctltd) $u nur $u femmen. 
 
 Should he be hungry, something ©elite c6 il)n f)una,ern, fe miipte man 
 must be given to him to eat. tbm ctn>ci$ $u cjfen geben. 
 
 OF THE CONDITIONAL OR POTENTIAL TENSES. 
 
 The conditional tenses are formed from the imper- 
 fect subjunctive of the verb tt)erben # , which is: id) 
 ttmrbe, I should or would become, and, as in the future 
 tenses (Lesson LXXXL and LXXXIL), the present of 
 the infinitive for the conditional present, and the past 
 of the infinitive for the conditional past. The imper- 
 fect of the subjunctive may be used instead of the 
 conditional present, and the pluperfect of the subjunc- 
 tive for the conditional past. Ex. 
 
 I should do it. 3d) wurbc c$ tfjun (or id) tfyate e$). 
 
 He would have done it. (St roiirbe cS getfyem fjaben (or ec 
 
 Jfjattc e$ getfjan). 
 
 We would go thither. ££ir rcmrben bafytn cjcljcn. 
 
 You would go thither. 3|$ rourfcet l)ingcr)cn. 
 
 They would go thither. (Sic rourben f)ingcf)Ctn 
 
 Thou wouldst thank me once. £)u rofirfceft nur ctnft bemfrn. 
 
 A.t one time, one day (once). (Stnft etneg Sngcg. 
 
 Obs. E^ The imperfect of the subjunctive or the 
 conditional tense may be employed either before or 
 after conditional propositions, as in English. Ex. 
 
289 
 
 I should buy it if I had money 3d) faufte e$ (or id) wfttbe c$ !au- 
 
 enough. fen)/ roenn id) ©etb cjenug fyattc. 
 
 If 1 had money enough I would 2Benn id) (Mb Cjcnu^ fyattc, fo tvutb? 
 
 buy it. id) cS faufen (or fo Caufte id) cs). 
 
 Elad I money enough! would pay £citte id) ©elb gcnitQ, fo be$a f)(te tcb 
 
 for it. cS (or fo rolirbe id) c$ be$a f)(cn). 
 
 had I money I would give you Jg>atte id) (Sett) (or roenn id) ©e(b 
 
 some. fyattc), fo nritrbe id) Sfynen tt>c(d)cS 
 
 Qebcn (or fo g&Oe td) Sfynen wet 
 
 If I went thither I should see &Benn id) fytnginge, fo rourbe td) tfjn 
 
 him. fcr)en. 
 
 Were I io give it to him, he would (SJabc id) c£ if)m, cr rourbe e$ (or \e 
 
 keep it. roiitbe cr es) bcrjalten. 
 
 If I gave it to him, he would not 2Benn id) e* ifjm §abc, fo nnftbe es el 
 
 return it to me. mir nid)t nneberciebcn. 
 
 Had you come a little sooner (or, SBatcrt <Ste einen 2(ugen6(icf eljer qc* 
 
 if you had come a little sooner) f ommen (or roerm (Sic einen lint 
 
 you would have seen my bro- cjenbttcf cber gef ommen waxen), fo 
 
 ther (or, you might have seen rvtirben Sic meinen 93rubcr gefe? 
 
 my brother). fyen fyaben (or fo fatten ©« n\cu 
 
 nen 33rubct gcfcr)cn). 
 If he knew what you have done, S&cnn er itmfte, rc>a$ <Sie getfyan r)as 
 
 he would scold you. ben, fo ttnitbe cr @ie auSfcbelten. 
 
 If there was any wood, he would 2Bcnn ^0(3 ba ware, fo rcmrbe es 
 
 make a fire. geuet cmmad)cn. 
 
 If I had received my money, I 2&enn id) metn ®clb befommen fycittc, 
 
 would have bought a pair of fo nnirbc id) mit ein tyaav neue 
 
 new shoes. <Sd)ufye gefemft f)aben. 
 
 Obs. F. The imperfect subjunctive of the verbs 
 fontten*, soften*, ntogen*, bitrfert*, is often employed to 
 express various feelings, as : 
 
 1st, $r)nrten, fear or desire. Ex. 
 
 He might Ml. (St lonnte fallen. 
 
 I might (could) do it. 3d) ft'nntc eg tfjun. 
 
 2d, SBotfert, solicitation. Ex. 
 
 Would you have the goodness 1 £Bofltcn (Sic bie G)tite r)a6cn ? 
 Would you be so good 1 SBoflten @ie fo cu'ittg fein ? 
 
 Wouldst thou do me the favour 1 SSMtcft bu mir bie ©efadtgfeit et* 
 
 rocifen ? 
 
 3d, ^JJogett, desire, either with or without the adverb 
 genu Ex. 
 
 t**d like to know. JUSSSStffnu 
 
290 
 
 4th, Surfeit, politeness, either in the present of the 
 indicative or the imperfect of the subjunctive. Ex. 
 
 May I ask you for the knife 1 2)atf (or burfte) id) @ic um t>al 
 
 Sftcffet bitten ? 
 May I beg of you to tell me ? Darf (or btitfte) id) @ie bitten, mtr 
 
 $u fagcrt ? 
 
 Would you learn German, if I £Burbcn (Ste beutfd) fernen, roenn td) 
 
 learnt it ] c$ lerntc ? 
 
 I would learn it, if you _earnt it. 3d) rofirbc ei krnen, rccmt (Sic e$ 
 
 fernten. 
 Would you have learnt English, 2Burbcn (Sic cngftfd) Qctcrnt rjaben, 
 
 if I had learnt it 1 roenn id) c$ gctcrnt r^d'ttc ? 
 
 I would have learnt it, if you had 3d) routbe e$ geletnt f)aben, roetm 
 
 learnt it. @tc e$ gelernt fatten. 
 
 Would you go to Germany, if 1 SBfitben <Ste nod) £)eutfd)(anb reifen, 
 
 went thither with you] rcenn id) mit Sfynen bafytn rctfete ? 
 
 [ would go thither, if you went 3d) ttriirbe t>af}in reifen, roenn ©ic 
 
 thither with me. mit mir bafytn rcifetcn. 
 
 Would you have gone to Ger- SMrben @ie nod) £)eutfd)(anb ejes 
 
 many, if I had gone thither rctf't fcin, roenn id) mit Sfjnen 
 
 with you ? . babin gcrciPt mare ? 
 
 Would you go out, if I remained SQSutben <Sic ciuggcfjcn, roenn id) 
 
 at home ? ju £aufc blicbe ? 
 
 [ would remain at home, if you 3d) rofirbe gtt £mufe btetben (or id) 
 
 went out. blicbe gu #aufe) wenn @ie cm$* 
 
 ginger 
 Would you have written a letter, gBiirben <§te etnen 93rief gefefiricben 
 
 if I had written a note ? fjaben, wenn id) cm 23tKet gcfd)tte* 
 
 ben ^Gttc ? 
 
 The spectacles, bie SSrttfc (is in German used in 
 
 the singular) ; 
 
 a pair of spectacles, cine 93rUle ; 
 
 the old man, bet cilte Sftann, bet ©tei$ ; 
 
 the optician, ber £)pttcu$ ; 
 
 To go (or come), to fetch. 2Cbf)0len. 
 
 To keep one's bed (one's room). £)ct$ SSett (beg Simmer) f)(item 
 
 The plate, ber teller ; 
 
 the son-in-law, ber ©dbtmegcrfcljn ; 
 
 the daughter-in-law, bie @d)n>tcgertod)ter ; 
 
 the progress, bie $ortfd)ritte (plural) ; 
 
 the step (the pace), ber @d)tttt ; 
 
 really, nrirfttd). 
 
 exercises. 208. 
 
 Would you have money, if your father were here ? — I should 
 have some, if he weie here.— Would you have been pleased, if ] 
 
291 
 
 had had some books ] — I should have been much pleased, if you had 
 had some. — Would you have praised my little brother, if he had been 
 good? — If he had been good, I should certainly (cjenrij}) not only 
 have praised, but also loved, honoured, and rewarded him. — Should 
 we be praised, if we did our exercises ? — If you did them without 
 a fault, you would be praised and rewarded. — Would my brother 
 not have been punished, if he had done his exercises ] — He would 
 not have been punished if he had done them. — Would your sister 
 have been praised, if she had not been skilful 1 — She would cer- 
 tainly not have been praised, if she had not been very skilful, and 
 if she had not worked from morning until evening. — Would you 
 give me something, if I were very good ] — If you were very good, 
 and if you worked well, I would give you a fine book. — Would 
 you have written to your sister, if I had gone to Dresden] — 1 
 would have written and sent her something handsome, if you had 
 gone thither. — Would you speak, if I listened to you 1 — I would 
 speak, if you listened to me, and if you would answer me. — Would 
 you have spoken to my mother, if you had seen her] — I would 
 (have) spoken to her, and have begged of her to send you a hand- 
 some gold watch (t>tc ttfyt), if I had seen her. 
 
 209. 
 
 One of the valet de chambres (bet jtcunmetbtcnet) of Louis the 
 XIV. (£ubttncj be£ XIV.) requested that prince, as he was going to 
 bed, to recommend (cmpfefjlcn*) to the first president (bcr Dberptaft 2 
 bent) a law-suit (bet $to$efO which he had against his father-in-law 
 (tve(cl)en et nut fetnem @d)ix>tecjet»atct fitfyrte), and said, in urging him 
 (in Semcmben bttnejen*) : "Alas (2(d)) sire ((Suet TOjejIaf), you have 
 but (@te btttfen nut) to say one word." " Well ((St)," said Louis 
 XIV., " it is not that which embarrasses me (bat ift e$ ntcrjt, nxiS 
 nucl) ctnftd)t) ; but tell me, if thou wert in thy father-in-law's place, 
 aw' thy father-in-law in thine, wouldst thou be glad if I said that 
 word T " 
 
 If the men should come, you would be obliged to give them some- 
 thing to drink. — If he could do this he would do that. — A peasant 
 havrrig seen that old men used spectacles to read, went to an opti- 
 cian and asked for a pair. The peasant then took a book, and 
 having opened it, said the spectacles were not good. The optician 
 put another pair of the (t)cn ben) best which he could find in his 
 shop upon hrs nose ; but the peasant being still unable to read, the 
 merchant said to him : " My friend, perhaps you cannot read at 
 all] " "If I could," said the peasant, "I should not want your 
 spectacles." — I have always flattered myself, my dear brother, that 
 you loved me as much as I love you ; but I now see, that I have 
 been mistaken. I should like to know why you went a walking 
 without me. — I have heard, my dear sister, that you are angry wkh 
 me, because I went a walking without you. — I assure you that, had 
 I known that you were not ill, I shoufd have come for you ; but I 
 inquired at your physician's about your health, and he told me that 
 you had been keeping your bed the last eight days. 
 
292 
 
 210. 
 
 A French officer having arrived at the court of v ienna (am 2Bte* 
 tier £ofe), the empress Theresa (t>te jtcufertnn Sfjetcfta) asked him, 
 if (ofr) he believed that the princess of (oon) N., whom he had seen 
 the day before, was (man) really the handsomest woman in (t>en) 
 the world, as was said 1 " Madam," replied the officer, "I though* 
 so yesterday." — How do you like that meat? — I like it very well. 
 — May I (£arf or btlrfte id)) ask you for a piece of (t>cn) that fish 1 — 
 If you will have the goodness to pass me your plate, I will give 
 you some. — Would you have the goodness to pour me out some 
 drink ] — With much pleasure. — Cicero seeing his son-in-law, who 
 was very short (ftctn), arrive with a long sword at his side (an ber 
 ©cite), said : " Who has fastened (qcbunben) my son-in-law to this 
 sword 1 " (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETY.FIRST lesson. — ©in unit nemwte 
 Cation. 
 
 To propose. ©id) DOtne&men*. 
 
 I propose going on that journey. 3d) ncfyme mir ttor, btefc £Hctfe $a 
 
 madjen. 
 
 To endeavour C @ t d) t> C m ft b e tt. 
 
 1 o endeavour. £ <£> i d) b e jt r e b e n, (tracbtcn). 
 
 I endeavour to do it. 3d) bemiibe mid), e$ $u tbutu 
 
 I endeavour to succeed in it, 3d) fitd)?, C6 b a I) i n $u bringen 
 
 To aspire after something. $lad) ctroaS trad)ten. 
 Heaspires after places of honour. (St tracbtet nad) (SfyrenjMten. 
 The honour, bic (Sbrc ; 
 
 the riches, bcr 9?eid)tf)um ; 
 
 the title, bcr &ttc(. 
 
 I should not have complained of 3d) roiirbe mid) ti6er l>a$, nxtS et 
 what he has done, if it had cjctl)an fjar, ntd)t teffagt b^en, 
 injured only me ; but in doing roenn c£ mir mtr gefebabet Wtte ; 
 it, he has plunged many fami- after cr bar mcle gamUien babutd) 
 lies into misery. in$ (S(cnb gejttiqt. 
 
 Since you are happy, why do ^)a @te bod) gtiicHtd) ftnt>, waruni 
 you complain] beftagen 6fe ft'tfj b e n n ? 
 
 O&s. JL In German a good many words, as : betttt 
 bod), tool)!, &c. are used for the sake of euphony- 
 Such words cannot possibly bfc rendered in English 
 Ex. 
 
293 
 
 What do you wish to say with £Ba$ tvotlen ©tc b c n tt tamit fa* 
 
 this? gen? 
 
 Since you have nothing to tell £)a Bic tfjm bod) nid)t£ $u facjcn 
 him, why do you wish to see fyaben, roarum wcltcn <Ste tfyn 
 him ? b e n n fehen ? 
 
 Who has made the best use of SQScr fat tuobt ben beften ©ebraudj 
 his money 1 sen fetnem ©elbc gema$t ? 
 
 To injure. (Scbaben. 
 
 To plunge (to precipitate). (Stuqcn. 
 The use, bcr (Sebraud), 
 
 You would oblige me much, if @ic rotirben mid) fcfjr ttcrbinben, 
 you would do me this favour. rcenn <§te mir btefe ©cfafltcjtett 
 
 errceifen rooUten. 
 If you would render me this ££enn ^te mir btcfen JDwjt fetften 
 service, you would oblige me roett'ten, fo nmrben @te mid) fcftr 
 much. t?erbtnben. 
 
 To oblige. 93crbtnfccn*, rjcrpflid)ten. 
 
 To render a service to some one. Semctnbem etnen iDtenft tetftcn. 
 The obligation, bte 33erbinbltd)t"eit. 
 
 To tie (attach). 23int>cn*. 
 
 I tie the horse to the tree. 3d) btnbe bci$ Spfcrb an ben 33aum. 
 
 He is the most honest man that £)a$ ift bcr cbrlid)ftc 93?ann, ben 
 has ever been seen. man \c (jemate) gefefan fat. 
 
 I want a horse that must be tal- 3d) nm9 etn $)fctb faben, ba$ (voeU 
 ler than this. d)e£) grower tft atS btefcS. 
 
 I am sorry that she is ill. (Sg ift (trjiit) mir letb, tajl ftc ftant 
 
 I am glad that you are come. (5$ ift mir iub, $>a$ <Sie ejefommen 
 
 ftnb. 
 I am astonished that he has not 3d) itwnbere mid)/ ba$ er fcinc 2(ufs 
 
 done his exercises. getben nid)t gemacbt fat. 
 
 He will marrv her though she is (Sr rtnrb fie fatrcitfan, ob fie fjtetd) 
 
 not rich. nid)t reid) ift. 
 
 I will wait until he returns. 3d) trnll warren, bti er ^urucrtemmt* 
 
 In case that should, happen, let 3m Satfe e* gcfd)tef)t, fo laffen <StC 
 
 me know u , mid)% rctffen. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Obs. B. In German the subjunctive, being only 
 used to express doubt or incertitude, is not governed 
 by any particular words. It has more affinity to the 
 English subjunctive than to that of any other lan- 
 guage, and more than would at first be supposed. We 
 sometimes, however, prefer the subjunctive vhere the 
 English use the potential should or ivould, though we 
 could in this case even use either the potential or the 
 subjunctive. Ex. 
 
294 
 
 should do it, if it were possible. 3d) tt) ii r t> e c$ tf)Utt, menn e$ m&}* 
 
 ltd) to a r e. 
 
 Were I in your place, or if I were ££ate id) an 31)tct ©telle, obet 
 
 in your place. tvenn id) an Sbter (Stelle tt) a t e. 
 
 £fad he the treasures of Croesus, £ a 1 1 e er tie <&§b$i t)C8 (SrSfug, 
 
 or if he had the treasures of et>ct tt>enn er tie ©cfyd'ge beg (Stfc 
 
 Crcesus. fug t) a 1 1 e. 
 
 That man w<?tt/d fo happier, if liefer 9#ann tt)utbc g(udltd)et 
 
 he Ze/£ off gambling. f e t n, n>cnn er bag ©piefen 1 1 e p e* 
 
 He would toe foen happier, if @r tt) it r b e gludltd)Ct g e ft) e f e n 
 
 he had left off gambling. f e i n, rcenn er t>a$ ©pielen g e s 
 
 I a f f c n h a 1 1 c. 
 If you £new how ill I am, you SSenn Si* tt) ii (j t c n (or tt) u p t e tt 
 wow/J not fo astonished to find (Ste), nnc franf id) bin, fo tt) ii r * 
 me in bed. b e n ©ie ntd)t erftaunt f e in (fo 
 
 tt>atcn @te nid)t erftaunt), mid) 
 
 im SBette §u ftnben. 
 
 He w^Zd not toe done it, had (St id it t b c eg ntd)t g e t F) a tt Ij a * 
 
 he foreseen the result. ben, fyatte er ben (Stfolg 
 
 ttotauggefefjen. 
 I should think myself ungrateful, 3d) tvutbe mtd) flit unbanf&at: 
 did I not consider you as my t) a 1 1 e n, f a & e id) ©ie ntd)t als 
 benefactor. mcinen 3£of)(tf)atet a n. 
 
 The French would not toe gain- £>tc gran^cfen ttut t b e n bte <Sd)lad)t 
 ed the battle, if they had not nid)t gett)onnen Ij a ft e n (or 
 A«c? superior numbers. fatten bte ©d)lad)t ntd)t g c s 
 
 tt) n n e n), roenn ftc ntd)t etne 
 fo grope Uc&etmad)t Don Ceuten 
 g c (J a & t fatten. 
 
 Obs. C. In English the potential should or would is 
 used to express a wish relating to a future time, and 
 the subjunctive to express a wish relating to a past 
 time. In both instances the Germans use the subjunc- 
 tive. Ex. 
 
 I wish you would do it. 3d) ttritnfd)te, <Ste 1 I) a t e n eg, or 
 
 bafy (Sic eg t f) a t e n. 
 I wish y ou w Mild go thither. 3d) tt)ttnfd)te, @ie g t n g e n \) i n, 
 
 or t>a$ (Ste I) t n g i n g e n. 
 1 wish you had done it. 3d) tt)itnfd)tc, (Ste fatten eg g e 2 
 
 t J) a n, ^r ba$ @;e eg g e t f) a n 
 
 fatten. 
 I wish you had gone thither. 3d) tt)itnfd)te, (Ste tt) a' t c n bins 
 
 g e g a n g e n, or baj} @ie f) i n 5 
 
 g e g a n g e n to a' r c n. 
 I should have wished to see him, 3d) I) a 1 1 e g e tt) it tt f d) t, ifytt gtt 
 Aac? it been possible. fcr)cn y tt) a t c eg mogltd) g e tt> e * 
 
 fen. 
 
295 
 
 £ should like to read, if I had 3d) (flfc gctn, mnn id) ttUt 3*il 
 only time. f) a 1 1 c. 
 
 Obs. D. Some expressions require sometimes the 
 indicative and sometimes the subjunctive according to 
 the manner in which the sentence is formed. Ex. 
 
 flndic. 
 However rich he may J 
 be. ] Subj. 
 
 @r mag fo reirf) fern, 
 
 nrie er tt>iCL 
 
 & fei fo retdf), tt>ie er 
 
 n>ofte. 
 
 rindic. 
 Whatever your power J 
 may be, j Subj. 
 
 3fyre ©ett>a(t mag fo 
 gro£ fern, aU fte n>itt. 
 Sfyre ©ewalt fei nod) 
 fo grog. 
 
 06s« E* In German we never employ the indica- 
 tive, 
 
 1. In conditional propositions with or without the 
 conjunction tt^emt, if. (See preceding Lesson.) Ex, 
 
 If I could I would do it. 2£cnn id) Conntc, fo tf)ate id) ee ; 01 
 
 formic id), fo tfyatc id) & 
 
 If she were amiable he w r ould £Bcnn ftc ticbcnSrauttug w&vc (or 
 marry her. uoan fte tecbenSrourtng),, fo fytixae 
 
 tfyctc cr ftc. 
 
 2. In exclamations and wishes. Ex. 
 
 If I had friends \ £attc id) grcunfcc ! 
 
 If I were rich ! SSatc id) rcid) ! 
 
 May heaven grant it ! £)ct £imme[ qc(hj c$ ! 
 
 Uod forbid ! ©ott bcrjtitc ! 
 
 I could not have thought it . £dttc tcfy'S t)Cd) nid)t gegiaubt! 
 
 3. After the verbs erjafytot, to relate ; fragen, to ask ; 
 fagen, to say, and others, which relate indirectly, either 
 to what we have said ourselves, or to what we have 
 heard said by other persons. Ex. 
 
 He related to me, that he had (§r cqabftc mtr, tap cr ©duprud) 
 
 suffered shipwreck, and had gelitfcn, tint) fein a/m$e$ 23erm3gen 
 
 lost all his fortune, wrloren fyatte. 
 
 He asked me whether I was not Qtz fraqte mid), ob id) nid)t fcct unfc 
 
 such a one, whether I had no t)cc ro&tc, Ob id) fein ©e(t> r)attc, 
 
 money, why I did not know rocirum id) nici)t fdjmbcn fonnte* 
 how to write. 
 
296 
 
 Thou art master on the cross- SDu Otft cm 9#etftcr cmf ber 2£tm; 
 
 bow, Tell. fcruft, Sell. 
 
 They say, tho?i standest up to SDton fagt, t)U ncifymefi c$ auf mil 
 
 any shooter 1 j[ct)ein ©d)fi|en ? 
 
 (gdnUcr'S SBUWm Sett.) 
 
 I told him he had made a mis- 3d) fagtc tbm, top cr fid) orirtt f)fo 
 
 take ; but he thought that was te ; cr nictntc abcr, bas mate md)t 
 
 impossible, as he had looked mogttcb, roetl cr cS btctmal turd)? 
 
 it over three times. gefcfyen (jd'tte. 
 
 A wise man said, The reason (Stn 2Bctfcr fagte : £)ct 5Q?cnfd) rjafce 
 
 why a man has but one mouth bcf'rocgcn ctnen 5Q?unb tint) $roct 
 
 and two ears is, that he may £)f)rcn, bcmut cr rccntgcr (ptecfyc, 
 
 speak less and hear more. unt> mcfyt fyorc. 
 
 Obs. F. Mr., Mrs., and Miss such a one, are often 
 translated by ber unb ber for the masculine, tk unb bie 
 for the feminine, ba3 unb ba$ for the neuter. 
 
 He said he would marry Miss (5r fagte, cr ttK'rbc* ba$ unb ba$ 
 such a one. gtMetn bctrat&cn. 
 
 To suffer shipwreck. (Scfytffbrucf) Ictben*. 
 
 Possible, mog(tci) ; 
 
 impossible, unmoajttf). 
 
 Whether. £) 0. 
 
 Obs. G. fOh is only used in indirect questions, oi 
 before sentences which express doubt or possibility. 
 Ex. 
 
 [ do not know whether he is at 3d) roctg mcf)t, ofc cr gu #aufc tjt. 
 
 home. 
 I did not know whether you 3d) reuptc md)t, ot> c$ SfyttCtt ticb 
 
 would be glad of it. fctn ixmtbc. 
 
 The question is whether he will (£* tft btc ^tagc, c & er ^ *$*& ^ un 
 
 do it. roollcn. 
 
 06s. Jff. £)& is a component of the following con- 
 junctions : obgfetd), obfdjon, obroofyJ, ofcjroar, though, al- 
 though. These conjunctions ought to bf considered 
 as two separate words, for the subject qy even the 
 case of the verb may be placed between them. Ex. 
 
 I shall buy that horse, though it 3d) rwrbc btcfeS $)ferb fcmfcn, Ob eg 
 is not an English one. glctd) fctn (Sngtanbct tjt. b 
 
 * SBcrbc is here in the future of the subjunctive. (See the following Les- 
 ion.) 
 b When the subject or case of the verb is not a personal pronoun, it is not 
 
297 
 
 Though he is my cousin, he SO et c^etdf) (or fcfyon) mem SJcttCt 
 nevertheless does not come to ift, fo fommt ct t>cd> md)t $u mm 
 see me. 
 Although he has promised it to Dbcjteid) cr c$ nut t?crfprec$)cn r)at, fb 
 
 me, I do not rely upon it. $cif)te id) bed) md)t tarauf. 
 
 Although he is poor, he does £)b ct feben (or gleid), $rc>ar, rooty) 
 nevertheless a great deal of arm tjt, fo tfyut cr t>ccr> met ©ute$, 
 good. 
 
 However, nevertheless, ted) ; 
 
 the folly, tie SriorrjCtt, tie 9?arv6ctt ; 
 
 the character, tet (Et)araftct (plur. e), tie (S5e* 
 
 miit()8art; 
 bashful, timid, btcte ; 
 
 fearful (timid), furcbtfam ; 
 
 natural, uattirttd) ; 
 
 oolite (civil), impolite (uncivil), rjoptcf) ; unfyofftd). 
 
 exercises. 211. 
 
 Well (9?un), does your sister make any progress ? — She would 
 make some, if she were as assiduous as you. — You flatter me.— 
 Not at all (®an$ unt) gar ntcbt), I assure you that I should be highly 
 satisfied, if all my pupils worked like you. — Why do you not go 
 out to-day ] — 1 would go out if it was fine weather. — Shall I have 
 the pleasure of seeing you to-morrow 1 — If you wish it I will come. 
 —Shall I still be here when you arrive (bet 3f)rer unhmft) 1 — Will 
 you have occasion (©ete^enrjett) to go to town this evening 1 ? — I do 
 not know, but I would go now if I had an opportunity (tie ©es 
 lecjenfjeit). — You would not have so much pleasure, and you 
 would not be so happy, if you had not friends and books. — Man 
 would not experience so much misery (fo met (Stent) in his career 
 (auf (enter Saufbafyn), and he would not be so unhappy, were he not 
 so blind. — You would not have that insensibility (tie ©efur)tloftCjfctt) 
 towards the poor, and you would not be so deaf to (taub ejegen) their 
 supplication (tie SMtte), if you had been yourself in misery for some 
 time. — You would not say that if you knew me well. — Why has 
 your sister not done her exercises'? — She would have done them, 
 if she had not been prevented. — If you worked more, and spoke 
 oftener, you would speak better.— I assure you, Sir, that I should 
 learn better, if I had more time. — I do not complain of you, but oi 
 your sister. — You would have had no reason (Urfacfye) to complain 
 of her, had she had time to do what you gave her to do. — What 
 has my brother told you 1 — He has told me that he w T ould be the 
 happiest man in the (t>en ter) world, if he knew the German lan- 
 guage, the most beautiftL of all languages. 
 
 usually placed between these two words. Ex. Dbgtetd) btefe§ $fetb letn 
 (£ttglanber ift, fo ttetbe id) c§ bod) femfett, although this horse is not an Eng- 
 lish one, I shall nevertheless buy it. Dbgletrf) bicfem SJitcmne tiicfctS totberfcij)* 
 ten tft, fo betlctgt er fid) bod), though nothing ha« happened to this man, he is 
 nevertheless complaining. 
 
 13* 
 
298 
 
 212. 
 
 I should like to know why I cannot speak as well as you.— 1 
 frill tell you : you would speak quite as well as I, if you were not 
 so bashful. But if you had studied your lessons more carefully 
 (bcffcr), you would not be afraid to speak; for, in order to speak 
 well, one must learn; and it is very natural, that he who 
 does not know well what he has learnt should be timid. — You 
 would not be so timid as you are (ctl$ @ic ftttt)), if you were sure to 
 make no mistakes. — There are some people who laugh when I speak. 
 — Tnose are impolite people ; you have only to laugh also, and 
 they will no longer laugh at you. If you did as I (do), you would 
 speak well. — You must study a little every day, and you will soon 
 be no longer afraid to speak. — I will endeavour to follow your ad- 
 vice, for I have resolved (fid) Dornefymen*) to rise every morning at 
 six o'clock, to study till ten o'clock, and to go to bed early. — De- 
 mocritus and Heraclitus (in German as in English .gjeraclttuS, &c), 
 were two philosophers of a (t>on) very different character : the first 
 laughed at (fiber with the accus.) the follies of men, and the other 
 wept at them. — They were both right, for the follies of men deserve 
 (tiertucncn) (both) to be laughed and wept at. — My brother told me 
 that you had spoken of me, and that you had not praised me. — We 
 should have praised you, if you had paid us what you owe us.— 
 You are wrong in complaining of my cousin, for he did not intend 
 to hurt your feelings. — I should not have complained of him, if he 
 had only hurt my feelings ; but he has plunged into misery a whole 
 family. — You are wrong in associating with that man. He only 
 aspires after riches. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETY-SECOND LESSON.— £u)*i urib netttt}ig$t£ 
 
 To be thoroughly acquainted with £fltt ctncr ©acfye gcncm focfcmnt (or 
 
 a thing. t)crtrant) fan*. 
 
 To make one's self thoroughly (Sid) nut ctner (Sacfye befannt (or 
 
 acquainted with a thing. sertraut) macr)en. 
 
 I understand this business. 3d) bin nut fciefer @ad)C ttcrtraut (or 
 
 befannt). 
 Acquainted, fccfcmnt ; 
 
 intimate, familiar, ttertrcmr. 
 
 1 am acquainted with that. f 3d) bin tomtt bcfannt (wttraut> 
 
 A species (a kind), cine 2Crt, a cine ©attun^. 
 
 What kind oi fruit is that | \ ^ fi' dne £ rt &«#* J« «* * 
 
 ) 2Ba$ fur ctne $rud)t t(t t>te$? 
 
 * The plural of collective nouns is generally formed by adding 5lrteHj 
 rinds, species, to the singular. Ex. bte Dbfta.tert, fruit (i. e. various sorts ol 
 (ruin ; b{c ©ettetbeartctt, corn (i. e. various kinds of corn'i. 
 
299 
 
 The kerne! (of an apple, a pear, > K - ~ 
 an almond), ' } bcc ® etn ' 
 
 The stone, tec (Stein ; 
 
 kernel-fruit, tag £ernobjt ; 
 
 stone-fruit, tag (Stetncbjt 
 
 [t is u kernel-fruit. 
 To gather fruit. 
 
 The dessert, 
 Tc serve up the dessert, 
 
 The fruit, 
 
 the plum, 
 the anecdote, 
 the soap, 
 the roast-meat, 
 
 To dry (to wipe). 
 To cease (to leave off). 
 I leave off reading. 
 She leaves off speaking. 
 
 (£g tjt cine £etnfcud)i 
 
 Dfcji bted)en*. 
 
 tct Sftod&tifcf). 
 
 ten 9tod)ttfd) aufttagen*. 
 i tag £)bjr, 
 ! tic gtucfyt ; b 
 ' tic spftaumc ; 
 
 tic 2Cnectctc ; 
 
 tic (Scifc ; 
 
 fccv SSratcn. 
 
 2C0trocfncn. 
 SCuf&oren. 
 
 t 3d) r)6te auf $u lefen. 
 t <Ste fjort auf $u fprcd^cn. 
 
 i 9J2cttcn* (acmteten, mict) 
 < SScruicttcn*. 
 Scmantcn mciten*. 
 (Stwag wrmctten*. 
 GKnem Unafttcfe cntgefyen* or entrm* 
 
 nen* (entronnen, entrann), 
 tic (Strafe. 
 
 Um tern Sote $u cnt^efjen, nafjm cr 
 tie gfud)t. 
 The flight, the escape, tic ghid)t. 
 
 To avoid. 
 
 To avoid some one. 
 
 To avoid something. 
 
 To escape (avoid a misfortune) 
 
 The punishment, 
 To avoid death he ran away. 
 
 To do without a thing. 
 
 Can you do without bread ! 
 
 I can do without it* 
 
 I do without bread. 
 
 Do you do without bread 1 
 
 I do without it. 
 
 i (Sine 
 
 <©tdr 
 
 dim (or einct) <Sad)c cntbefyten 
 governs the gen. or the ace). 
 fcefjeffen* cfyne etroag/ 
 Gormen @ie p4 otync S3rot fcefjek 
 
 fen? 
 jtonnen (Sic tag 23rot (teg SBteteg) 
 
 entbefyten ? 
 3d) farm eg entbeftten. 
 3d) fcefoeffe mid) efnte S3rct. 
 SSefjelfcn <Sie fid) cfjne SBcct ? 
 3d) fann eg cntbefyren. 
 
 b 3)ie $rud)t is the fruit of trees and plants. Ex. £>te $elbfritc$te, the fruit 
 of the fields. ^rud)t is also employed figuratively: Ex. 3)ie Jyrud)t fetner 
 5ivbett, the reward of his labour. £-bft is only used in speaking of apples, 
 pears, plums, and similar fruit. Hence ba3 ^ernobfi, kernel-fruit; b(i$ ©tettt* 
 obft, stone-fruit. 
 
 t c (Sntbefyrcn is employed in the sense of to be without and to do without, 
 fi$ befyetfett* in the ssnse only of to do without 
 
300 
 
 There are many things which we &Bit mtiffen mele$ mtbtf)tm 
 must do without. 
 
 (Sftan facjt, ct roetfce mctcjen a&rei* 
 fen, 
 9J?an fagt, fcaf* cr moreen abteifen 
 wcrfce. 
 
 FUTURE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 The futures of the subjunctive differ from those of 
 the indicative only in the second and third persons 
 singular, which are : IDerbefl and toette, instead of ttnr ji 
 and ttrirb. Ex. 
 
 Thou wilt praise. 
 He will praise. 
 Thou wilt have praised. 
 He will have praised. 
 
 2)u roetkjt toben, 
 (5r rocrfce foben. 
 £)u rocrbeft gclobt fyaben, 
 (5r roerfce gclobt Ijabcn. 
 
 The future of the subjunctive implies a coming but 
 uncertain event. Ex. 
 
 It is said that he will soon ar- 
 rive. 
 
 '9Jlan fagt, cr roctfce bait) anfom* 
 
 men. 
 9#an facjr, tap ct baft) anfemrom 
 rcctbe 
 
 {202an f>cfft, cr roerbe nod) $u reciter 
 Sett ancjefommen fein, 
 y^an f)offt, t>af er nod) $u reciter 3^if 
 angefommen fein roerfce. 
 
 They will warm the soup. SWan tt>trb tic <Suppe roatmen. 
 
 Dinner, or supper, is on the tab! 3 f £Jlan f)at aufejettagen. 
 (Literally : one has served up) 
 
 To serve, to attend. 
 
 li u f tx> a x t n. 
 
 Can I nelp you to some of it? f $ann id) 3hmn bamttaufroatten? 
 Shall I help you to some soup 1 ") f jtann id> Sfyncn nut <8uppe aaf* 
 Shall I help 5 ra to some soup ] 5 marten ? 
 I will trouble you for a little. f 3d) bttte mtr ein roemo, fca&on 
 
 au£. 
 To ask for (politely). ©id) auSbttten* 
 
 May I crave (beg) the favour of f £)atf td) mte Sfytren Stamen au$* 
 your name ) bitten ? 
 
301 
 
 The woman, tie $tau > 
 
 the wife, foaS £Bei&* 
 
 exercises. 213. 
 
 1 come to wish you a good morning. — You are very kind.— 
 Would you do me a favour ! — Tell me what you want, for 1 would 
 do anything to oblige you. — I want five hundred crowns, and I beg 
 of you to lend them to me. I will return them to you as soon as 
 I have received my money. You would oblige me much, if you 
 would render me this service. — I would do it with all my heart, if 
 I could ; but having lost all my money, it is impossible for me to 
 render you this service. — Will you ask your brother whether he is 
 satisfied with the money which I have sent him 1 — As to my bro* 
 ther, though it be little, he is satisfied with it: but I am not so; 
 for having suffered shipwreck, I am in want of the money which 
 you owe me. — Henry IV., meeting (ctnttcffcn*) one day in his 
 palace (bet ^)a(afl) a man whom he did not know (t)cc tfjm unbcfcirmt 
 roar), asked him to whom he belonged ($uo,cf)Cten). "I belong tc 
 myself, 1 ' replied this man. " My friend," said the king, " you 
 have a stupid master." 
 
 214. 
 
 Have they served up the scup 1 — They have served it up some 
 minutes ago. — Then it must be cold, and I only like soup hot (wax? 
 me ©ippe). — They will warm it for you. — You will oblige me. — 
 Shall I help you to some of this roast-meat! — I will trouble you 
 for a little. — Will you eat some of this mutton ? — I thank you, I 
 like fowl hetter. — May I offer you some wine 1 — I will trouble you 
 for a little. — Have they already served up the dessert 1 — They have 
 served it up. — Do you like fruit! — I like fruit, but I have no more 
 appetite. — Will you eat a little cheese 1 — I will eat a little. — Shall 
 I help you to English or Dutch (fyellanbtfd)) cheese 1 — 1 will eat a 
 little Dutch cheese. — W T hat kind of fruit is that 1 — It is stone-fruit. 
 — What is it called 1 — It is called thus. — Will you wash your 
 hands? — I should like to wash them, but I have no towel to wipe 
 them with. — I will let you have (geben laffen) a towel, some soap, 
 
 d 2)te *y:au is used in titles, in which case it is not expressed in English. 
 Ex. 2)te %xan ©rttfum, the countess. It stands for, 1. the mistress of the 
 house. Ex. 5>aS ift bte ^rau som 45cmfe, that is the mistress of the house ; 
 
 2. the consort. Ex. vSeine $rau tfi ' fef)r fcfyon, his lady is very handsome ; 
 
 3. the sex, but then it is generally combined with the word ^evfott or ^im- 
 mer. Ex. Bennett ete btefe ^taueitSperfon (btefel $rauett§tmmer) ? do you 
 know that lady ? The word SBetB means : 1. in general a woman of the 
 lower classes. It is sometimes combined with the word ^erfcm, and in speak- 
 ing contemptuously with the word Q3ilb. Ex. 5>te 23eifcer »om gemetnen 
 33elfe, the women of the lower classes ; bte 2Betfts))erfon, ba3 2BciB§Mlb, the 
 female ; 2. a consort among the lower classes. Ex. ($r i)at etnSSetb gertoms 
 men, he has taken a wife (has married) ; 3. the sex in general. Ex. (*tn 
 ebleS SBeib, a woman of noble sentiments; bte 9ktur beg 2Betl>e$, wonian'f 
 nature 
 
302 
 
 and some water. — I shall be much (fefyt) obliged to you. — May 1 
 ask you for a little water 1 — Here is some (£)a f)afrcn @tc). — Can 
 you do without soap !— As for soap, I can do without it ; but I 
 must have a towel to dry my hands with. — Do you often do with- 
 out soap ? — There are many things which we must do without. — 
 Why has that man run aw T ay 1 — Because he had no other means of 
 escaping the punishment which he had deserved. — Why did your 
 brothers not get a better horse 1 ? — If they had got rid of their old 
 horse, they would have got another better one. — Has your father 
 arrived already] — Not yet, but we hope that he will arrive this 
 very day (nod) r)cute). — Has your friend set out in time? — I do not 
 know, but I hope that he will have set out in time. 
 
 215. 
 
 Will you relate something to me 1 — Whai do you wish me to re- 
 late to you 1 — A little anecdote, if you like. — A little boy asked 
 (fcrbern) one day at table (Oct &tfd)e) for some meat ; his father said 
 that it was not polite to ask for any, and that he should wait until 
 some was given to him. The poor boy seeing every one eat, and 
 that nothing was given to him, he said to his father : " My dear 
 father, give me a little salt, if you please." "What will you do 
 with it ? " asked the father. " I wish to eat it with the meat (3d) 
 will c£ £U tent $(etfd)e effen) which you will give me, 1 ' replied (wrfe* 
 £en) the child. Every body admired (fcenntnbcrn) the little boy's wit ; 
 and his father, perceiving that he had nothing, gave him meat with- 
 out his asking for it. — Who was that little boy, that asked for meat 
 at table 1 — He was the son of one of my friends. — Why did he ask 
 for some meat? — He asked for some because he had a good appe- 
 tite. — -Why did his father not give him some immediately ? — Be- 
 cause he had forgotten it. — Was the little boy wrong in asking for 
 some ] — He was wrong, for he ought to have waited. — Why did 
 he ask his father for some salt ] — He asked for some salt, that (t>cu 
 nut) his father might perceive that he had no meat, and that he 
 might give him some. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETY.THIRD LESSON. -EDm nnb nemqigste 
 Cection. 
 
 To execute a commission. (Stnen tfuftrao, auSttcfyten, ttolt$tef)en*, 
 
 befcrgcn. 
 I have executed your lommissior . 3d) r)abc Sfyren 2(uftrng gut etudes 
 
 rtd)tct (tjoflscgen, bcforaf). 
 1 2 
 
 I have received with the greatest 3d) fyafre 3f)t unterm fcd)jtcn an 
 pleasure the letter which you 3 4 
 
 addressed to me, dated the 6th mid) QettdjteteS <Sd)vett>cn mtt 
 instant. t>em gr often SScrgnugcn ctfyat* 
 
 ten. 
 
303 
 
 Uj^ When the adjective precedes the noun (Led* 
 s 1 XVIII.) all words relating to it are placed before 
 the adjective, or the participle used adjectively, in the 
 following order : 1st, The article or pronoun ; 2d, all 
 words relating to the adjective or the participle adjec- 
 tive ; 3d, the adjective or participle adjective ; and 
 finally, 4th, the noun. Ex. 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 A. man polite towards everybody. (£tn gegen Sefcermcmn fyofticfyet 
 
 4* 
 dScnfcf). 
 12 3 4 
 
 A. father who loves his children, (Sin feme Jtinfcer Ueftenbet $atet. 
 You have to study the twentieth 8ie fjafcen fc>te gwon^tgpc Section 
 Lesson, and to translate the 12 3 
 
 exercises relating to it. £U jiubtten, uno tie foqu geljfc 
 
 4 
 rigen 2Cufgakn $u ii6erfegen. a 
 
 Have you executed my commis- $abm &\c meincn 2Cuftrctg auSge* 
 
 sion 7 rict)tct ? 
 
 I have executed it. 3d) fjafec tfjn cmSgeticfytet. 
 
 To do one's duty. ©cine <Sd)u(bigfett tl)un # . 
 
 To fulfil one's duty. Seine ^)fltd)t ctfiillen. 
 
 To do one's task. ©cine Arbeit mcuf)en. 
 
 That man always does his duty. <Diefer 2Q?ann tfyut immer feinc Scouts 
 
 bigfeit. 
 That man always fulfils his duty. £)iefet 93?ann erfullt immer fetne 
 
 9)flicf)t.b 
 Have you done your task ? £akn <§te 3f)te Arbeit gemacfyt ? 
 
 to saasnffisi. \ @i * auf *■« **«*•< 
 
 He depends upon it. (St t>ertapt fid) fcarauf. 
 
 I rely upon you. 3d) tterlaffe mid) auf (Sic. 
 
 You may rely upon him. @te fcnncn fid) auf ifyn tjcvfoffen. 
 
 To suffice, be sufficient. (Skniigen, rjtnretcrjen, genug fein*. 
 
 To be contented with something. Sid) mit ettua$ begntfgeo. 
 
 Is that bread sufficient foryou ? * * ^«&*%SSj, 
 
 f 3ft otefeS 33rco fur @ie genug ? 
 
 Tt is sufficient for me. (S$ gentigt mir. 
 
 a This kind of construction, wherein the noun stands separated more 01 
 less from its article, is more frequently made use of in elevated style than in 
 conversation. 
 
 b ^3fltd)t is that which our own conscience obliges us to ; (Scfyttfbtgf tit the 
 orders given us by our superiors, an J is derived froir bte ©djulb, the oblige 
 lion, debt. 
 
304 
 
 Will that money be sufficient for 
 
 that man ? 
 It will be sufficient for him. 
 Little wealth suffices for the wise. 
 Was this man contented with 
 
 that sum ] 
 
 Has this sum been sufficient for i 
 that man 1 
 
 It has been sufficient for him. 
 
 He would be contented if you 
 
 would only add a few crowns. 
 
 >Btrb btefeS ©ctb btefem 9)?anne ge» 
 
 niigen ? 
 6$ rottb ifym genii gen, 
 SBentg genugt bem £8eifen. 
 £at fid) btefct 93?ann nut btefet <Sum« 
 
 me begnugt ? 
 SBat biefe (Summe fur btcfen 9)2ann 
 
 l)tnrctd)cnb ? 
 £Bat btefe (Summe btefem 9tfannc ge; 
 
 nug? 
 (St f)at fid) banut begnugt. 
 (St nritrbc fid) begnugen, rcenn ©tc 
 
 nut nod) cintge Scaler fym^ufiigen 
 
 rcottten. 
 
 To add. 
 To build. 
 
 #tn$uffigcn. 
 23auen. 
 
 To embark, to go on board. 
 The sail, 
 To set sail. 
 To set sail for. 
 To sail for America. 
 With full sails. 
 To sail with full sails. 
 
 (Sid) einfdjtffen. 
 
 bets SfegeL 
 
 ilntet <Seget gefyen*. 
 
 ©egctn nad). 
 
 9?ad) ttmettfa fegeKn. 
 
 9Jttt ttolien ©cgctn. 
 
 9}Jtt pollen (Segetn fasten* 
 
 He embarked on the sixteenth of (St Fjat fid) am fed)$el)nten (obet ben 
 last month. fecfyefonten) legten SftonatS etnge* 
 
 fAtfft. 
 He sailed on the third instant. (St tft ben btttten (cbet am btttten) 
 
 btefet untet <Sege( gegangen. 
 
 That is to say (i. e.). £)a$ f)cij}t (namttd)). 
 
 Et cetera (*tc), and so on, and Unb fc wetter (abbreviated u. f. «?♦)• 
 so forth 
 
 Otherwise, differently. 2(nberS. 
 
 In another manner. 2(uf etnc anbete 2ftt. 
 
 If I knew that, I would behave 2Bcnn id) t>a$ wufre, wittbe id) mid) 
 
 differently. anbetS benefjmen. 
 
 [f I haa known that, I would SOBcnn id) %>a$ gewupt fyatte, fo wtitbe 
 have behaved differently. id) mid) ctnbcrS benommen fyaben. 
 
 To behave. (Std) benefymen*. 
 
 Else (otherwise). (Sonft. 
 
 If not. 2Bo mdfrt 
 
 Mend, else (if not) you will be 33cffetn <Ste fid), fenjt (wo ntd)t) 
 
 punished. ttntb man ©te fttafen. 
 
 I cannot do it otherwise 3d) fann e£ ntd)t anbetS machen. 
 
305 
 
 OF THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 The second person singular of the imperative, being 
 formed from the second person singular of the indica- 
 tive, is only irregular when the latter is so. Ex. ©e* 
 ben*, to give ; second person of the indicative, bit gtbft, 
 ttiou givest; imperative, Q\b, give thou, ijelfen*, to 
 help ; second person of the indicative, bit tyitf ji, thou 
 helpest ; imperative, fytlf, help thou. 
 
 From this rule must be excepted: 1st. The follow- 
 ing verbs : fyctben*, to have ; second person, bit fyafi, 
 thou hast - imperative, fyabe, have thou ; fern*, to be ; 
 second person, bit Uft, thou art ; imperative, fet, be 
 thou ; toerben*, to become ; bit tvivfi, thou becomest ; 
 imperative, tt>erbe, become thou ; ttriften*, to know ; 
 second person, bit toetfft, thou knowest ; imperative, ttnfte, 
 know thou ; tt>oKen # , to will ; bit ttrittft, thou wilt ; im- 
 perative, toofte* 2d. Verbs which, in the second person 
 of the indicative present, change the letter a into &♦ 
 In the imperative they resume the radical vowel. Ex. 
 ?aitfett, to run ; bit l&ttffi, thou runnest ; imperative, lau* 
 fe, run thou. 
 
 All the other persons of the imperative are derived 
 from the present of the subjunctive, which is always 
 regular, as well as the plural of the present of the in- 
 dicative. 
 
 Have patience ! £akn <&k dJcbu(t) ! 
 
 Be attentive ! <Setcn <Ste cmfmerffam ! 
 
 Go thither! ©efycn @te l)tn ! 
 
 Give it to me ! ®cbcn (Ste c$ mit ! 
 
 Give it to him ! dkbcn <Stc c$ tf)m ! 
 
 Patience, impatience, t»ie ©etmlfc) ; t>te Uncjetmlfc. 
 
 Lend it to me ! Setfjen (Sic c» nut ! 
 
 To borrow. SBorcjen ((ctf)cn*). 
 
 I will borrow some money of 3d) rot ft nut tten Sfyrten (Mfc) letfjei 
 
 you. (Ocrgen). 
 
 I will borrow this money of you. 3d) rotll btcfeS dktt) t>Ott S^ncn foot- 
 
 gen. 
 Borrow it of (or from) him. Screen (Sic e* t>cn tr)m. 
 
 I do borrow it from him. 3d) Serge c$ sen if) nu 
 
 Obs. A. These examples of the imperative are for 
 the third person plural, which is most commonly used 
 
306 
 
 in polite conversation ; but we sometimes also employ 
 the second person plural, particularly in exhortations 
 as: 
 
 Be (y e ) good. (Setb gut. c 
 
 Know (ye) it. SBijfet e£. d 
 
 Obey your masters, and never ®cf)0tcr)Ct e (Suten Ccfjrern, unb ma* 
 
 give them any trouble. d)Ct tfynen rue 93etbrup. 
 
 Pay what you owe, comfort the S5c$ar)(et, rea£ 3bt* fd)ulbtQ fetb ; 
 afflicted, and do good to those troftct tie Unglucf(id)en, unb tr)ut 
 that have offended you. beniemgen @ute£, t>tc (5ud) Octets 
 
 bto,t rjabcn. 
 Love God, thy neighbour as thy- Stefcet ®ott unb (Sutcn 9Mcl)ftcn ttne 
 self (in German yourself). (Slid) felfcft. 
 
 To obey. ©crjorcfyen. 
 
 To comfort. Stftftem 
 
 To offend. 93elcibi<jen. 
 
 The neighbour, bet 9^adr)ftc ; 
 
 sadness, tie Srauriajrett ; 
 
 the creditor, bet ©(aubiget ; 
 
 the watch, bte Ufa ; 
 
 the snuff-box, tie £>ofe, 
 
 O&s. J3. We often employ compound imperatives, 
 in order to give to understand that we either com- 
 mand or invite. They are formed for the third person 
 sing, and plur. with ntogen*, may ; foften*, shall ; and 
 for the first person plural with Ictflfen*, to let, which 
 likewise forms the compound imperative in English ; 
 and with n>o((en # , will. Ex. @r mag (often, let him (he 
 may) praise ; er foft (often, let him (he shall) praise ; ffe 
 mogen (often, let them (they may) praise ; jte fotten (often, 
 let them (they shall) praise ; laffet UXl$ (often, let us 
 praise ; ttnr tt>ol(en (often, let us (we will) praise, &c. 
 
 Let us always love and practise Caffct un$ immcr tie &u$enb Uebcn 
 virtue, and we shall be happy unb ciusiiften, fo rocrben rott tn 
 both in this life, and in the btefcm unb jenem Ceben gtiidtid^ 
 next. fetn. 
 
 Let us see which of us can shoot 2Btt roottcn fefyen, nocr tton un$ cmi 
 best. fceften fcfytepen fcmn. 
 
 c From %bx fetb, second person plural of the indicative. 
 d From ?fix ttnffet, &c. &c. 
 • From %%t gef)0td)er, &c. <fec. 
 
307 
 
 EXERCISES. 216. 
 
 Have you executed my commission ] — I have executed it. — Has 
 /our brother executed the commission which I gave him ? — He has 
 executed it. — Would you execute a commission for me 1 — I am un- 
 der so many obligations to you, that I will always execute your 
 commissions when it shall please you to give me any. — Ask the 
 horse-dealer (bcc ^fcrt)cf)anb(cr) whether he can let me have the 
 horse at (fur) the price which I have offered him. — I am sure that 
 he would be satisfied, if you would add a few florins more. — I will 
 not add anything. If he can let me have it at (fiir) that price, let 
 him do so; if not, let him keep it (fo tnao, cr e$ ftefyaltcn). — Good 
 morning (in the accus.), my children ! Have you done your task ] 
 — You well know that we always do it ; for we must (nulpten) be 
 ill not to do it. — What do you give us to do to-day 1 — I give you 
 the ninety-third lesson to study, and the exercises belonging to it to 
 do, — that is to say, the 216th and 217th. Endeavour to commit 
 (macfyen) no errors (t>er gefylct). — Is this bread sufficient for you 1 — 
 It would be sufficient for me, if I was not very hungry. — When did 
 ycur brother embark for America 1 ? — He sailed on the thirtieth of 
 last month (tegtcrt 93?onat*). — Do you promise me to speak to your 
 brother] — I do promise you, you may depend upon it. — 1 rely upon 
 you. — Will you work harder for next lesson than you have done for 
 this ] — I will work harder. — May I rely upon it ] — You may (foris 
 nen c$). 
 
 217. 
 
 Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadness alters 
 (anoern) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse (aro/t). — Be not 
 afraid of your creditors ; be sure that they will do you no harm. — 
 You must have patience, though you have no mind for it (t>a$u) ; 
 for I also must wait till I (man) am paid what is due to me. — As 
 soon as I have money, I will pay all that you have advanced (cm$; 
 (eqen) for me. Do not believe that I have forgotten it, for I think 
 erf (t>cnfcn an* with accus.) it every day. I am your debtor (t>et 
 ®'d)ult>net), and I shall never deny (tcugnen) it. — Do not believe that 
 I have had your gold watch, or that Miss Wilhelmine has had your 
 silver snuff-box, for I saw both in the hands of your oister when 
 we were playing at forfeits (spfd'nfcet fptc(cn). — What a beautiful 
 inkstand you have there ! pray, lend it to me. — What do you wish to 
 do with it 1 — I wish to show it to my sister. — Take it, but take 
 sare of it, and do not break it. — Do not fear. — What do you want 
 of (sen) my brother 1 — I want to borrow some money of him. — 
 Borrow some of somebody else. — If he will not lend me any, I will 
 borrow some of somebody else. — You will do well. — Do not wish 
 (for) what you cannot have, but be contented with what Providence 
 (bie s #otfcf)una,) has given you, and consider (tu'bcnfcn*) that there 
 are many men who have not what you have. — Life (£)a$ £cben) 
 being short, let us endeavour to make it (e$ Utts) as agreeable (anges 
 nefjm) as possible. But let us also consider that the abuse (t>ct 
 
308 
 
 £tttfi&taud)j of pleasure (in the plur. in German, SSergnftgungcn) 
 makes it bitter (bitter). — Have you done your exercises 1 — I could 
 not do them, because my brother was not at home. — You must not 
 get your exercises done by (yen) your brother, but you must do them 
 yourself. (See end of Lesson XXXIY.) 
 
 NINETY-FOURTH LESSON.— bkx tmir iuim?ig0te 
 Csrtion. 
 
 To be a judge of something. 
 Are you a judge of cloth 1 
 I am a judge of it. 
 I am not a judge of it. 
 I am a good judge of it. 
 I am not a good judge of it. 
 
 To draw. 
 
 To chalk. 
 The drawing, 
 the drawer, 
 To draw from nature, from life. 
 
 To draw a landscape from nature. 
 
 To manage or to go about a thing. 
 How do you manage to make a 
 
 fire without tongs ? 
 1 go about it so. 
 
 You go about it in a wrong way. 
 I go about it in a right way. 
 How does your brother manage 
 
 to do that] 
 Skilfully, dexterously, cleverly. 
 
 Awkwardly, unhandily. 
 
 He should have managed the 
 
 thing better than he has done. 
 You should have managed the 
 
 thing differently. 
 They ought to have managed it 
 
 as I have done. 
 We ought to have managed it 
 
 differently from what they did. 
 
 + @td) auf ctroag ttetfrcfyen*. 
 
 t &erfref)cn @te fid) auf Sud) ? 
 
 j 3d) wrftcfje mid) fcarauf. 
 
 t 3d) write fye mid) nid)t barauf. 
 
 t 3d) write he unci) fef)t gut baratif. 
 
 f 3d) wrftefye mid) ntd)t fcfjr gut 
 fciarauf. 
 
 3 e i d> n c tt. 
 
 9fotd)$etdjncn (falftccn). 
 
 tie 3etd)nung ; 
 
 t>cr 3etd)ner. 
 
 Itad) tec 9?atur, nad) tern Se&en 
 
 aetebnen. 
 Sine Sanfcfdjaft nad) t>cr Sftatut ^etc^^ 
 
 nen. 
 (SS anfangen*. 
 £Bte fangen @ic e$ an, oljne 3ange 
 
 Jeuet an$umad)cn ? 
 3d) fange c$ fo (or auf fcicfe 2£etfe) 
 
 an. 
 (Ste fangen e$ ntd)t gut an. 
 3d) fange es> gut an. 
 2Bie fangt Sfa SBtufcet e$ an, urn 
 
 DiefeS $u tf)un ? 
 ©efdjicft (auf cine gefefyicfte ofcet feU 
 
 ne 2Crt). 
 llngefd)tc!t. 
 (St batte e» befjet anfangen follen. 
 
 (Ste fatten c$ anfc>ct$ anfangen 
 
 nutffen. 
 ©ie batten e$ madjen follen/ rote id). 
 
 SBtr fatten e$ inters mad)cn foiled 
 a(S fie. 
 
309 
 
 To forbid. 
 
 1 forbid you to do that. 
 
 To lower. 
 To cast down one's eyes. 
 The curtain rises, falls. 
 The stocks have fallen. 
 
 or 
 
 The day falls. 
 
 Ft grows towards night, 
 
 comes on. 
 It grows dark. 
 It gtows late. 
 
 To stoop. 
 
 To feel. 
 To smell. 
 
 He smells of garlic. 
 
 To feel some one's pulse. 
 
 To consent to a thing. 
 I consent to it. 
 
 night 
 
 aSet&teten*. Part, past, t>et* 
 fcoten. Imperf. wtbot. 
 
 3d) Dcttuete Sfynen, btefeS $u tf)un. 
 
 DZtebetfaffcn*, fjcnmtcrfafien*. 
 iDte 2Cugen ntet)crrd)(agcn*» 
 £)et SSorljang gefyt auf, fatth 
 t £>er 2Bcd)fc(cour$ ift gcfaUcn (ffcljt 
 
 mebrtger). 
 t 2>ct Sag nctgt ftd). 
 
 ><£$ roitb sflacfyt. 
 
 (5*6 ttutb fpa't. 
 (Sid) biiden. 
 
 ^ted^n" 
 
 (gerod)en*, rod)). 
 
 (St ttedjt nad) itnoMaud). 
 
 Scntanbcm ben $)ut$ fuMett. 
 C3n ctroag nrittigen (or einttndtgcnj. 
 I (Seine (StnrvitUgung $u etroaS geben* 
 C 3d) rotlltge batetn. 
 C 3d) 9 e ^ »rtw <5"tmintltgung ba$u. 
 
 OSerfcergen* (wrborgen, ccrbarg)* 
 t SSerjtccfen. 
 3n 2BaJ)rf)eit. 
 
 3n bet Sfyat (roitftid), roafjrfjafttg). 
 tie £M ; 
 true, roat)t (rcd)t) ; 
 
 genuine, nxtfytfyaft ; 
 
 He is a true man. (St ift cm nxibtfyaftct Sftann. 
 
 This is the right place for this £)a$ ift bee roafytc (recite) $8ag fftt 
 picture. biefe* ©emalbc. 
 
 As I live ! f <j0o n?a^r id) (eOe ! 
 
 To think much of some one. 2Cuf Semanbcn Diet fatten*. 
 To esteem some one. Semanben fd)dgen. 
 
 I do not think much of that man. 3d) Ijattc ntd)t Dtel auf bicfen 9)*ann. 
 [ tnink much of him (I esteem 3d) fyatte t>iel auf ifyn (id) fd)age tfyn 
 him much). f^)t). 
 
 To hide, to conceal. 
 
 Indeed. 
 In fact. 
 The fact, 
 
 To permit, to allow 
 
 The permission, 
 permit you to go thither. 
 
 S r ( a u b c n. 
 
 btc (Srlautmtp. 
 
 3d) erlaubc Sfaten fyingugefyen (oi 
 fcafjtn $u gefyen). 
 
 (To command, to order). 23efef)(en* (6efol)(ett, befall). 
 
310 
 
 Obs. When the third person plural is employed in 
 the imperative instead of the second, the personal pro- 
 noun always follows the verb, but never when the 
 second person is employed. Ex. 
 
 Order it to be done. $8efel)fen @ie, tia£ man c£ tfyuc 
 
 Re virtuous. (Setti tugentifyaft. 
 
 Will you permit me to go to the SBollcn <ste nut evlau&en/ cutf tien 
 market ] 9)?ar£t $u gcfycn ? 
 
 To hasten, to make haste. (SUcn, fid) fputen. 
 Make haste, and return soon. ©Ken @tc unti femmen @te fcatti 
 
 nuetier. 
 
 I had done reading when your 3d) fjcittc aufo,cf)ort $u U]i1\, aU 3fa 
 
 brother entered. SSrutier fyereintrat. 
 
 f ou had lost your purse when I <§:e fatten Sfetrc SBb'rfc Dcrtoren, a($ 
 
 found mine. id) tie metntqe fanti. 
 
 To step in, to enter. £cretntreten (gctrcten, trat). 
 
 To be ashamed. @ t d) f d) a m C n. 
 
 To be ashamed of some one or ©id) Semantics otier etner ©adje 
 
 something. fdjamen*. 
 
 I am ashamed of my impatience. 3d) fcfycime mid) met net tlnpjetiutti. 
 
 To copy, to transcribe. 2(&fd)ret&en*. 
 
 To decline. £)ec(tntren. 
 
 The substantive. £)a§ $auptit)Ott. 
 
 To transcribe fairly. JgWMjggjg; 
 
 The adjective, the pronoun, the tia£ SBctmort ; tiaS Jfimwt ; tial 
 
 verb, the preposition, 3etttt>ott ; tiaS Convert. 
 
 The dictionary, the grammar, tias> £8ottertmd) ; tile (Sptad)(efjre 
 
 (tite ©ramtnattf). ' 
 
 Do good to the poor, have com- Kfyttt tien 2Crmen ®ute£, unti rjabt 
 passion on the unfortunate, 9D?tt(ettien nut tien linajucfltcfyen, 
 and God will take care of the fo rcttti tier ttebe ©ott fur tia$ 
 rest. UcOttcjc fora/n. 
 
 Co do good to some one. Semantiem ©utc£ tfjun*. 
 
 To have compassion on some $Ktt(ettien nut Semantiem ba&en*. 
 one. 
 
 Compassion, pity, t>a§ 9)?tt(ettien ; 
 
 the rest, tia£ UebrtQC. 
 
 He has no bowels. t @r fyat'fetn 93tft(etticn. 
 
 For pity's sake. f 2(uS £fttt(eitien. 
 
 exercises. 218. 
 
 What must we do in order to be happy ? — Always love <md 
 practise virtue (gtc&et unti (ibet tite — immer aus), and (fo) you w .1 be 
 fcappy both in this and the next life. Since we wish to be r <ppy, 
 
311 
 
 let us do good to the poor, and let us have compassion on the un- 
 fortunate ; let us obey our masters, and never give them any trouble ; 
 let us comfort the unfortunate, love our neighbour as ourselves, and 
 not hate those that have offended us ; in short (£ur$), let us always 
 fulfil our duty, and God will take care of the rest. My son, in or- 
 der to be loved, you must (mujj man) be laborious and good. Thou 
 art accused (Oefdnitbicjen) of having been idle and negligent in thy 
 affairs. Thou knowest, however (jcbcd)), that thy brother has been 
 punished for (it>ct() having been naughty. Being lately in town, I 
 received a letter from thy tutor, in which he strongly complained of 
 thee. Do not weep ; now go into thy room, learn thy lesson, and be 
 (a) good (boy), otherwise thou wilt get (in the present tense) nothing 
 for dinner. — I shall be so good, my dear father, that you will certain- 
 ly (cjcroifj) be contented with me. — Has the little boy kept his word ? 
 — Not quite, for after having said that, he went into his room, toot 
 his books, sat down at the table (fid) cm ten Stfd) fegen), and fell 
 asleep (etnfcfylafen*). He is a very good boy when he sleeps, said 
 his father, seeing him some time after (batcmf). 
 
 219. 
 
 Are you a judge of cloth ? — I am a judge of it. — Will you buy 
 some yards (for) me ] — Give me the money, and (fo) I shall buy 
 some (for) you. — You will oblige me. — Is that man a judge of 
 cloth 1 — He is not a good judge of it. — What are you doing there 1 
 — I am reading the book (in t>cm SSucfye) which you lent me. — You 
 are wrong in always reading it (unmet bctrtn $u (efen). — What do you 
 wish me to do 1 — Draw this landscape ; and when you have drawn 
 it, you shall decline some substantives with adjectives and pro- 
 nouns. How do you manage to do that ] — I manage it so. — Show 
 me how you manage it. — What must I do for my lessons of to- 
 morrow (tie motcjenbe (Stunbc) 1 — Transcribe your exercises fairly, 
 do three others, and study the next lesson. — How do you manage 
 to get goods without money ? — I buy on credit. — How does your 
 sister manage to learn German without a dictionary 1— She manages 
 it thus. — She manages it very dexterously. — But how does your 
 brother manage it ] — He manages it very awkwardly : he reads, 
 and looks for (cmf(ud)en) the words in the dictionary. — He may 
 learn in this manner (ciuf biefe ££etfe) twenty years without know- 
 ing how to make 3 single sentence (ber @a§). 
 
 220. 
 
 Why does your sister cast down her eyes 1 — She casts them 
 down because she is ashamed of not having done her task. — Let 
 us breakfast in the garden to-day : the weather is so fine, that we 
 ought to take advantage of it (c$ foenugen). — How do you like thai 
 coffee ? — I like it very much (ttorttcffftd)). — Why do you stoop ] — 1 
 stoop to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped. — Why do 
 your sisters hide themselves 1 — They would not hide themselves, 
 if they did not fear to be seen. — Whom are they afraid of? — The? 
 
312 
 
 .*ie afraid of their governess (tie (Sqtcfyerinn), who scolded them 
 yesterday because they had not done their tasks. — An emperor, 
 who was irritated at (cuifgebracfyt cjcqcn) an astrologer (tec <&titnbcvn 
 tet), asked him : " Wretch, what death (rcclcfyen &ote£) dost thou 
 believe thou wilt die?" — "I shall die of a fever, 1 ' (Lesson 
 LXXXIII.), replied the astrologer. " Thouliest," (page 210) said 
 the emperor ; " thou wilt die this instant (in btcfem 2(ugv«nWttf) a vio- 
 lent (geroattfam) death." As he was going to be seized (.rgreifen 
 Wotten*), he said to the emperor, "Sir (©ncibtQftet £etr). order some 
 one to feel my pulse, and it will be found that I have a fever." 
 This sally (SMefer gutc (Stnfatl) saved his life. — Do not judge (rid)- 
 ten), you who do not wish to be judged ! — Why do you perceive 
 the mote (t>ci£ (Strob) in your brother's eye, you who dc not perceive 
 the beam (t>er S3ci(r\'n) which is in your own eye 1 — Would you 
 copy your exercises if I copied mine ] — I would copy them if you 
 copied yours. — Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I 
 had transcribed mine? — She would have transcribed it. — Would 
 she have set out if I had set out 1 — I cannot tell you what she 
 would have done if you had set out. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETY-FIFTH LESSON.— JFuttf ttttir n*Ml?ig0te 
 Section. 
 
 To grow (to wax). £Bacf)fen* (takes fein* for its 
 
 auxiliary. Part, past, geroad):- 
 fen. Imperf. roucf)6). 
 
 To grow rapidly (fast). <$5d)nelt it)acf)fen*. 
 
 That child has grown very fast £>iefe$ jttnt ift in fur^ct 3ctt fef)t 
 
 in a short time. geroaebfen (or Ijetangcroacfyfen). 
 
 To grow up (to grow tall). £etanroacf)fen*. 
 
 The flower, t>te 23fume ; 
 
 the shelter, bet @d)U| (tie (Stcfyetfjett) ; 
 
 the cottage, the hut, tie <Strol)f)iitte« 
 
 To shelter one's self from some- (&\<fy t?or etwa$ (dat.) fc^dgen. 
 
 thing. 
 To take shelter from something. 8id) t)0t etroaS (dat.) in <Stdjctf)ett 
 
 fegetu 
 Let us shelter ourselves from the 3Btr roolten un$ t?or tern 9?egen (tern 
 
 rain (the storm). 2Btnte) fcfyiigen (in ©tefyetfjeit 
 
 fegen). 
 Let us enter this cottage in order Caffen (Ste unS in ttcfe (Strof)I)utte 
 
 to be sheltered from the storm gefyen, um Dot tern (Sturmroettet 
 
 (tempest). in ©tcfyertyctt $u fetm 
 
 For fear of. 2Cu$ gurd)t — 3U» 
 
 To catch a cold. ©td) erfdtten. 
 
313 
 
 will not go out for fear of 
 catching a cold. 
 
 He does not wish to go to town 
 for fear of meeting with one 
 of his creditors. 
 
 Every where, throughout. 
 
 All over (throughout) the town. 
 
 Under the shade. 
 
 Let us sit down under the shade 
 of that tree. 
 
 To pretend. 
 
 3d) nritt md)t cmSgerjcn, au$ #utcf)t 
 mid) gu etfatten (obet rcetl td) 
 mid) t)cr (Stfattung futd)te, cbct 
 ctu$ gutd)t, ben <Sd)nupfen $u fee* 
 fommen). 
 
 (St will ntcbt nad) bet (Stabt gcben, 
 auS ^urcfct cincn fetnet ©laubt^CF 
 angutteffen. 
 
 Ucfcetatt. 
 
 f Sn bet gan$en ©tabt. 
 
 t 3n ben (bem) ©pattern 
 
 t <Sc§en nut un£ in ten <Sd)attcn 
 btcfe* 93aumc$ (cbct untet biefen 
 SBauni in ben ©djatten), 
 
 t Sfjun (ft* ft ell en), a(* ob 
 or a ( $ wenn (followed by 
 the imperfect of the subjunc- 
 tive). 
 
 That man pretends to sleep. £)iefct Statin fteltt fid)/ ctlS 06 er 
 
 fdrfiefc. 
 This young lady pretends to SDicfeS $tcmlctn tr)ut, al$ Dcrftunbc 
 know German. ftc bcutfd), or att roenn (et>) fie 
 
 bcutfd) scrftunbe. 
 They pretend to come near us. (Sie ftellen fid), at$ 06 (or roenn) ftc 
 
 fid) un$ nafyern rootltem 
 
 Then, thus, so, consequently. 1i ( f C. 
 
 O&s. J.. This word must not be mistaken for the 
 English word also, which is translated into German 
 by and). 
 
 In a short time. 
 Lately. 
 
 To make a present of something 
 to some one. 
 
 Mr. Fischer wrote to me lately, 
 that his sisters would be here 
 in a short time, and engaged 
 me :o tell you so ; you will 
 consequently be able to see 
 them, and to give them the 
 books which you have bought. 
 They hope that you will make 
 them a present of them. Their 
 brother has assured me, that 
 they esteem you without know- 
 ing you personally. 
 14 
 
 3n Jlutjem. 
 
 ffceutt*. 
 
 Scmcmbem cm ©cfefyen! nut etwa$ 
 macfecn. 
 
 £crt gifdjet fd)tic6 nut nculid), ba$ 
 feme $tauletn <Sd)roejtctn in 
 kutgent f)tctf)et fommen rofitben, 
 unb bat mid), eS Sfaen $u fagen. 
 (Sic roctben ftc a ( f fcfyen, unb 
 iljncn bic S5ud>er ge&cn ftmnen, 
 rocldjc 8'tc ejefanft fjafyiu @tc 
 fjeffen, ba$ (Sic ifyncn cin ©efdbcnf 
 bamit madjen roetben* 3r)t 23tu= 
 bet fyat mid) i>ctftd)ctt, t>a% ftc @tc 
 f)od)fd)a|en, cfyne (Sic petfdnltd) *u 
 fennem 
 
314 
 
 Would to God. ©elite ®ott. (See Obs. F. Lesson 
 
 XC.) 
 
 Would to God it were so. SMtte ©ctr, e$ ware fo. 
 
 Would to God he had done it. 2Bctite d5ott, cr Ijcitte c$ gcttjan. 
 
 s^rsr- }^***** 
 
 How could I get tired in your £Bte ft'nnte id) bet Sfyncn fonge £Bei» 
 company ? Ic fyafren ? 
 
 Firstly (at first), erjtens ; 
 
 secondly, &c. sroettenS n* 
 
 To have reason to. Utfacfye foaben* — $u. 
 
 He has reason to be sad. <5r f)at Htfacfye trauttg $u fetn 
 
 He has much sorrow. ©r l)at triel SScrbrup (Summer)* 
 
 Ota. B. When any one is thanked for a thing, he 
 must answer in German : 
 
 You have no reason for it. f d&w ftafcen) 9ftd)t lltfacfje. 
 
 To look upon or into. dk'fyen auf or nad). 
 
 The window looks into the street. £)a$ genfict gef)t auf tic (nad) t>et) 
 
 ©trape. 
 J'he back door looks into the £>tc £tntcrtl)tfr gc^t nad) tern (Uars 
 garden. ten. 
 
 To drown. (Srtrctafen (active verb). 
 
 r (5rtrtnfcn* (neuter verb). Part, 
 past, ertrunfen. Imperf. cr* 
 To be drowned. < tranf. 
 
 (Srfaufen* (neuter verb). Part, 
 past, erfoffen. Imperf. crfoff* 
 
 Toju.poutofthewindow. JW^NgJ*g^ 
 To throw out of the window. |K«!!j£ftSSS^ 
 
 To sAoo* (meaning to kill by (S t f d) t c fi e n *. 
 shooting). 
 
 ' Scmanbcm cine Jlugel sot: ten $epj 
 
 fdbtegm*. 
 Semanbem cine jiugcf fcurd) t>a$ 
 ®ef}trn fagen. 
 
 To shoot one's sell with a pistol/ €>id) nut enter spijiofe erfd)tepen*« 
 He has blown out his brains. @t j)at fid) crfd)Offen. 
 He has blown out his trains with (5t fyofc fid) nut enter $)tflc(e et* 
 a pistol. fdjoffen. 
 
 * 
 
 To blow out soue one's brains. 
 
315 
 
 I am diowning. 3d) ertrtttfe. 
 
 He jumped out of the window. (§r tft cm£ bem genftet gcfprungea, 
 
 To get paid. f (Sid) fttjaUm taflfcn*. 
 
 To suffer one's self to be pre- f <Sid) bitten (affen*. 
 
 Tailed upon. 
 To get one's self invited to dine, f (£id) $mu QJZtttagcflfen cinlaben 
 
 toffen*. 
 
 Get paid. f Caficn <Ste ftcf> be$af)(en ! 
 
 Let us set out. Caffen ©ic un$ (or roir rootten) aO^ 
 
 retfen. 
 Let us breakfast. Saflfen (Sic ttns> (or tvtt rootten) fr% 
 
 ftucfen. 
 Let him give it to me. 3)aj} cr mtr c£ gebe, or er gebe e$ 
 
 mtr. 
 Lethim be there at twelve o'clock. £>aj} cr um gtt>o(f Ufyr t»a fei, or cr fci 
 
 urn arcolf Vlr)r fca. 
 Let him send it to me. 2)ap cr mtr e$ fenbe, or cr fenbe c$ 
 
 mtr. 
 He may believe it. *Dap er gkube, or cr gtaube c$. 
 
 To be at one's ease. SBcbagcn, bcf)ag(td) ober bequem fein* 
 
 (impers. verb, gov. dat.). 
 To be uncomfortable. Unbef)ag(id), unbequcm ober gentrt 
 
 fetn*. 
 I am very much at my ease upon (S$ tft mtr cmf btefem (Stufytc fcr)r 
 
 this chair. befjagtid). 
 
 You are uncomfortable upon your (£$ ift Sfcncn md)t bef)ag(td) (ober 
 
 chair. unbef)ag(td)) auf Sftrcm <Stuf)te. 
 
 We are uncomfortable in that (5$ befycigt un$ in btefem jtoftfjcmfe 
 boarding-house. (btcfer 5)cnft0tt) ntd)t. 
 
 To make one's self comfortable. (S3 fid) bequcm madjen. 
 To put one's self out of the way. (Std) bemufyen. 
 Make yourself comfortable. 9^ad)cn (Sic C5 ftd) bequcm. 
 
 Do not put yourself out of the SSenuifjen <Ste fid) ntd)t. 
 
 way. 
 Do as if you were at home. &F)ttn (Ste, ati rcenn (Sic gu #aufe 
 
 roaren. 
 
 Go and tell him that 1 cannot ®cf)t unb fagt tt)m, bafi id) r)cutc 
 come to-day. md)t fommen fann. 
 
 He came and told us he could (Sr fam unb fagtc un$, ba$ cr ntd)t 
 wot come. fommen fonnte. 
 
 To prefer. 23or$icf)cn* (gcgogen, ^cg). 
 
 * prefer the useful to the agree- 3d) aicfje bag 9ttig(td)C bem 2(na,es 
 able. ncfymen oor. 
 
316 
 
 Obs. C. When au adjective is used substantively 
 in the masculine or feminine gender, a noun is always 
 understood, e. g. ber DWcfye, the rich, meaning ber retcfye 
 Sfflann ; bte ©cfyone, the beautiful woman, meaning bte 
 fcfyone grau* 
 
 Few words to the wise (proverb). (Me&rten ; ft QUt prebtcjen (Sprier;* 
 
 wort). 
 
 Ofo. Z). An adjective used substantively without 
 a noun being understood is always put in the neuter 
 gender, e. g. ba# ©roffc, the great ; bag (Jrfyafotte, the 
 sublime ; bag 2leu$ere, the exterior ; bag Snnere, the in- 
 terior. 
 
 What he likes best is hunting @em Cte&ffeS tft tie Sac^b tmb t)a$ 
 and fishing. $tfcf)en. 
 
 r £)enn ivo ba$ @trencjc nut tern 3at* 
 
 For when the Manly and the 
 
 Fair, 
 When Strength and Beauty 
 
 form a pair, 
 Then rings it out a merry song. 
 
 ten, 
 2£o ©tarfeg jidj unb 93Ztfbe$ paar* 
 
 ten, 
 • Da gtbt eS etnen Cjuten JUancj. 
 (<S d) 1 1 1 e r in his Sieb sen ber 
 ®(ocfe, the song of the bell). 
 Severe, tender, mild (gentle). (Stteng, gart, nu(b. 
 To be welcome. SOBiflfommcn fetn*. 
 
 You are welcome every where. (Sic (info ubetatt rmttfommen. 
 
 He will arrive in a week. @r ttrirb in acfyt £acjen (etner SBecfye) 
 
 cmfommen. 
 It took him a week to make this (St (jat btefe £Retfe in acfyt Sacjen 
 
 journey. cjemacftt. 
 
 He will have finished his studies (5t rottb fetne (Stubten in einem 
 
 in three months. SStertctjafjre ttotfenbet fyaben. 
 
 He finished his studies in a year. @t fyat feme (Btubten in etnem 3>ar)s 
 
 re toUenbet. 
 
 EXERCISES. 221. 
 
 Have you already seen my son ? — I have not seen him yet, how 
 is he \ — He is very well ; you will not be able to recognise him, 
 for he has grown very tali in a short time. — Why does this man 
 give nothing to the poor 1 — He is too avaricious (gc^ig) ; he does 
 not wish to open his purse for fear of losing his money.—- What 
 sort of weather is it 1 — It is very warm ; it is long since we had 
 any rain (eg fjett (ange ntcfyt cjerecuiet) : I believe we shall have a 
 storm (etn ©ennttet Oefomroen). — It may be (£)a$ fann tt>of)l fetn). — 
 The wind rises (fie!) etfjefcen*), it thunders already; do you hear it? 
 —Yes, I do hear it, but the storm is still far off (roett entfernt).— 
 
317 
 
 Not so far as you think; see how it lightens. — Bless me (OTcin 
 ©otr), what a shower (rvctd) cm cntfcgttdjct JHcgcn ift fcas) ! — If we go 
 into some place we shall be sheltered from the storm. — Let us go 
 into that cottage then ; we shall be sheltered there from the wind and 
 the rain. — I have a great mind to bathe (bafcen) to-day. — Where will 
 you bathe ? — In the river. — Are you not afraid of being drowned * — 
 Oh no ! I can swim. — Who taught you (cs) 1 — Last summer I took 
 a few lessons at the swimming-school (fctc ^cbrotmmfd)ii(e)- — Where 
 shall we go to now 1 — Which road shall we take ? — The shortest 
 will be the best. — We have too much sun and I am still very tired ; 
 let us sit down under the shade of this tree. — Who is that man that 
 is sitting under the tree !-— I do not know him. — It seems, he wishes 
 to be alone ; for when we offer to (rooflen*) to approach him, he 
 pretends to be asleep. — He is like your sister : she understands 
 German very well ; but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends 
 net to understand me. 
 
 222. 
 
 Have you seen Mr. Jaeger 1 — I have seen him ; he told me that 
 his sisters would be here in a short time, and desired me to tell you 
 so. — When they have arrived, you may give them the gold rings 
 which you have bought ; they flatter themselves that you will 
 make them a present of them, for they love you without knowing 
 you personally. — Has my sister already written to you ] — She has 
 written to me, I am going to answer her. — Shall I (<Sell tcb) tell her 
 that you are here ] — Tell her ; but do not tell her, that I am wait- 
 ing for her impatiently. — Why have you not brought your sister 
 along with you ] — Which one 1 — The one you always bring, the 
 youngest (bte lunqfte). — She did not wish to go out, because she has 
 the tooth-ache. — I am very sorry for it ; for she is a very good girl. 
 — How old is she ] — She is nearly fifteen years old. — She is very 
 tall for her age (fc)a$ 2Cltcr). — How old are you ] — I am twenty-two. 
 — Is it possible ! I thought you w r ere not yet twenty. 
 
 223. 
 
 Will you drink a cup of (t)ic SSttfle) tea 1 — I thank you, I do not 
 like tea. — Do you like coffee 1 — I do like it, but I have just drunk 
 some. — Do you not get tired here 1 — How could I get tired in this 
 agreeable society ? — As to me I always want amusement. — If you 
 did as I do, you would not want amusement ; for I listen to all those 
 who tell me anything. — In this manner I learn (ctfaftren*) a thou- 
 sand agreeable things, and I have no time to get tired ; but you do 
 nothing of that kind, that is the reason why you want amusement. 
 — I would do every thing like (nric) you, if I had no reason to be 
 sad. — I have heard just now that one of my best friends has shot 
 himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife's best friends has 
 drowned herself. — Where has she drowned herself 1— She has 
 drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. Yester- 
 day at four o'clock in the morning she rose without saying a word 
 
318 
 
 to anj one, leaped out of the window which looks into the garden, 
 and threw (ftuqen) herself into the river where she was drowned. — 
 Let us always seek the friendship (btc grcunbfcfyaft) of the good and 
 avoid (fltcfyen*) the society of the wicked ; for bad society corrupts 
 (tterberben) good manners (btc bitten, fern. plur.). — What sort of 
 weather is it to-day 1 — It snows continually (nedf) immcr), as it 
 snowed yesterday, and according to all appearances (ctllcm '2(nfd)Ct* 
 nc nad)) will also snow to-morrow. — Let it snow, I should like it to 
 enow still more, and to freeze also, for I am always very well when 
 't is very cold. — And I am always very well when it is neither 
 cold nor warm. — It is too windy (c\ar $u nrinbtg) to-day, and we 
 should do better if we staid at home. — Whatever weathei it may be, 
 I must go out, for I promised to be with my sister at a qua-ter past 
 eleven, and I must keep my word. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETY-SIXTH LESSON.— 0*d)0 ttttb tteun?igsi£ 
 Section. 
 
 Notwithstanding, in spite of. 
 
 Notwithstanding that. 
 
 In spite of him (her, them). 
 
 Notwithstanding his promise. 
 
 C Ungcadjtct (governs the gen.). 
 (_ £Btt)et (governs the accus.). 
 
 £)cffen ungeacfytet. 
 
 SBtbet fetnen (tftrcn) SSttten. 
 
 ©etnes SSerfprcd)eng ungcacfytct. 
 
 Even. (gogar. 
 
 He has not even money enough (St ()at fogar md)t (Mb genug, um 
 to buy some bread. 23tot> $u faufcm 
 
 (SS bergeftatt madjen, t)ap. 
 
 (S$ fo etnrtdbtcn, bap. 
 
 (S$ fo macfyen, bap. 
 
 $flad)cn <Stc c$ fo, t>a$ (Sic all? 
 
 ©amftog T&ato nut S&rct 2Crbcil 
 
 fcrttg roetben ? 
 5Kicbtcn <Stc cS fo etn, t>a$ <Ste jebett 
 
 (Samftag 2(6cnb nut 3f>rev Titbcxt 
 
 fcrttg rvcrben ? 
 SHidjten (Ste e$ fo cm (obct macrjen 
 
 @ie c$ fo), t>a$ (Sic attc ©amjtag 
 <! 2(benb nut Sbrcc 2Crbctt fcrttg 
 
 ftnb (obcr tfyrc 2Crbctt ferttg tya* 
 
 UtQ ? 
 
 To manage. 
 
 Do you manage to finish your 
 work every Saturday night % 
 
 Do you manage to have your 
 work done every Saturday 
 night ? 
 
 Try to dc that to oblige me. 
 I manage to go thither. 
 
 25cftrct>cn (Sic fid), btefcS ya tfyun, 
 
 urn mid) $u ttcrtnnbcn. 
 3d) ttd)tc c$ fo cttt, *>$ id) rjingcFjcn 
 
 fann. 
 
319 
 
 To have done. -^crttg fein*. 
 
 Will yoi soon have done work- ©inb ©te 6alb nut S^rer 2Ctbetl 
 
 ing? f crtig ? 
 
 I shall soon have done. 3d) rccrbe batb tomtt fcrtig feitl. 
 
 To keep warm. (Sic!) warm fatten*. 
 
 To go always neat. ©id) tmmcr reinltd) fatten*. 
 
 To be (to keep) on one's guard, ©id) bitten, fid) wrfeben*. 
 
 To take care (be careful). (Sid) in 2(d)t ne()men*. 
 
 To keep on one's guard against ©id) Mr Semanbem in 2Cc^t nebmen* 
 
 some one. (or bitten). 
 
 Take care that you do not faJ. Sfofjmen ©te ftd) in 2(d)t (bfiten ©te 
 
 fid)), bap ©te nid)t fallen. 
 To beware of somebody or some- ©id) t>ot Semanbem cber t>ot etroaS 
 
 thing. fatten (or in 2Cd)t nefaien*). 
 
 Keep on your guard against that £ittcn ©ie ftd) ttor biefem 9Eanne. 
 
 man. 
 ff you do not take care of that ££cnn ©te ftd) t?ot btefem g)fetbe 
 
 horse it will kick you. ntdjt in 2Cd)t nebmen, fo nritb e$ 
 
 ©te fd)lagen. 
 Take care. ©cfan ©ie ftd) »or. 
 
 1 fear he will come. 3d) fittd)tc, tag er fomme. 
 
 I do not doubt but he will come. 3d) groctfle ntd)t, baj} er femmt. 
 
 The bad weather hinders us from £)a$ fd)(cd)te £Bettct scrbinbett, top 
 
 taking a walk. tx>ir fpa^icren gefan. 
 
 I shall prevent you from going 3d) roerbe fcfan ttcrrjinbetn, tap ©ie 
 
 out. au^geben. 
 
 ( shall not set out till every 3d) nxtbe ntd)t ttbtetfen, bi£ alleS 
 
 thing is ready. fcrtig ift. 
 
 The enemy is stronger than you 2)et geinb ijr (tatfet, alg©iegeglaubt 
 
 thought. faben. 
 
 t shall certainly come, unless I 3d) recrbe gcarip fommen, e$ fet 
 
 am taken ill. benn, ba$ id) franf roiirbe. 
 
 To be taken ill (to fall sick). ^rartE roerben*. 
 
 Very little more, and I would do <&$ fefjlt roenig, t>a$ id) e$ tfae. 
 
 it. 
 
 It is in your power to obtain me f (56 ftcl)t nur bei 3facn, l>a$ id) 
 
 that situation. biefe ©telle befomme. 
 
 He is quite different from what (gt ift gan$ anbetS, al£ et t>ot $n>et 
 
 he was two years ago. Safcren roar. 
 
 You do not act any more as you ©te banbetn rticbt mcfa fo, rote (or 
 
 have done. ©te banbetn anberS, ak) ©ie ges 
 
 fanbell faben. 
 
 Before you undertake anything (Sfa ©te ctroaS untewebmen, fagen 
 
 tell me of it. ©te es mtr. 
 
 Did any body know how to tell £at 3emanb auf eine naturtidjere 
 
 a story in a more natural (more (ungcfunjteltere) 2(rt $u cqarjletl 
 
 artless) manner than Lafon- geroupt, al$ Safcntaine ? 
 
 taine 1 
 
320 
 
 A thought, 
 an idea, 
 a sally, 
 To be struck with a thought. 
 
 A. thought strikes me. 
 
 That never crossed my mind. 
 To take it into one's head. 
 He took it into his head lately 
 
 rob me. 
 What is in your head ? 
 
 In order that, in order to. 
 
 cin dk'bante (masc.) ; 
 
 cine 3bee ; 
 
 .cin ©in fall (masc). 
 
 (£incn ©infoll baben* (einfatten*) 
 C (5*$ fa'ttt mir ctt»a$ cin. 
 i 3ef) babe cin en (Stnfall. 
 
 <&c emxiS ift mir nte ctngcfallcn. 
 
 f @td) etnfallen lajfcn*. 
 to f ®t ttcp fid) ncuttcb etnfallen, mi 
 gu befieblcn. 
 
 t 2Ba$ f&ilt 3bnen cm. 
 
 2fuf bap or bamit. 
 
 He works in order to be one day (St atbettet, bamit cr fetnem SSater-. 
 
 useful to his country. (ante cinft (ctncS &age$) nu|Ud, 
 
 nxrbe. 
 Die native country, the father- fca$ 23aterlanb. 
 
 land, 
 
 eincg SagcS, einfh 
 ©ebtirtig fcin*. 
 
 2Bo ftnt) ©e gebiittia, ? 
 3d) bin in biefem Canbe a,cbtittt$ 
 2Bo tft 3bre <Scbmefter gebtittta, ? 
 ©te tft in ben SBeretnigten <Staa* 
 ten t>on Sftorbamettfa gebftrttg. 
 2Bo flirt) Sbre ©ruber gebuttta, ? 
 @te ftnb in gtanfretd) geburtia,. 
 
 One day, once, 
 
 To be born. 
 Where were you born 1 
 I was I orn in this country. 
 Where was your sister bor a 1 
 She was, born in the United States 
 
 of North America. 
 Where were your brothe s born 1 
 They were born in France. 
 
 Around, round. 
 
 All around, round at* out. 
 
 The dish went around the whole 
 
 company till b name back to 
 
 the landlord. 
 We sailed around England. 
 They went about the town to look 
 
 at the curiosities. 
 
 To go around the house. 
 To go about the house. 
 
 To express one's self. <Stcb au£brMcn. 
 
 To make one's self understood. (Sid) ttcrftanblict) macben 
 
 To have the habit. £)ic ©eroofynfjett baben*. 
 
 To accustom. (Sjeroofynen. 
 
 To accustom one's self to some- @id) an ctn?a£ (accus.) gemobnen, 
 
 thing. 
 Children must be accustomed Winter mfiffen bet 3ctten an tie ttz» 
 
 eurly to labour. bctt gewb'bnt werben. 
 
 Return (umber). 
 
 9?unb betum (runb umber). 
 
 iDk (Scbitffel gtng bet bet gan^cn 
 Sifcbgefcllfcbaft betum, hU fie rote* 
 t)Ct $um SBirtbc $urucf tain. 
 
 SBtr fegeftcn urn (Sngfanb berum. 
 
 (Sic ajngen in ber (Stabt umber, ura 
 ibrc tnncren S^crfmurbi^etten &tt 
 betracbtcn. 
 
 Um t)a$ $a\i$ r)crum geben*. 
 
 3n bem Jpaufe umbcrgeben* 
 
321 
 
 r<5;ine (accus.) @adf)e geroer)nt fetn* 
 To be accustomed to a thing. < (Stnct &([$<! (gen.) qeroofynt fcin* 
 
 C2Cn cine (Sac^e cjcroofynt fctn* 
 I am accustomed to it. Set) tun e£ Qcroefynt. 
 
 I cannot express myself in Ger- Set) fann mid) tm £)cutfd)en nid)t <mt 
 man, for I am not in the habit cmSfctutfen, twit id) md)t $u fprcs 
 of speaking it. d)cn Qcroefynt bin (efcer : rcetl id) 
 
 tm @prcd)cn nicfyt gciibt bin). 
 You speak properly. f (Sic refcen, rcie ficfy'S qefyott. 
 
 To chatter. Sptoufcew. 
 
 To prate. ®d)tt>a§en. 
 
 A prating man, cm paubercr, ©$ro4$tf « 
 
 A prating woman, cine (Sdjrcagettnn. 
 
 To practise. Hebem 
 
 I practise speaking. f 3d) uOe mid) tm @pred)cn. 
 
 To associate (to converse) with sjfltt 3emanfcem urocjefjen^ 
 
 some one. 
 I associate (converse) with him. 3d) Qcfyc mit tfym urn. 
 
 exercises. 224* 
 
 Have you been learning German long ? — No, Sir, I have only 
 been learning it these six months. — Is it possible ! you speak 
 tolerably (^iemtid)) well for so short a time. — You jest (fd)cr$en) ; I 
 do not know much (of it) yet. — Indeed, you speak it well already 
 I think you flatter me a little. — Not at all ; you speak it properly. 
 — In order to speak it properly one must know more (of it) than I 
 know. — You know enough (of it) to make yourself understood. — I 
 still make many mistakes. — That is (tfyut) nothing; yon must not 
 be bashful ; besides (liberties) you have made no mistakes in all 
 you have said just now. — I am still timid because I am afraid of 
 being laughed at (man mocbtc fid) uOcr mid) tuftig mad)cn). — They 
 would be very unpolite to laugh at you. Who would be (benn) sa 
 unpolite as to laugh at you 1 — Do you not know the proverb ?— • 
 What proverb ? — He who (Lesson XXIX.) wishes to Speak well, 
 must begin by speaking badly. Do you understand all I am telling 
 you 1 — I do understand and comprehend (bc^retfen*) it very well ; 
 out I cannot yet express myself well in German, because I am not 
 in the habit of speaking it. — That will come in (mit fcer) time. — I 
 wish it (may) with all my heart. 
 
 Good morning, Miss. — Ah ((Si) ! here you are at last. I have 
 been waiting for you with impatience. — You will pardon me, my 
 dear, I could not come sooner (ef)er). — Sit down, if you please.— 
 How is your mother ] — She ib oetter to-day than she was yesterday. 
 — I am glad of it. — Were you at *,ne ball yesterday 1 — I was there. 
 — Were you much amused (fide; temfftaen) 1 — Only so so. — At what 
 o'clock did you return home 1 — Af » quarter past eleven. 
 14* 
 
322 
 
 225. 
 
 Do you sometimes see my brother ! — I do see him sometimes; 
 When I met him the other day (ra'uttd)), he complained of you. " ll 
 he had behaved better, and had been more economical (fpavfam)," 
 said he, " he would have had no debts ((Scbulben, plur.) and I 
 would not have been angry with him."— I begged of (bitten*) him 
 to have compassion on you, telling him, that you had not even 
 money enough to buy bread. "Tell him, when you see him," re- 
 plied he to me, " that notwithstanding his bad behaviour towards 
 me, I pardon him. Tell him also," continued he, " that one should 
 not laugh (fpetten) at those to whom (Lessons XIV. and LX.) one 
 is under obligations. Have the goodness to do this, and I shall be 
 much obliged to you," added he in going away.— -Why do you 
 associate with that man] — I would not associate with him, if he 
 had not rendered me great services.— Do not trust him, for if you 
 are not on your guard, he will cheat you. — Take care of that horse, 
 otherwise it wilf kick you. — Why do you work so much ] — I work 
 in order to be one day useful to my country. (See end of Lesson 
 XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Subett ttttb ttemt^igsU 
 
 Section. 
 
 He is too fond of me to do such f (5r ttebt mid) $u fcbt, at » & a P cr 
 
 a thing. t>te[e6 t()un [elite. 
 
 I will rather die than do that. f 3d) will (teOer fterben, aU fc>aj} id) 
 
 fctefes tfjun follte or at* t>tefe$ tljun. 
 She loved him so much, that she ©tc liebte ttm fo fcf)r, Dog fte ifm fc- 
 
 even wished to marry him. gar t)etratf)en roclltc. 
 
 He cannot have said that unless f & fcmn t>tefe$ ntd)t cjefagt baben, 
 
 he is a fool. c* fci term, tag er em 9larr tji. 
 
 To get married (to enter into f (Sid) »err;etratt)en. 
 
 matrimony). ( Sid) Deref)Ud)en or t?ermaf)lcn. 
 
 To marry somebody. Scmanben f>etratf>cn. 
 
 To marry (meaning to give in 23crl)ctratf)cn (t>cref)(td)en). 
 
 marriage). 
 My cousin, having given his 9?ad)t>cm mem better feinc <Sd)roc* 
 
 sister in marriage, married fter »ed)etratf)Ct &atte (Page 280), 
 
 Lady Pommern. fyctratfeete er gr&utctn i>on g)onv 
 
 mem. 
 Is your cousin married 1 3ft 36* £«« better Mrfjetrat^et ? 
 
 No, he is still a bachelor. t S«ein / et ift nod) tc% 
 
 To be a bachelor. f fceWfl f»n*. 
 
 Embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss. 93 e r ( e g e It. 
 
 The embarrassment, the puzzle, fcie SSertcgenfjett. 
 
 You embarrass (puzzle) me. (Sic fcgen mid) in aSerfcgenJjeit. 
 
323 
 
 u puzzle (perplex) me. <Sie macfyen mid) ttcttccjett. 
 
 The marriage, Uc fativatf), t>te (Sl)c. 
 
 II ' demands my sister in mar- (£t t>ct(ana,t metne (Sd)J#eftet gut 
 riage. (Sfye. 
 
 To take measures. 9}tajh:e$e(rt nefymen* (or ergretfcn*). 
 
 [ shall take other measures. 3d) roetfce anbete 9#ajh:ea,e(n crgrei* 
 
 fen (or nefymen). 
 
 Goodness ! how rapidly does 9)Mn G5ott ! rote Dcrjtrcic^t tie Beit 
 time pass in your society. in Sbrcr ©efettfefyaft. 
 
 The compliment, t>a$ (Sompttment (plur. e a ). 
 
 You are making me a compli- (£ie macron mit fca ein (Sompttment, 
 ment to which I do not know roorauf id) nid)t£ $u antrootten 
 what to answer. rc>eif\ 
 
 The least blow makes him cry £)et fteinfte ®d)la§ mad)t tljn Wt\* 
 (weep). ncn (bttngt tfyn $um SScinen). 
 
 To frighten. @tfd)tecfen (a regular active 
 
 verb)* 
 
 To be frightened < ©rfcftrccfcn* (a neuter irregular 
 
 l o De mgntened. ^ verb) ^ ( crfd)rc ^ n/ er fd&raf ). 
 
 Thou art frightened, he is fright- £)u crfd)ricffr, et etfd)ticft. 
 
 ened. 
 Be not frightened. (5rfd)tecfen (Ste nid)t. 
 
 The least thing frightens him £)a$ ©erinajte erfc^rccft ifjn (fie)* 
 
 (her, them). 
 At what are you frightened 1 ££orufcct etfdjrecfen @ie ? (See 
 
 Obs. C. Lesson LII.) 
 To be frightened at something. UeOct ctvoa$ (accus.) erfefyrecfen*. 
 
 To depend on, upon. {^nf emmen*-a uf. 
 
 That depends upon circumstan- £)a$ f)ana,t son ben Umftanfcen a&. 
 
 ces 
 That does not depend upon me. £)a$ fydttgt ntd)t &on nut aO. 
 It depends upon him to do that. (5$ fjangt ocn tfjm a6, fc)tefe$ gu tf)UtU 
 O ! yes, it depends upon him. £) ! [a, t>a$ bangt oon ifjm a& 
 
 (fommt auf iljn an). 
 That man lives at every body's ©tcfet 9#ann tebt auf ScfcetmamtS 
 
 expense. Unf often. 
 
 The expense (cost), tie Unfoften (is never used in the 
 
 singular). 
 At other people's expense (or 2Cuf 2£nbetet Un!often, 
 
 charge). 
 
 a Neuter nouns derived from foreign languages and terminating in ertt take 
 e in the plural, except the two words : bag $aiiamettt, the parliament ; ba3 
 Regiment, the regiment, which like all other neuter nouns, take er in all the 
 cas<»* plural. 
 
324 
 
 The fault, 
 
 It is not my fault. 
 
 Do not lay it to my charge. 
 Do not accuse me of it. 
 Who can help it 1 
 
 W /lose fault is it 1 
 I cannot help it. 
 
 The delay, 
 He does it without delay. 
 I must go (must be off). 
 
 Go away ! be gone ! 
 
 trie <Sd)u(b. 
 i t 3* bin nid)t ©djwlb totem. 
 \ t <S$ ift nid)t meinc <5d)ulb. 
 
 i f (Skben ©te nut tie @d)ulb nicl>t 
 
 2£cr Conn boftir ? 
 5 t SB« ift @*utb boron ? 
 { SBcffcn <3d)ulb tft e* ? 
 ( 3d) Conn md)t$ bofur. 
 \ 3d) Conn eg nid)t anbern. 
 
 ber tfuffdnib. 
 
 <£r tr)ut e$ obne 2Cuffd)tib. 
 
 | 3d) will mod)en, bop td) ^ 
 
 fomme* 
 t 9Bod>ctt <5ie, bof @te fertf ommett 
 
 To 5e astonished (surprised). (S t ft a u n e n, e r ft o u n t fetn* 
 
 I am surprised at it. < 
 
 An extraordinary thing happened 
 which surprised every body. 
 
 Many things have passed which 
 will surprise you. 
 
 Many days will pass before that 
 takes place. 
 
 To jest. 
 
 The jest, 
 You are jesting. 
 
 He is no joker (cannot take a 
 joke). 
 
 To beg some one's pardon. 
 I beg your pardon. 
 To pardon. 
 
 The watch goes too fast. 
 The watch goes too slow (re- 
 tards). 
 My watch has stopped. 
 
 To stop. 
 Where did we leave off ? 
 
 3d) erftoune boruber, 
 
 3d) bin boraber erftount. 
 
 (5$ ereigncte fid) etroog 2(uperorbente 
 
 ttd)es, rccrtiber Sebermonn er* 
 
 ftounte (erftount rsor). 
 (S'g ift 98te(e$ aefefyefyen, rooriibcr <Ste 
 
 erftouncn roerben. 
 @g bat fid) SSieleg eretgnet, rcorube* 
 
 ©te erftouncn rocrben. 
 "SERebrere gage nxrben (jmgerjen, efys 
 
 biefeg gcfd>tef>t. 
 (§5 rocrben nie^rere Sage btngefjefl, 
 
 cbe biefcg gefdjie&tr 
 
 © d) c r ^ c n. 
 
 ber (5d)er$. 
 
 <Sie fcr)cr$en. 
 
 (Sr (apt nid)t mit ftdj fdr)crgcn. 
 
 3enionbcn urn SSeqeibuna, bitten* 
 3d) bitte (Sie urn SSer^eibung* 
 SScrjctf)cn* (tterjtc&en, wqieb). 
 
 3)te Uf)t gef)t t?cr (or $u frub). 
 £)ie Ufrr $cr)t nod) (or $u fpd't> 
 
 OTeirte Ufyr ift fteben gebUeben. 
 
 (Steven b I e t b c n *♦ 
 
 t £&o finb mir ftefyen geblieben? 
 
325 
 
 inhere did we stop 1 
 iVe left off at the fortieth Les- 
 son, page 100. 
 
 To wind up a watch. 
 To regulate a watch. 
 V our watch is twenty minutes 
 too fast, and mine a quarter 
 of an hour too slow. 
 [t will soon strike twelve. 
 Has it already struck twelve 1 
 
 To strike (beat). 
 Thou strikest, he strikes. 
 
 t 2Bo finb mtt geblteben ? 
 
 2£it finb ftet bet wet$tgfien Section, 
 (Seite 100 ftetjen geWckn. 
 
 (Sine Ufjr cmftieljcn*. 
 
 (Sine Uftr ftdlcn. 
 
 Sfyte U&t ge()t gwanjtg SDrtnuten su 
 frul) (sot), unb bie metntge ehu 
 23tette(fhmbe $u fpat (nad)). 
 
 <$$ roitb cjteid) gwolf fd)(agen. 
 
 £at c£ fd)on gro&f gefctyagen ? 
 
 (Sscfyfogen* (Imperf. fd)lug)« 
 
 ©u fd)tag|i, et fctyagt. 
 
 Till I see you again. *% ± ' . 
 
 I hope to see you again soon, jt ^ M *W* 8B«bcrf«6en> 
 
 To faili to want, to ail* $ c 5 t e n 
 
 What ails you ? ") 
 
 What is the matter with you 1 3 
 You look so melancholy. 
 
 2Ba$ fe&ft Sfjncn ? 
 
 (Sie fefjcn fo fc^wermutfjtg au& 
 
 On condition, or provided. 5 
 
 I will lend you money, provided 
 you will henceforth be more 
 economical than yon have hi* 
 therto been. 
 
 Henceforth. 
 
 Economical. 
 
 To renounce gambling. 
 
 The game (sport, play), 
 
 To follow advice (counsel). j 
 
 Untet bet 33ebingung, t>o% 
 
 SOttt bem SSebtnge, ba$. 
 
 3* wttt Sbnen ©clb lei^en, untet 
 bet SBebtngung, bap <Ste in 3us 
 funft fpatfamet feien, aU <Sie f>\$* 
 f)et gemefen finb. 
 
 3n 3u!unft. 
 
 ©parfam or fyau6f)a(tettfcl)« 
 
 ©cm ©ptete entfagcn* 
 ba£ <Spte(. 
 
 (Stncm SRatfjc fetgem 
 (Stnen $atf) fcefelgen. 
 
 EXERCISES. 226. 
 
 What o'clock is it? — It is half past one. — You say it is half past 
 one, and by (cmf with the dat.) my watch it is but half past twelve* 
 —It w' 1 soon strike two. — Pardon me, it has not yet struck one. — 
 I assure you, it is five und twenty minutes past one, for my watch 
 goes very well. — Bless me ! how rapidly time passes in your so* 
 ciety. — You make me a compliment to which I do not know what to 
 answer. — Have you bought your watch in Paris ? — I have not 
 nought it, my uncle has made me a present of it (bamtt). — What 
 nas that woman entrusted you with ?■— She has entrusted me with 
 
 b This is the way in which Germans who are intimately acquainted 
 generally express themselves when separating. It answers the French : au 
 plaisir de vous revoir, or simply au revoir. 
 
326 
 
 a secret of a (t»on cittern) great count who is in a great embarrass* 
 ment about the marriage of one of his daughters. — Does any one 
 ask her in marriage ? — The man who demands her in marriage is a 
 nobleman of the neighbourhood (qu6 fcet 9fiod)bar|"d)aft). — Is he rich? 
 — No, he is a poor devil who has not a farthing (fcer £ellct). — You say 
 you have no friends among your scho, lfellows (t>ct $flttfd)u(ct) ; but 
 is it not your fault? You have spoken ill of them (sen tfynen), and 
 they have not offended you. They have done you good and never- 
 theless you have quarelled with them (page 278). Believe me, he 
 who has no friends deserves (t>ert>tenen) to have none. 
 
 227. 
 
 Dialogue (£)ci$ dkfprcid)) between a tailor and .lis journeyman 
 (bcr ©cfett, gen. en). Charles, have you taken the clothes to the 
 Count Narissi ] — Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him. — What did 
 he say ? — He said nothing but that (au£et tap) he had a great mind 
 to give me a box on the ear (tie Dfyrfetge), because I had not 
 brought them sooner. — What did you answer him ? — Sir, said I, 
 I do not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me ; and it 
 you do not do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely 
 ($aum) had I said that, when he put his hand to his sword (na$ 
 t>em ^Dea/n cjtetfen*), and I ran away (fcte glucfyt nefjmen*). 
 
 228. 
 
 At what are you astonished 1 — I am astonished to find you still 
 in bed. — If you knew how (rote) sick I am you would not be as- 
 tonished at it. — Has it already struck twelve 1 — Yes, madam, it is 
 already half past twelve. — Is it possible that it is so late 1 ? — That is 
 not late, it is still early. — Does your watch go well (red)t) 1 — No, 
 miss, it goes a quarter of an hour too fast. — And mine goes half an 
 hour too slow. — Perhaps it has stopped. — In fact, you are right. — Is 
 it wound up 1 — It is wound up, and yet (bennocf)) it does not go.— 
 Do you hear, it is striking one o'clock. — Then I will regulate my 
 watch and go home. — Pray (3d) bttre) stay a little longer (nod) etn 
 roentcQ ! — I cannot, for we dine precisely at one o'clock (nut tern 
 ^d)ta$c cin£)« — (Adieu), till I see you again. 
 
 229. 
 
 What is the matter with you, my dear friend 1 why do you look 
 so melancholy 1 — Nothing ails me. — Are you in any trouble (#aben 
 @tc trgenb etnen Jtunurtet) 1 — I have nothing, and even less than 
 nothing, for I have not a farthing and owe a great deal to my cre- 
 ditors. Am I not very unhappy ] — When a man is well and has 
 friends he is not unhappy. — Dare I ask you a favour 1 — What do 
 you wish ? — Have the goodness to lend me fifty crowns. — I will 
 lend you them with all my heart, but on condition that you will re- 
 nounce gambling and be more economical than you have hitherto 
 been. — I see now, that you are rny friend, and I love you too much 
 
327 
 
 not to follow your advice. — John ! — What is your pleasure, sir*— 
 Bring me some wine. — Presently, sir. — Henry ! — Madam 1 — Make 
 the fire. — The maid-servant has made it already. — Bring me some 
 paper, pens and ink. Bring me also some sand (ber <Strcufcmt>) or 
 blotting-paper (ba$ Sofltpaptct), sealing-wax (bet (Siegellacf) and a 
 light (£td)t). — Go and tell my sister not to wait for me, and be back 
 again at twelve o'clock in order to carry my letters to (auf) the post 
 office. — Very well, madam. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETY-EIGHTH LESSON.— QUljt tmb lWtStt?lg0fc 
 
 Action. 
 
 Out of, except. U u p c t (governs the dative),* 
 
 Oat of, or without doors. 2Cu£ct fcem £aufe. 
 
 He works out of doors. - (Sr arbeitct cunjet t>em £aufe. 
 
 They were all present, except <Ste ivaxcn atte fca, auper ten fccibett 
 
 the two brothers. SBrubern. 
 
 Except you and I, nobody was 2Cuf'ct Sfyncn unt) mit fefytte 9tte* 
 
 absent. ntanb. 
 
 Besides that, otherwise. 2(u6er&cm (ubetbieS). 
 Excepting this, he is an honest 2(u£etbem tft cr em efjtftdjcr 9)iann. 
 
 man. 
 
 It can be done. f (£$ jpbt 20?ittet, b e£ 311 tfyun. 
 
 There is no means of finding f (£6 tft md)t mb'gUd) (ober e£ cjt&t 
 money now. h'm Sfttttel)/ fid) in btefem tfugen* 
 
 bltcfe (Mb $u aerfefyaflm 
 
 Along, £ a n a, 5 (governs the dative aa 
 
 well as the genitive) , c 
 
 All the year round. t & a $ 9°K# 3«!)r fjmburd). 
 
 To enable — to. 3n ben <Stanb fcf en — $u. 
 
 To be able — to. 3m (Stcmbe fetn* — $u. 
 
 To sing. (StttQcn* (Part, past, cjefungen. 
 
 Imp erf. fang). 
 
 a 5lu^er employed as a conjunction may be followed by any case, according 
 to the verb by which the case is governed. Ex. 3d) fyabt s JHemanbcn au£et 
 i\}\i gefefyen, I have seen no one except him ; eS tt»ar Sfttemanb ba, aujjer er, 
 nobody was there except he. 
 
 b 3\t£ -SJiittet, the means, is here in the plural. 
 
 c The jfcispoEition langS must not be mistaken for the adverb laitofi, super- 
 .ative of lartge, a long while. Ex. £ang§ ben Ufern be8 -Seeing bin icf) fajon 
 langfi $eretfet, it is a long time since I travelled along the bo tiers of die 
 Rhine. 
 
323 
 
 To the right, on the right side 9Scd)t$, red)tet $a\ib. 
 
 (or hand). 
 
 To the left, on the left side (or %'mH, (infer £cmfc>. 
 
 hand). 
 
 Could you not tell me which is jtcnnten ,@te mir ntcbt fagcn, rocfofoe* 
 
 the nearest way to the city ter ffir$efte 2Beg tft, um an$ Sljot 
 
 gate ] $u t ommen ? 
 
 Go to the foot of this street, and ®ef)en @te tie gcmje <Strc$e f)inau| 
 
 when you are there, turn to the (fjincib) ; unt) roenn <Sic ctu'n 
 
 right, and you will find a cross- (untcn) fint, roentcn @ic fid) 
 
 way, which you must take. WnU ; ta vurten <Sic einen 
 
 jtreugroeg pnbcn, ubcr ben (Sic 
 gefycn. 
 
 And then 1 Unt fycrnad) ? 
 
 You will then enter a broad street, Pernod) fommen (Sic in cine §icms 
 
 which will bring you to a great ltd) ftrcite (Strcipc, tie ©te auj 
 
 square, where you will see a einen grojkn $)(ci§ ftffyrt, roo ©ie 
 
 blind alley. cine ©aefgaffe fefyen rocrten. 
 
 You must leave the blind alley ©ie laflen tie (Sctcfgafje (infer £ant, 
 
 on your left, and pass under unt gefyen turd) tie ©cfynnbbcgcn, 
 
 the arcade that is near it. tie tancben ftnt. 
 
 Then you must ask again. f 2C(5bann frctgen <B'u tt>etter. 
 
 The arcade, ter (Scfyrcibbogen ; 
 
 the cross-way, ter Jtreusroeg ; 
 
 the shore (bank), ta£ ©eftate ; 
 
 the blind alley, tic @acf gaffe. 
 
 Through. aD u r d) (governs the accusative), 
 
 Do not cross (on horseback) the 9?ctte md)t turd) ten 5Mt ! 
 
 forest. 
 
 He made his way through the f (5r bafynte ftd) einen £Bcg turd) 
 
 enemy. tie $ctnte. 
 
 By this means the patient was £)urd) tiefcS 93?itte( wart ter Jtranfc 
 
 cured. gefunt. 
 
 He speaks through the nose. (5r retet turd) tie Sftofe. 
 
 Without, £> fj n c, fontcr (govern the 
 
 ace us.). 
 
 Do not go out without me. ©efyen <&'u ofjne mtd) nid)t au$ ! 
 
 Without the least doubt. ©onter d aden 3rc>etfe(. 
 
 To last (to wear well). £a(ten *, tauerm 
 
 That cloth will wear well. £)iefc$ &ucf) roirt gut Fjaftcm 
 
 How long has that coat lasted £Bic (ange l)at Sfynen ttcfeS $(et& 
 you? gefyalten ? 
 
 To my liking. 9la&) metnem Sedebcn (®cfaltcn> 
 
 * ©onbev instead of of)tte is only used in poetry. 
 
 
329 
 
 To every body's liking. 9la$ SebetmcmnS S5eUe6cn (2Bc&U 
 
 gefallen). 
 Nobody can do any thing to his Sfltemanfc fann iffm etroaS tecfyt ma* 
 liking. d)cn. 
 
 The question is, it turns upon. < 
 
 It does not turn upon your 
 pleasure, but upon your pro- 
 gress. 
 
 You play, sir, but playing is not 
 the thing, but studying. 
 
 What is going on ? 
 
 The question is to kn >w what 
 we shall do to pass the time 
 agreeably. 
 
 I propose (intend) joining a hunt- 
 ing party. 
 
 On purpose. 
 
 I beg your pardon, I have not 
 done it on purpose. 
 
 A game at chess, 
 A game at billiards, 
 
 To play upon the violin. 
 
 To play the violin. 
 
 To play for something. 
 
 To play upon the harpsichord. 
 
 To play upon the flute. 
 To play at cards. 
 The game of chess, 
 the card, 
 
 the playing at cards (toe card- 
 playing), 
 the pack of cards, 
 
 (5$ fjanbdt fid) urn. 
 
 t&S fcmmt batauf an $u. 
 
 ($$ fyanbett fid) md)t urn Sfyr 93 ct* 
 
 cmiigcn, fcnbern urn Sfyre ^crts 
 
 fcfyrttte. 
 @ic fpklen, metn £ctr; after (Sic 
 
 feflcn nid)t fptelen, fenbern ftubi-- 
 
 rem 
 Urn roa» (roorum) fyanbett ficfy'S ? 
 2Borauf fommt c$ an ? 
 @$ fcmmt batauf an gu rotfien, roaS 
 
 rott tfyim roerben (conversational 
 
 style: &Sit mujfen roiffen, roa$ 
 
 nut tfjun follen), urn unfete 3ett 
 
 angcnefjm f)in$ubttna,en ebct §u$us 
 
 fcringcru 
 3d) nctjme mtr t?cr, enter Sflgbparttc 
 
 bei^uroofyncn. 
 mt gtetg, »orfa£ttcf). 
 3d) bitte (Ste urn QSer^ctfmna,, id) 
 
 rjabe es ntdr)t t>orfagtict> (nut §tctp) 
 
 getfjan. 
 
 eine ^artie ©cftad). 
 
 cine 9>a*ttc S3iflarb. 
 
 2fuf ber &Uoltne fptelen. 
 
 2)te S3teltne eber Violin fptelen. 
 
 Urn etnxiS fpietcn. 
 
 2Cuf bem JUamcr (bat £{amet) fpte* 
 
 ten. 
 2Cuf bcr Jflcte (Die pie) fctofen* 
 jtatten fpieten. 
 ba$ <Sd)ad)fptc( ; 
 bte jtatte ; 
 t)a$ ^attenfptel ; 
 
 ba$ (Spiel partem 
 
 05s The name of the instrument is put in the ac- 
 cusative when we wish to express, with the verb fpte* 
 kit, that a person knows how to play ; but when we 
 wish to express that he is actually playing, it require? 
 the preposition auf with the dative. Ex. bte Siottttf 
 fpieteu, to play the violin ; auf ber 33tcfme fpiefert, to play 
 
330 
 
 upon the violin. The names of games are employed 
 * without an article, and the rest is as in English. 
 
 To blow. 93 1 a f c n * (gcblafen, &Uc$). 
 
 Thou blowest, he blows. £u btafcft, ct MfU 
 
 To hold one's tongue. ?/?««.• * , C r • „ . , 
 
 To stop speaking, to be silent. j®*»« fl cn* (flefowuflen, ftnueg). 
 
 Do you hold your tongue ? <Sd)n?ctgcn (Sic ? 
 
 I do hold my tongue. 3d) fcfyroctgc. 
 
 After speaking half an hour, he 9?ad)t>em ct etnc ^atOe (Stunfcc gcre* 
 held his tongue. bet Ijatte, fc^tvtcg cr. 
 
 To suspect. 23crmutr)cn. 
 
 ( suspect what he has done. 3d) tjcrmutfje, xoa$ cc gctfycm fjat. 
 He does not suspect what is (St scrmutfyct md)t, roaS tfym nribct* 
 
 going to happen to him. fafyrcn nnrfc). 
 
 Do you intend to make a long ®cfccnfcn (Sic ftd) (an$c in t)cc (Stabt 
 
 stay in town ? cwftufjaltcn ? 
 
 I do not intend to make a long 3d) cjefccnfc mid) md)t langc fca auf 
 stay there. $u'()a(tcn. 
 
 To make a stay. (Sid) ctuffyattcn*. 
 
 The stay, the sojourn, bet: 2Cufcntr)att* 
 
 To think. £)ent:cn* (gcbacfyt, foad&te). 
 
 To think of some one or of some- ZCn 3?ntant>crt obcr an cttuag bens 
 
 thing. fen*. 
 
 Of whom do you think ? 2Cn roen fcenftm (Sic ? 
 
 Of what do you think ? 28otan fcenEcn (Stc? (See Rule, 
 
 Lesson LXIV.) 
 
 EXERCISES. 230. 
 
 Sir, may 1 ask you where the Earl of B. lives ? — He lives near 
 the castle (Lesson LXVIII.) on the other side (jenfett) of the river. 
 — Could you tell me which road I must take to go thither? — You 
 must go along the shore ((d'ngS tern (55eftat)c r)tn), and you will come 
 to a little street on the right, which will lead you straight (gerctbe) 
 to his house (auf bag £>auS $u). It is a fine house, you will find it 
 easily (letd)t). — I thank you, sir. — Does the Count N. live here? 
 — Yes, sir, walk in (fid) fjcretn bemtiben), if you please. — Is the 
 count at home ? I wish to have the honour to speak to him. — Yes, 
 sir, he is at home ; whom shall I have the honour to announce 
 (mc(t)tn) 1 — I am from B., and my name is F. 
 
 Which is the shortest way to the arsenal ($)a$ 3eugf)au$) ? — Go 
 down this street, and when you come to the foot, turn to the left 
 and take the cross-way ; you will then enter into a rather narrow 
 f cno/) street, which will lead you to a great square, where you will 
 
331 
 
 see a blind alley. — TVrough which I must pass 1 — No, for there is 
 no outlet (bet 2(u£aanaj. You must leave it on the n^ht, and pass 
 under the arcade which is near it. — And then ! — And then you 
 must inquire further. — I am very much obliged to you. — Do not 
 mention it ((5*8 ift nicfyt Utfacfyc). 
 
 221. 
 
 Are you able to translate a French letter into German ! — I am 
 (c£). — Who has (e$) taught you 1 — My German master has enabled 
 me to dc *t. — You are singing, gentlemen, but it is not a time for 
 singing ; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what you are told. 
 — We are at a loss. — What are you at a loss at 1 ? — I am going to 
 tell you : it is a question with us how we shall pass our t'jne agree- 
 ably. — Play a game at billiards or at chess. — We have proposed 
 joining a hunting party : do you go with (us) ! — I cannot, for I 
 have not done my task yet : and if I neglect it, my master will 
 scold me. — Every one according to his liking ; if you like staying 
 at home better than going a hunting, we cannot hinder you. — Does 
 Mr. K. go with us ] — Perhaps. — I should not like to go with him, 
 for he is too great a talker, excepting that he is an honest man. 
 
 What is the matter with you] you look angry. — I have reason 
 to be angry, for there is no means of getting money now. — Have 
 you been at Mr. A's ? — I have been at his house ; but there is no 
 possibility of borrowing any from him. I suspected that he would 
 not lend me any, that is the reason why I did not wish to ask him $ 
 and had you not told me to do so, I should not have subjected my- 
 self (fid) ausfcgcn) to a refusal (t>tc aOfd)ta'gtgc 2(nut>ott). 
 
 232. 
 
 I suspected that you would be thirsty, and that your sister would 
 be hungry ; that is the reason why I brought you hither. 
 
 I am sorry, however, that your mother is not here. 1 am aston- 
 ished ((SS bcftembet mid)) that you do not drink your coffee. — If I 
 were not sleepy I would drink it. — Sometimes (53alt>) you are slee- 
 py, sometimes cold, sometimes warm, and sometimes something 
 else is the matter with you (ift Sfynen ctrcaS 2(nbetc$). I believe 
 that you think too much about (an) the misfortune that has hap- 
 pened to your friend (fern.). — If I did not think about it, who would 
 think about it ] — Of whom does your brother think ? — He thinks of 
 me ; for we always think of each other when we are not together 
 (Oetfammen). 
 
 I have seen six players (bet ©pte(et) to-day, who were all win- 
 ning at the same time ($u gtctdjet 3cit). — That cannot be, for a 
 player can only win when another loses. — You would be right if I 
 were speaking of people that had played at cards or billiards ; but 
 I am speaking of flute and violin players (bev gtotcn? iml) SSteltnfptcs 
 let). — Do you sometimes practise (macfoen) music 1 — Very often, for 
 I like it much. — What instrument do you play ! — I play the violin, 
 
332 
 
 and my sister plays the harpsichord, My brother, who plays the 
 6ass (bet 33a(5), accompanies (beglctten) us, and Miss Stolz. some- 
 times applauds us (Semcinbem SSetfatf guElatfcfecn). — Does she not 
 also play some musical instrument (ba$ muft!a(tfcl)C Snftrument) 1 — 
 She plays the harp (bte £atfe), Dut sue * s to ° proud (ftc($) to prac- 
 tise music with us. — A very (fefyr) poor town went to considerable 
 expense (bet bettad)tttd)e 2fujruant>) in feasts and illuminations (nut 
 greubenfejlen imb (Sr(eiitf)tuncjen) on the occasion of its prince passing 
 through (Oct bet 3)iircf)reifc tt)tc* — ). — The latter seemed himseli 
 astonished (crfUumt) at it. — " It has only done," said a courtier 
 (bet £efmann), " what it owed (to your majesty). " — " That is true," 
 replied (wrfegen) another, "but it owes all that it has done." (See 
 end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 NINETY-NINTH LESSON.— ^eutx tttti> lUttttfafite 
 Ceriion. 
 
 Either — or. <S n t ro e b c t — c b e r. (Lesson 
 
 LXI.) 
 
 Fte either has done it, or will (St ()at c$ enttuebct gctfjan, obet rottD 
 still do it. c$ nocf) tfyun. 
 
 Obs. A. It has been noticed in many parts of this 
 work, that certain conjunctions correspond with others 
 that generally follow them. These conjunctions are: 
 
 (Less 
 
 XCI.) 
 
 (£nttt>eber, is followed by: 
 
 3e a 
 
 3ftd)t atfem, 
 
 5itdf)t ttur, 
 
 06gletd>, ) 
 
 D6fd)on, > 
 
 ©o, . 
 ©ott>of)f, 
 
 Sffieber, 
 
 SBemt, 
 
 StBenn gleid), > b 
 
 2Bemt fd)ort, S 
 
 ober (Lesson LXL), either — or, 
 
 je, or befto, the — the. 
 ( fonbent aucf) (Lesson LXI.) 
 I not only — but also. 
 I fo — bod), or gletd)tt)ofy(, or 
 < md)t$ befto menfger, though- 
 ( nevertheless. 
 
 fo, however — still. 
 ( aU, or aU and) (Lessor 
 t LXL), as well — as. 
 { nod) (Less. VII. and LXL), 
 ( neither — nor. 
 
 fo, if — so. 
 
 fo — bod), though — yet or 
 nevertheless. 
 
 • 3e unites two comparatives. 
 
 *! 2Bemt is not only combined with gletcfy arxl fctyon, but also with atttetft 
 
333 
 
 ( aber, or atfem or gfetd)tt>oljl 
 3tt)ar, < or jebod), though — never- 
 
 ( theless, or but. 
 
 Prepositions either govern the 3)te ^erfyaftmfwb'rtet (^tapofttio? 
 genitive, or the dative, or the ncn) regtercn entnx'bet ben ®cnU 
 accusative, or finally the da- tit), obet ben £)attt>, obet ben lie- 
 tive and accusative. cufatb, obet enbdd) ben 3)Ut& «nb 
 
 2Cccufatit>. 
 
 The sooner, the better. 3c eftcr / je debet. 
 
 <"he greater our pleasures, the 3c Qrojkt unfere gteuben fmb, befto 
 more we feel how transitory mefyr empfinben rott tfyve 23ets 
 they are. Cjancjttcbfttt. 
 
 Obs. B. 2)e|T:o may be placed in the first member of 
 **e phrase, in which case je begins the second. Ex. 
 
 A work of art is the more beau- (Sin Jtunfht>et6 tft befto febonct, je 
 
 tiful the more perfect it is. Dottfommenet e$ tfL 
 
 (Sulzer.) 
 She is not only handsome, but @ic tft ntcbt nut fd)b'n, fonbetn aud) 
 
 she is rich also. rctct). 
 
 Not only his idleness, but his in- 9tfd)t nut fetne •Jaut^ctt, fonbetn 
 
 discretion also makes him con- cud) (cine llnbejcfyetbenfyett niad)t 
 
 temptible. tfjn wtacbttid). 
 
 Though this young lady is not Dbgletd) btefeS £tau(etn ntcbt fcf)C 
 
 very handsome, she is never- febon tft, fo tft fie bed) fcfjt licbcng* 
 
 theless very amiable. nnitbta,. 
 
 However handsome she may be, (So fd)b'n fie aud) fein mag, fo tft fie 
 
 still she is not amiable. bod) ntcbt ttebenSreurbtcj. 
 
 Fou as well as your sister. <Sott>of)l @tc, att 3t)t #tau(etn 
 
 ©cbroeftet. 
 She is as handsome as she is &c tft foroobt fd)on aH ftebenSroitts 
 
 amiable and rich. big unb retct)* 
 
 They had neither bread, nor meat, @tc batten roebet 23tob, necb $fetfd), 
 
 nor arms, nor money. nod) SOBaffcn, nod) ©elb* 
 
 f he does not pay you for the SBenn et Sbnen la$ $>fetb ntcbt be* 
 
 horse, tell me. $ab(t, fo fagen ^ie e* nut. 
 
 Though I should have money, £Benn tcb p/ietcb ®e(b fjattc, fo cjabe 
 
 still I would give him none. id) tbm bod) frinS. 
 
 Indeed I do not know him yet, 3roat fentu tcb tbn nod) ntcbt, aber 
 
 but he seems to be docile. er fd>ctnt nut felgfam. 
 
 jebeeb, aud), fetbfi, and nut. Ex. SBcnn cmfcerS, if otherwise ; tternt jcbodj), if 
 however ; ttjenn auty or roernt felbft, if even ; roemt nur, if only. All these 
 compound conjunctions must be considered as two separate words, between 
 which the subject and even the case of the verb (when a personal pronoun) 
 may be placed. The same observation applies to the coi-ibi nation of ob witb 
 other words. (See Lesson XCI. Obs II Note*;.) 
 
334 
 
 Though I wrote to him, never- 3d) Me t&m S^at gcfdjttefcen, a,fetd)* 
 the] ess he has not answered tvofyt r)at et mir nid)t gcantroottet 
 me. 
 
 (3d) tv>unfcr)te, et fjatte eg md)t ge* 
 ScStaVc^baPcre^ntdjt^an 
 batte. 
 
 O&s. C. The conjunction b a $ may be omitted ; 
 but then the verb immediately follows its subject. 
 
 I wish you would g o with m e. J * gg gSutti^^. 
 
 '3* f>cffc, 3f)t £rau(etn £d)roejrer 
 
 T hope that your sister will 
 marry my brother. 
 
 tuttb metnen $Btubet fjetra? 
 tf)cn. 
 3d) r>cffc, bap 3fa -Jra'ulcin @d)roe-- 
 flcr mcinen SBruber fycitatfyen 
 nrirb. 
 
 {©cfegt, voir rja'ttcn roebet 33tob, ncc^ 
 SBetn, nccr> (Mb. 
 ©cfegt, bag rott rocbet 93tob, nod) 
 S&etn, nod) ©elb fatten. 
 (SScttte d5ctt, atle grope £erren Uebtcn 
 ben ftttcben ! 
 SBclltc ©ott, bap atle grope ferret* 
 ben $tieben ftefcten ! 
 
 By virtue of. & t a f t (governs the genitive). 
 
 By virtue of his employment St mup ftaft feineS 2CmteS fo (jan* 
 (his office) he must act thus. beln. 
 
 According to (by virtue of). $ e t m 6 0, e (governs the gen.). 
 
 According to your order I must QScrmftge 3fjre$ SStffetytt mup td) fo 
 speak thus. fptcdjen. 
 
 Instead of. 2£nftatt or ftatt (goveras the 
 
 genitive). 
 
 He sent his daughter instead of 2fnfratt fetneS (SofyneS fdncfte et fetnc 
 
 his son. &od)tet. 
 
 He has adopted him. (gr foot tfjn an .ftinbeS (Statt c an- 
 
 genotttmen. 
 Go thither instead of me. (Start metnet gefye £>u r)tn. 
 
 c The word ©tatr, lieu, place, when thus seoarated from an, must be con 
 •idered as a substantive. 
 
335 
 
 In consequence of (according to). £ a u t (governs the geniti?e). 
 
 According to his letter, he ought £aut (eineS S3rtefe$, mug ct ben 
 to arrive here on the 18th of IBten ttefeS fyitt etntteffctt. 
 this month. 
 
 To exclaim. 2£uSrufen* (Imperf. ricf). 
 
 To make uneasy. SBeunrufngen. 
 
 To be uneasy (to fret). SBcunruht^t (fccfcrgt) fcttt* 
 
 Why do you fret (are you un- £Batum fint Sic bcuntufjtgt (be* 
 
 easy) 1 fergt) ? 
 I do not fret (am not uneasy) . 3d) bin md)t kforqt (Ocutttufyigt). 
 
 Compose yourself! 25eruf)tgen @te ftd) ! 
 
 To alter, to change. (Stcf) tterantcrn. 
 
 That manhas altered a great deal liefer 9)tann r)at ftdf) fer)r ttctantcrt, 
 since I saw him. fctttcm td> tfyn nicfyt Qcfcfycn Ijafcc. 
 
 To alter a coat. (Sittcn SRocf antctn. 
 
 To recommend. @rnpfer)(en*. 
 
 To take leave (to commend one's @tcr) cmpfcfylcn*. 
 
 self). 
 Farewell, adieu ! 3d) empfer)(c mid) Sfyncn ! 
 
 I have the honour to bid you \ 3d) fyafcc tic (Sfjtc, mid) S^ncn $U 
 
 adieu. cmpfcljkn. 
 
 Obs. D. This and lefcen ©te tt>of)f, farewell, is the 
 general salute of the Germans when leaving each 
 other. 
 
 Farewell (adieu) ! £cbcn ©tc roerjt ! 
 
 To bid one's friends adieu. Bdncn gmmtcn £c&croof)l fagen. 
 
 The recommendation (respects, tic (Smpfcfytuncj. 
 compliments), 
 
 Pr ( e ^ ^ ie *» <&> mcinc ® m ' 
 
 Remember me to him (to her). > ^* fal * 
 
 To cn/oy. (S5 cntcpen* (governs the ace.) 
 
 Enjoy all the pleasures that vir- ©cnicfictt (Sic atte SScrgniigungcn, 
 tue permits. roclcf)C tic Nugent cdauOt. 
 
 The past, tic SSctQangcnfjctt, ta$ $cr$angcnc ; 
 
 the present, fca$ ©cgcntvdrti^c ; 
 
 the presence, tic ©cgenrcatt. 
 
 In his presence. 3n fcincr ©cgenroatt. 
 
 The future, tag 3uf unftujc ; 
 
 the loss, tcr QSettuft ; 
 
 the loss uf time, tc«t 3cit»ctlujt. 
 
 Not to fail. 2(uSrid)tcn, md)t ermangefn. 
 
336 
 
 Pray, present my compliments 3d) bttte (Ste, Sfytem $tautetn 
 (my respects) to your sister. (Sd)tt>eftct guttajt mcinc (Smyfef)* 
 
 fung su macfycn. 
 
 {2£cnn eg Sfjnen gefcifltg iff, 01 
 simply gcfa'tltgfr, 
 SGBcnn ©te fo gut fctn molten or 
 simply gtittgft. 
 
 I shall not fail. j ^ ^ ^ crman ^ m 
 
 EXERCISES. 233. 
 
 I have the honour to wish you a good morning-. How do you 
 do? — Very well, at your service (Sfjnen aufeuroatten). — And how 
 are they all at home (beftnfcct man ftd) bet Srrnen $u £aufe) ] — Toler- 
 ably well, thank God (®ott fet £anf). My sister was a little indis- 
 posed (unpap(icb), but sbe is better (ttucbet bctgcjMtt) ; she told me 
 to give you her best compliments (fie (aj}t fid) Sfyncn bcjtcnS empfefofen). 
 —I am glad ((5s tft nut (tcb) to hear tbat she is well. As for you, 
 you are health itself; you cannot look better (<Ste fonnten ntd)t bef- 
 fet ausfefyen). — I have no time to be ill ; my business would not per- 
 mit me. — Please to sit down (<Be(tebcn ©tc fid) ntet>et$u(affen), here 
 is a chair. — I will not detain you from your buiness (son ten ©e? 
 fefyaften abbatten*) ; I know that a merchant's time is precious (t>aS 
 etnem .ftaufmanne Me 3ett foftbat tft). — I have nothing pressing (nicbtS 
 (SiftgeS) to do now, my courier is already dispatched (mcinc Spoft tft 
 fd)0n abqcfetttqt). — T shall not stay (fid) auffjalten*) any longer. I 
 only wished in passing by (tm £?orbctgef)cn), to inquire about (ftd) 
 crfunMgen nad)) your health. — You do me much honour. — It is very 
 fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the plea- 
 sure of seeing you again this afternoon (nad) &tfd)c), and if you 
 have time we will take a little turn together (fo gefyen tint etn nxntq 
 nut ctnanfcet fpagtcrcn). — With the greatest pleasure. In that case I 
 shall wait for you. — I will come for you (<&xc abfyolen) about (gegen) 
 seven o'clock. — Adieu then (atfo), till I see you again. — I have the 
 honour to bid you adieu. 
 
 234. 
 
 The loss of time is an irreparable (unetfcgUcb) loss. A single 
 minute cannot be recovered (tutcbctcttangcn) for all the gold in the 
 world. — It is then of (sen) the greatest importance (Me £8td)ttgfctt) 
 to employ well the time, which consists only of minutes (cuts 93?U 
 nuten beftefyen*) of which we must make good use (Me man tvobl be? 
 nu£cn mu|). — We have but the present ; the past is no longer any 
 thing, and the future is uncertain. A great many people (@crjt mclc 
 9)2cnfcben) ruin themselves (ftd) $u ©tunt^c rtd)ten), because they wish 
 to indulge themselves too much (n>ct( fie fid) afl$u gtitltd) tfyun molten). 
 If most (tic mctfrcn) men knew how to content themselves (ftd) be* 
 cmugen) with what they have they would be happy, but their gree- 
 diness (Me ©tcttqfett) very often makes them unhappy. In order to 
 
337 
 
 be happy, we naust (mujj man) forget the past, not trouble ourselveu 
 about (fid) bcfummcrn urn) the future, and enjoy the present. — I was 
 very dejected (trauricj) when my cousin came to me. " What is 
 the matter with you 1 " he asked me. " Oh (act)) I my deai 
 cousin," replied I, "in losing that money, I have lost every 
 thing." " Do not fret," said he to me, " for I have found youi 
 money." 
 
 235. 
 
 As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me he begins to speak French, ; n 
 order to practise it (um ftd> $u ttOen), and overwhelms me with po- 
 liteness (nut £oflicWcttcn uk'rfya'ufcn), so that I often do not know 
 what to answer (rea£ td) irjm antrcettcn foil). His brothers do the same 
 (c$ cbcnfo mocljcn). — However, they are very good people ; they are 
 not only rich and amiable, but they are also generous (qreftmutfytoj 
 and charitable (roobltfjattcj). They love me sincerely (aufttcrjtioj, 
 therefore, I love them also, and consequently (fclgftd)) shall nevei 
 Bay anything to their disadvantage (9tacl)tr)etltgc$ son tfynen). 1 
 should love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony 
 (t)k llmftanbc) ; but every one has his faults (t>cr Jcrjlct), and mine 
 is to speak too much of their ceremonies. . 
 
 236. 
 
 Have the enemies surreudered (ftcl) crgc&en*) 1 — They have not 
 surrendered, for they did not prefer life to death ; and though they 
 had neither bread, nor water, nor arms, nor money, they determined 
 to die rather than surrender. — Why are you so sad ? — You do not 
 know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend (fern.). — Tell me, 
 for I assure you that 1 share (thctlen) your sufferings (ba$ Cetfcen) as 
 well as (ekn jo roe 1)1 ate) your pleasures (tic Create). — Though I am 
 sure that you partake of (£bci( an enter ©ache ncljmcn*) my suffer- 
 ings I cannot, however, tell you now (in bkfcm 2Cugenbltcf) what 
 makes me uneasy ; but I will tell you when an opportunity offers 
 (gcU'gcntttcb ct)cr bet ©e(ea,enbett). Let us speak of something else 
 now. What do ycu think of the man who spoke to us yesterday 
 at the concert ] — He is a man of much understanding (cm fcfjr MVs 
 jt&'nfctgcr 932ann), and not at all wrapt up in his merits (twrt fetrten 
 SScrbtcnfrcn etna/nemmen fan*). But why do you ask me that] — To 
 speak of something. — It is said (\DZan fagt) : contentment surpasses 
 riches (3ufrkt>cnf)eit Qdyt iUht 9?etd)tbum) ; let us then always b& 
 content. Let us share with each other (nut ctnanber tr)ct(cn) what 
 we have, and live all our life-time (tin jet ganged £d>cn) inseparable 
 (unjertrennltd)) friends. You will always be welcome (rotllfemmcn) 
 at my house, and I hope to be equally so (c£ ami)) at yours. — If 1 
 saw you happy I should be equally so, and we should be more con- 
 tented than the greatest princes, who are not always so. We shall 
 be happy, when we shall be perfectly (wllfemmen) contented with 
 what we have ; and if we do our duty as we ought (gcf)6riaf), God 
 15 
 
338 
 
 will take care of the rest (fo wttt t>cr lube (S5ott fur fc>a$ ttefcnqe far* 
 gen). The past being no longer any thing, let us not be uneasy 
 •about the future, and enjoy the present. 
 
 237. 
 
 Behold, ladies, those beautiful (fycrdtcf)) flowers, with theii 
 colours so fresh and bright (mit ifyrcn fo frifdjen unb gtcinjcntcn gar* 
 ben) ; they drink nothing but water. The white lily has the eoloui 
 of innocence (t)ic tfnfd)u(b) ; the violet indicates gentleness (bit 
 (Scmftmutt)) ; you may (man farm) see it in Louisa's eyes. The 
 forget-me-not (£)as &crgtflmctnntd)t) has the colour of heaven, our 
 future (tunfttg) dwelling (tic £Bof)nuna,, repeat the genitive), and the 
 rose (tic SHofe), the queen of flowers, is the emblem (t>aS ©innlult) 
 of beauty (bte @d)onr)ctt) and of joy (t>te Jrciibe). You (Sftcm) see 
 all that personified (t>errmrHtd)t) in seeing the beautiful Amelia 
 (2Cma(k)» — How beautiful is the fresh verdure (t>a$ junge frtfdje 
 ($ttm) ! It is salutary (rocrjl tfnin*) to our eyes, and has the colour 
 of hope (bte $offnun$), our most faithful (ttcu, repeat the genitive) 
 friend (fern.), who never deserts (»erfaflcn*) us, not even in death 
 (tm &ot>e»). — One word more my dear friend. — What is your plea- 
 sure ? — I forgot to tell you to present my compliments to your 
 nother. Tell her, if you please, that I regret (befcauern) not having 
 been at home when lately she honoured (beer)ten) me with her visit. 
 — I thank you for her (in ifyrem 9? amen), I shall not fail. — Farewell 
 then. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
 HUNDREDTH LESSON.— Qmibtttot* UtilOtl. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 We have hitherto shown by numerous examples for 
 the practice of learners, the place which the adverb 
 is to occupy in a sentence. Let us now determine the 
 place of the adverb by standard rules. 
 
 As the adverb modifies the signification of the verb, 
 it should always be near it, particularly the negative 
 mcfyt, which, if misplaced, would entirely change the 
 meaning of a phrase. Ex. 
 
 I have not the honour to know 3d) fyafre md)t tie (Sfyre, @tc $u 
 you. fennen. 
 
 And : 
 
 I have the honour not to know 3d) Fmfc tic (Sf)re, <Sie md)t $1 
 
 fennen. 
 
339 
 
 Rules 
 
 1st. The adverb precedes the adjective, the meaning 
 of which it modifies. Ex. din tt>a!)tf)aft guter 9D?amt, a 
 truly good man ; extte ttnrfltd) gute ©etegenfyett, a truly 
 good opportunity ; em fefyr <trttge£ $tttb, a very good 
 child. 
 
 2d, It follows the imperative and precedes the infi- 
 nitive to which it relates. Ex. D?ebett ©te Icmt, speak 
 aloud ; fprecfyen ©te md)t fo fd)tteK, da> not speak so quick- 
 ly ; fcfyretben ©te. tcmgfam, fo n>erbett ©te fcfyon fcfyretben, 
 write slowly, and you will write well ; id) bttte ©te, 
 md)t $u fifyteU $tt fdE)rex6en, pray, do not write too fast. 
 
 3d, It follows the simple tense of the verb, but pre- 
 cedes it when the sentence depends on a conjunction. 
 Ex. 3d) fage e$ Sfynen fret beratt^, I tell you frankly ; 
 id) tterftefye ©te md)t, tt>etf ©te $u fcfynell fprecfyett, I do 
 not understand you, because you speak too fast (Les- 
 son LXIX.) ; er fontntt itm jefytt Ufjr SSKorgen^ a fcott ba 
 jurttrf, he returns from there at ten o'clock in the morn- 
 ing (Lesson XL VII.) ; wetttt ©te fmtgfam rebeten, fo witr* 
 be id) ©te tterftefyett, if you spoke slowly I should under- 
 stand you. 
 
 4th, In compound tenses it precedes the past parti- 
 ciple. Ex. (§r fydtte taut gelefett, rcemt ©te t()tt ofter baju 
 cmgefyatten fyattett, he would have read aloud, if you 
 had oftener engaged him to do so ; id) bin fcfyon ba ge* 
 IDefetty I have already been there (Lesson XLI.) ; tcf) 
 fyabe tf)tt fcorgeftent gefefyett, I saw him the day before 
 yesterday. 
 
 5th, It follows the case of the verb, but precedes it 
 when it is a partitive, or joined to an indefinite article. 
 Ex. 3d) fal) tint geftew, I saw him yesterday ; er fyctt eg 
 tmr fo eben gegeben, he has just now given it to me ; td) 
 toiU tt)tt 3f)nett ntorgen fcfyttfett, I will send it to you to- 
 morrow (Lesson XXVIII.) ; fyaft 2)u mmtdjmat S^algtu* 
 djex att^beftent faflen ? hast thou sometimes had cravats 
 mended? id) fyctbe ntattdjmat ^efc^eau^bejfemfaffen,! have 
 
 a Um $efjtt Uf)t SftovgettS, is an adverbial phrase, and all sorts of adverbial 
 expressions, or compound adverbs, as they may be called, follow the rules oi 
 simple adveibs. 
 
340 
 
 sometimes had some mended (Lesson XLIV.) ; fyabett 
 ©te je etnen ©epbanteu gefefyen? have you ever seen an 
 elephant ? id) babe me emen gefeben, I have never seen 
 one ; er fyatte btefen 90iergen fern ©elb, he had no money 
 this morning ; er trdgt gent etnen gro£en $)i\t, he likes to 
 vear a large hat. 
 
 6th, It precedes the case of the verb when governed 
 by a preposition. Ex. 3cf) VDttt tfyn morgen jn 3t)nen fd)i* 
 (fen, I will send him to you to-morrow (Lesson 
 XXVIII.) ; ftnb ©ie fange bet metnem SSater geblteben ? 
 have you stayed long with my father (Lesson XL VII.) ? 
 id) bin erne ©hmbe lang bet tfym geblteben, I have stayed 
 with him a full hour (Lessons XL VII. and XLVIII.) ; 
 ttrir fpracfyen fo eben Don 3fynen/we have just spoken of 
 you ; fonnen ©te fyente jn nttr fommen ? can you come to 
 me to-day? 
 
 PLACE OF THE NEGATIVE nidjt 
 
 Rules. 
 
 1st, It likewise follows the simple tense and the 
 case of the verb, when there is one, but precedes the 
 infinitive and the past participle. Ex. 3d) tterftefye iie> 
 fen 5D?ann nicfyt, I do not understand that man ; bet 9Kann 
 hat ben goffer md)t, the man has not the trunk; bet 
 innge ?0?enfd) (3itngltng) kfat i\)n ntd)t, the young man has 
 it not (Lesson IX.) ; ©te eften ntd)t, you do not eat ; tdj 
 fyctbe tfyn nidjt gebabt, I have not had it (Lesson XLII.) ; 
 er tt>tll ntd)t arbetten, he does not wish to work ; id) l)abe 
 tf)tt ntd)t gefet)en, I have not seen him ; id) i)abe fte nid)t 
 gefannt, I have not known them (Lesson XLIV.) ; id) 
 i)i>re ©te, aber Derfle^e ©te ntdjt, I hear, but do not un- 
 derstand you (Lesson XL VI.); id) gebe eg tfyttt ntd)t, I 
 do not give it to him ; fte fteben fid) nid)t, they do not 
 love each other ; id) fcfymetcfyfe mtr nid)t, I do not flatter 
 myself; fte fefyen etnanber ntd)t afynltd), they do not re- 
 semble each other (Lesson LXXXVL). 
 
 Obs. A. When the negative sentence is preceded 
 or followed by an affirmative one, md)t precedes the 
 case of the verb, but if the affirmative sentence con- 
 tains another nominative with aber, the negative fol 
 
341 
 
 lows the general rale. Ex. 3d) babe nid)t biefcn, fott* 
 bent jenen, I have not the latter, but the former ; er fyal 
 btefe£, after mcfjt jeneg, he has the latter, but not the 
 former (Lesson XL) ; id) babe 3bren £nt mdf)t, aber ntetn 
 33rnber bat tfyn, it is not I who have your hat, but my 
 brother. 
 
 Obs. B. A negative, not depending on the nomina 
 tive of the verb, precedes the word the sense of wjiich 
 it modifies. Ex. dv arbextet ben ganjen £ag ntd)t, he does 
 not w r ork during the whole day ; and man arbettet ntd)t 
 ben ganjen £ag, one does not work all day. 
 
 2d, The case of the verb being governed by a pre- 
 position, ntd)t, like other adverbs (Rule 6 above), pre- 
 cedes it. Ex. @r ifit ntcfyt jn £anfe, he is not at home 
 (Lesson XXVI.) ; id) fitrcfyte mid) nid)t $or tl)tn, I do not 
 fear him (Lesson LXX.). 
 
 3d, It follows the adverbs of time, but precedes all 
 other adverbs, as adverbs of quality, of place, &c 
 Ex. 3d) arbette l)ente ntcfyt, I do not work to-day ; ei 
 fd)retbt ntrf)t fd)cn, he does not write well ; er tft ntd)t 
 ba, he is not there ; id) gebe ntcfyt bafyut, I do not go 
 thither. 
 
 4th, It follows the adverb nod). Ex. 3d) bin nod) 
 md)t ba gercefen, I have not yet been there ; id) bin nod) 
 nid)t bet tbm geroefcn, I have not yet been at his house 
 (Lessor XLL). The following sentences, however, 
 must be distinguished from each other : tDotten ©te nod) 
 nid)t ettva$ eflen ? will you not eat anything yet ? and 
 rootfen @ie n t d) t nod) ettva$ efien ? will you not eat 
 anything more? In the latter sentence ntd)t modifies 
 the signification of nod) ettt>a$. 
 
 Obs. C. The negative precedes the word and), when 
 the sentence is both interrogative and negative, but 
 follows it when the sentence is simply negative. Ex. 
 33m id) nid)t and) ba getoefen ? have I not also been 
 there ? nnb id) and) ntdjt, nor I either ; nnb er and) ntdjt 
 nor he either. 
 
 To Dretend r be ill $ + @i * f iic !ran6 au ^™* 
 
 lo pretend x he .11. ^ + &a& ^ m<m ^ fcflB(i 
 
342 
 
 This boy always pretends to be £)tefer Jtnafce gtfct fid) tmmet fftt 
 ill; but when we sit down to fran! au£ ; alletn rocnn mart gu 
 dinner, he is generally well £tfd)C qcF)t, fo tft er geroofjnftdj 
 again. roteber ^crgcftcUt (rotcber gcfunb). 
 
 To be said. f @c((cn*. 
 
 He is said to have suffered ship- f ©r f<>W cm ber £ufte son ©tcttfen 
 
 wreck near the coast of Sicily. ©d)tff(>rud) gc(tttcn fyafcen. 
 
 Out of all his property he is said f (Sr felt t?cn alien fetnen ^afcfettgs 
 
 to have saved nothing but an fetten mtf)t$ o(l etnen leeren 9teU 
 
 empty portmanteau. fefacf gcrettet Fjabcn 
 
 OF TENSES. 
 
 1st, The present tense is frequently substituted for 
 the imperfect, to enliven the narrative and excite at 
 tention. This is sometimes done in English, but not 
 so often as in German. Ex. 
 
 Imagine my horror ! Yesterday iDenft ffindfc metnen ©cbrecfen ! tcf) 
 
 I went with my child to the gefye gejrcrn nut mctnem ittnbe 
 
 gate of the town, to see the tier bat 3#or, um ben ?uft6allon 
 
 ascent of the balloon. We aufftetgen ^u fcf)cn, Fommc nut 
 
 were soon surrounded by the tfym in£ ©ebrange, r»cr(tcrc e$ au$ 
 
 crowd, when suddenly I lost ten 2Cua.cn, unb ftnbe e$ erft nac!) 
 
 sight of my child, and it was etner (gtunbe ftetnafte gerbriicft unb 
 
 not till an hour afterwards gcrtrctcn retebcr (for: id) gtng, 
 
 that I found it, trampled un- ia\\\, rerlor and fanb). 
 der foot and nearly crushed 
 to death. 
 
 I now ascend the mountain ; a 3e|t crflimme tcb ten 23crg ; ctn 
 
 deep valley unfolds itself to ttcfes &W ereffnet ftci> mctnem 
 
 my delighted eyes ; a limpid forfeftenben 2Cugc ; gnrifefyen $artcn 
 
 stream murmurs among the (Mutfcfyen rtefelt etn flarcr ^act)/ 
 
 verdant shrubs ; sheep are gu metnen ^iijk'n roctben Scimmer, 
 
 grazing at my feet, and I be- unb burd) ben fernen £8alb brcs 
 
 hold the last rays of the set- d)en fid) bte (c|tcn (Straftten bcr 
 
 ting sun breaking through the ftnfrmbcn ©onnc. 
 deep foliage of the distant 
 wood. 
 
 2d, The present tense is employed for the future, 
 when that time is indicated by another word in th6 
 sentence. Ex. 
 
 We leave to-morrow for Berlin, Bergen tetfen rotr nacb SBcrfin ; in 
 but 1 shall be back within a acpt Sagcn femme tcb after rmebet, 
 week, and I shall then cer- unb bann bcfud)C tcb £>td) gettHp 
 tainly comi< to see you. (for roerben nrir retfen, rocrbe td) 
 
 wteberfemmen, &c). 
 
343 
 
 £ shall be back in a moment. 3d) fommc ajctcr; ttricbcr. 
 
 We scale the castle this very £)tefcs <3d)top crfrctgcn rmr in fctcfct 
 
 night. 9?ad)t 
 
 £ ha\re the keys, we kill £)ct <Sd)(uffd bin id) mad)tig ; 
 
 itnr crmorbcn 
 The guards, and deliver thee £)te £utcr, reipen Did) auS £>ctnet 
 from thy prison. jammer. 
 
 (<S d) i C 1 c r 1 $ SDtaria (Stuart). 
 
 1st, The imperfect has already been touched upon 
 In Lesson LVIL It is the historical tense of the Ger- 
 mans. Ex. 
 
 £ ipio Africamis was in the ha- ©ctpw, bcr 2Cfrtfancr, fagtc / cr wan 
 
 bit of saying, he never was ntc nxntgcr o!)nc 23cfd)dfttgunA/ 
 
 less idle than when he had alS rccnn cr tudjtS gu tfyun r)atte» 
 
 nothing to do ; and in fact his SSHtfttcl). war cr aud) ntc mcbr bez 
 
 busiest time was that which fd)a'frtgt, al$ in ber (Stnfamfett ; 
 
 he spent in solitude. For it bcnn i)tcr faun cr fetncn n>td)ttgen 
 
 was there he meditated over llntctncfjunmgcn tint) (Scfcbaftcn 
 
 his great enterprises and his nacb ; btcr, tin <2>d)0fje tec Stubc, 
 
 future deeds. In the bosom cnttvarf cr !>p{anc gum 9Bcr)l fctncs 
 
 of retirement, he traced plans 23atcr{anbc£, unb bier, entfernt 
 
 for the happiness of his coun- wn tern $rotfc fetner 20Htbura,cr, 
 
 try ; and there, far from the unterrjtctt cr fid) ctngtg unb alictn 
 
 intercourse of his fellow-citi- intt bem ®{Mc berfctben. 
 zens, he devoted his thoughts 
 to the promotion of their wel- 
 fare. 
 
 2d, Tt is used to narrate an action or event of which 
 the narrator was an eye-witness, or to express an ac- 
 tion in reference to another which was either simulta- 
 neous with, or antecedent to it (Lesson LVIL). 
 
 Yesterday a child was drowned, dkjrcrn crtranf cm £inb, cd$ id) auf 
 
 while I was on the bridge. ber 23rucfc (rant). 
 
 He granted my request because @c gcrearjrtc metric $8tttc, nxtl cr jk 
 
 he found it just. gcrccbt fanb. 
 
 I was playing with my pupil, Set) fpicttc nut mcincm 3b'9ftna,c, ate 
 
 when the news was brought man ir.tr tm 9?ad)rtd)t bracb,tc. 
 
 to me. 
 
 1st, The perfect tense is used to express an action 
 or event as perfectly ended without any reference to 
 another circumstance, and when the narrator was not 
 
 an eye-witness of it. Ex. 
 
344 
 
 Were you yesterday at the con- (Stnb Cte geftern tm Concert gerw» 
 
 cert ? rcefen ? 
 
 Has the army been beaten 1 3ft bte 2(rmce Qefcfyacjen tvorben ? 
 
 Has anybody been drowned ? 3ft Semcmb crtrunfcn ? 
 Were you ever in Vienna ] ©tnb <Ste i« in SBtcn gcroefcn ? 
 
 2d, The imperfect may even be used when the nar- 
 rator has not witnessed the event ; but then he must 
 take care to add to his narrative a phrase like . fagte 
 tx f he said ; fagt man, it is said, &c. Ex. 
 
 They say, that day before yester- SSergeftetn, fa gt m a n, roar em 
 day there was a great feast in Qtojk'S gejt in bev Stabt. 
 the town. 
 
 They say there was a battle on £)en fttnf unb grocmjigften ttcrtgen 
 the 25th of last month. SWenats, Fjctjft e£, pel cine @d)(act)t 
 
 w*. 
 
 Obs. D. We have already seen (Lesson XXXIV.) 
 that we cannot say with the English, I am writing, I 
 do write, both of which must be expressed by the only 
 present id) ffixeibe, I write ; nor, I was writing, I did 
 write, both of which must be expressed by the only 
 imperfect id) fcfyrief), I wrote (Lesson LVIL). Expres- 
 sions such as the following : When you come to learn, 
 he is to write, to go, I am to have it, fyc, cannot be 
 translated literally in German. In such cases we use 
 the future when mere futurity, and the verb fottett when 
 necessity or a wish is to be expressed. Ex. 
 
 When you come to learn French. SScmn (Sic fran$|ifd) ternen roetben. 
 
 He is to write. <St ruirt) febretben. 
 
 Am I to go thither 1 ©ell td> fyingefyen ? 
 
 He is to go thither. (St fell ()tnqef)en. 
 
 Am I to have this book? ©ell id) btefeS 33nd) fya&en? 
 
 Am I to give you a pen 1 ©ell id) Sbnen cine geber gefcen? 
 
 I was to speak for them all. 3d) fellte file 2Clle fprccfyen. 
 
 He was to arrive on the 20th. (St fellte ben $rc>an$i$ftcn anfommen* 
 
 Obs. E. At the end of a phrase we sometimes omit 
 the auxiliary of the perfect and pluperfect tenses, when 
 the phrase that follows it begins with another auxi- 
 liary. Ex. 
 
Th'jugh 1 have never been in 
 Paris, I am nevertheless ac- 
 quainted with all that is 
 going on there. 
 
 345 
 
 "£>& tcfy gtetd) me gu $)an$ geroefett 
 Inn, bin id) tod) sen allcm un* 
 temd)tet, roaS fcafelbjl tJorgefjt ; 
 or, 
 £)b id) gfctch niemate $u $art$ geroes 
 fen, fo bin id) ted) sen allem un? 
 terrtcfetet, n>a$ t>afe(bft »ergef)t. 
 A.s he did not answer me, I wrote ^)a er mir nid)t gcantmcrtet (hat), 
 to him no more. IjaU id) tf)m mci)t mef)r gefefyrtes 
 
 ben* 
 The enemy having been beaten, 9?ad)tem bet $etnt gefefyfagen root* 
 it is to be hoped that the war ten (tft), if? $u fyoffen, tap tec 
 will be at an end. jtrieg geenttgt fein rettt. 
 
 exercises. 238. 
 
 Have you seen your niece] — Yes, she is a very ^flod girl *vho 
 vrites well and speaks German still better : therefore she is hon- 
 oured and loved by every one. — And her brother, what is he doing 1 
 —Do not speak to me of him, he is a naughty (bofe) boy, who 
 writes always badly and speaks German still worse: he is there- 
 fore loved by nobody. He is very fond of dainties (tcr cuite $tffen) ; 
 but he does not like books. Sometimes he goes to bed at broad 
 day-light (bet ()eltem So$e), and pretends to be ill ; but when we sit 
 down to dinner, he is generally better again. He is to study 
 physic (tie 2Crgnct6unft) ; but he has not the slightest inclination for 
 it (gar fctne £ufr ta$u). — He is almost always talking of his dogs 
 which he loves passionately (lettenfd)aft(id)). — His father is ex- 
 tremely (mificrerbentttcb) sorry for it. The young simpleton (tec 
 83(6tftnntge) said lately to his sister: " I shall enlist (Soltat wets 
 ben* oter fid) anroerben laffen*) as soon as peace is proclaimed (tff* 
 fentltd) befannt macben oter publtciten). 
 
 •239. 
 
 My dear father and my dear mother dined yesterday with some 
 friends at (in dat.) the (hotel) King of Spain (son ©pantcn). — Why 
 do you always speak French and never German 1 — Because I am too 
 bashful. — You are joking; is a Frenchman ever bashful] — I have 
 (a) keen appetite : give me something good to eat. — Have you any 
 money 1 — No, sir. — Then I have nothing to eat for you. — Will you 
 not let me have some on credit ] I pledge (oerpfanten) my honour. 
 — That is too little.— What, sir ! 
 
 My dear friend, lend me a ducat (ter Ducat, gen. cn).« — Here are 
 two instead of one. — How much I am obliged to you ! — T am al- 
 ways glad when I see you, and I find my happiness in yours. — Is 
 this house to be sold 1 — Do you wish to buy it] — Why not? — Why 
 does your sister not speak ] — She would speak if she were not al- 
 ways so absent ($erjtrcnt). — I like pretty anecdotes (tie 2Cnectote) ; 
 they season (roiiqen) conversation (tie Unterha(tung) and amuse (be* 
 15* 
 
346 
 
 lufttgen) every body. — Pray, relate me seme. Look, if you please, 
 at page 389 of the book (in bem 93ud)0 which I lent you, and (fo) 
 you will find some. — To-morrow I shall set out for Hanau ; but in 
 a fortnight (in tuer$el)n Sacjcn) I shall be back again, and- then 1 
 shall come to see you and your family. — Where is your sister at 
 present ? — She is in Berlin, and my brother is in Leipzic. — This 
 little woman is said to be going to marry the counseller N., your 
 friend; is it true] — I have not heard of it. — What news is there 
 of our great army ] — It is said to be lying (ftcljcn*) between the 
 Rhine and the Weser. All that the courier told me seeming very 
 probable (mctl)tfd)cinlid)), I went home immediately, wrote some 
 letters, and departed for Paris. (See end of Lesson XXXIV ) 
 
 HUNDRED AND FIRST LESSON.- 
 
 Cection. 
 
 -tyunbztt nrib m&m 
 
 To begin to laugh, to weep, to 
 cry, &c. 
 
 To pledge. 
 To pawn. 
 
 To destroy by fire and sword. 
 
 To look out of the window. 
 
 I do not know whether this so- 
 ciety will admit me. 
 
 After ten o'clock you will not 
 find me at home. 
 
 The weather is clearing up. 
 
 My hand is asleep. 
 
 To smell of garlick. 
 
 To smell of wine. 
 
 The sermon is over. 
 
 That is the question. 
 
 He has nearly fallen. 
 
 I did not find a living soul 
 
 2Cnfangcn $u lacfycn, $u mcincn, $u 
 
 fcftrcten u. f. n% 
 aScrpfffttfcetu 
 93ctfeg«n. 
 
 93?tt Jeuer unt> @d)n>ett wtfyecren. 
 2Cu$ t>em Jenfter fefjen*. 
 3d) roafi md)t, cb btcfe ®efellftf)aft 
 
 mid) mitb fyaben rvctlcn. 
 f 9lad) ^cr)n Ufjr treflren <Bk mid) 
 
 nid)t mci)V ^u £aufe. 
 3>c$ better fn'ttett fid) ouf. 
 t Sflcinc £anb ift etncjefcfylafen. 
 hlad) ^nob(aud) tiecfyen*. 
 $lad) SGScin riectjen*. 
 JDte 9)reMgt ift au& 
 (S£ ift tic gragc (eS femmt barauf 
 
 an), 
 f (St mare bcinabe cjefallen. 
 3d) r)abc fcinc lebenbtge <Sec(c angc* 
 
 troffen. 
 
 To meet with. 2Cntteffen* (Part, past, getrofc 
 
 fen, Imperf. traf). 
 
 You have the wrong key. (Sic baOen t>cn unrecbten (Scfytiffel. 
 
 He is now on the road. ($r ift je|t auf bem 2Begc. 
 
 Give me a clean plate, if you ©eben ©ic nut cjcfadicjft etnen veu 
 please. nen Seller. 
 
347 
 
 VARIOUS WAYS OF TRANSIATING THE VERB, 'i PUT. 
 
 To put one's hand into one's 3n fete Safdf>e 3 ret fen*. 
 
 pocket. 
 To put one's son to school. ©cinen ©cfyn in t)te (Scfyute t f) u tt* 
 
 (6 1 i n 3 e n *). 
 To put one out to prenticeship Semcmfeen in fete Cefyce t^un*. 
 
 (to bind one prentice). 
 To put to account. 3n 9^ed)nung 3 i e I) e n *• 
 
 To put to flight. 3n feie g(ud)t } a g c n (ofeer fd^ta? 
 
 gen*). 
 To put one's hat on. €>etncn £ut auffegen* 
 
 To jow^ an end. (Sin (Snfec m a d) e n. 
 
 VARIOUS WAYS OF TRANSLATING THE VERB, TO SET. 
 
 To set pen on paper (to take the Die gefeer etgreifen*. 
 
 pen in hand). 
 
 To set sail. Unlet (Se$e( 9 c F) e n * (a ft f e 9 e ( n> 
 
 To se£ in order (to regulate, 3n £)tfenun$ b r i n 3 e n *. 
 
 settle). 
 
 To set something on fire. (StnxtS a n 3 ti n fe e n (a n ft e cf e n), 
 
 To set to work. ©id) an fete 2(rbeit m a d) e n. 
 
 IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS DEPENDING 
 
 1st, On the use or omission of an article. 
 
 £ have read Schiller. 3d) fja&c fe e n filler §e(efen. 
 
 He broke his neck. (5t (jat fe c n Spalt gebrecrjen. 
 
 Nature is the best instructress. £) i e 0Jatut iji fete befte £cf)retinn. 
 
 Man is mortal. £> e r 9#cnfd) if! fterMtd). 
 
 Human life is short. 2) a g nienfd)Ud)e Seben tft £ut$. 
 
 Vice plunges its followers into £) a $ Rafter ftuqt feine 2(n ganger 
 
 perdition. tn$ QSerfeerben. 
 
 E^quence is powerful. £) i c SSerefetfamfrit ift madjttg. 
 
 Poetry is enchanting. £) i e £)td)tfunft ift k$aubetnfe* 
 
 Government. £>te ^Ke^tetung. 
 
 History teaches us experience. D i e ®efd)td)te (el)rt un$ (Srfafytung 
 
 Saint Paul. £) e r fyeittgc $pautu$. 
 
 Most of his contemporaries. 2) i e meiftcn feiner 3ettgencffen. 
 
 In town. 3n feer.^tafet. 
 
 To go to church. 3n fe t c JUrcfye cjefyen*. 
 
 T/13 East Indies. DfHnfeien. 
 
 Thi West Indies. SBefHnfetcn. 
 
 Before the conclusion of the dra- 5Sor (Snfeicumg fecS @d)aufpte(e$. 
 
 ma. 
 
 2d, On the use of a pronoun. 
 
 I take the liberty of writing to 3$ nefyme m i r feie gtetftett, aft 
 you. <§te $u fd)tei&en. 
 
348 
 
 How goes it? How do you do? 
 
 Very well. 
 
 I have bought a hat. 
 
 Let us go on a party of pleasure. 
 
 He is quite at home. 
 He is very conceited. 
 I have it in my hands. 
 I have it before my eyes. 
 I consent to it, (willingly or with 
 pleasure). 
 
 2Btegef)t'g Sfjnen? 
 
 (5g gcbt mir fcf)t rooty*. 
 
 3d) f}ot>e m i t ctncn £ut gefrmft 
 
 2Btt rceltcn ung focute etn SBergmk 
 
 gen wrfefiaffen. 
 ^r madbt fi cb ' g kquein 
 (St bttfcct fi d) met etn. 
 3d) fyabe eg in £anten. 
 3d) babe eg tjcr 2Cugcru 
 3d) tun e g juftiefcen. 
 
 3d, On the use of a verb. 
 
 Who has said mass to-day 1 
 I am with you in a moment. 
 We shall have a storm. 
 
 How is that 1 
 
 I do not scruple to do it. 
 
 What do you think of it ? 
 They will not dissuade me from 
 
 it. 
 To buy a lottery ticket* 
 To be born* 
 To bring forth* 
 To dowZ>£ (to call in question). 
 To lay the cloth. 
 To se£ down (to compose). 
 
 2$cr F)at Ijeute tie Sfflcffe gelefen? 
 
 3d) f omme gfetd). 
 
 SBtt rocrtcn cm ©enrittet & c F o m - 
 
 men. 
 8£ie g e f) t tag gu ? 
 3d) trage Fein S3etenFen, 
 
 c^ $u tfyun. 
 2&a$ fatten @te tawn ? 
 3d) faffs mir tag md)t augretet*. 
 
 3n tic Sottcttc f e | c tu 
 3ur 2Mt F o m m c n *. 
 3ur SBeft b r t n g c n *. 
 3n 3rc>ctfc( 5 1 c ty c n *. 
 £>en Stfd) tccfen. 
 ©djrtftltd) auffejscn. 
 
 4th, On the use of a preposition. 
 
 How is your health 1 
 
 To land, to go ashore. 
 
 His affairs are in a bad state. 
 
 I bet six crowns. 
 
 I forgive you. 
 
 To esteem one's self happy. 
 
 To make an enemy of some one. 
 
 I fear to be burdensome to you. 
 
 £Btc ftefyt eg u m 3fae ©cfuttbfjeit * 
 
 2C n g Cant treten*. 
 
 <5g ftefyt tibeC m i t tfym aug, 
 
 3d) nxtte u m fcd)g -Sfyater. 
 
 3d) fjatte eg Sbnen 3 u gut* 
 
 (Std) fur gludltd) fatten* 
 
 @td) Scmanfcen gum gctnte mad)Cti, 
 
 3d) fftrcfjtc SDncn gur 2aft gu fallen 
 
 OBSERVE ALSO THE FOLLOWING IDIOMS. 
 
 To prescribe milk-diet. 
 To copy fair. 
 
 Of one's own accord. 
 We shall not live to see it. 
 It is all over with me. 
 
 © i c SHttcfyFur ttetottnen. 
 
 3ng 9?ctne fefactben* (rein a&fcfyrd* 
 
 ben*). 
 2Cug frcten (Stucfen. 
 2Btr roerten eg md)t etfefcen* 
 <Sg ift urn mid) gefefafan* 
 
349 
 
 My head turns round (is giddy). <&$ nntb nut fcfyttrinbltdft. 
 
 I faint. 3d) fccfomme cine Dfjnmacf)!. 
 
 I thought you were a German by 3d) Ijtett (Sic fur cincn QCtwnen 
 
 birth. £)cutfd)cn. 
 
 To live on bad terms with some Unctntg nut Scmanbcm tckn. 
 
 one. 
 
 To follow an unprofitable trade. @td) nut broblofcn jtunftcn a&ge&cn* 
 
 This seems reasonable. £)ct$ (cipt fid) t)5'ten (fdjcint ttetnunfs 
 
 To lose one's reputation. (gctnen guten Seamen Bcrtteren*. 
 
 By means of. sj^tt t c( ft or crmit t ct ft (go- 
 
 vern the genitive). 
 
 He has succeeded by means of SScrmtttcIft 3f)tc$ SSctjtcmbcS ift e$ 
 
 your assistance. tf)tn getunqen. 
 
 We reached the shore by means £Bit famen nuttetft (ttetmttte(ft) ctncS 
 
 of a boat. itafyncS an$ Ufcr. 
 
 Towards (to meet). 6 n t$ C g C n (governs the dative) 
 We went to meet his father. £Btt gtno/n fetnem 93ater entgegen 
 
 Against (in opposition to). 3 U an b e t. 
 Never act against the laws. £anb(c nic ben (Ucfegen jtinribcr. 
 
 Opposite. (3 i Q c n u i> c r. 
 
 My house is opposite his. SBcin #au$ ftcf)t bem fctnigen gecjett* 
 
 iibet. 
 
 O65. The prepositions etttgegen, juttriber, and gegett* 
 fiber are always placed after the case which they 
 govern. 
 
 Next to (after). #1 a cfy ft (governs the dative). 
 
 Next to you I like him )sst. 9?ctd)ft Sljnen ift et nur bet £ict>ftc* 
 
 Together with (besides, inclu- SftcOft, fammt (govern the dative), 
 ding). 
 
 He lost the ducat together with (St ttetlot ben £)ucatcn fammt ben 
 the crowns, sold the garden £t)ctfcrn, sctfaufte ben fatten 
 including the house. nebft bem 6aufe. 
 
 If I were now to question you as £Benn id) ©ie jcgt fragtc, rote id) in 
 I used to do at the beginning unfern etften Cccttonen $u tf)un 
 of our lessons, what would pfU'Qte (rote id) attfotujS gu tfjun 
 you answer? Pf^te), was rcurben <Ste ant? 
 
 wcrten ? 
 
350 
 
 We found these questions at first SBtr fanten anfnng$ tiefe $ta$ett 
 rather ridiculous, but full of etnxis tad)erttd) Tattem t>cll 33er* 
 confidence in your method, we traucn --jf Sfyte Cef)tatt, beants 
 answered as v ell as the small roertcten tt>it ttefe(6en, fo gut e$ 
 • quantity of word sand rules we un$ tet Heine SScrratr) son £Bots 
 then possessed allowed us. tern unt SKecjeln (^principten), ten 
 
 tvir tamalS fatten, cjeftattetc (er« 
 (aubte). 
 
 We were not long in finding out ££it fyakn ftatt gemcrft, tap tie 
 that those questions were cal- $rao,en t>arouf berecfynet nxtren, 
 culated to ground us in the uns turd) tie rciterfprecbenten 
 rules, and to exercise us in 2Cntrcotten, tie rxrir Qcpungen 
 conversation, by the contradic- rcaren, tarauf $u a,cbcn, tic frills 
 tory answers we were obliged cipien ($Kege(n) ein$ufd)arfen unt 
 to make. un$ in tcr ilnterrjaftuno, $u liben. 
 
 We can now almost keep up a 3«ej$t fennen tmr un$ fcetnarje t>oll= 
 conversation in German. f ommen cutf teutfd) (tm iDeutfcfyen) 
 
 untcrfottetu 
 
 This phrase does not seem to us £)iefer ©ag fcfyetnt un$ mcf)t (cgifd) 
 logically correct. rtc^ttcj. 
 
 We should be ungrateful if we ££it roaren imtanftat, roenn nrir 
 allowed such an opportunity cine fo fd)6ne (Sktegcnfyett sorbets 
 to escape without expressing gefyen Itcpcn, obne Sfynen tmfetf 
 our liveliest gratitude to you. tebfyaftefte iDanffcarfctt $u Oe^etgen. 
 
 In all cases, at all events. 2£uf [eten gatl. 
 
 The native, ter (Stngeborne ; 
 
 the insurmountable difficulty, tie unfibernnntltcfjc (Scfyttnetigfctt ; 
 
 this energetic language, tiefe energifebe (Etaftrotle) ©prac^e ; 
 
 the acknowledgment, tie (grfcnnt(icr)6cit ; a 
 
 tire gratitude, the acknowledg- tie SDanf forfeit 
 ment, 
 
 exercises. 240. 
 
 Will you drink a cup of coffee 1 — I thank you, 1 do not like 
 coffee. — Then you will drink a glass of wine ] — I have just drunk 
 some. — Let us take a walk. — Willingly ; but where shall we go 
 to ? — Come with me into my aunt's garden ; we shall there find a 
 very agreeable society. — I believe it (2)as ajattbe id) gern) ; but the 
 question is whether this agreeable society will admit me. — You 
 are welcome every where. — What ails you, my friend ? — How do 
 you like (SBte fdjmecft Sfynen) that wine? — I like it very well (bert* 
 ltd)) ; but I have drunk enough ($ut ©entire otet genua,) of it. — 
 Drink once more. — No, too much is unwholesome (ungefunt) ; I 
 know my constitution (tie 9?atut). — Do not fall. — What is the mat- 
 ter with you ? — I do not know ; but my head is giddy ; I think I 
 am fainting.— I think so also, for you look almost like a dead per- 
 son. — What countryman are you 1 — I am a Frenchman. — You 
 
 a (£rfenntlid)feit is derived from erfemten, to acknowledge. S)anffor*eM 
 expresses both gratitude an 1 acknowledgment. 
 
351 
 
 •peak German so well that I took you for '& German by birth. — Yob 
 are jesting. — Pardon me, I do not jest at all. — How long have you 
 been in Germany ] — A few days. — In earnest] — You doubt it per- 
 haps, because I speak German ; I knew it before I came to Ger- 
 many. — How did you manage to learn it so well ] — I did like the 
 prudent starling (bet ©taor), 
 
 Tell me, why you are always on bad terms with your wife (bte 
 g'rau) 1 and why do you engage in unprofitable trades'? — It costs 
 so much trouble ((£$ feftct fo Mel 93?uljc) to get an employment (lug 
 man ctrt — fcefemmt). — And you have a good one and neglect it (tf 
 f)tntanfe|en ctcr J?crnad)ld'ffiflcn). Do you not think of the future 1 
 — Now allow me to speak also (3cj>t (affen @w mid) aud) ritatj. 
 All you have just said seems reasonable, but it is not my fault (e$ 
 ijt ntd)t nietne (Sdbulb), if I have lost my reputation ; it is that of my 
 wife (nietne -Jrau ijt (Scbulb baton) ; she has sold my finest clothes, 
 my rings, and my gold watch. I am full of debts (t>ett £fd)uft)en 
 fetn*), and I do not know what to do (roa$ id) anfangen cber trjun fell). 
 — I will not excuse (entfcftulbtcjen) your wife ; but I know that you 
 nave also contributed (focttragen*) to your ruin (l>a$ SSerberften). 
 Women are generally good when they are left so. 
 
 241. DIALOGUE. 
 
 The master* If I were now to ask you such questions as 1 did 
 at the beginning of our lessons, (viz.) Have you the hat which 
 my brother has ] am I hungry 1 has he the tree of my brother's 
 garden ] &c. what would you answer 1 
 
 The pupils. We are obliged (cje^nningen) to confess that we 
 found these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of confi- 
 dence in your method, we answered as well as the small quantity 
 of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were in 
 fact not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to 
 ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the 
 contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we 
 can almost keep up a conversation in the energetic language which 
 you teach us, we should answer : It is impossible that we should 
 have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons canno 1 
 have one and the same thing. To (2Cuf with accus.) the second 
 question we should answer, that is impossible for us to know 
 whether you are hungry or not. As to the last, we should say : 
 that there is more than one tree in a garden, and in telling us that 
 he has the tree of the garden, the phrase does not seem to us logi- 
 cally correct. At all events we should be ungrateful if we allowed 
 such an opportunity to escape, without expressing our liveliest 
 gratitude to you for the trouble you have taken in arranging those 
 wise combinations (Huge SS^egc cinfdhtaqcn* cber (Somtunattenen mcu 
 d)en), to ground us almost imperceptibly (bcincifee unmerfttd)) in the 
 rules, and exercise us in the conversation of a language which, 
 taught in any other way, presents (bartueten*) to foreigners, and 
 even to natives, almost insurmountable difficulties. (See end of 
 Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
852 
 
 HUNDRED AND SECOND LESSON.— fitxtibttl ttttb 
 ^tueite faction. 
 
 To avoid death, with which he Um t>cm Sobe $u cntgerjen, t)cr tr)m 
 was threatened, he took to betterftanb (roomtt cr bcbroljct 
 flight. war), nafym (ercjnff) cr bte -gludjt. 
 
 I warrant you (I answer for it), f 3d) jtcfje Sfyuen bafur. 
 
 So goes the world. f (go cjefyt c$ in bcr 2Be(t. 
 
 But must one not be a fool to 2Cbcr mupte man ntd)t cin 9?atr fetn, 
 remain in a place bombarded rcenn man an ctnem t>on Ungarn 
 by Hungarians 1 bombarbtrtcn £)rte btetben roollte ? 
 
 The deuce take the Hungarians f Dag tic Uncjarn, roelcfce tanc 
 who give no quarter ! ©nabc cjcben (nx(d)C gar nid)l 
 
 fdjoncn), betm £cnfet roaren ! 
 
 Will you be my guest 1 SMlen <Ste metn ©aft fctn ? 
 
 Will you dine with me 1 SBollcn <Ste mit mtr cf]Ten ? 
 
 r Semanben gu ©aft bitten*. 
 To invite some one to dinner. < Scmanben gum SMtttageffcn ctnlas 
 
 C ben*. 
 I have ordered your favourite f 3d) f)abe S^e Setbfpetfc $ubcrctten 
 
 dish. laffen. 
 
 There is nothing like a good (Sg cjebt ntd)tS iibcv cin gutc^ Stiicf 
 piece of roast meat. 33raten. 
 
 X 
 
 The roast meat, bcr SBraten, t>a$ ©ebratcne ; 
 
 the guilty, bcr (Sdnilbtge ; 
 
 the innocent, bcr llnfcbulbtge ; 
 
 a good (jovial) companion, cin (ufttCjet 23rubcr ; 
 
 the husband, bcr 93?ann (©fyemann). 
 
 i (Sin en &d an ciner 8ad)e haben* 
 
 To be disgusted with a thing. < (Stner ©acl)C (genitive) tA&tti&ffa 
 
 ( fctn*. 
 
 Who hazards gains. > f grifd) flcrcagt tft fcatb gcrcennen. 
 
 Nothing venture nothing have. J (Sprid)ii;ctf.) 
 
 To strike (in speaking of light- f (Stnfdjtagcn* 
 ning). 
 
 The lightning has struck. f (5$ fyat ctngefd)lagcn. 
 
 The lightning struck the ship, f £)cr 33tt§ febtug tn£ <Sd)tff 
 
 While my brother was on the 2C(6 mem ©ruber auf bet effenen 
 open sea a violent storm rose (See (cber auf bem fyorjen 9}?eere) 
 unexpectedly ; the lightning roar, crrjob ftd) (!am unt?ermutr)Ct) 
 struck the ship which it set ctn fjefttger (Sturm ; ber SBtig 
 on fire, and the whole crew fd)(ug tns <Sd)tff, %a$ cr anjttnbc* 
 jumped into the sea to save tc, unb t>a$ cjan^e @d)tff6t>otf 
 themselves by swimming. fpran^ (ftur^te ftd}) tng Sfteer, um 
 
 ftd) mtt Sd)wtmmen ju rctten. 
 
353 
 
 He was struck with fright, (St routbc ten (Sd)tccfen befallen 
 
 when he saw that the fire (crfd)ta£ ^eftt^), otS et faf), toj 
 
 was gaining- oh all sides. ba$ gtuet ouf alien ©citcn urn 
 
 ftd> griff. 
 
 He did not know what to do. f <gt reupte nicbt, wo$u ct ftcb cnU 
 
 febtiepen [elite. 
 
 TT „ C (St mecbtc nacbftnnen, rote ct rooUte. 
 
 He reflected m yam. £ ffir fann ^^ narf)# 
 
 In vain. SScrgcMirf), setgcbcnS, umfonjt. 
 
 To reflect (to hesitate). (Sid) fteftmten* (Part, past, tu'fons 
 
 ncn). 
 He hesitated no longer. f (St befann fid) ntdt)t tanker. 
 
 I have not heard of him yet. 3d) f)dbc ncd) fetne 5^acr>rtd)t t?en 
 
 tbm ctbatten. 
 My friend who was present told TOcin gtcunb, roelcbet $ugegen wax, 
 me all this. fat nut alleS biefe$ cr^ablt. 
 
 What would have become of ( ££ic ware cS nut etgangen ? 
 me ? ( %£a$ ware au$ mit gercotben ? 
 
 A FEW MORE IDIOMS. 
 
 It is a fortnight (a week) since SStcqebn (acbt) Sage lang bin id) 
 
 I was out. nicbt au£gegangen. 
 
 Will you not go out to-day ? ©tc roctben t)cd) f)cutc au£gcl)cn ? 
 I would not importune you. 3d) null Sfynen nid)t befebroctlid) 
 
 fallen. 
 He has nothing to live upon. (St bat ntcbt* $u leben. 
 I board and lodge him. 3d) Qcbc t()tn fretcn Sifd) unb £Bcb' 
 
 nung. 
 The mystery will be discovered. 3>te (Sacbe tvirt) fdjon an ben Sag 
 
 fommen. 
 They are going to lay the cloth. 50?an rcitb balb ben Sifd) becfen. 
 He lives high (feasts, eats, and (St ipt unb ttinft gut. 
 
 drinks well). 
 Have you done 1 ©tub @te fertig ? 
 
 That is his business. £)a mag et gufeben. 
 
 To do one's best. ©ein 2Ceu(5erfte§ tbun*. 
 
 He has assisted me. (St tft nut $ut £anb gegangen. 
 
 We must not be too particular. SSit nuiffen e$ fo genau nid)t neb* 
 
 men. 
 He is not to be blamed for not (S* tft tbm nicbt 311 ttctbcnftn, ba$ ex 
 
 doing it. eei nicbt tbut. 
 
 The book is out of print ; it was &a* 25 ud) ift ttcrgri^fen ; c$ wax bet 
 
 publised by N, £)?. fertegt. 
 
 Will you please to take a plain Snellen (Sic mit cincm cinfacben 
 
 supper with us ? 2(benbeffen bei un$ furlicb (cbet 
 
 tjorttcb) nebmen ? 
 
354 
 
 The general has been defeated £>et geltfyetr tft aufs £aupt gefd)la» 
 and the army routed. gen imt> tte 2Crmce ufcet ten #au« 
 
 fen geipcrfen tvorten. 
 
 The angel, tet (Snget ; 
 
 the masterpiece, ta$ ^etfterjltic! ; 
 
 her physiognomy, ifyrc ®eftd)t$bUfcung ; 
 
 the expression. ter 2(ustrucf ; 
 
 her shape, tt)rc ©eftott ; 
 
 the action, tie £cmttung ; 
 
 the look, tet "KuUid ; 
 
 the contentment, tie 3ufrietenF)eit ; 
 
 the respect, tie (5l)rfurcf)t ; 
 
 the admiration, tie SBenwnterung; 
 
 the charm, the grace, tic tfnmutl) ; 
 the demeanour, the manners, ta$ SBenefymen ; 
 
 thin (slender), fd)(anf ; 
 
 fascinating (engaging), etnnel)ment ; 
 
 ravish in gly, $um (Sntgticfcn ; 
 
 uncommonly well, gang ttortreff(td) ; 
 
 perfectly well, t>ollfemmcn. 
 Her look inspires respect and 3l)r UnUxd flof't (Sfytfutd)t unt 93e. 
 admiration. rountcrung ein. 
 
 Allow me, my lady, to introduce (Srfaufccn <Sie, gnatige $xau, ta|5 
 to you Mr. G., an old friend id) Sfincn £ettn t>on ®. atg einen 
 of our family. ctlten grcunt metneS £aufe$ t>cr« 
 
 ftette. 
 
 1 am delighted to become ac- 3d) freue mid) fe^r,mctn £ett, Sforc 
 quainted with you. 23e6anntfd)aft 511 macfyen. 
 
 I shall do all in my power tc 3d) roerte atle^ £ftogltd)e tfyun, urn 
 deserve your good opinion. mid) Sfytct ©ercegenfycit rcutttg 
 
 511 mad)en. 
 
 Allow me, ladies, to introduce to (Srfaufccn ©to, metne £)ctmen, tag 
 you Mr. B., whose brother has id) Sfynen ^errn ncn 23. tjerjtcfle, 
 rendered such eminent ser- teffen SBruter S^rem 2Setter fo 
 vices to your cousin. grope Dienfte geletftet t)at. 
 
 How happy we are to see you at £Bte fefyr ftnt rotr ctfreut, &c Wx 
 our house ! unS $u fer)cn ! 
 
 exercises. 242. 
 
 Why do you hide yourself? — I am obliged to hide myself, for it 
 is all over with me if my father hears that I have taken to flight ; but 
 there was no other means (lein entered 9Ktttcl ftfcrtg cter nicbt ontet£ 
 niegtuf) fcin*) to avoid death, with which I was threatened. — You 
 nave been very wrong in leaving (tJerlnffen*) your regiment, and 
 your father will be very angry (fef)t bofc cter ^erntg fcin*) when he 
 hears of it, I warrant you. — But must one not be a foo- to remain 
 in a place bombarded by Hungarians ] — The deuce take the Hun- 
 garians, who give no quarter ! — They have beaten and robbed (aufa 
 fcUmtcrn) ine, and (never) in my life have I done them any harm. • 
 
355 
 
 So goes the world, the innocent very often suffer for the guiity.-- > 
 Did you know Mr. Zweifel ] — I did know him, for lie often worked 
 for our house. — One of my friends has just told me that he has 
 drowned himself, and that his wife has blown out her brains with 
 a pistol (Lesson XCV.). — I can hardly believe it; for the man 
 whom you are speaking of was always a jovial companion, and 
 good companions do not drawn themselves. — His wife is even said 
 to have written on the table before she killed herself: " Who haz- 
 ards gains ; I have nothing more to lose, having lost my good hus- 
 band. I am disgusted with this world, where there is nothing 
 constant (Ocjlanbtg) except (at*) inconstancy (Me Unbeftantuc^ett)." 
 
 243. 
 
 Will you be my guest ] — I thank you ; a friend of mine has in- 
 vited me to dinner : he has ordered my favourite dish.— What dish 
 is it] — It is milk-food. — As for me (;33}a$ mid) anMangt), I do not 
 like milk-food : there is nothing like a good piece of roast beef or 
 veal (liKinC^ etwr jlatbebratcn). — What has become of your young- 
 est brother ] — He has suffered shipwreck in going to America. — 
 You must give me an account of that ((Sqdfyten ©te nut fced)t>a£). — 
 Very willingly. Being on the open sea, a great storm arose. The 
 lightning struck the ship and set it on fire. The crew jumped into 
 the sea to save themselves by swimming. My brother knew not 
 what to do, having never learnt to swim. He reflected in vain ; 
 he fou.,d no means to save his life. He was struck with fright 
 when he saw that the fire was gaining on all sides. He hesitated 
 no longer, and jumped into the sea. — W T ell (iflim), what has be- 
 come of him ] — I do not know, having not heard of him yet. — But 
 who told you all that ] — My nephew, who was there, and who saved 
 himself. — As you are talking of your nephew (£>a <Ste Qerafce oca 
 Sfyrcm Stfcffen fprcd)en), where is he at present] — He is in Italy. — 
 Is it long since you heard from him 1 — I have received a letter from 
 him to-day. — What does he write to you ] — He writes to me that 
 he is going to marry a young woman who brings (^ubrtncjen*) him 
 a hundred thousand crowns. — Is she handsome] — Handsome as 
 an angel ; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiognomy is 
 mild and full of expression ; her eyes are the finest in (pen) the 
 world, and her mouth is charming (allerttebft). She is neither too 
 tall nor too short : her shape is slender ; ail her actions are full of 
 grace, and her manners very engaging. Her look inspires respect 
 and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit (Oct &>erftcmt>) ; 
 she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings 
 ravishingly. My nephew finds in her but one defect (fcet Jchfer). — 
 And what is that defect] — She is affected (mad)t 2Cnfpruchc). — There 
 is nothing perfect in the world. How happy you are (SSk qlucHtcfy 
 finb (Sic) ! you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a 
 fine house, and all you wish (for). — Not all, my friend. —What do 
 you desire more ] — Contentment ; for you know that he only is 
 happy who is contented. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 
 
356 
 
 HUNDRED AND THIRD LESSON. — tyntibctt XM6 
 britte Section. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS ON GERMAN CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 The fundamental principle of German construction 
 is this : the word which, after the subject, expresses 
 the principal idea, is always placed after those words 
 which only express accessory ideas. It has the advan 
 tage of attracting and of keeping up and increasing 
 the attention to the end of the phrase. 
 
 The word which least defines the subject is placed 
 at the beginning of the sentence, then come those 
 words which define it in a higher degree, so that the 
 word which most determines the meaning of the 
 phrase is at the end. 
 
 According to this we place the words in the follow- 
 ing order: 
 
 1st, The adverb of negation mcfyt, when it relates 
 to the verb of the subject. Ex. ©em Setter beanttwvtet 
 
 1 
 nteuten SSrtef mtf)t, his father does not answer my letter. 
 
 2d, The other adverbs relating to the verb of the 
 
 1 2 
 subject. Ex. ©te fcfyretben %t)ten SSrtef ntcfyt gut, you do 
 not write your letter well. 
 
 3d, The preposition with the case it governs, or in 
 its stead the adverbs of place : ba, fyter, and their com- 
 pounds : bafyer, baf)ttt, as well as the demonstrative ad 
 verbs compounded of ba and fyter, as: bamtt, battott, 
 
 1 
 fytemn, barauf, baritber, &c. Ex. dv anttoortete ntd)t 
 
 2 3 
 fyofittdf) auf ttteuien SSrtef, he did not answer my letter 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 politely. @r ctntroortete nicfyt fcfynett betremf, he did not 
 answer it quickly. 
 
 Obs. When the verb of the subject has several ca- 
 ses with their prepositions, that which defines it the 
 most exactly follows all the others, the determination 
 of time always preceding that of place. Ex. @r ttat 
 
357 
 
 toegen feitter ttnfcfyulb mit frofylicfyem ©effcfyte fcor bag @ertrf)t 
 (which defines most exactly), on account of his inno- 
 cence he appeared before his judges with a joyful 
 countenance. £er ©efitfyllofe blieb an biefem Stage (time), 
 auf berfcfyonften glur (place), bet alter Scfjonljeit ber reijen* 
 ben 9iatur (place) bennorf) ofyne alle (Smpftnbung (which de- 
 fines most exactly), the insensible man, remained on 
 that day without the least emotion, though in the most 
 beautiful field and surrounded by all the beauty of 
 charming nature. 1 
 
 4th, The predicate of the subject. Ex. 3d) bin nicfyt 
 
 2 3 4 
 
 tmmer mit feiner Slnttoort gufrieben, I am not always 
 satisfied with his answer. 
 
 5th, The separable particles of compound verbs, as 
 well as all those words which are considered as separ- 
 able particles, inasmuch as they complete the sense of 
 the verb (Obs. A, Lesson LXVIL), as: au^wenbtg 
 femen, to learn by heart: in Sid) t .nefymen*, to take 
 care ; ju 9Diittag effeu*, to dine, &c. Ex. 2Barum gin; 
 
 12 3 5 
 
 er ntcfyt offer mit Sbtten gu$ ? why did he not go out witi 
 you oftener ? 
 
 6th, The verb in the infinitive. Ex. (gr fann %i)Xim 
 12 2 3 6 
 
 tudjt immer fcfynelt auf S^reit SSrtef antnwten, he cannot 
 always answer your letter quickly. 
 
 7th, The past participle or the infinitive, when th3j 
 form with the auxiliary a compound tense of the verb. 
 
 12 2 3 7 
 
 Ex. (£r i)at mix nicfyt immer fyoflid) barauf geautwortet, he 
 has not always answered it politelv. @r tt>irb S^nett 
 
 12 2 3 7 
 
 nicfyt immer fo fyoflid) auf %l)xen SSrief antroorten. 
 
 * # # These remarks apply to the natural order of 
 ideas; but the German language is so much subject to 
 inversions, that we must sometimes deviate from them, 
 according to the stress which we wish to put on cer- 
 tain words, or the strength and importance we wish 
 to give them in the sentence. See the following 
 
358 
 
 RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES OF SYNTAX 
 OR CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 1st, When the adjective which precedes the noun 
 is accompanied by some words that relate to, or define 
 it, they are placed immediately before it. Ex. (£m? 
 gegen Seberntann fyofltdje $vau, a woman polite towards 
 everybody. 3fyr ©te fyerjttd) Kebenbeg $tnb, your child 
 that loves you from all his heart. (Lesson XCIII.) 
 
 2d, Personal pronouns, when not in the nomina 
 tive, as well as reflexive pronouns (Lesson LXX ) are 
 placed after the verb. Ex. 3d) liebe £trf), I love thee. 
 @r ftebt mid), he loves me. 3d) nmnfdje Sfynen etttett guten 
 99?orgett, I wish you a good morning. SD?eine ©d)tt>efler 
 6eftnbet jTd) ti)of)f, my sister is well. 
 
 Obs. A. When the accusative is a personal pro- 
 noun, it precedes the dative, if not, it follows it. Ex. 
 ©eben ©ie metnem 33 r u b e r i>a$ S3 ud) ? do you 
 give the book to my brother ? 3d) gebe eg t f) m, I do 
 give it to him. Wladjen ©ie3fyrer$rcm ©emafylum ntetne 
 Smpfefyhmg, present my compliments to your lady. 3d) 
 gab e$ bem 93ater, I gave it to the father. (Lesson 
 XXVIII.) But if we wish to put a particular stress on 
 the dative, we must put it after the accusative. Ex. 
 & er gdfylte bie gem ge ©efd)id)te fetner grau, he told his wife 
 the whole history. Here the whole strength of the 
 sentence falls on the words fetner §rau* 
 
 Obs. B. When the case of the verb is a genitive 
 it is always preceded by the accusative, whether a per- 
 sonal pronoun or not. Ex. 3d) fcerjTcfyere ©ie metttet 
 §od)ad)tung, I assure you of my esteem. 9D?cm fyat ben 
 ©efangenen beg 23erbred)en3 itberwtefen, the prisoner has 
 been convicted of the crime. (Lesson LXIV.) 
 
 3d, The infinitive and past participle are always 
 preceded by their cases, or in other words, the infini- 
 tive and past participle always stand at the end of the 
 sentence. Ex. 3d) tt>erbe morgen aufS Scmb gefyen, I shall 
 go into the country to-morrow. @r tfi geflew bafyin ge* 
 gattgen, he went thither yesterday. 3d) tt>erbe Sfynen tae 
 93ud) gebett, I shall give you the book: <gr fyat eg mtr ge* 
 fa$t, he has told it to me. (Lessons XXIV. and XLII.) 
 
359 
 
 Obs. A. When two or several infinitives, two past 
 participles, or a past participle and an infinitive de- 
 pend on each other, the first in English becomes the 
 
 1 , 2 
 last in German. Ex. ©te fomtett tfyh fprecfyett fyoren, you 
 
 2 1 12 
 
 may hear him speak ; id) tt>erbe fyeute nid)t fyct$teren getjett 
 
 3 3 2 1 
 
 fomtett, I shall not be able to go a walking to-day ; feitt 
 
 12 2 1 
 
 £cw£ ift fcerfcmft ttJOtbett, his house has been sold. 
 (Lesson LXXI.) 
 
 Obs. B. The two infinitives or participles, &c, not 
 depending on each other, follow the English construc- 
 
 1 2 
 
 tion. Ex. Wlaxt tmt$ ©ott Itefcen tmb fcetefyrett, we must 
 
 1 2 
 
 love and honour God ; ffe ttrirb geliebt Uttb gefobt, she is 
 
 1 2 
 
 loved and praised. (Lesson LXXI.) 
 
 4th, The verb of the subject (in compound tenses 
 the auxiliary) is removed to the end when the phrase 
 begins, (a) with a conjunction, as : al§, ba, ob, ba$, 
 VDeil, tt)emt r a &c. (b) with a relative pronoun, as : ber, 
 IDetdfjer, tt)er r meaning he who, and xva$, that which ; (c) 
 after the relative adverb, *tt>0, and all the prepositions 
 combined with it, as : ttwbttrd), ttJOtllit, toofcott, &c. Ex. 
 Site td) fte juttt erftett 9Q?ate faf), when I saw her for the 
 first time. 3d) nmttfcfyte, ba# er imtgittge, I wish he would 
 go with us. @r liebt ©ie tticfyt, n>etl ©ie ifytt beleibigt f)a* 
 ben, he does not love you, because you have offended 
 him. SfBarten ©te, big id) mem @e(b befotitnte, wait till I 
 receive my money. 2Betttt tcf) eg gettm^t tyattt, had I 
 known that. ?efett ©te ba$ SBncf) / tt>ekf)e3 id) Sbtten gefte* 
 l)ett f)abe? do you read the book which I have lent 
 you ? SBtflen ©ie tticfyt, n>o er gewefett tfi ? do you not 
 know where he has been ? $6ttltett ©ie ntir ltid)t fagett, 
 toa$ attg il)tit gett)orben xfl ? can you not tell me what 
 
 a For conjunctions which do net remove the. verb to the end of the phnuM 
 •ec Lesson LXI. 
 
360 
 
 has become of him ? 25ag ift eg ebeit, tooburd) er emeu 
 fo groften ©djaben erlitten t)at, n>ot)on er ffcf) fcl>n>erlxct) ttneber 
 erbolen ttnrb, it is precisely that, by which he has sus- 
 tained such a loss, as he will find it difficult to recover 
 from. (Lesson XLVIL) 
 
 Obs. A. When a proposition in which the verb is 
 required at the end of the sentence, contains one of 
 the auxiliaries fein and tt>erbett, or one of the verbs 
 biirfen, fomtett, lajfen, ntitflen, fotten, tt>often, joined to an 
 infinitive, these take their place immediately after the 
 infinitive. Ex. 2Bemt ©ie bag *Pferb faufen ttotfen, if you 
 wish to buy the horse. (Lesson LXIX.) But when 
 not governed by a conjunctive word, they stand before 
 the infinitive and its case. Ex. SOBoften ©te bag *Pferb 
 faufen ? Do you wish to buy the horse ? 
 
 Obs. B. Incidental or explanatory propositions are 
 placed immediately after the word which they define, 
 or at the end of the principal proposition. Ex. (£g ift 
 fd)tt>er, emen $etnb, welcfyer nxtcfyfam ift, ju iiberfaHen, or : 
 eg tfl fdf)tt>er, etnen getnb $u itberfatfen, tt>eld)er tt>ad)fam ift, 
 (Lesson LX.) 
 
 Obs. C. When there are at the end of a sentence 
 two infinitives, two past participles, or an infinitive 
 and a past participle, the verb which the conjunction 
 requires at the end, may stand either before or after 
 them. Ex. 28emt ©ie Sfyre Section n>erben ftabixt fyaben, 
 or: ftubixt tyahen werben, fo werbe id) Sfytten fagen, wag ©ie 
 jit tijlin fyaben, when you have studied your lesson, I 
 shall tell you what you have to do. (Lesson LXXXII.) 
 
 ON THE TRANSPOSITION OF THE SUBJECT AFTER ITS VERB. 
 
 5th, Whenever a sentence begins with any other 
 word than the subject or nominative, its order is in- 
 verted, and in all inversions the subject stands after 
 the verb in simple, and after the auxiliary in compound 
 tenses (Lesson LVIIL). From this rule must be ex- 
 cepted conjunctive words which serve to unite senten- 
 ces. They leave the subject in its place and remove 
 the verb to the end of the sentence (Lesson XI/VTL 
 and Rule 4th above). 
 
361 
 
 A German sentence may begin with an adverb, a 
 preposition and its case, a case, an adjective, a parti- 
 ciple or an infinitive. Ex. Qmte g e b e id) md)t a\x8 f 
 I do not go out to-day ; morgen tt> e r b e id) ©ie befudjett, 
 to-morrow I. shall come to see you ; tm Slttfattge fcfyuf 
 ©ott Qimmel imb (Srbe, in the beginning God made 
 heaven and earth. S3 on feitten $itt bern fprarf) 
 e r, he spoke of his children. S3ei Sfyttett f) a b e i cf) 
 mem 33ud) ttergeflfen, I forgot my book at your house. £>ett 
 SEftettfdjett madjt fein 2Biffe gro$ unb ftettt (©d)iKer),his will 
 makes a man great and little. 9?eid) ift er md)t, aber 
 gefebrt, he is not rich, but learned, ©ettebt tt)irb er ttidjt 
 aber gefiircfytet, he is not loved, but feared. ©cftaben famt 
 3cber, aber nfifcen fann ttur ber SGeife itnb ©ute, any man 
 can do injury, but the wise and good only can be use- 
 ful. (Lessoii LVIII.) 
 
 6th, The subject is placed after the verb in an in- 
 version of propositions, that is, when that which ought 
 to stand first, is placed after, and forms, as it were, 
 the complement of the other. In other words : the 
 subject is placed after its verb in the second membe? 
 of a compound phrase (Lesson LXXVIL). An inver- 
 sion of propositions takes place, when the first propo- 
 sition begins with a conjunction. Ex. 35ct# er ©ie fiebt, 
 toei$ id) (for: id) mi$, ba$ er ©ie licit), I know that 
 he loves you. %e flei$iger cin ©cfyufer ijl, bejlo frfmeflere 
 $ortfd)ritte ttt a rf) t e r, the more studious a pupil is, the 
 more progress he makes. SfBetttt id) reid) toixve, fo if atte 
 I cf) $remtbe ; I should have friends, if I were rich. 3la<f)' 
 beiK mir bit ©tabt fcertafien fyattm, jog ber $ e i tt b in 
 biefelbe extt, when we had left the town, the enemy en- 
 tered it (Lesson LXXXL). 
 
 Obs. In transposing the phrase there is no inversion 
 of propositions. Ex. £)er $emb jog in bie ©tabt eitt, 
 Itacfybent tt)ir biefefbe fc>er(afiett fatten, the enemy entered 
 the town, after we had left it (Lesson LXXVIL). 
 
 7th, The subject also follows its verb, when in an 
 
 inversion of propositions, the conjunction tt) e tt tt is left 
 
 out in the first. Ex. 3(1 bag SBetter giutjtfg (for. 
 
 fcetttt bag ^Better gunjlig ijt), fo werbe id) biefe D?eife in acfcl 
 
 16 
 
362 
 
 £agett mttreten, if the weather is favourable I shall *et 
 out in a weeK (Lesson LXXXL). 
 
 The same is the case with the conjunctioi ob, 
 whether. Ex. 3d) n>eifji nicfyt, frf) 1 af e obertt>ad)t id) 
 (for: ob id) fdjfafe ober tixtdje), I do not know whether I 
 am asleep or awake ; and all compound conjunctions, 
 such as : obgfeid), obfdjott, tt>etttt gfeid), tt)emt fd)on, though. 
 Ex. Sin i d) gfeid) (fcfyon) nid)t retd) (for : ob or meitn id} 
 gteid) nid)t reid) bin), fo hin id) bod) jufrieben, though I am 
 not rich, I am nevertheless contented. 
 
 Obs. Adverbs of comparison, such as : ttne, as ; gleid)* 
 tt>ie, the same as ; nid)t rntr — fonbem and), not only — but 
 also, &c, make the nominative of the second member 
 go after the verb, but not that of the first (this ob- 
 servation is included in Rule 6. above). Ex. Sffite (or 
 gteicfyttne) bag 9D?eer fcom SOBinbe bett>egt tt>irb, atfo tt) i r b 
 e i n Wt a tt tt t>ott feittett getbettfdjaftert bett>egt, as the sea 
 is agitated by the winds, so a man is agitated by his 
 passions. 
 
 8th, Some conjunctions, when beginning a sentence, 
 make the nominative go after its verb, as : bod), how- 
 ever ; bertttod), nevertheless ; g(eid)tt>oM, notwithstand- 
 ing ; beflen tmgead)tet, for all that ; vfafyii befto wemger, 
 nevertheless ; fyittgegett, im ©egetttfyeif, on the contrary. 
 (This rule is included in Rule 5.) Ex. Seffett uttgead)* 
 tet f) a b e tt © i e ttiemate meitten SGuttfd) erfitttett Gotten, 
 for all that you were never willing to accomplish my 
 desire ; bod) frf) r i eb e r, er fonnte md)t fomtttett, however 
 he wrote that he could not come. 
 
 9th, The subject follows its verb when the phrase is 
 interrogative or ejaculatory. Ex. 2 e r tt e n 3 f) r e 
 jperren 23 r it b e r beurfd) ? do your brothers learn 
 German? 2Bte gttttffid) fittb ©ie! or SGBie finb ©if 
 fo glMItd) ! how happy you are ! (Lesson XXXII. and 
 LXXXVIII.) 
 
 Obs. When the subject is a personal or an interro- 
 gative pronoun, the construction of the interrogative 
 sentence is the same as in English. Ex. 3ft er Jtt 
 ijaufe ? is he at home ? ©ittb Sfyre ftxautein ©cfyroefiem 
 in bem ©artett ? are your sisters in the garden ? SGBer 
 tftba? who is there? 2Ba$ babett ©ie getfyan? what 
 
363 
 
 nave you done ? SKMcfyer Sinabe §at btefe SSikfyet- gefcmft, 
 «nb tt>em fyat er fTe fcerefyrt ? which boy has bought those 
 books, and to whom has he given them ? 5Bct£ fitr ei* 
 (ten SBagen fraben ©ie gefauft ? what carriage have you 
 bought ? 
 
 10th, The subject not only stands after the verb, but 
 also after all the words relating to it, when the sen- 
 tence begins with the indefinite pronoun e£* Ex. (£$ 
 Ief)rt Mt£ bte (Srfafyruttg, experience teaches us. 
 &$ ift md)t affe £age eute fo gute ©elegenfyett, there is not 
 every day such good opportunity. 
 
 11th, In inversions where the subject stands after 
 its verb, it may take its place either after or before 
 the other cases, if they are personal pronouns, and if 
 the subject is a substantive. Ex. fteute gtbt mem ?et)rer 
 mtr em SSucf), or fyeute gt6t nur mem Sebrer em S3ud), to-day 
 my master will give me a book, ©efterrt gab mem ?et)* 
 rer e3 mtr, or geftem Qab e3 mtr mem ?ef)rcr, my master 
 gave it to me yesterday. ©6 er gletd) gcmj entfteftt nxtr, 
 erfannte xf>n bod) fern ©ofyn, or erfannte fern ©ofyn it>n bodj, 
 though he was quite disfigured, nevertheless his son 
 recognized him. 
 
 12th, But if the subject is likewise a personal pro- 
 noun, or if the other cases are substantives, it must 
 precede. Ex. ©ejlew gab er e£ mtr (not eg mtr er), yes- 
 terday he gave it to me. £)af)er ftebt ber ©cfyttfer ben ?efy* 
 rer (not Itebt ben ?efyrer ber ©emitter), therefore the pupil 
 loves his master. £>efien nngeacfytet erfannte ber ©ofyn ben 
 SSater (not ben SCater ber ©ofyn), nevertheless the son re- 
 cognised his father. 
 
 EXERCISES. 244. 
 
 A stranger having sold some false jewels (ber falfc&e (Sbelftetn) to 
 a Roman empress (bte romtfefye $aiferinn), she asked (forbcrn con) 
 her husband (to make) a signal example (of him) (btc auffaflenbe 
 vSkuuicjtfyuuna,). The emperor, a most excellent and clement prince 
 (bet ein fcfjr grtabtcjet imb mitbet Jurft war), finding it impossible to 
 pacify (ktufnqen) her, condemned the jeweller to be thrown to the 
 wild beasts Qum jtampfe nut ben nntben Sfyteten). The empress re- 
 solved to be present (3euo,e) with her whole court (ber £cf|laat) at 
 the punishment of the unfortunate man (fetncS SobeS). As he was 
 led into the arena (auf ben Jtampfptag cjefurjrt nmtbc), he expected to 
 die (fief) auf ben Sob gefagt macfyen) ; but instead (jiatt governs the 
 
gemtivo) of a wild beast a lamb ($>a$ £amm) came up to nim and 
 caressed him (tueld)e6 tfym tiebfefete). The empress, furious (d'ujkrjl 
 aufyebracbt) at the deception (fid) $um 23eften gcr)Qttcn au fcbcn), com- 
 plained bitterly of it (fid) bitter befwegen beftagen) to (Oct) the em- 
 peror. He answered : " I punished the criminal (bet s $erbred)et) 
 according (nad)) to the law of retaliation (ba$ ^tebet&ctgdtuna^tecrjt). 
 He deceived (bettitcjen*) you, and he has been deceived in his turn 
 (wiebet)." 
 
 245. 
 
 The bakers of Lyons, having gone to Mr. Dugas (gu Sjemcmbcm 
 Eonmien*), the provost (bet (Stcibtrtd)ter), to ask his permission (3e* 
 manben urn (St(aubni£ bitten*) to raise the price of bread (nut bem 
 *Btebe auf3Ufd)la(}en), he answered that he would take their petition 
 into consideration (er rcolle ben ©ecjenjlanb ibtet JBttte untctfucrjen). 
 As they took leave (nxggerjen*), they contrived to slip (liejjen fie tins 
 bemerft) a purse containing (nut) two hundred Louis d'ors (bet £oui£s 
 b'cr) on the table. — When they returned, in the full conviction (md)t 
 gtueife(n) that the purse had been a powerful advocate in their favour 
 (nnrffam fur einc (Sacfye fprecfyen*), the provost said to them : " Gen- 
 tlemen, 1 have weighed (abroagen) your reasons (bet ®runb) in the 
 scale of justice (Me £BaaJd)a(e bet ©erect) tia^ett), and I have found 
 them wanting (nid)t t>clltr>tcht"tq). I have not thought it expedient 
 (Set) Helt ntcl)t bafur) by a fictitious raising of price (untet etnet un^Ci 
 grtinbeten Sf)eurunq) to make the public (\>a$ tyMitum) suffer : I 
 have, however (libttgens), distributed (t>crtr)ct(cn) your money to (un* 
 tet with accus.) the two hospitals of the town, for I concluded (id) 
 Cj(aubte) you could not intend it for any other purpose (bet ©ebraud)). 
 Meanwhile (3d) fyabe etnejefefyen) as you are able to give such alms 
 (fe(d)e 2ttmefen $u geben), it is evident you are no losers (oerlteten*) 
 oy your tr^de (bat ©eroetbe)." 
 
 246. 
 
 THE PHYSICIAN TAKEN IN (bettC^Cn). 
 
 A physician of (in) Dublin, who was rather old (roe(tf)et fcrjOri 
 gtcmttd) bejafyrt war), but who was very rich and in extensive prac- 
 tice (in cjtopem 9?ufc fteljen*), went one day to receive a considerable 
 (jtemttd) grefi) sum of money in bank notes and in gold. As he was 
 returning home with (belaben mit) this sum, he was stopped (anfyaU 
 ten*) by a man who appeared out of breath (cutset 2CtF;eni), owing to 
 the speed with which he had run (we'll et $u fcfynell gelaufen root). 
 This man asked him (Unb t)cv ir)n bat) to come to see his wife, 
 whom a violent diarrhoea retained in bed dangerously ill (an eineni 
 Ijeftiqi'n Jdiffe gefa'br(td) franf barniebet (ie^cn*) ; he added that it was 
 urgent she should have immediate advice (bojj fcfyleuntge £)i(fe febt 
 nctbnxnbio, incite), and at the same time promised the physican his 
 guinea fee (einc ©utnee flit einen 23efud)). 
 
 The physician, who was very avaricious (cjet^tg), was pleased at 
 the prospect of gaining his guinea (elite fie 311 ttctbtenen) ; he direc- 
 
365 
 
 Jed (fagen gu) the man to *'ead the way (Semanbem bai 2Beg getgcn)» 
 and promised to follow. He was led to a house situated (ftefyen*) 
 in a remote (entU'gcn) street, and made to ascend to the third story 
 (in fcciS bt itte (Stetfrocrf), where he was admitted into a room, the 
 door of which was immediately (alfobatb) locked (»crfd)(te£en*). 
 The guide (Dec giifjrcr) then presenting (batretcfyen*) a pistol with 
 one hand, and with the other an empty ((eet) purse, which was 
 open, spoke as follows (bterauf rebete ber gntyrer ten erfctyrocfenen 2Cr$t 
 folcjenbermafien an, inbem, &c). 
 
 44 Here is my wife : yesterday she was seized with a violent 
 diarrhoea (an etnem r)cftia,en 33aud)ftuffe (etben*), which has reduced 
 her to the state (in ben Suftcmb ttcrfefeen) in which you (now) see 
 her ; you are one of our most eminent (cjej"cf)tcft) physicians, and 1 
 know you are better able than any one to cure her. I am besides 
 (liberbieS) aware that you possess the best remedy for her ; haste 
 then to employ (anroenben) it, unless you prefer swallowing (sets 
 fctyucfen) the two leaden pills (t>te Spille) contained in this instru- 
 ment." The doctor made a horrible face (bci* obfebeuttebe ©cficbt), 
 but obeyed. He had several bank notes and a hundred and twen- 
 ty-five guineas rolled up (in SKelkn) ; he placed the latter (Cue fegt 
 tern) into the purse, as he had been desired (cjebutMcj), hoping thus 
 to save his bank notes. 
 
 But the thief (fcer dfouncr) was up to this, and was perfectly 
 aware of his having them in his pocket (nw&te, ba$ cr fie in t>er £as 
 fd>c fjattc). "Wait," said he, "it would not be fair (biilicj) that 
 you should have performed (r>errtd)ten) so miraculous a cure (Me 
 jtur) without remuneration (t>ercjebens) ; I promised you a guinea 
 for your visit, I am a man of honour (bet 9Jcann sen (Si)re), and 
 here it is ; but I know that you carry about your person (bet fid) 
 fyaben) several little recipes (bn$ Sftecept, plur. e) most efficacious 
 (fef)t nnrffam) as preventives against the return (bte $Kucffef)r) of the 
 disorder (ba$ Hebet) you have just removed (fyetten) ; you must be 
 so kind as to leave them with me." The bank-notes immediately 
 took the same road as the guineas had done. • The thief, then 
 keeping his pistol concealed beneath his cloak (ber 9}?ante(), ac- 
 companied the doctor into the street (f)tcrcmf furjrte ber ©auner, in; 
 bem — roieber ^urttcf) requesting him to make no noise. He stopped 
 him (fteben (ciffen*) at the corner (an ber (Stfc) of a street, and for- 
 bidding (ycrbieten* him to follow, suddenly (plogticb) disappeared, 
 to seek, in a distant part of the town (bas enttegene (Stabtmertet), 
 another habitation (Die SBoljnung). 
 
 247. PiALOGUE (bte Unterretomg) 
 
 BETWEEN A FATHFH AND MOTHER ON THE HAPPINESS (bd$ 
 2B0l)t) OF THEIR CHILDREN. 
 
 Countess. Forgive me for having disturbea (wedfen laflfen*) 
 you so early ; but I wanted to speak to you on matters of im« 
 por&nce. 
 
366 
 
 Count. You alarm (beunrufytgen) me .... I see that you 
 have been crying; what has happened, my dear (tfyetier)? 
 
 Countess. I own I am a little agitated (unrufytg) ; but I have 
 nothing unpleasant (Unangenef)me$) to communicate (mtttt)etlen) ; 
 on the contrary. 
 
 Count. From your emotion (bte 23 eroegung), I should guess 
 Emily to be the cause of it (ba$ oon — bte 9?efce tjt). 
 
 Countess. It is true .... My sister came this morning 
 with a proposal (etne $etW$ »orfd)la$en*) for her. 
 
 Ccwm*. Well ? 
 
 Countess. The gentleman who asks her (in marriage) is en- 
 dowed with (befi^en*) all the advantages (ber 93orgug) of birth 
 (bte ©eburt) and fortune (ba$ ©litdf). His merit is acknowl- 
 edged (cmerf ennen) by all. He is thirty ; his person agreeable ; 
 he loves Emily, and even refuses the fortune (bte SluSjteuer) 
 which we should give her, stating his affection to be secured by 
 her only (oerlangt mtr fie). 
 
 Count. But how comes it that you are not overjoyed at this 
 (auger fief) »or grettbe fetn*)? I am very anxious (cor SSegter* 
 be brennen) to learn his name. 
 
 Countess. You know him ; he often comes here, and you 
 like him exceedingly (febr). 
 
 Count. Pray gratify (befriebtgen) my curiosity. 
 
 Countess. It is the Count of Moncalde .... 
 
 Count. The Count of Moncalde ! a foreigner ; but he prob- 
 ably (roafyrfefyetnltd)) intends to settle (fid) meberlajfen*) in 
 France ? . . . 
 
 Countess. Alas ! he has declared that he can promise no« 
 thing (feme a&erpfltdjtungemgefyen*) onthatsco-e (bte £tnfid)t) ; 
 this is informing us (erf Id ten) clearly (beutttd)) enough, that he 
 intends to return to his own country. 
 
 Count. And you would nevertheless accept him for your 
 daughter ? 
 
 Countess. I have known him (Utnqang mtt Semanbem fya* 
 ben*) for four years. I am thoroughly acquainted with his 
 disposition (ber Character). There cannot be a more virtuous 
 (tugenbfyaft) or estimable (fdfjafcenSroertW man. He is very 
 clever and agreeable (ooll @etfl imb 2(mte()mftd)fett fetn*), has 
 much good feeling (qe fill) to oil), is well informed (unterrfd)tet), 
 and perfectly devoid of affectation (unaffecttrt). He is a passion- 
 ate admirer of talent (etnen leibenfd)aftltd)en @efd)macf fi'tr %a* 
 lente fyaben*) ; in short (mtt etnem 28orte) he possesses every 
 quality (bte ©genfefyaft) that can answer my daughter's happi^ 
 ness (qhtcfltd) macfyen). How can I reject him (fie tfym oerfo* 
 
367 
 
 gen) ? Surely, my love (mem greunb), you do not think trie so 
 selfish (eme£ folcfyen SgotSmuS fdfytg fatten*). 
 
 Count (taking her hand) (fie bet ber £>anb faffenb). But 
 can I consent to a sacrifice (ba3 Opfer) that would make you for 
 ever (auf tmmer) unhappy ? Besides (Ueberbte3) I never could 
 bring myself to part from Emily. — She is my daughter ; more 
 than that even, her amiable disposition is your work. In Emi- 
 ly I find your sense (ber ©etjl) and your virtues. No, I cannot 
 part (fid) trennen) from her. I am looking forward with so much 
 delight (fid) erne fo fiige SSorftettung son bem 33ergniigen macfyen) 
 to her entrance into the world (fie in bte SfBelt etngefiifyrt $u fe* 
 fyen) ! I am in much hopes of her shining in it (tfyre$ guten @r* 
 fclgS barm gu gemefien). — How gratifying (rote tfyeuer) to me 
 will be the praise (ba3 Sob) bestowed (ertfyet(en) on her! — for 
 I am convinced {bo, id) ba§> SSewugtfem fyabe), that to your care 
 of her (bte ©orgfa(t) alone, my love, she will be indebted for 
 whatever success she may obtain. After having devoted (\v>ibt 
 men) the best years of your life to her education, can you now 
 give her up, and see her torn from (entretgen* with dative) your 
 arms and her country ; can you consent thus to lose in one mo- 
 ment the fruit of (son) fifteen years of anxiety (5ftiit)e unb S(rbett) ? 
 
 Countess. I have laboured for her happiness, and (have) not 
 (sought) to educate (bringen*) a victim to my own vanity. I 
 beseech you, consider (bebenfen*) also the great and unhoped 
 for advantages of the match (bte SSerbtnbung) now in agitation 
 (welcfye man un$> anbtetet). Think of the smallness (bte 2Rttte(* 
 mdgtgf ett) of her fortune. Consider the excellence and amiable 
 disposition, the high birth and immense (uner meg lid)) fortune of 
 her future husband ! — It is true, I shall be separated from 
 Emily, but she will never forget me . . . this thought will be 
 my consolation, and without fear for her future life (iiber baS 
 ©cfytcffat ffmtlienS bentfytgt). I shall be able to bear any other 
 trial (affe£ ertvagen). 
 
 Count. Bat will Emily herself be able to bring herself to 
 leave you ? 
 
 Countess. She has always been accustomed to obey the dic- 
 tates of reason (bte 93ernunft sermag atteS iiber fie). I am wil- 
 ling to believe this will cost her some effort (bte 2(njrrengung 
 ttnrb tbr fcfywer fatten) ; but if she does not dislike Qemanbem 
 mtgfatten*) the temper and person of Mr. de Moncalde, I can 
 answer (auf fid) nefymen*) for her compliance (fie $u beroegen), 
 however painful (fctyrotertg) the sacrifice ($u btefem Opfer). In 
 short I entreat (befcfyrcore) you to entrust entirely to (fid) gan$ 
 Derlaflfen* auf) me the care (roegen ber ©orge) of her happiness 
 
368 
 
 Count. Well (SBofytcm)* since you wish ft, will give my 
 consent. You have indeed, my dear, earned (erwerben*) for 
 yourself a right (bct£ 3led)t) to dispose of your daughter (iiber tl)r 
 ©cfytcffctl su entfcfyetben), which I will not dispute (jtretttg madden). 
 I know you will sacrifice (ctufopfern) yourself for the sake of 
 one so dear to you (fiir bt'efen fo tfyeuern ©egenffrxnb). — I fore- 
 see Oorau£fet)en*) that I shall not have your fortitude (ber 9D?ut{)), 
 but I admire, and can no longer withstand (tmberftefyen*) (your 
 argument). — Still (3 ebod)) think, what sorrow (nnestel Summer) 
 you are preparing for yourself (fid) beretten) ; how shall I my- 
 self support your grief and my own, your tears and those oi 
 Emily? 
 
 Countess, Do not fear (beftircf) ten) that I should cloud (beun* 
 rufytgen) your life by useless (iiberfliiffig) repinings (bte Silage). 
 How could I give myself up to sorrow when my greatest con- 
 solation will be the hope of alleviating (mtlbern) your grief? 
 
 Count. Ah, you alone are every thing to me ! You know 
 it we.l . . . . friendship, admiration, and gratitude are the ties 
 (bte SScmbe, plur.) that bind (feffe(n) me to you. The influence 
 (Die £)errfd)ctft) you have acquired (er(angen) over my mind 
 (iiber ntd)) is so thoroughly justified (red)tferttgen) by your vir- 
 tues, that far from denying (r>erldugrten), I glory in it (fetnen 
 9?ut)m barm fef$en, fie anuterfennen). — It is to you I owe every 
 thing : my reason, my sentiments (ba$> ©efiifyl), my principles 
 (ber ©runbfa§) and my happiness. In you I find the most ami- 
 able as well as the most indulgent (nad)ftd)ttg) of friends, the 
 wisest (roetfe) and most useful adviser (bte niigltcfyfte 9fatfygebe* 
 rtnn). Be then the arbiter of my children's destiny (bte ©cfytebS* 
 rtd)tertnn iiber baS ©cfyt.cffal) as you are that of my own. But 
 at any rate (roentgen 3) let us attempt (atleS »erfud)en) to per- 
 suade the Count of Moncalde to settle (fid) mebertaflfen) in 
 France. . . . He seemed so struck (geriifyrt) by your affection 
 (bte 3avtlid)teit) for Emily, and to feel for you such sincere 
 attachment (5(nt)dng(td)fett) that I cannot yet believe his inten- 
 tion (bte 5(bfid)t) to be to separate you from your child. I can- 
 not think his decision (ber (Sntfd)(u§) unalterable (unoerdnber^ 
 ltd)). 
 
 Countess. No, do not let us flatter ourselves. He is a firm 
 and decided character (fern — tjt fejt unb entfdjlo (fen). He has 
 positively (befrtmmt) told my sister that it would be vain to at- 
 tempt to exact from him a promise (tfym bte 33etttgung ttergu* 
 fcfyretben) of residing in France. His resolution is irrevocably 
 (unwtberrnfltd)) taken to return to Portugal. 
 
 Count. You grieve (betriiben) me ... . But I lepeat ts 
 
369 
 
 you, the fate of Emily .s in your hands. Whatever it may cost 
 me, you shall be absolute mistress (bie itnumfcfyrdnfte ©ebt'ete* 
 rtrnt) of it. I shall consent to whatever you decide on (befcfylte* 
 gen*). Do you intend speaking to-day (ncd) fyeute) (on the 
 subject) to Emily 1 
 
 Countess. After dinner .... But it is late ; it is time to 
 dress .... I have not yet seen my sons to-day ; let us go and 
 see them. 
 
 Count. I wanted to consult (urn 3tatl) frctgen) you on (wegen) 
 something connected with (angel) en*) them. I am dissatisfied 
 with their tutor (fcer £)ofmetfter). Another has been proposed 
 (ttorfcfyfogen*) me, I should wish you to speak to him ; I am told 
 he speaks English perfectly ; I cannot judge myself of the latter. 
 
 Countess. I will tell you if he really understands it well . . 
 
 Count. How 1 . . . But you have never learnt English . « 
 
 Countess. I beg your pardon. I have been studying it for 
 the last year, to be able to teach Henrietta, who had asked me 
 to give her (3emanben um etroaS erfuefyen) an English master. 
 In general (3m Durd)fd)nttt) masters teach so carelessly (mttfo 
 meler D^acfyldffigf ettO that, however excellent they may be, two 
 years of their lessons (fcer Unterrtcfyt) are not worth three 
 months (ba$ QStertelja^r) of those (ocn tern) given by a mother. 
 
 Count. What a (wonderful) woman you are ! . . . . Thus 
 till your children's education is completed, you will spend part 
 of your life with masters. Half of it (£){e etne ^d(fte) you devote 
 (cmroenben) to study (fid) $u unterricfyten), and the other half in 
 teaching what you have learnt .... Yet in spite of such nu- 
 merous occupations, whilst you thus multiply (sem'elfdlttgen) 
 your duties, you spare time to devote (nnfcmen) to your friends 
 and to the world (fct'e ©efeHfcfyaft). How do you manage (e£ 
 cmfangen) ? 
 
 Countess. It is always possible to find time for the fulfilment 
 of duties that are pleasing to us (bte tin$ tfyenet fmb). 
 
 Count. You always surprise me (beftdn&tg tn Srftctunen fe* 
 §en), I own .... Ah! if your children do not make you hap- 
 py, what mother could ever expect from hers a reward of her 
 affection ! . . . . And our dear Emily may be for ever lost to 
 you ! . . . I cannot bear (ertragen*) the thought of it ! — Shall 
 you see your sister again to-day ? Shall you give her your an- 
 swer for the Count of Moncalde ? 
 
 Countess. He requested a prompt decision (etne fd)neffe unb 
 befttmmte) .... I shall accordingly give (ertbet(en) him the 
 answer, since you allow it, as soon as I have questioned Emily 
 on the subject (gmtltenS ©efmnungen pritfen). 
 16* 
 
370 
 
 Count. I am certain, Emily will refuse (cutSfdjtagen*) him. 
 
 Countess. I think as you do, but it is not enough (fytnretcfyenb 
 fern*) that she has no aversion (ab^enetgt fern*) to the Count of 
 Moncalde, and that she feels (fyegen) for him the esteem he so 
 justly deserves 
 
 Count. Well, I see, we must submit (fid) entfdjliegen*) to 
 this sacrifice (bte 2(ufopferung) .... Speak to your daughter 
 
 Speak to her alone, I should never have courage to 
 
 support (ctuSMten*) sucn an interview (bie Unterrebung) . . . 
 I feel I should only spoil all your work. 
 
 248. DIALOGUE. 
 
 EMILY. AGATHA. 
 
 Agatha. I was looking for you .... But, dear Emily, 
 what is the matter? 
 
 Emily. Have you seen mamma (bte 9D?utter) ? 
 
 Agatha. No, she is gone out ; she is gone to my aunt's. 
 
 Emily. And my father ? 
 
 Agatha. He has shut himself up (fid) etnfd)lte§en*) in his 
 study (ba$ ^abtnett) .... But surely, Emily, they are think- 
 ing of your marriage (bte SBerfyetratfytmg) 5 I guess (erratfyen*) 
 as much (e3) from your agitation (an Seiner JBenmramg). 
 
 Emily. Ah, dearest sister, you little dream (me ttnrft T)u 
 ben Wamen beSjem^en erratfyen) who is my intended (bem man 
 mtd) bejrtmmt) ! . . . . Agatha, dearest Agatha, how much I 
 pity you, if you love me as well as I love you ! 
 
 Agatha. Good heavens ((Serecfyter f)tmme() ! Explain 
 ((Srflciren) yourself more clearly (beutltd)). 
 
 Emily. I am desired (9D?an beftel)(t mtr) to marry the 
 Count of Moncalde, and he is to take (mtt fid) fiifyren) me to 
 Portugal. 
 
 Agatha. And you intend to obey ? . . . . Could you leave 
 us ? .... Is it possible my mother even should consent ? 
 
 Emily. Alas ! (getber) dear Agatha, it is but too true. 
 
 Agatha. No, I never can believe it .... it is impossible 
 you ever can (Sit barfft md)t) obey. 
 
 Emily. What are you saying ? Do you think I should 
 oppose my mother's wishes (fcmn id) metnet 5SJ?utter ttnbet* 
 men) 1 
 
 Agatha. But do you think she herself will ever consent to 
 wich a separation ? 
 
 Emily. She only considers (in SSettacfyttmcj jtefyen*) what 
 
371 
 
 she calls my interest (ber SSortfyetD ; she entirely forgets her 
 self. Alas ! she also forgets that I could enjoy (geme£en*) na 
 happiness she did not witness (befien fie nid)t 3euge ware) ! 
 
 Agatha. Dear sister, refuse your consent (tucfyt efmmtttgen) ! 
 
 Emily. T have given my word. 
 
 Agatha. Retract ($uru tfnefymen*) it . . . out of affection to 
 my mother herself; your unfortunate obedience (ber ©efyorfam) 
 would be (sorberettert) a constant source of regret (bte eange 
 3?eue) to us all. 
 
 Emily. Agatha, you do not know my mother's fortitude. 
 Her sensibility (3fyr gefiifyfootteS &erj), though mastered (gelet* 
 tet) by her superior mind (bte iiberlegene 23ermtnft), can, it is 
 true, sometimes make her surfer, but will never be strong 
 enough to betray her even into showing a momentary weak- 
 ness (me tmrb eS etnen 2Utgenb(ttf ©cfywacfye ttt tfyr fcenwrbrut* 
 gen) ... . She is incapable (unfafytg) of ever regretting 
 (ber en en) she has fulfilled a duty. 
 
 Agatha. Emily ! dearest sister, if you go, I shall not sui 
 vive (etroctS iiber(eben) such a misfortune ! 
 
 Emily. Ah, if you love me, conceal (from) me the excess . 
 (ba§> Uebermct£) of your grief. It can only unfit me for the 
 task I have to perform (welcfyer mir su fefyr bagu geetgnet tft, 
 mid) nod) fcfyroacr/er $u macfyen). — Do not further rend (md)t 
 ttottenbS gerretgen*) a heart already torn by the conflict of (ba$ 
 fcfyon fo getfyetlt t|t sttnfcfyen) duty, affection and reason. 
 
 Agatha. Do not expect me to confirm (2)td) gu befefHgen 
 tn) this cruel resolution. I can only weep and lament my own 
 hard fate. 
 
 Emily. I hear some one .... Dear Agatha, let us dry 
 our eyes. 
 
 249. 
 
 On the liability to error (2Bte fefyr man ftcf) ixven famt) 
 of our judgments (tn fetnem Urtfyet(e), or the injury 
 (ber ©cfyaben) repaid (erfe^en). 
 
 An English stage-coach (bte Scmbfntfcfye), full of travellers 
 (ber 9¥etfenbe), was proceeding (fctfyren*) to York. Conversa- 
 tion fell on (Sftctr fpracfy met »on) the highwaymen and robbers 
 that infested (bte man ofterS anf — antreffe) those parts (ber 
 $3eg)> and on the way of concealing one's money. Each 
 person had his secret, but no one thought (fetnem ft el e§ em) 
 of telling it (offenbaren). One young lady ($>a§> SDWbdjen) only 
 of eighteen, was less prudent than the rest (ntdfjt fo t (ttg fefn*)« 
 
372 
 
 Imagining, no doubt, (Ofyne 3wetfe( * n ^ er SSWetmmg) that she 
 was thereby giving a proof (ber 23ett)et$) of her cleverness 
 (ber 2)erfranb), she said with great self-satisfaction (ganj offerr< 
 fyer$tg) that she had a draft (ber 28ed)fetbrtef) for two hundred 
 pounds, which was (beftefyen*) her whole fortune, but that the 
 thieves would be very clever (ItfHg) if they thought of seeking 
 for (roenn fie-— fuefyen foltten) this booty (ber 9taub) in her shoe, 
 or rather (ja fogar) under the sole of her foot ; to find it they 
 would be obliged to (e£ mii£te tfynen nur etnfaften) rob her of 
 stockings. 
 
 The coach was soon after (bafb barauf) stopped (anfyalten*) 
 by a gang of thieves (bte 9?ditberbanbe), who called upon Cmf* 
 forbertr) the affrighted and trembling travellers to deliver up 
 (fyergeben*) their money. They accordingly all pulled out 
 (t)erau£$tei)ett*} their purses, fully aware (fief) sorfMen) that 
 resistance (ber SBtberjTanb) would be perfectly useless, and 
 might prove dangerous (ober gar gefdfyrttdf)). The sum (thu? 
 produced) appearing too small to these gentlemen (of the road 
 they threatened (broken) to search (burd)fud)en) all the luggagw 
 (bte Sflfectert), if a hundred pounds were not immediately given 
 them. 
 
 " You will easily (let d)t) find double that sum (ba$ ©oppek 
 te)," said an old gentleman from the corner of the coach (rtef 
 t^nen — tjtnten cui3 bem 2Bagert $u), " if you examine (burd)* 
 fitcfyen) the shoes and stockings of that lady." The advice was 
 "^ty well taken (aufnefymen*), and the shoes and stockings being. 
 
 *lled off, the promised treasure (ber tterfunbtgte ©d)ct§) was 
 discovered (jeigt ftrf>). The robbers humbly (bofltd)) thanked 
 the lady, paid (macfyen) sundry compliments on the beauty of 
 her foot, and without waiting for an answer, they made off with 
 their prize, leaving the coach to proceed on its journey (wetter 
 fafyren*). Hardly were the robbers gone, when the consterna- 
 tion (bte 93efHiratmg) of the travellers was changed (fid) serroan* 
 beln) into indignation (bte 28utfy). Words could not express 
 (fid) rr'cfyt mtt Morten au^brucfen laffen*) the sorrow of the poor 
 woman, nor the resentment (ber 3 Drn ) expressed by (empbren) 
 the whole party against the betrayer (ber QSerrdtber). 
 
 The strongest, and even the most insulting epithets of disgust 
 (Die ung(tmpfltd)ften unb befdjtmpfenbften 53etnamen) were lav- 
 ished on him by all (fid) au$ alter 9D?unbe fybren (affen*), and 
 many went even so far as to call him a rascal (ber 93bfe*tttcf)t) 
 and the accomplice of the thieves (ber 9iau berg en og;. To 
 these marks (bte S(eugeritng) of the general indignation (be$>a1l< 
 gemetnert UnmtltenS) (his conduct had excited) was added (set; 
 
373 
 
 btnDen*) the threat (bte Suiting) of giving the informer (bet 
 Slngeber) a sound beating, and of throwing him out of the window 
 (gum 2Bagen btnattS), and of instituting legal proceedings against 
 him (3emctnben gertcfytltd) be(angen). In short (Jturg), all seemed 
 to concur (fid) erfcfyopfen) in forming schemes (ber Sntrourf ) 
 for taking exemplary vengeance on the offender (an bem ©traf* 
 baren erne auffatlenbe 3?ad)e), The latter remained perfectly 
 unmoved (fid) gang ftitt serbalten*), and only remarked once in 
 extenuation (fid) mtt ber Sfeugerung entfcfyulbtgen), that a man 
 could have nothing dearer to him than himself (3>eber fet ftd) 
 felbft ber Stebjte) ; and when the coach reached the end of its 
 journey (ate man am $iete ber 9?etfe mar), he suddenly (tinker* 
 febenS) disappeared (»erfd)Wt'nben*), before his fellow-travellers 
 could accomplish (tn§ SBBerf fe£en) any one (etne etnatge) of 
 their intended measures (bte beabficfyttgten SQcagregetn) against 
 him. 
 
 As to the unfortunate young lady, it is easy to imagine (fid) 
 Dorftetten) that she passed a sad and sleepless night (bte 9iad)f 
 l)0d)jl: traurig itnb fd)tafle$ subringen*). To her joy and aston. 
 ishment (ba$ Srftatmen), she received the next day the follow- 
 ing letter : 
 
 " Madam, — You must yesterday have hated (serabfcfyeuen) 
 as an informer the man who now sends you, besides the sum 
 you then advanced him (ttorfcfytegert*), an equal (gletd)) sum, as 
 interest thereof (ate 3* n f en &<*?aiif), an d a trinket (ba3 Stimel) 
 of at least the same value (ber 2Bertb) for your hair (jtt Sbrenl 
 £)aarfd)mucfe). I hope this will be sufficient (fytnretcfyen) to si- 
 lence (mtlbern) your grief, and I will now explain (fagen) in a 
 few words what must appear mysterious in my conduct (ben ge* 
 fyetmen ©rimb metneS 95etragenS). After having spent (fid) auf* 
 balten*) ten years in India (3nbien), where I amassed (attfam* 
 menbrtngen*) a hundred thousand pounds, I was on my way 
 home with letters on my bankers (ber 2Bed)felbrtef) to that 
 amount (fur bte gan$e ©umme), when we were attacked (ange* 
 fatten merben*) yesterday by the highwaymen. All my savings 
 (bte retd)(td)err Erfparntjfe) must have inevitably been sacrificed 
 (e$ war gefcfyeben urn), had the shabbiness (bte ftargbett) of our 
 fellow-travellers (ber 9?etfegefdf)rte) exposed us to a search from 
 (oon ©etten) these unprincipled spoilers (ber S(ngretfer). Judge 
 (Urtt)et(en) for yourself, if the idea of returning to India thorough- 
 ly empty handed (mtt ttotttg (eeren £>dnben), could be support- 
 able (ertrdg(td)) to me. Forgive me, if this consideration (Ote 
 95etrad)tung) led (sermogen*) me to betray your confidence 
 (ba§ gnttciVLtn serratben*) and to sacrifice (aufopfern) a small 
 
874 
 
 (m5gtg) sum, though not my own, to save my whole fortune. 1 
 am under the greatest obligation to you. I shall be happy to 
 testify (SSeroetfe gebert son) my gratitude in any way in my 
 power, and I request you to consider (tecfynen) these trifles (fur 
 ntdjtS) as only the expressions (fete geringen 3?id)tri) of my 
 readiness (burcfy toelcfye tcfy mid) beetfere) to serve voiu" 
 
SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, 
 
 THEIR INFLECTION AND USE. 
 
 By G. J. ABLER 
 
SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, 
 
 THEIR INFLECTION AND USE. 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 § 1. The German language has ten parts of speech: 
 > — The Article, Substantive or Noun, Adjective, Numeral, 
 Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and 
 Interjection. 
 
 Of these six are declinable ; namely, the Article, the 
 Noun, the Adjective, the Numeral, the Pronoun, and 
 the Verb. 
 
 The remaining parts of speech are indeclinable and 
 are called Particles. 
 
 The declinable parts of speech have two numbers, 
 the Singular and the Plural. 
 
 To substantives, and to all the other declinable parts 
 of speech, except the verb, belong three genders, Mas- 
 culine, Feminine, and Neuter. 
 
 § 2. They have also four cases: — Nominative, 
 Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, which in general cor- 
 respond to those of the same name in the Classical 
 Languages. 
 
 1st, The nominative is employed as the subject of a proposition, 
 in answer to the question "who?" or "what?" e. g. 3Bct 
 fcmmt? fret 93ater, t>tc 50?uttct unt) taS .flint) fommcn ; who comes 1 
 the father, the mother and the child are coming. 
 
 2d, The genitive denotes the relation of origin, possession, mu- 
 tual connection, and many others, which in English are expressed by 
 the possessive case, or by the preposition of. It answers to the 
 question " whose V e. g. SSkffen &au* tft t)&$1 (&* tft t>e$ .ftontg*; 
 te$ JlaufmarmS ; whose house is this 1 It is the king's ; the mer- 
 chant's. 
 
378 
 
 3d, The dative is the case of the remote object, from which any 
 thing is taken, to or for which any thing is done. It answers to 
 the question "to whom!" "for what?" e.g. 2Bem feting)! £)tt 
 t>a$ 23ud) ? S)cm 2ehtet ; bem Jtnafeen ; for whom do you bring that 
 book ? For the teacher ; the boy. 
 
 4th, The accusative indicates the immediate object of an active 
 transitive verb, in answer to the question " whom?" or "what?" 
 e. g. 2Bag I)af! 2)u ? (Sine #et>et ; etn Sftcfier ; what hast thou 1 A 
 pen ; a knife. 
 
 ARTICLES. 
 
 V 
 
 § 3. An article is a word which serves to restrict 
 or individualize the meaning of substantives. 
 
 There are in German as in English two articles ; 
 the definite ber, bte, ba£, the ; and the indefinite cut, Cttte, 
 etrt, an or a. 
 
 In German both articles are declined, i. e. they indi- 
 cate by a change of termination the gender, the num- 
 ber, and the case of the substantive to which they be- 
 long. 
 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE 
 
 DEFINITE 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. Neut. 
 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ber, 
 
 bte, bct$, 
 
 the. 
 
 bte, the. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 be3, 
 
 ber, be$, 
 
 of the. 
 
 ber, of the. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 bem, 
 
 ber, bem, 
 
 to the. 
 
 t>en f to the. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ben, 
 
 bie, i>a$>, 
 
 the. 
 
 bte, the. 
 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE INDEFINITE 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 em, etne, 
 
 etn, 
 
 a, an. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 etneS, etner, 
 
 emeS, 
 
 of a, an. 
 
 
 Dat 
 
 etnem, etner, 
 
 etnem, 
 
 to a, an. 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 etnen, etne, 
 
 etn, 
 
 a, an. 
 
 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 
 § 4. Obs. 1. The meaning of substantives without the 
 article is expressed in the most general manner. The office 
 of the article is to point out either definitely or indefinitely an 
 individual of the genus or species denoted by the substantive 
 e. g. ber 9J?cmn, the man ; etne SSUime, a flower. 
 
379 
 
 Obs. 2. Hence common nouns only, which under one term 
 comprehend many individuals, can, strictly speaking, assume 
 the article. The remaining classes of nouns must from the 
 nature of their signification commonly reject it ; viz : 1st, 
 proper names, which already contain the notion of individuali- 
 ty ; as, Goethe, Walter Scott, &c. ; 2d, abstract substantives 
 and names of materials, the meaning of which is so general, 
 that no individual is distinguished ; as, virtue, water, gold. 
 
 Obs. 3. The article, however, is employed in various rela- 
 tions before all classes of substantives, even more frequently 
 in German than in English. 
 
 ARTICLE BEFORE PROPER NAMES. 
 
 § 5. The article is used before proper names in the 
 following instances : — 
 
 1st, When the name of a person assumes the signification of 
 a common noun. This is the case, when the same name is com- 
 mon to several individuals ; as, bic <Stuart'S, ttc (Eatone, the Stuarts, 
 the Catos, or when it is employed to express some quality or 
 characteristic ; as, er tft cirt getter tyiato, he is a second Plato ; bcr 
 (Scifctt unferer 3ctt, the Caesar of our age. 
 
 2d, If the name of a person is preceded by an adjective ; as, 
 ber fctftge ^ctruS, bcr grope griebrid), St. Peter, Frederick the Great. 
 
 3d, When the name of an author is put instead of his works ; 
 as, id) tcfe ben ©djatfpeare, I am reading Shakspeare; fyaben ©ie 
 b c n ?cffing nod) nictyt ? have you not yet purchased Lessing's 
 works 1 
 
 4th, To denote familiarity or inferiority ; as, id) mag'S unb 
 will's md)t gfaufcen, t>a$ mid) bcr SJtar. oerfaffen M (<Sd)tHcr), I cannot 
 possibly believe that (friend) Max has deserted me ; bcr grig fed 
 gefd)tuinb fommen, let Frederick (servant) make haste to come. In 
 this connection the article may often be rendered into English by a 
 possessive pronoun ; e. g. too ift bcr 23ater ? where is your father ? 
 bic Gutter ift au£gegangcn, my (our) mother has gone out. 
 
 5th, To distinguish the gender of names of countries and places, 
 such as are not of the neuter gender ; as, bic ©djroeij/ bcr S5rci$* 
 gem il 
 
 6th, The article serves often simply to point out the case of the 
 name ; as, bcr getbaug b e£ (Snrus, the expedition of Cyrus ; bcr Sob 
 b e $ @o crate$, the death of Socrates. 
 
 ARTICLE BEFORE ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES AND NAMES OF 
 MATERIALS. 
 
 § 6. Before abstract substantives and names of 
 materials the article is employed, 
 
380 
 
 1st, To express the distinction of case, when the noun is of th* 
 feminine gender and therefore indeclinable in the singular (§ 30) 7 
 e. g. tcr Sacj t) c r SRctdje tft gefemmen, the day of vengeance is 
 come; in fcet gretbett (jettYjcnt <Scbuf5, under the sacred protection 
 of liberty ; b e r £m(fe bet>ucfen, to stand in need of help. 
 
 2d, When their meaning is restricted to some particular in* 
 stance ; as, t>as Staffer bet (Slbe, the waters of the Elbe ; t>er 
 gletjj fc)c£ <Sd)ulet$, the diligence of the scholar, 
 
 ARTICLE BEFORE COMMON NOUNS. 
 
 § 7. Common nouns are usually connected either 
 with the definite or indefinite article. Its omission, 
 however, becomes necessary in the following cases : — 
 
 1st, When the common noun expresses some quality or condi- 
 tion; as, cr iflt Jtctufmann, jlontq, (Sett>at cjerootfcen, he has become 
 a merchant, king, a soldier. 
 
 2d, In titles, superscriptions, &c, as in English ; e. g. Sector 
 gutljct ; &err, Jrcm Dietrich, Mr., Mrs. Dietrich; teutfer) r cngtifc^e^ 
 SBorterbud), German-English Dictionary. 
 
 3d, When the common noun, in connection with a preposition, 
 constitutes an adverbial expression, or when several common nouns 
 are united by a copulative conjunction and form one complex no- 
 tion ; e. g. $u -Jupe, fiber Scmb, $u @d)tffe retfen, to travel on foot, by 
 land, by sea ; ftejj unt> better fcfynoben, unt) .fties unt) Junfcn jroben 
 O-Mrget), both horse and horseman were panting, and pebbles 
 and sparks were flying ; nut ©ut unt) 23(ut, with property and 
 life. 
 
 4th, Common nouns in the plural, denoting several individuals 
 in an indeterminate manner, and corresponding to the singular with 
 the indefinite article c'tn, cine, ctn, do not admit of the article ; as, id) 
 rjabc e t n e n SB r i c f cr batten, 1 have received a letter ; plur. id) babe 
 23 r i c f e erbaften, I have received letters. ^>fert>e ftnt) niig(id)C Sbtctc, 
 horses are useful animals. 
 
 5th, The omission of the article often gives a partitive significa- 
 tion to the substantive, especially, if it be the name of a material 
 substance. In this case we supply the English some (the French 
 du) ; e. g. gib tfym S3tot>, 9Jli(d), SBctn, give him some bread, milk, 
 wine, &c. 
 
 IDIOMATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 § 8. In a manner peculiar to the German, the definite ar- 
 ticle is often put before a common noun, to indicate that the en- 
 tire species is meant ; e. g. b e r OTenfcf) tjt fterbltdf), man {all 
 men, every man) is mortal. So also before abstract substan- 
 tives and names of materials, when their meaning is to be taken 
 to its full extent ; e. g. imb fc t e lugenb, fie tfl feut (eeret 
 
381 
 
 ©cfyaff, and virtue, it is no empty stund ; fcaS Stfen ijr eta SEJ?e^ 
 tad, iron (all iron) is a metal. 
 
 The Germans employ the definite article also before the names 
 of seasons, months, days, and in many other cases, where the 
 English idiom does not admit of it ; e. g. ber fieng, ber ©ommer, 
 ber Slbenb, spring, summer, evening ; ba$ Sfyrifrentfyum, christi* 
 anity, bte ©fye, matrimony, &c. 
 
 THE ARTICLE IN SENTENCES. 
 
 § 9. When in the same proposition several substantives of 
 the same gender and number follow each other, the article is 
 expressed with the first only ; but if they differ in gender or in 
 number, or are otherwise opposed to each other, it must be 
 expressed with each ; e. g. bte 2)erroanbten unb $reunbe bte* 
 fe$ 3D?anne3 finb atte tobt, the relations and friends of this man 
 are all dead ; ber Setter, bte 9J?uttev unb tie fttnber finb gu 
 £)aufe, the father, the mother and the children are at home. 
 
 When a substantive in the genitive case limits the meaning 
 of another, the article is always omitted before the limited sub- 
 stantive, if the genitive precedes it ; e. g. metneS QSrubev3 
 93ud) — ba£ 93 ltd) metned 33ruber3, my brother's book ; auf fei : 
 ne3 8eben$ erftem ©ange, on the first journey of his life. 
 
 § 10. If the definite article is preceded by one of the pre- 
 positions an, attf, bet, burcf), fur, tn, t>on, »or, iiber, gu, both are 
 frequently contracted into one word. 
 
 The following is a list of the principal contractions thus 
 formed : — 
 
 . am ifenjier, at the window ; 
 an$ lifer, to the shore ; 
 aufS Jfctb, into the field ; 
 betm Sicfete, near the light ; 
 t>urd)S Jeuer, through the fire ; 
 fdt$ Satcttanb, for one's country 
 tm £aufe, in the house ; 
 tn$ SBaffer, into the water ; 
 »cm £tmme(, from (the) heaven ; 
 ttor* 2Cngeftd)t, before the face ; 
 tibetm (Srbentebcn, above this earth 
 
 ly life ; 
 &icU SOZeet, over the sea ; 
 ttntevm SSaume, under the tree 
 $Uffl ©(tic!, fortunately ; 
 $ut S^ube to the joy. 
 
 JCm, 
 
 instead of an tern, 
 
 an$, 
 
 u 
 
 an ta$, 
 
 auf*, 
 
 (( 
 
 auf ba^, 
 
 brim, 
 
 a 
 
 bet bem, 
 
 tmtcH 
 
 »» 
 
 burcb t><\$, 
 
 flW, 
 
 a 
 
 fitr $>ci$, 
 
 tm, 
 
 a 
 
 in bem, 
 
 tn$, 
 
 u 
 
 in bat, 
 
 Mm, 
 
 a 
 
 Mn bem, 
 
 Mr*, 
 
 «c 
 
 oor t>a$, 
 
 fibetm, 
 
 a 
 
 tiber bem, 
 
 fibers, 
 
 t; 
 
 iiber bat, 
 
 untcrm, 
 
 u 
 
 ttnter bem, 
 
 Sum, 
 
 a 
 
 $u bem, 
 
 !«*, 
 
 U 
 
 $u ber, 
 
382 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. 
 
 §11. A substantive or noun is the name of any 
 person or thing. 
 
 Substantives are divided into three principal clas- 
 ses : Proper, Common, and Abstract. 
 
 A proper noun is the name of an individual person 
 or object ; as, jjewricf), 2)eutfd)Ianb, Henry, Germany. 
 
 A common noun is a general term comprehending 
 a plurality of individuals or parts, and applicable to 
 each of them ; e. g. SERenfcf), SSaum, *Pferb, man, tree, 
 lorse, &c. 
 
 Among common nouns may also be included names of materials ; 
 as, (Stfcn, iron ; SDWcf), milk, itnd collective nouns, which are singu- 
 lar in form, but plural in signification ; as, SSclf, people ; ©efotQe, 
 range of mountains. 
 
 An abstract noun is one which serves to denote 
 either a quality, an activity, or mode of being, to which 
 the mind attributes an independent existence ; e. g. 
 gxetfyett, liberty ; iauf, course ; @ebad)tm#, memory, &c. 
 
 In German the initial of substantives and words 
 used substantively is always a capital letter. 
 
 We shall consider the substantive in a fourfold 
 point of view ; namely, as to its Gender, its Number 
 its Inflection, and lastly its Government. 
 
 I. GENDER. 
 
 § 12. The grammatical gender of names of per- 
 sons and animals generally corresponds to their natu- 
 ral sex, i. e. the names of all male beings, including 
 that of the Divinity and other superior beings regard- 
 ed as males, are masculine ; those of all females are 
 feminine ; e. g. ber SKcmtt, the man ; ber ©Ott, God ; ber 
 ©etft, the spirit ; bte ©ottintt, the goddess ; bte SOJutter, 
 the mother. 
 
 Exceptions. Diminutives in cf) c n and ( e t n ; as, fca* STftabcfycn, 
 the maid ; t>ci6 9Jlann(ctn, the mannikin ; also, t>a£ 2Bdb, the woman, 
 and certain compounds ; as, tie SCftcmn^pctfon, the male; ba£ 2Bet&$* 
 &tlt>, Staucngtmmer, the female, woman. 
 
383 
 
 Appellations, comprehending an entire species of living 
 beings without reference to any distinction of sex, are some- 
 times masculine, sometimes feminine, and sometimes neuter, 
 e. g. ber 5Kenfcfy, man (homo) ; bte SBacfytel, the quail ; ba3 
 *}Jferb, the horse. 
 
 § 13. With respect to substantives in general, their 
 gender, as far as it is reducible to rules, may be deter- 
 mined either by their signification, or by their termi- 
 nation. 
 
 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR 
 SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 I. Masculines. The name of winds, seasons, months, ana 
 days are masculine ; also the points of compass ; as, ber SftortV 
 ©lib, £>jr, 2Bejr, the north, south, east, west. 
 
 II. Feminities. Most names of rivers are feminine ; e. g 
 bte Xfyemfe, Sottcui, 2Befer, the Thames, Danube, Weser. Ex 
 cept ber 9tyem, SWaxn, 9tyone, 9W :c. 
 
 § 14. III. Neuters. To the neuter gender belong : 
 
 1st, The names of letters, ba£ 3(, 95, S K. 
 
 2d, All infinitives and other words, which properly are no 
 substantives, but are used as such ; e. g. ba£ 2>et)en, £)bren, 
 the seeing, hearing ; ba& ©lite, @cf)Dne, the good, beautiful ; 
 ba3 SBerm, ba£ 2lber, the if, the but. 
 
 3d, Names of countries and places ; as, Seutfcfylanb, g:ran?s 
 retd), Setpjig, ^retburg, Germany, France, Leipzig, Freiburg. 
 
 Except the following : tie $rtmm, Crimea ; bte 2auft£, Lusitania; 
 t>tc SKarf, Mark ; bte $Pfaf$, Palatinate ; tie <Sd)tt>ct$, Switzerland j 
 all those ending in e i ; as, bie Surfct, 9QBa(acl)ci l*., Turkey, Wala- 
 ehia ; and all those compounded with a u or Q a u ; e. g. ber S$ret$s 
 gau, tie SfBetterau k. 
 
 4th, Moa: collective nouns and names of materials ; as, ba3 
 SB^lf, the people ; 93tefy, cattle ; Jletfd), flesh ; $cutr, the hair. 
 
 5th, Names of metals ; as, ba3 Stfen, ©db, ©tlbet, 3 tnn > tne 
 iron, gold, silver, tin. 
 
 Except: bet JtctxUt, cobalt ; bie $>latttia, platina ; bet ©to t)l, steel ; 
 ber SomOacf, tombac ; ber 3tnf, zink. 
 
 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR 
 TERMINATION. 
 
 § 15. I. Masculines. To the masculine gender be- 
 long : 
 
384 
 
 1st, Primary derivatives* of one syllable ; as, bet $Ut$, ©cf)(a$, 
 ©prudf), 8auf, $lu$, the flight, beat, sentence, course, river. 
 
 2d, Most derivatives, both primary and secondary, terminating 
 in el, er, en, tng, I trig; e.g. ber @tpfe(, top; ©cfynabel, 
 beak ; Summer, sorrow ; hunger, hunger ; ©artert, garden ; 
 SfBagen, waggon; faring, herring ; ^ofltng, courtier; ©iinft* 
 Itng, favourite. 
 
 To these there are many exceptions : — 
 
 Exc. 1. Substantives, the gender of which is otherwise de- 
 termined by their signification; e. g. tie gutter, mother; £ed)tcr, 
 daughter; bie SKcfel, £ber. (rivers); tag (Sifter, silver; gjftfftng, 
 brass. 
 
 Exc. 2. Most names of animals in c(, and many names ol 
 things are feminine, e. g. tie 2l'mfe(, blackbird ; £)reffcl, thrush ; 
 &\\\mmi, bumble-bee ; ££ad)te(, quail ; 2Tcbfc(, shoulder ; S3udfe(, boss ; 
 (Stdn'l, acorn ; ($c4>el, fork ; 9?abc(, needle ; (Scfeacbtet, box ; (Sd)tnbe(, 
 shingle ; &afe(, table ; gtemmet, drum ; 2Buqe(, root, &c. 
 
 § 16. Exc. 3. Words in el, of Latin origin, which formerly 
 ended in la are feminine; as, tie $ermel, formula; Snfel (insula), 
 island, &c. ; but those which originally ended in lum are neuter, 
 e. g. tag dfrempel (exempZwra), the example ; (Sapttet, chapter; £)ra= 
 fct (oracu/wm), oracle. So also, bag 23unbel, bundle; $ftttte(, means ; 
 ^tegcl, seal, and others. 
 
 Tftrc. 4. The following in cr are feminine : — 
 
 2(ber, vein. liefer, pine. 
 
 2(ufret, oyster. Mammit, cramp. 
 
 SBtattct, blister. Stopper, clapper. 
 
 SButrer, butter. £ef>et, liver. 
 
 (Sifter, magpie. Setter, ladder, 
 
 gafer, fibre. 9^afcr, speck, 
 
 gebcr, pen. Matter, adder, 
 
 fitter, tinsel. £)ttet, viper, 
 
 goiter, torture. duller, elm. 
 
 £atftet, halter. (Scfyleuber, sling, 
 
 hammer, chamber. (Scfyultct, shoulder, 
 
 jtcltet, wine-press. SBimpet, eye-lash. 
 
 Exc. 5. The following in e t are neuter : — 
 
 2Ctrer, age. ©titer, udder. 
 
 (Stter, pus. $uber, load. 
 
 * Substantives formed from primitive verbs by a simple change of the 
 radical vowel, are called primary derivatives ; as, 33ruci), breach, from bxt- 
 cfyett, to break ; 3 U 8' march, from $tel)en ; to march. Commonly they add no 
 other termination to the root of the verb. But sometimes they assume t X, 
 et, ett, and also b, e, t, ft. Secondary derivatives are formed either from 
 verbs, from adjectives, or from other nouns, by means of certain affixes, 
 such as et, cr fcetr, feit, ung, fd>aft k. 
 
385 
 
 gutter, fodder. 
 
 fitter, 5 grate ' 
 £laftet, fathom. 
 Soger, couch. 
 Rafter, vice. 
 Ccbcr, leather. 
 £ubcr, carrion 
 
 Suffer, knife. 
 ^fttebct, bodice. 
 Sftuftcr, pattern. 
 g)clftcr, cushion. 
 SRufcet, oar. 
 lifer, bank. 
 2Bcttcr y weather. 
 £Bunt)cr, wonder. 
 
 Salter, a measure of corn. Simmer, room. 
 
 f *c. 6. Of those terminating in en, the following are neutei — » 
 tfttt JSeden, basin ; jttffcn, cushion; ZaUn, sheet; happen, escutch- 
 eon t Sweden, sign. 
 
 ^ 17, IL Feminines. To the feminine gender belong : 
 
 1st, All substantives having the termination t n n (also writ- 
 ten { n), which affix is joined to masculine names of persona 
 and animals, to form corresponding terms for females ; e. g. 
 @ott, ©otttnn; Come, goannn, lion, lioness; $elfc, Qeittitin, 
 hero, heroine, &c. 
 
 2d, Primary derivatives in fce, e, t, jt; e. g. bte ©djfowjo 
 snake ; 5?unt)e, knowledge ; QSenumft, reason ; Jhinfl, art. 
 
 Exc, 1. The following are masculine : — 
 
 230ft, bast. 
 S3ebacJ)t, reflection. 
 93ettod)t, consideration. 
 3)od)t, wick. 
 JDtenft, service. 
 3)rof)t, wire. 
 £)unft, vapour. 
 Durft, thirst. 
 (Stnjr, earnestness, 
 gorft, forest, 
 gteft, frost. 
 ®tftf)t, yest. 
 ©enrinnft, gain. 
 £cd)t, pike. 
 £erbft, autumn. 
 SD^ift, dung. 
 
 9Eonb, moon. 
 
 5ftonot, month. 
 
 Sfteft, must. 
 
 9?ojr, rust. 
 
 <Sd)acf)t, shaft (in mines). 
 
 (Scrjoft, shaft. 
 
 ®cr/uft, rascal. 
 
 (Soft, pay. 
 
 (Stift, tag. 
 
 &rejt, comfort. 
 
 SSerfcocfyr, suspicion. 
 
 S3ct(uft, loss. 
 
 SBonft, paunch. 
 
 2Btd)t, wight. 
 
 SBuft, filth. 
 
 Stvtft, dispute. 
 
 Exc. 2. The following are neuter : — fcoS ©efpenft, spectre ; (Se» 
 fld)t, face; £oupt, head; £tnt>, child ; JUetnot), jewel; Std)t, .ight; 
 Bttft, (ecclesiastical) foundation. 
 
 § 18. 3d, Secondary derivatives, formed by the affixes e t, 
 e, ^ e 1 1, fett, una,, fcfyaft, atfy, utfy; as, bte £eucr;etet, 
 hypocrisy; ©tdrfe, strength; ^iifynfyeit, boldness; (gttelfett, 
 vanity; gefhing, fortress; ganbfefjaft, landscape; $eima% 
 home ; Slrmutl), poverty. 
 17 
 
386 
 
 Exceptions. Many of those in e are masculine ; as, fc>tr #af* 
 the hare ; SRabi, crow ; $ajc, cheese, &c, and some are neuter ; 
 as, t>a$ 2£u$e, the eye ; (Srbe, inheritance ; (Snt>c, end, &c.~3tcratl), 
 ornament, is masculine, and $)etfd)aft, seal, is neuter. 
 
 § 19. III. Neuters. To the neuter gender belong : — 
 
 1st, All diminutives ending in cf) e n and I e t n ; as, fc>a3 
 93(iimd)en, the floweret ; ©ofyncfyen, little son ; aSucfyleirt, little 
 book ; graulem, young lady, miss. 
 
 2d, Collective and frequentative substantives formed by the 
 prefix g e ; as, bctS ©eftnbe, domestics ; ©etbft, noise ; ®e* 
 fhw, constellation; — fca£ (Serebe, talk; ($Maufe, frequent 
 walking, &c. 
 
 3d, Most secondary derivatives formed by the affixes f e I, 
 fat, tfyum, rug; as. ba^ UeberMebfef, remainder ; ^dt^fel, 
 riddle , ©rangfal, distress ; ©cfytcffal, fete ; gfyrtjlerttfyum, Chris- 
 tianity; £>er$ogt()um, dukedom; aSiinbrug, alliance; QBevfedtt 
 m£, relation. 
 
 Exc. 1. CK *hose in tf)um, three are masculine: — tec 3rt* 
 tfjum, error ; $Ketd)tr)um, riches ; 2Bad)6tfyum, growth. Of those in 
 fat, Stubfat, affliction, is feminine; (Stopfcl, stopper, is masculine 
 
 Exc. 2. The following in n t f are feminine : — 
 
 SBetrangrufJ, grievance. (Sttcuibntf?, permission. 
 
 23etrii0mp, affliction. ^dutntf', putrefaction. 
 
 S3etummcrnt£, sorrow. $tnjtermf5, darkness. 
 
 SBeforgmp, apprehension. itenntntf}, knowledge. 
 
 33enxmt>ntp, condition. SScrtanunnip, damnation. 
 
 (Smpfangmp, conception. ££Utmtp, wilderness. 
 (Stfparmp, savings. 
 
 GENDER OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 § 20. Compound substantives generally adopt the gendei 
 of the second component, which contains the emphatic idea ; 
 as, ber $trd) f) o f, the church-yard ; $>a$> 3?att) I) a u §>, the town- 
 hall ; bte $3utb m ii i) I e, the windmill. 
 
 Exc. 1. Names of places are always neuter, though their prin» 
 cipal component may be masculine or feminine ; e. g. (fcas) $xeu 
 b u r 9 (t> t e SSutg), £am 6 u r $, bitten c t g (b e r SBcrq), &c. 
 
 Exc. 2. A number of substantives compounded with b e « 
 80? u t r) are feminine : — 
 
 tfnmutf), grace. ©anftmutfy, meekness. 
 
 3)emutf), humility. ©cfyrocrmutf), melancholy 
 
 ©topmutlj, generosity. 8&ef)mutfj, sadness, 
 gangmutf), forbearance 
 
387 
 
 Exc* 3. The following likewise deviate from the general rule, 
 oet 2(6 f d) e u (t) i e 6d)eu), abhorrence ; bte 9?cun a u 9 e, lamprey ; the 
 following compounds of Sfyett, part : — bat ©cgentljetf, the reverse ; 
 £tntertf)crt, hind part; $orbertf)et(, fore part ; also, bet SRtttwocf), 
 Wednesday, which, however, sometimes is t> i c SQZitttvod)* 
 
 GENDER OF FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 §21. Those foreign substantives which have preserved their 
 original form, retain also the gender which they have in the lan- 
 guage from which they are adopted ; e. g. ber Sector, ©rnibu 
 cu§ ; bte ©tytttaytS, t>a$ Sonctlmm. 
 
 But those, whose form has become assimiJated to German 
 words, frequently assume another gender ; e. g. ber Stttctr 
 (altare), the altar ; ber $6rper (corpus), the body ; ber Sinin 
 (ruina), the ruin ; ba§> Sortfu tat (consulatus), the consulship, &c. 
 
 Some substantives have two genders, and are generally also em- 
 ployed in different significations. The following list exhibits the 
 most important of them : — 
 
 ta& 23ant>, the ribbon. 
 
 bat SBauct, the cage. 
 
 bat Sunt), the bundle. 
 
 bat (5f)or, the chorus. 
 
 bat (Srfrmntmp, decision (judicial). 
 
 bat (Stfre, the inheritance. 
 
 bag (55ef)alt, the salary. 
 
 bte ©etpet, the whip. 
 
 bte #etbe, the heath. 
 
 bte JSunbe, knowledge. 
 
 bat Sfflenfcrj, the wench. 
 
 bat SRtit, the twig. 
 
 bat (Scfyttb, sign (of a house). 
 
 bte (See, the sea. 
 
 bat ©ttft, charitable foundation 
 
 bat Zbcxi, the share. 
 
 bat &l)0r, the door. 
 
 bat aSctbtenft, the merit. 
 
 3)cr 23anb, the volume ; 
 3)et Salter, the peasant ; 
 £)et SBunb, the alliance ; 
 £)er (Sbor, the choir ; 
 SDic (Srftnntmfi, knowledge 
 £)ct (SrOe, the heir ; 
 £)ct ®ef)a(t> the contents ; 
 iDcr ©etfel, the hostage ; 
 £)et £etbe, the pagan ; 
 Dec itunbe, the customer ; 
 jDcc SRenfd), man ; 
 Dec SRetS, rice ; 
 £)er <Sct)t(b, the shield ; 
 £)et ©ee, the lake ; 
 3)et ©rift, the peg ; 
 £)et SfieU, the part ; 
 £)et &f)Ct, the fool ; 
 £)et $erbienjl, earnings ; 
 
 II NUMBER. 
 
 § 22 In German, as in English, substantives have 
 two numbers, the Singular and the Plural. 
 
 With respect to the termination of the singular no 
 definite rules can be given. 
 
388 
 
 The nominative plural is formed from the nomina* 
 tive singular according to one of the following Rules: — ■ 
 
 Rule I. The nominative plural frequently does not 
 differ from the nominative singular by any additional 
 letter or syllable, especially in masculine and neuter 
 substantives ending el, er r e tl, and diminutives in 
 d) e n and I e t It ♦ 
 
 It is then either the same as the singular, or is distinguished 
 from it by the modification of its radical vowel ;* e. g. ber Si?* 
 gel, the angel, pi. bte (£na,el; ber Stcufer, emperor, pi. bit 
 Staffer 5 ba& genjler, window, pi. bte genjter 5 — ber Q3ater, fa- 
 ther, pi. bte 2)ater; ber Ofen, stove, pi. bte Oefen; ber SSru* 
 ber, brother, pi. bte 95riiber. 
 
 There are only two feminine substantives belonging to this 
 class: Gutter, mother; Tocfyter, daughter, pi. SOWttter, Xocfy* 
 ter. The change of the radical vowel is restricted to mascu- 
 line nouns ; of neuters, only ^(ojTer, monastery, has Jttofter in 
 the plural ; — but, ba$ Saflfer, water, pi. bte Gaffer; i>a& 3lm 
 ber, oar, pi. bte 9?uber. 
 
 § 23. Rule II. In all other cases the nominative 
 plural is formed from the nominative singular by an 
 nexing one of the terminations e, er, en (it); e. g. ber 
 gretmb, the friend, pi. bte gxetmbe ; ber Mnabe, the boy 
 pi. bte $ttct&ett ; bag Sud), the book, pi. bte SSitrf) er* 
 
 Obs. 1. The termination c belongs chiefly to masculine substan- 
 tives. It is, however, also added to feminines and neuters ; e. g. 
 ber Sao,, the day, pi.. bte Sage; ber £opf, the head, pi. bte Jtcpfe; 
 bte Jlunft, art, pi. bte Jltinfte ; bciS SBcrt, the word, pi. bte SBorte. 
 
 Obs. 2. The termination e t properly belongs to nouns of the 
 neuter gender only. Masculines assume it only by way of excep- 
 tion ; e. g. bag 33Kb, the picture, pi. bte 29tlfcet ; bat .fttnb, the 
 child, pi. bte Jltnber- ; ber ©etft, the spirit, pi. bte (Sktfter. 
 
 Obs. 3. The termination e n (n) is assumed principally by femi- 
 nines, also by masculines, and a few neuters ; e. g. bte <Sd)u(c, the 
 school, pi. bte <Scf)it(ert ; bte 9laM, the needle, pi. bte 9?abcln ; bet 
 £afe, the hare, pi. bte £afen ; ba$ £)l)t, the ear, pi. bte £)f)ren. 
 
 § 24. Obs. 4. Substantives which form their plural in e x 
 
 * That part of the substantive which is never affected by the changes of in- 
 flection is called its root. When it contains one of the vowels a, 0, U, or the 
 diphthong cm, they are frequently changed into a, '6, v, cut in the plural and are 
 then said to be modified. 
 
389 
 
 alivays modify the vowels of the root (a, D, u, cut) ; and those 
 which form their plural in e n, never modify it. With respect 
 to plurals in e, the modification always takes place when tho 
 substantive is feminine, and usually too when it is masculine, 
 but rarely when it is neuter. 
 
 Rule III. Masculine and neuter nouns adopted from modern 
 languages frequently form their plural in § ; as, ©eme'S, 2orb$, 
 2>dId'3 ; so also German words, the termination of which is not 
 susceptible of inflection ; as, bte U'£/ fcte 2% bte ty a p a \ $♦ 
 
 Rule IV. Nouns compounded with SCftann usually take 
 2 e u t e instead of 5)? d n n e r (the regular pi. of 9D?cmn) in 
 the plural ; e. g. ber $auf m a n n, the merchant, pi. ^auf I c lite; 
 ber £of m a n n, the courtier, pi. fcte £of I eut e. 
 
 § 25. Common nouns alone are by their significa- 
 tion entitled to a plural number. 
 
 The following classes of substantives want the plu- 
 ral: — 
 
 1st, Proper names, except when they assume the signification 
 of common nouns (§ 45) ; as, 5larf, S^ri**)/ SHom. 
 
 2d, Names of materials, except when different species of the 
 same genus are to be denoted ; as, ba$ Sifen, ©Uber, ©offc, 
 iron, silver, gold ; — but bte Srben, the earths (different kinds) ; 
 bte Sfttnerctlroafier, mineral waters. 
 
 3d, Many collectives ; as, ba$ ©eftnbe, the domestics ; ba§ 
 93tefy, cattle, &c. 
 
 4th, All infinitives and neuter adjectives used substantively ; 
 as, bctS 2Bet§, white (the colour) ; ba§> ^)dg(tc^e, the ugly ; baS 
 gtnfommen, the income ; ba$ 2Btfifen, knowledge. 
 
 5th, Most abstract substantives, especially such as denote 
 qualities, powers or affections of the mind, &c. ; as, ber 'ftleift, 
 diligence ; bte 3"9 en ^/ vout h ; fete 2*ernunft, reason ; bte $wcd)t, 
 fear. Sometimes, however, they become concrete, expressing 
 different kinds of the same quality, &c, and then they are em- 
 ployed in the plural ; as, lugenben, virtues ; (Bcfyonfyetten, beau. 
 ties. 
 
 § 26. 6th, Substantives denoting number, measure, weight 
 when preceded by i numeral, are put in the singular, even 
 though in other connections they may form a plural ; as, $roei 
 gttg brett, two feet wide fed)3 ^funb 93utter, six pounds 
 of butter ; em JRegtment sort taufenb Sft a n n (not Wanner, pi.)/ 
 a regiment of thousand men. 
 
390 
 
 Exceptions. Feminine substantives in e, and such as express a 
 measure of time ; as, $roct ©lien (t> i c ©tie) &ucf), two ells of cloth ; 
 fiinf Saljre (ang, for five years; moreover, all names of coins; 
 as, greet ©rofctyen, groftf ^rcti^er, two groshes, twelve kreuzers, — are 
 put in the plural as in English. 
 
 § 27. Some substantives are employed in the plur- 
 al number only : — 
 
 Slfynen, ancestors. 
 2(ettern, parents. 
 2Upen, alps. 
 getn«eiber,j trousers< 
 £ofen, S 
 
 SSrieffcfyaften, papers. 
 Stnfunfte, revenue, 
 gaflen, Lent. * 
 Scrten* vacation, 
 ©efdfle, rents. 
 ©Itebmctgen, limbs. 
 Soften, expenses. 
 2 elite, people. 
 
 measles. 
 
 Stftctfern, 
 SWot&eln, „ 
 $ftolfen, whey. 
 Sftern, Easter, 
 ^pffngften, Whitsuntide 
 9?dnfe, tricks, 
 ©porteht, fees. 
 'Irdber, husks, 
 drummer, ruins. 
 Iruppen, troops. 
 2Betfynad)ten, Christmas. 
 3ettlditfte / junctures. 
 3tnfen, interest of money. 
 
 § 28. There are a number of substantives which 
 have two forms for the plural, partly as a simple dia- 
 lectic variety, but most commonly with different sig- 
 nifications : — 
 
 Singular, 
 
 Ser SScmfc, the volume ; 
 £)ct$ Scm&, the ribbon ; 
 £)a3 Sknfc, the bond ; 
 Ote SSanf, the bench ; 
 £)te 33anf, the bank ; 
 Set 93ctuer, the peasant ; 
 2)a3 SSauer, the cage ; 
 
 Der Sorn, the thorn ; 
 
 5>3 Smg, the thing ; 
 Da$ 2)mg, little creature 
 Sa3 ©effect, the face ; 
 Da§ ©eftcfyt, the vision ; 
 SaS £)orn, the horn ; 
 
 Plus a l 
 fcte SSdnbe. 
 bte 23dn£>er, 
 bte 33ant>e. 
 bte 23dnfe. 
 fcte aSanfem 
 bte 93auerm 
 fc>te 25cuier. 
 Somen. 
 Domer. 
 bte 2)tnge. 
 bte Dinger, 
 fcte ©eficfyter. 
 bte ©eftcfyte. 
 
 fcte Corner ; but # o r n e, dif- 
 ferent sorts of horn. 
 
391 
 
 Set gctben, the shutter bte gabett. 
 
 55er i^aben, the shop ; iDte £aben. 
 
 £er D* the place ; J gj£ 
 
 Der ©d)t(b, the shield ; bte ©d)t(be. 
 
 Da£ ©cfyilb, the sign; bte ©cfytlber. 
 
 £)a$ ©tttcf, the piece ; bte ©tiiife. 
 
 Da3 ©tiicf, the fragment • bte ©titrfem 
 
 Ser 'Xfyor, the fool ; bte Ifyoren- 
 
 Sct£ 'Xfyor, the door ; bte Ifyore. 
 
 S)a$ 2Bort, the word ; bte 2Bbrter ; but ffiorte, word* 
 
 in connected discourse. 
 
 IIL INFLECTION. 
 
 §'29. For the purposes of declension we divide 
 German substantives into two classes, which differ es- 
 sentially in their mode of inflection ; viz : 1st, Common 
 and Abstract Nouns ; 2d, Proper Names. 
 
 DECLENSION OF COMMON AND ABSTRACT NOUNS. 
 
 § 30. Common and abstract nouns have two prin 
 cipal forms of inflection, denominated the earlier and 
 the later declensions. The characteristic distinction of 
 each is the termination of its genitive singular, which 
 in the earlier declension is $ or e $, and in the later 
 It or en. 
 
 All feminine substantives are invariable in the sin- 
 gular ; hence their mode of declension is determined 
 by the nominative plural. 
 
 The nominative, genitive and accusative plural are 
 always alike, and their difference is pointed out by 
 the article only. 
 
 The dative plural always assumes It, unless its nom- 
 inative already ends in that letter. 
 
 EARLIER DECLENSION 
 
 § 31. The earlier declension comprises nouns of fill 
 genders, and may be distinguished by the termination 
 
392 
 
 of its genitive singular, which (feminine n^uns ex 
 cepted) is always g or e $♦ 
 
 The nominative plural is either the same as the 
 nominative singular, or it assumes one of the termina- 
 tions e, e r, e n or n. 
 
 In the plural the radical vowels a, 0, tt, and the dipn- 
 thong cut, are generally modified into d, o, it, cut* 
 
 Hence to inflect a word of this declension, not only 
 the genitive singular, but also its nominative plural 
 must be given ; e. g. ber S3rat>er, the brother, gen. be$ 
 23rttber3, nom. pi. bte SSritber ; bie grurfjt/ fruit, nom. pi. 
 bie griicfyte ; ba$ Mefo, the garment, gen. beg Mkibt^ 
 nom. pi. t)k Mkibex. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE EARLIER 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 I. II. 
 
 III. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 given. 
 
 like the sing. 
 
 e. 
 
 er. 
 
 en, tu 
 
 Gen. 
 
 e$, i (ett§, n£). 
 
 u 
 
 e. 
 
 er. 
 
 en, n. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 e, or like the nom. 
 
 — n. 
 
 en. 
 
 ern. 
 
 en, n> 
 
 Ace. 
 
 like the nom. 
 
 like the nom. 
 
 e. 
 
 er. 
 
 e«, %u 
 
 § 32. PARADIGMS. 
 
 i. a. 2)er Setter, the father. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. ber Setter, the father ; bte Setter, the fathers* 
 
 Gen. be3 Setter^, of the father ; ber Setter, of the fathers. 
 
 Dat. bem Setter, to the father ; ben Settern, to the fathers. 
 
 Ace. Sen Setter, the father ; bte Setter, the fathers. 
 
 I. b. Die SDIittter, the mother. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. fc>te Gutter, the mother; tfe SWtttter, the mothers 
 Gen. ber Gutter, of the mother ; ber 5SJfiitter, of the mothers 
 Dat. ber Gutter, to the mother; ben 9Diiittern, to the mothers 
 Ace. bte $)?utter, the mother • bte 9tRiitter, the mothers 
 
393 
 
 II, a. 2)er SScutm, the tree. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. ber 93aum, the tree ; bte SSdume, the trees. 
 
 Gen. be$ SkttmeS, of the tree ; ber 25dume, of the trees. 
 
 Dat. bem SSaume, to the tree ; ben SSdumen, to the trees. 
 
 Ace. ben 23cutm, the tree ; bte 33dume, the trees. 
 
 II. b. £)te £anb, the hand. 
 
 Singular. Plural* 
 
 Nom. bte £anb, the hand ; bte £dnbe, the hands* 
 
 Gen. ber £)cmb, of the hand ; ber |)dnbe, of the hands* 
 
 Dat. ber .f)anb, to the hand ; ben £)dnben, to the hands. 
 
 Ace. bte |)anb, the hand ; bte f)dnbe, the hands* 
 
 III. a. £)a$ Steb, the song. 
 
 Singula*r. Plural. 
 
 Nom. ba$ Steb, the song ; bte Cteber, the songs. 
 
 Gen. be$ 2tebe$, of the song ; ber fiteber, of the songs* 
 
 Dat. bem 8tebe, to the song ; ben Stebern, to the songs. 
 
 Ace. ba$ 8teb, the song ; bte Sieber, the songs* 
 
 III. b. Der ©etfl> the spirit. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. ber ©etft, the spirit ; bte ©etfrer, the spirits* 
 
 Gen. be§ @etire6, of the spirit; ber ©etjler, of the spirits. 
 
 Dat. bem ©et'fte, to the spirit ; t>en ©etftern, to the spirits* 
 
 Ace. ten ©etft, the spirit ; bte ©etfter, the spirits* 
 
 IV. a. Ser ©tral)t, the ray. 
 
 Singular. Plural* 
 
 Nom. ber ©trctfyl, the ray; bte ©trafyten, the rays 
 
 Gen. be£ ©trafyleS, of the ray; ber ©trafyfen, of the rays* 
 
 Dat. bem ©treble, to the ray; ben ©trafyfen, to the rays. 
 Ace. ben ©trafyf, the ray ; bte ©tracer the rays 
 
 IV. b. £)a3 Stu^e, the eye. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. b<x§> 2(u<je, the eye ; bte Sdtcjen, the eyes 
 
 Gen. be§ SdtgeS, of the eye ; ber 9(itc$en, of the eyes 
 
 Dat. bem 2UtO[e, to the eye ; ben Slug en, to the eyes 
 
 Ace. ba§> Stu^e, the eye ; bte 2(ugen, the eyes 
 
 17 
 
 i * 
 
394 
 
 V. J)er JWame, the name. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. ber Jftctme, the name ; bte Seamen, the names. 
 
 Gen. be$ 9ictmen3, of the name; ber stamen, of the names. 
 
 Dat. bem Seamen, to the name; ben ffJamen, to the names. 
 
 Ace. ben Stamen, the name ; bte 5Kamen, the names. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 The laws of euphony alone can decide, whether the termi- 
 nation of the genitive singular is to be $ or e£, and whether 
 the dative is to be like the nominative or to have e* Gener- 
 ally, however, nouns ending in b, b, t, ft, cfy, cj, f, 3, fefy, p, a 
 form their genitive in e 3, and their dative in e ; those ending 
 in ant), at, enb, tcfyt, tg, tng, Itng, rtd), fat, t|«m 
 have $ in the genitive, and the dative like the nominative. 
 
 § 33. Like Setter (I. a.) are inflected all masculine 
 and neuter substantives terminating in e \, e r or e it ; 
 diminutives in rf) e U and \ e t n ; and neuters in e, which 
 have the prefix g e ; as, ©erebe, ©etofe, talk, noise, &c. 
 Examples : — 
 
 £)er 2(pfci, apple ; bci$ ffitiftet, window ; 
 
 bet (Snfcl, grandchild ; bciS ©erotttcr, thunderstorm ; 
 
 ber QSeget, bird ; ber £)cgen, sword ; 
 
 ba$ (Skgel/ seal; ber ©cirten, garden; 
 
 ber TCbler, eagle ; ber 2Bagen / waggon ; 
 
 bet ©ruber, brother ; ba£ SBecfen, basin ; 
 
 ber drifter, master ; ba$ 3etd)en, signal. 
 
 90tfbd)en, girl, maiden ; 23ud)(etn, little book ; 
 
 QSeUcfyen, violet; SMumletn, floweret. 
 
 Gutter and £ed)ter, daughter, are the only feminine substantives 
 which retain in the plural the termination of the nominative sin- 
 gular. 
 
 § 34. Like ber f&anm (II. a.) are inflected the follow- 
 ing:— 
 
 1st, Masculines and neuters terminating in the affixes attb, 
 at, td)t, tg, tng, Hng, rid); e. g. £)eilanb, saviour; SKortat, 
 month ; ftdftg, cage ; ^duptltng, chieftain, &c. 
 
 2d, Many foreign substantives, such as, ber 3(bt, SUtar, 23t* 
 fdr)of, Sarbtrtal, ^alaft; the abbot, alter, bishop, cardinal, pal- 
 ace, <fec. 
 
395 ^ 
 
 W, All substantives ending in the affixes ntg and fat; 
 fe» bte gmjtermfj, darkness ; Senntmg, knowledge ; ba£ ©cfytcfr 
 fca fate ; Srarujfaf, calamity, &c. 
 
 ,'jike bte jpattb (II. b.) are declined the following fem- 
 inizes : — 
 
 2Cngft, anguish. Suft, air. 
 
 2Cu6flud)t, evasion. £uft, delight. 
 
 2Crt, axe. $Rlad)t, power. 
 
 93an£, bench. Stfagt), maid-servant. 
 
 gBtaut, bride. 9J?au$, mouse. 
 
 SBruJT, breast. $kafyt, night. 
 
 •JcmJT, fist. Sflafyt, seam. 
 
 grud)t, fruit. Sftotf), distress. 
 
 (S5an$, goose. 9?ufJ, nut. 
 
 (5k'fd)wutjr, swelling ©cm, sow. 
 
 ©vuft, tomb. ©cfynur, string. 
 
 £ctut, skin. (Stafct, city. 
 
 £(ufr, gulf. $$anfc>, wall. 
 
 Jtraft, force. 2BulJT, tumour, 
 
 Jtuf), cow. ££urjr, sausage, 
 
 ilunjt, arc. 3unft, guild. 
 2aus, lo«u} 
 
 To these are to be added the compounds of the words $unft and 
 toft, which ar^ never employed separately ; as, t>te Sufammetl* 
 funft, the meeting - Siriftoflc, pi., revenues ; 3eit(attftc, pi., junctures 
 (§ 27). 
 
 Remark. Masculines of this form generally modify the 
 radical vowel in the plural ; feminines always ; of neuters only 
 the following three : — fca$ St) or, the chorus ; ba$ ^fof?, the 
 raf 4 . ; ba§> 3?ot)r, the reed ; pi. ©bote, gtoge, 9Wfyre. 
 
 § 35. Substantives declined like ba^2ieb (III.) are gen- 
 erallj of the neuter gender, and masculine only by 
 way of exception. They always modify the vowel 
 of the root. Examples : — 
 
 2Cmt, office. £amm, lamb. 
 
 33uct), book. $li% nest. 
 
 iDorf, village. JKafc), wheel, 
 
 ©elb, money. (^crjtep, castle- 
 
 ©tab, grave. 83 off:, nation. 
 
 .Sraut, herb. ££etfc, woman. 
 
 So also all nouns ending in t^um; as, SKetcIjtrjUm, riches ; $tx* 
 jogtfyum, dukedom, and a few foreign words ; as, 3)avfamcnt, SiegU 
 ment, <Spttal. 
 
The masculines declined like g t e t are' as follows :— *-S5ofe* 
 tttdjt; villain; £ont, thorn; ©etft, spirit (III. b.); ©ott, God 
 getb, body ; 5ftamt, man (vir) ; £)rt, place ; JRcmb, border ; 
 SSormunb, guardian ; 2Batfc, wood ; ffiurm, worm. 
 
 § 36. Substantives inflected like ber ©trafyl (IV.) are 
 of the masculine and neuter genders. They are but 
 few in number and never modify the radical vowel in 
 the plural. They are : — 
 
 1st, Names of persons terminating in o r 5 as, Sector, tyto* 
 feflfor, ^ajtor, &c. Except : gaftor, &ectvop$ov, SSatafcor, and 
 also 93Meor, which have their plural in e. 
 
 2d, Foreign words which still have, or once had the Latin 
 termination t u m, as, (&tut> i it m, pi. &tni> i e n, studies ; @otfe> 
 gtam, pi. Sottegtert, lectures ; Sftserb, pi. Slbserbten, adverbs ; 
 also those ending in ti », as, grebttto, ©itbfrantt©, &e. ; those 
 terminating in a I or t 1 have t e rt in the plural, as, 3¥egal, pt 
 JRegal ten; goffU, pi. gofftl t e it. 
 
 3d, The following masculine substantives >— 
 
 £>otn, thorn. (See § 28.) ©pern, spnr. 
 
 $orjr, forest. <Stacbe(, sting. 
 
 (Scatter, god-father ©ttefel, boot, 
 
 fiorbcet/ laurel. ©trauf), ostrich. 
 
 5£ajt, mast. better, cousin. 
 
 9£ad)&at, neighbour. Untertfyan, subject. 
 
 9>fau, peacock. .Sicratf), finery. 
 (See, sea. 
 
 4th, To these may be added the following foreign 
 masculines : — 
 
 Eonful, consul. sptafect, prefect. 
 
 £)tfmon, demon. sjjtfaim, psalm. 
 
 SDiamont/ diamond. SHuOtn, ruby, 
 
 gafctn, pheasant. <§taat, state. 
 
 Smpeft, impost. £l)ron, throne. 
 
 SDluSUl, muscle. Sractat, treaty, 
 9)antoffe(, slipper. 
 
 5th, The following neuter words : — 
 
 tfuge, eye Snfect, insect. 
 
 S3ett, bed. spronom, pronoun. 
 
 (Snfce, end. ©tatut, statute. 
 
 £emt>, shirt. $erO, verb. 
 
 § 37. Like Name (V.) are inflected the following 
 
391 
 
 masculines: — ber Sucfyfiafce, letter ; $ete,rock; %xkty 
 peace ; %unte, spark ; ©ebcmfe, thought ; ©faube, faith 
 jjaufe, heap ; (game, seed ; ©cfyabe, detriment ; StBitfe, 
 will. These substantives, however, frequently assume 
 an n in the nominative ; e. g. ber $unfen, ©ebcutfen, 
 and then they follow the inflection of the first form 
 (»ater). 
 
 Remark. The word £er$, heart, has en 3 in the genitive, 
 and retains the e n in the dative singular and in all the cases 
 of the plural, thus :— 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 tie £ct$cn, 
 
 Nom. t)di fytxi, 
 
 Gen. beg £et$en$, 
 
 Dat. bem £cr$cn, 
 
 Ace. ta$ £er$; 
 
 ber .&cr^n, 
 ben |>cr#n, 
 
 btc ^er^cn. 
 
 The word ©d)mcr$, pain, has either c n $ or e I in the genitive, 
 and in the dative en or e. Nom. ber ©camera, Gen. be£ ©cl)mcr$cn$ 
 or (ScfymeqeS, Dat. bem (Scftmcqcn or ©demerge ; Nom. pi. bie 
 ©cfemeqcn* The word <^d)recf, terror, is also irregular : Nom. t>ct 
 6d)recf or ©cbrccfen, Gen. be$ <Sd)tecfen$ or (Scl)tedfc$, Dat. bem 
 Scbrecf or ©cfytecfen, Ace. ben <Sd)recf or ©cfyredfen ; Nom. pi. bti 
 gefyrecfen. 
 
 LATER DECLENSION. 
 
 § 38. Substantives of this declension are either 
 masculine or feminine. 
 
 Masculines form their genitive in tt or ett, and re- 
 tain that termination in all the remaining cases sin- 
 gular and plural. 
 
 Feminines being indeclinable in the singular, as- 
 sume the n or en in the plural only. 
 
 No nouns of this declension ever modify the radica. 
 vowels a, 0, U, or the diphthong an in the plural (§ 24). 
 
 TABULAR VIEW 
 
 OF 
 
 THE TERMINATIONS OF THE LATER 
 
 
 
 DECLENSION 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 given, j 
 en, n, 
 en, n, 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 en, n, 
 en, n, 
 en, n, 
 
 A co. 
 
 i 
 
 en, n. I 
 
 en, n. 
 
398 
 
 §39 PARAD.GMS 
 
 I. Oer ©raf, the count. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. ber ©raf, the count ; 
 Gen. beS ©rafen, of the count; 
 Dat. bem ©rafen, to the count ; 
 Ace. ben ©rafen, the count ; 
 
 Plural. 
 bte ©rafen, the counts 
 ber ©rafen, of the counts 
 bert ©rafen, to the counts 
 bte ©rafen, the counts. 
 
 II. ©er Srbe, the heir. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. ber (£rbe, the heir ; 
 
 Gen. be3 Srben, of the heir ; 
 Dat. bem Srben, to the heir ; 
 Ace. ten Srben, the heir ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bte (Srben, the heirs; 
 
 ber Srben, of the heirs ; 
 ben (£rben, to the heirs ; 
 bte ©rben, the heirs. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. bte $rau, the woman ; 
 Gen. ber $rau, of the woman ; 
 Dat. ber Srau, to the woman ; 
 Ace. bte §rau, the woman ; 
 
 III. £te Srati, the woman. 
 jar. Plural. 
 
 bte $ranen, the women ; 
 ber granen, of the women ; 
 ten grauen, to the women ; 
 bte $rauen, the women. 
 
 IV. £)te $eber, the pen. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. bte geber, 
 Gen. ber geber, 
 Dat. ber geber, 
 Ace. bte geber, 
 
 the pen ; 
 of the pen ; 
 to the pen; 
 
 the pen; 
 
 bte gebern, 
 ber gebern, 
 ben gebern, 
 bte gebern, 
 
 the pens . 
 of the pens ; 
 to the pens 
 
 the pens. 
 
 observations. 
 
 Obs. 1. When the nominative singular ends in e, or in 
 one of the unaccented affixes el, e r, a r, the genitive and re- 
 maining cases assume n only ; as, ber 8oroe, the lion, gen. be3 
 Somen; bte ^anjel, the pulpit, pi. bte 5?anseln; ber 93au* 
 er, the farmer, gen. be$ SSauern; otherwise en becomes ne- 
 cessary; e. g. ber^etb, the hero, gen. beS £elben; ber ©efeff, 
 the companion, gen. be3 ©efetten ; ber *}3oet, the poet, gen. be$ 
 ^Joeten ; bte $rau, plur. bte granen. 
 
 Obs. 2. Feminine substantives were formerly declined in 
 the singular number also ; this practice, however, has been 
 
399 
 
 retained only in certain adverbial expressions, in which the 
 substantive is connected with a preposition ; e. g. cutf @rbe n, 
 on earth; mtt greuben, with joy, joyfully; son <Setten fce3 
 SomcjS, from the part of the king; in ©naben, graciously; 
 mtt &)ven fterben, to die an honourable death ; nt ©chanter 
 roerben, to be put to shame, &c. ; sometimes e n seems to be 
 annexed simply for the sake of euphony ; as, fetner %vau i M 
 93ater, his wife's father, 
 
 § 40. To this declension belong the following clas- 
 ses of nouns : — 
 
 1st, Masculines of one syllable ; as, 25dr, ^ ea ? ; Stetf, S P°* } 
 giirft, prince; ©raf, count; £e(b, hero; £err (has $errn in 
 the gen. and dat. sing., but $ err en in the plur.), master; 
 $ftenfcf), man; Sftarr, fool; fj>fau, peacock; spring prince; 
 Xt)or, simpleton. 
 
 2d, Masculines terminating in e unaccented ; e. g. 
 
 2Cffe, the ape. $nappe, squire. 
 
 SBarbc, bard. 9?ad)fomme, descendant. 
 
 S3(irge, surety. S^effc, nephew. 
 
 3)rad)e, dragon. g)at^c, sponsor. 
 
 fiaih, hawk. jfetefe, giant. 
 
 ©cftulfe, assistant. ©cfa»e, slave. 
 
 ©6§e, idol. 3euge, witness. 
 £ttte, shepherd. 
 
 3d, Names of nations, such as are not derived from 
 the name of the country. They generally end also in 
 e; e. g. 
 
 bet JBcuet, the Bavarian. bet Sfiaute, the Moor, 
 
 bcr SBb'bme, the Bohemian. bet $)o(e, the Pole, 
 
 bet 23tttte, the Britain. bet Spteufk, the Prussian, 
 
 bet 93u(gat, the Bulgarian. bet SKuffe, the Russian, 
 
 bet Dane, the Dane. Uv ^ad)fe, the Saxon. 
 
 bet £)etitfd)e, the German. bet ®ti)Xvabc, the Swabian. 
 
 bet gxangofe, the Frenchman tcv ©cfyrocbe, the Swede, 
 
 bet (55rted>e / the Greek. bet Tartar, the Tartar. 
 
 bet £effe, the Hessian. bet Zmte, the Turk. 
 
 bet 3ube / the Jew. bet Ungcit, the Hungarian. 
 
 §41. 4th, Masculine substantives of foreign origin, termi- 
 nating in ant, a t df), at, e n t, x f, t ft r e t, 1 1, o t, o 3, o p b, 
 em 2C. ; e. g. bet ^rotejrant, SKonatd), Sanbtbat, ^rcUat, ©tit* 
 bent, ^tdfibent, SJat&oltf, Sttetfjobijr, Shrift, $oet, hornet, @re< 
 mtt, Sefiitt, Sbtct, Ifyeolocj, ^^tlobg, ^tnlofopfy, Sljrronem :c. 
 
 5th, All the feminine nouns in the language, except 
 
400 
 
 those mentioned above (§ 33 and § 34). They are 
 either monosyllables, as SBafytt, path ; *PfKd)t, duty, or 
 polysyllables, chiefly ending in e, el, er, aity. ft, ent>, 
 fyett, tun, fcfyctft, itng. The following maj serve as 
 examples : — 
 
 MONOSYLLABLES. 
 
 tfrt, kind. ©oat, seed. 
 
 SButcj, citadel. ©d)tad)t, battle. 
 
 g(ut, plain* ©pur, trace. 
 
 Sagb, chase. Sfyat, deed. 
 
 £afr, burden. 3af)(, number. 
 £lua(, torment. 
 
 POLYSYLLABLES. 
 
 2Ct6cit, labour. Cficttur, nature. 
 
 (Srntc, duck. £)f)nmad)t, impofawr ja 
 
 fennel, formula. ^ccfie, poetry. 
 
 (Regent), region. ^elic^ton, religion, 
 
 ^dnbfung, action. <Sd)uffc(, plate. 
 
 Suncjfer, maiden. Stoube, dove. 
 
 JUntgtnn, queen. Unttterfttat, univBr*ii> 
 
 Pctbcnfcbaft, passion. SBafytfydt, truth. 
 
 $ttad)rid)t, news. Bungc, tongue. 
 
 FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 § 42. 1st, With respect to substantives of foreign origin, w» 
 have already under each declension, noticed such as have ac 
 commodated their termination to the analogy of German words 
 There are some, however, which still appear in their original 
 form unaltered ; as, ber 9Kebtcu6, the physician; ber (£afu$, the 
 case ; ba3 factum, the fact ; ba£ Ifyema, the theme, &c. These 
 are cither indeclinable in the singular ; as, ber Stents, the 
 clergy, gen. be3 Sleru£, dat. bem SleniS, &c, or they as- 
 sume 3 in the genitive ; as, bct£ factum, Sttbttnbuum, the fact, 
 individual, gen. be$ $actum£, SnbunbmtmS- 
 
 2d, In the plural, foreign nouns either assume en (§ 36); 
 as, SBerbum, verb, pi. SSerben; ©iubutm, study, pi. ©tubt'en; 
 or they retain in all cases the original termination of the nomi 
 native plural ; as, 9!ftebtct, 9Rufict, SafuS, fiacta, tfyemata. 
 
 3d, Masculine and neuter substantives, adopted from the 
 French or English, generally take § in the genitive singular, 
 and retain it in all the cases of the plural ; ber Corb, gen. be$ 
 £orb$, pi. bte SotbS ; ber (Sfyef, tne chieftain, gen. be$ ©)ef& 
 pi. bte (SbefS; botS ®eme, the genius, ger. be$ @ente% pi. bte 
 ©ente% &c (§ 24. Rule III.) 
 
401 
 
 DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 
 
 § 43. Proper nouns are either names of Persons^ 01 
 names of Countries and Places. 
 
 Names of persons are declined either with or icithout 
 the article. 
 
 I. When preceded by either of the articles (em or ber), 
 names of persons are not varied in the singular, the 
 different cases being sufficiently indicated by the in- 
 flection of the article ; as, ber ©emitter, gen. be3 ©emitter, 
 dat. bem ©emitter, ace. ten ©cfjttfer; em Sutfyer, gen. emeg 
 gutter, dat. ernem Sutler, ace. einen Sutler* 
 
 Exception* If the genitive of the name of a male limiting the 
 meaning of another word is connected with an adjective, and placed 
 before the governing word, it assumes the termination g ; as, £>eg gte* 
 gen ^ant v ^ 8&cvU, the works of the great Kant ; be$ bmifymten 
 )D u r e r * $ ©emalbe, the paintings of the celebrated Diirer. 
 
 § 44. II. When not connected with the article, mas- 
 culine names ending in £, % fd), X f J, and feminines end- 
 ing in e, form their genitive in e n 3 ; all other names, 
 both masculine and feminine, including also diminu- 
 tives in cfyen, form their genitive in '$ simply; e. g, 
 sfflax, gen. tyflax e n $ ; 33og, gen. SSo# e n $ ; frmife, gen. 
 ?otrifen$; but Hermann, gen. §ermamt'£; (Sari, gen. 
 Sari 9 8 ; £an£df)en (Jonny), gen. £an$d)en £ ; iibelfyeib, gen. 
 21beff)eib' g. 
 
 Remark I. In the dative and accusative singular it has been 
 customary to annex the termination en. It is better, however, to 
 leave those cases like the nominative, and to prefix the article, 
 when ambiguity would otherwise arise; e. g. nom. ^effing, gen. 
 fccfjtnq'S, dat. (torn) Ccfftng (better than Ccfjtngen), ace. (fc>cn) 2efftn$. 
 
 Rem. 2. Names of Latin or Greek origin were formerly 
 inflected after the manner of Latin nouns ; e. g. nom. <Pciuhi$, 
 gen. tyauli, dat. ^cutte, ace. ^cutlum ; ^latom'S ©efprdcfye, 
 Plato's dialogues ; ©cerorriS 3teben, Cicero's orations, &c. 
 Now, however, they follow the analogy of German nouns, and 
 the ancient mode of inflection is only retained in a few expres- 
 sions, as, gfyrifH ©eluirt, &c; e.g. ^(ato'S ©efprdcfye ; St* 
 cero'3 9?ebert ; ^bdbruS' %abd\\ ° r bte $abe(n ^ ^dbntS, the 
 fables of Phtedrus ; ber JRetcfytfyum be3 SrofitS, the wealth oJ 
 Croesus. 
 
402 
 
 PLURAL OF PROPER NAMES. 
 
 § 45. The plural of proper names is only employed when 
 the same name is common to several individuals ; as, bte 
 ©cfylegef, bte £ermanne, persons of the name of ©cfyfegef, $er* 
 matin ; or when they are converted into common nouns 
 (§5.); as, bte 9ceutone unferer ^zxt, the Newtons of our 
 age, <&c. 
 
 Rules. The inflection of proper names in the plural 
 number is not influenced by the article, and the radi- 
 cal vowels (a, 0, U, an) are never modified. 
 
 When the names are masculine, terminating in a, e, 
 i, a I, e I, t f, e r, e n or d£) e n, the plural remains unaltered. 
 
 All other masculine names of German origin, and 
 foreign names ending in a m, It, form their plural by 
 adding e to the nom. sing. ; but those ending in o, add 
 ne. Examples : — 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 PZwr 
 
 (Setta, 
 
 (bte) Gotta. 
 
 2£t>Clpf), 
 
 (tic) 
 
 2Ct>0(pf}C. 
 
 (Scimpc, 
 
 „ (Sampc. 
 
 ^agefcorn, 
 
 // 
 
 £aa,et>otne. 
 
 $anmbal, 
 
 „ Cannibal. 
 
 ©»», 
 
 // 
 
 £)mt>c. 
 
 gRttetC. 
 
 „ 9Eeter. 
 
 SKclanc^tfjon/ 
 
 // 
 
 2Refond)tf)one 
 
 SKo&fyen, 
 
 „ SKoScfyen. 
 
 (Sato, 
 
 // 
 
 ©atone. 
 
 The dative plural always assumes the termination 
 It, unless the nominative already ends in that letter ; 
 as, ben gutfyer n, SBMattcfytfyone it, &c, to the Luthers, 
 Melanchthons, &c. 
 
 Names of females invariably add eitorn in every 
 case of the plural ; as, ftlota, pi. gforct'tt, SlUfe, Smfett, 
 $ebtt>tg, pi. §ebtt>igen. 
 
 § 46. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. gutter, 
 Gen. gutter's, 
 Dat (bem) gutter, 
 Ace. (ben) Sutler; 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 
 Masculines. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. (bte) gutter, 
 
 Gen. bet* gutter, 
 
 Dat. (ben) gutfyern, 
 
 Ace. (bte) gutter. 
 
 * In the genitive plural the article is necessary to point out the case ($ 5. 6th 
 
403 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. 2et6m£, 
 Gen. getbmgenS, 
 Dat. (bem) getbmg, 
 Ace. (ben) getbntg; 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. Hermann, 
 Gen. |)ermann% 
 Dat. (tern) Hermann, 
 Ace (ben) Hermann; 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. ©otfce, 
 Gen. ©ot^e'S, 
 Dat. (bem) ©6tt;e, 
 Ace. (ben) ©btl)e; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. (bte) Setbmge, 
 Gen. ber Setbmise, 
 Dat. (ben) £etbm|en, 
 Ace. (bte) getbmge. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. (bte) £ermanne 
 Gen. ber £ermanne, 
 Dat. (ben) $ermannett v 
 Ace. (bte) £)ermanne. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. (bte) ©otfye, 
 
 Gen. ber ©otfye, 
 
 Dat. (ben) ©ctfyen, 
 
 Ace. (bte) ©otfye. 
 
 FeMININES. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. SSertfca, 
 
 Gen. Serb's, 
 
 Dat. (ber) SSertfya, 
 
 Ace. (bte) 93ertfya; 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. ©ertraub, 
 Gen. ©ertraub% 
 Dat. (ber) ©ertraub 
 Ace. (bte) ©ertraub 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. gutfe, 
 
 Gen. gutfenS, 
 
 Dat. (ber) gmfe, 
 
 Ace. (bte) Sutfe; 
 
 Singular, 
 Nom. Suite, 
 Gen. 3ulten3, 
 Dat. (ber) Suite, 
 Ace. (bte) Suite; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. (bte) 9Sertt>a'n, 
 
 Gen. ber SSertfya'n, 
 
 Dat. (ten) 93ertfya'n, 
 
 Ace. (bte) 33ertfya'n. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. (bte) ©ertrauben. 
 Gen. ber ©ertrauben, 
 Dat. (ben) ©ertrauben, 
 Ace. (bte) ©ertrauben. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. (bte) Cutfen, 
 Gen. ber Sutfen, 
 Dat. (ben) Sutfen, 
 Ace. (bte) Ctttfen. 
 
 Nom 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 (bte) %uiitti, 
 
 ber %ulkn, 
 
 (ben) Sulten, 
 
 (bte) Sulten, 
 
 
404 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Ols. 1. The termination en$ of the genitive singular belong* 
 particularly to feminine names in c. With respect to masculines, 
 in $, p, I'd), r, fa the practice of substituting '$, or a simple apostrophe, 
 instead of en$, is becoming more frequent ; e. g. Si'tbtug'S ^Ijilcjopfyic, 
 the philosophy of Leibnitz ; 9#on§ ^cgjcfy'S Umttjfe $u (Scroller's 2id& 
 »oa t>cr ©Iciic, Retzsch's Illustrations to Schiller's Song of the Bell, 
 
 § 47. Ofo. 2. When a family name is preceded by one 
 or more christian names, or common nouns without an article, 
 the family name alone is inflected ; e. g. 3^^ attn Spetnrtd) 
 93offert3 (or simply 58og'$) Ueberfeguttgen, John Henry 
 Voss's translations ; $6mg J r * e & r * cf) ' 3 Sebert, the life of 
 King Frederick. 
 
 Ofo. 3d, But if the article precedes, in connection with the 
 word £)err, or a common noun designating some title or office. 
 the proper name is not inflected ; as, ba$ £) an $ be§ £)etrn 5R it k 
 ler, the house of Mr. Mailer ; bte 'Ifyaten beS ftatferd Sari 
 be$ 3ft n ft en / tne ex pl°its of the Emperor Charles V. ; §&$> ©tanb* 
 bttb be£ grofjert StcfyterS © 6 tl) e, the statue of the great poet 
 Goethe. 
 
 NAMES OF COUNTRIES AND PLACES. 
 
 § 48. 1. Names of countries, places, rivers, mountains, &c. 
 which are of the masculine or feminine gender, are generally ac- 
 companied by the article (§ 5), and declined like common nouns ; 
 as, bte ©cfywetj, gen. ber ©df) wet's, dat. ber ©comet's, acc » fcte 
 ©cfyroets ; ber SBretSgau, gen. be$ -SretSgau'S, &c. ; ber 3?fyetn, 
 gen. be$ 3tyetrteS, &c. ; bte Ifyemfe, gen. ber tfyemfe, &c. 
 
 2. Neuter names of countries and places, not terminating 
 in 3, 5 or x, have the sign $ in the genitive and remain unal- 
 tered in all the other cases ; e. g. bte Unttterfitaten Seutfcfj* 
 lanbS, the Universities of Germany ; 9?u£tcmb$ S(bet, the no- 
 bility of Russia ; et fommt son 53eritn (dat.), he comes from 
 Berlin , nacf) Setpjt'g (ace), to Leipzig, &c. 
 
 3. Since names of places which end in g, fa % do not admit 
 of an additional § in the genitive, for the sake of euphony, it is 
 customary to put them in apposition with the genitive of some 
 word like © t a b t, © o r f, $ e ft u rt g (town, village, fort), or to 
 prefix the preposition con; e. g. bte @t'nwot)net ber ©tabt 
 *part$ (or sort ^partS) the inhabitants of the city of Paris ; bte 
 Cage sort SKams, the situation of Mentz 
 
405 
 
 IV. GOVERNMENT 
 
 § 49. 1st, When a substantive is the subject of a proposi* 
 tion, it is always in the nominative case, and governs the verb 
 in number and person. 2Ber raft? ©er 93ater, bet $ramb 
 unb bte Sofyne rafen. Who travel? The father, the friend, 
 and the sons are travelling. 
 
 2d, In the oblique cases, i. e. in the genitive, dative, and 
 accusative, nouns are governed either by other nouns, or by 
 adjectives, verbs, prepositions, &c. ; e. g. bte Wtv&tzx b e 3 
 £ a life 3, the mother of the house; ber ©tvafe ttntrbtg, 
 worthy of punishment; etnen 35 rt e f fcfyretben, to write a 
 letter ; auf D e m 8 a n b e, in the country. We shall here 
 only consider the relation which one substantive may sustain 
 to another. 
 
 § 50. Substantives which stand in the relation of equality 
 to each other, are put in the same case. They may be thus 
 related : — 
 
 1st, When one is added to another, for the sake of explana- 
 tion, or is put in apposition with it; e. g. 2Btlbetm ber (Jro* 
 b e x e r, William, the Conqueror ; 3fyr f ettnei t'brt, ten © d) o * 
 p f e r fiibner £)eere, ye know him, the creator of bold armies ; 
 tfym, metnem 2Bob(tb<iter, to him, my benefactor. 
 
 2d, When one constitutes the predicate to the other ; as, 
 fetn 93ater tjl $bntg geroorben, his father has become king; 
 er t jl metit % x e u n b, he is my friend. 
 
 3d, When one is compared with another ; as, ber Xburm tft 
 bofyer ct($ ber 93 a u m, the tower is higher than the tree. 
 
 4th, When several substantives constitute a compound sub- 
 ject to one verb; e. g. ©cfybnbett unb Sugettb- treten in t'bre 
 ttotte 9ted)te wteber em. Beauty and Youth are fully reinstated 
 to their former rights. 
 
 § 51. 1st, A substantive which stands in the relation of 
 cause, origin, possession, mutual connection, &c, to another, is 
 put in the genitive; e. g. ber ©efcmg ber 93b get, the sing- 
 ing of birds ; ber © d) op fer b e v 2S e 1 t, the creator of the 
 world; bctS £au3 be$ 5taufmctnn3, the house of the mer- 
 3hant; bee @d)roejrer b e$ SJaterS, the sister of the father. 
 
 2d, The genitive is often employed adverbially to express 
 the relation of time, locality or manner; be$ 93iorgen3, be$ 
 9)?tttagS, be3 2lbenb3, in the morning, at noon, in the evening; 
 btefigen OrteS, of this place ; §ute$> s Hhttbe3 fetn, to be of good 
 cheer ; unoerrtcbteter ©acfye, without accomplishing one's pur- 
 pose. 
 
406 
 
 8d, A substantive which has a partitive signification is fol 
 lowed by a genitive of the whole ; e. g. bte SSdttme etneS @ar* 
 ten*v the trees of a garden ; ba§> Sad) be§ £>aufe$, the roof oi 
 the house. 
 
 4th, If, however, the partitive substantive points out a num* 
 ber 3 measure or weight, the name of the material numbered, 
 measured, &c, is more frequently put in apposition with it 
 than in the genitive ; as, etne 9Q?ewje $ t n h e r, a number of 
 children; mtt fiinf Dugenb ©tern, with five dozen of eggs; 
 etn ^actr ©ttefel, a pair of boots. But when the thing 
 measured has an adjective or other declinable word connected 
 with it, the genitive is required; as, jroet glctfcfyen f ojHtcfyen 
 2Beme3, two bottles of superior wine; etn ^funb fttfdjer 
 Sutter, a pound of fresh butter. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 52. An adjective is a word which limits the 
 meaning of substantives. 
 
 Every adjective may generally be employed in two 
 different relations* viz : 
 
 1st, The quality expressed by it may be conceived as inde- 
 pendent of the subject, and be asserted of it by a formal act 
 of judgment ; as, ba3 £)au3 t)l Q V %, the house is large ; tie 
 9?ofe tjt rotl), the rose is red. The adjective thus used is 
 called predicative, and is never inflected in German. 
 
 2d, The quality expressed by it may be so intimately con- 
 nected with the substantive as to form one complex idea with 
 it, and then the adjective is termed attributive ; as, fcaS 9 r D % t 
 £)au$, the large house ; bte r Dt^ e 3tofe, the red rose. 
 
 Remark. The predicative adjective stands usually after the 
 verbs f e t n, to be ; rc> c r t> e n, to become, and b t e t b e n, to remain ; 
 sometimes also after certain transitive verbs ; e. g. t>cr £tmmcl toat 
 b I a u, the sky was blue ; tic 9?ad)t tmrfc) t) u n t e t, the night be- 
 comes dark; t>ci$ $(ctfc bfctbt fauber, the dress remains clean; 
 Hug macfyen, to make wise ; g r ii n fd'tbcn, to die green, &c. 
 
 § 53. Some adjectives can only be employed in the 
 predicative sense, as : — 
 
 abtyclfc), disaffected ; brad), fallow ; 
 
 cmcjft, distressed, afraid ; eincjcfcenf, remembering ; 
 
 betett, ready ; feint), hostile ; 
 
407 
 
 gat, dons ; net!), needful ; 
 
 g&ng unb (jefce, current ; nu§, useful ; 
 
 gefyajj, hating ; quet, diagonal, cross ; 
 
 getroft, of good cheer ; quirt, free from ; 
 
 gram, bearing a grudge ; tfyeilfyaft, partaking of; 
 
 trte, stray ; unpap, indisposed, ill ; 
 
 t unb, known ; oerlufttg, losing, 
 teib, sorry ; 
 
 § 54. Others again can only be used as attribu« 
 tives : — 
 
 1st, Those terminating in e t n, en, and indicating the .Aaterial 
 of which anything is made ; e. g. bet lebetne £anbfd)uf), the leather 
 glove ; bog fetbene £al$tud), the silk cravat; — but, bet #cmbfd)ufj xft: 
 v o n 2 e b c r, bet 9?tng ift t> o n (3 o I b, the glove is (made) of 
 leather, the ring is (made) of gold. 
 
 2d, All superlatives, ordinal numerals, and certain adjectives 
 formed from adverbs of time and locality ; e. g. bet greffte, bet 
 groeite, bet btttte K., the tallest, the second, the third, &c. ; — botttCj, 
 fjeurtq, fyieftg, geftrtg, morgenb, from bort, there ; fjcute, to-day ; r)ier, 
 in this place ; geftetn, yesterday ; mcrgen, to-morrow. 
 
 3d, Many derivatives ending in tfd) and (id), including also 
 adjective names of nations ; as, btebtfcf), thievish ; notbifcrj, northern; 
 roortud), literal ; anfa'ngftd), original ; beutfd), German ; frans8fi{d), 
 French ; cng(tfdr), English, &c. 
 
 We are to consider, 1st, the inflection, 2d, the comparison 
 and 3d, the use and government of adjectives. 
 
 I. INFLECTION. 
 
 $ 55. When an adjective is used in the attributive 
 relation, certain terminations are added to it, indica- 
 tive of the gender, the number, and the case of the sub- 
 stantive to which it is united ; e. g. QUt e V Sffiettt, good 
 wine ; etrter fcfyjrten 33fume, of a fair flower ; bag Mem e 
 SSurf), the small book. 
 
 All attributive adjectives of every degree of com- 
 parison are susceptible of three different modes of in- 
 flection, denominated the first, second, and third declen- 
 sions. 
 
408 
 
 fhb following table exhibits the terminations of the 
 three declensions. 
 
 Singular. 
 First Declension. Second Declension. Third Declension 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 A-cc. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 cr. 
 
 C 
 
 C$ 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 C 
 
 cr 
 
 e 
 
 c$/ en 
 
 er 
 
 ft, cn 
 
 en 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 cm 
 
 et 
 
 cm 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 en 
 
 c 
 
 c$ 
 
 cn 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 cn 
 
 e 
 
 Neut. 
 C$ 
 
 cn 
 cn 
 e* 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 1st 2d Sd 
 Decl. Decl. Decl. 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 Nom. 
 
 c 
 
 cn 
 
 Gen. 
 
 cr 
 
 cn 
 
 Dat, 
 
 cn 
 
 cn 
 
 Ace. 
 
 c 
 
 cn 
 
 Remark. The first declension of adjectives corresponds to the 
 earlier declension of substantives, and presents the greatest varie- 
 ty of terminations ; so also the second possesses the characteris- 
 tics of the later declension of substantives (the c n in the genitive 
 and remaining cases). The third declension is composite, partak- 
 ing of the character of both. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 § 56. When an adjective is preceded by no othei 
 limiting word, or by one which is indeclinable, it as- 
 sumes the terminations of the definite article* in all 
 its cases singular and plural, and is said to be inflected 
 according to the first declension, thus : — 
 
 * With this difference, that in the nom. and ace. neuter singular ti^e jmJ 
 iective has c 9 instead of a 8. 
 
409 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 guter, gate, 
 
 HSU}*** 
 
 Dat. gutem, guter, 
 Axjc. guten, gute, 
 
 Neut. 
 guteS, 
 
 ; gttten, 
 gutem, 
 gute^ ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 Nom. gute, good, 
 
 Gen. guter, of good, 
 
 Dat. guten, to good, 
 Ace. gute, good 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 
 I. Masculine 
 Singular. 
 28 em, red wine, 
 
 SBetneS, of red wine, 
 
 rotfyer 
 
 rotbeS 
 
 rotten 
 
 rotfyem SBetne, to red wine, 
 
 rotten 2Bem, red wine ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 rotfye 2Beme, 
 
 rotter SBetne, 
 
 rotten 2Betnen\ 
 votfye SBetne. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fiige grudjte, 
 juger Sriicfyte, 
 fiigen $tiicr)tet<, 
 fiige $riid)te. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 gute ©elber, 
 
 guter ©etber, 
 
 guten ©elberr?, 
 gute @eft>er. 
 
 Ota. ls£. The following are some of the indeclinable words 
 which may precede the adjective without affecting its termination* 
 c t n> a $, some ; g e n u g, enough ; a ( I e t [ e t, of various sorts ; m e \) t, 
 more ; t) t e (, much ; tt) e n t g, little ; in the plural the numerals 
 I m e i, b t e t, &c. e. g. g c n u g rotfjer £Betn, enough red wine ; a U 
 I e r ( c t fupe $rud)t, a variety of sweet fruit ; to i n i g gute$ SBrob, 
 little good bread. 
 
 Obs. 2d. We are to regard e £ as the regular termination of the 
 genitive singular masculine and neuter, though en most always 
 takes its place for the sake of euphony, when the noun itself has 
 e$ in the genitive; e. g. gut en 2Betne5, fatte n SBaffetS, of cold wa- 
 ter ; (mat en ©elbeg, of ready money. 
 
 II. Feminine, 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. fuge $xud)t, sweet fruit, 
 Gen. fuget $rucr;t, of sweet fruit, 
 Dat. fiiger §rud)t, to sweet fruit, 
 Ace. fiige grucfyt, sweet fruit ; 
 
 III. Neuter. 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. guteS ©eft), good money, 
 
 Gen. ^ U T^ j ©eft>e$, of good money, 
 
 Dat. gutem ©elbe, to good money, 
 Ace. guteS ©eft), good money ; 
 
 18 
 
410 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 § 57. An adjective belongs to the second declen- 
 sion, when it is preceded either by the definite article, 
 bet, tie, bd$, by a demonstrative or relative pronoun, or 
 an indefinite numeral. It then assumes the termination 
 cin the nominative singular for all genders, and in the 
 accusative singular feminine and neuter, and the ter- 
 mination e n in all the remaining cases singular and 
 plural. 
 
 The pronouns and indefinite numerals are : — 
 
 btefer, btefe, btefeS, this ; 
 jcner, jene, jeneS, that, yonder; 
 berfclOe, btefdOe, bafielbe, the same ; 
 berjenige, btejentge, baSientge, that ; 
 welder, roefcfye, roe(d)e$, who, which ; 
 fotc^er, fo(d)e, fotcfyeS, such ; 
 jeber, jet>e, jebeS, 7 , 
 
 jegltrf)er, [*$&, iegttcf)e$, 5 
 allcr, die, all e$, all ; 
 
 etntger, eintge, ctntgcS, ) 8eV er*i- 
 
 ctltd>er, etttctK, etlttf e$, $ some ' severa -> 
 manner, manege, mandjeS, many a, &c, 
 
 § 58. PARADIGMS. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 
 
 N. bet gute, bte gute, ba$ gute, bte guten, the good, 
 G. be$ guten, ber guten, be$ guten, 
 D. bem guten, ber guten, bem guten, 
 A, ben guten, bte gute, t>a& gute ; 
 
 t>te guien, uie gooa, 
 ber guten, of the good, 
 ten guten, to the good, 
 bte guten, the good 
 
 I. Stefer roetfe 9D?ann, this wise man. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. btefer roetfe $?cmn,. 
 Gen. btefeS roetfen 90?anne$, 
 Dat. btefem metfen Sftanne, 
 Ace. btefen roetfen 9J?ann ; 
 
 btefe roetfen Scanner, 
 btefer roetfen Scanner, 
 btefen wetfen SOWnnent, 
 btefe roetfen Scanner. 
 
 II. 3ebe fcfyone 33(ume, each fair flower. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom, jebe fcfyone 33lume, I rcekfye fcfyonen 93(umen? 
 
 Gen. jeber fcfyonen 95(ume, | welder fcfyonen 93 lumen? 
 
 Dat. jeber fcfyonen SSlume, roetcfyen fcfyimen SStumen? 
 
 A.cc. jebe fd)6ne SSfume* raelcfye fcfyonen 93fumen? 
 
411 
 
 III. ^eneZ grime $etb, yonder green :ield. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom jetted griine $e(b, 
 
 Gen jeneS grirnen SelbeS, 
 
 Dat. jenem crimen $elbe, 
 
 Ace. jene£ grime $e(b ; 
 
 jene grimen $e(ber, 
 jener grimen $elber, 
 jenen grimen gelbern, 
 jene griinen $etber. 
 
 So decline : berfctbc rotr;e SBetn, the same red wine ; tic fceffete 
 grud&t (pi. grfid&te), the better fruit ; roc(d)C$ ncufte JKeib (pi. Jttcit>er) ? 
 which newest garment 1 
 
 observations. 
 
 1st, According to the usage of many writers the adjective rejects 
 the n in the nom. and ace. plural, when it is preceded by one of 
 the words c t n i g e, some ; c 1 1 1 cf) e, nie^rf or m c f) r e r c, seve- 
 ral ; moncbe, t> t c ( c, many ; a I ( e, all ; as, alle ftetfnge @d)ftlcr, all 
 diligent scholars ; mete ebte OTenfcben, many noble men, &c. It is 
 not necessary, however, to make this exception to the general rule. 
 
 2d, When the definite article, being preceded by a preposition, 
 coalesces with it into one word (§ 10), the inflection of the adjec- 
 tive is not thereby altered ; e. g. burcfysgrune getb, through the 
 green field ; i m g r c p e n £aufe, in the great house. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 § 59. An adjective is inflected according to the 
 third declension, when it is preceded either by the in- 
 definite article, by a personal or possessive pronoun, or by 
 the singular of the indefinite numeral i e t it, no, none. 
 It assumes the terminations of the first declension in 
 the nominative singular of all genders (er, e, e$), and in 
 the accusative singular feminine and neuter (e, e$) 
 and the terminations of the second declension in all 
 the remaining cases. 
 
 The pronouns are : personal, td), bu, er, fte, e£, tmr, tfyr, fte, 
 I, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they ; possessive, mem, bem, fettt, 
 tinfer, euer, ttyr, my, thy, his, our, your, her (the'ir). 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. For all genders 
 
 Nom. em (jitter, eirte gute, em guteS, feme guren, 
 
 Gen. emeS guten, etner guten, eme$ guten, femer guten, 
 
 Dat. etnem guten, etner guten,, emem guten, fetnen guten, 
 
 Ace. etnen guten, erne gute, em guteS; feme guten. 
 
412 
 
 I. SERetn guter SSruber, my good brother. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. mem guter SSruber, 
 Gen. metnei gtiten SSruberS, 
 • metnem guten SSruber, 
 metnen guten 93ruber 5 
 
 Dat 
 Aoc 
 
 Plural. 
 
 metne guten 93riiber, 
 metner guten SSriiber, 
 mei'nen guten Sritbern, 
 metne guten 35riiber. 
 
 II. 3|rc jungfle ©cfywefter, her youngest sister. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Singular, 
 itive jungjre ©cfywefter, 
 t^rer jungften ©dweller, 
 tfyrer jungften ©cfyroejter, 
 tfyre jungjre ©cfyroefter ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tyre jiingjren ©cfyweftern, 
 xfyrer jungften ©cfyroeftew, 
 ifyren jungften ©cfywoeftern, 
 ifyre jungften ©cfyweftew. 
 
 III. Unfer gro0e$ $au§>, our large house. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 unfer grogeS £au$, 
 unfreS grogen £aufe£, 
 unferm grogen £>aufe, 
 unfer groge£ £au3 ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 unfre grogen Jenifer, 
 unfrer grogen £aufer, 
 unfern grogen §)aufew, 
 unfre grogen £)dufer. 
 
 So decline : fetn fcfyonerer lag (g^n. 'JageS), no finer day, 
 feme angenefyme 3?etfe (pi. 3?etfen), his pleasant journey 5 bein 
 guteS fttnb (gen. S?mbe£, pi. Sfr'nber), thy good child. 
 
 Remark. The adjective is declined in the same manner when 
 it follows one of the personal pronouns id), I ; t>u, thou ; rotr, we ; 
 tf)t (<Stc), } r ou ; except in the genitive case, where the definite ar- 
 ticle must be supplied ; e. g. id) ormcr 93?ann, 1 poor man ; gen. 
 metncr, b e 6 armen Wlcmm$, of me, the poor man ; dat. mtr ox* 
 men 9#cmnc, to me poor man ; ace. mid) armen 93lann, me poor man. 
 So also, bu gute Gutter, thou good mother ; gen. b e t n e r, bet gu? 
 ten SOUitter, &c. ; tf)r guten Scute, you good people.; dat. cud) guten 
 Seuten ; ace. cud) guten Ceute, &c 
 
 observations on the three declensions. 
 
 § 60. Obs. 1st. When adjectives, terminating in c (, er, en, are 
 inflected, they frequently drop the c of those terminations for the 
 sake of euphony ; as, ctn ebtcr (instead of cbc(cr) @of)n, a mag 
 nanimons son ; bcr cbne (for eh c n e) SQBcg, the smooth road ; bte bits 
 t r c (instead of tutt ere) jrucbt, the bitter fruit. Sometimes this c is 
 retained, and that of the syllable of inflection is rejected in its stead, 
 especially in the dative case ; as, ctn fyetttet Jbtmmcl, clear sky, gen. 
 etnc$ fyettren £tmme($, dat. etnem fjett em (not belt c r c n or fyett ten) 
 
413 
 
 pixtmct, &c. ; ten cb e ( n, fyett e r n £eqen, to the generous, cheerful 
 hearts. 
 
 Obs. 2d. The attributive adjective is frequently left 
 uninflected like the predicative. This is the case : — 
 
 1st, When it is placed after its substantive, as the predicate of 
 an abridged proposition ; as, bte JUtppc, f cf) r o f f unt) ft e t i, the cliff, 
 rough and steep ; fctc S3ltcfc, fret unt) f cffcl(o$ ercjcrjen fid) in uns 
 gemepnen SKaumen (@d)tUcr), the eyes, free and unshackled, roam 
 through the measureless abyss of space. 
 
 2d, In poetry and conversational German, the e 5 is often dropped 
 in the ace. neut. sing, of the first and third declensions ; as, cj u t (for 
 gut c S) 23tetv good bread ; alt (Sufen, old iron ; cm u r a ( t £Bort, an 
 ancient saying, &c. 
 
 3d, When the adjective is used adverbially, to limit the meaning 
 of another adjective ; as, cm gang netted £au$, a house entirely 
 new; tie uncrroortct frer)e £ftacbrid)t, intelligence cheering be- 
 yond expectation ; cm n c u ctngcOunfcencg 23uc1), a newly bound 
 book. 
 
 If in these cases the adjective is inflected, the sense is entirely al- 
 tered : — cin gcrngeg, netted £au$, an entire, new house ; fete unerroartete, 
 ftcfye 9^ad)rtcbt, the unexpected, cheering intelligence ; em ncucS, etn* 
 gcbunfcenes 53ucb, a new book, bound. 
 
 § 61. Obs. 3d. If a substantive in the genitive limits the mean- 
 ing of another substantive, and is placed before it, so that the lat- 
 ter loses its article (§ 9), the adjective connected with the latter 
 substantive must be inflected according to the first declension ; e. g, 
 feine£ SSatcrS jiinqircr ©er)n, instead of: t>ct funajte <Sobn fetne$ 
 SSatcrS, his father's youngest son ; unfreS £aufc$ greater <Sau(c, in- 
 stead of: t>er groftcn <Sau(e unfere^ £aufc£, to the greatest pillai 
 of our house. 
 
 Obs. 4th. When two or more adjectives are con- 
 nected with the same substantive, they all follow the 
 same rules of inflection : — 
 
 I. ©uter, rotfyer, (autrer 2Betn, good, red, pure wine. 
 Nom. filter, rctber^ (autrer 2Bctn, 
 
 Gen tguten, rotten, (autrcn 5 m ™*' 
 Dat. gutem, retbem, lauterm SBctnc, 
 Ace. (wren, rotten, lautern SQBctn. 
 
 II. 2)te retfe, fefyone, gute $rucl)t, the ripe, fair, good fruit. 
 
 Nom. bte retfe, febone, gute Jrucfyt, 
 Gen. fc>ct retfen, ftyoncn, gutcn 5rud)t, tu 
 
4ft 
 
 III. Unfet fcfyoneS, cjriineS ©ta$, our fine, green giver 
 
 Nom. unfer fcboncS,- gtiines ©rag, 
 Gen. unfreS fc^oncn, Qttmen ©tafeS, ic. 
 
 With respe .*.t to case I, however, usage is not decidedly estab- 
 lished, as the last adjective frequently follows the inflection of the 
 1st declension in the nom. sing, and plur. only, and that of the 
 2d declension in all the remaining cases : rcarme, frifcfye 50?Ucb, warm, 
 fresh milk, gen. and dat. warmer, frifcl) e n 932tld) ; cjute$, roetpeS S3tot>, 
 good white bread, gen. cjuteS, roetpen SStotcS, dat. cjutem, wetpen 
 33tot>e,pl. gute, roetpe S3tot>e, gen. Quter tvetpen SBro^c, it 
 
 II. COMPARISON. 
 
 § 62. In German, as in English, there are two 
 modes of comparing adjectives, called the terminational 
 and the compound comparisons. 
 
 The former makes the comparative and superlative 
 by adding certain terminations to the simple form of 
 the positive ; the latter by prefixing to it the adverbs 
 of comparison : m e I) r, more ; am m e i ft e tt or fy 5 d) ft, 
 most. 
 
 Rule I. The terminational comparative is formed by ad- 
 ding e r, and the terminational superlative by adding ft or e ft 
 to the root of the positive ; e. g. frol), comp. frot) e r, superl. fro* 
 pt ft, glad, glader, gladest ; retcf), tetcfy e r, vcid) ft, rich, richer, 
 richest ; fcfyiirt, fcfyon e r, fcfyon ft, beautiful, more beautiful, most 
 beautiful. 
 
 Rule II. Adjectives, containing the vowels a, D, u, gener- 
 ally modify them in the comparative and superlative degrees ; 
 e. g. cut, after, atteft, old, older, oldest; grog, groger, grogt, 
 great, greater, greatest. 
 
 § 63. The vowels of the root, however, are not 
 modified in the following instances : — 
 
 1st, In all participles which have become susceptible of com- 
 parison, by assuming the signification of adjectives ; as, rctfcnb, 
 mad ; fdjtojcttt), decisive; t>erfd)(acjen, cunning ; tierroorfen, abandoned, 
 &c. ; e g. tcifcnb, comp. rctfenb cr, superl. vafen'Oft. 
 
 2d, All adjectives containing the diphthong a u ; as, rcmfj 
 rough, comp. raufyet, superl. taufyeft ; so : cjrau, grey ; taub deaf,* 
 tout, loud, &c. 
 
 3d, Derivative adjectives terminating in c(, et, en, C, or in one 
 
415 
 
 of the affixes & a x, fa m, r) a f t, t §, t d) t, 1 1 d) k., e. g. fornfel, dark; 
 ftecfen, dry; fyagct, slender; futctytOat, formidable; ratf)fam, advisa- 
 ble ; bosfyaft, malicious ; tt?alt>t§, woody ; grciftcfyt, grass-like ; t&un? 
 ltd), feasible, &c. 
 
 4th, In the following : 
 
 SMag, pale ; Ffar, clear ; 
 
 bunt, variegated ; fnapp, tight; 
 
 tafjm, lame ; 
 
 (e£, loose ; 
 
 matt, wearied ; 
 
 morfd), brittle ; 
 
 rmcft, naked ; 
 
 platt,flat; 
 
 plump, clumsy ; 
 
 tof), raw ; 
 
 runt), round; 
 
 fanft, gentle ; 
 fatr, satisfied ; 
 fcl>laff, slack ; 
 fd)lanf, slender ; 
 ftart, numb ; 
 ftof$, ^ roud ; 
 (Waff, stiff; 
 ftumm, dumb ; 
 tell, mad ; 
 Mil, full ; 
 $af)rn, tame. 
 
 faf)(, fallow ; 
 fcilfd), false ; 
 fret), joyful ; 
 {jerafce, straight ; 
 Qcfunb, healthy ; 
 
 ?tatt, smooth ; 
 CM, hollow ; 
 l^tt), kind; 
 faf)(, bald ; 
 farg, stingy ; 
 
 § 64. When the adjective ends either in fc, t, ft, 6, p, fcf) or $, 
 the e before the ft of the superlatives becomes essential for the 
 sake of euphony. In all other cases it is commonly rejected ; e. 
 g. merfd), brittle, superl. merfebeft; ftet^ proud, superl. fto($ C ft K. ; 
 but, f(ar, clear, superl. Hat ft; tapfer, valiant, superl. tapfcr ft ; 
 fd)ii(t>tg, culpable, superl. fd)u(t>tg ft K. 
 
 Polysyllables terminating in c (, c r or c n, generally reject 
 the c of this termination in the comparative, but resume it again in 
 the superlative; e. g. eM, comp. cSlcr (instead of cMet), superl. 
 <!t> c ( ft ; fyeitcr, cheerful, comp. l)ctt r c r, superl. r)cit e t ft ; crgeben, de- 
 voted, comp. ergeb n c t, superl. crgeb e n ft. 
 
 § 65. Comparatives and superlatives are inflected 
 like positive adjectives; thus: — 
 
 1. Better wine 2. fairer flower, 3. greener field. 
 
 N beffeter 2Betn, fd)b'nere SSlume, QtuncteS $ett>, 
 G belter en £Bctnc$, fcfyoncret 23tume, gruncrcn §elt>e$ is. 
 
 So : fc>et kft e £Betn, the best wine, gen. be£ ftcft c n £Beitte$ **♦, fci« 
 fd^onft 2§(ume, gen. fcet fcfyonft c n 33(ume jc. 
 
 IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 
 § 66. The following adjectives are irregular in their com* 
 parison : — 
 
 Posit. 
 flut, 
 
 rtctfye, 
 
 Comp. 
 beffer^ 
 
 fyoljer, 
 rtafyer, 
 
 met)r, 
 
 Superl. 
 
 nacfjft 
 < metft, 
 ^ mefyrft, 
 
 good, better, hest ; 
 
 high, higher, highest ; 
 
 near, nearer, nearest ; 
 
 much, more, most. 
 
416 
 
 Also the adverbs : — 
 gent, Keber, am Itebften, gladly, more gxadly, most gladty 
 (roemcj), mtnber, am mmbeften, little, less, least. 
 
 § 67. There are a number of adjectives, derived from ad* 
 verbs of place, which under a comparative form have a posi- 
 tive signification, and hence their comparative is wanting : — 
 
 
 
 
 Posit. Superl. 
 
 
 
 fcer, 
 
 fcte, 
 
 fcaS 
 
 augere, augerjte, 
 
 outer, 
 
 extreme, uttermost; 
 
 t. 
 
 19 
 
 19 
 
 l)tntete, fytnterfte, 
 
 hind, 
 
 hindermost ; 
 
 tt 
 
 99 
 
 19 
 
 tnrtere, tnnerfte, 
 
 inner, 
 
 innermost ; 
 
 tt 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 mtrtlerc, mittetfte, 
 
 middle, 
 
 middlemost ; 
 
 tt 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 m'ebere, meberfte, 
 
 lower, 
 
 lowermost ; 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 T9 
 
 obere, oberfte, 
 
 upper, 
 
 uppermost ; 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 tmtere, unterfre, 
 
 under, 
 
 undermost ; 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 sorbere, ttorberfte, 
 
 fore/ 
 
 foremost. 
 
 
 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 
 
 §63. Adverbs of manner, the form of which is generally 
 the same with that of adjectives, are likewise susceptible oi 
 compaiison; as, gefcfymtnb, gefcfyunnber, fcf)i>n, fcfycmet, swiftly, 
 more swiftly, beautifully, more beautifully. They express the 
 superlative, however, by prefixing to it am (a contraction for 
 an bem, § 10); as, am gefcfymtrtbften, am fcfyonften, most 
 swiftly, most beautifully. 
 
 But when no comparison, but simply eminence is to be denoted 
 oy the superlative, a u f £, a contraction of the preposition cmf with 
 the accusative of the article (ba6), is prefixed, or 3 urn, a contraction 
 of the preposition $u with the dative of the article (bem) ; e. g. auf$ 
 frcunbftcbftc, $um fcbonften, most kindly, most beautifully; cr empftng 
 mid) a u f $ b f t i d) |1 c, he received me most courteously. The ad- 
 verbial superlative of eminence, which is also called the absolute 
 superlative, may likewise he expressed by the simple form of tha 
 degree, or by the termination c n 6 ; as, Qttttgft, most kindly ; tit- 
 nigft, most cordially ; f)cd)ften$, at the most; (tfngffotf, at the longest 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 § 69. Obs. 1. The plural of the comparative mefjr, more, is 
 m e b r e or m e b r c r e, which is used as an indefinite numeral in 
 the sense of the English several. 
 
 Obs. 2. The two numerals, t)cr erfte, the first, ber U'gtc, the last, 
 though superlatives in sense, give rise to new comparatives bcr 
 t x ft c r e and t>et I e % t e r e, which correspond to the English tht 
 former — the latter. 
 
 Obs. 3. The compound comparatt/e becomes necessaiy wh*-"* 
 
417 
 
 iwc adjectives, denoting qualities of different degreed, are predl. 
 «ated of the same person or thing ; e. g. er ift m e t) r fait alg warm, 
 he is rather cold than warm ; fcu btft m c F) r 9e(cr)rt a(^ t tua,, thou 
 art more learned than prudent. 
 
 Obs. 4. The compound superlative becomes necessary when 
 the indefinite article precedes ; e. g. cm f)8d)ft Qtaufamet SRenfd), 
 a most cruel man; eme Md)ft gcfar^rdc^e Strife a most dangerous 
 journey. 
 
 Obs. 5. There are a number of particles (adverbs) which are 
 frequently placed before adjectives of every degree of comparison 
 to render their meaning intensive. They are : — 1st, With the posi- 
 tive, a u g c t ft, extremely ; | o d) ft, highly ; f e I) t, very, &c. 2d, 
 With the comparative, JH e t, much ; rc> e 1 1 or b e i nmtc nr, by far ; 
 nod), yet, &c. 3d, With the superlative, bet ro e i t c m, by far $ 
 and the prefix alter; e. g. fer)r f d) 6 h, very pretty ; n? e 1 1 Qrcjkr, 
 by far greater ; a 11 e rfcfyonft, most beautiful of all. 
 
 Obs. 6. In comparisons, a 1 g corresponds to the English than 9 
 and tv i c to the English as ; e. g. @tc fint) alter a I $ id), you are 
 older than I ; er ift fo cjrop n? i e frin SSater, he is as tall as his 
 father. 
 
 III. USE AND GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES* 
 
 § 70. 1. Adjectives of every degree of comparison may 
 be employed substantively ; but they even then retain the in* 
 flection of adjectives ; e. g. iDer 28etf e, the wise (man), sage ; 
 tin JGetf e r, a sage ; bte ©cr)6ne, the fair woman ; D*£ Srfya* 
 bene, the sublime* 
 
 2. With respect to adjectives which are used substantively 
 in the neuter gender, it is necegsary to distinguish :— 
 
 1st, Those which assume no termination, and which designate 
 either some abstract quality, or some material named after that 
 quality; e. g. la* 3? e d) t, justice; cr fprtd)t etn reined £)eutfd), 
 he speaks p'ire German ; tag <8lri ro e i g, white lead ; SBetUnct 
 $8 1 a u, Prussian blue, &c. These are inflected like substantives 
 of the earlier declension, and are used in the singular only ; as, 
 ba€ 23lau, teg 23lau$ &c. 
 
 2d, Those which assume the terminations of the attributive adjec- 
 tive and are inflected like it; e. g. tag G5ute, the good (2d decl.) ; 
 etwag ©uteg, something good (1st decl.); ba$ ©rune, the green; 
 ritt (Stating, a whole. 
 
 § 71. With respect to their signification, adjectives are di 
 vided into two classes, viz : 1st, such as make complete sense 
 of themselves without the addition of any other word ; as, qut) 
 good ; o,ro£, great, (fee. 2d, Those which of themselves can- 
 not express an entire idea, but require the addition of some 
 18* 
 
418 
 
 complemental notion ; as, b e W u 1, conscious of; I o $, free 
 from, &c. The former maybe termed absolute, the latter ?e* 
 lative. 
 
 The complement of a relative adjective may either be the 
 sblique case (§ 49. 2d.) of a substantive (including all words used 
 is such), or a verb in the infinitive with g u . 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH THE INFINITIVE, 
 
 § 72. Adjectives signifying possibility, duty, necessity, easi- 
 ness, difficulty, and the like, are followed by an infinitive with 
 j u ; as, e£ xft mtr mcfyt m 6 9 1 1 d) 3 u 9 e fy en, it is not possible 
 for me to go ; er t ft genbttjt^t 3 u a r b e 1 1 e n, he is obliged 
 lo work ; berett 311 fampfert, ready to contend. In this connec- 
 tion the infinitive, though active in form, is often passive in signi- 
 fication ; letcfyt gu mctcfyen, easy to be done; fcfyroer 311 glauben, 
 hard to be believed, &c. 
 
 ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE OBLIQUE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES, 
 
 § 73. When relative adjectives are followed by a 
 substantive, it is put either in the genitive, the dative 
 or the accusative. 
 
 I. The adjectives governing the genitive are : — 
 
 betmrfttg, in want of; funbtg, acquainted with 5 
 
 fcefUffcn, diligent in ; mad)ttg, master of; 
 
 befucjt, authorized ; mut>e, tired of; 
 
 fcenotfugt, in need of; fd)u(t>tg, guilty of; 
 
 fccrcuj^t, conscious of; tfyeUfyaff, partaker of ; 
 
 ctttgefcenf, remembering ; 9crt)ad)ttg, suspected of; 
 
 fafjtg, capable of ; ttcrtufttg, losing ; 
 
 frof), happy in; t>olI / full of; 
 
 gcroarttg, in expectation of; tvutfctg, worthy of. 
 QCttnfJ, certain of ; 
 
 Examples. (Stnct ©pracfye m a d) t i $ fetn, to be master of a lan- 
 guage ; ctne$ 93ettodKn$ f d) u 1 1) t g, guilty of a crime ; fcer (Strafe 
 tt> u r t) i g, worthy of punishment. 
 
 § 74. II. The adjectives which govern the dative 
 case are : — 
 
 1st, Such as are derived from verbs which govern the dative; 
 as, gctyotfam, obedient ta ; frtenflbat, bound in service to ; wtbutu 
 ben bliged to, &c. 
 
419 
 
 2d. The following :— 
 
 fifjntid), resembling ; 
 ongemejTen, suited to ; 
 ctngenefym, agreeable ; 
 cmjfofitc}, offensive ; 
 fcefannt, known ; 
 frequent, convenient ; 
 berouf't, known ; 
 fctenftd), serviceable ; 
 etgen, own ; 
 fremt>, strange ; 
 ftcunfcltd), friendly ; 
 gegenroatttg, present to ; 
 gclauftg, fluent ; 
 gemctfj, suited to ; 
 Qenetgt, inclined ; 
 gercogen, kind; 
 geroadjfen, equal to ; 
 Qlcid), like ; 
 gndbtg, gracious ; 
 fjeUfam, salutary ; 
 
 belt), kind ; 
 l&ftt$, troublesome ; 
 (tefc, dear, agreeable; 
 nacfyttycUtg, hurtful ; 
 nafye, near ; 
 nulttd), useful ; 
 fdjafcttd), injurious ; 
 fd)ult>tg, indebted ; 
 treu, true, faithful ; 
 tibettegen, superior ; 
 unsetgej&d), ever memorable to) 
 t>ert>ad)tig, suspected by ; 
 ttcrfcerfrltd), destructive to ; 
 tterfyapt, odious to ; 
 ttetroanbt, related ; 
 ttortfjetl&aft, advantageous ; 
 ttnbttg, loathsome ; 
 voiMemmtn, welcome ; 
 gugetljan, addicted to. 
 
 Examples : bet ©o^n tft fetnem 93citet a ^n ( t d), the son resembles 
 nis father; er if! fetnem 23erufe md)t g e ro a d) f e n, he is not equal to 
 his calling ; c$ tft tf)m fj e U f a m, it is salutary to him ; nne met bin 
 id) Sfyncn f d) u ( t> i 3 ? how much do I owe you 1 ec tft mir t> c r f) apt 
 he is odious to me, &c. 
 
 III. Adjectives denoting the measure, weight, or woith of a 
 thing; also age or duration of time, govern the accusative; 
 as, grcotf $pfunt> fd)it>et, twelve pounds in weight; etnen ginget 
 6 r e 1 1, of the breadth of a finger ; einen Sljcrtet rc> e r 1 f), worth a 
 crown; er tft ^efyn 3ci§t alt, he is ten years old; funf 3a\)tt tang, 
 for five years, &c. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 § 75. Numerals are either definite or indefinite ; as, 
 tner, J e I) n, four, ten ; tu el, a He, many, all. 
 
 Definite numerals are divided into two classes :— > 
 Cardinal and Ordinal. 
 
 Cardinal numerals are such as express simply the number 
 of persons or things in answer \o the question " how many?" 
 btet, three; ftergtg, forty. 
 
 Ordinal numerals designate the rank of a person or thing fa 
 a series ; as, ber erfte, the first ; fcer awoffte, the twelfth. 
 
420 
 
 Ordinals are formed from cardinals by annexing the termi 
 nation ft e, when the cardinal ends in q, and the termination 
 te in all other cases; as, fcer 3tt>an$tg ft e, merte, the twen. 
 lieth, fourth. 
 
 Exceptions. The ordinal of etn, one, is irregular: bet ecfte 
 (instead of bet e t n t e), the first. Instead of bet $ ro c 1 1 e, the 
 second, it was formerly customary to say bet a n b e r e. 
 
 § 76. The following is a list of cardinal and ordinal 
 numerals : — 
 
 Cardinal. 
 
 1. etn, ring, one j 
 
 2. greet, two ; 
 
 3. btet, three; 
 
 4. trier, four ; 
 
 5. fiinf, five ; 
 
 6. fed)$, six ;> 
 
 7. jteOen, seven ; 
 
 8. cicbt, eight; 
 
 9. neun, nine^ 
 
 10. $ebn, ten; 
 
 11. c(f, eleven; 
 
 12. gntflf, twelve, &c. 
 
 13. bret$ebn ; 
 
 14. meqcbn; 
 
 15. funftcfyn; 
 
 16. fecbgebn; 
 
 17. fkben$ebn or fteb^f)tt 
 
 18. ad)tgc$n; 
 
 19. neun$ebn ; 
 
 20. $man$tg; 
 
 21. etn unb $roan$t<}; 
 
 22. $nm unb $n>an$tg, tt » 
 30. bretfitg ; 
 
 34. etn unt) bmpi'g, ft. 
 
 40i tricqtg ; 
 
 50. funfttcj; 
 
 60, fecl)^; 
 
 70. fteben^tg or ftet^tg 
 
 80. ad)t$tg; 
 
 90. ncun$ig; 
 
 100. bunbett; 
 
 101. bunbert unb etn$;- 
 
 102. bunbert unt) $roet ; 
 103 bunbert unt) btet tc> 
 200 gnxtbunbett ; 
 
 30#. btetbunbett; 
 
 Ordinal. 
 
 bet, bte, t>a$ 
 
 // // // 
 
 // it tt 
 
 tt tt tt 
 it // // 
 
 tt // // 
 // // // 
 
 // // // 
 // // // 
 
 ft // // 
 
 // // // 
 // tt if 
 
 // rt // 
 
 // // // 
 
 ft // // 
 // // // 
 
 // // // 
 // // // 
 
 ft ft ft 
 
 n it // 
 
 // // // 
 // // // 
 
 // // // 
 // // // 
 
 it ft tt 
 tt tt tt 
 
 tt tt tt 
 ft tt tt 
 
 tf tt tt 
 
 etjle, 
 
 $mette, 
 
 brttte, 
 
 merte, 
 
 fitnfte, 
 
 feebfte, 
 
 the first. 
 " second. 
 « third. 
 " fourth, 
 " fifth. 
 " sixth. 
 
 fiebente, " seventh. 
 
 eighth. 
 " ninth. 
 " tenth. 
 " eleventh. 
 
 twelfth, && 
 
 acbte, 
 neunte, 
 
 etfte, 
 
 breqebnte. 
 
 meqebnte. 
 
 ftruftebnte. 
 
 feeble bnte. 
 
 fieben jebttte or fte&aebnt£ 
 
 ad)t^bnte. 
 
 neungebnte. 
 
 $man$tgfte, 
 
 etn unb $wan$t$f!e. 
 
 gwet unb sroan^tctfte, jg» 
 
 trctptgftc. 
 
 ein trnb bretptgfte iu 
 
 iricr$igfte. 
 
 fedtftgftc. 
 
 ffcben$ig|fc or ftefe$tg{t& 
 
 acbtjtgfte. 
 
 neun^igfte. 
 
 bunbertfte. 
 
 bunbert unb crftc.- 
 
 bunbert unb gwette. 
 
 bunbert unb brttte 1% 
 
 aroetbunbertfte. 
 
 btetbunbettfte. 
 
421 
 
 Cardinal Ordinal* 
 
 400. mcdjunbert ♦* $a f ttt,Ht mcrfyunbcrtfrg, 
 
 500. ftinfbuttbcrt; „ „ » fiinftunbertjfo 
 
 600. fed)$bunbcrt ; „ „ „ fcdbSbunbertffo 
 
 700. fkbenl)unt>crt ; „ „ „ ftebenbunbcrtfl* 
 
 800. cid)tbunt?ert ; „ „ „ ad)tbunbertfie. 
 
 900. ncunfnmbcrt; „ „ „ ncunbunbettjfo 
 
 ?000. taufenb; „ „ „ taufenbfte. 
 
 2000. $rocttaufenb. 
 a0OO. bmtcmfenb. 
 100,000. rjimbetttaufenb. 
 1,000,000. cine Stilton. 
 2,000,000. 0ti SDrtUioncn. 
 
 observations. 
 
 § 77. Obs. 1. When e tn stands in connection with ounei 
 numerals, it is indeclinable ; as, e i n unb ateratg, forty one 
 e t n tcutfenb acfytJwnbert fiinf unb sterjtg, 1845. In other ca 
 ees it is always inflected. This may be done in four different 
 ways :— * 
 
 1st, If the numeral ctn, either alone or with an adjective, limits 
 the meaning of a substantive, and is not preceded by any other de* 
 clinable word, it follows the inflection of the indefinite article C in, 
 e i n e, c i n, and differs from it only by a greater stress of accentua- 
 tion; e. g. etn (cuiter) SRann, one (good) man; etnc (cjute) £rcm, 
 one (good) woman ; e i n (QuteS) JrtinD, one (good) child. 
 
 2d, When it stands entirely alone, either in an absolute sense or 
 relating to some substantive understood, it is inflected like an ad- 
 jective of the first declension — e iner, cine, e i n c $, &c. ; e. g< 
 aud) ntd)t (S 1 n e r mar t>a, not one even was there ; @i n e n son un$ 
 rottb l>a$ £oo$ trcffen, the lot will fall on one of us; e t n c mcine? 
 ©d)ivejtcrn, one of rny sisters, &c. 
 
 3d, But if it is preceded either by the definite article bcr, btc, t>a$, 
 or any other word having the characteristic terminations of the ar* 
 tide (§ 57), it is declined like an adjective of the second declen- 
 sion ; e. g. bet etnc SQlam, fcie e t n e great, t>a$ cine Jttnb, the 
 ens man, one woman, one child, &c. 
 
 4th, The numeral c i n follows, finally, the inflection of the third 
 declension of adjectives, when it is preceded by a possessive pronoun, 
 m e in, b etn, fe t n, &c< ; e. g. mctn c t n e t SBrubcr, my one bro- 
 ther ; [cine e t n e ^cbrcefter, his one sister; (Sucr c in e € §)fcrb, you* 
 one hone, &c. 
 
 §78. Obs. 2. The numerals jnjet and b r e t are in- 
 flected only when they are not preceded by the article or some 
 other declinable word ; thus :**** 
 
422 
 
 Nom. $wct, brct ; 
 Gen. $roetet, bretcc ; 
 Dat. imhxi, bteien ; 
 Ace. $wet, tret. 
 
 Examples : am a to e i e r obet b v e i c r 3eugen 9}?unb, from the 
 ihvuth of two or three witnesses ; fage e$ t>ed) j e n e n b r e t (no 
 b\ i x en) greunben, pray tell those three friends. 
 
 Obs. 3. The remaining cardinal numerals are indeclinable 
 except that they assume en in the dative case, when they are 
 used substantively ; e. g. rmt © e d) f e n fctfyren, to ride in a 
 coach with six (horses); cuif atten SSteren frtecfyen, to crawl 
 on hand and foot. But, rmt fecfys SSRarrn, with six men; rmt 
 »ier ©ofynert, with four sons. 
 
 Obs. 4. Instead of $ro e i, 6 e i b e, both, is frequently used, and 
 is inflected like an adjective in the plural : nom. b ci b e, gen. b c u 
 b e r, &c. ; b i e b e t b e n, gen. ber beiben, &c. ; feine beiben, 
 gen. feiner e t b e n, &c. ; e. g. fcine b c i b e n 93tubet ftnb tvanf, 
 both his brothers are sick ; bte betben greunbe roaten ta, both friends 
 were there. The neuter singular, b C i b c $, refers to £200 different 
 things , but is nevei applied to persons. It corresponds to the Eng- 
 lish : both the one and the other ; as, fyaben ©ie 23tob obcr 5Betn? 
 3d) babe 6 C i b e$. Have you bread or wine 1 I have both the one 
 and the other. 
 
 § 79. Obs. 5. Most cardinal numerals are adjectives, 
 which, however, like all other adjectives, may be used substan- 
 tively. The words $. u tt b e r t and % a it f e n b are employed 
 as collective nouns of the neuter gender, and are inflected as 
 such : nom. ba3 Spunbtvi, gen. be$ £)unbert3, pi. bte £ttnberte ; 
 e * g- S " & u n b e r t e n, by hundreds ; 3 u X a 11 f e Kt b e n, by 
 thousands, gtrte SO? t i I i n is a noun of the feminine gen- 
 der, and occurs only in connection with an article. 
 
 Obs. 6. When numerals serve simply to denote cyphers, 
 or the abstract notion of number, they are substantives of the 
 feminine gender, the word 3 a M being understood ; as, bte 
 C3 a ^0 ©ret, tne number three ; bte 95 1 e r g t 9, the number 
 forty. 
 
 Obs. 7. By means of the affixes et and ling, masculine sub- 
 stantives of various significations are formed from cardinal num* 
 bers ; e. g. ein 2) r c i e t, em (S e d) f e r, coins of three and six 
 kreuzers ; etn 2C d) t $ t g e r, a man of eighty ; 3 ro e i unb $ ro a n $ 1 2 
 g e r, wine grown in 1822 ; Swilling, twin ; Drilling, triplet. 
 
 Obs. 8 Ordinal numerals are regularly declined after the 
 
428 
 
 manner of adjectives. When used substantive! j, their initia. 
 letter must be a capital, if a person is referred to : as, tie 
 Srften roerben bte £e£tert fettt, the first shall be last. 
 
 § 80. To the preceding classes of numerals may be added 
 the following compounds, formed partly from cardinals, partly 
 from ordinals, and partly from indefinite numerals : — 
 
 I. COMPOUNDS FORMED FROM CARDINAL AND INDEFINITE 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 1st, Distributives ; formed by prefixing the adverb j e ; as, 
 j e ft e b e n, by seven ; j e 3 e fy n, ten at a time, or as in Eng- 
 lish, 1 w e t tint $ ro e t, two and two. 
 
 2d, Iteratives ; formed by adding the substantive 90? a I, 
 time, etnmat, once; fun fatal, five times; jebeSmal, each 
 time ; melmaf, many times, &c. Sometimes 30? a t is separat- 
 ed and declined like a substantive; as, etn SO? at, once; ju 
 ^efyn 901 a I e n, ten times. This is always the case when it is 
 preceded by an ordinal : ba£ erfte, aroette 90?al, the first, second 
 time. 
 
 3d, Multiplicatives ; formed by annexing the affix f a d), or 
 the obsolete fd(ttg, fold; e. g. etnfad), aroetfad), gefynfad), 
 simple, twofold, tenfold ; $ \ e I f a d), manyfold ; fyunbertfal* 
 ttcj, an hundredfold, &c. 
 
 4th, Variatives ; which are indeclinable, and formed 
 by adding the obsolete substantive let (meaning kind, 
 manner), and inserting e r for the sake of euphony ; as, e x * 
 n c r t e t, of one kind, all the same ; brexerlet, of three 
 kinds ; mancfyertet, metertet, of various, of many kinds, &c 
 
 II. COMPOUND NUMERALS FORMED FROM ORDINALS. 
 
 § 81. 1st, Dimidiatives ; indeclinable adjectives formed by 
 annexing bait), half, to the ordinal ; as, b v 1 1 1 e t) a t b, two 
 and a half (literally third-half, meaning two whole and one half 
 of a third) ; fiinftefyalb, four and a half, &c. Instead of 
 jwettefyatb, anbettbatb is used, from the obsolete word ber 
 anbere, the second (§ 75. Exc.), 
 
 2d, Ordinal adverbs in en§; as, e r ft e n 3, 3 ro e 1 1 e n $, 
 lefyntenS, firstly, secondly, tenthly, &c. 
 
 3d, Partitives ; masculine substantives formed by means of 
 the affix tet (from Ifyetl, part) ; e. g. ber Dnttel, 33ter* 
 tct, 3ef)Htet, 5)unbertjret, the third, fourth, tenth, hun. 
 dredth part. 
 
424 
 
 INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 
 
 $ 82. The indefinite numerals are as follows s — 
 atfe, all ; mcfytS, nothing ; 
 
 gefammt, > complete, efatge, 1 some 
 f&mmttfy, S entire ; etHdje, > \ 
 
 gan$, all, whole ; manege, ) J ' 
 
 * eber ' ) each * id ' much > many ; 
 
 jetweber, > e ' . me&r, more ; 
 
 jegh'd&er, > J ' gernig, enough ; 
 
 fetn, no, no one ; etroct§, some, a little. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Ofo. 1. The indefinite numerals serve either to express n\M 
 her, as, etntge, etltcfye, manege, jeber or jeglicfyer; oi 
 quantity, as, etroaS, gctn$; or 6oZA, as, aU, gefammt, ef< 
 ntgeS, etntge, fetn, stel, metjr, roentg, genug. 
 
 Obs. 2. Those which may indicate quantity and numbei 
 both, are generally inflected only when they imply number, 
 e. g. t) t e t e ^ftenfefyen, many men ; etntge gebern, severa; 
 pens; but xtiel 2Betrt, much wine ; mefyr 33rob, more bread. 
 
 § 83. INDEFINITE NUMERALS DENOTING NUMBER ONLY. 
 
 1st, 3 c b c r, j c b e, i c b e $ (of which jcgftd)cr and jebroebet are 
 antiquated forms), is disjunctive, corresponding to the English 
 each, every ; e. g. jebct ©tont) f)cit fcine $cfd)tr>ctbcn, every condi- 
 tion has its troubles. It is inflected like adjectives, and is often 
 preceded by the article etn ; as, c t n jeter, e t n c { e b e, e i n 
 j e b e S. 
 
 2d, <S t n i g e r, c i n t g e> c in t g e $, some, a few, when applied 
 to number, is used in the plural only, and is synonymous with 
 etftdK. In the singular, however, it has reference to quantity; 
 as, c t n t g c $ SffleW, some flour ; e t n i g e 3ctt, some time. 
 
 3d, SQcancfyer, mancrjc, mand)C$, in the singular, answers 
 to the English many a ; as, m a n d) e r a(te gteunb, many an old 
 friend ; m a n d) e foft(td)C ©abe, many a precious gift. In tht 
 plural it is to be rendered by many 
 
 § 84. INDEFINITE NUMERALS IMPLYING QUANTITY ONLY* 
 
 1st, ® t rc> a $, some, is indeclinable, and usually connected with 
 collective nouns or names of materials ; e. g. e t rc> a $ (55c(b, some 
 money ; e t ro a $ frifcf)C$ SGBaffcr, some fresh water. When, as a 
 substantive, it corresponds to something, it is an indefinite pronoun 
 
425 
 
 2d, © a n | rndicates the completeness of an object and is opposed 
 to half, part, &c. ; t»cr, tie, tag (3 a n $ e, the entire, whole ; ctn 9 a n* 
 3 e 6 3faf)t/ a whole year. It is inflected like adjectives ; but before 
 neuter names of places and countries it is always indeclinable ; as 
 9 a n $ 2Cmerif:a / Sonton, all America, London. 
 
 § 85, INDEFINITE NUMERALS IMPLYING NUMBER AND 
 QUANTITY BOTH. 
 
 1st, li X I e r, atU, a I ( e $, all, in the plural implies number, an 
 in the singular quantity; e.g. aller SB ctn, ail the wine; all < 
 Sfil t ( d), all the milk ; and often without any termination (§ 8 , 
 Oft*. 2.); alt ttefet 2£etn, all this wine; all tag SStct, all tie 
 bread ; a 1 1 e tic SQBafjler, tie ftefcen (filler), all the electors, seven 
 in number. Its signification does not admit of its being preceded 
 by the article, and hence its inflection is not affected when another 
 word, declined like the article, precedes ; e. g. roe Id) eg alic$ 
 (not a I ( c, § 57), all which ; bet t t e f c m a ( I c m, in all this, &c. 
 The neuter singular sometimes designates number in the most inde- 
 finite manner; e. g. a It c g rennet, retter, fliicfytet, all are running, sa- 
 ving, rescuing. When the English all is equivalent to the whole, 
 it is rendered by the German 9 a n$; as, all the hour, all the day, 
 tic 9 a n 3 c ©tunte, ben 9 a n 3 c n Sag. 
 
 2d, ^ c t n, f: c i n e, ! c i n, no, none, is declined like the indefinite 
 article ctn, ebe, ctn, when it stands in connection with a substan- 
 tive ; and like an adjective of the first declension, t tin ex, f c t n c, 
 f e t n e g, when the substantive is not expressed ; as, Ic i n SJJZenfd), 
 no man ; fyaft «Du cin SBuct) ? 3d) fyaftc £ c i n c $ ; hast thou a book ? I 
 have none ; et fyat f c t n c greuntc, he has no friends. 
 
 3d, (Sammtltcfyet, fammtU d) e, fd'mmtl td) eg, ter 9c 5 
 f a m m t c, tic 9 c f a m m t e, tag 9 c f a m m t e, are nearly synony- 
 mous wrth a 1 1, «//, entire, the complete. They are regularly de- 
 clined like adjectives ; as, fcine fdnuntltcftcn SBcrfe, his complete 
 works ; £)etne fa'mmtttdjen (gefammten) $mmte, all thy friends. 
 
 4th, $8 t e I and n? c n t g, when they imply quantity, or number con- 
 sidered as a mass, are invariable (§82. Obs. 2). 23tct S3tet, i)tcl(5k(t, 
 much bread, much money ; Diet 9)?cnfd)cn, a large mass of men 
 But if they refer to a number of individuals or things regarded as 
 distinct, they follow the inflection of adjectives : Dieter, M c I C, 
 t) i e ( c g, xo c n 1 9 c r, n? e n i 9 e, w e n i 9 e g, &c. ; e. g. eg fonnen fid) 
 nur SB e n 1 9 c rcqtcren, but few can govern themselves ; id) effc ntd)t 
 t> t e t c Jrudjt, I do not eat many kinds of fruit. When an article 
 or pronoun precedes, t>tc( and rocntg must be inflected, even if they 
 refer to quantity ; e. g. tie » t e t e n SKortc, the many words ; fetn 
 tt) c n 1 9 e g ©elt, his little money, &c. 
 
 5th, The comparatives m e h x, more, and xo e n i 9 c x, less, are no! 
 generally inflected, except m c \)X c r e, the plural of mt\)X, when it 
 assumes the signification of several (§ 69). 
 
426 
 
 § 8G. OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF NUMERALS. 
 
 Obs. 1 If numerals stand in connection with substantives 
 which express a definite number, measure, or weight, the Ger- 
 man idiom requires the substantive to be put into the singular 
 (§ 26) ; as, jwolf ty f it n b, twelve pounds ; a wet © t ii cf> two 
 pieces. 
 
 Obs. 2. Numerals which denote a part of a greater num- 
 ber or multitude of objects, are followed by a genitive of the 
 whole, or by the dative with the preposition a u 3, from among ; 
 u n t e r, among ; » d n, of ; e. g. b r e t f e t n e r ftmber, three 
 of his children; ber erfte son metnen greunben, the first 
 of my friends ; *B t e t e untet tfyrten, many among them. 
 
 Gta. 3. When the genitive of the whole is a personal pro- 
 noun, it always precedes the numeral ; as, e^ finb il n f e t 
 \ tt) a n & i g, there are twenty of us ; e$ werben ifyxex mcfyt 
 tt t e I e fern, there will not be many of them. 
 
 Obs. 4. When a definite number is to be stated approxi- 
 mately, or with uncertainty, the adverbs and prepositions em- 
 ployed in German for that purpose are : e t tt) a, something 
 like ; ungefdfyr, about ; b e t n a t) e, fa ft, almost ; f a u m, 
 scarcely ; g e g e n, bet, an b t e, nearly, about ; e. g. ba3 
 ^3ferb tft ungef&fyt fyunbert 'Xfyaler wevfy, the horse is worth 
 about a hundred crowns ; er tft b e t n a 1) e or an b t e fiinfetg 
 3a^r alt. he is nearly fifty years of age. 
 
 Obs. 5. The word h x $ (till, to) is used when a number can be 
 stated only as fluctuating between two given numbers ; as, t) i e t 
 bit fun f taufent) SCftann, from four to five thousand men ; ^tpan^tg 
 bt$ bretptg Abater, about twenty or thirty crowns. 
 
 Obs. 6. The English upward is rendered by u n b c t I i d) C or 
 it n b c i n i 3 e ; as, bag £au£ tft n c u n $ t a. unb c t ( i d> e gup bod), 
 the house is upward of ninety feet high, or in conversational Ger- 
 man often, e 1 1 1 cf) c n e u n 3 t g. 
 
 Ofo. 7. The English either and neither have no corresponding 
 words in German, and are rendered by e t n e t Don be i ben, one 
 of the two, and Cetnet t) n b e t b e n, none of the two. 
 
 § 87. Ofo. 8. Numerals are sometimes employed elliptic 
 tally without a substantive, when a point of time is expressed; 
 e. g. tft e3 nod) nidjt $tt> btf ? is it not twelve yet? @3 bat eben 
 b r e t gefefytacjen, it has just struck three. In these cases the 
 word U b r or an b e r U f) r, o'clock, is to be supplied. In 
 the same manner ordinal numerals are used, when the day of 
 the month is to be denoted ; e g. ben w t e a t e I fl: e « fyaben 
 
427 
 
 ttur ? what day of the month is it ? SStr fyaben ben 3 w a n 
 |t 5 ff e n (lag be$ SiftonatS), it is the twentieth. 
 
 When in connection with a date the name of the month is given, 
 the preposition of is never expressed in German; as, ten funften 
 Sftat, the fifth of May ; am Written ItUQuft, on the third oj 
 August, &c. 
 
 Jr PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 88. Pronouns are words which serve as the sub* 
 stitutes of nouns. 
 
 Pronouns are divided into Personal, Possessive, De- 
 monstrative, Determinative, Relative, and Interrogative. 
 
 I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 §89. A personal pronoun is one which simply indicates 
 the relation of personality ; i. e. whether the substantive rep- 
 resented be the person speaking (t d), n) t r, I> we), or spoken 
 to (b u, i \) r, thou, ye), or spoken of (e r, ft e, e $, ft e, he, she, 
 it, they). 
 
 Personal pronouns are declined as follows : — 
 
 FIRST PERSON (FOR ALL GENDERS). 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. td), I, 
 
 Gen. memer (mem), of me, 
 Dat. mtr, to me, 
 
 Ace. mid), me; 
 
 Plural. 
 Nom. wtr, we, 
 Gen. urtfer, of us, 
 Dat. an§/ to us, 
 Ace. un£, us. 
 
 second person (for all genders). 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. bu, thou, 
 
 Gen. betner (bent), of thee, 
 Dat. bit, to thee, 
 
 Ace. btcfy, thae ; 
 
 Nom. tfyr, ye or you, 
 
 Gen. euer, of yon, 
 
 Dat. ettd) A to you, 
 
 Ace. end), ye or you. 
 
 third person 
 Singular. 
 
 Masculine . Feminine. 
 
 Nom. er, he, fte, she, 
 
 Gen. fetner (fetrt), of him, tfyrer, of her, 
 Dat. t^m £ r;4% to him, . tfyr } n4% to her, 
 
 AlCc. tfyn 
 
 \ fi*, 
 
 him : I fie 
 
 fid), 
 
 her: 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 e$, it, 
 
 fetner (fetn), of it, 
 
 8r]» to it 
 
428 
 
 Plural 
 
 For all genders 
 
 Nom. fte, they ; 
 
 Gen. tfyrer, of them ; 
 
 Dat. tfynert ) r / to them ; 
 
 Ace. fte $ ,tct}/ them. 
 
 § 90. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Obs. 1. The genitives m e i n e r, t> c i n e r, f e t n c r, now gene* 
 ally take the place of the earliei forms mctn, t> etn, f e i n, which 
 are found only in poetry, and in certain familiar expressions; as, 
 wrqtjj mctn ntcbt, forget me not ; ejefcenfr mctn, remember me. 
 
 Obs. 2. When the prepositions f) a t b e n, w e Q e n, on account 
 of, and um — unit en, for the sake of, are compounded with the geni- 
 tives mctn, t) c t n, f e t n, i \) r, the syllable c t is inserted for the 
 sake of euphony; e. g. metn et?, t> etn e t?, fei n et?, iftrets 
 f) a I fte n (weejen), on my, thy, his, her account. The genitives 
 unfer and euct take t simply: um u nf e r tw t ( (e n, for our 
 saKe ; curctroegen, on your account 
 
 Obs. 3. The word fid) (sibi. se) is rne reflexive pronoun fir the 
 gen. and dat. of the third person, both singular and plural. It is 
 used in propositions, in which the action of the verb terminates in 
 the subject itself, from whence it proceeded. The oblique cases 
 of the first and second persons, as well as the gen. of the third 
 (fetner, tf)ret), do not possess a separate form of the reflexive, and 
 hence they are themselves employed in a reflexive sense ; e. g. id) 
 fd)ame mtd), I am ashamed (lit. I shame myself); bit (obeft fctcf), 
 thou praisest thyself. In these instances, however, the indeclina- 
 ble word f e I b ft or f c I b c r is added, whenever emphasis or per- 
 spicuity require it ; e. g. f e t n e r f c t b ft md)t febonen, not to spare 
 one's self; mtr felbcr, to myself; tud) felbft, thyself. When 
 joined to the nominative of the first, second or third persons, felbft 
 or fclbct is intensive ; as, id) f e ( b c r farm fie retten, 1 myself can 
 rescue her ; £>u f e ( b ft muff rtcbtcn, thou thyself must be the judge ; 
 fcer .ftonto, fe lb ft etfebien, the king appeared in person. 
 
 Obs* 4. There is one reciprocal pronoun in German — etnanber 
 (contracted for c t n e r ten a n t> e r n), one another, each other. 
 Instead of this, however, the reflexive pronouns are often employed 
 in a reciprocal sense in the plural ; as, wit fenncn u n $ or etna ns 
 t> e r, we know each other ; fie ganfen ft d) or mi t etnanber, they 
 are quarrelling with each other. 
 
 § 91. Obs* 5. In poetry, and when addressing the Supreme Being, 
 their intimate friends or families, the Germans employ the second 
 person singular, £)u. In polite conversation, however, they al- 
 ways address each other in the third person plural, <S t e, gen. 3 b 5 
 r c r, dat. 3 b n e n, ace. (Sic; e. g. id) fcanfe 3 1) n e n, I thank you ; 
 rt)0 gefyen (Stc bin? where are you going? It is also customary 
 for superiors to address their dependants and others of inferio* 
 rank in the second person plural (3 b t, © u d), you. to you), or ii 
 
429 
 
 the third person singular ((St, (gte, he, she) ; e. g s \va$ rjat (kt ge. 
 6rnd)t ? what have you brought 1 In writing*, both the personal 
 and possessive pronouns relating to the person addressed, must al- 
 ways begin with a capital letter ; e. g. td) bttte <B"te (3)tcb, (Surf), 
 3b") «m 3f)t (Dctn, (Suer) SBucb, I beg you to give me your book. 
 
 Obs. 6. The neuter pronoun eg is never used in the genitive 
 and dative cases (f c t n cr, i f) m), except when it relates to a per- 
 son. When a thing is referred to, the expressions of it, of them, 
 to it, with it, are either rendered by the demonstrative pronouns 
 beffen, bercn, or by an adverbial pronoun, b a $ u, b a mi t, 
 taran &c. ; e. g. have you much of it? fjaben &U beffen »ic( ? 
 what do you wish with it? roag ruotien @te bam it (see pages 29 
 and 142)? 
 
 Ofo. 7. The pronoun eg has often a very indefinite significa- 
 tion, sometimes corresponding to the English " it," sometimes to 
 the unaccented " there," but frequently it is expletive, and cannoi 
 be rendered at all. It is employed : — ■ 
 
 1st, As the subject of impersonal verbs, or such as appear to be 
 used impersonally ; as, eg b o n n e r t, e g b i t % t, it thunders, it 
 lightens ; e g f t e u t m i d), I am glad ; c g 9 i t S e u t e, there are 
 men. 
 
 2d, It simply stands as the representative of the subject of a 
 proposition, when its order is inverted and the predicate comes 
 first ; as, c g fullt fid) b e r <S p c t cr) c r, eg bebnt fid) bag $ a -u ti 
 {expletive), the granary is replenished, the house expands ; e 6 ftnb 
 ntd)t efcen f d) t e d) t e banner, they are by no means worthless 
 men. 
 
 The e of the eg is often elided ; as, bx ina/g nut, bring it to 
 me ; er (j a t ' g QCtfjnn, he has done it. 
 
 i^- INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 9£. Among personal pronouns are properly included the 
 following, 'which, however, represent the third 'person only, and 
 in the most indefinite manner : — 3 eman ^/ Stner, some 
 one, some body ; ^ebextnaiitt, every one, every body ; 
 yt i e m a n b, Seiner, no one, nobody ; man, one, they 
 people (corresponding to the French on). To these may be 
 added ttwa§>, something, and n i d) t $, nothing. 
 
 9Rart, ctwaZ and nicfytS are indeclinable. Sewanb, 9itemart& 
 and 3ekermanrt are declined as follows : — 
 
 Nom. Semanb, Sfttemanb, Sebermarm, 
 
 Gen \^ mmt s \ f eman l\ \ Sebermamrt, 
 
 »-■ J3=*U »Z&J *»""""" 
 
 a - llzt ss&J 3*™~ 
 
430 
 
 The declension of (£ t n c r and 5\ e t n e r has already beer, 
 noticed among the indefinite numerals (§ 77 and § 85), between 
 which and the indefinite pronouns it is difficult to fix the line 
 of distinction. A few examples may illustrate their inflection 
 and use : — £aft Su erne geber, em 93udf) ? Hast thou a pen, a 
 book? 3d) fyabe etne, etti e£, I have one ; tcf) fyctbe fetne, 
 f e t n e d, I have none ; e$ tft S t n e r braugen, some one is 
 out of doors ; R e t n e r tt>et£ afteS, no one knows every thing. 
 
 II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 § 93. A possessive pronoun is one which repre- 
 sents the object to which it relates, as belonging ei- 
 ther to the speaker (mine), the person spoken to (thine) 
 or the person or thing spoken of (his). 
 
 Possessive pronouns are formed from the genitive of personal 
 pronouns. They are : — 
 
 1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 
 
 m e t n, my, mine ; t> e i n, thy, thine ; f e t n, his, its ; 
 unfer, our, ours ; e u e r, your, yours ; i fy r, her, hers, their. 
 
 § 94. When a possessive pronoun stands in connection 
 with a noun, it is called conjunctive, and is declined like the in. 
 definite article in the singular, and like the definite article in 
 'he plural. Thus : — 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Fem. Neut 
 
 metne, mem, my, 
 
 metneS, of my, 
 metnem, to my, 
 mew, my ; 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 { unfere, 
 ( unfre, 
 
 S unferev, 
 J unfrer, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Nom. mem, 
 Gen. metneS, 
 Dat metnem, 
 Ace mefnen, 
 
 metner, 
 metner, 
 metne, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 metne, my, 
 metner, of my, 
 metnen, to my, 
 my. 
 
 metne, 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 unfer, 
 
 Neut. 
 
 unfer, 
 
 our, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 unfereS, 
 
 unfreS, 
 
 unferS, 
 
 unferem, 
 
 unfrem, 
 
 unferm, 
 
 unferen, 
 
 unfren, 
 
 unfern, 
 
 i unferer, 
 1 unfrer, 
 
 unfere 
 unfre, 
 
 unfereS, 
 unfreS, of our, 
 unferS, 
 \ unferem, 
 unfrem, to our, 
 unferm, 
 
 4nfer, 
 
 our. 
 
431 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 NoM ; imfere, unfre, our, 
 Gen. ltnferer, unfrer, of our, 
 Dat. unfeten, iinfrert, to our, 
 Ace. imfere, unfre, our. 
 
 OBSERVATION^ 
 
 01 s. 1. Of the remaining pronouns of this class, eu er, \om 
 is declined like u n f e t, and the others like m e i n. It will he per* 
 ceived that the remark made respecting euphonic changes in ad- 
 jectives ending in e (, cr, en, unaccented (§ 60. Obs. 1st*), is also 
 applicable in the case of u ttf er. 
 
 Obs. 2. The word c t Q c n, own, is often joined to possessive 
 pronouns to make the notion of possession more prominent ; as 
 mem c i 9 n e r SKoc!, my own coat ; unfet e i g n e $ Jtinfc, our own 
 child. 
 
 Obs. 3. It will be perceived, that for the third person singular 
 there are two forms of the possessive, viz : f e in, when the gender 
 of the possessor is masculine or neuter, and i \) t, when it is femi- 
 nine. Each of these again indicates, by means of its terminations, 
 the gender of the object possessed, with which possessive pronouns, 
 like all other adjectives, must agree in gender, number and case ; 
 0. g. fetn (tf)t) 23atet, fetne (tf)te) Gutter, fetn (tbr) S3ud), his 
 (her) father, his (her) mother, his (her) book. 
 
 Obs* 4. When a possessive pronoun constitutes the predicate 
 to a substantive, or to a pronoun denoting a determinate object, it re- 
 mains like adjectives, uninrlected; as, t>as> SButf) ift fetn, the book 
 is his ; rt>eS ijt t>et SKufjm ? 9?ut £) c t n, nut & e t n ! Whose is the 
 glory ? Thine, only thine ! (§ 52, 1st.) 
 
 Obs, 5. In addressing persons of rank, it was formerly custom 
 ary to use 3 f) t <> instead of the third person feminine 3 fy r e, her 
 and also in place of (Su c r, your ; e. g. 3 & t (now 3 f) t e) 932qe? 
 flat Me ^ontcitnn, her Majesty the queen; 3 h * ((5* u r e) sjftajejtd't 
 rjafcen nut fcefofylen, your Majesty has commanded me. In written 
 communications the pronouns (Sure, your, (Seine, his, and (Setn^, 
 to his, are commonly contracted into (S tt>., <S e., and (S r. ; e. g 
 (Stt>. £)utd)(cutd)t, your Highness; (St. 93?aieftat, to his Majesty. 
 
 § 95. Possessive pronouns are called absolute when they 
 aie not immediately connected with a substantive, but related 
 to one already mentioned or understood. 
 
 Absolute possessive pronouns with the article are inflected 
 like adjectives of the second declension, and without it, like ad- 
 jectives of the first. 
 
 When connected with the article, they frequently change the 
 termination e into 1 3 e ; as, ber m e t n e, m e t n t cj e • ber f e u 
 tt e, fetn tge. 
 
betne 
 
 a 
 
 betntge, 
 
 thine, 
 
 feme 
 
 a 
 
 fetmge, 
 
 his, 
 
 tfyre 
 
 u 
 
 t&rtge, 
 
 hers, 
 
 unfre 
 
 a 
 
 unfrtge, 
 
 ours, 
 
 eure 
 
 a 
 
 eurtge/ 
 
 yours, 
 
 tyre 
 
 a 
 
 t^rige, 
 
 theirs, 
 
 432 
 
 The following list exhibits the absolute possessive pronouns 
 of both declensions in the nominative singular. 
 
 First Declension. Second Declension. 
 
 metner, metne, metneS, ber, bte, ba$ metne or metntge, mine, 
 betner, betne, betneS, » u 
 fetner, fetne, fetne$, n » 
 tfyrer, tfyre, tfyreS, it tt 
 autferer, unfere, unfereS, n w 
 eurer, eure, eureS, * it 
 tfyrer, tfyre, tfyreS, tt ft 
 
 S^rer, 3ftre, 3*)re3, (in polite conversation) 3fyre or^xu 
 
 ge, yours. 
 
 § 96. The inflection of possessive pronouns, both absolute ani 
 onjunctive, may be illustrated by the following examples : — 
 
 I. My brother and his. 
 Singular. 
 Nom. metn 23tubet unb fctncr, bet feintge ; 
 Gen. metner ^rubers unb fetnes, be$ fetntgen ; 
 Dat. metnem 23tubet unb fetnem,bem fetntgen; 
 Ace. written SBrubet unb fetnen, ben fetntgen. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. metne SBrubcr. unb fetne, bte fetntgen ; 
 Gen. metner 23rubet unb fetner, bet fetntgen ; 
 Dat. metnen 23tubern unb fetnen, ben feintgen ; 
 Ace. metne SBtttbet unb fetne, bte fetntgen. 
 
 II. Her sister and mine. 
 
 Nom. tf)te ©cftrocftct unb metne, bte metmge ; 
 Gen. tfyrer @d)we(!cc unb metner, bet metntgen ; 
 Dat. tfjrer (Scfyroejter. unb meiner, ber metntgen u* 
 
 III. Our house and theirs. 
 
 Nom. unfer ^>au^ unb tljreS, t>a$ tfyrige ; 
 Gen. unfreS $mfe$ unb tl)re$, be$ tfyttgen ; 
 Dat. unfecm £aufe unb tfyrem, bem ttyrtgen *c. 
 
 Examples. 3ft ba£ 3f)r ^egenfcfytrm (masc), %i)ve Xmte 
 fern.), 3fyr 5l(etb (neut.) ? 3a, e£ tft m e t n e r, b e r metne, 
 ber metntge — metne, bte metne, bte metntge — met* 
 n e §, b a 3 metne, ba§> metntge; is this your umbrella 
 your ink, your garment ? Yes, it is mine (i. e. my umbrella, m 
 ink, my garment). 
 
 Remark. The absolute possessive pronouns are sometimes 
 ployed substantively, in which case their initial must always be a 
 
433 
 
 capital letter (§ 11); as, ba£ 9ttetntge, £)etntge, (Setntge, 
 my own (my property), thy own, his own; e. g. £afce id) ntd)t 
 SEacbt, $u tfjun, roas id) wilt, mit bem $)* e t n t 9 c n ? Is it not lawful 
 for me to do what I will with mine own 1 So also in the plural, 
 tic m e t n i 3 e n, 2) e i n 1 9 c n, @ e t n t g e n, 3 f) r i 9 e n, my, thy, 
 his, their (your) friends, relatives, family. 
 
 III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS?"^ 
 
 § 97. A demonstrative pronoun serves to point out 
 the locality of the person or thing with which it is 
 connected. 
 
 The German language has three demonstrative pronouns 
 viz: btefer, btefe, btefeS, this; jener, jene, jeneS, 
 that, and ber, b t e, $>a%, this, that. 
 
 £)tefer and jener are dechned like adjectives of the first de 
 elension, thus : — 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 
 
 Nom. btefer, btefe, btefeS (bteS), this, btefe, these, 
 
 Gen. btefeS, btefer, btefeS, of this, btefer, of these, 
 
 Dat. btefem, btefer, btefem, to this, btefen, to these, 
 
 Ace. btefen, btefe, btefeS (bte$), this ; btefe, these. 
 
 § 98. The demonstrative pronoun ber, bte, ba§> may 
 supply the place of either btefer or jetter. When it stands in 
 connection with a substantive, or any word used as such, it is 
 inflected like the definite article (§ 3), and differs from it 
 only by sl stronger accentuation. But when it is used abso- 
 lutely, it deviates from the inflection of the article in the gen. 
 itiv» singular, and in the genitive and dative plural, thus :— 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 Nom ber, bte, ba§>, this, that, 
 
 Gen. \ Jefe»/ jjeren, j beflfen, ) of thi that 
 ( beg, 1 ber, ( beg, $ ' 
 
 Dat. bem, ber, . bent, to this, that ; 
 
 A-cc. ben, bte, bct§, this, that 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 Nom. bte, these, those ; 
 
 Gen. beren, of these, those; 
 
 Dat. benen, to these, those ; 
 
 Acg. bte, / these, those. 
 I© I 
 
434 
 
 § 99. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Obs. 1. £)tefet implies proximity either of space or time tc 
 the person speaking, and hence it is frequently equivalent to the 
 English the latter. S C n e r, on the other hand, refers to some- 
 thing well-known (the Latin Me), already mentioned, or remote* 
 and hence it is often rendered by the former. 
 
 Obs. 2. The neuter pronouns fc> i e $ and b a $ are, like the in- 
 definite e$ (§ 91. Obs. 7), often employed to represent the subject 
 of a proposition in the most general and indefinite manner, ;^me- 
 times even without any distinction of gender or number ; e. g. fc a $ 
 ift cm grcm^ofe, that is a Frenchman ; b t c g ft n t) mctne (Sltern, 
 these are my parents ; b a $ ftnt) SRetfen, those are pinks. 
 
 Obs. 3. £)ep is the more ancient form of the genitive singular 
 masculine and neuter, now only used in the more elevated style of 
 poetry and in composition ; as, b e $f) a I b, b c £ rc> e 9 c n, on that ac 
 count ; b ep frcue fid) fca$ (Srbreicfy, let the earth rejoice in it. 
 
 IV. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 100. Determinative pronouns serve to make 
 prominent the person or object which is the antece- 
 dent of a subsequent relative clause. 
 
 They are : — ber, bte, bctS, that ; berjemge, btejentge, bafijem* 
 ge, he, she, it, that person (who) ; berfelbe, btefelbe, baSfelbe, 
 the same; the obsolete felbtger, felbtge, felbtgeS, the same; and 
 folcfyer, fotcfye, folcfyeS (talis), such. 
 
 £)er, bte, ba3, when standing with a substantive, is inflected 
 like the article (§ 3), and when used absolutely, like the de- 
 monstrative pronoun ber, bte, bctS, except that in the genitive 
 plural it has berer instead of ber en; e. g. t>a§> ©djtdffct! 
 bere r ift fyart, bte fid) fetbjl $u ernafyren mcfyt tm ©tanbe ftnb, 
 the fate of those is hard, who are not able to support them- 
 selves. 
 
 §101. © d I d) e r, when used without the article, follows the 
 inflection of the first declension of adjectives, but when prece- 
 ded by the indefinite article etn, etne, em, it is inflected like an 
 adjective of the third declension, thus : — 
 
 Nom. folcfyer, folcfye, folcfyeS, 
 
 Gen. \ f D !i e§ ' I fDtd?ev V \ Hj eg ' *, 
 I fotcfyen, y I folcfyen, &c. 
 
 Nom. etn fotcfyer, etne foldfje, etn folcfyeS, 
 Gen. efneS folcfyen, etner folcfyen, etneS folcfyen, &c. 
 
 © e v \ e n t 9 e and berfelbe are compounds, of which 
 
435 
 
 Doth components are declined ; ber, bte, bctS following the in« 
 flection of the definite article, and j e n i g e and f e I b e that 
 of the second declension of adjectives : — 
 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. For all genders. 
 
 Nom. berjenfge, btejemge, bctSjemge, 
 
 Gen. beSjem'gen, berjemgen, beSjemgen, 
 
 Dat. bemjentgen, berjentgen, bemjentgen, 
 
 Ace. benjemgen, btejem'ge, baSjemge ; 
 
 Nom. btejem'gen, 
 
 Gen. berjemgen, 
 
 Dat. benjemgen, 
 
 Ace. btejem'gen. 
 
 § 102. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Obs. 1. Determinative pronouns can always be distinguished 
 from demonstratives by the relative clause by which they are gen- 
 erally followed. Examples : berjentge, n) e I d) e t bte 2£ t f s 
 fcnfdjciftcn 1 t c b t, tt»eif* feine SDlufe cmf etne angenefyme 2Crt $u be? 
 nugen, he who is fond of the sciences, is never at a loss how to 
 improve his leisure hours pleasantly; cr f)(\t ben felt) en gtr/ter 
 genwefyt, ix> e I d) c n id) gemacfyt fyabc, he has made the same mistake, 
 which I have made ; traue b e n c n me, b t e *Dic fd)metd)eln, never put 
 confidence in those, who flatter you. 
 
 Obs. 2. The determinative pronouns may be employed either 
 adjectively or substantively. >Dcrjentge serves simply to point out 
 emphatically the antecedent without any other modification ; berfelbe 
 adds to it the notion of identity, which is often made intensive oy 
 the particle e b c n ; as, c b c n berfelbe, the very same, ©oleber im- 
 plies a reference to the kind or constitution of persons or things ; 
 e. g. f o I d) e S ru d)t, such fruit ; e t n f o I d) e r SSatet, such a father. 
 When fctdbcr, in conformity with the English idiom, is followed by 
 the indefinite article, it is not inflected, — f old) e t n 9#ann, such a 
 man ; fold) eincm <Sof)ne, to such & son. Sometimes the syllable oi 
 inflection is likewise dropped, when it is accompanied by an adjec- 
 tive ; as, fold) grope S3efd)etbenr)Ctt, such great modesty. 
 
 Obs, 3. £)et and b erf el be often stand simply as the repre- 
 sentatives of the personal pronouns e r, ft e, c $, or of the posses- 
 sives fetn, tf)r, his, hers, when two persons mentioned in the 
 same or in a previous sentence are to be clearly distinguished from 
 each other ; e. g. er fanb ben 2Satcr unb beff en <3obn $u £aufe, he 
 found the father and his (i. e. the father's) son at home ; ber Sting? 
 ling fcfyttcb feinem gteunbe tiber ba$ bet>otftel)cnbe <Scr>icffat beffelben, 
 the young man wrote to his friend concerning his (the friend's) fu- 
 ture destiny ; btefcr sjBann tr)ut olles fur fetnen 33rubet, aber b erf els 
 b e roetp tfym fetnen Dan! bafiir, this man does every thing for his 
 brother, but he (the brother) is not grateful for it. 
 
 V. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 103. A relative pronoun is one which serves to 
 connect a limiting or explanatory clause to a preceding 
 
436 
 
 loun, to which it relates, and which is called its ante- 
 cedent. 
 
 The German language has four relative pronouns, viz : — bet) 
 bte, ba3, and toelcfyer, weld)?, toelcfyeS, who, which ; met, toctS, 
 who, what, and the obsolete and indeclinable f o. 
 
 § 104. 23elcfyet is the only pronoun of this class which may stand 
 idjectively in connection with a substantive. It is declined 
 like an adjective of the first declension, thus : — 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 Nom. toelcfyer, toelcfye, toelcfyeS, who, which, 
 
 Gen. toelcfye£, toelcfyer, toeldjeS, whose, of which, 
 
 Dat. toefcfyem, toelcfyer, toelcfyem, to whom, to which, 
 
 \cc. toelcfyen, toetcfye, toelcfyeS, whom, which. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 Nom. to eld) e, who, which, 
 
 Gen. toelcfyer, whose, of which, 
 Dat. weld) en, to whom, to which, 
 Ace. to eld) e, whom, which. 
 
 The relative b e r is inflected like the demonstrative ber, 
 bte, ba3 (§ 98). 
 
 The plural of to e r and to a 3 is wanting ; in the singular 
 they are thus declined : — 
 
 Masc. and Fern. Neut. 
 
 Nom. toer, who, he who, she who, toctS, which, what, 
 
 Gen. w **j} e *v ( whose, of whom, toeg, of which, of what, 
 toeg, ) 
 
 Dat. to em, to whom, too^u, to which, to what, 
 
 Ace. toen, whom; mas, which, what. 
 
 § 105. observations. 
 
 Obs. 1 The pronouns to c r and to a $ never relate to an indi- 
 vidual or determinate object, but to such only as are of the most 
 general and indefinite character. Hence they are commonly em- 
 ployed after the neuter demonstrative b a $, or the indefinite numer- 
 als a ( ( c $, all, ettua^ something, m a n dj c $, many a (thing), 
 Diet, much, tt> e n 1 9, little, n t cl) t 6, nothing; e. g. t> a $, to a $ tcfj 
 jjabc, ejek id) Dtr, that which I have, I give thee ; a 1 1 c S, to a £ nut 
 tfycuet tft, all that is dear to me. But, btefct jtnabe (definite), 
 to eld) cr in tic @d)u(e gefyt, this boy who goes to school ; bte iKofe, 
 to e ( d) e blufyt, the rose which blossoms. 
 
 Obs. 2. The forms to e r, to e f f c tt, to e m, to e n relate to persons 
 only, of either sex ; to a g and the genitiv •», to e p only to things and 
 
437 
 
 abstract terms. SB e 9 is also used in the compounds roeproegeit 
 and trepljal&en, wherefore, on which account. 
 
 Obs. 3. On account of this indefinite signification cf vo 1 t and 
 W a $, their antecedent is frequently omitted, and they become equi- 
 valent to b e r I c n t 9 e w e t cb c r, b t e i e n 1 3 e it> c t cb e, b a S i c n u 
 g c n> e I d) e $, he who, she who, that which ; e. g. roer ctnfam figt 
 in fctncr jammer unb febrocte, btttre Sbtanen roetnt (^coatt^), he who 
 sits in his lonely chamber, shedding the heavy, bitter tear; tuaS 
 fctn mup, a,cfd)ef)e ! That which must needs be, let it come to pass ! 
 Sometimes, however, to give emphasis to the expression, the de- 
 terminative bet, bte, bag is added to the main proposition, which 
 in this construction always follows the relative clause ; e. g. to e r 
 ntd)t atOetten null, b e r foil aud) ntd)t effen, he who is not willing to 
 labour, neither shall he eat. 
 
 Obs. 4. The compound relatives whoever, whatever, whosoever^ 
 &c, are rendered in German by annexing a u d) or i m mcr to 
 wet or nxiS ; e. g. n> e r a u d) (i til m e r), w a $ a u cb (i m m e t), &c. 
 
 Ofo. 5. After personal pronouns of the first and second persons, 
 the relative \v e I d) e r is never used, but always t) e r ; e. g. t d)/ b e t 
 (not r&elcfeet) id) t>ot £)tr ftefye, I who am standing before thee ; 3) u, 
 bet £)u mein etgenet 23tubct bi% thou who art mine own brother. 
 
 It will be perceived from these examples, that in German the 
 personal pronouns (t d), b u) are repeated after the relative ; when- 
 ever this is the case, the verb of the relative clause must agree in 
 person with the personal pronoun ; otherwise it is put in the third 
 person, and agrees with the relative ; e. g. Unfet SSater, b e t £> u b t ft 
 in bem ^tmmet, our father who art in heaven ; Du, b c r fo mel 
 tt c f* t unt) fo wemcj ten it, thou, who readest so much and thinkest 
 so little. 
 
 Obs. 6. Instead of xo e 1 d) e $, xo e I d) e t, pi. xo c ( d) c t, the gen- 
 itives of the relative nxtcbet, the Germans regularly substitute t> e f ? 
 fen, b e t c n, pi. t) c r e n ; the genitives of roelcbet being only used 
 when the relative is employed adjectively (§ 104); e. g. bet 9^ann, 
 t> e f f e n (not xo c I d) e $) (Sofyn id) fenne, the man whose son I am ac- 
 quainted with; bie SBaume, be t en (not roelcbet) 93Uitr)cn afojefaflen 
 ftnb, the trees, the blossoms of which have perished. But, teuton, 
 weld) eg $pf)itofopf}cn ^princtpta id) gelefen ty&t, Newton, the Princi- 
 pia of which philosopher I have read. 
 
 Obs. 7. The use of the relative f o, instead of xo e 1 d) e r and feet, 
 is antiquated. It occurs only occasionally in poetry, as, $Kb'Scben 
 fchtummert, f o bet 9J?uttet gteube, fo bet <Sto($ beg £)otfe$ mat, Rosetta 
 Bleeps (in death), who once was the joy of her mother, the pride 
 of the place. 
 
 VI. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 106. Interrogative pronouns are employed in 
 asking questions. 
 
 They are : — 1st, wet? ro a $? who? what? which are al 
 
438 
 
 ways used substantively ; 2d, ro e I cf) e r, w e I ct) e, wetcfyeS? 
 which, what ? used substantively and adjectively both ; and 3d, 
 mag fiir etn, cine, etn? what sort of ? 
 
 The plural of mer, wag is wanting ; the singular is declined 
 thus : — 
 
 Masc. and Fern. Neut. 
 
 Nom. mer, who? mag, what? 
 
 Gen. mefifen or me$, whose? (it) eg), of what? 
 
 Dat. mem, to whom ? . mo^u,* to what ? 
 
 Ace. men, whom? | was, what? 
 
 The interrogative metcfyer is inflected precisely like the re* 
 lative (§ 104). 
 
 § 107. When mag fiir etn stands in immediate connection 
 with a substantive, the e t n, which is the only declinable part, 
 follows the inflection of the indefinite article in the singular 
 number. In the plural the pronoun is simply m a g f ii t\ 
 
 What sort of a tree, a flower, a book ? 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 Nom. mag fiir etn 25aum, erne SSutme, em 93ud)? 
 Gen. roa£ fiir etneg 23anmeg, etner 93(ume, etneg S5ud)e3? 
 Dat. mag fiir etnem 25aume, etner 9S(ume, etnem aSudje? 
 Ace. mag fiir etnen SSaum, erne 93lume, etn 93ttcfj? 
 
 What sort of trees, flowers, books ? 
 Plural. 
 Nom. mag fiir SSdttme, 23(ttmen, 23iid)er ? 
 
 Gen. »on mag fiir SSaumen, 35(umen, aSiictyern? 
 Dat. mag fiir 93aumen, S3lumen, SSiicfyern? 
 
 Ace. mag fiir 23aume, SSlumen, Siicfyer? 
 
 But If the substantive, to which mag fiir etn relates, is not 
 expressed, it is declined in the singular only, like an adjective 
 >f the first declension, thus : — 
 
 Masc^ Fem. Neut. 
 
 Nom. mag fiir etner, erne, etneg, 
 
 Gen. mag fiir etneg, etner, etneg, 
 
 Dat. wag fiir etnem, etner, etnem, 
 
 Ace. mag fiir etnen, et'ne, etneg. 
 
 * With respect to the pronominal adverbs, which supply the place of th© 
 oblique cases of demonstrative, relative and interrogative pronouns, see the 
 remarks on Adverbs, below. 
 
439 
 
 § 108. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Obs. 1. The genitive wcffcn, and the dative rocm, are gener* 
 ally applicable to persons only, and not to things, except the ab- 
 breviated form rx> e p in composition; as, tt>c£ fyaib, rocproc^cn, 
 wherefore, on what account ; e. g. we^citb biffc 2)u gefommcn ? 
 wherefore hast thou come? rccpnxgen roeint fie? why does she 
 weep ] 
 
 Obs. 2. The pronouns was fur ctn and meld), the uninfiected 
 form c f rx>ctd)cr, are sometimes used in exclamations of surprise ; 
 e. g. 2B a S fur ctn SSaum ! What a tree ! @cf)t, rr> c t d) ctn 
 SO^cnfd) ! Lo, what a man ! 2B c ( d) ©Ificf t>c$ $iiiime& fyaO id) rcca,- 
 gcfd)(cul>crt ! What heaven-sent fortune I have cast away ! 
 
 Obs, 3. SB e r and n> a £ are employed when inquiry is made 
 after a person or thing in the most general and indefinite manner. 
 £B c ( d) c r is more definite, including the notion of the quality or 
 condition of the individual object inquired after. It is the correlative 
 of feld)cr (§ 102. Obs. 2), and corresponds to the Latin qualis. 335 a $ 
 fur cin indicates the species or kind, to which the person or thing 
 belongs; e. g. 835 cr ijt t>a ? (Sin 5Rcmn. SBcs fur etner? 
 (Stn jlaufmcmn cms Hamburg. SB c I d) e r Jtaufmann ? £crr 9k 
 Who is there 1 A man. What sort of one 1 A merchant of Ham- 
 burg. What merchant 1 Mr. N. 2B a g f^j} 3> u ? (gi nc S3(umc. 
 2B a $ fur cine SBtume ? Sine <Kefc. 2£ c I cb c ? f)te rotfje. What 
 have you 1 A flower. What sort of a flower ? A rose. Which 
 rose 1 The red rose. 
 
 Obs. 4. The ctn, of uoa$ fur ctn, is omitted before names of ma- 
 terials, or before substantives of the plural number. 2Ba$ fur 
 2Bctn ? What kind of wine 1 2Bas fur Scute ? What sort of 
 people 1 
 
 Obs. 5. The interrogative m a g is sometimes employed in the 
 sense of to a r u m ; e .g. 83$ a $ bctriibfi 3)u 3)td) ? Why art thou cast 
 town ! SB a $ wetnen ©tc ? Why do you weep 1 
 
 VERBS, 
 
 § 109. 1st, A verb is a word by which either an ac- 
 tivity, a passivity, or a simple mode of existence is predi- 
 cated of a person or thing called its subject ; e. g. id) 
 fcfyretbe, I write ; ®u ttrirfi gefcfylaqert, thou art beaten ; 
 bit SHofe bliifyt, the rose blooms. 
 
 2d, Verbs are divided into two principal classes — 
 Transitive and Intransitive. 
 
 3d, Transitive verbs are active verbs, the sense of which is 
 not complete without the addition of an object in the accusa- 
 tive case ; e. g. id) fcfyretbe etnen 23rtef, I am writing a letter. 
 
440 
 
 § 110. Intransitive verbs are of two kinds: — 
 1st, Neuter verbs, which denote either a quiescent state (sim- 
 pie mode of existence) ; as, id) rufye, ft£e, fdjlafe, I am resting 
 sitting, sleeping, or such an activity as does not terminate hi 
 any object ; e. g. id) laufe, fampfe, gefye, I am running, strug- 
 gling, going. 
 
 2d, Those active verbs, the object of which is either in the 
 genitive or dative ; e. g. id) fcfyone, »ergeflfe, erinnere mid) fei* 
 n e r, I spare, forget, remember him ; td) gefyorcfye, traue, banfe 
 i % m, I obey, trust, thank him. 
 
 § 111. Transitive verbs have two forms, called the 
 active and the passive voices. 
 
 If the subject is represented as the agent acting upon an- 
 other person or thing {object in the accusative), the verb is said 
 to be in the active voice ; e. g. td) rttfe, tie be, nenne 
 \\)x\, I love, call, name him. 
 
 B t if the subject of the verb is the object of the action ex- 
 pressed by it, the verb is said to be in the passive voice ; e. g. 
 id) wevbe gerufert, geh'ebt, gencmnt, I am called, loved, named. 
 
 § 112. 1st, Intransitive verbs do, from the nature of their 
 signification, not admit of a passive voice, but have the active 
 form only ; as, id) reife, ftefye, I am travelling, standing. 
 
 2d, When, however, the active subject cannot be named, or 
 is designedly left indeterminate, intransitive verbs may be used 
 impersonally in the third person singular of the passive voice ; 
 e. g. e£ roirb g eta ngt, gefptett, getrunfen, there 
 is dancing, playing, drinking going on. 
 
 § 113. The class of intransitive verbs comprehends also 
 reflexive verbs. Of these there are two kinds : — 
 
 1st, Such as are employed in the reflexive form only ; as, 
 ftd) beftnrtert, ftd) fefynen, fid) freiten, to reflect, to 
 long, to rejoice. 
 
 2d, Such as are formed from transitive verbs by the addition 
 of the reflexive pronouns mid), iin§, bid), end), ft d) (§ 90. 
 Obs. 3) 5 e. g. er firgert fi d), he is vexed ; id) lege mid), I lie 
 down ; fyiite Sit Sid)! beware ! from a r g e r n, legert, 
 I) h t e n, to vex, to lay down, to guard. 
 
 This form of verbs is of extensive use in German, and cor- 
 responds to the deponent verbs in Latin and to the niddle voice 
 in Greek. 
 
 § 114. 1st, Impersonal verbs are employed in the third 
 person singular only. Their subject is quite indeterminate, and 
 
441 
 
 is always expressed by the indefinite pronoun e 8 (§ 90. O bs. 7) t 
 as, e 8 regnet, e $ Conner t, e 3 b 1 1 § t, it rains, it thun- 
 ders, it lightens ; e$ fyetg t, it is said ; e3 gtbt ieute, there are 
 men. 
 
 2d, Many verbs have an impersonal form in German, which 
 are not used as such in English ; e. g. e£ fyungert mid), I am 
 hungry; e$ fciirftet mid), I am thirsty; e$ fnert mtd), I am 
 cold ; e§ ld0t ftcfy m'cfyt gut ftrtgen, it is not easy to sing, &c. 
 
 § 115. Of auxiliary verbs there are two classes in Ger- 
 man : — 
 
 1st, Auxiliary verbs of tenses, of which there are three : 
 fy a b e n, to have ; f e t tt, to be ; and k> e r b e n, to become (shall, 
 will). 
 
 2d, Auxiliary verbs of mood, not absolutely necessary to the 
 conjugation of the verb. They are seven in number: bur* 
 f e n, to be permitted ; f o n n e n, to be able (can) ; m o g e tt, to 
 be allowed (may) ; m ii f f e n, to be obliged (must) ; f 11 e n, to 
 be under obligation (ought) ; ro It e n, to be willing (to intend) ; 
 ( a f f e tt, to let (permit). 
 
 § 116. In the conjugation of the German verb, we 
 distinguish, as in English, the relations of Number, 
 Person, Mood, and Tense. 
 
 §117. Verbs have two numbers, Singular and Plural; 
 and three persons, each of which may be distinguished by its 
 characteristic termination. 
 
 The following scheme exhibits the terminations of verbs as as- 
 sumed by the three persons, singular and plural : — 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Person — e or given, 
 
 2d Person — eft, ft, 
 
 3d Person — e t, t, or like the first person ; 
 
 examples : 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 en, 
 
 et,t, 
 
 en. 
 
 id) xti e, I speak, 
 
 bu lob e ft, thou praisest, 
 
 Ct fptelt, he plays; 
 
 toix tefert, we read, 
 tbr fefyet, ye see, 
 fte furf) e n, they seek. 
 
 § 1 18. German verbs have four moods, viz : — the Indica* 
 live, Subjunctive, Imperative, and the Infinitive ; the significa- 
 tion of which in general corresponds to that of moods of the 
 19* 
 
442 
 
 same name in English; e.g. fie rebett, they speak (hr 
 die); id) t> a tt e gerebet, I should have spoken (subj.) ; 
 r e b e £) it ! speak thou (imper.) ! 
 
 § 119. They have, moreover, six tenses : — the Present, 
 Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, Simple Future, and Future 
 Perfect. Of these the present and imperfect of the indicative 
 and subjunctive active are simple tenses ; the remaining ten- 
 ses of the active voice, as well as all the tenses of the passive, 
 are periphrastic, i. e. formed by means of the perfect partici- 
 ple or infinitive, and the auxiliary verbs of tenses (§ 115) ; e. g. 
 pres. id) {) 6 r e, I hear ; imperf id) t)6 r te, I heard ; perf id) 
 fyabe g e t) 6 r t, I have heard ; pres. passive, id) roerbe g e * 
 t) o r t, I am heard, &c. 
 
 § 120. There are four forms of the infinitive : — the present 
 and perfect infinitives active ; as, I o b e tt, to praise ; g e I o b t 
 I) a b e n, to have praised ; and the present and perfect infinitives 
 passive ; e. g. gelobtwerben, to be praised ; g e I D b t 
 tt>orben f e t tt, to have been praised. The present infinitive 
 active always ends in n or e tt, and is often preceded by the pre- 
 position g u ; as, $u fyelf e it, to help ; gu tabel tt, to blame. 
 
 § 121. The German verb has three Participles : the 
 present, perfect, and future. 
 
 1st, The present participle is formed from the present infini- 
 tive, by adding b to it ; as, (obert b, fyorett b, praising, hearing. 
 It is always active in its signification, and is less extensively 
 employed than the English participle in ing. 
 
 2d, The perfect participle generally assumes the prefix g e, 
 and ends either in e t or t in regular verbs ; as, g e lob e t, 
 praised ; g e leb e t, lived ; or in e tt (tt) in irregular verbs ; as, 
 9 e fet) c tt, seen ; g e geflf e tt, eaten. When belonging to tran- 
 sitive verbs, it has a passive signification (except in the c#m- 
 pound tenses of the active voice), but when formed from in- 
 transitive verbs, it is active (§ 112), differing from the present 
 participle only in the relation of time. 
 
 3d, The future participle is formed from the infinitive with 
 jit, by annexing the letter b ; as, ju Id belt, to praise ; 
 SU tobenb, to be praised; $tt serebrertb, to be venerated, 
 verable. Like the Latin participle in dus (amandus, veneran- 
 dus), it always has a passive signification, involving at the same 
 time the notion of necessity, propriety, or possibility. It is, 
 however, employed only as an adjective in the attributive rela* 
 
443 
 
 iion (§52); as, fcer £u lob en be ©cfyfrier, the scholar wiia 
 is to be (ought, may, must be) praised. But not : ber ©cfyiitet 
 tft g u I o b e n b ; in the latter case the infinitive with ju is used 
 instead of the participle : — ber ©d)ii(er tft i u I D b e tt, the 
 scholar is to be praised, is worthy of praise. 
 
 § 122. With respect to the perfect participle, it is to be re- 
 marked, that it does not assume the prefix g e in the following 
 instances :— 
 
 1st, In the verb nj e r b e n, when, as an auxiliary, it stands 
 in connection with another verb ; as, er ; ft gefragt *n D r b e n 
 (not (jeroorben), he has been asked. 
 
 2d, In all German verbs compounded with the inseparable 
 and unaccented prefixes be, beun, emp, ent, er, ge, ser, 
 » e r a b, & e r u n and $ e r ; as, b e I e f) r t, entfaltet, 
 ertfyettt, ttercjeffen, gerrtffen, instructed, unfolded, 
 imparted, forgotten, torn ; not q e beleljrt, g e entfaltet, &c. 
 
 4th, In all verbs derived from foreign languages, which 
 have the accented termination trenorteren; e. g. ctbfol* 
 »trt, ftubtrt, bctrbtert, from abfefotren, to absolve; 
 (rub t r e n, to study ; bctvb i e x e n, to shave. 
 
 5th, In verbs compounded with the particles bitrcfy, t)tnter, 
 u b e r, am, unter, »otl and void ex, when they are in- 
 separable, in which case the accent rests not on the particle, 
 but on the verb; e.g. »o((brad)t, fy tnterg ang en, un* 
 terfefytteben, from ttollbrtngen, to consummate, finish ; 
 fytntergefyen, to deceive, and unter fcfyrab en, to sign. 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 § 123. To the full conjugation of German verbs, three 
 auxiliaries are necessary, and only three, namely, the 
 auxiliary verbs of tenses (§ 115) : fyab en, to have ; 
 f e i n, to be, and tt> e r b e n, to become. 
 
 1st, £ a b c n is used in forming the perfect infinitive (and 
 tenses derived from it), the perfect and pluperfect, both indi- 
 cative and subjunctive, of all transitive and of many intransitive 
 verbs ; as, cjettebt I) a b c n , to have loved ; perf id) (jafcc geltebt, I 
 have loved ; pluperf tdj I) a 1 1 e gcttcbr, 1 had loved ; future perf. 
 id) roerfee 9 e I i c b t f) a b e n, I shall have loved, &c. 
 
 2d, (S c i n serves to form the same tenses of all verbs in the 
 passive voice and of many intransitive verbs in the active ; e. g. 
 verf icf) 6 in geltebt ruotfccn, I have been loved ; future perf. t>u nritft 
 geltebt rootben fetn, thou shalt have been loved ; id) bin qereipt, I 
 have travelled. 
 
444 
 
 3d, SB e x b e n is used in the formation of the future tense* 
 when it corresponds to the English shall or will, ar *d also in the 
 formation of all the tenses of the passive voice, when it corresponds 
 to the English verb to be ; e. g. id) m c r t> c Itebeti, I shall love; 
 t>u r» t r ft geltebt fyaben, thou wilt have loved ; ex \v t r t> gcUebt, he is 
 loved, &c. 
 
 § 124. The simple tenses of the auxiliary verbs are irre- 
 gular as in English. The compound tenses are regularly 
 formed, as in all other verbs, according to the following 
 
 RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Rule I. The perfect tense of any verb is formed by annex- 
 ing its peifect participle to the present indicative of either j) a * 
 ben or fetn; id) tyabe gefyabt, geltebt, gefungen, I have had, 
 loved, sung ; id) bin geroefen, gegemgen, gereift, I have been, 
 gone, travelled. 
 
 Rule II. The pluperfect is made by joining the perfect par- 
 ticiple of the verb to the imperfect tense of either b a b e n 01 
 fein; as, id) fycttte gefyctbt, geitebt, gefungen, I had had, 
 loved, sung ; id) wax gemefen, gegemgen, getetf t, I had been, 
 gone, travelled. 
 
 Rule III. The first or simple future is formed by annexing 
 the present infinitive of the verb to the present indicative of 
 the auxiliary n> e rb en ; as, id) roerbe baben, Kebert, retfen, 
 fein, I shall have, love, travel, be. 
 
 Rule IV. The future perfect is made by joining the perfect 
 infinitive of the verb to the present of the auxiliary xo e r b e n ; 
 e. g. id) werbe gefyabt baben, geitebt f;aben, gereift fyaben, I 
 shall have had, loved, travelled. 
 
 Remark. The corresponding tenses of the subjunctive mood 
 are formed in a similai manner. 
 
 § 125. From these rules it will be seen, that in order to 
 form all the compound tenses of a verb, three principal parts 
 must necessarily be given, viz : the present infinitive, the per- 
 fect participle, and the perfect infinitive (which also contains 
 the auxiliary which the verb employs). 
 
 § 126. Instead of the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive 
 (id) batte, id) batte gebabt, I might have, I might have had), 
 when they are conditional, i. e. when they denote a possibility 
 not conceived as really existing, the imperfect subjunctive of 
 tt> e x b e n (id) roiitbe), in connection with the present and per- 
 
445 
 
 ect infinitive, is often used ; e. g. id) tt) u x b e I) a b e n, lie 
 ben, I should have, love; id) miirfce gebabt, geltebt baben, I 
 should have had, have loved. 
 
 These compound forms of the verb have commonly had a 
 place among the other tenses, under the name of first and 
 second conditionals. 
 
 § 127. PARADIGMS 
 TO THE CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 I. £) a b e n, to have. 
 
 C Pres. Infin. baben, to have. 
 Principal parts. < Perf. Part, gebabt, had. 
 
 ( Perf. Infin. gefyabt tjaben, to have had. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 d) babe, I have, am having, do id) babe, I may have, be hav- 
 
 have, ing, 
 
 fcu baft, thou hast, &c. bit babeft, thou mayst have, &c. 
 
 er (fie, e6) bat, he (she, it) has, er (fie, e£) ^abe, he (she, it) 
 &c. may have, &c. 
 
 Plural. Plural, 
 
 tciv baben, we have, &c. xvix baben, we may have, &c. 
 
 tbr b<*bet (babt), ye or you tyr babet, ye or you may have, 
 
 have, dec. &c. 
 
 fte baben, they have, &c. fte baben, they may have, &#>. 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) batte, I had, was having, id) fyixtte, I might have, be hav- 
 
 did have, ing, 
 
 fcu batteft, thou hadst, &c. bu batteft, thou mightst have 
 
 &c. 
 er batte, he had, &c. er batte, he might have, &c. 
 
 Plural. Plural, 
 
 wix batten, we had, &c. tm'r batten, we might have, &c 
 
 tbf battet, ye or you had, &c. tbr bartet, ye or you might 
 
 have, &c. 
 fte batten, they had, <fec. fte batten, they might have, <fec 
 
446 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 ifij feabe gefyabt/ I havo had, id) fyabe cjefyabt^ I may have 
 
 been having, had, been having, 
 
 fcu fyajT: Q^abt, thou hast had, bu babeft gebabt, thou mayst 
 
 &a have had, &c. 
 
 er fyat gefyabt, he has had, &c. er babe gefyabt, he may have 
 
 had, &c. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 ttJtr baben gefyabt, we have had, mtr baben gefyabt, we may have 
 
 &c. had, &c. 
 
 tbrbctbet(babt) gefyabt, you have ttyr fyabet cjefyabt, you may have 
 
 had, &c. had, &c. 
 
 fie fyctben getjabt, they have had, fte babert gebabt, they may have 
 
 &c. had, &c. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) bcttte gebabt, I had had, been id) fyatte gefyabt, I might have 
 
 having, had, been having, 
 
 bu fycttteft gebabt, thou hadst bu fcatteji gebabt, thou mightst 
 
 had, &c. have had, &c. 
 
 er batte gebabt, he had had, &c. er bdtte gebabt, he might have 
 
 had, &c. 
 
 Plural. Plural, 
 
 tioix fatten gebabt, we had had, tmr batten gebabt, we might 
 
 &c. have had, &c. 
 
 tbr battet gebabt, you had had, tfyr ^dttet gebabt, you might 
 
 &c. have had, &c. 
 
 fte batten gebabt, they had had, fte fatten gebabt, they might 
 
 &c. have had, &c. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) rcerbe baben, I shall have, td) werbe fyaben, I shall have, 
 
 be having, be having, 
 
 bu toivft baben, thou wilt have, bu merbefl: ^abett, thou wilt 
 
 &c. have, &c. 
 
 er tmrb fyaben, he will have, er werbe fyaben, he will have, 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
 ttjtr werben baben, we shall have, &c. 
 tbr roerbet baben, you will have, &c. 
 fte werbett baben, they will have, &c. 
 
447 
 
 Futitce Perfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) roerbe $efyabt fyabett, I shall id) merbe gefyabt tjaben, I shall 
 
 have had, been having, have had, been having, 
 
 bu toixft gefyabt fyaben, thou wilt bit roerbeft cjefyabt fyaben, thou 
 
 have had, &c. wilt have had, &c. 
 
 er rotrb getyabt fyctben, he will er roerbe Qtfyabt tyaben, he will 
 
 have had, &c. have had, &c. 
 
 Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
 
 voir Herbert cjefyabt fyaben, we shall have had, &c. 
 tfyr roerbet cjefyabt baben, you will have had, &c. 
 fte roerben cjefjabt fyaben, they will have had, &c. 
 
 Conditionals. 
 
 First Conditional. Second Conditional. 
 
 Singular. Singular, 
 
 id) roiirbe fyctben, I should have, id) roiirbe gefyabt {jaben, I should 
 
 have had, 
 bit wiirbefl: l)aben, thou wouldst bu toiirbeft QtyaU baben, thou 
 
 have, wouldst have had, 
 
 er roiirbe fyctbett, he would have; er roiirbe gefyctbt baben, he 
 
 would have had ; 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 voiv rourben tjaben, we should tmr wiirben Qtfyabt baben, we 
 have, should have had, 
 
 ii)t nmrbet ^aben, you would tyr roiirbet gebabt fyaben, you 
 have, would have had, 
 
 fte nmrben fyaben. they would fte roitrben ge^abt baben, they 
 have. would have had. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 baben rotr, let us have, 
 f)ab e (bit), have ( .hou), do thou i>c&et or fyabt (t'br), ) have ye, da 
 
 have, fyaben ©te, J ye here, 
 
 babe er (fte, e£), let him (her, fyaben fte, let them have 
 it) have ; 
 
 Infinitives. Participles. 
 
 Pres. fyabett, to have, Pres. fyabenb, having, 
 
 Perf. qefyabt baben,tc have had. Perf. $ebabt, had. 
 
448 
 
 § 128. II. © e t n, to be. 
 
 C Pres. Infin. fetn, to be. 
 Principal parts. < Perf. Part, gewefen, been. 
 
 ( Perf. Infin. gewefen fern, to have been, 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Singular, 
 
 id) bin, I am, id) fet, I may be, 
 
 bu btft, thou art, tit feteft (fetfb,thou mayst be, 
 
 er (fie, e$) t'ft he (she, it) er fet, he may be ; 
 is; 
 
 Plural. 
 wit feten (fetn), we may be, 
 tfer fetet, you may be, 
 fte feten (fetn), they may be. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 Wtr fmb, we are, 
 tfyr fetb, you are, 
 fte fmb, they are. 
 
 Singular, 
 id) war, I was, 
 bu warejl (warft), thou wast, 
 
 er war, he was ; 
 
 Plural. 
 wtr waren, we were, 
 tfyr waret (wart), you were, 
 fte warett, they were. 
 
 id) ware, I might be, 
 
 bit wareft (wdrjt), thou mightsl 
 
 be, 
 er ware, he might be ; 
 
 Plural. 
 wtr wdren, we might be, 
 iifT wdret (wart), you might be, 
 fte wdren, they might be. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Singular. Singular, 
 
 id) bin gewefen, I have been, id) fet gewefen, I may have 
 
 been, 
 bu btftgewefen, thou hast been, tn fetjt gewefen, thou mayst 
 
 have been, 
 er tft gewefen, be has been ; er fet gewefen, he may have 
 
 been; 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 Wtr fmb gewefen, we have been, wtr feten gewefen, we may have 
 
 been, 
 if)x fetb gewefen, you have been, tfyr fetet gewefen, you may have 
 
 been, 
 fteftnb gewefen, they have been, fte feten gewefen, they may have 
 
 been. 
 
449 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Singular. Singular* 
 
 id) mar gemefen, I had been, id) mdre gemefen, I might nave 
 
 been, 
 bu warjt gemefen, thou hadst bu mareft gemefen, thou mights! 
 
 been, have been, 
 
 er ra&r gemefen, he had been ; er ware gemefen, he might 
 
 have been ; 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 ttrir maren gemefen, we had mir maren gemefen, we might 
 
 been, have been, 
 
 ifyv maret gemefen, you had tfyr maret gemefen, you migk* 
 
 been, have been, 
 
 fie maren gemefen, they had fie mdren gemefen, they might 
 
 been. have been. 
 
 First Future. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) merbe fern, I shall be, id) merbe fein, I shall be, 
 
 In mtrft fein, thou wilt be, in merbefl: fein, thou wilt be, 
 
 er mtrb fet'n, he will be ; er merbe fem, he will be ; 
 
 Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive* 
 
 ttrir merben fein, we shall be, 
 ifyr merbet fein, you will be, 
 fte merben fein, they will be. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) merbe gemefen fein, I shall id) merbe gemefen fein, 1 shall 
 
 have been, have been, 
 
 bu mt'rjl: gemefen fein, thou wilt t>u werbefl: gemefen fein, thou 
 
 have been, wilt have been, 
 
 er tmrb gemefen fein, he will er merbe gemefen fein, he will 
 
 have been ; have been ; 
 
 Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
 
 ttrir merben gemefen fein, we shall have been, 
 tfyr merbet gemefen fein, you will have been, 
 fte merben gemefen fein, they will have been. 
 
450 
 
 Conditionals. 
 
 First Conditional. Second Conditional. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) roiirbe fetn, I should be, id) rcurbegeroefen fern, I should 
 
 have been, 
 bu ttmrbejT: fern, thou wouldst bu wutbejl geroefen fern, thou 
 
 be, wouldst have been, 
 
 er rotirbe fetn, he would be ; er ttmrbe geroefen fetn, he would 
 
 have been ; 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 wtr roiirben fetn, we should be, tmr wiirben geroefen fetn, we 
 
 should have been, 
 
 tfyr rotirbet fetn, you would be, tfyr rciirbet geroefen fetn, you 
 
 would have been, 
 
 fte wiirben fetn, they would be. fie roiirben gewoefen fetn, they 
 
 would have been. 
 
 Imperative. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 feten wtr, let us be, 
 fet (bit), be thou, do be, fetb (tfyr), ) be ye, 
 
 feten @te, $ do ye be, 
 fet er (fte, e£), let him (her, it) feten fte, let them be. 
 be ; 
 
 Infinitives. Participles. 
 
 Pres. fetn, to be, Pres. fetenb (roefenb), being, 
 
 Perf. geroefen fetn, to have been. Perf. geroefen, been. 
 
 § 129. III. 203 e r b e n, to become (shall, will). 
 
 "Pres. Infin. roerben, to become. 
 Principal parts. J J»bp. Paht. gemorbett, become. 
 
 r r ) Perf. Infin. geroorben fetn, to have 
 
 become. 
 
 indicative. subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Singular, 
 
 id) wevbe, I become, am be- id) roerbe, I may become, be 
 
 coming, do become, becoming, 
 
 tu ttn'rjr, thou becomest, &c. bit roerbeft, thou mayst be- 
 come, &c. 
 er tm'rb, he becomes, &c. er werbe, he may become, &c 
 
451 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 ttnr werben, we become, &c. wtr werben, we may become* 
 
 &c. 
 tfyr roevbet, you become, &c. tfyr werbet, you may become, 
 
 &c. 
 fte werben, they become, &c. fie rcerben, they may become, 
 
 &c. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) rourbe (roarb), I became, id) ttutrbe, I might become, be 
 
 was becoming, did become, becoming, 
 
 bu ttutrbeft (roarbjV)/ thou be- bu roiirbeft, thou mightst be- 
 
 earnest, &c. come, &c. 
 
 er ttnttbe (warb), he became, er ttmrbe, he might become, 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 toiv wurben, we became, &c. mtr wilrben, we might be 
 
 come, &c. 
 
 tfyr wurbet, you became, &c. tfyr mitrbet, you might be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 fte wurben, they became, &c. fte roiirben, they might be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) bin geworben (worben), I id) fet geworben (rootben), I 
 have become, been becom- may have become, been be- 
 ing, coming, 
 
 bit btft geroorben (roorben), thou bu fetfl geroorben (roorben), 
 
 hast become, <fcc. thou mayst have become, 
 
 &c. 
 
 er tft geroorben (worben), he er fet geworben (roorben). he 
 
 has become, &c. may have become, &c. 
 
 Plural. Plural* 
 
 rotr ftnb geworben (roorben), n>tv feten geroorben (worben), 
 
 we have become, &c. we may have become, &c. 
 
 ifyr fetb geroorben (roorben), tt>r fetet cjeroorben (roorben), 
 
 you have become, &c. you may have become, &c. 
 
 fte ftnb geroorben (worben), fte feten cjeworben (roorben), 
 
 they have become, &c. they may have become, <fcc. 
 
452 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) war geworben (worben), I 
 had become, been becom- 
 ing* 
 
 bu warft geworben (worben), 
 thou hadst become, &c. 
 
 er war geworben (worben), he 
 had become, &c. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 wtr waren geworben (worben), 
 we had become, &c. 
 
 tfyr waret geworben (worben), 
 you had become, &c. 
 
 fte waren geworben (worben), 
 they had become, &e. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) ware geworben (worben), 1 
 might have become, been 
 becoming, 
 
 bu warejl geworben (worben), 
 thou mightst have become, 
 
 &C. 
 
 er ware geworben (worben), 
 he might have become, &c. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 wtr waren g-eworben (worben), 
 
 we might have become, &c. 
 xbr waret geworben (worben), 
 
 you might have become, &c. 
 fte wdren geworben (worben), 
 
 they might have become, 
 
 &c. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ,ct) werbe werben, I shall be- 
 come, be becoming, 
 
 bu wtrjl werben, thou wilt be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 er wtrb werben, he will be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) werbe werben, I shall be- 
 come, be becoming, 
 
 bu werbejl werben, thou shalt 
 become, &c. 
 
 er werbe werben, he shall be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
 wtr werben werben, we shall become, &c. 
 tfyr werbet werben, you will become, &c. 
 fte werben werben, they will become, &c. 
 
 Future 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) werbe geworben (worben) 
 
 fetn, I shall have become, 
 
 been becoming, 
 bu wirfl: geworben (worben) 
 
 fetn, thou wilt have become, 
 
 &c. 
 er wtrb geworben (worben) fetn, 
 
 he will have become, &c. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) werbe geworben (worben) 
 
 fetn, I shall have become, 
 
 been becoming, 
 bu werbeft geworben (worben) 
 
 fetn, thou wilt have become, 
 
 &c. 
 er werbe geworben (worben) 
 
 fetn, he will have become, 
 
 &c. 
 
453 
 
 Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
 tmr werben geroorben (roorben) fern, we shall have become, &c 
 i\)X roerbet geroorben (moreen) fetn, you will have become, &c« 
 fie werben geroorben (roorben) fetn, they will have become, &c. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 First Conditional. 
 Singular. 
 
 id) ttmrbt roerben, I should be- 
 come, be becoming, 
 
 fcu wiirbefi: roerben, 
 wouldst become, &c. 
 
 thou 
 
 er roiirbe werben, 
 become, &c. 
 
 he would 
 
 Plural, 
 wiv wurben werben, we should 
 become, &c. 
 
 tfyr wiirbet roerben, you would 
 become, &c. 
 
 f e wiirben roerben, they would 
 become, dec. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 merbe (bit), become thou, do 
 
 become, 
 toerbe er (fte, e$), let him (her, 
 
 it) become ; 
 
 Infinitives. 
 Pres. werben, to become, 
 Perf. geroorben fetn, to have 
 become. 
 
 Second Conditional. 
 Singular. 
 
 tcf) witrbe geroorben (worben) 
 fetn, I should have become, 
 been becoming, 
 
 bu wiirbefi: geroorben (worben) 
 fetn, thou wouldst have be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 er roiirbe geroorben v 'tt)orben) 
 fetn, he would have become, 
 &c. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 nnr roiirben geroorben (roorben) 
 fetn, we should have be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 tfyr wtirbet gercorben (roorben) 
 fetn, you would have be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 fie roiirben geworben (morben) 
 fetn, they would have be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Plural. 
 roerben rotr, let us become, 
 
 roerbet (%), ) become ye, 
 roerben ©te, $ do become, 
 werben fie, let them become. 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. roerbenb, becoming, 
 Perf. geroorben, become. 
 
 § 130. It has been remarked (§ 123) that the compound 
 tenses of some intransitive verbs are made by means of the 
 auxiliary fy a b e n, and of others by means of f $ t it, The sig- 
 
454 
 
 mfication of the verb generally decides which auxiliary is to 
 be employed. 
 
 § 131. INTRANSITIVE VERBS WHICH ASSUME THE 
 
 auxiliary \) a be it* 
 
 1st, Impersonal and reflexive verbs; as, e$ t)at geregnet, 
 gebonnert, it has rained, thundered ; td) 1) a b e mid) gefreut, 1 
 have rejoiced ; er I) at fid) gedrgert, he has been vexed. 
 
 2d, All the auxiliary verbs of mood (§ 115) ; as, id) b a b e 
 gemugt, I have been obliged ; er b a t mcfyt fommen fonrten, he 
 has not been able to come. 
 
 3d, All intransitive verbs which are followed ty an object 
 in the genitive or dative, or by a preposition ; as, er I) a t met* 
 iter gebacfyt, he has remembered me ; td) b ab e tfym gebtent, I 
 have served him ; er b a t itber Std) gefpottet, he has derided 
 you. 
 
 Except: kitten, to meet; fotgen, to follow, and roeid)en, to 
 yield to, which govern the dative, and take [ein. 
 
 4th, Verbs denoting a permanent state or such an activity, 
 by means of which an impression on the outward senses is 
 produced ; e. g. id) fyabe getegen, gefd)(afen, geftanben, ge* 
 mofynt, I have lain, slept, stood, lived; er bat gebraufet, ge* 
 brMt, gebuftet, gegtdngt, gerod)en, gefcbtenen, geroetrtt, he has 
 bellowed, roared, exhaled fragrance, glittered, smelled, ap- 
 peared, wept, &c. 
 
 § 132. intransitive verbs which assume the 
 auxiliary feitt* 
 
 1st, The verb fetn itself; as, id) bin gewefen, I have been, 
 td) war geroefen, I had been. 
 
 2d, Verbs which imply motion either in general, or to some 
 definite place or object ; moreover, such as denote a transition 
 from one state to another, especially verbs compounded with 
 the prefixes er, »er, ent, or with the particles art, auf, *u$, 
 em, &c. The following list exhibits most of them : — 
 
 aufroacfyen, to awake ; erftaurten, to be astonished, and 
 
 au^arten, to degenerate ; other compounds with e t: ; 
 
 bcgcgncn, to meet ; fafyren, to move ; 
 
 berften, to burst ; fautcn, to become putrefied ; 
 
 brccfyen, to break ; fltegen, to fly ; 
 
 trtngcn, to press ; fttejkn, to flow ; 
 
 etfen, to hasten ; frieren, to freeze ; 
 
 ergrimmcn, to grow angry ; gefjett, to go ; 
 
fjclangen, to get, to arrive ; 
 genefcn, to recover ; 
 getatfycn, to fall into ; 
 gcrtnrtcn, to coagulate ; 
 .qefcrjcfyen, to come to pass ; 
 (Jetfert, to heal ; 
 {eleven, to run in haste; 
 
 f emmen, to come ; 
 fried) en, to creep ; 
 {anben, to land ; 
 (cmfen, to run ; 
 quetlen, to well forth ; 
 retfen, to ripen; 
 retfen, to travel ; 
 tetten, to ride ; 
 rennen, to run ; 
 rtnrten, to flow; 
 tucfen, to move ; 
 fcfyetben, to part ; 
 fcfytefjen, to dart forth ; 
 fdnffen, to sail ; 
 fd)tetd)en / to sneak ; 
 fd^tiipfen, to slip ; 
 
 455 
 
 fd)me($en, to melt ; 
 
 jefymten, to stride ; 
 
 fcfyroetlen, to swell : 
 
 fcfyrotmnien, to swim 
 
 fcrjtmnben, to vanish : 
 
 fecjetn, to sail ; 
 
 finfen, to sink ; 
 
 fprtegen, to sprout ; 
 
 fpttngett, to leap ; 
 
 peigen, to rise ; 
 
 fterben, to die ; 
 
 ftojkrt, to push ; 
 
 fttanben, to strand ; 
 
 ftraucbelrt, to trip ; 
 
 fircid)en, to ramble ; 
 
 ftiiqen, to plunge ; 
 
 tteten, to step ; 
 
 trakn, to trot ; 
 
 tteratmen, to grow poor ; 
 
 ttetroefen, to decay, and many othoi 
 
 verbs compounded with t) e x ; 
 nxmberrt, to wander ; 
 roatcrt, to wade ; 
 roetcfyen, to yield ; 
 atefyen, to pass. 
 
 § 133. Some verbs employ fyaben in one signification, and 
 fetn in another. With fyaben they generally imply an activity, 
 and with fetn a state or condition: — 
 
 @r bat ba£ 5lamtn auSgebramtt, he has burnt out the chim- 
 ney ; ia$ §euer tfl: au3gebrarmt, the fire has done burning ; id) 
 fyabe fortgefafyrert 311 lefert, I have continued to read ; id) bin 
 fortcjefafytert, I drove off; fcte 9tbl)xe t)at gefloflfen, the pipe has 
 leaked ; fcctS 28af[er tjt cjeflopn, the water has flowed ; td) fyabe 
 gefrorert, I have been cold ; bte 9U?t(d) tjl gefrorert, the milk is 
 frozen ; id) fyabe mid) mttbe cjegangert, I have become fatigued with 
 walking ; id) bin nad) $aufe gegan^ert, I have gone home ; id) 
 babe geja^t, I have hunted ; td) btrt gejagt, I have run in haste ; 
 id) ^abe etn *Pferb gertttert, I have ridden a horse ; id) bin ciu& 
 genttert, I have taken a ride. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 
 
 § 134. It has already been observed (§ 119) that only 
 two tenses of the German verb are simple tenses, namely, the 
 present and imperfect of the active voice. Besides these the 
 present infinitive active (fyabert, werben), two participles (pres. 
 
456 
 
 fcabenb, perf. §et)aht), atnd the imperative mood, are also simple 
 forms of the verb. All other parts are periphrastic or com- 
 pound, and formed by means of the infinitive or perfect parti- 
 ciple, and one of the auxiliary verbs of tenses. 
 
 § 135. In the compound tenses the auxiliary alone is in- 
 flected. Hence it follows, that when the inflection of the aux- 
 iliaries is known, and the principal parts of any verb are given, 
 all the tenses of the same may be easily formed according to 
 the rules given above (§ 124). 
 
 § 136. The inflection of the compound tenses being uniform 
 in all German verbs (with this variation only, that some take 
 J) a ben and others fetn for their auxiliary), all the differences and 
 irregularities of conjugation must be sought for in the simple 
 forms. 
 
 § 137. With respect to their simple forms, verbs 
 follow two different modes of inflection : — 
 
 1st, Without changing the radical vowel, they form the im- 
 perfect simply by adding the termination e t e or e t to the root ; and 
 the perfect participle, by adding the termination e t or t ; e. g 
 pres. infin. lob e n, to praise, imperf. td) lob t e, perf. part, ge* 
 lobet (gelobt). Verbs thus conjugated are usually called 
 regular verbs. 
 
 2d, The vowel of the root is changed in the imperfect tense 
 and in the perfect participle, which latter then always ends in 
 en or n, and the first and third persons of the imperfect indica- 
 tive remain without any termination; e. g. pres. infin. be? 
 fet)Un, to command, imperf. tcf), et befctfyl, I, he com- 
 manded, perf. part, b e f o \) i e n ; pres. infin. I e f e n, to read, 
 imperf. id) I a 3, perf. part, g e I e f e n. 
 
 Verbs of this form of conjugation have heretofore passed under 
 the name of irregular verbs. As, however, they are very numer- 
 ous, comprehending nearly all the primitive verbs of the language, 
 this name is now generally discarded, and various attempts have 
 been made to reduce them to a number of regular conjugations. 
 
 Note. The classification of the irregular verbs (which name we 
 retain for the sake of convenience), and an alphabetical list of them 
 will be found below. 
 
 Sixteen verbs are partly regular and irregular, in the forma 
 ion of their simple forms. They will be found in the table 
 uf irregular verbs below. 
 
457 
 
 § 138. The personal terminations of the simple tenses 
 are essentially the same in both kinds of verbs, except in the 
 first and third persons singular of the imperfect indicative, in 
 which irregular verbs assume no termination. The first and 
 ihird persons plural end always in e n, and the second person 
 floral in e t throughout all the moods and tenses. 
 
 § 139. When the root of an irregular verb contains one of 
 ihe vowels a, D or it, it is generally modified into a, b, u in the 
 second and third persons of the present indicative, and also in 
 the imperfect subjunctive ; e. g. id) fyatte, fcu fyaltft, ex fydtt, I hold, 
 thou holdest, he holds ; id) fanfc, subj. id) fdnbe, I found, I might 
 find. In like manner the radical e is changed into t or t e in 
 the second and third persons of the present indicative, and in 
 the singular of the imperative ; e. g. id) gebe, bit gtbft, er gtbt, 
 gtb bit, I give, thou givest, he gives, give thou ; id) fefye, &il 
 ftefyft, er fiefyt, ftefy bit, I see, thou seest, he sees, see thou. 
 
 § 140. The following table presents a comparative view 
 of the terminations of the simple forms of verbs, both regular 
 and irregular. 
 
 Present of all Verbs. 
 
 Indicat. Subjunct. 
 
 I 1 . 
 
 S3 , 
 
 S3 
 
 1st Pers. e, 
 2d Pers. eft, ft, 
 3d Pers. et, t 
 
 Indicat. 
 
 1st Pers. en,n, 
 2d Pers. et, t, 
 3d Pers. en,n. 
 
 Subjunct 
 
 en, 
 et, 
 en. 
 
 Imperffct of Regular Verbs. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 te, ete, 
 teft, eteft, 
 te, ete, 
 
 1st Pers 
 2d Pers, 
 3d Pers, 
 
 Imperat. of Reg. Verbs, 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 ete, te, 
 etejl, tejf, 
 ete, te, 
 
 eten, ten, 
 etet, tet, 
 eten, ten. 
 
 Pres. ettb, rtt). 
 p«£ 9 — et,t 
 
 Imperfect of Irregular Verbs. Imperat. of Ir. Verbs 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 1st Pers. 
 2d Pers. 
 3d Pers. 
 
 ten, eten, 
 tet, etet, 
 ten, eten. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 2d Pers. sing, e, 
 1st Pers. pi. en, 
 2d Pers. pi. et,t 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 en, n. 
 
 i 
 
 1st Pers. 
 
 2d Pers. 
 
 3d Pers. 
 
 20 
 
 ft, eft. 
 
 e, 
 
 eft, ft, 
 e. 
 
 2d Pers. sing. — , t, 
 1st Pers. pL en, 
 2d Pers. pL et, t 
 
453 
 Imperfect of Irregular Verbs 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 
 ^ 1st Pers. en, 
 
 en, 
 
 Infiiitivf 
 
 I- 
 
 2 2d Pers. et, t, 
 
 zt,t, 
 
 
 £< 
 
 f 3d Pers. en* 
 
 en. 
 
 en. 
 
 Participles. J ^ enb ' 
 
 £ Per/, ge — en. 
 
 § 141. REMARKS ON TLX TABLE. 
 
 Remark 1. In the present tense, all German verbs ar* regu 
 iarly formed by adding the above terminations to the root of tht 
 present infinitive. 
 
 Remark 2. In the imperfect of regular verbs, the t and the c t in 
 dicate the tense, and the remaining part of the termination the 
 different persons. The imperfect of irregular verbs, on the othe» 
 hand, has terminations for the person only, the tense being stiffi 
 ciently distinguished by the change of the radical vowel. 
 
 Remark 3. With respect to the c preceding the terminations % 
 t e, &c, it is to be observed, that it is always retained in the sub 
 junctive mood, but in the indicative it may either be retained oi 
 omitted, as euphony may require ; e. g. subjunctive, id) lobe, I may 
 praise, t>u lob e ft, thou mayst praise, id) (ob etc, I might praise ; 
 indicative, bu (oOeft or (oftjr, thou praisest; tcfylo&ete ortobte, J 
 was praising. 
 
 Remark 4. Verbs ending d n or e r tt, reject the c of the termi- 
 nation of inflection throughout, before ft, t or n. But in the first 
 person of the present indicative, and in the imperative singular, the 
 c of the original termination is rejected in its stead ; e. g. fammctn, 
 to collect; pres. indie, id) fammle (instead of fommetc), I collect, 
 bit fammctft, cr femmtett, thou collectest, he collects, fammlc 2)u, 
 do thou collect ; es bauet t, it lasts, from baue x n, &c. The sub- 
 junctive, however, either retains the c in both cases, or rejects the 
 first only ; e. g. tcb tab e I c or tab ( e, I may blame, fie tab e I e n or 
 obi en, they may blame, &c. 
 
 § 142. The tenses of the passive voice are all periphrastic, 
 and are formed by combining the perfect participle of the verb 
 with the different moods and tenses of the auxiliary ro e r b e n ; 
 as, pre 3. indie, id) tt>erbe Q e ( t e b X, I am loved ; imperf. indie. 
 id) ttutrfce a, e 1 1 e b X, I was loved ; perf. indie, id) bin $ e I i e b X 
 ttwben, I have been loved, &c. In this connection the perfect 
 participle of t&erben always loses its prefix g e. (§ 122. 1st.) 
 
459 
 
 PARADIGMS 
 
 TO THE CONJUGATION OF GERMAN VERBS* 
 
 § 143. I. TRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 So b en, to praise, regular. 
 
 Principal parts 
 
 3t u f e n , to call, irregular. 
 
 Pres. Infin. loben, rufen, 
 Imperf. Indic. id) lobte, rtef. 
 Perf. Part, getobt, gerufen. 
 ^Perf. Infin. gelobt, gerufen ^abem 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
 
 Present. 
 
 I 
 
 Singular. 
 I praise, call, am praising. 
 
 calling, do praise, call. 
 id) lobe, rufe, 
 
 fcu tobcfl (lobjr), rufefl (ruf(t), 
 er lobet (lobt), rufet (ruft) ; 
 
 PZwraZ. 
 wtr loben, rufen, 
 tfer lobet (lobt), rufet (ruft), 
 fte loben, rufen. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Singular. 
 1 praised, called, was prais- 
 ing, calling, did praise, call 
 id) lobte, rtef, 
 kit lobteft, rtefeft (rtefft), 
 er lobte, rtef ; 
 
 Plural. 
 anr tobten, rtefen, 
 0)v lobtet, rtefet (rteft), 
 fie lobten, rtefen. 
 
 Singular. 
 may praise, call, be prais 
 ing, calling. 
 
 id) lobe, rufe, 
 bu lobeft, rufefl, 
 er lobe, rufe ; 
 
 Plural. 
 wtr loben, rufen, 
 tfyr lobet, rufet, 
 fie loben, rufen. 
 
 Singular. 
 I might praise, call, be praia» 
 ing, calling. 
 
 td) lobete, rtefe, 
 bu lobetefr, rtefejt, 
 er lobete, rtefe ; 
 
 Plural. 
 wtr lobeten, rtefen, 
 ii)x lobetet, rtefet, 
 
 fie lobeten, rtefen. 
 Perfect. 
 
 I have praised, called, been I may have praised, cnlkti, 
 
 praising, calling, &c. been praising, calling, &c. 
 
 Sing, id) fyabe, bu Ijafr, er bat Sing, id) Ijabe, bu tjabeft, er 
 
 gelobt, getufen; fyabe gelobt, gerufen; 
 
46C 
 
 Plur. nnr Ijaben, fbr babt, fie 
 baben gelobt, gerufen. 
 
 Plur. tmv ^aben, tbr babet, fie 
 baben gelobt, gerufen. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 1 had praised, called, been 
 praising, calling, dec. 
 
 Sing, id) fjatte, bit batteft, er 
 fyatte gelobt, gerufen ; 
 
 PZwr. mtr batten, ttyr battet, fie 
 batten gelobt, gerufen. 
 
 I might have praised, called, 
 been praising, calling, dec. 
 
 Sing, id) batte, bit batteft, er 
 batte gelobt, gerufen ; 
 
 Plur. wtr batten, tbr i)attct f fie 
 batten gelobt, gerufen. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 I shall praise, call, be prais- 
 ing, calling, dec. 
 
 Sing, id) werbe, bit nnrft, er 
 rotrb loben, rufen; 
 
 Plur. rotr roerben, tbr werbet, 
 fte roerben loben, rufen. 
 
 I shall praise, call, be prais- 
 ing, calling, dec. 
 
 Sing, id) werbe, bu werbejt, 
 er werbe, loben, rufen ; 
 
 Plur. wit roerben, x'br roerbet, 
 fte werben loben, rufen. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 1 shall have praised, called, I shall have praised, called 
 been praising, calling, dec. been praising, calling, dec 
 
 Sing, id) raerbe, bu rotrft, er Sing, id) werbe, bu merbeft, et 
 anrb gelobt, gerufen baben ; werbe gelobt, gerufen baben ; 
 
 Plur. mtr roerben, tbr roerbet, Plur. rotr merben, tbr roerbet 
 fie werben gelobt, gerufen ba* fte roerben gelobt, gerufer 
 ben. baben. 
 
 Conditionals. 
 First Conditional. Second Conditional. 
 
 I should praise, call, be prais- 
 ing, calling. 
 
 Sing, id) roiirbe, bu wiirbeji, 
 er nntrbe loben, rufen ; 
 
 Plur. nnr ttnirben, tbr wiirbet, 
 fte roitrben loben, rufen. 
 
 I should have praised, called, 
 been praising calling. 
 
 Sing, id) roiirbe, bu ttmrbeff, 
 er rourbe gelobt, gerufen ba* 
 ben; 
 
 Plur. rotr roiirben, tbr nmrber, 
 fie ttnirben gelobt, gerufen 
 baben. 
 
461 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 let en rotr, let us praise, be 
 praising, 
 lolbe (fcu), praise thou, do lobet, lobt (tfyr), ) praise ye, 
 
 praise, leben Ste, $ do ye praise, 
 
 lobe er (fte, e§), let him (her, loben fte r let them praise. 
 it) praise, be praising ; 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 rufen rmr, let us call, be call- 
 ing, 
 wfe (bit)/ call thou, do call, rufet, ntft (tfyr), ) call ye, do 
 
 rufen (£ie, / ye call, 
 
 cufe er (fte, es), let him (her, rufen fte, let them call, be 
 it) call, be calling ; calling. 
 
 Infinitives. Participles. 
 
 Pres. loben, rufen, to praise, Pres. lobenb, rufenb, praising 
 to call. calling. 
 
 Perf. gelobt, gerufen tyaken, to Perf. gelobt, gerufen, praised, 
 have praised, called. called. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I am praised, called, &c. I may be praised, called, &c. 
 
 Sing, id) roerbe, bit wtrft, er Sing, id) roerbe,- bu roerbeft, er 
 unrb gelobt, gerufen ; raerbe gelobt, geutfen j 
 
 Plur. rntr roevben, tt)r merbet, Plur. wtr werben, tt>r werbet, 
 fte merben gelobt, gerufen. fte roerben gelobt, gerufen. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 I was praised, called, &c. I might be praised, called, &c. 
 
 Sing, id) nmrbe, bit ttutrbeft, Sing, id) rsiirbe, bit roiirbeft, er 
 er rourbe gelobt, gerufen; roiirbe gelobt, gerufen; 
 
 Plur. rrur rourben, tyr nntrbet, Plur. nnr roiirben, tfyr ttmrbet, 
 fte nntrben gelobt, gerufen. fte mitrben gelobt, gerufen. 
 
462 
 
 Perfect. 
 I have been praised, called, I may have been prai&cd, 
 
 &c. 
 Sing, id) bin, bu btft, er tft ge* 
 
 lobt, gerufen WDrben; 
 Plur. voix ftnb, tfyr fetb, fte 
 
 ftnb getobt, gerufen worben. 
 
 called, &c. 
 Sing, id) fet, bu feteft, er fet 
 
 getobt, gerufen roorben ; 
 Plur. xvix feien, il>r fetet, fte 
 
 feten gelobt, gerufen roorben. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 I might have been praised, 
 called, &c. 
 ♦Swig", id) ware, bit roareft, er 
 
 ware gelobt, gerufen roorben ; 
 Plur. tmr roaren, tt)r roarer, 
 
 fte roaren gelobt, gerufen 
 
 roorben. 
 
 I had been praised, called, 
 
 &c. 
 Sing, id) war, bu warft, er wai 
 
 gelobt, gerufen roorben ; 
 Plur. mtr rcaren, tfyr waret, fte 
 
 roaren gelobt, gerufen njor* 
 
 ben. 
 
 First Future. 
 1 shall be praised, called, &c. I shall be praised, called, &c. 
 
 Sing, id) roerbe, bu tmrft, er 
 tmrb gelobt, gerufen roerb<- n ; 
 
 Plur. roiv roerben, ii)v roerbet, 
 fte roerben getobt, gerufen 
 werben. 
 
 Sing, id) rcerbe, bu werbeft, er 
 
 roerbe gelobt, gerufen roer* 
 
 ben; 
 Plur. tmr werben, ii)x werbet, 
 
 fte roerben gelobt, gerufen 
 
 werben. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 I shall have been praised, 
 
 called, &c. . 
 Sing, id) roerbe, bu nnrfr, er 
 
 rotrb getobt, gerufen roorben 
 
 fetn; 
 Plur. rotr roerben, tfyr roerbet, 
 
 fte roerben gelobt, gerufen 
 
 roorben fetn* 
 
 I shall have been praised 
 
 called, &c. 
 Sing, id) roerbe, bu roeibeft, e? 
 
 roerbe getobt, gerufen roorben 
 
 fetn; 
 Plur 4 rotr roerben, tbr roerbet, 
 
 fte roerben gelobt, gerufen 
 
 roorben fetn. 
 
 Conditionals. 
 
 First Conditional. 
 
 I should be praised, called, 
 
 &c. 
 P *g. id) roftrbe, bit roiirbeft, 
 
 er rourbe gelobt, gerufen 
 
 roerben ; 
 
 Second Conditional. 
 
 I should have been praised, 
 
 called, &c. 
 Sing, id) roiirbe, bu rourbeft, er 
 
 roiirbe getobt, gerufen root* 
 
 ben fetn ; 
 
468 
 
 **-ur. »{r umrben, tfyr rciirbet, Plur. tmr rourben, \%x wmrbet, 
 fte roiirben gelobt, gerufen fie roitrben gelobt, gerufen 
 toerben. rcorben fein* 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 merben trnr gelobt, gerufen, let 
 us be praised, called, 
 merbe (bu) gefobt, gerufen, be werbet (tfyr) gelobt, gerufen, £ 
 (thou) praised, called, roerben @te gelobt, gerufen, J 
 
 be ye (you) praised, called, 
 aaerbe er (fte, e6) getobt, genu roerben fte gelobt, gerufen, let 
 fen, let him (her, it) be them be praised, called, 
 praised, called ; 
 
 Infinitives. Participles. 
 
 Pres. gelobt, gerufen merben, to Perf. gelobt, gerufen, praised, 
 be praised, called called. 
 
 Perf. gelobt, gerufen tsorben Fut. $u lobenb, §u rufenb, to be 
 fetn, to have been praised, praised, called, 
 called. 
 
 § 144. II. REFLEXIVE VERBS, 
 
 © x d) f v e « e n, to rejoice, 
 f Pres. Infin. fief) freuen. 
 
 fVfaivd parte. I / PEEF p lNDIC :|* £«**»»«*• 
 
 J / ] Ferf. Part. ftd> gefreuet or gefreut 
 
 I Perf. Infin. fid) gefreut fjaben. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 [ rejoice, am rejoicing, do re- I may rejoice, be rejoicing, 
 
 joice, &c. &c. 
 
 Sing, id) freue mxd), bu freueft Sm#. id) freue mxd), bu freueft 
 (freuft) btd), er freuet (freut) bid), er freue fid) ; 
 
 Wi 
 
 Plur. rcxr freuen un£, tfyr freu* Plur. mxr freuen un$, t^r freu* 
 d (freut) end), fte freuen fid). et eud), fte freuen fid). 
 
 Imperfect. 
 [ rejoiced, &c I might rejoice, &c„ 
 
 Sing, id) freute mxd),, bu freu* Seng, xd) freuete mtd), bu freu* 
 iejt bid), &c. etejl bt^ &c. 
 
464 
 
 Plur. toix freuten un3, ifyr Plw. xoxx freueten un$, &c, 
 freutet eitd), &e. 
 
 Perfect. 
 I have rejoiced, &c. I may have rejoiced, &c. 
 
 Sing, id) fyabe mid) gefreut, bu Sing, id) tjabe mid) gefreut, bu 
 
 fyaft btc^ gefreut, &c babeft bfc^ gefreut, &c. 
 
 F?wr. ttur baben un$ gefreut, PZwr. \v>ix fyabeu un$ gefreut, 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 I had rejoiced, &c. I might have rejoiced, &c. 
 
 $mg-. t(^ fycttte mid) gefreut, Sing, id) l)dtte mtd) gefreut 
 dec. &c. 
 
 First Futurb; 
 I shall rejoice, &c. I shall rejoice, &c. 
 
 $mg. id) roerbe mid) freuen, Sing, id) roerbe mid) freuen, 
 tm x&ixfi bid) &c. bu roerbefr t)tc^ &c. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 i shall have rejoiced, &c. I shall have rejoiced, &c. 
 
 Sing, id) werbe mid) gefreut Sm^-. tc^ roerbe mid) gefreut 
 fab % bu xx>ixft bic^ &c baben, tm werbeft &c. 
 
 Conditionals. 
 First Conditional. Second Conditional. 
 
 1 should rejoice, &c. 1 should have rejoiced, &c. 
 
 Sing, id) rciirbe mid) freuen, bu Sing, id) miirbe mid) gefrenl 
 rourbefl: &c. fyoben, bu miirbeft &c. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 rejoice thou, &c. 
 
 PZwr. freuen mix un$, 
 Sing, freue btd), freuet (tbr) eud), 
 
 freue er (fie eS) fid) ; freuen fie fid}. 
 
 Infinitives. Participles. 
 
 Pres. fid) freuen, to rejoice. fid) freuenb, rejoicing. 
 
 Perf. fid) gefreut baben, to fid) gefreut, rejoiced* 
 have rejoiced. 
 
 § 145. III. INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 & e t) en, to go, takes f e i n for its auxiliary. 
 
 {Pres. Infin. get) en, to go. 
 Imperf. Indic id) qinq, I went. 
 Perf. Part. ge 9 an 3 e«, gone- 
 Perf. Infin. gegangen fein, to have gone 
 
 
465 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 I £o, am going, do go, &c. I may go, be going, &c. 
 
 Sing, td) ge^e, bu ge^eft (ge^jl), Sing, id) gefye, bit gefyeft, el 
 
 ergej>t; getye; 
 
 Plur. wtr gefyen, tfyr gefyet PZwr. wtr gefyen, ifyr ge^et, fie 
 
 (geW, fie getyen (getjn). gefyen. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 I went, was going, did go, &c. I might go, be gcAng, &c. 
 Sing, id) gtng, bit gtngft, er £mg. id) gtnge, bu gtngejT, er 
 
 9^3; , fltngc; 
 
 PZwr. wtr gtngen, t^r gtnget, PZwr. wtr gtngen, tfyr gtnget, 
 
 fte gtngen. fie gtngen. 
 
 Perfect. 
 I have gone, been going, &c. I may have gone, been going, 
 
 &c. 
 
 Sing, id) bin, bu btft, er tft ge* £mg. id) fet, bu feteft, er fet 
 
 gangen ; gegangen ; 
 
 Plur. wtr ftnb, t&r fetb, fie finb Plur. wir feten, it)x fetet, fte 
 
 gegangen, feten gegangen. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 I had gone, been going, &c. I might have gone, been going, 
 
 &c. 
 Sing, id) war, bu war|T, er war Sing, id) ware, bu wdreft, er 
 
 gegangen ; ware gegangen ; 
 
 Plur. wtr waren, tfyr waret, fte Plur. wtr waren, tfyr waret, fie 
 waren gegangen. waren gegangen. 
 
 First Future. 
 I shall g-a, be going, &c. I shall go, be going, &c. 
 
 Sing, id} werbe, bit wtrft er Sing, id) werbe, bu werbeft, er 
 
 wirb gefyen ; werbe gefyen ; 
 
 PZwr. wtr werben, tfyr werbet, Plur. wtr werben, tfyr werbet, 
 
 fte werben gefyen. fte werben gefyen. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 I shall have gone, been going, I shall have gone, been going, 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Sing, id) werbe, bu wtrft, er Sing, id) werbe, bit werbeft, er 
 
 wtrb gegangen fern; werbe gegangen fetn; 
 
 Plur. wtr werben, tfyr werbet, Plur. wtr werben, tfyr werbet, 
 
 fie werben gegangen fetn. fte werben gegangen fetn. 
 20* 
 
466 
 
 Conditionals. 
 First Conditional. Second Conditional. x 
 
 I should go, be going, &c. I should have gone, been go. 
 
 ing, &c. 
 Sing, id) ttnirbe, fcu ttmrbejt, Sing, id) rciitbe, bit ttwrcejt, 
 
 er roiirfce gefyen 5 er nmrbe gegangen fetn 5 
 
 Plur. mx roiirben, tfyr nwrbet, Plur. rotr nnirben, tfyr nntrbefc 
 
 fie ttwtben gefyen. fie nntvben gegangen fetn. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 PZwr. gefyen voir, let us go, be 
 going, 
 8m#. gefye (6u), go thou, do ^e^et or gefyt (tfyr)/ geben @te, 
 
 go, " 5 go ye (you), do go, 
 
 gefye er (fie, es), let him (her, gefyen or gefyn fie, let them go, 
 it) go ; 
 
 Infinitive Mood. Participles, 
 
 Pres. gefyen, to go. Pres. gefyenb, going. 
 
 Perf. gegangen few, to have Perf. gegangen, gone, 
 gone. 
 
 IV. IMPERSONAL VERBS.* 
 
 § 146. Impersonal verbs are conjugated like other verbs in 
 all the moods and tenses, but only in the third person singular 
 (§114). 
 
 They want the passive voice, and generally employ the auxi- 
 liary Men (§ 131). 
 
 $ e g n c n, to rain. 
 Pres. Ind. c£ rcgnct, it rains. Subj. eS rcgnc, it may rain. 
 
 Imperf. Ind. c$ rcgnctc, it rained. Subj. cS rcgnctc, it might rain. 
 Perf. Ind. cS fyat gcrcgnct, it has Subj. c<? f>abe gercgnct/ itmayhavf 
 
 rained. rained. 
 
 Pluperf. Ind. i$> fjatte gcrcgnct, it' Subj. e$ batte gcrcgnct, it mighi 
 
 had rained. have rained. 
 
 First Fut. c- trnrb rcgncn, it will Subj. c$ rocrfce rcgncn, it will rain 
 
 rain. 
 Future Per/* c$ rotrb gcrcgnct fya? Subj. c$ rocrbc gcrcgnct Ijatcn, it 
 
 t>cn, it will have rained. will have rained 
 
 Conditionals. 
 
 First Cond. cS rciitbe rcgncn, it Second Cond. c$ rofitfce gmgnd 
 
 would rain. fyabcn, it would have rained. 
 
 Tmperat. c$ rcgnc ! let it rain ! 
 
 Pres. Infin. rcgncn, to rain. p .. - , ( rcgncnb, raining, 
 
 Perf. Infin. gcrcgnct fyabcn, to hav 3 ar lcl V es - ) gcrcgnct, rained, 
 rained. 
 
 * For exercises on the unperson il verbs see Lesson L VI. 
 
467 
 
 y jl^'i . 3oine impersonal verbs have a reflexive form ; a% 
 e* fvaqt jlu), il is a question ; e3 aiemt fid), it is becoming, &c. 
 Others again are active, and are followed by an object in the 
 accusative or dative, which may be either a substantive cr a 
 personal pronoun ; e. g. e$ bunged: m i d), b t d), 1 6 n, I am, 
 thou art, he is hungry ; e$ biirftet, friert, fdjaubert m t d), I am 
 thirsty, cold, shuddering ; e3 geitngt m i r, I succeed ; e$ grauet 
 1 t) m, he dreads. The accusative or dative is sometimes placed 
 first, and then the e § is omitted ; as, m t d) fyungert, m i d) bur* 
 (let, m t r grauet/ &c, 
 
 V. COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 § 148. 1st, Compound veibs are either separable or inse- 
 parable* 
 
 2d, In compounds of the first class, the constituent parts are 
 separated, and the first component is placed after the verb, in 
 all the simple forms of the verb which are susceptible of in- 
 flection, viz :— in the imperative active, and in the present and 
 imperfect, both indicative and subjunctive ; e. g. anfangen, to 
 begin, pres. indie, id) fartge an, I begin, imperf. id) fmcj a n, I 
 begun, imperat. fange 2)u a n, begin thou. Moreover, in the per- 
 fect participle, the augment g e is inserted between the separable 
 particle and the verb ; e. g. an?ge=f angen, au3*ge*gangen, ab-ge* 
 retf t, from anfangen, to commence ; auSgefyen, to go out ; ah 
 ret fen, to set out on a journey. 
 
 Remark, In subordinate propositions, however, which are in- 
 troduced by a conjunction or conjunctive word, such as — a I 6, b a, in? 
 b e in, n> e n n, \v c t (, b a % &c., or by a relative pronoun, this separa- 
 tion of the component parts does not take place; e. g. a(£ cben 
 bie (Sonne aufgtng (from aufgefyen), just as the sun was rising; 
 roe n n cr nur a n I & m e (from anfbmmen) ! would that he might ar- 
 rive ! 3 n b c m id) am £aufe sotbetging, asl was passing by the 
 house. £)te Sbitte, tt) c ( d) c fid) a u f 1 I) a t, the door which opened. 
 
 § 149. In compounds of the second class, the constituen 
 parts remain inseparaily connected throughout the entire con 
 jugation of the verb, and the perfect participle does not assume 
 the augment g e, if the first component is one of those insepa 
 rable particles mentioned above (§ 122) ; but if it is a noun oi 
 an adjective, the augment is prefixed to the entire compound ; 
 e. g id) oerttere, I lose, id) »er(or, I lost, part, uerforen, lost. 
 But, friifyjKtcfert, to breakfast (compounded with the adjective 
 frill), early), perf. part, g e friifyftiicft ; red)tfertigen, to justify (from 
 red)t,just), perf. part, g e redjtferttgt, &c. 
 
468 
 
 § 150. Yerbs compounded with substantives or adjectives 
 are generally inseparable, when they so coalesce in sense as 
 to form one complex conception ; but when their union is so 
 slight, that they may be regarded as distinct words, they are se- 
 parable ; e. g. <&tatt ftriben, to take place ; t)od) acfyten, to 
 esteem highly ; (o3 fprecfyen, to acquit ; perf. parts, ©tatt ge* 
 funfeen, fyod) geacfytet, lo£ gefprocfyen. 
 
 § 151. When the verb is compounded with a particle (i. 
 e. with an adverb, a preposition, or a simple prefix), the accent 
 determines to which of the two classes the compound belongs. 
 If the particle is accented, the compound is separable ; but if 
 the principal accent falls on the verb itself, the compound is in- 
 separable. 
 
 A list of inseparable prefixes has already been sjiven above 
 (§ 122. 2d). 
 
 § 152. Verbs compounded with the following adverbs and 
 prepositions are separable : — a b, an, a it f, a u 3, b e t, tit a r, 
 e t n, fort, t> er, t) i n, and the compounds of ber and fytn : — 
 fyerab, fytnetn, &c. ; nad), ntefcer, ob, oor, we&ju, 
 I u x h cf .* 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 cmfemmen, to arrive, part. cm^eFommen ; 
 
 aufftef)cn, to rise, " aufgeftanben ; 
 
 barfcringcn, to offer, " t>arcjef>racl)t ; 
 
 fottfafjten, to continue, " forrcjefafyten ; 
 roegnxtfcn, to throw away, " rccc$croorfen ; 
 gubringcn, to spend, " $ugebtad)t. 
 
 § 153. Compounds with Id ti r d), M n t e r, ii b e r, u m, it it* 
 t e r, tt o ft and rot e b e r are separable, when the accent rests 
 on the particle ; they are inseparable, whe*i it rests on the verb 
 itself (§ 122. 5th). 
 
 It is frequently the ease, that in one apd th« s^m*> compound this 
 difference of accentuation has given rise to different significations. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 butcf) t) r i n g c n (inseparable), to penetrate, part. buret) brurtatis 
 b u r d) brtngcn (separable), to press through a crowd, part 
 
 b u t cr> gcfcrimgcn ; 
 buttf) x e t f e n (insep.), to travel over, part. burd) x c i f r t ; 
 b u r d) reifcn (sep.)/ tc travel through, joar£. t) u r cf) gereif't ; 
 fiber f (if) ten (insep.;, to convince, part. tiberfuf)tt; 
 ft b cr fftfyten (sep.), to convey over, part, iibcx <jcfiif)rt ; 
 
 * Compare also the table of separable and inseparable verbs on pagss 59 
 and 53. 
 
469 
 
 Untcr fatten (insep.)/ to entertain, part, untct gotten; 
 u n t c r fatten (sep.), to hold under, part, it n t c r gcfjaftcn ; 
 Mil c n t> c n (insep.), to finish, part. t>oll c n fc> c t ; 
 » C Ugiepen (sep.), to fill by pouring into, part. DeU gegeffen. 
 
 'Remark. Compounds with the preposition nnber (which 
 should be carefully distinguished from the adverb w t e b c r) are 
 always inseparable, the accent being invariably assumed by the verb 
 itself; as, rotter I e cj e n, to confute, part, rmbet t c cj 1 ; rmbcrftcfyen, to 
 withstand, part, nnberftanben. The adverbial prefix mi 6 cannot be 
 reduced to any definite rule, as the accent does not in all instances 
 decide whether it is separable or inseparable. 
 
 § 154. With respect to the infinitive of compound verbs, 
 it is to be remarked, that the particle in (§ 120) is placed be- 
 fore it, if the verb is inseparable ; if separable, it is inserted be- 
 tween the two components, and constitutes one word with 
 them ; e. g. 3 u entroet&ert, to desecrate ; 5 u jerfatten, to fall 
 into pieces ; but, an^farrcjen, to begin ; rcecpsu^roerfert, to 
 throw away ; $tmtcf*$it4ret ben, to drive back, &c. 
 
 § 155. Compounds generally follow the conjugation of 
 their simple verbs. The following is a specimen of the simple 
 forms of a separable compound : — - 
 
 9( b v e t f e rt , to set out on a journey. 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 Id) reife ab, bit retfeft ab, cc rcifct id) retfe ab, bu retfeft ab, er rctfet 
 (retf t) ab ; ab ; 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 «nr retfen ab t*)r rcifct (rctft) ab, roit retfen a&, tr)r retfet ab, fte retfett 
 fte retfen ab ab. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Singular. Singula?'. 
 
 id; retf'te ab, bu retf'tcjt ab, er reipte tel) rcifetc ab, tit reifetcft ab, cr ret 
 ob ; fete ab ; 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 wtr rciptcn ab> tfjr rctftct ab, ftc ttrir rcifctcn ab, tf)t rctfetet ab, fti 
 retftcn ab. rcifctcn ab. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 retfe (hi) ab, retfe cr ab ; retfen renr ab, rcifct (rcift) tljr afj 
 
 retfen fte ab. 
 
470 
 
 Infinitives. Participles. 
 
 Pres. abtetfen or ab$utetfen. Pres. Part, abtetfenb. 
 
 Perf. afcgerctf t fetru Perf. Part, at^etetft. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. . 
 
 I. AGREEMENT. 
 
 § 156. The verb agrees with its subject nominative in 
 number and person. In German the subject cannot bo 
 omitted as in the Classical languages, in which the termina- 
 tion of the verb is sufficient to indicate the difference of per- 
 son and number ; except in the second person of the impera- 
 tive singular, when bu, like the English thou, is expressed only 
 for the sake of emphasis ; e. g. t d) (efe, I read ; b it rebejl, 
 thou speakest ; ber ©turm §at cmSgetobt, the storm has ceased 
 to rage ; bte ^rtabert fptelen, the boys are playing. But, im- 
 perat. re be! lefe! read, speak (thou) ! ©ptele, 5?tnb, cmf 
 ber Sautter ©cfyooS ! Play, my child, on thy mother's lap ! 
 (Schiller.) 
 
 Exception 1. When several verbs constitute a compound predi- 
 cate to one subject, it is only expressed with the first. £)u arOetteft 
 met, r t d) t c ft abet roenta, au$, thou labourest much, but accomplish- 
 est little; unb et fojjtt'g mtt fiiunmem Sfrcxm, retpt fid) blutent) (c$, 
 p r e p t fie fjcfttg in tie 2Crme, fd) m t n g t fid) fliif fetn $op (<Sd)Utet), 
 and with mute grief he hears it, tears himself bleeding away, ea- 
 gerly folds her to his breast, springs upon his steed. 
 
 Excep. 2. The neuter personal pronoun e 6 and the demonstra- 
 tives ties and ba$ are followed by a verb in the plural, when 
 the substantive after the verb which they represent is plural ; bte£ 
 ft n b metne 23riiber, these are my brothers ; eg ft n b efyrUcfye banner, 
 they are honest men. 
 
 Excep. 3. In reciting the multiplication table, the Germans use 
 the singular where the plural would seem proper ; trier mat furtf t fl 
 $rc>an$tg, four times five are twenty, &c. 
 
 Excep, 4. When the subject of a verb is a pronoun of the first 
 or second person, it is sometimes omitted by poetical license ; as, 
 jtafrc nun, a§\ ^Uefeptric Suttjteret unb 93?ebum butdjauS ftubtrt, 
 I have now, alas ! completely mastered philosophy, the jurist's craft, 
 ani medicine (Goethe's Faust). 
 
 § 157. When the verb refers to several subjects equally 
 related to it, it must be put in the plural ; as, Wlatfyt ntxi 'lag 
 ft x x it tn mtt etrtcmber urn t>en 93orsug, night and day were 
 contending with each other for the preference. When, how- 
 ever, the subjects are connected by disjunctive conjunctions, 
 or when they are regarded as one complex notion, the verb is 
 
471 
 
 in the singular; e. g. roeber ber SSater nod) fetn ©ofyn tjt ba 
 geroefen, neither the father nor his son has been here ; 93er* 
 ratty nnb Slrgroof/tt I a u f cf) t ttt alien (£cfen, treason and suspi- 
 cion (combined) lurch at every corner ; t)ter t ft ^Pfeffer unb 
 ©a($, here is pepper and salt. 
 
 § 158. After several subjects of different persons, the verb 
 in the plural agrees with the first person in preference to the 
 second^ and with the second in preference to the third ; e. g. id) 
 itnb Du iroix) ft n b SSriiber, I and thou are brothers ; J)u itnb 
 ber 2)ater (Sfyt) fetb etnanber dfynltcf;, you and your father 
 resemble each other. Sometimes, however, the verb agrees 
 with the nearest nominative ; id) bcuf reben, ntcfyt £)u, / am per- 
 mitted to speak, not thou. 
 
 II, TENSES. 
 
 § 159. It will be perceived from the paradigms, that the 
 German verb has no separate forms to express the distinctions 
 observed in English between I praise, and I am praising, do 
 praise, I praised, and I was praising, did praise, &c., all of 
 which are implied in the one form id) lobe, id) lobte (see page 
 279). 
 
 § 160. In German, as in English, the present is often em- 
 ployed instead of the imperfect, to give greater animation to 
 historical narration (see page 342). 
 
 § 161. The present is used in place of the future, espo 
 dally if the event is regarded as certain ; as, moreen f D m m t 
 er roteber, to-morrow he will come again ; tunftt^e SBocfye ret' 
 fe id) nad) gonbort, next week I am going to London ; sertag 
 T)id) btauf, id) laffe fecfytenb f)ter baS geben, ober fiifyr e fte 
 au£ ^tlfen, depend upon it, I shall either fighting lose my life 
 here, or lead them out of Pilsen (Schiller). (See page 342). 
 
 § 162. So also, on the other hand, the first future is used 
 instead of trie present, and the future perfect instead of the 
 perfect, to give an air of probability to the expression ; e. g. 
 er vo tr b root; I mcfyt git £)aufe fetn, he is not likely to be at 
 home, er tturb au^egangen fetn, he has in all probability 
 gone out (literally, he will have gone out) ; £)u tmrft T)id) ge* 
 trrt r/aben, you must have made (have probably made) a mis- 
 take. 
 
 § 163. The imperfect, the perfect, and the pluperfect cor 
 respond on the whole to the tenses of the same name in Eng 
 
472 
 
 lish, with this exception, that when simply a division of time*, 
 and not another event is referred to, the Germans sometimes 
 employ the perfect, when the English idiom requires the im 
 perfect ; e. g. geftern ft n b Sfyre 93ud)er angefommen, yes 
 terday your books arrived ; er t ft legte 2Sod)e gefrorben, he 
 died last week. On the meaning and use of these tenses, and 
 on the omission of the auxiliary, see pages 343, 344, and Les 
 son LVII. 
 
 § 164. As to the moods of the German verb, the Indica 
 live, the Subjunctive, as well as the Conditionals and the Im- 
 operative, have been treated at large and illustrated with numer- 
 ous examples in the former part of the book, so that a further 
 analysis of them in this place would be superfluous. On the 
 Subjunctive and Conditionals see Lessons XC. and XCL, anJ 
 on the Imperative, page 305. 
 
 III. THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 § 165. Besides serving to form the compound tenses of 
 the verb (§ 134), the infinitive mood is used in various other 
 relations, either with or without the preposition giu 
 
 § 166. All infinitives may be regarded as abstract verbal 
 substantives of the neuter gender, and are frequently employed 
 as such in every case, generally in connection with the arti- 
 cle ; e. g. $>a$> ©tt$en tft tt)m fcfyabftrf), sitting is injurious to 
 him ; id) bin b e£ @ d) r e t b e n 3 miibe, I am tired of writing ; 
 Sum 3? e t f e n btjr Du mcfyt gefcfytcft, you are not fit for travel- 
 ling. 
 
 § 167. The infinitive is employed without $u in the follow- 
 ing instances : — 
 
 1st, When it stands as the subject of a proposition ; as, 
 geben tflt fettcjer a(3 net) men, it is more blessed to give 
 than to receive ; jTerben tjl m'cfytS, aber lebert unb mcfyt feben, 
 ba3 ifl etn Ungliicf (©cfytlfer), to die is nothing, but to live and 
 not to see, that is a wretched lot indeed. 
 
 2d, In connection with the auxiliary verbs of mood — b ii r * 
 fen, fonnen, (affen, mogen, mtiffen, follen, rool* 
 ten (§ 115. 2d), and in particular expressions, also with fyctben 
 and t ^ it it ; e. g. er I a g t em £cut$ b a tt e n, he orders a 
 house to be built; id) barf fpt el en, I am permitted to play; 
 !Dtt f o U (I mcfjt ft e M e n, thou shalt not steal ; faf? fie <jef)en ; 
 let them go ; ©it t) a ft Qlit r eben, it is easy for you to speak 
 fie t but ntcfytS al3 roetnen, she does nothing but weep. 
 
473 
 
 Remark. When the auxiliary laffen, in the sense of to order 
 is followed by an infinitive, the latter, though active in German, 
 must generally be rendered by the passive in English ; as, er (apt 
 cin 25 ud) c t n l> i n t> c n, he orders a book to be bound, &c. 
 
 3d, In connection with the verbs % e t § e n, to order ; I) e t % e n 
 and n e n n e n, to call ; % e I f e n, to help ; I e f) r e n, to teach ; 
 I e r n e n, to learn, and m a d) e n, to make ; e. g. fyetg tfyn ge* 
 ()en ! tell him to go ! 
 
 4th, When joined to certain verbs denoting an exercise of 
 the senses; as, fefyen, to see; fyoren, to hear; f it f; ten, 
 to feel; fin ben, to find; as, id) fefye ipn fommert, tefen, getdj* 
 nen, I see him coming, reading, drawing, &c. ; id) t)i)re ifyn 
 fingen, fpieten, I hear him singing, playing ; id) fcmb t^n fcfyfafen, 
 fi§en, I found him sleeping, sitting. In this connection the in- 
 finitive has the signification of the present participle. 
 
 5th, The infinitive is employed without ju in connection with 
 the following verbs : — b I e i b e n, to remain ; g e | e n, to go ; 
 f a fy r e n, to ride in a carriage ; r e 1 1 e n, to ride on horseback ; 
 e. g. bfetben @te fi§en, keep your seat ; er gefyt betteltt, he goes 
 a begging ; fie fafyren fpa$teren, they take an airing, a ride in 
 a carriage ; er xrettet fpct$teren, he takes a ride on horseback. 
 
 § 168. By an idiom, peculiar to the German, the auxiliary 
 verbs of mood — fciirfen, Wnnen, mogen, miiffen, fatten, rooffen, 
 laffen, and also the verbs fyetgert, fyetfen, fyoren, fefyen, {ernen, 
 lefyren, assume the form of the infinitive, instead of the perfect 
 'participle, when they stand in connection with another infini- 
 tive ; e. g. er i)at fief) mcfyt riibrert bitrf en (instead of getmrft), 
 he has not been permitted to stir ; Su fyattefl f ommen f o 1 1 e n 
 (instead of gefottt), you ought to have come ; 3fyr fyabt bte $etnbe 
 Sngtanb'S fennen 1 ernen, ye have learnt to know the enemies 
 of England. It. is now customary, however, regularly to employ 
 the participle of the verbs tern en and lefyren instead of the in- 
 finitive ; as, er t)at iijn fennen g e t e r n t, he has become ac- 
 quainted with him; id) \)<xk$ tfyn jeicfynen geteljrt, I have 
 taught him drawing. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE WITH JU* 
 
 § 169. The infinitive with in is sometimes employed in- 
 stead of the simple infinitive, as the subject of a proposition, 
 especially when in an inverted proposition it comes after its 
 predicate; e.g. e£ gegtemt bem Sftanne, tfyattg in fetn, it 
 behoves man to be diligent, &c. 
 
474 
 
 § 170. When the infinitive with ju is not the subject of a 
 proposition, it is equivalent to a verbal substantive in an 
 oblique case, corresponding either to the Latin supine {ama- 
 lum, amatu), or to the gerund (amandi — do — dum — do). It is 
 thus used :- — 
 
 1st, After substantives j especially such as signify an inclina- 
 tion or affection of the mind, opportunity, time, fyc. ; as, 9tet* 
 gung, inclination; gntfcfylug, resolution; ©tfer, zeal; 3JJur(), 
 courage ; gujt, desire ; 3ett, time ; ©elegenfyett, opportunity ; 
 er i)at 2ujt in ret fen, in effen, &c, he has a mind to 
 travel, to eat, or he is desirous of travelling, of eating, &c. ; e$ 
 tft &it 3 u a r b e 1 1 e n, } u f d) I a f e n, it is time to work, to 
 sleep. 
 
 2d, After adjectives — signifying possibility, duty, necessity, 
 easiness, difficulty, and the like ; as, mogttd), unmogltd), tter* 
 pfiicfytef, genotfytgt, (etd>t, fcfywer, fyart, &c Die SSiirbe tft fcfywer 
 $u tragen, the burden is hard to be borne ; e$ tft mtr immogltd) 
 in Fommen, it is impossible for me to come, &c. 
 
 3d, After verbs, generally as the object to which an activity, 
 a desire, or emotion of the mind implied by them, is directed ; 
 e ' g* f*$ freuen, to rejoice ; ftd> bemiifyett, to strive ; fyoffert, to 
 hope; gebenfen, to intend; notfytgert, sttnngen, to necessitate, 
 compel; »etgeflfen, to forget ; serbteten, to forbid, &c. ; e£ freut 
 mtd), ©te gu fefyen, I am glad to see you ; er bemiifyte fid), tfyn 
 etnguMen, ne strove to overtake him ; id) ratfye Sir, sit fcfyrcet* 
 gen, I advise you to be silent. 
 
 § 171. 4th, After many verbs which serve to designate the 
 time or mode of an action ; as, anfangen, to begin ; auffyorerr, 
 to cease ; fortfafyren, to continue ; etlen, to hasten ; pflegen, to 
 be wont ; sevmogen, to be able ; braudjen, to need ; fcfyetnen, to 
 appear; anfifen, to know; e. g. er fdngt an $tt ftngen, in teamen, 
 he begins to sing, to dance ; er sermag nidjt in fprecfyen, he is 
 not able to speak ; £)u fcfyetnft eS mcfyt in nnflfen, you appear not 
 to know it, &c. 
 
 5th, The infinitive with ju is sometimes employed as the 
 predicate of a proposition in connection with the copula f e t tt, 
 to express the possibility or necessity of an action. The infin- 
 itive, in this connection, though active, has generally a passive 
 signification ; as, e$ tft feme &it in settteren, there is no time 
 to be lost ; fetn ©rernbtlb tft in fefyen, no star is to be seen; er 
 tft ntrgenb£ angtttreffen, he is nowhere to be found. It occurs 
 also in the same signification with I) a ben ; er J) at tjter ntcfytS in 
 fhqen, he has nothing to say here ; wa3 fyaft ©it in tfyitn? what 
 
475 
 
 have you to do ? It is .his construction of the infinitive, which 
 has given rise to the future participle (§ 121. 3d). 
 
 6th, The infinitive with $u serves sometimes to denote 
 the purpose or design of an action or state expressed by a 
 previous verb, in which case the particle urn usually is pre- 
 fixed to add emphasis to the expression ; e. g. id) f omme, ll m 
 £)tr SSiicfyer gu brtngert, I come for the purpose of bringing you 
 books ; er gefyt tn bte &tabt, u m nut etnem $mtnbe $ufcmv 
 men $u f ommen, he goes into town in order to meet a friend. 
 
 IV. PARTICIPLES. 
 
 § 172. Participles are declined like adjectives, and follow 
 the same rules of inflection. Ser (tebenbe ^Better, the 
 affectionate father ; etrt geltebteS $tnb, a beloved child. So 
 also substantively — ber ©enefene, one who has recovered from 
 sickness ; bte ©terbenbe, the dying woman ; ba3 93er(angte, 
 that which was wished for, &c. 
 
 § 173. The present and perfect participles are frequently 
 used as adverbs of manner ; e. g. ©te fprecfyen ft t e $ e n b, 
 you speak fluently; ertbtfyenb fblgt er tfyren ©paten, 
 blushing he follows her steps. This is especially the case 
 with perfect participles, in connection with the verb fontmen, 
 to come ; fyeufenb f ommt ber ©turm g e fl d g e n, ber bte $lams 
 me braufenb fuc^t (©cfytfler), howling the blast comes flying, 
 and roaring seeks the flame ; er Bmmt gelaufen, gentfen, he 
 comes running, riding, &c. 
 
 § 174. Participles, like adjectives, serve either to form 
 the predicate of a proposition, or they are joined to a noun in 
 an attributive sense (§ 52) ; e. g. ber 9)?ann tft g e I e t) r t, 
 the man is learned, and ber getefyrte 90fcmn, the learned 
 man; bte Sftacfyt tft tfetfloffen, the night is past, and bte 
 serfloffene Sftacfyt, the past night; ba$ 2Baffer tft fte* 
 b e n b, the water is boiling, and ba£ ft e b e n b e SBaffer, the boil- 
 ing water ; bte ^anbfefyaft tjt entgucfenb, the landscape is 
 charming, and bte entgScf ettb e ?cmbfd)aft, the charming 
 landscape. 
 
 The present participle, however, is not generally used in the 
 predicative sense, unless it has entirely assumed the signification 
 of an adjective; thus we cannot say : — tcf) bin tufcnb/Ucbcnt^fefycnb, 
 I am calling, loving, seeing; but : — id) tufe, lick, fefye. (§ 159 ) 
 
 § 175. In connection with another verb, the present par. 
 ticiple, either alone or qualified by other words, frequently 
 
476 
 
 stands as the abridged form of a subordinate proposition, serf 
 ing to express the time, manner, cause, or condition of the ac 
 tion denoted by the verb ; as, bte$ bet mtr b e n f e n b, fcfyltef tdf) 
 etn [time), revolving these things with myself, I fell asleep, in- 
 stead of, tnbem id) bte$ bet mtr felbft bad)te, &c, whilst I was 
 revolving, &c. ; tb/m bte £dnbe b r ii cf e n b, nafrm er 2fbfcf)teb 
 (manner), shaking his hands he took leave ; fetn Slbbtlb bill* 
 bet fie, afletn $>a% fbrperlofe 2Bort ser efyr en b; i. e. njeil fie 
 afletn ba3 fbrperlofe 2Bort x>erel)rt (cause) (©cfyttfer), she tole- 
 rates no image, adoring the incorporeal word alone. 
 
 This construction, however, is not as extensive in German 
 as in English, and entirely inadmissible, when the subject of 
 the participle is different from that of the verb, or when in 
 English we employ the compound participle. Thus we cannot 
 say, the sun being risen, I set out on my journey, but when the 
 sun had arisen, &c, a 1 3 bte ©onne aufgegattgen war, retf te id) 
 ab ; after having breakfasted, he read his paper, n a cf) b e m er 
 gefriibftiicft focttte (after he had breakfasted), (ct3 er feme ^eiU 
 fcfyrtff (see page 279). 
 
 § 176. In certain expressions only, both the present and 
 the perfect participle are used absolutely in the accusative 
 case ; e. g. ba$> aSttcf) f oftet, t> en Stnbanb abgerecfynet, 
 greet Ifyater, the book costs two crowns, exclusive of the bind- 
 ing ; fie feufget fymauS tn bte ftrtftere $l<xd)t, b a 6 2( u g e som 
 2B e t n e n g e t r it b e t (©emitter), she sighs out into the murky 
 night, her eyes bedimmed by the gushing tears ; er trctt tn ba% 
 3tmmer, ben £utt auf bem $opfe, ten ©tocf tn ber £>anb, he en- 
 tered the room, with the hat on his head, and cane in his hand. 
 In this last example the participle fyabenb, having, may be sup- 
 plied, to link the expression to the subject of the proposition. 
 
 § 177. The perfect participle, when formed from transitive 
 verbs, has always a passive signification, and is therefore used ad- 
 jectively only by way of exception. When formed from reflexive 
 or impersonal verbs, it is employed neither in an attributive nor in 
 a predicative sense, but serves simply to form the compound ten- 
 ses ; as, tcf) babe unci) g c f r c u t, g e a r g c r t, g e f cf) a m t, I have 
 rejoiced, been vexed, ashamed; e$ r)at get eg net, gefefynett, it 
 has rained, snowed ; but not, ber gefrcute, gefcrjcimte 9J?ann; nor, ber 
 SQfann tft gefreut, gefebamt, &c. Of intransitive verbs those only, 
 which take the auxiliary fetn, may be used in the attributive re- 
 lation, as well as in the predicative; e. g. baS #au$ tfii cibge* 
 b t a n n t, the house is burnt down, and ba$ aOgebrct nnte £>au£, 
 the house which has burnt down ; ber #reunb t ft a n g e f m m e n, 
 the friend has arrived, and ber a n g c 1 m m e n e Jreunb, the friend 
 
477 
 
 who ha3 arrived. Some participles have assumed the signification 
 of adjectives, and may even be compared. (See § 63- 1st.) 
 
 Note* The government of verbs is treated of at the close of the 
 table of irregular verbs below. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 § 178. An Adverb is a word which limits the 
 meaning of verbs, of adjectives, and of other adverbs. 
 Adverbs correspond to the questions where ? when ? 
 how ? to what degree ? &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 £8 o tft ta$ $pferb ? Where is the horse * 
 
 (5r ift n t r 9 c n t> 6 $u finben. He is nowhere to be fcand. 
 
 .ftcmmcn <Ste herein! Walk in ! 
 
 SB a n n ijl ct ana,c£emmen ? WAerc did he arrive 1 
 
 @r tft 9 eft e tn geftorfcen. He died yesterday. 
 
 2)cc &nabe febreibt febon, after er The boy writes beautifully, but 
 
 Itcf't f cf) t e d) t. reads poorly. 
 
 £)ct SSatcr ift fe b t bctttibr. The father is very sad. 
 
 iDie $ofe ift a u g n e I) m e n t) The rose is exceedingly beauti- 
 
 fdjon. ful. 
 
 § 179. With respect to their signification, adverbs 
 may be divided into six classes : — 
 
 1st, Adverbs of Place. These may either designate rest in a 
 place, in answer to the question where ? as, iiberafl, attentat* 
 ben, every where ; tv^enbroo, any where ; ntrgenbS, nowhere , 
 bier, bet, bort, here, there ; roo, where ; augen, without ; trmen, 
 within ; oben, above ; tmtert, below r ; btrttert, behind ; vcvxx, be- 
 fore ; red)t$, on the right hand ; ItnfS, on the left hand ; and 
 the compounds : broben (bemeben), there above ; bnmten (bat* 
 iirtten), below ; brctu^ert, out of doors ; bteruebert, here below ; 
 bteflTettS, on this side ; jertfett^, on that side ; — or, motion 01 
 direction towards a place, in answer to the question whither ? 
 baber, along ; bterfyer, hither ; bctbtrt, thither ; berab, down 
 {towards the speaker) ; btnab, down (away from the speaker) ; 
 bergemf, up hill ; benjab, down hill ; serroattS, forward ; tM* 
 tt)art$, backwards ; btmmelroartS, toward heaven, &c. 
 
 2d, Adverbs of Time. These denote either a point or pe- 
 
478 
 
 riod of time, in answer to the questions when ? how long 
 since ? by what time ? as, barm, then ; warm, when ; bamal£, 
 at that time ; mm, jefct, now ; etnft, once ; nod), still ; fcfyon, 
 berettS, already ; sormafe, fonft, heretofore, formerly ; balb, 
 soon ; fiinfttg, hereafter ; neultd), jurtgfl:, recently ; anfangS, at 
 first ; beS SKorgenS, be$ SlbenbS, in the morning, in the eve* 
 ning; gejlern, yesterday; fyeute, to-day; morgen, to-morrow; 
 je, j em a 13, ever ; me, never, &c. ; — or a duration of time ; as, 
 aflesett, at all times ; tmmer, ftet$, always ; lange, long. 
 
 3d, Adverbs of Modality, which are either affirmative, nega» 
 tive, potential, optative, interrogative, or imperative ; as, ja, yes; 
 bod), however; fretltd), sroar, though, however ; fitrwafyr, roafyr* 
 ltd), tmrflid), verily, truly, actually, in very deed; ftcfyerltd), 
 surely ; — netn, no ; md)t, not ; fetrte3roeg$, by no means ;— 
 x>iettetc^t, perhaps; roafyrfcfyemltd), probably; etuoa, n>of)l, per- 
 haps, indeed; — wemt bod), bag bod), would that ;— ob, if; et* 
 ma, rcofyt, perhaps, perchance; mm, now; betm, then; — bttrd). 
 au§, allerbtngS, fd)led)terbtrtg£, by all means, absolutely, &c. 
 
 4th, Adverbs of Quantity, derived from numerals, and an- 
 swering to the questions how much ? how many ? e. g. etroaS, 
 somewhat ; gang, entirely ; gemtg, sufficiently ; xnel, much ; 
 roemg, little ; tf)etl$, partly ; meijtenS, metjrerttljetlS, mostly, for 
 the most part; erftenS, firstly ; amettenS, secondly, &c. ; f enter, 
 further, moreover ; let3tert§, lastly ; awetmal, twice, &c. • em* 
 fad), simple ; melfad), many fold, &c. (§ 80.) 
 
 5th, Adverbs of Quality or Manner, which answer to the 
 question how? as, gliicfttd), fortunately; fcfyort, beautifully; 
 fd)(ed)t, badly; ftetfKg, diligently, &c. ; fo, so, thus; rote, as, 
 how; ebert fo, just so, &c. Many of this class are originally 
 adjectives or participles. 
 
 6th, Adverbs of Intensity ; as, fefyr, very ; gar, quite ; fo. 
 gar, oven ; augerjr, j()od)fr, ungemetrt, extremely, highly, uncom- 
 monly; gan^ttd), ttolltg, entirely, fully; bemafye, faft, almost, 
 nearly ; mtr only ; faum, scarcely ; t)0d)ften£, at the most ; 
 raentgjTenS, at least ; roett, bet rcettem, by far, &c. 
 
 § 180. OBSERVATIONS ON THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Obs. 1. Beginners should carefully mark the distinction be- 
 tween the adverbs f) t n and I) e r, for which there are no correspond- 
 ing" terms in English ; ft i n denotes motion away from, and F) e t 
 approximation towards the person speaking. These words have 
 given rise to a number of compounds, all of which participate in 
 tb»« original signification. Examples : — 
 
479 
 
 Away from, towards the speaker. 
 
 f)tnat>, 
 
 fjerafc, 
 
 down ; 
 
 (jtnauf, 
 
 Fjerauf, 
 
 up; 
 
 fyinau*, 
 
 fycrauS, 
 
 out; 
 
 fytnctn, 
 
 herein, 
 
 in; 
 
 fyiniiber, 
 
 fyetubcr, 
 
 across. 
 
 So also — b q f) t n, thither, to that place ; b a r) e t, thence, from tha 4 
 p race ■ b o r t f) i n, to yonder place ; t) r t fy c t , from yonder place ; 
 roof) in, whither; roofjer, whence, &c. 
 
 Obs. 2. To adverbs of intensity may be added the compound 
 proportionals \c — [c, or j[c — 1> e ft C, or [c — urn f o, the — the; as, 
 j e grofkr, b e ft o freffet, the greater, the better ; { e lander er Ubt, u m ft) 
 fd)(cd)tcr rottb et, the longer he lives, the worse he becomes. 
 
 Obs. 3. The adverb of place, b a, is derived from the demonstra- 
 tive pronoun b e r, and is an abbreviated expression for an biefem £)rte, 
 in this place. So the adverb rco, the correlative of ba, is derived 
 from the relative pronoun xoix, and stands instead of an roctdjem 
 £)rte, in which place. Both ta and roo, therefore, are termed pro- 
 nominal adverbs. As adverbs of place they are combined with f) i n 
 and \) e r, and form the compounds bafytn, bafjer, roofytn, roofyer. 
 
 Obs. 4. Besides serving as adverbs of place, ba (bar), and wo 
 (rocr), are often compounded with prepositions, to supply the place 
 of the dative and accusative neuter of the demonstrative b e r, and 
 of the relative or interrogative \v e v, n? e ( cf) e r . Thus the Ger- 
 mans regularly say : — 
 
 babct, therewith, instead of 6et bem ; 
 
 rocbet, wherewith, — Oct roetcfyem ; 
 
 bamit, thereby, — nut bem ; 
 
 roonut, whereby, — mit roetcfyem ; 
 
 baburd), through, by it, — burd) bat ; 
 
 roeburd), through, by which, — burd) roelcfyeS ; 
 
 bafiir, for that, — fur $>a$ ; 
 
 roefitr, for which, — fur roe(d)e$ ; 
 
 baran, thereon, — an bem ; 
 
 roeran, whereon, — an roe(d)em ; 
 
 barren, thereof, — son bem ; 
 
 root>cn, whereof, — son roelcfyem ; 
 
 ba$u, thereto, — $u bem ; 
 
 roo*u, whereto, — gu roetcfyem. 
 
 Obs. 5. Some adverbs are compared like adjectives. 
 Their mode of comparison has already been explained (§ 68). 
 
 Obs. 6. On the position which the negative nxdfjt and 
 adverbs generally are to occupy in sentences, see Lesson C. 
 
48G 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 181. A preposition is a word which is joined to 
 nouns or pronouns, to point out their relation to some 
 other word in the sentence. 
 
 § 182. The following is a list of the German pre- 
 positions : — 
 
 an, on, by, near ; 
 
 -^instead; 
 
 cmf, on, upon ; 
 au£, out, out of; 
 aujkt, ) without, on the 
 auf'ctfyatb, £ outside ; 
 bet/ near, with, by ; 
 btnnen, within ; 
 tueffett, on this side ; 
 turd), through ; 
 cntgccjcn, over against ; 
 fur, for, in favour of; 
 
 aerf"' S towards » a g ainst 5 
 
 wk ~) 
 
 fyalben, >on account of; 
 f)a(bct, J 
 fytntet, behind ; 
 in, in, into ; 
 
 *«*?' \ oa J^f^ 
 
 jenfett, beyond ; 
 Craft, by virtue of; 
 lan^, along; 
 tout, according to ; 
 nut, with ; 
 
 nad), after ; 
 
 next to ; 
 
 nacf)fr, 
 
 neben, beside ; 
 nebft, together with ; 
 oberfycilb, above ; 
 
 &,H thout; 
 
 fammt, together with ; 
 fett, since, from ; 
 tre§, in spite of; 
 
 ^ cr 'j above, over; 
 
 urn, about, round ; 
 
 urn — rmllen, for the sake of ; 
 
 ungead)tet/ notwithstanding ; 
 
 i. <. 1* 7 below, on the lowej 
 unlets, j side ' of . 
 
 t)crmb'QC, by virtue of; 
 
 t)0n, from, by, of; 
 
 t)cr, before ; 
 
 tx>af)tent>, during ; 
 
 nxgen, on account of; 
 
 tt)tt)er, against ; 
 
 $U, to ; 
 
 3ufofc;c, in consequence of ; 
 
 $unrit>et, against ; 
 
 $nnfd)cn, between, betwixt. 
 
 § 183. Prepositions require the substantives, with which 
 they are connected, to be put either in the Genitive, the Dative* 
 or the Accusative, Some few require the dative in one signi- 
 fication, and the accusative in another. 
 
 I. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 
 
 § 184. The prepositions which govern the genitive case, 
 are: — cmftatt or ftatt, fyalben °r Mber, attgerfyatb, t'mtetMb, 
 
481 
 
 cber&alb, mitctfaib, bteffett, jenfett, tYaft, laut, mtttelft or ser* 
 mittetft, ungeacfyter, umuett or unfern, setmrige, roafyrenb, roegett, 
 urn — rotffen, and (dng§, gufotge, tro§ (see § 188), 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 2C n ft a 1 1 fefncd Waters, instead of his father ; bet (Sfyte r) a t b e n, 
 for the sake of honour ; a u £c t r) a I b bet ©tafct, without the city ; 
 jenfeit be£ ®rabe$, beyond the grave; ftaft metne$ 2Cmte$, by 
 virtue of my office ; (aut beS SSttefeS, according to the letter; un? 
 ro e 1 1 be$ JUrdjbefS, not far from the church-yard ; to a f) t en b teg 
 &tteges, during the war ; u nt be» -gricbcnS rot (( en, for the sake of 
 peace ; 1 t o § feinet £ftad)t, in spite of his power. 
 
 II. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE DATIVE ONLY. 
 
 § 185. Prepositions which govern the dative case alone, 
 are : — cm3, auger, bet, btnnen, entgegen, gegeniiber, gemag, mit, 
 nad), nadjft, sunacfyjr, rtebft, fammt, fett, son, su, stttmber, and o& 
 when it is equivalent to to e g e it, on account of. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 (5r fommt au^ bet ^ttdje, he comes from church; auger 2)tt 
 roaren Me ba, all were present except you ; et roofynt b e i m *8acfer, 
 he lives with the baker; bin n en (always refers to time) gwei 
 £Bed)cn, within two weeks ; et geljt ifym entgegen, he goes to 
 meet him ; m it metnet Gutter, with my mother ; n a d) bem £aufc, 
 to the heuse ; n e b ft femem greunbe, together with his friend ; f e it 
 bem Sage, since that day ; $ u bet £Xuelle, to the spring. 
 
 III. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 
 
 § 186. The following prepositions require the accusative 
 only : — butd), fur, gegen, cfyne or fonber, urn, and wotber. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 (St tetf't b u t d) $ gan$e 8anb, he travels through the entire 
 country ; b u t eft tf)n bin id) gtM(td), by him I am made happy ; ct 
 betefynt mid) fitt metne Dtfufye, he rewards me for my trouble ; bet 
 SSatet fcrgt flit fetne Jtuibet, the father provides for his children; 
 sjftann fur Sftann, man by man; id) fjalte t>a$ f tit (Scrmietdbclet, I re- 
 gard this as flattery ; g e g e n ben (Strom, against the stream ; g e- 
 9en etnanber, towards each other; ot)nc 3«>etfef, without doubt; 
 o n b e t ®(etd)en, without an equal ; u m etn Ut)t, at one o'clock ; 
 urn bcn&omg, about the king; tdt> faufte e$ urn grodlf Jtteugct, I 
 bought it for twelve kreuzers ; rot b et feinen gfreunb, against hit 
 friend. 
 
 21 
 
482 
 
 XV. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING BOTH THE DATIVE A3D 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 § 187. The following prepositions are sometimes connect 
 ed with the dative, and sometimes with the accusative : — 
 an, cmf, fytnter, m, neben, fiber, unter, »or, and jtrnfcfyen. 
 
 With respect to all the prepositions of this class it is to be ob- 
 served, that when they imply rest or motion in a place, they are 
 followed by the dative, in answer to the question where ? bat when 
 they imply a tendency or motion from one place to another, they 
 are followed by the accusative, in answer to the question whither ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 (Sr roof)ttt an b e m SJicete, he lives near the sea ; er gefjt a n t> a 4 
 ilfer, he goes towards the shore ; er fcfyretbt a n fetnen greunb, he 
 writes to his friend ; a n bcr ©ran$e, at the frontiers ; er arbettet 
 a u f bem $elbe, he labours in the field ; a u f ber <&d)\xU, at school ; 
 er $tef)t a u f bag 2anb, he moves into the country ; a u f ben 2Cbenb, 
 for the evening; Winter bem £aufe, behind the house; er fegt ftcfe 
 Winter t>m Dfen, he takes his seat behind the stove ; er ifi in ber 
 &ta\)t, he is in the city; id) gefye in bte ©tabt, I am going into the 
 city; tm Some, in anger; in bte £cmb nefymen, to take into the 
 hand; er ftefyt neben mtr, he is standing by my side; tct) fegte 
 nud) n e e n tf)n, I seated myself by his side ; u b e r ben (Sternen, 
 above the stars ; u b e r ben g(up cjefycn, to go across the river ; u n* 
 ter fretem £tmmel, under the open sky; unter fetnen SSritbern, 
 among his brothers ; t) o r tfym, before him ; er ftetlt fid) Dor ben 
 (Spiegel he takes his position before the looking-glass ; 5 ro tfcl) en 
 mtr unb tfym, between me and him, &c. 
 
 § 188. Of those prepositions which govern the genitive 
 (§ 184), the following three may also be connected with the 
 dative : — ( a n 3 & ; as, (cmg§ beS UferS, or tana,§> bem Ufer, along 
 the shore ; — j a f 1 9 e, which with the genitive precedes, and 
 with the dative follows the noun; as, sufof^e beS SSertcfyteS, or 
 bem SSertcfyte sufol^e, according to the report ; — and tvofyy as, 
 tro§ fetrtem fyerben ©dfjfcffafe, in spite of his hard fate ; trog ber 
 ©efafjr, in spite of the danger. 
 
 § 189. When prepositions precede the definite article, thej 
 often coalesce with it into one word, as, t m, for ttt bem, <&c £ 
 list of these contractions has been given above (§ 10} 
 
483 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS 
 
 § 190 A conjunction is a word by which two simple 
 sentences are united into one compound sentence* 
 
 § 191. Conjunctions have been variously classified accords 
 ing to their different significations. They are : — 
 
 1st, Copulative; mtb, and ; a ud), also ; fowofyl ate, as well 
 as ; gubem, moreover ; augerbem, besides ; meter — nod), nei- 
 ther — nor ; md)t rnir or m'cfyt attetn — fonbent and), not only — 
 but also ; fcrner, furthermore ; sugletd), at the same time. 
 
 2d, Disjunctive; erttroeber — ober, either — -or; e. g. ertt* 
 tt) e b e r grog ober i lem, either large or small. 
 
 3d, Adversative ; aber, affetn, but ; fonbent (used only 
 after a negative), but ; bod), jebod), yet ; bemtod), nevertheless ; 
 fonft else ; melmefyr, rather ; fytngegen, on the contrary ; md)t 
 force!) t — ate tuelmefyr, not so much — as rather. 
 
 4th, Conditional; wenn, fo, too, wofern, if; falB or tm 
 gatt, in case ; mo nidjt, if not ; e.g. wenn id) mir em SOctrtet 
 roiigte, ben ©cfyaben txneber §ut in macfyen! if I only knew some 
 means of repairing the damage ! In German the conjunction 
 roerm is often omitted, and then the verb (if the tense is simple) 
 or the auxiliary (if the tense is compound) takes the place of 
 the conjunction ; n> & r e ft Su fyter gewefen, mem SSruber mare 
 ntcfyt geftorben, for roenn X)n fyter geroefen rodrefiy&c, if 
 thou hadst been present, my brother would not have died. 
 
 5th, Concessive ; groar, to be sure, indeed, true ; ttueroofyl, 
 obroot)!, obfefyon, obgletd), roenn gletd), though, although ; e. g. 
 o b to o t) I ba$> SBetter fd)i>n ifi, fo fann er bod) nidjt au§ge(jett, 
 though the weather is fine, he is nevertheless unable to go out. 
 Compare also page 296. 
 
 6th, Causal ; benn, for ; ba, roetf, nun, since ; e. g. td) gefye 
 nut £)tr, to e t I t)u ten vecfyten 2Beg md)t fennjt, I go with you, 
 because you do not know the right way ; ttorrodrtS mugt 2)u, 
 benn riicfrodrtS fannjl: Sit mcfjt mefyr, you must go onward, 
 for back you can no longer go. 
 
 7th, Illative ; a(fo, barum, therefore ; bafyer, hence ; beg* 
 fjatb, begroegen, urn begnuu'en, on that account; fo(gh'd), conse- 
 quently ; e. g. er tft franf, f o I g 1 1 d) mug er ju §>aufe blctben, 
 he is sick, consequently he must remain at home ; e3 g eft el 
 tl)m nidjt mebr unter ben S9?enfd)en, beg meg en gog er fid) in btc 
 Stnfamfett aitritcf, he was no longer pleased air ong men, there, 
 fore he retired into solitude. 
 
484 
 
 8th, Final ; ba0, that ; ouf fcaf, fcamtt, in order that um 
 ju, in order to ; nut jtrafen t^rt, t> a m x t er ftd) befifere, we punish 
 him in order that he may reform ; etlen ©te, bctmtt ©ie md)t 
 in fpdt fommen, make haste, lest you come too late. 
 
 9th, Comparative ; al$, ttne, gletcfywne, as, just as ; fo, so 
 thus ; a(3 roerm, al3 cb, as when, as if; g(etd) al$ ob, just as 
 if; er fiircfytete fid), aU ob er attetn mare, he was afraid, as if 
 he were alone ; er ftellte fid), aU fcfyltefe er, he acted as if he 
 were asleep. 
 
 10th, Conjunctions expressing a relation of time : — bamal£, 
 barm, at that time, then ; tnbefifen, meanwhile ; sorter, au»or, 
 efyer, before, sooner ; fcarctuf, thereupon ; fyernad), afterward ; 
 fettbem, since ; ctl$, t>a, when ; warm, when ; roafyrenb, whilst ; 
 tnbem, tnbejfen, in that, during which time ; bt3, until, &c. 
 
 § 192. For those conjunctions which require the verb to 
 be put at the end of the sentence, see page 180. On com- 
 pound conjunctions, entweber — ober, &c, see page 332. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 § 193. Interjections are words or articulate sounds 
 expressive of sudden emotion. 
 
 The most important interjections used in German, are :— 
 
 ad) ! alas ! ab fjotta ! holla ! 
 
 af) ! ah ! fyut ! hurrah ! quick ! 
 
 auf ! up I fyufd) ! hush ! 
 
 brat) ! bravo ! fnadfa ! crack ! snap ! 
 
 ei ! why ! eigh ! letter ! alas ! 
 
 frifd) ! brisk ! quick ! of) ! o ! oh ! 
 
 fort! away! paff ! puff! puff! 
 
 (SMucf $u ! success to you ! pfut ! fy ! 
 
 f)a ! ha ! pogtaufent) ! 'zounds ! 
 
 hush ! silence ! 
 
 ml £ha,na. n! f 
 
 l)c ! t)e ta ! soho ! ho there ! fd)t ! ) 
 
 r)a(t ! hold ! topp ! agreed ! 
 
 ^cxt ! Kail ! PA I ?, 0jbehold , 
 
 f)eifn ! ^ fief> fca ! 3 
 
 (uc^etfa ! Chusza ! hey-day ! ml) [ l wo , alas , 
 
 nuf)r)e ! J o roefye ! 3 
 
 f)Uf, |)immel ! heaven help ! roofytan ! well then ! 
 
485 
 
 Remark 1. As interjections express no thought, but simply out* 
 breaks of feeling, they neither govern other words, nor are they 
 governed by any. 
 
 Rem. 2. They stand in connection with every case, but more 
 particularly with the nominative, grtfcf) ! ©cfcltcn, fctt) $ut £ant> ! 
 Brisk ! my workmen, be at hand ! £) t)cm Sfyorcn Qcfcfytefyt e$ rcd)t ! 
 the fool deserves it ! 
 
 Rem. 3. The use of rocf)(, rocfyc, £ctf, is elliptical, fct being 
 understood. They always require the dative which depends on 
 the omitted verb ; e. g. rocbe (fct) tfym ! wo be to him ! Jpctl (fct) 
 £)it ! Lail thou ! The interjections c, a d), and p f u i are frequent- 
 ly put with the genitive ; e. g. pfui £>ct (Sd)cmt>e ! for shame ! ad) 
 bc$ (§lcnt)e$ ! alas, the misery ! 
 
 Note. For the general principles of Construction and a 
 recapitulation of the Rules of Syntax, which are scattered 
 through the book, see Lesson 103, pages 356 — 363. 
 
486 
 
 TABLE OF CLASSIFICATION 
 
 OF THE 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Remark. — From this table must be excepted the sixteen irregu 
 iaT \eibs, which in our list form the first class.* 
 
 CO 
 
 09 
 
 > 
 
 1 
 
 a> 
 
 i 
 
 CD 
 
 a 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 0) 
 
 Past 
 Participle. 
 
 I 
 
 e 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 ©efjen, to see, 
 
 |<*, 
 
 gefefjen. 
 
 II 
 
 c 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 £elfcn, to help, 
 ©innen, to reflect, 
 
 fann, 
 
 gefyclfen. 
 gefennen. 
 
 III 
 
 t 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 SrinFen, to drink, 
 
 ttcmr 5 , 
 
 gettunfen. 
 
 IV 
 
 a 
 
 ie 
 
 a 
 
 goiter to fall, 
 
 Per, 
 
 gefaEen. 
 
 V 
 
 ci 
 
 t 
 
 ie 
 i 
 
 ©cfytetfren, to write, 
 S3etfen, to bite, 
 
 fcfyrieb, 
 
 gefdjttefcen. 
 getriffen. 
 
 VI 
 
 <x, cm, 
 
 e, h ie, 
 
 o, ft. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ©d)tepen, to shoot, 
 
 f**P, 
 
 gefdjofien. 
 
 fii 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 ©cf)(agen, to beat, 
 
 f*t«9/ 
 
 gestagen. 
 
 * The 5th and 6th classes include the greater part of the irregular verbs. 
 
487 
 
 EXPLANATORY REMARKS. 
 
 L The first class changes the radical vowel e into a in the 
 imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. @eben, to 
 give ; imperfect gab ; past part, gegeben. To this class must 
 be added : bitten, to entreat (beg), which changes the radical 
 vowel { in the same manner, as : imperfect bat j past part, 
 gebeten. 
 
 II. The second class changes the radical vowel e or i into 
 a in the imperfect, and in the past participle into o. Ex. Sftefy* 
 men, to take ; imperf. naf)m ; past part, genommen ; gewtnnen, 
 to win ; imperf. geroann ; past part gewonnen. To these must 
 be added, gebaren, produce (to give birth to), which has a in- 
 stead of t hi the root, as : imperf. gebar ; past part, geboren* 
 
 III. The third class changes the radical vowel { into a in 
 the imperfect, and in the past part, into u. Ex. ©cfylingen, to 
 sling; imperf. fctylang, past part, gefcfyhmgcn ; except fcnngen, 
 to hire ; imperf. bung ; past part, gebungen 5 fcfyinben, to flay ; 
 imperf. fcfyunb; past part, gefcfyunben; and fyun, to do ; imperf 
 fyat) past part, geifyan. 
 
 IV. The fourth class changes the radical vowel a into te in 
 the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. QbU 
 ten, to hold; imperf. fytelt; past part, gefyatten ; except fangen, 
 to catch ; imperf. ftng } past part, gefangen. The following 
 conform to the principle of the rule, resuming in the past part, 
 the radical vowel or diphthong of the present : laufen, to run ; 
 imperf. lief; past part, gelaufen 5 gefyen, to go; imperf. gtng; 
 past part, gegangen ; t)ti$en, to order ; imperf. fyief ; past part. 
 gefyeigen; rufen, to call ; imperf. rtef ; past part, gerufen ; ftofien, 
 to push ; imperf. fHeg ; past part, gejregen. 
 
 V. The fifth class changes the radical vowel ei into te in 
 the imperf. and in the past part, or before a double consonant 
 into i. Ex. SSleiben, to remain; imperf. btieb; past part. 
 gebtteben ; fcfyneiben, to cut ; imperf. fdjmtt ; past part, ge* 
 ftymtiett. 
 
488 
 
 VI. The sixth class changes the radical vowels : a, cut, e, i$ 
 ie, b, u, into o in the imperf. and past participle. Ex. ©d()tt>o* 
 ren, to fester; imperf. fcfywor; past part, gefcfyrcoren; faugen, 
 to suck ; imperf. fog 5 past part, gefogen ; faufen, to drink to 
 excess; imperf. fofjr 5 past part, gefoffen ; fyeben, to lift ; imperf. 
 fyob ; past part, gefyoben ; ttertturren, to embroil (to confuse) ; 
 imperf. sermon* ; past part, roerroorren ; bieten, to offer ; imperf. 
 bot; past part, geboten; fcfyrooren, to swear, imperf. fcfyroo* 
 fdjumr) ; past part, gefcfymoren ; liigen, to lie ; imperf. log ; 
 past part, gefogen. 
 
 VIL The seventh class changes the ladical vowel a into u 
 in the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. 
 SBacfyfen, to grow ; imperf. mid)& ; past part, geroacfyfen ; fle^en, 
 to stand, has jtcmfc) in the imperfect (formerly, however, fhutb) 
 and »n the past part, geftanfcen. 
 
489 
 
 1 A 
 
 © ^ 
 -^ co 
 IX cd 
 
 00-5 
 
 •5 bJD 
 O CD 
 
 ^a m 
 
 r <d 
 
 ^? *■« 
 o cd 
 
 >-. -C 
 CD > 
 P* ? 
 
 •~>§ 8 
 
 § g^ 
 
 air 
 
 1—1 * CD • 
 
 it? <"— * ~s 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 eg 
 
 CD 
 
 Jzzj 
 
 
 ■B 
 
 >>-d 
 
 a 
 
 
 n3 
 
 
 cd 
 
 
 93 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 fc> 
 
 -d 
 
 a* 
 
 cd 
 
 nrt 
 
 
 „d 
 
 
 o 
 
 *d 
 ~0 
 
 CD 
 -d 
 
 -*-> 
 
 ^3 
 
 <D 
 
 
 £ 
 
 bJO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ra 
 
 
 -£^ 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 
 r> 
 
 JS 
 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 
 $ ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 £ 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 ,d 
 
 aa 
 
 
 +j 
 
 -O 
 
 
 be 
 
 £ 
 
 
 S3 
 
 t> 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 *-t 
 
 
 
 cd 
 
 
 ft! 
 
 
 
 -♦-> 
 
 3 
 
 
 fl 
 
 bn 
 
 
 (J 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 l l 
 
 l l 
 
 a a 
 
 *= "£ ^ ^ . -m +S +S u "£ ^ f* 
 
 „0 ^ yO /O sC-m2 iS C 2 CwS. 
 C?3C?5<55<5}cr)Cf5<3^<j}cy5C>3<33<33 
 
 a a 
 
 33 Cft 
 
 *- <J <* • .£* £* 
 
 t_> j-> *« -d -c$ 
 
 : *2 £j £ 
 
 £ ~ « C u 2 
 
 a a 
 
 r-e*e*e*e*e*e*s>e*G*8*e >s*S" 
 
 S3 rt 3 
 © -3 ho 
 
 ^^/^jo^o^siwsnc^t^ 1 a a 
 
 • <3 ^_: 
 jo a 
 
 jo >o 
 
 J3 . 
 
 § 2 £ 
 
 ■** c £ 
 
 s =3 =j 
 
 S 2 £ 
 
 <3 22 £2 
 
 jo *c 
 
 
 ^e ^e^e 
 
 a a 
 
 
 s a 
 
 5 =5 
 *> iO 
 
 a a 
 
 21* 
 
 !?* 
 
 cd . 
 
 si 
 
 bo J 
 
 .s-a 
 
 CD ^ 
 
 O ** 
 
 ** o 
 en % 
 
 S CD > $ 
 
 cd 
 .d 
 
 CO 
 
 nd 
 CD 
 
 ^bJD 
 
 bf 
 
 •x^d ■ 
 
 s *? 
 
 do 1 * 
 
 c^^Q 
 
 S s 
 
 N c s: J 
 
 -d 
 
 ^^ | g'lo 3 
 
 o jg a S S o-^^ 
 
 "° « o o o.o o ^* 
 
 g i s g s c I c « 
 
 S : 5 g - - 
 
 £ ^ £ s sg^S" cccd= fc^g 
 
490 
 
 a ^ 
 
 HH © 
 
 d 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 © 
 
 -d 
 
 1 
 
 T3 
 05 » 
 
 "5 s g 
 
 
 CO 
 
 *d 
 
 i b: 
 
 .5 ■*■■ 
 3 ft 
 
 d 
 P 
 
 CO 
 
 d 
 
 © 
 
 1 
 
 2 P 
 
 a. a 
 
 2 2 
 
 'S's 
 
 3 £p 
 
 «- '5° 
 o 3 
 
 *-■ 
 
 eS 
 
 §>! 
 
 e3 
 
 © o 
 
 8 -.2 
 
 si a 
 
 d 
 
 ♦fife 
 
 d g 
 © © 
 
 1 
 
 © 
 
 H 
 
 d 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 a. 
 
 © 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J=S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .5 o <t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *» i— 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dig 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S.bJT 
 
 . 
 
 ^5 
 
 
 
 s 2L W 
 
 
 45 
 
 
 l 
 
 1 
 
 "CI 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 ©* 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 tf> 
 
 
 
 r2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3, 
 
 
 #* C 
 
 
 
 J: 
 
 to o 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 * £3 
 
 
 »o H 
 
 s£> 
 
 fe: 
 
 c 
 
 Pn 
 
 
 
 ,Q 
 
 £- 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 ~> ~> 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 «> 
 
 
 
 C0*O 
 
 VO 
 
 so 
 
 ^s> 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 tk* 
 
 
 «> 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 * 
 
 >A^ 
 ^s^ 
 
 
 5-i ^^ 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 •2, 
 
 CT2 
 
 ^4! 
 
 
 
 :<3 c 
 <3? 
 
 
 
 
 g£ 
 
 «> o J^- 
 
 «* 
 
 
 
 
 nO sO t 
 
 o ->o 
 
 s» 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^-^ t 
 
 
 V-^ 
 
 B 
 
 
 CO 
 
 *e*e 
 
 *S" 
 
 ^ 
 
 >& 
 
 <£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 en. 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 «,£> 
 
 o o 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 *£> W 
 
 e^^° 
 
 SO 
 
 sO 
 
 
 
 
 ^e^e 
 
 >e 
 
 s 
 
 »e 
 
 
 
 **■* *•-* 
 
 *** 
 
 
 «♦-► 
 
 <M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 09 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •0 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ©Ctt.g 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 »tt 
 
 >» 
 
 
 
 •S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 *£ : 
 
 *3 
 
 
 ; 
 
 ; 
 
 43 
 
 
 ^O 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Vt-I 
 
 
 SJ 
 
 S5 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 jo 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 T3 
 
 "S* 
 
 
 
 
 ■f-> 
 
 fl 
 
 o- 
 
 
 
 
 © *43 
 
 C3 
 
 s 
 
 B 
 
 O 
 ** 
 
 To 
 © 
 
 8? 
 
 
 ,Js4 co 
 
 o 
 
 -°^ 
 
 ^3 
 
 I 
 
 
 ♦ C3 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 ■4J 
 
 
 O 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 ^" o 
 
 
 
 
 c ? 
 
 w 
 
 sO CO 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 ** 5 
 
 sX> 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 £5 
 
 *cn 
 1 
 
 
 
 s . 
 
 . 
 
 , 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 
 1^ c« 
 
 e* 
 
 ift 
 
 CM 
 
491 
 
 
 
 t i i 11 . $i i i i if i 
 
 * s 
 
 .<^> en 
 
 S8 
 
 dr. 
 
 o 
 
 n 
 S3 
 
 
 
 n e 
 <ncn 
 
 O O 
 
 s g^ g J.^^^>&§ 
 
 cn43 E: 43 ^ *> 13 es o c* 
 
 O O S O s-5 \S *,T* S-> }-► i-> 
 
 es 
 
 
 v» sO 
 
 vO 
 
 tSL 
 
 
 
 dsO^NO^^AsOiOO 
 
 sO 
 
 
 e> <^* 
 
 «s» 
 
 Q> 
 
 
 
 O Ck» 
 
 OSi>«>«>«>>«>«>S>0»> 
 
 e^ 
 
 
 en en 
 
 en 
 
 >o 
 
 
 a 
 
 so *o 
 
 en en en en <n en en en en en 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 U3- 
 
 S3 
 
 $3 
 C 
 to 
 
 
 en <n 
 to to 
 
 £ B 
 
 cn~ cii^€Sl5 
 
 *o to : CJ «-CS '£ '£ '^i J-> w w 
 
 
 
 ;S^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^o 
 
 sO sO 
 
 AA AA^sO^OA A^ 
 
 sO 
 
 
 >e^ 
 
 •^ : 
 
 ^>S 
 
 *&<& 
 
 *e ^ *s ^ >e *& >& "B "B *& 
 
 >e 
 
 
 .*-» ♦«-» 
 
 
 
 
 ■*■* 
 
 .«-* »«-» 
 
 **"* **-* **"* •** **"* •*■* *«"* *** **"* '*■* 
 
 .«-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *• 
 
 
 1 
 
 • en 
 
 tt±* E 
 ex s-> «2L 
 
 
 c5. 
 
 t Ct 
 
 cben 
 o o 
 
 £ S 
 
 <** 
 « ■*-» 
 
 en+5 C^^^j^.Sicse: 
 
 es 
 
 i 
 
 ! 
 
 •3T <3 
 
 >^ O 
 
 o 
 
 
 e»» 
 
 
 ooc*cs",I3%Ii^3j-»J"»*-» 
 
 J-* 
 
 ^ vO 
 
 sD *0 
 
 
 >o 
 
 *o *=> 
 
 ^*^diOA^*A^> 
 
 sO 
 
 -e^ 
 
 *e w 
 
 *e 
 
 
 >e 
 
 ff 
 
 *S" *S* *6" *© *& *3* *& ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 .*- .«-» 
 
 .«- 
 
 —* 
 
 
 **■* 
 
 
 
 «•-» 
 
 .1 
 
 85 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •s>*~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t> 5P 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *s 
 
 
 ».s 
 
 • 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 # 
 
 • . 
 
 • » • . . . . 
 
 • 
 
 s'S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .a § 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l!3. 
 
 • 
 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 » ** i* S 
 io ^» S ^ 
 
 • 
 » 
 
 2 5 1 
 
 w 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 O tci -g-s 
 
 
 •gsf 
 
 JO 
 
 ss 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 8 
 
 •2 
 
 I 
 
 S o 
 
 o 3 
 
 +? 2 
 
 O 
 
 2 5 ,.S ~ 
 
 
 S 
 ^Q 
 
 S3 C M g 
 
 «> ^* <u *> 
 
 o o 
 
 o o 2 
 
 <D fO 
 
 bD O 
 
 J3 
 
 <3? 
 03 
 
 $ 
 
 
 ^ I 
 
 
 c c § 
 
 fig,?' 
 
 r-i ?D «5 
 
 ,^ vo ^ 43 *e c ^ 
 '^*v2 2 w c a 
 
 ^^^^g-| 
 
 ci ^j m h ^ ifi m* »* w w 
 
 *SS 
 
 cj 
 
 ^3 O 
 
 s-s 
 
 SR 
 
499 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 | 
 
 
 1 
 
 ' :-► 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 
 * S3 
 
 $3 
 
 c § 
 
 
 ^2 
 
 £ J 4«. 
 
 n ^" 
 
 s tt 
 
 » v» 
 
 J-» S3 
 
 jo ya 
 
 >=> /=> 
 
 
 «> ^> 
 
 <S)<2) 
 
 <53<?3 
 
 ^ 
 
 t I 
 
 si 
 
 c ^> S3 f3 ^ 
 
 an is 
 
 S3 S3 w 
 
 2- 2- 
 
 s s 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 ft» , 
 
 
 
 
 .6: 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 2 
 
 
 -• • • 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 to 
 
 
 *<3 
 
 *S v> *P U *S3 
 
 S3 S3 
 
 S c ** 
 
 s- s-» 
 
 
 s* 
 
 JO 
 
 yOiO^yO^ 
 
 «> <i> 
 
 s e,~ 
 
 O O 
 
 <^» 
 
 03 
 
 4r 
 
 *B*& W *S'^ 
 
 ^e^e 
 
 *e*e -e 
 
 >e^ 
 
 *r 
 
 
 
 
 
 *^ •*■■* *^ 
 
 .«-> ._► 
 
 
 © 
 
 '•3 
 
 
 53 W g >_> 3 
 
 S S 
 
 alii P~ 
 
 S3 e £S ^ 
 
 S3 r» *i j-> 
 
 
 ** 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 ^> 
 
 />jO^/>iO 
 
 o ^* 
 
 ^ «> c S 
 
 
 o 
 
 . 
 
 g- 
 
 SS^S.I? 
 
 .*§.*§* 
 
 S^^S 
 
 1§S' 
 
 S" 
 
 £ 
 
 St 
 
 SS * c ^ 
 
 *£±-i*3- 
 a. a- 
 S S 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 ?|*QQ 
 
 Q 
 
 O Oh 
 
 co'Q 
 
 ;a 
 
 
 <D O 
 
 
 > ^ 
 
 CD 
 
 Q M 
 
 p-5 C3 
 
 
 CD 
 
 CD O 
 
 •© = ,? 
 
 v ^^ «> S3 
 
 O o 
 
 73 
 o 
 
 «-. 
 bfl 
 o 
 
 CD 
 CD g 
 
 § o 
 
 O ^ 
 
 o p 
 
 H3 
 
 S3 
 
 S. ^ S3 
 
 C £3 
 
 it9 
 
 S3 -o ^ 
 
 «> ^ S3 
 
 ^3 .2 *S ^ 
 
 P-S3 
 
 Tt< <N «W 
 
 m 
 
 «o «o 
 
493 
 
 2 » S 
 * •• .. •• 
 
 *« ... g w, b 
 
 .2 « 
 
 I I J_=> I *§ ko bb ho I 3 <S*§ 
 
 y__ ijL g S m >*- 
 
 S_L 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 •3 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 C 
 
 
 g 
 
 a. 
 
 
 <i> 
 
 
 £ 
 
 I ge g ^ggslggg g g § I 5 fl 
 
 W ^> <_. <_._._._.•_.-_»_.<_»'<!_> o t> -S3 >SOT 
 
 <?3 <_0 <S5 en CJ) <35 C_0 Cfi <~0 <33 CO <3) <_Cl O tjO 
 
 X 
 
 sT _> Crs. i3 ^ J_ ^ 5 ro -o i0 ro . V? *S to 
 
 .^ .,_.,. ^ ^^.^.^^.^^^^^ >^ ... __: s^-a.^ ^ 
 
 — — ■ __ — o c<«> £ -2 
 
 £+ 3-Q OB g.S i3 
 
 S *1 . P «es § v. fl 
 
 ■g- N e Sfif !£££«££. £ a j£ s !S.s 
 
 p £-g..j_ * 
 
 ll-5§i8 
 
 
 .1 & if 
 
 " 53 ., * m « 
 
 ^ os .2 _T^ « 
 -° « E__ G ^ 
 
 ^^ •£ d"§ 
 
 3 © m C) 3 3 ^rt".2i Si S3 » 
 . . t v— * _ -o _>.S r ♦— 
 
 
 s 
 
 Q O r— i H 
 
 <5» Uh l> Tj3 rf O CO <fi «5 O W h h CO 50 
 
494 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 CT* •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 .25 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •• 
 
 & 5s-2 
 
 
 e* 
 
 s— • 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 i . 53 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ip," 
 
 
 sH> 
 
 ^> bo, 
 
 t^ 
 Zt 
 
 1 
 
 I | 
 
 w 
 
 bog 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 | 
 
 ^° 
 
 t3 
 
 
 a» 
 
 *23s © 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 0) 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 C* 
 
 
 co 
 
 CO J-l 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 In 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 o 
 
 <i> o 
 
 
 
 il 
 
 <?CO 
 
 S c 
 
 co,E 
 
 
 
 S5 
 
 <3 *C- 
 
 
 t5 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 tf> 
 
 co^o 
 
 
 jo 
 
 CO 
 
 s s 
 
 3-> ^±- 
 
 
 en en 
 
 
 
 ^> 
 
 o ~> 
 
 
 <s> 
 
 o o 
 
 ^> 
 
 
 ~a c> 
 
 
 e-» 
 
 «> Ck> 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 coco 
 
 
 CO 
 
 coco 
 
 CO 
 
 coco 
 
 COCO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 coco 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 t* 
 
 
 
 <J CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 
 «# 
 
 K3 to 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 a 
 
 co 
 
 coco 
 
 
 CO 
 
 *^CO 
 
 *co 
 
 CO CO 
 
 ^CO 
 
 
 
 ^COCO 
 
 ts 
 
 
 w 
 
 «" 
 
 *e^ 
 
 
 •e 
 
 *S"£ 
 
 .^ 
 
 !§S 
 
 ^y> 
 
 
 >e 
 
 ^>e^ 
 
 
 
 ** i * 
 
 .»- .♦- 
 
 
 *^ 
 
 «*-* %> 
 
 
 
 .«-» <-► 
 
 
 " ,- 
 
 •<-► »♦-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^r> ♦ 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 <*£ 
 
 
 
 con 
 c ^2 
 
 *5 
 
 
 
 
 S5 
 cs 
 
 g 
 
 c5.^ 
 
 
 
 
 c> 
 
 <3 «i* 
 
 
 «> 
 
 
 *« 
 
 o t-» 
 
 
 
 
 o c£ 
 
 
 
 ►3 
 
 co 
 
 COCO 
 
 
 CD 
 
 *^«i 
 
 co 
 
 CO CO 
 
 ^CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 co en 
 
 
 
 
 S" 
 
 *e« 
 
 
 § 
 
 >e^» 
 
 s 
 
 !§.1? 
 
 ^6*w 
 
 
 ^e 
 
 ^e»@ 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 •** **^ 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 ...» o 
 
 
 
 »r-> trf- 
 
 
 »•>* 
 
 .*- ♦** 
 
 Vm 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \1 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 £| 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 *s 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 *> 2* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 uxx. 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 '&% 
 
 
 
 
 
 »* 
 
 «» 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 WCO 
 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 CO . 
 
 n3 
 
 
 # 
 
 -w V» 
 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 u • 
 
 
 
 -«-* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «* 
 
 
 
 
 «» 
 
 «9l 
 
 
 
 ^4* 
 
 
 
 
 
 OX 
 
 
 
 
 a? 
 
 >_, GO 
 
 S3 
 
 
 IS 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 *-> ti 
 
 ^8 s 
 
 
 
 
 *CO 
 
 CO 
 
 s 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 .1" 
 
 
 3fc 
 
 'CO** 
 
 so O 
 
 
 : 
 
 • • 
 
 
 • v- ^ Si 
 
 
 • 
 
 JO 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 o 
 
 
 
 
 *CO 
 
 bog 
 
 ^CO 
 
 
 
 bo 
 
 *3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 y=» >-. 
 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 H 
 
 yO <^ 
 
 
 
 r-t 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 ■4-» 
 
 ■a 
 
 C3 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 *2- 
 © 
 
 1 
 
 '3 
 
 
 •a a 
 
 •* o 
 © o 
 
 bo .£ o 
 
 O bJD^ 
 ~ o . 
 
 £ 2 « ts 
 
 sO T3 ■>£> '.O 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 -J S g © 
 
 ^ O O ** 
 
 <r> c cp © n p t»^l'S" 
 
 5 / ^ 
 S l! « jt 
 
 1 
 
 © 
 
 £ 8 
 
 s« 
 
 ex.. is 
 
 
 
 1 ^* 
 
 P-t 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 o ** ^> 
 
 i«? 
 
 
 o o 
 
 E3. 
 
 a* 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 © 
 
 S,es 
 
 ©® 
 
 Pi5 
 
 © 
 
 gg 
 
 
 
 
 i C* 
 
 H O 
 
 
 10 
 
 T^ C*5 
 
 <yj 
 
 F-H «D 
 
 TH rH 
 
 
 <y» 
 
 CO if) 
 
495 
 
 i I | I I I i i «■ I III 
 
 * 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 • 
 
 o* 53 
 
 - 5 ^s 
 
 
 sO 
 <3 
 
 ^* en 
 
 £2 S3 
 CS CS 
 
 c e « 
 
 <3 O o* 
 
 S3 
 \j3^_ 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 S3 
 
 cs 
 
 . «» S3 
 
 g §cn 
 
 so S3 « 
 o o S3 
 
 cn cn 
 
 cr.cn 
 
 se- 
 
 iC>>0 
 
 ^j-^- ■fcf-^ v^^ 
 
 s£J* 
 
 V4-> 
 
 W-* 
 
 SU_> SU-* U4-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^cn 
 
 en en 
 
 en 
 
 en en 
 
 cn en en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en en en 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q> 
 
 ^5 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 sO 
 
 vl> 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 • s 55 
 
 <**-/ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 «> 53 
 is s 
 
 
 o» 
 Jet 
 
 ♦ • 
 £3 en 
 
 o S3 
 
 o* ^^ o> 
 
 O* lO 0> 
 
 ict 
 
 ** 
 
 fe 
 
 S3 
 
 $* 5- cn 
 
 sO S3 r- 
 :o <>o .ti 
 
 
 
 
 
 *>^ 
 
 
 
 
 en en 
 
 en en 
 
 iO 
 
 *£>■>£*» 
 
 sS 1 ^^ 
 
 «-> 
 
 u-t 
 
 ^«-52 
 
 >e*& 
 
 *e*e- 
 
 >e 
 
 *S*S 
 
 ^^S^ 
 
 >S^ 
 
 & 
 
 >e 
 
 *6**#A» 
 
 1 
 
 *' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 *S 
 
 If 
 
 
 ct 
 
 ±2 en 
 
 2 .5 
 
 
 *• 
 
 sO • irn. 
 
 
 "a 
 
 ** 
 
 fe 
 
 S3 
 et 
 
 sSsS § 
 
 1 
 
 chen 
 
 encn 
 
 *£> 
 
 vG-sO 
 
 
 sC" s c > *53' 
 
 
 v£> 
 
 «c 
 
 «4^ 
 
 *•■* "** SJ 
 
 ! 
 
 €€ 
 
 ^S-e 
 
 # 
 
 ss 
 
 
 s *€s *§■*§* 
 
 
 ^e- 
 
 ^e 
 
 S 
 
 ^*S"<x» 
 
 i **■* 
 
 "** *** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T* 
 
 .<-* 
 
 
 .«-» .«-» Oi 
 
 .s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 • • 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 a 
 
 • • • 
 
 # 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 es 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 kC- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *2 
 
 sO 
 1* 
 
 Sri 
 
 *3 S3 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 g. 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 en 
 
 o* 
 
 
 
 
 
 vS- 
 
 
 
 
 t<3 
 
 
 S3 
 
 u s 
 
 
 
 
 S=* 
 
 
 
 
 *N*^ 
 
 • • 
 
 en 
 
 SO 
 
 cs 
 
 ^cr en 
 
 v^ 53 
 
 ^— sO 
 
 
 : : : 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 I : ; 
 
 .§1 
 
 3 
 
 1.8 
 
 ■si 
 
 II 
 
 
 S3 
 
 *S* 
 
 55 S3 
 
 
 
 
 53 
 
 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 *>M 
 
 
 
 
 iO 
 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 .2 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 I 
 © 
 
 CO 
 
 • 
 
 CO 
 
 1-H 
 
 n3 
 
 53 
 
 =3 s 
 
 CO >r-4 
 
 ^d 
 
 ;3 o 
 
 o v 
 +* S3 
 
 eg 
 
 ^> ^ 
 
 *<» .*z 
 
 « o 
 
 r, CO 
 
 d3 53 C 
 
 o-^ © * rt 
 
 ^n5"§ S?^S3 
 
 ^ G C CO <J « w 
 5 *Q^g «^^>^ 
 
 -a 
 © 
 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 ^2 
 
 •i 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 C3 
 
 ' o 
 ■»-» 
 
 53 
 
 bD © 
 
 © "^ 
 
 .a i 
 
 ^ S- „53 
 
 • o 
 
 > § bD 
 © U .3 
 
 r— l w M 
 
 . 53 ^ 
 
 S3 SS « 
 
 •* S ?3 o 
 
 ^^ 5 cn 
 
 *» to 
 
 t^ iO 
 
 o^ 
 
 Tj5 ^ 
 
 
 rt< CO ^ 
 
 
 o> 
 
 ^O 
 
 «5 
 
 co CO CO 
 
 
496 
 
 
 l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 2 *w *■ 
 
 .5 ° « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 2|U 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 ! 
 
 l^f 1 1 J 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 1 
 
 l 
 
 
 ©» 
 
 
 \u-» 
 
 
 
 
 ^** "** w 
 
 
 }-> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 $5 
 
 S s 
 
 
 
 ggiss= 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 04 
 
 
 *c "5* 
 
 o o 
 
 
 
 ^S ^ ^S ;S -^ ^j 
 
 «5 
 
 S-5 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 o «> ^5> t> <^> o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 O"} CO CO CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CT3 <35 <X) CJ2 CJ5 C?5 <Ti 
 
 <J) 
 
 <^i 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 ♦ *■* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 !§ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 2* 
 »2i_ £*- 
 
 •'is 
 
 Si c 
 
 
 
 t* «S *J %! ?* • 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 S £ £ £ g §■ 
 
 ^2 
 
 en 
 
 bJD 
 
 eg 
 
 £^•3 
 
 3 C 
 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 .1fS.1f.1l 
 
 
 ."§■ 
 
 !§" S 5 S S S .*? 
 
 s 
 
 S S 
 
 © 
 
 Cm 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •e 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "** 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 e c a S 
 
 'A4~> \U «-* 4W 
 
 
 
 s .Si .2 .ts .S5 ^ § 
 
 <55 
 
 O 
 
 8 
 
 H c 
 
 B 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 
 . 
 
 S5 
 
 
 s 
 
 Q* 
 
 £ 
 
 • • *5 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 . 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 • • 
 
 * vw 
 
 
 3-> 
 
 ' • fe" 
 
 • 
 
 wS 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 J^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 »* 
 
 
 
 
 — ** 
 
 
 
 «> 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 tS M 3 
 
 ©j! bfi 
 © <N .S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 xsx 3 «2i- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U ^03 
 
 ^ s • 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 ^2^2 -S* 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 •3 
 
 
 • : 
 
 I $2 
 
 ss 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^=3 *^T 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 • 
 
 : 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 <3 
 
 
 
 ^2^2 -^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 05 
 
 3 3 » 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 PP J» 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «s 
 
 
 r- 
 
 •- «„ 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 /^N 
 
 
 CM 
 
 © 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 0) 
 
 jH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pX3 
 
 O 
 
 
 • fc 
 
 ■t5 T3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 v— ' 
 
 
 /~\ O 
 
 
 | 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 S3 
 
 
 *Z5 
 
 
 .5 
 
 t5 
 
 
 © 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 
 o 
 
 O cd 
 
 4-3 r-Q 
 
 c o 
 
 o 4-s 
 
 <— > 
 EQ 
 to 
 83 
 
 o 
 
 (D 
 O 
 
 c o S o o M 
 
 
 
 bo 
 
 o 
 
 •** 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 c e «» £2 
 &><*<*> g 
 
 XIX 
 
 CD 
 GO 
 
 
 C C C u o v .- 5 
 
 en 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 
 
 »n vfj 
 
 «fc$ 
 
 
 «5 tO 
 
 r^ r£ rj5 o »rs i-I 
 
 r-H 
 
 O 
 
 r^ 
 
 fcO 
 
497 
 
 .11 II 
 
 ^w ir* ■ j ~^ ,f7- .^t 5 £* .*»* qo 
 
 *2 
 
 o c s 
 
 ss.^s « cc «-«.». o- be 1 
 
 ■»-» *-£». cd. <3 
 so t<3 .-to 
 
 ox 
 «0 
 
 
 tfczrto 
 
 *j3 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 g 
 
 2 S S S 
 
 2 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 a- o. 
 
 ». 
 
 <y 
 
 s 
 
 *2 
 
 *J* 
 
 
 *e*e*e*s 
 
 >S 
 
 >s*e 
 
 ^e^e- 
 
 *& 
 
 H? 
 
 I 
 
 ^e 
 
 ^a 
 
 
 I 
 
 »•-» .♦- .♦-» .«-► 
 
 .♦-» 
 
 *** 
 
 *** 
 
 .«-* .«- 
 
 .«-► 
 
 .«-► 
 
 
 .«-» 
 
 .»-► 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 wo 
 
 <3 
 
 
 
 '2 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 C3 
 
 HcSS 
 
 2 
 
 c 
 
 « 
 
 »-a- 
 
 a- 
 
 or 
 
 1 
 
 *fc> 
 
 'w 
 
 
 .*§.§!? .§ 
 
 s 
 
 ^*6* 
 
 >e^ 
 
 3 
 
 § 
 
 1 
 
 *e 
 
 ^e 
 
 
 .s 
 
 
 
 •«-» 
 
 *** 
 
 **^**^ 
 
 
 
 
 .«-* 
 
 ST* 
 
 
 -s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •s 
 ^ 
 
 
 S3 
 
 s 
 
 
 ." 
 
 : : 
 
 .* 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 • 'C y 
 
 
 ^-5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J2 
 
 S3 ^j ••— v 
 25* eg- 2 £2; 
 
 n g u a 
 
 > 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 M 
 
 *2 
 
 
 
 
 "2 
 
 or 
 
 
 5« 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 u ^ X s 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 ** 
 J^ 
 
 
 Is 5 
 
 X **it£s 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 P. 
 
 - .• *" 
 
 
 3 
 
 CfcL 
 
 s 
 
 2 
 
 : 
 
 : : 
 
 ; 
 
 "2 
 
 : 
 
 £1 
 
 • 
 
 N 
 BO 
 
 ■5 £S • 
 
 2 2 2 5 
 
 2 
 
 *2 
 
 
 
 
 or 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 c 
 
 « ^ i 
 
 3 33^ 
 
 >g> 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 3 
 
 "2.S o 
 
 <o /=> /=> .— 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 ^O 
 
 
 t ; to disgust with any 
 b must not be confoui 
 3 paint, without the f) 
 to nurse, to be accus 
 
 to milk, 
 to measure, 
 n, to displease, 
 desire, like (see 
 
 ), 
 
 h3 
 
 .2P 
 o 
 
 ^ Wit 
 
 <D 
 
 CD 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 +■» 
 
 CD 
 * CO 
 
 £•$ 
 
 4J M 
 CO CD 
 
 ^ o 3 B#> 
 
 'o 
 
 "8 
 
 cp 
 
 CD 
 W 
 
 "cZ 
 
 CO 
 
 S 
 bo 
 
 9 
 be 
 
 1 
 S 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 CO 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 4-> 
 
 JLfLS. £ 
 
 so •-* t£ fc? 
 
 2 ~ 
 
 i 
 
 c 
 
 S 
 
 oil 
 
 O «J 
 
 4^ CO 
 
 5 co 
 
 OL52-^ 
 kO CO 
 
 id 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 « 
 
 S5 
 
 
 
 £3 
 
 O 
 
 m M 8 
 
498 
 
 .1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sv* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •J2 c * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cJ fig 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 |s« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 |§,-a 
 
 
 ft* 1 * 
 
 
 l l 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 1 II 
 
 1 
 
 r3 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C* 
 
 
 *•> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'S, 
 to '3 
 
 cS\3 
 
 P4 
 
 
 « S= c 
 
 o ft* rj 
 
 ,TT.t2 es 
 *-> ** *-> 
 
 
 « S 
 *> en 
 
 o 33 
 
 
 S3 
 
 ft* 
 S3 
 S3 
 o 
 *-► 
 
 S3 
 
 C S3 
 
 ft* t^ 
 
 CiS= ^S 
 
 ^a .Si 
 
 J£jtl s 
 
 S3 
 ft* 
 
 S3 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft* ft* 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 ft* 
 
 ft* ft* 
 
 ft* ft* * ft* 
 
 
 
 
 en en en 
 
 
 en en 
 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en en 
 
 enen en 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 so 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 d 
 
 ft* 
 
 m <J ft* c 
 fc=t3 S3 
 
 J-» J-» J-> 
 
 
 ft* 5k 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 £3 ,<£ 
 
 S3 V| — 
 
 *cs • .2* 
 
 I s - 
 
 ^ ft» ^ 
 
 till 
 
 ftj 
 
 S3 
 ft* 
 
 o 
 
 
 03 
 
 ^s*s^ 
 
 
 ^e^e 
 
 
 !§ 
 
 c ^ 
 
 '.'§ 
 
 €€€€ 
 
 5* 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 *«"* **"* **" 
 
 
 .«-* .«_» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 3 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 ^id 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 o 
 •3 
 
 d 
 
 #5 § 
 
 »-» *-► S» 
 
 
 J-> V* 
 
 
 S3 
 CS 
 
 *-» 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 MM 
 
 ig 
 
 
 
 
 >e>e^ 
 
 
 *e*s 
 
 
 >e 
 
 ^e 
 
 '« 
 
 ssss 
 
 ^s 
 
 
 
 
 **~* "■* **■* 
 
 
 .«-* .«-► 
 
 
 v 
 
 ■** 
 
 **^ 
 
 
 **~ 
 
 «4-l 
 O 
 
 (A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 .... 
 
 ( 
 
 <r) 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 • • 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 .... 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •** d r2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d J3 s? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 © be 
 on rd cs 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *L 
 
 
 
 g<?*'gn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 Pi © © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 >Jj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i-> 
 
 
 
 tf ** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 3 
 
 
 ; ; ; 
 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 S# 
 
 • • • ■ 
 
 ^ 
 
 .3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?C* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 go 
 
 
 © 05 
 
 J* 
 
 1 tab 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 A 4 
 
 * s 
 
 O %H 
 
 PS .2 
 
 o 
 
 ■♦^ 
 
 M 
 
 © d 
 
 .iff 8- 
 
 Pi 
 
 I 
 
 
 03.H fi 
 
 
 
 „ 
 
 p? 
 
 33 
 
 r e3 , -J 
 
 
 2 c o 
 
 » O (» o 
 
 CO iS 
 
 o 
 •** 
 
 
 
 *" M P* ~ 
 
 o o ^-22' 
 
 
 
 4T o 
 
 o23 
 
 % 
 
 £3 
 
 
 ^ 5 o 
 e c ^ 
 
 ft* r! »» 
 
 %* s ft* 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 C 
 
 S3 c 
 ft* ec 
 
 
 4-> 
 
 S3 
 
 o c S 
 « « S 
 
 =- g e i 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 »o to 8$ 
 
 —4 
 
 +3 
 <D 00 
 
 
 
 S©8 
 
 
499 
 
 
 <£ 
 
 
 
 <3 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 ll|l 
 
 1 1 1 «s>i£ 
 
 f 
 
 en cnen cncnen en en en en en en en en 
 
 1<3 ^_. to 10 t _. ;«$ ._» S» _■ -^J ;_ SO =C3 jj £j 
 
 Se_i;§l ££S^SSjSj§! ^ S S 
 ^■^^g^g i?1?eeeee^ >e *g ^ 
 
 >o . • • . **3 vsn. 
 
 g, 
 
 *^ & 
 
 •>§ it t§i^ ^ 
 
 5 ^ 3 
 
 ..•#•■■ .g^| 
 
 §T - - S sail 
 
 - o * 
 
 . +3 o oi 
 
 
 ^ £§Q 
 
 53 
 
 ITT" bee - 2 "S^.fi 
 
 y=» x> »-. >=> . •• S _f S3 
 
 , *a s « « 5 
 
 'm § 5 | ^5 Y^ | -2 -S S | 
 
 2 w ^ g 1 § 'S ^ & 8 .s ^ rt 
 
 ^M ^..^O^nS +T " © O "1 So el JJ J" 
 
 Sl §£§-:3S.5*f_ o.-2 S .s-sS*-S 
 
 "3 o°oo-ooo ^ - » CS 2S 
 
 _~g||l||- |>f t-cf .s 1 'I a . f ; }•£!*! 
 
 ei ^o' o «jd co "^ i> o o «r5 cd 
 
500 
 
 £ o « 
 
 
 I ' 1 1 I I 
 
 I I 
 
 
 • e C c 
 
 '282 
 ^ *r> *g-Jg-*g>g >g>g-»g,g 
 
 <£} c£> cr; <3^ a - ) en «cna3«) 
 
 •■» o £* .S -- 
 
 a a 
 
 
 a a 
 
 >B 
 
 .S ^ 1? ..§ S r ^ -^ l ^ 
 
 "c v *n *2 *w a a a 
 
 •g* -g >§ >§- ■B'-rR B~ 
 
 >R*R>R*R ^R^R^R^R 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 *0 
 
 
 a a 
 
 x a _ 
 
 *g*gHg~*g *QB *B^ 
 
 sgsg^vgsg vgsg>g-^g 
 
 a a 
 
 <^8 • 
 
 si 2 ^i 
 
 ^T3 sg-,2_ » 
 
 
 C 53 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 £ CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 si 
 
 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 >rG 
 
 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 u^US v* 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 ...» 
 
 
 
 ^ S3 •♦* 
 
 
 ' 
 
 • 
 
 . . . . 
 
 
 • •• • a 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 Sc\S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *s* 
 
 
 
 o ••* »^— 
 
 •5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 un^> ^ 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 JBSS 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 * 5 
 
 . •* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 +* 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 £*tT 
 
 t5 
 
 
 
 
 
 hD ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ -9 £ 
 
 O CQ ^ 
 
 
 «5 ©'lo!? 
 
 T3 -p {£ 
 "C OT ® m • 
 
 
 .3 & 
 
 02 l> 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^oOo2 
 
 
 CQ ^ /-v ^ 
 © O -*> 
 
 ** \> * -^ 
 £> C g C S 
 -3 & .^« © 
 
 ** o 
 
 o M 
 
 4J O 
 
 CO © 
 
 
 so 
 
 
 £> ^§ >o S 
 C i- j-» *-► 
 
 
 
 
 +* o 
 
 
 <3 
 
 *c 
 
 S 
 
 • " : G y o 3 
 
 28888 
 
 a a « 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 *B 
 
 *S" 
 
 ^S^B^B^B 
 
 a> 
 
 «^€€§ 
 
 ^-s-'S 
 
 ^e 
 
 ■i> «* 
 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 ®®®® 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 ©49©^)^ 
 
 ©^ g 
 
 ©^ 
 
 ©® 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 »f)«) iftkO 
 
 
 0«Dtf50 
 
 5^ CO 
 
 CO CO 
 
 ^H »• 
 
50J 
 
 I I I I I I III I f fr| I cs i -4 
 
 • C ~I 53 jr 2*. • r- 
 
 c ^ ;± § "^J? S 3 c S 
 
 ?* c C i^L«Rfer C <^ >o 
 
 x£ziBli£^ c2:u2:l2i iH: l^. t£L 
 
 0S0S0S g^oSoS aS oS oS 
 
 
 »g *g*g-,g,g^ >0 I I s g-.g s >-'»g jg,g* vg*^- '^g-^g-vg-^— ' 
 
 I 
 
 2- iS. S n ° . P 
 
 >e 
 
 gj rf 
 
 » w — 
 
 ViQ 
 
 d d k 2 © 
 
 f«M 
 
 *=- : ! g c ~ » « 
 
 ! O^. 
 
 T3 
 
 
 63 
 
 I 5 . J itff & "E.J „ 1 Jl si 
 
 1 «H ^ >€l 3** 2 ||| Iff if 
 
 10 o 5 o ° o '« o p *"• \. "\ * 2 o o c » 3 B S 
 
 M -F^SS ,- o 03 ~ e £ u^^'^- g 5 S = g g^S-4i 
 
503 
 
 
 »<*h J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■*-* 
 
 •43 c « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « fig 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '£- 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 £3. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 IS 
 
 IB 3 
 
 03 O 
 Ph'£ 
 
 
 
 3 S 
 8>§ 
 
 
 
 «^ «- ^> 
 
 J 
 
 E « § 
 
 Q o o .^i 
 
 *C> J_> j-> J-> 
 
 *•* 
 
 oa 
 
 
 
 .«£ o 
 
 
 o 
 
 Sow 
 
 j-> 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 d=L 
 
 
 £3ti=L 
 
 
 d=i 
 
 d=L£3d=i 
 
 en 
 
 J-> J-» 
 
 
 
 
 o t> 
 
 
 c-» 
 
 
 
 o >&» c*> ej 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 en en 
 
 
 Cn 
 
 <J)CQcn 
 
 en 
 
 cncn<J2<3) 
 
 cn cr. 
 
 
 f 
 
 5k> 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 S3 
 
 ..C3 
 £3- 
 
 •"■> 
 
 •-C3 
 
 .£=- 
 
 
 
 $5 
 
 »* «5 ~1 ** 
 
 .*3 C^ltl^' 
 
 . *" 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 rfe! 
 
 to 
 
 -<3 .2 *S 
 
 
 -« £| :<3 .25 
 
 t<3 to 
 
 3 
 
 w 
 
 *B 
 
 «. ' 
 
 *s *& 
 
 
 *S* 
 
 -B^s^e 
 
 *& 
 
 iC">g^>5 
 
 >o^ 
 
 H 
 
 
 **"* 
 
 
 *^* *'~ > 
 
 
 .,-. 
 
 "~* *** **"■ 
 
 •** 
 
 ._, ._ .— . ._» 
 
 *^ •«"* 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U3. £3-£3_ 
 
 cfcLctiifcl c=t 
 
 sO* J-> W J_» 
 
 *5lt= 
 
 *B*S"*S*S~ *S^ 
 
 C=L 
 
 • e=i 
 
 sO 
 
 • *o 
 
 «> 
 
 J-» 
 
 
 
 d=t 
 
 £3- 
 
 ss 
 
 S3 
 
 en. 
 
 to 
 
 £3. 
 
 S3 
 
 h-* •*-* 
 S3 <i> S 
 
 S3 tc; .TT 
 JO ^» t> 
 
 vC- S3 S3 
 
 .2i a> jo 
 
 
 S3 
 
 P4 
 
 
 ■^3 
 
 ^JT 
 
 S 
 
 KJ 
 
 <D ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 O © 
 
 CO 
 
 rt n3 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 
 
 +* +■ 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 S2 c 
 
 
 
 S- 
 
 .2^fj 
 
 XI w ^ 
 
 o o 
 
 S3 
 Ph 
 
 f3 C S3 S3 
 
 ci> .j_. (/} .♦. 
 
 ® ©® © 
 
 s.»« 
 
 © ^ 
 p s-> 
 
 S3 © r^ 
 
 
 hi) 
 
 © 
 
 CD ~ 
 ° X 
 
 «-» ^-> J^ 
 
 G w o 
 
 ^ W W >j 
 
 S3 
 
 V» S3 
 ^> JO 
 
 .ti o 
 
 S3 © 
 
 ^ #C a* 
 
 *1 P^'g < 
 Ph O CD 
 
 s^ 
 
 trs 
 O w 
 
 k c © 
 
 
 1-" G<> ift ^-t c^o ?JD 
 
503 
 
 5 
 
 J& 
 
 I I 
 
 
 £S c c ** 
 
 p W J-r J-> 
 » l> » l> 
 
 
 a a 
 
 Is 
 
 
 <55 
 
 
 CO. 
 
 * 
 
 •S ^2 =o 
 
 o ^> ~> 
 » » » 
 
 to *t> 
 
 ^s^^s* >s* *s- 
 
 ^ 
 
 *> % s 
 
 
 1? *§ ^ 
 
 
 r>e*S" *e ^ 
 
 *2 ** 
 
 t> » 
 
 w ** 
 
 en 
 
 vX> ca. 
 
 O ^ 
 
 
 
 
 Q* 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 S H 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 55 *vo 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 jO 
 
 J-i 
 
 
 
 /=» s 
 
 JO 
 
 
 >=» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 1 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 ■♦-3 
 
 ^ s 
 
 
 CD ^a 
 
 CD 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 <]~ 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 US 
 
 
 
 „o 
 
 o *» 
 
 
 T3 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 rn 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 "S 
 © 
 
 CD 
 O 
 
 CS5 
 
 
 c3 
 CD 
 O 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 ♦ o 
 
 13 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 ^* r. 
 
 bJO CD 
 CD 
 03 
 
 O 
 
 s oT 
 
 S3 
 ^> ^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 .Q-'V g» 
 
 ° *s § 
 
 -*- CD v^/ 
 
 ^* © £» w 
 
 P- 
 CD O 
 
 be o 
 © 
 
 cT ^* 
 
 
 ® 1 *! 
 ^^ © g 
 
 ee i oT © o 
 
 © M CO ^Q ^ 
 
 © o o -S ^ 
 
 © ^3 +J O v 
 
 ** c g § ^ «* 
 C ^^ ^> 0=- cd .— » 
 
 be 
 
 n 
 
 © 
 
 t- 
 
 C3 
 Ph 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 
 .a. 
 
 J- 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 CD 
 
 sO ^ ^ t> 
 , s> <i> f^> ^> , 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 » 
 
 O 
 § 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 
 c<* 
 
 CO 
 
 vn 
 
 
 C^ ?£> 
 
 ^ iO 
 
 
 S? rjJ «5 CO 
 
 
 qo 
 
 
 1ft 
 
 
504 
 
 © 
 
 es a 3 
 
 !? o bn 
 
 
 s 
 
 [ I 
 
 w '3 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 « c 2 g 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 <3 O ,~ .— CJ 
 
 O o 
 
 o o 3 o 
 
 P-i 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 2BSBS 
 
 a a 
 
 a a a a 
 
 
 
 
 «-» 
 
 «s> o o o «> 
 
 o £ 
 
 «> «> <^> «> 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 <no<5iocn 
 
 <n en 
 
 en cd en en 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sO 
 
 *+i- 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 #* . ,P 
 
 tc: ♦ . 
 
 i<3 • • . 
 
 
 
 o 
 5 
 
 
 en 
 to 
 
 trJ ;o -^ .— ^> 
 
 2 ^« 
 
 a 2 a a 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 g 
 
 a a a a a 
 
 '§2 
 
 o 
 
 
 00 
 
 ^ 
 
 *e 
 
 >g »g- vg- ^ sg 1 
 
 «^-e 
 
 €^€€e 
 
 1 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 rs 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 spu^i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Cr 
 
 3 o .^ .£S c: 
 
 ct S . 
 
 e$ o a o 
 
 
 
 T3 
 S3 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 a a a a a 
 
 a a-^ 2 a a a 
 
 
 
 
 !§ 
 
 sg^ 
 
 vgsg'igvgsg 
 
 1? *§** 
 
 ^ ^'S'^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 £ w .^ 
 
 a •* 
 
 id 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 S3 
 
 a 
 
 S5 
 
 s« 
 
 ^3 - ^ 
 
 ^ CD > © 
 
 2 it w 
 
 .2ofl 
 
 2J2 
 
 CO v £ c ** 
 
 •>& rt Si, •^ £ 
 
 *t3 CD en >_ u^-^o 
 
 C M 'C C C o 
 
 rC <© r>: ^o 
 
 o c o 
 
 -^2 o2 
 
 
 CO V* S-> CD J-» 
 
 — S ! — P— 
 
 CD 03 nrj 
 
 ^ ° ? 
 
 rs 
 
 rs> 
 
 ©5 
 
 .SJ.S.JS'bjD© 
 
 & 
 
 CM OW«D 
 
505 
 
 § ! I 
 
 2 
 
 en. 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 4? 
 
 ca. 
 
 2 
 
 >e 
 
 MO "O 
 
 
 
 a a 
 
 .1 
 
 s? 
 
 *> 
 
 
 
 
 se 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 =5 
 
 
 : : : 
 
 
 © rt 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 |S 
 
 ^B- 
 
 *T 
 
 
 
 
 d.S 
 
 
 .«-» 
 
 
 
 
 09 * 
 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 "5 
 
 
 © CO © 
 
 
 |1 
 
 a; 
 
 
 
 •» Ph £3 
 
 
 a ° 
 
 o 
 
 CS 
 
 ho 
 
 .3 
 
 03 
 
 class), 
 
 to accuse 
 onvict, im 
 a legal se 
 to draw, 
 , to force, 
 
 
 I! 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 +a 
 
 v © « ^5 
 
 
 ** « 
 ** 5 
 
 
 CO .*. 
 
 i— 1 
 
 © 
 CD 
 00 
 
 ** ."S 52 •— £• 
 
 09 
 
 
 JD 
 
 ^r 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 © 
 
 
 a3 e3 
 
 «5 
 
 CD 
 
 © 
 
 S 
 
 CO 
 
 fn 
 
 w 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 t£ 
 
 
 
 Fh 
 
 © 
 
 t= 
 
 © 
 
 
 :«j 
 
 X5 
 
 1 
 
 *4_ 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 m 
 
 PU 
 
 © 
 
 a 
 
 © 
 
 j2 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 *^3 
 
 .3 
 
 ^d 
 
 © 
 
 CO 
 
 t*-t 
 
 5 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 ed 
 
 
 CO* 
 
 « 
 
 © 
 
 ■a 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 © 
 
 
 > 
 
 Fh 
 
 s> 
 
 
 &**0 
 
 "g 
 o 
 
 PL 
 
 o 
 
 
 B 
 o 
 © 
 
 5-* 
 
 a 
 
 
 T3 
 ti 
 
 4-1 
 
 & 
 
 o3 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 ■*-» 
 
 £ 
 
 , 
 
 ^ 
 
 -fc 
 
 H 
 
 $3 
 
 tS 
 
 H 
 
 6> 
 
 # > 
 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 DO 
 
 ^ 
 
 -§ 
 
 
 -§ 
 
 CD 
 
 '-<-^ 
 
 g 
 
 >+^ 
 
 *l 
 
 w- 
 
 *j 
 
 
 ^~» 
 
 o3 
 
 'C 
 
 !=$ 
 
 ,4 
 
 a. 
 
 © 
 
 *^ 
 
 ^H 
 
 © 
 
 fl 
 
 'o 
 
 bD 
 
 CD ^ 
 
 © 
 
 £ 
 
 *a 
 
 O 
 
 Fh 
 
 
 bD © 
 
 e 
 
 ^ ^3 
 
 Cl> 
 
 <2 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ct 
 
 O 
 
 ■*-J 
 
 
 PS ^ 
 
 .»» 
 
 -*-> 
 
 tJD 
 
 ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 5 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 © 
 
 
 h5 
 
 4* 
 
 © 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 c 
 
 W 
 
 £ 
 
 .*> 
 
 PI 
 
 © 
 
 e5 
 
 1 
 
 tf 
 
 "© 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 22 
 
506 
 
 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 The subject of the verb is always in the nominative ; the di 
 rect or immediate object is put in the accusative. Ex. : Sari 
 fcfyretbt etnen 33rtef, Charles writes a letter. Sari is the sub- 
 ject or nominative, etneit 25rtef is the immediate object or accu 
 sative. 
 
 I. VERBS WHICH ARE FOLLOWED BY THE NOMINA HVE. 
 
 The following verbs take after them only the nominative ii 
 they have an attribute, it is in like manner put in the nomi. 
 native : — 
 
 <S c t n, to be. <Sein £3r.ubet war etn gvcpct pelt, his brother waa 
 a great hero. 
 
 SB c 1 1 e n, to become. (St reutbc etn retcfyet 9Eann, he became a 
 ••ich man. 
 
 23 1 e t 6 c n, to remain. (Sr. Ukb ftet$ mein gctteuer gtounk/ he al 
 ways remained my faithful friend. 
 
 £etfjen, to call (be called). SSJldn aiteftcx SStuber f>ctpt (Sad, 
 my eldest brother is called Charles. 
 
 © d) e t n c tt, to appear. £)er Sag fd^ten mtt cine (Stunbe, bag Sal)* 
 cin Sag, the day appeared to me an hour, the year a day. 
 
 With some passive verbs, such as gencmrtt werben, to be 
 called, named. Ex. : @r f emit etn braver 3Jf ann genannt uwben, 
 he can (may) be called a good man; gefcfyolten werbert, to be 
 chided. 
 
 II. VERBS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 
 
 a) The following verbs, besides the direct object in the accu 
 sative, have an indirect object in the genitive : — 
 
 2C n M a g c tt, to accuse. 9}2an Hagte tfjtt be$ *DtcfcjlaF)t$ an, they 
 accused him of theft. 
 
 23etcr)ren, to instruct. (St Ijat mtcf) etnc£ SScffern Meljtt, he has 
 instructed me in something better (put me right). 
 
 25 e t a u & c n, to deprive, rob. 9J?an fjat tf)tt fetnc^ SSetm&'genS 6c? 
 taufct, they have deprived (robbed) him of his fortune. 
 
 SBefcfyutbtgcn, to charge. 93]an fyat tr)n be$ £odj»etratfj$ 6c> 
 fcf)U(btgt, they have charged him with high treason. 
 
 <S n t I c b i g e n, to exempt, dispense. 9J?an fjat tr)n fctttcS 2(mtc$ 
 entfegt, they have dismissed him from his office. 
 
 Ueberftifjrctt, uOctwctfcn, to convict. %flcin bat ifytt cb 
 nc$ 23etbred)en6 uOetfiif)tt (tiOetnncfen), they have convicted him of a 
 crime. 
 
 UeOetbeben*, to exempt. Semanbem cuter ©acl)C aOctfje&en, to 
 •tempt a person from any thing (or trouble). 
 
507 
 
 tlebet$eugen, to persuade, convince. <£t \)at mid) beffen 1 
 fibctgeugt, he has convinced me of it. 
 
 9Serftd)ern (see Obs. Lesson 64), to assure. 3d) fcerftdjer* 
 (Sic metner £cd)ad)tung unb metner £iebe, I assure you of my esteem 
 and affection. 
 
 33etroetfen*, to banish. ©ncn be£ Canted rerroetfen, to 
 banish a person from his country. 
 
 £B u r b t g e n, to honour, estimate. (Sr nrittfctgt mtd) feineS S3er* 
 trauenS, he honours me with his confidence. 
 
 b) A considerable number of reflexive verbs require an ill- 
 direct object in the genitive, as : — 
 
 (Sid) anne^mcn*, to interest one's self. (St nafym ftd) be$ &tn* 
 be$ an, he interested himself in (for) the child. 
 
 (Std) bebt en en, to avail one's self. 3d) bebtene mid) btefer 
 fdjb'nen ©clcgenljeit, 1 avail myself of this good opportunity. 
 
 (Std) b c f I c t p e n * or befletjngcn, to apply, attach one's 
 self. SBcftcipige £>id) ber Sugcnb, attach yourself to virtue. 
 
 ©id) f e t n e $ 2C m t e $, f e i n c r $ o r b e r u n a b e g e b e n*, to 
 resign one's office, to desist from, renounce one's claim, pretension. 
 
 (Bid) b e m a d) t i g e n, ft d) c nu t ft c r n, to possess one's self, 
 to make one's self master. §Jlan 6emad)ttqtc ftd) be$ £)tebe£, they pos* 
 sessed themselves of (captured) the thief. 
 
 (Sid) e t n e $ £) r t c 6 b e ft n n e n *, to remember a place. 
 
 ©id) beg 2B e i n c S entfoctlten*, to abstain from wine. 
 
 (Std) etner (S a d) e cntfdjlagcn*, to divest one's self c f 
 (give up) any thing. 
 
 ©id) b e r 2C t m e n e r b a r m e n *, to take upon one's self the 
 cause of the poor. 
 
 ©id) eineS 33 e r f p r e d) e n S (or an fetn2Serfpred)en) 
 ertnncrn (Obs. D. Lesson 71), to remember a promise. 
 
 (Sid) f e t n e $ 3 o r n e $ erroeljren, to check one's anger. 
 
 ©id) etner 21 n t rc o r t getroften, to console one's self with 
 an answer (await a reply in confidence). 
 
 ©id) f e t n e $ *ft e t d) t Ij u m $ til f) me n, to boast of one's riches. 
 
 <Sid) etner fd) led) ten £anbtung fdjffmcn, to blush 
 (feel ashamed) at a bad action. 
 
 (Sid) etner <Sad)e unterfangen* (ober untetftefyen), to 
 venture upon (undertake) any thing. 
 
 (Sid) etncS f o I d) e n © t ii cf ^ t> e r m u t fy e n, to anticipate 
 (calculate upon) such good fortune. 
 
 ©id) etner <S a d) c t> e t f e t) e n, to be aware of (prepared for) 
 any thing. 
 
 (Std) etner (Sad)C n> e t g e r n, to hesitate upon (refuse) any 
 thing. 
 
 » This verb is used also with ttott, as 3d) bin »ott Sfynx ^reunbfdjaft itbcr* 
 gcugt, I am convinced of your friendship. 
 
 b This may also take after it the preposition CMS, as : 3emanbett att$ bent 
 '^anbe t>evtt»etfen, to banish a person from his country. 
 
508 
 
 c) Many verbs are used indifferently with the genitive 03 
 accusative ; but with the genitive they mark a sense more gen* 
 eral and more absolute than with the accusative, as : — 
 
 2f cb t c n, esteem. 3d) ctdfete fritter (ober tfyn), I esteem him. 
 
 S3 c t> u r f e n, to be in need, 28tr bebttrfen Sfyrer (ober Sforc) $$U 
 fe, we are in need of your aid. 
 
 (Sntbefyrett, to spare, do without. 3d) fann fritter (ober ifyn) nid)i 
 entbefyren, I cannot spare (do without) him. 
 
 (Strodfyttctt, to mention, make mention. (Sr errocifynfe 3f)rcr 
 (ober (Sic), he mentioned (made mention of) you. 
 
 ©cntcpen, to enjoy, ©entepe be$ SebenS (ober baS Ce^cn), en- 
 ioy life. 
 
 $> f ( e 9 e n, to take care. (Sr pflcgte fritter (ober fritte) ©efunbfyctt, 
 he took care of his health. 
 
 <Sd) on e tt, to spare (take care of). 9#an mug fritter (ober tfjn) 
 fcfyonett, they must spare him. 
 
 d) The verb fettt, to be, requires the genitive in the following 
 exf /essions : — 
 
 ® e ro fj tt t f e t tt, to be accustomed. (£r if! beffen md)t gercofynt, 
 ne if not accustomed to it. 
 
 £) t r 93? e i tt u n g f e i tt, to be of opinion. 
 
 ® U t e n 9tt u t e $, 9 u t e r & a u tt e f € t tt, to have courage, 
 to be in a good humour, in spirits. 
 
 £B i I ( e n 5 f e i tt, to have the intention. 
 
 3) e £ £ b e £ f e i tt, to die, be dead. (£r tfi: bc£ SobeS, he is 
 a dead man. 
 
 ©uter #offttuttg fetn, to be with child. 
 
 Rem. — Verbs always require after them the same case as 
 the past participles used adjectively. (See the government of 
 adjectives, Lesson 93.) 
 
 e) Verbs referring to time, require in like manner the geni- 
 tives, although not followed by a preposition, as : — 
 
 £> c $ WlctQent, b e $ 2C b e n b 6 f p a 3 1 e r e n a, e r) e n , to 
 take a walk in the morning, in the evening. 
 
 £)e$ 3fU*t* c (bet Sfcacftt or bte 9Zad)t rjtnburd)) 
 ar bet ten, to work at (all) night. 
 
 3) eg S3 ormttta 9$ abrctfen, to depart (start, set out) 
 in the morning, forenoon. 
 
 *De$ 91 ad) mittagg fpajteren retten, to ride out (on 
 horseback) in the afternoon. 
 
 £> e 6 £ a g £ (bet ober otttScige) arbetten, to work 
 by day, in the day time. 
 
 « Custom requires that the word 9latf)t, although feminine, takes here an § 
 In the genitve. 
 
509 
 
 @onntag$ unb SftontagSgeJjt bie 9)oft ah, the mail 
 Aeaves on (every) Sunday and Monday. 
 
 9#ein $ t e u n b £ o m m t f c d) $ m a f b e $ 3 a J) t $ (o b e t 
 tin 3 a t) r c), ^eimal be$ SCttonatS (obet im SJttonat), 
 einmal bte £Bcd)e (accusative), my friend comes six times a 
 (in the) year, twice a month, once a week. (See Lessons 31 and 54, 
 Obs. B.) 
 
 III. VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 
 
 Besides the direct object in the accusative, verbs often have 
 an indirect one, which is put in the dative. Ex. : — 
 
 3 c m a n b c m itwa § g e b e n, to give something to some- 
 body. 
 
 3 e m a n b e m f a g e n, m c ( b e h, fcfytetben, antwot* 
 ten, to say to, mention to, write to, reply to somebody. 
 
 The verbs which require the dative are :— 
 
 a) Most neuter verbs which do not admit of a direct object 
 in the accusative, as : — 
 
 Semanbetn a n g c f) 6 t e n, to belong to somebody. 
 
 3 e m a n b e m ausn?etd)en*, to avoid somebody. 
 
 (55 e f a I 1 e 11/ to please. (St gefatft mitfefjt, he pleases me much. 
 
 3 e m a n b e m g e fj o r cr> e n, to obey somebody. 
 
 3 c m a n b e m g ( e t d) c n *, to resemble someboay. 
 
 b) The following reflexive verbs : — 
 
 © i tf) ctnbilben, to imagine to one's self. £>u btCbeft ©it 
 ein, you imagine to yourself. 
 
 ©id) e t g c b e n *, to yield, surrender. (St crgibt ftcft bet £us 
 genb, he yields to virtue. 
 
 © i d) n tf f) e t n (o b e t ft d) n a r) e n), to approach. Sfl<Xr)ettt 
 Ste fid) bem $euet, approach the fire. (St nafyet fid) mit, he approaches 
 me. 
 
 ©id) tt 1 ft e U e n, to represent to one's self, to imagine. 3$ 
 (telle nut »ot, I represent to myself. 
 
 © i d) m i b m e n, to devote (consecrate, dedicate) oneself. (St 
 nribmet fid) t)m ®efd)aften, he devotes himself to business. 
 
 c) Certain impersonal verbs. See page 158, Obs. A. 
 
 (S $ i ft m i t a n g ft, I am afraid. 
 
 (S $ f cfy e t n t £) i t, it appears to you (thee). 
 
 £B e n n e $ 3()nen b e 1 1 e b t, if you please, like. 
 
 (S $ f) a t m i t g e 1 1 a u m t, I dreamt, &c. 
 
 IV. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE, 
 a) All active and transitive verbs are followed by the accu 
 sative of the direct object, which in the passive voice becomes 
 the subject nominative, as :— 
 
510 
 
 ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 
 
 3* f d) a' § c metnen $ t e u n b, 9)?em gteunb rctrb Don nut gefcfytfgfc 
 
 I esteem, appreciate my friend. 
 3d) ebte t>ie SGSa^rfjcit, I Die £Ba§rfjeit roitb t?on mit geefjtt 
 
 honour the truth. 
 @tltebtba$.fttnb / he loves £)a$ fttnb roitb wn tr)nt gcltefct 
 
 the child. 
 
 b) Most of those reflexive verbs, which ought to be consid- 
 ered as active, expressing an action which terminates in the 
 agent himself (see Lesson 70), as : — 
 
 3d) freue mid), I rejoice. 
 
 £> u f d) a' nt ft £> i d), you are (thou art) ashamed. 
 
 S3 e m u c n @ t e ft d) n i d) t, do not trouble yourself. 
 
 c) Certain impersonal verbs. (See page 158, Obs. A.), as : 
 
 (£ $ Ij u n 9 e t t mid), I am hungry. 
 (5 $ f r i e r t i f) n, he is cold. 
 
 d) The following verbs govern two accusatives, the one of 
 the person, and the other of the thing :— 
 
 £ e t p e n *, to call, be called, order. (St fjctpt mid) cincn fatten, 
 he calls me a fool. 32$et fyat Did) bag gcr)cipcn ? who ordered you to 
 do that? 
 
 9? e n n e n *, to name, call. 3d) nenne ifjn metnen gtsunb, I call 
 him my friend. 
 
 <§ d) e 1 1 c n*, f d) t m p f e n, d to abuse. (St fdr>att (fdjtmpfte) 
 mid) etnen Stfatren, he called me a fool by way of reproach. 
 
 * It must not be forgotten that the verbs §ei{jen, ttemten, fc^elten, %nd fdjjtot* 
 |>fett have two nominatives in the passive. 
 
D. APPLETON ? CO., PUBLISHERS. 
 
 HAND-BOOK OF GERMAN LITERATURE. 
 
 CONTAINING : 
 
 Schiller's Maid of Orleans. I Tieck's Puss in Boots. 
 
 Goethe's Iphigenia in Tauris. | TheXenia. By Goethe & Schiller 
 
 With Critical Introductions and Explanatory Notes ; to which is added 
 
 An Appendix of German Prose, from the Middle of the Sixteenth 
 
 to the Middle of the Nineteenth Century. 
 
 BY J. G. ADLEE, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF GERMAN LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF THE CITY OP 
 
 NEW YORK. 
 
 1 vol. 12mo. $1 50. 
 
 " This work is intended for the use of snch students, as, having mastered the rudiraenta 
 of the language, and acquired some facility of translation, are prepared to enjoy tho 
 beauties of the great German authors. It contains Schiller's 'Maid of Orleans,' 
 Goethe's ' Iphigenia,' Tieck's ' Puss in Boots,' a large number of the choicest and most 
 piquant epigrams from the ' Xenia 1 of Goethe and Schiller, and a variety of selections 
 from the best prose writers of Germany. The German text is illustrated and explained 
 by a profusion of notes in English, the greater portion of which are of a critical or his- 
 torical nature, 11 — Savannah Republic. 
 
 PRACTICAL GERMAN GRAMMAR. 
 
 BY PKOF CHARLES EICHHOEN. 
 
 12mo. Price $1 00. 
 
 "The plan of this work consists in teaching the pupil by what is called the natuiai 
 mode, in opposition to the Grammatical method. A child is taught to speak its native 
 tongue by learning the words and the construction of sentences, without the assistance 
 of rules. We have seen Grammars in other languages formed on this system, but this 
 is the first systematic attempt to introduce the plan into the study of the German. We 
 have no doubt the author has succeeded in producing an excellent text-book. 1 '— Prot 
 Churchman. 
 
 BRYAN'S 
 GRAMMAR FOR GERMANS TO LEARN ENGLISH. 
 
 EDITED BY PBOF. SCHMIEDEE. 
 
 1 vol. 12mo. Price 62 Cents. 
 50 
 
£>. APPLET ON §• CO., PUBLISHERS. 
 
 A PROGRESSIVE GERMAN READER. 
 
 BY J. G. ADLEB. 
 
 12mo. Price $1 00. 
 The favorable reception which Ollendorff's German Grammar hai 
 received fron. the American public, has induced the Publishers and the 
 Editor to comply with the very general demand for a German Reader. 
 The plan of this reader is as follows, viz. : 
 
 1. The pieces are both prose and poetry, selected from the best au- 
 thors, and are so arranged as to present sufficient variety to keep alive 
 the interest of the scholar. 
 
 2. It is progressive in its nature, the pieces being at first very short 
 and easy, and increasing in difficulty and length as the learner advances 
 
 3. At the bottom of the page constant references to the Grammar 
 are made, and the difficult passages explained and rendered. To en- 
 courage the first attempt of the learner as much as possible, the twenty- 
 one pieces of the first section are analyzed, and all the necessary 
 words given at the bottom of the page. The notes, which at first are 
 very abundant, diminish as the learner advances. 
 
 4. It contains five sections. The first contains easy pieces, chiefly 
 in prose, with all the words necessary for translating them ; the secona\ 
 ehort pieces in prose and poetry alternately, with copious notes and 
 renderings; the third, short popular tales of Grimm and others; the 
 fourth, select ballads and other poems from Buergek, Goethe, Schiller, 
 Uhland, Schwer, Chamisso, <fec. ; the fifth, prose extracts from the best 
 classics. 
 
 5. At the end is added a Vocabulary of all the words occurring in 
 the book. 
 
 PRONOUNCING GERMAN READER. 
 
 TO which is added, a method of learning to read and understand thb 
 
 GERMAN WITHOUT A TEACHER. 
 
 BY J. O. (EHLSCHLAGEE. 
 
 12mo. Price $1 00. 
 
 •' The author has been for many years a successful teacher of the German, his nativo 
 tongue, in Philadelphia, and he has given in this book the fruits of an intelligent expe- 
 rience. The time has come when the old, humdrum method of learning languages- 
 living languages certainly— should be abandoned, once and forever. A living language 
 should be learned by foreigners, just as it is by children. Pronunciation comes by imi- 
 tation, phrases and idioms by example and repetition. The logic of language is an after- 
 thought, something to be applied after the language is learned, not as a means of learn 
 tag if— -United States Gazette. 
 
 51 
 
11. APPLE TON $ CO., PUBLISHERS. 
 
 ITALIAN & ENGLISH, AND ENGLISH & ITALIAN 
 
 PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY. 
 
 BT F. 0. MEADOWS, M. A. 
 
 Of the University of Paris. 
 12mo. 714 pages. Price $1 50. 
 
 This work is printed from the stereotype plates of the thirteenth 
 English Edition. 
 
 The First Part contains all the old words, contractions, and licenses 
 used by the ancient Italian poets and prose writers. 
 
 Second Part contains all of the various meanings of English verbs, 
 
 WITH A NEW AN3 CONCISE GRAMMAR, 
 in which is exhibited the pronunciation by corresponding sounds, the 
 Parts of Speech, Gender of Italian Nouns, New Conjugation of Regular 
 and Irregular Verbs ; also containing a list of useful, Christian, and 
 proper names, names of countries, nations, &c, &c. 
 
 ITALIAN EEADER. 
 
 By E. FELIX FORESTI, LL.D. 
 
 PiiOFESSOR OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITEEATUEE IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE AND 
 IN THE UNIVEESITY OP THE CITY OP NEW YORK. 
 
 One neat vol. 12mo. 298 pages. Price $1 00. 
 
 A Collection of Selected Pieces in Italian Prose, designed as a Class 
 Reading-Book for beginners in the study of the Italian language. 
 
 " The selections in the Italian Keader are from popular authors, such as Botta, Man- 
 zoni, Machiavelli, Yillani, and others. They are made so as not to constitute mere 
 exercises, but contain distinct relations so complete as to gratify the reader and engage 
 his attention while they instruct. This is a marked improvement on that old system 
 which exacted much labor without enlisting the sympathies of the student. The selec- 
 tions from Manzoni, for example, are from the ' Promesi Sposi^ one of the noblest 
 works of fiction ever issued from the press — a work so popular as to have gone through 
 an incredible number of editions in Italy, while it has been translated into every language 
 of Europe. The Eeader contains six extracts from this novel, among which are the 
 beautiful episodes of Father Christoforo and the Nun of Monza, and a description of the 
 famine and plague of Milan in the year 1530. The account of the plague rivals the cele- 
 brated one of Boccacio in his Decameron. The idioms that occur in the selections are 
 explained by a glossary appended to each. The Italian Reader can with confidence 
 be recommended to students in the language as a safe and sure guide. After master- 
 ing it, the Italian poets and other classics may be approached with confidence. 1 ' — Sa 
 jannah Republican. 
 
D. APPLETON & CO., PUBLISHERS. 
 
 THE WORLD IN THE MIDDLE AGES. 
 
 AN HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY, with accounts of the origin and devel- 
 opment, the institutions and literature, the manners and customs oi 
 the nations in Europe, Western Asia, and Northern Africa, from the 
 <dose of the Fourth to the middle of the Fifteenth Century ; accompa- 
 nied by complete Historical and Geographical indexes. By Adolfhus 
 Kceppen, Professor of Plistory, Greek, and German Literature in Frank- 
 lin and Marshall College. 2 volumes, 12mo. 850 pages. Price $2. 
 
 * ACCOMPANIED BY 
 
 AN HISTORICO-GEOGRAPHICAL ATLAS OF THE MIDDLE AGES. 
 
 Containing a Series of six General Maps, delineating the migration of the 
 Northern and Eastern nations, together with the States arising from 
 their fusion with the ancient Roman Empire in Europe, Western Asia, 
 and Northern Africa, from the close of the Fourth to the middle of the 
 Fifteenth century. Published from the great Historico- Geographical 
 Hand-Atlas of Charles Spruner, LL.D., Major of Engineers in the 
 Kingdom of Bavaria. With a Concise Explanatory Description. Folio. 
 Price, $2 50. 
 
 THE SAME WORK. 1 volume, folio, 232 pp., containing the Historical 
 Geography and the Atlas complete. Price $4 50. 
 
 " This truly excellent work supplies, in a very satisfactory manner, a want which has long 
 been felt by every student of history."— Evening Post. 
 
 " One of the most valuable contributions of the day to American literature. It reflects 
 great honor upon the author."— Springfield Republican. 
 
 "This work is one of a very high character, and is replete with valuable information." — 
 Phila. Inquirer. 
 
 " The arrangement of this valuable work is at once ingenious and tasteful, and we are sure 
 it will find great favor with students and readers generally." — City Item. 
 
 " A more valuable or important aid to historical reading and study has never appeared." — 
 N. Y. Churchman. 
 
 " The volumes are indispensable to eveiy reader who wishes for accurate information re- 
 specting the period in question." — Boston Courier. 
 
 ; ' A work of elaborate learning and industry— a monument of the patient and laborious in- 
 vestigation of the Teutonic intellect."— A 7 ". 0. Bee. 
 
 " A more comprehensive and reliable view of the world in the Middle Ages has never been 
 given to the public."— Prot. Churchman. 
 
 " The importance of this work is evident at a glance, and the extensive attainments and 
 ripe scholarship of the author are a guarantee for the accuracy of its execution." — N. Y. Tribune. 
 
 u It is distinguished by great method, faithful research, and concise style. We have sel- 
 dom met so much historical information so ably condensed." — Hartford Courant. 
 
 " It is evidently prepared with great care, and by one thoroughly conversant with the 
 subject. Its arrangement is excellent, and its lucid descriptions and the ease with which it 
 can be consulted, must make it an indispensable book of reference." — Traveller. 
 
 "A faithful, scholarly, and valuable work." — Christian Mirror. 
 
 " This book is a wonder of learning, and justly reflects great credit on American literature."- 
 Life Illustrated. 
 
 "This work evinces great and laborious researches on the part of the author, as well as a 
 iudicious, succinct, and careful arrangement of his materials, and supplies a great desideratum 
 in the study of history." — Boston Atlas. 
 
 11 ^hi? -york will be found exceedingly valuable, not only for general reading, but as a text« 
 H*»k in all our nigher institutions." — iv. Y. Observer. 
 
 53 
 
D. APPLETON & CO., PUBLISHERS. 
 ADVANCED OOUESE 
 
 COMPOSITION AND RHETORIC 
 
 A Series of Practical Lessons on the Origin, History, and Peculiarities 
 of the English Language, Punctuation, Taste, the Pleasures of the 
 Imagination, Figures, Style and its Essential Properties, Criticism, and 
 the various departments of Prose and Poetical Composition ; illustrated 
 with Copious Exercises. By G. P. Quackenbos A. M. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 450 pages. Price $1 00. 
 
 The title of this work fully set3 forth its scope and character. It is an 
 eminetly clear and practical text-book, and embraces a variety of important 
 subjects, which have a common connection, and mutually illustrate each 
 other; but which the pupil has heretofore been obliged to leave unlearned, 
 or to search for among a number of different volumes. Claiming to give a 
 comprehensive and practical view of our language in all its relations, this 
 "Advanced Course" views it as a whole, no less than with reference to 
 the individual words composing it ; shows how it compares with other 
 tongues, modern and ancient ; points out its beauties ; indicates how they 
 may best be made available ; and, in a word, teaches the student the most 
 philosophical method of digesting and arranging his thoughts, as well as 
 the most correct and effective mode of expressing them. 
 
 Few works have received such unqualified commendations from the 
 press and the public. 
 
 " We think this an excellent treatise ; excellent both for self-instruciion and for the use oi 
 Echools. We are not familiar with any work of a similar character that is equally accu- 
 rate and comprehensive.'''' — JV. T. Com. Adv. 
 
 " It is admirably adapted to self-instruction as well as for the use of schools and colleges."— 
 N. Y. Daily Times. 
 
 "A carefully prepared and thorough educational text-book by an accomplished teacher" — 
 N. Y. Tribune. 
 
 "A skilfully prepared manual, clear and practical throughout." — Churchman. 
 
 " Prof. Quackenbos is well known as the author of numerous works of high standing in the 
 department to which the " Course of Composition " belongs. The present work is thorough 
 in its treatment, and excellently arranged." — Southern Lit. Messenger. 
 
 " The pupil who studies this book, under the tutoring of a capable instructor, cannot fail 
 to become an efficient English scholar." — Ledger, Lancaster, S. C. 
 
 GRAHAM'S ENGLISH SYNONYMES, 
 
 Classified and explained with Practical Exercises, designed for schools and 
 private tuition ; with an introduction and illustrative authorities. By 
 Henry Reed, LL.D. 1 vol. 12mo. Price $1 00. 
 
 This is one of the best books published in the department of language, 
 and will do much to arrest the evil of making too common use of inappro- 
 priate words. The work is well arranged for classes, and can be made a 
 branch of common school study. 
 
 The Synonymesare treated with reference to their character, as generic 
 and specific ; as active and passive ; as positive and negative ; and as misccl 
 laneous* synonvmes. 
 
 54 
 
D. APPLETON & CO., PUBLISHERS. 
 
 GILLESPIE'S LAND-SURVEYING; 
 
 THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL. 
 
 By W. M. Gillespie, A. M., C E., Professor of Civil Engineering in Unioc 
 College; Author of "Manual of Roads and Railways," &c. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 400 pages. "With, four hundred engravings, and a Map showing the 
 Variation of the Needle in the United States. (Nearly ready.) 
 This is the most complete, and, at the same time, fundamental work on 
 
 fchis subject ever published in any country. Among its leading peculiarities 
 
 are these : — 
 
 1. All the operations of surveying are developed from only jive simple principles. 
 
 2. A complete system of surveying with only a chain, a rope, or any substitute, is fully 
 explained. 
 
 3. Means of measuring inaccessible distances, in all possible cases, with the chain alone, 
 are given in great variety, so as to constitute a Land Geometry. It occupies 26 pages, with 
 58 figures. 
 
 4. The Rectangular method of Compass-surveying is greatly simplified. 
 
 5. The Traverse Tables gives increased accuracy in one fifteenth of the space of tho usual 
 tables. 
 
 6. The effect of the changes in the variation of the needle, on the re-survey of old lines, id 
 minutely illustrated. 
 
 7. Correct tables of the times of elongation of the North Star are given ; those in common 
 use being in some cases nearly half-an-hour out of the way. 
 
 8. The adjustment of the engineer's Transit and Theodolite are here, for the first time, 
 fully developed. 
 
 9. Methods of avoiding obstacles in angular surveying. Occupy 24 pages, with 85 figures. 
 
 10. Topographical Mapping is fully described with illustrations. 
 
 11. Laying out, Parting off, and Dividing up Land, are very fully explained, and illustrated 
 by fifty figures. 
 
 12. The most recent improvements in the methods of Surveying the Public Lands of the 
 United States, with the methods used for making " corners," are minutely described from 
 official authorities. 
 
 A double object has been kept in view in the preparation of the volume ; viz , to make an 
 introductory treatise easy to be mastered by the young scholar or the practical man of little 
 previous acquirements, the only pre-requisites being Arithmetic and a little Geometry ; and, 
 at the same time, to make the instruction of such a character as to lay a foundation broad 
 enough and deep enough for the most complete superstructure which the professional student 
 may subsequently wish to raise upon it. 
 
 The volume is divided as follows : — 
 
 Part I. General Principles and Fundamental Operations. — II. Chain Surveying. — III. 
 Compass Surveying. — IV. Transit and Theodolite Surveying. — V. Trigonometrical Survey- 
 ing.— VI. Tri-linear Surveying.— VII. Obstacles in Angular Surveying.— VIII. Plane Table 
 Surveying. — IX. Surveying without Instruments. — X. Mapping. — XL Laying out, Parting 
 off, and Dividing up Lands.— XII. United States 1 Public Lands. 
 
 Appendix.— A. Synopsis of Plane Trigonometry. — B. Demonstrations of Problems. — 0. 
 Levelling. 
 
 Tables.— Chords for Platting.— Latitudes and Departures. 
 
 FIELD-BOOK FOR RAIL ROAD ENGINEERS 
 
 By John B. Henck. Civil Engineer. One volume, with fifty eight Diagrams 
 
 pocket-book form, $1 15. 
 Containing Formula for laying out Simple, Eeversed, and Compound Curves, Paraboli 
 Curves, Vertical Curves, Determining Frog Angles and Radii of rum outs and Crossings, Lev 
 oiling, Setting Slope Stakes, Elevating Outer Rail on Curves, Curving Rails, &c, &c. ; together 
 m ith many Miscellaneous Problems, and a New System of Earth-work. Also, Tables of Radii 
 Orainates, Chord and Tangent Deflections, Ordinates for Curving Rails, Long Chords, Eleva 
 tion of Outer Rail, Frog Angles, Properties of Materials, Magnetic Variations, Squares, Cube* 
 Square Roots and Cube Roots, Logarithms of Number, Logarithmic Sines, Cosines, langentt 
 and Cotangents, Natural Sines and Cosines, Natural Tangents and Cotangents, Rise per mile ol 
 Grades, &c. 
 
 55 
 
 A 
 
A° 
 
 
 .9* * v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 »- ' » 4 % 
 
 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proces 
 \ Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: Nov. 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologie 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATK 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
qp 
 
 Z r ::: ofc °^s S